Gs 2006 Edition Volume 1 and 2 19 Apr 2010

General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 2006 Edition
Volume 1 of 2
This electronic file is for reference only. When the
content of this electronic file is inconsistent with the
hard copy of the GS, 2006 Edition and the Amendments
issued, the hard copy of the GS, 2006 Edition and the
Amendments shall prevail.
(This Version is Continuously Updated to include Amendments issued)

This Electronic File has incorporated the following Amendments:-
Rev
First Issue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Issue Date
March 2007
9 July 2007
27 December 2007
17 January 2008
12 June 2008
6 February 2009
26 August 2009
26 November 2009
2 February 2010
9 March 2010
15 April 2010
19 April 2010
Amendment Incorporated
Amendment No. 1/2007
GENERAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WORKS
VOLUME 1
2006 Edition
The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
2006 Edition
The publication General Specification for Civil Engineering Works, 2006 Edition is available
from :
Publications Sales Unit
Information Services Department
Room 402, 4/F Floor, Murray Building
Garden Road, Central
Hong Kong
and
can be ordered both locally and overseas through the following channels:
Visit the online Government Bookstore at www.bookstore.gov.hk
Download the order form from the Information Services Department website at www.isd.gov.hk
and submit the order direct online or by fax to the Information Services Department
By e-mail at puborder@isd.gov.hk
2006 Edition
FOREWORD
The General Specification for Civil Engineering Works lays down the quality of materials, the
standards of workmanship, the testing methods and the acceptance criteria for civil engineering
works undertaken for the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region. Where
necessary, this General Specification should be supplemented by a particular specification.
The 2006 Edition of the General Specification comprises considerable greening of the Eighth
Reprint of the 1992 Edition (October 2002) according to the current green practices of the
construction industry. The text relating to "green measures" is printed in green colour in this
Edition with a view to making it easier for reader's reference. It was produced over a 15-month
period from March 2005 under the guidance of a Steering Committee comprising members from the
main Government departments involved in civil engineering works. The greening of each section
was undertaken by a works department with the appropriate expertise. The Standards Unit of Civil
Engineering and Development Department (CEDD) was responsible for the overall co-ordination of
comments received from departmental circulation, editing and production of the document.
Amd 1/2007
Sustainability is the prime objective of the 2006 Edition. Two new sections, viz.
Environmental Protection (Section 25) and Preservation and Protection of Trees (Section 26)
have been created. The original Section 22 for Railways Works has been deleted, as
construction of railways is no more the responsibility of works departments. The 2006 Edition
comprises 26 sections and is posted on the CEDD Homepage on the Internet.
The General Specification will be updated continuously. The electronic files of the
sections affected by any amendment issued will be kept up-to-date on the CEDD Homepage.
September 2006
2006 Edition
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
CONTENTS
VOLUME 1
SECTION
GENERAL
SITE CLEARANCE
LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
FENCING
DRAINAGE WORKS
EARTHWORKS
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
PILING WORKS
CARRIAGEWAYS:
MATERIALS
SUB-BASE
MATERIAL
AND
10
CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS
11
MISCELLANEOUS ROADWORKS
12
TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS
BITUMINOUS
VOLUME 2
SECTION
13
WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
14
FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE
15
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
16
CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE
17
PRESTRESSING
18
STEELWORK
19
HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING
20
BRIDGEWORKS
21
MARINE WORKS
22
WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS
23
WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
24
BUILDING WORKS
25
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
26
PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES
2006 Edition
CONTENT OF VOLUME 1
SECTION 1
GENERAL
Page
No.
INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
Application of the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works .................................

Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................
Glossary of terms .......................................................................................................................
Trials and approval ....................................................................................................................
British Standards, European Standards adopted as British Standards, Codes of Practice and
other standards (Amd 3/2010) ...........................................................................................................
Specifications in metric and imperial units ..............................................................................
Dimensions from Drawings ......................................................................................................
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
PROGRAMME
1.08
Programme .................................................................................................................................
1.6
CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
Surveyor .....................................................................................................................................
Foreman for concrete work .......................................................................................................
Supervision of piling works ......................................................................................................
Particulars of agent and employees ..........................................................................................
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.8
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC (Amd 1/2009)

1.13
Construction safety and safety of the public (Amd 1/2009) ...........................................................
1.9
WORK ON ROADS
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
Approval for temporary traffic arrangements and control .......................................................

Temporary traffic arrangements and control ...........................................................................
Particulars of temporary traffic arrangements and control .....................................................
Use of roads and footways .......................................................................................................
Work on roads and footways ....................................................................................................
Reinstatement of roads and footways ......................................................................................
1.9
1.10
1.10
1.11
1.11
1.12
CARE OF THE WORKS

1.20
1.21
1.22
Protection from water ...............................................................................................................

Protection from weather ...........................................................................................................
Protection of work ....................................................................................................................
1.12
1.12
1.12
2006 Edition
Page
No.
DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
Damage and interference ..........................................................................................................

Watercourses and drainage systems ..........................................................................................
Utilities .......................................................................................................................................
Structures, roads and other property .........................................................................................
Access ........................................................................................................................................
1.13
1.13
1.14
1.16
1.16
RECORDS
1.28
1.29
1.30
Records of wage rates ............................................................................................................... 1.16

Records of correspondence ....................................................................................................... 1.16
Records and reports ................................................................................................................... 1.16
LIAISON WITH OTHERS

1.31
Liaison with others .................................................................................................................... 1.17
SITE CLEANLINESS
1.32
1.33
1.34
Site cleanliness ........................................................................................................................... 1.17

Prevention of mosquito breeding .............................................................................................. 1.18
Prevention of dust ...................................................................................................................... 1.18
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1.35
1.36
Materials and equipment provided by the Employer ............................................................... 1.19

Materials .................................................................................................................................... 1.19
TESTING
1.37
1.38
1.39
1.40
1.41
1.42
Quality assurance schemes ........................................................................................................

Batches, samples and specimens ..............................................................................................
Samples for testing ....................................................................................................................
Testing ........................................................................................................................................
Compliance of a batch ...............................................................................................................
Raw records of tests and test reports ........................................................................................
1.19
1.20
1.20
1.22
1.22
1.23
WORKMANSHIP AND TOLERANCES

1.43
1.44
Workmanship ............................................................................................................................. 1.24

Tolerances .................................................................................................................................. 1.24
2006 Edition
Page
No.
SITE ESTABLISHMENT
1.45
1.46
1.47
1.48
1.49
1.50
1.51
1.52
1.53
Use of the Site ...................................................................................................

Submission of particulars ..........................................................................................................
Survey of the Site ......................................................................................................................
Fences and signs on the Site .....................................................................................................
The Engineer's Site accommodation ........................................................................................
The Contractor's Site accommodation ......................................................................................
Site utilities and access ..............................................................................................................
Transport for the Engineer ........................................................................................................
Clearance of the Site ..................................................................................................................
1.24
1.24
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.26
1.26
1.26
1.27
MEETINGS
1.54
Meetings ..................................................................................................................................... 1.27
PHOTOGRAPHS
1.55
Photographs ............................................................................................................................... 1.27
APPENDIX 1.1
STANDARDS
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
1.1.9
1.1.10
1.1.11
1.1.12
1.1.13
1.1.14
1.1.15
British Standards ........................................................................................................................

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards ...........................................
American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO) Standard .................................................................................................
American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards/Amercian National Standards
Iinstitute (ANSI)..........................................................................................................................
Construction Standards of the Government of the HKSAR (CS).............................................
Swedish Standards (SIS) .............................................................................................................
American Public Health Association (APHA) Standards .......................................................
European Standards Adopted As British Standards (BS EN) ..................................................
European Standards (EN) and/or International Organization for Standardizations
Standards (ISO) Adopted As British Standards (BS EN ISO) ................................................
Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) ..........................................................................................
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) ...............................................................
Water Industry Specification, Water Research Centre .............................................................
National Water Council, UK .....................................................................................................
Australian/New Zealand Standard (AS/NZS) ..........................................................................
.
1.28
1.45
1.47
1.47
1.47
1.47
1.47
1.48
1.51
1.53
1.53
1.53
1.53
1.54
1.54
APPENDIX 1.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL CONTAINER ROOM
1.2.1
1.2.2
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1.55

Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 1.55
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 1.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR CURING TANK
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1.56

Equipment ......................................................................................................................... 1.56
Maintenance........................................................................................................................ 1.56
SECTION 2
SITE CLEARANCE
GENERAL
2.01
2.02
2.03
General requirements ................................................................................................................

Pipes and manholes to be abandoned .......................................................................................
Earthworks .................................................................................................................................
2.3
2.3
2.3
SITE CLEARANCE
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
Demolition .................................................................................................................................
Pipes and cables .........................................................................................................................
Trees ...........................................................................................................................................
Reinstatement ............................................................................................................................
Materials and equipment for re-use and storage ......................................................................
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.4
SECTION 3
GENERAL
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07

Site clearance .............................................................................................................................
Earthworks .................................................................................................................................
Landscape hardworks ................................................................................................................
Geotechnical works ...................................................................................................................
Weather and ground conditions ................................................................................................
Use of chemicals ........................................................................................................................
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
3.08
3.09
3.10
Landscape softworks .................................................................................................................

Landscape hardworks ................................................................................................................
Establishment works .................................................................................................................
3.3
3.3
3.3
2006 Edition
Page
No.
MATERIALS
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
Seedling trees .............................................................................................................................

Whip trees ..................................................................................................................................
Light standard trees ...................................................................................................................
Standard trees .............................................................................................................................
Heavy standard trees .................................................................................................................
Semi-mature trees ......................................................................................................................
Small shrubs ...............................................................................................................................
Large shrubs ...............................................................................................................................
Conifers ......................................................................................................................................
Palms ..........................................................................................................................................
Bamboo ......................................................................................................................................
Herbaceous plants ......................................................................................................................
Ground cover .............................................................................................................................
Climbers .....................................................................................................................................
Containerised plants ..................................................................................................................
Grass seed ..................................................................................................................................
Turf .............................................................................................................................................
Sprigs .........................................................................................................................................
Plant name ..................................................................................................................................
Soil-mix ......................................................................................................................................
Soil conditioner ..........................................................................................................................
Mulch .........................................................................................................................................
Mulch for hydroseeding ............................................................................................................
Fertilizer .....................................................................................................................................
Soil binder ..................................................................................................................................
Stakes, ties and guys ..................................................................................................................
Protective fabric material ..........................................................................................................
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.7
3.7
3.7
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.9
3.10
3.10
3.10
3.10
3.11
3.11
3.12
SUBMISSIONS
3.38
3.39
3.40
Particulars of seed mixture, turf, sprigs, soil conditioner and water ....................................... 3.12
Particulars of hydroseeding ....................................................................................................... 3.13
Samples of materials ................................................................................................................. 3.13
HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

3.41
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.48
Handling and storage of rootballed stock .................................................................................

Handling and storage of container grown and containerised stock .........................................
Transport of plants .....................................................................................................................
Storage of plants ........................................................................................................................
Storage of trees and shrubs .......................................................................................................
Handling and storage of turf and sprigs ...................................................................................
Storage of grass seed .................................................................................................................
Storage of fertilizer ....................................................................................................................
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.14
PRE-PLANTING WORKS
3.49
3.50
3.51
3.52
3.53
3.54
Preparatory works ......................................................................................................................

Cleaning ground ........................................................................................................................
Ripping .......................................................................................................................................
Contaminated ground ................................................................................................................
Soiling ........................................................................................................................................
Cultivation .................................................................................................................................
9
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
2006 Edition
Page
No.
3.55
3.56
3.57
Scarifying ................................................................................................................................... 3.16

Protection of prepared ground .................................................................................................. 3.16
Removal of material .................................................................................................................. 3.16
PLANTING
3.58
3.59
3.60
3.61
3.62
3.63
3.64
3.65
3.66
3.67
3.68
General .......................................................................................................................................
Use of excavated material .........................................................................................................
Planting ......................................................................................................................................
Staking, tying and guying .........................................................................................................
Mulching ....................................................................................................................................
Notch planting of seedlings .......................................................................................................
Pit planting of seedlings, shrubs, whips, climbers, ground covers and herbaceous plants ....
Pit planting of light standard and standard trees ......................................................................
Pit planting of heavy standard tree and semi-mature trees ......................................................
Pit planting of bamboo, conifers and palms .............................................................................
Pit planting on slopes ................................................................................................................
3.16
3.16
3.16
3.17
3.17
3.17
3.17
3.17
3.18
3.18
3.18
GRASSING
3.69
3.70
3.71
3.72
3.73
3.74
3.75
3.76
3.77
3.78
Hydroseeding .............................................................................................................................
Hydroseeding cover.....................................................................................................................
Surface conditions for hydroseeding ........................................................................................
Application of hydroseeding .....................................................................................................
Protective material .....................................................................................................................
Patching up ................................................................................................................................
Post-planting fertilizer ...............................................................................................................
Turfing ........................................................................................................................................
Sprigging ....................................................................................................................................
Completion of turfing and sprigging ........................................................................................
3.18
3.19
3.19
3.19
3.19
3.20
3.20
3.20
3.20
3.20
ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
3.79
3.80
3.81
3.82
3.83
3.84
3.85
3.86
3.87
3.88
3.89
3.90
3.91
3.92
3.93
Establishment works .................................................................................................................

Inspection of establishment works ............................................................................................
Replacement of plants and grass ...............................................................................................
Security of stakes, ties and guys ...............................................................................................
Firming up plants .......................................................................................................................
Watering .....................................................................................................................................
Weeding .....................................................................................................................................
Pruning .......................................................................................................................................
Grass cutting ..............................................................................................................................
Litter collection ..........................................................................................................................
Post-planting fertilizer ...............................................................................................................
Control of pests, fungi and disease ...........................................................................................
Forking over ...............................................................................................................................
Mulching ....................................................................................................................................
Completion of work ..................................................................................................................
3.21
3.21
3.21
3.21
3.21
3.21
3.22
3.22
3.23
3.23
3.23
3.23
3.24
3.24
3.24
TESTING: GRASS COVER

3.94
3.95
3.96
Testing: grass cover ................................................................................................................... 3.24

Compliance criteria: grass cover ............................................................................................... 3.25
Non-compliance: grass cover .................................................................................................... 3.25
10
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TREE TRANSPLANTING
3.97
Transplanting of existing trees .................................................................................................. 3.25
SECTION 4
FENCING
GENERAL
4.01
4.02
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.06
4.07
4.08
4.09
General requirements .................................................................................................................

Handrailing .................................................................................................................................
Earthworks ..................................................................................................................................
Pedestrian guardrailing ...............................................................................................................
Formwork and finishes to concrete ...........................................................................................
Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................
Concrete ......................................................................................................................................
Steelwork ....................................................................................................................................
Vehicular parapets ......................................................................................................................
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
MATERIALS
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
Wire .............................................................................................................................................
Chain link fence ..........................................................................................................................
Timber .........................................................................................................................................
Steel .............................................................................................................................................
Bolts, nuts, washers and fittings ................................................................................................
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.3
4.4
FABRICATION OF FENCING
4.15
4.16
4.17
Fabrication of steelwork ............................................................................................................. 4.4

Galvanizing to steel .................................................................................................................... 4.4
Welding steel ............................................................................................................................... 4.4
POSTS AND GATES FOR FENCING

4.18
4.19
Concrete posts ............................................................................................................................. 4.5

Gates ............................................................................................................................................ 4.5
SUBMISSIONS
4.20
4.21
Particulars of fencing .................................................................................................................. 4.5

Samples of materials .................................................................................................................. 4.5
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
4.22
Storage of fencing ....................................................................................................................... 4.5
11
2006 Edition
Page
No.
ERECTING FENCING
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
Alignment of fencing .................................................................................................................

Posts for fencing .........................................................................................................................
Erecting posts for fencing ..........................................................................................................
Fixing wire for fencing ...............................................................................................................
Fixing gates .................................................................................................................................
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.7
TOLERANCES
4.28
Tolerances: fencing ..................................................................................................................... 4.7
SECTION 5
DRAINAGE WORKS
GENERAL
5.01
5.02
5.03
5.04
5.05
5.06
5.07
5.08
5.09

Metalwork ...................................................................................................................................
Earthworks ..................................................................................................................................
Formwork ...................................................................................................................................
Concrete ......................................................................................................................................
Materials for grout ......................................................................................................................
Water supply pipeworks .............................................................................................................
Cable duct systems .....................................................................................................................
Recycled Aggregates ..................................................................................................................
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
5.10
Pipes ............................................................................................................................................ 5.3
MATERIALS
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
Precast concrete pipes and fittings .............................................................................................

Vitrified clay pipes and fittings ..................................................................................................
DI pipes and fittings ...................................................................................................................
Grey iron pipes and fittings ........................................................................................................
uPVC pipes and fittings .............................................................................................................
GI pipes and fittings ...................................................................................................................
Bolts, nuts and washers ..............................................................................................................
Elastomeric joint rings ...............................................................................................................
Detachable couplings and flange adapters ................................................................................
Anticorrosion tape ......................................................................................................................
Bituminous coatings ...................................................................................................................
Aggregates for granular bed and granular fill ...........................................................................
Joint filler and compressible padding .......................................................................................
Polyethylene sheeting ................................................................................................................
Precast concrete manholes ........................................................................................................
Chambers and gullies ................................................................................................................
12
5.3
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.10
5.10
5.10
2006 Edition
Page
No.
5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32
5.33
5.34
5.35
Step irons ...................................................................................................................................

Manhole covers, gully gratings and kerb overflow weirs .......................................................
Penstocks ...................................................................................................................................
Gate valves .................................................................................................................................
Flap valves .................................................................................................................................
Sludge valves .............................................................................................................................
Air valves ...................................................................................................................................
Fittings for penstocks and valves ..............................................................................................
Filling abandoned pipes and manholes ....................................................................................
5.10
5.10
5.12
5.13
5.13
5.13
5.14
5.14
5.15
SUBMISSIONS
5.36
5.37
5.38
5.39
5.40
5.41
5.42
5.43
5.44
Particulars of pipes, joints and fittings .....................................................................................

Particulars of anticorrosion tape and joint filler .......................................................................
Particulars of aggregates for granular bed ................................................................................
Particulars of manholes, chambers and gullies ........................................................................
Particulars of penstocks and valves ..........................................................................................
Particulars of foam concrete and PC/PFA grout ......................................................................
Particulars of tests ......................................................................................................................
Particulars of CCTV inspections ..............................................................................................
Particulars of diversions of flow ...............................................................................................
5.15
5.15
5.16
5.16
5.16
5.17
5.17
5.17
5.18
TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF

MATERIALS
5.45
5.46
5.47
5.48
5.49
5.50
5.51
Transport, handling and storage of pipes, joints and fittings ...................................................

Handling of pipes and fittings ...................................................................................................
Storage of pipes .........................................................................................................................
Storage of anticorrosion tape and joint filler ............................................................................
Handling and storage of aggregates for granular bed ..............................................................
Handling and storage of units for manholes, chambers and gullies ........................................
Storage of covers, gratings, weirs, penstocks and valves ........................................................
5.18
5.18
5.18
5.19
5.19
5.19
5.19
EXCAVATION
5.52
Excavation ................................................................................................................................. 5.19
LAYING AND BEDDING PIPES

5.53
5.54
Laying pipes ............................................................................................................................... 5.20

Bedding pipes ............................................................................................................................ 5.21
CUTTING PIPES
5.55
Cutting pipes .............................................................................................................................. 5.21
13
2006 Edition
Page
No.
JOINTING PIPES
5.56
5.57
5.58
5.59
5.60
5.61
5.62
5.63
Jointing pipes .............................................................................................................................

Flanged joints .............................................................................................................................
Flexible collar joints ..................................................................................................................
Push-in joints .............................................................................................................................
Detachable joints .......................................................................................................................
Flange adapters ..........................................................................................................................
Solvent welded joints ................................................................................................................
Screw joints ...............................................................................................................................
5.22
5.22
5.22
5.23
5.23
5.23
5.23
5.23
PROTECTION OF JOINTS
5.64
Protection of joints ................................................................................................................. 5.24
REPAIRS TO COATINGS AND LININGS

5.65
Repairs to coatings and linings ................................................................................................. 5.24
THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS

5.66
Thrust and anchor blocks .......................................................................................................... 5.24
BED, HAUNCH AND SURROUND

5.67
5.68
5.69
Granular bed .............................................................................................................................. 5.25

Concrete bed, haunch and surround ......................................................................................... 5.25
Fill material surround ................................................................................................................ 5.26
TOLERANCES
5.70
Tolerances: pipelines for drainage works ................................................................................. 5.26
CONNECTIONS
5.71
5.72
Connections to structures .......................................................................................................... 5.26

Connections to pipes ................................................................................................................. 5.27
MANHOLES, CHAMBERS, GULLIES AND CHANNELS

5.73
5.74
Manholes, chambers and gullies ............................................................................................... 5.28

Concrete open channels ............................................................................................................. 5.29
MARKER BLOCKS
5.75
Marker blocks ............................................................................................................................ 5.29
14
2006 Edition
Page
No.
INSTALLATION OF PENSTOCKS AND VALVES

5.76
Installation of penstocks and valves ......................................................................................... 5.29
PIPES AND MANHOLES TO BE ABANDONED

5.77
Pipes and manholes to be abandoned .................................................................................... 5.29
CLEANING OF PIPELINES
5.78
Cleaning of pipelines ................................................................................................................. 5.30
INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
5.79
5.80
Inspection of pipelines .............................................................................................................. 5.31

Inspection of pipelines by CCTV ............................................................................................. 5.31
TESTING: PIPES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

5.81
5.82
5.83
5.84
Batch: pipes for drainage works ...............................................................................................

Samples: pipes for drainage works ...........................................................................................
Testing: pipes for drainage works .............................................................................................
Non-compliance: pipes for drainage works .............................................................................
5.31
5.31
5.31
5.32
TESTING: AGGREGATES FOR GRANULAR BED

5.85
5.86
5.87
5.88
Batch: aggregates for granular bed ...........................................................................................

Samples: aggregates for granular bed .......................................................................................
Testing: aggregates for granular bed .........................................................................................
Compliance criteria: compacting fraction value ......................................................................
5.32
5.32
5.32
5.32
TESTING: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS FOR

MANHOLES, CHAMBERS AND GULLIES
5.89
5.90
5.91
5.92
Batch: manholes, chambers and gullies ...................................................................................

Samples: manholes, chambers and gullies ...............................................................................
Testing: manholes, chambers and gullies .................................................................................
Non-compliance: manholes, chambers and gullies ..................................................................
5.32
5.33
5.33
5.33
TESTING: MANHOLE COVERS, GULLY GRATINGS

AND KERB OVERFLOW WEIRS
5.93
5.94
5.95
5.96
5.97
5.98
Batch: covers, gratings and weirs .............................................................................................

Samples: covers, gratings and weirs .........................................................................................
Testing: covers, gratings and weirs ...........................................................................................
Compliance criteria: resistance to fracture of covers and gratings .........................................
Non-compliance: mass of covers, gratings and weirs .............................................................
Non-compliance: resistance to fracture of covers and gratings ...............................................
15
5.33
5.33
5.33
5.33
5.33
5.34
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF PENSTOCKS

5.99
5.100
5.101
Testing: watertightness of penstocks ........................................................................................ 5.34

Compliance criteria: watertightness of penstocks .................................................................... 5.34
Non-compliance: watertightness of penstocks ......................................................................... 5.34
TESTING: GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE

WORKS
5.102
5.103
5.104
Testing: gravity pipelines for drainage works .......................................................................... 5.34

Compliance criteria: gravity pipelines for drainage works ..................................................... 5.36
Non-compliance: gravity pipelines for drainage works ........................................................... 5.36
TESTING: PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE

WORKS
5.105
5.106
5.107
Testing: pressure pipelines for drainage works ........................................................................ 5.36

Compliance criteria: pressure pipelines for drainage works ................................................... 5.37
Non-compliance: pressure pipelines for drainage works ........................................................ 5.37
REPAIR OF PIPELINES AND CULVERTS BY

INTERNAL LINING
5.108
5.109
5.110
5.111
5.112
5.113
General .......................................................................................................................................
Materials ....................................................................................................................................
Design of lining .........................................................................................................................
Submissions ...............................................................................................................................
Installation of lining ..................................................................................................................
Performance tests on internal lining materials .........................................................................
5.37
5.37
5.38
5.38
5.39
5.40
APPENDIX 5.1
CCTV INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
Recording of results ...................................................................................................................
5.42
5.42
5.43
5.43
APPENDIX 5.2
DETERMINATION OF THE COMPACTING FRACTION
VALUE OF AGGREGATES FOR GRANULAR BED
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Apparatus ...................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
Calculation .................................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ...................................................................................................................
16
5.45
5.45
5.45
5.45
5.46
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 5.3
DETERMINATION OF THE RESISTANCE TO
FRACTURE OF MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY
GRATINGS
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
APPENDIX 5.4
TESTS ON GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..................................................................................................................................
Procedure: before tests and inspections ....................................................................................
Procedure: water test .................................................................................................................
Procedure: air test ......................................................................................................................
Procedure: visual inspection .....................................................................................................
Procedure: infiltration test .........................................................................................................
Calculation .................................................................................................................................
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
APPENDIX 5.5
TESTS ON PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE
WORKS
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
Calculation .................................................................................................................................
5.50
5.50
5.50
5.51
5.51
SECTION 6
EARTHWORKS
GENERAL
6.01
6.02
Reclamation ................................................................................................................................ 6.3

Trip-ticket System ...................................................................................................................... 6.3
17
2006 Edition
Page
No.
GLOSSARY OF TERM
6.03
6.04
6.05
6.06
6.07
6.08
Areas of fill ................................................................................................................................

Earthworks final surface ...........................................................................................................
Inert construction and demolition materials...............................................................................
Earthworks material ....................................................................................................................
Formation ...................................................................................................................................
Intermediate areas of fill .............................................................................................................
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
MATERIALS
6.09
Fill material ................................................................................................................................
6.3
SUBMISSIONS
6.10
6.11
Particulars of earthworks ...........................................................................................................

Particulars of blasting ................................................................................................................
6.5
6.6
GENERAL EARTHWORKS REQUIREMENTS

6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
Ownership of earthworks material ...........................................................................................

Temporary Works for earthworks .............................................................................................
Handling and storage of earthworks material ..........................................................................
Protection from water and weather ...........................................................................................
Earthworks material allowed to become unsuitable or to deteriorate .....................................
Additional excavation and stabilisation ....................................................................................
Removal of earthworks material ...............................................................................................
6.6
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.8
6.8
EXCAVATION
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
Disposal of excavated material .................................................................................................

Use of excavated material .........................................................................................................
Obstructions in excavations ......................................................................................................
Excavation .................................................................................................................................
Excavations adjacent to structures and utilities ........................................................................
Excavations for structures, pits and trenches ...........................................................................
6.8
6.8
6.9
6.9
6.9
6.9
BLASTING TRIALS
6.25
6.26
6.27
6.28
6.29
Blasting trials .............................................................................................................................

Controlled blasting trials ...........................................................................................................
Results of blasting trials ............................................................................................................
Commencement of blasting ......................................................................................................
Changes in blasting procedure ..................................................................................................
6.9
6.10
6.10
6.10
6.10
BLASTING
6.30
6.31
6.32
6.33
6.34
Statutory requirements for blasting ...........................................................................................

Recording vibrations due to blasting ........................................................................................
Preparatory work for blasting ...................................................................................................
Notification of blasting ..............................................................................................................
Storage of explosives .................................................................................................................
18
6.10
6.10
6.11
6.11
6.11
2006 Edition
Page
No.
6.35
6.36
6.37
Restrictions on blasting times ................................................................................................... 6.11

Blasting ...................................................................................................................................... 6.11
Controlled blasting .................................................................................................................... 6.12
DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

6.38
6.39
6.40
6.41
6.42
6.43
6.44
6.45
6.46
6.47
Types of fill material .................................................................................................................

Sources of fill material ..............................................................................................................
Surface preparation for fill material ..........................................................................................
Commencement of deposition of fill material .........................................................................
Haulage of fill material .............................................................................................................
Deposition of fill material .........................................................................................................
Overfilling ..................................................................................................................................
Deposition of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities .................................................
Deposition of rock fill material .................................................................................................
Deposition of fill material in excavations for structures, pits and trenches ............................
6.13
6.13
6.13
6.13
6.13
6.13
6.14
6.14
6.15
6.15
COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

6.48
6.49
6.50
6.51
6.52
Compaction of fill material .......................................................................................................

Moisture content of fill material ...............................................................................................
Compaction of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities ...............................................
Compaction of rock fill material ...............................................................................................
Compaction of general fill material with a large portion of coarse material ..........................
6.15
6.15
6.15
6.15
6.16
COMPLETION OF EARTHWORKS SURFACES

6.53
6.54
6.55
Completion of earthworks final surfaces .................................................................................. 6.17

Completion of formations ......................................................................................................... 6.17
Protection of earthworks final surfaces and formations .......................................................... 6.18
INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

6.56
6.57
Deposition of fill material in intermediate areas of fill ............................................................ 6.18

Compaction of fill material in intermediate areas of fill .......................................................... 6.18
EARTHWORKS IN PUBLIC FILLING AREA

6.58
6.59
6.60
6.61
6.62
6.63
6.64
6.65
6.66
6.67
Public filling area .......................................................................................................................

Public fill ....................................................................................................................................
Combined reception and exit offices ........................................................................................
Reception areas, queuing areas and access roads ....................................................................
Management of dump truck movements ..................................................................................
Temporary haul roads and drains ..............................................................................................
Handling and storage of wet soil ..............................................................................................
Deposition of public fill ............................................................................................................
Compaction of public fill ..........................................................................................................
Use of fill material adjacent to structures and utilities in public filling area ..........................
19
6.18
6.18
6.18
6.20
6.20
6.21
6.21
6.21
6.21
6.24
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TOLERANCES
6.68
Tolerances: earthworks final surfaces and formations ............................................................. 6.25
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL GENERAL EQUIREMENTS

6.69
6.70
Batch: fill material ..................................................................................................................... 6.26

Samples: fill material ................................................................................................................. 6.26
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - PARTICLE SIZE

DISTRIBUTION, LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTICITY INDEX,
COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY AND SULPHATE
CONTENT
6.71
6.72
6.73
Samples: particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index,coefficient of uniformity,

sulphate content ......................................................................................................................
Testing: particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index, coefficient of uniformity,
sulphate content ......................................................................................................................
Non-compliance: particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity
index, coefficient of uniformity, sulphate content .................................................................
6.26
6.27
6.27
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - OPTIMUM MOISTURE

CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
6.74
6.75
6.76
Samples: optimum moisture content, maximum dry density .................................................. 6.28

Testing: optimum moisture content, maximum dry density .................................................... 6.28
Consistency: optimum moisture content, maximum dry density ............................................ 6.28
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - MOISTURE CONTENT

6.77
6.78
6.79
6.80
Samples: moisture content ........................................................................................................

Testing: moisture content ..........................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: moisture content ......................................................................................
Non-compliance: moisture content ...........................................................................................
6.29
6.29
6.29
6.29
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - RELATIVE COMPACTION

6.81
6.82
6.83
Testing: relative compaction ..................................................................................................... 6.30

Compliance criteria: relative compaction ................................................................................. 6.31
Non-compliance: relative compaction ...................................................................................... 6.31
APPENDIX 6.1
TEST METHODS FOR FILL MATERIAL
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
General ....................................................................................................................................... 6.32

Terms and symbols .................................................................................................................... 6.32
Grouping of material ................................................................................................................. 6.32
20
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 6.2
DETERMINATION OF THE MOISTURE CONTENT OF
FINE GRAINED AND MEDIUM GRAINED MATERIAL
BY THE MICROWAVE OVEN DRYING METHOD
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Apparatus ...................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
Calculation .................................................................................................................................
6.33
6.33
6.33
6.34
6.34
APPENDIX 6.3
DETERMINATION OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED
BULK DENSITY BY THE HILF METHOD
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Apparatus ...............................................................................................................................
Procedure ................................................................................................................................
Calculation .............................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ................................................................................................................
6.35
6.35
6.35
6.38
6.39
APPENDIX 6.4
ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED
BULK DENSITY FOR THE DETERMINATION OF
THE RELATIVE COMPACTION
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Apparatus ...................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
Calculation .................................................................................................................................
6.40
6.40
6.40
6.41
6.41
SECTION 7
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
7.01
7.02
7.03
7.04
7.05

Site clearance .............................................................................................................................
Drainage works ..........................................................................................................................
Earthworks .................................................................................................................................
Concrete .......................................................................................................................................
21
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
2006 Edition
Page
No.
7.06
7.07
Prestressed ground anchors .......................................................................................................

Reinforced fill structures ...........................................................................................................
7.3
7.3
TRIALS
7.08
Trials for geotechnical works ....................................................................................................
7.3
PART 2: GROUND INVESTIGATION

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
7.09
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.22
7.23
7.24
7.25
7.26
7.27
7.28
Block sample .............................................................................................................................

Bulk sample ...............................................................................................................................
Inspection pit .............................................................................................................................
Jar sample ..................................................................................................................................
Sample ........................................................................................................................................
Slope surface stripping ................................................................................................................
Trial pit .......................................................................................................................................
Trial Trench ................................................................................................................................
U76/U100 samples ....................................................................................................................
Undisturbed Soil Sample ............................................................................................................
Ground Investigation .................................................................................................................
Ground Investigation Site .........................................................................................................
Investigation Station ..................................................................................................................
Common Ground .......................................................................................................................
Rock ...........................................................................................................................................
Boulders .....................................................................................................................................
Cobbles ........................................................................................................................................
Gravel .........................................................................................................................................
Hard Strata .................................................................................................................................
AGS Digital Format ..................................................................................................................
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
SUBMISSIONS
7.29
Particulars of ground investigation ...........................................................................................
7.5
INSPECTION PITS, TRIAL PITS AND SLOPE SURFACE

STRIPPING
7.30
7.31
7.32
7.33
7.34
7.35
7.36
7.37
7.38
7.39
7.40
7.41
7.42
Inspection pits ............................................................................................................................ 7.5

Trial pits and trial trenches ........................................................................................................ 7.5
Pumping from trial pits and trial trenches ................................................................................ 7.6
Backfilling of inspection pits, trial pits or trial trenches .......................................................... 7.6
Slope surface protection strippin .............................................................................................. 7.7
Protection of stripped surface ................................................................................................... 7.8
Temporary access ladder for slope stripping ............................................................................ 7.8
Reinstatement of stripped surface ............................................................................................. 7.8
Disturbed samples from trial pits, trial trenches or slope stripping ......................................... 7.8
Records of inspection pits ......................................................................................................... 7.8
Records of trial pits and trial trenches ...................................................................................... 7.8
Photographs of trial pits or trial trenches .................................................................................. 7.9
Slope stripping records .............................................................................................................. 7.10
22
2006 Edition
Page
No.
DRILLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

7.43
7.44
7.45
7.46
7.47
7.48
7.49
7.50
7.51
7.52
Drilling rigs for ground investigation .......................................................................................

Drilling equipment for ground investigation ............................................................................
Drilling for ground investigation ..............................................................................................
Categories of drilling .................................................................................................................
Rotary open hole drilling ..........................................................................................................
Air-Foam Drilling .....................................................................................................................
Disposal of flush returns ...........................................................................................................
Backfilling of drillholes and rotary open holes ........................................................................
Sampling from drillholes ...........................................................................................................
Records of drillholes .................................................................................................................
7.10
7.11
7.11
7.12
7.12
7.12
7.13
7.13
7.14
7.14
SAMPLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

7.53
7.54
7.55
7.56
7.57
7.58
7.59
7.60
7.61
7.62
7.63
7.64
7.65
7.66
7.67
Supply of equipment and containers ........................................................................................

General sampling requirements ................................................................................................
Numbering and labelling of samples ........................................................................................
Sealing of common ground tube samples ...............................
Core boxes .................................................................................................................................
Delivery and storage of samples ...............................................................................................
Undisturbed tube sampling of common ground in drillholes ..................................................
Retractable triple tube core sampling .......................................................................................
Piston sampling
U100 and U76 Sampling ...........................................................................................................
Block samples ...........................................................................................................................
Recovery of cores .....................................................................................................................
Extrusion and handling of cores ...............................................................................................
Photographs of core boxes ............................................................................................
Groundwater samples .....................................................................................................
7.14
7.15
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.17
7.17
7.17
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.21
7.22
7.23
7.23
IN SITU TESTING
7.68
7.69
7.70
7.71
7.72
7.73
7.74
7.75
7.76
7.77
Standard penetration tests .................................................................................

Dynamic probe tests ..................................................................................................................
Vane shear tests .........................................................................................................................
In situ density tests ....................................................................................................................
Falling or rising head permeability test ....................................................................................
Response test .............................................................................................................................
Constant head permeability test ................................................................................................
Packer (water absorption) test ...................................................................................................
Impression packer tests .............................................................................................................
Inclination and bearing measurements ....................................................................................
7.24
7.25
7.26
7.27
7.27
7.28
7.28
7.29
7.30
7.30
REPORTS OF GROUND INVESTIGATION

7.78
7.79
7.80
7.81
7.82
7.83
General ......................................................................................................................................
Site log book .............................................................................................................................
Daily site records .......................................................................................................................
Preliminary records ...................................................................................................................
Submission of Final Field Work Report ...................................................................................
Submission of digital image of Final Field Work Report ........................................................
23
7.30
7.31
7.31
7.31
7.31
7.32
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 3: SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

MATERIALS
7.84
7.85
7.86
7.87
7.88
7.89
7.90
7.91
7.92
7.93
7.94
7.95
7.96
7.97
7.98
7.99
Cement mortar ...........................................................................................................................

Rock for masonry infilling ........................................................................................................
Soil-cement ................................................................................................................................
Aggregates for sprayed concrete ...............................................................................................
Reinforcement for sprayed concrete .........................................................................................
Protective mesh and fixings ......................................................................................................
Rock bolts ..................................................................................................................................
Grout for rock bolts ...................................................................................................................
Rock dowels ..............................................................................................................................
Grout for rock dowels ...............................................................................................................
Soil nails .....................................................................................................................................
Soil nails with doublecorrosion protection ............................................................................
Grout for soil nails .....................................................................................................................
Non-degradable mats for erosion control .................................................................................
Biodegradable mats for erosion control ................................................................
Wire mesh for erosion control........................................................................................
7.33
7.33
7.33
7.33
7.33
7.33
7.34
7.34
7.34
7.34
7.34
7.36
7.36
7.36
7.37
7.37
SUBMISSIONS
7.100
7.101
7.102
7.103
7.104
7.105
7.106
Particulars of access ...............................................................................................

Particulars of sprayed concrete ..............................................................................
Particulars of rock bolts..........................................................................................
Samples of materials ..............................................................................................
Soil nails.......................................................................................................................................
Mats for erosion control ............................................................................................................
Wire mesh for erosion control ..................................................................................................
7.37
7.37
7.38
7.38
7.39
7.40
7.40
PRELIMINARY WORKS
7.107
7.108
7.109
Access to slopes ......................................................................................................................... 7.40

Protection fences and barriers ................................................................................................... 7.41
Preparation for slope treatment works ...................................................................................... 7.41
ROCK SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

7.110
7.111
7.112
7.113
7.114
Scaling and trimming of rock slopes ........................................................................................

Rock splitting .............................................................................................................................
Removal of boulders .................................................................................................................
Sealing and infilling of rock joints ...........................................................................................
Concrete buttresses ....................................................................................................................
7.41
7.42
7.42
7.42
7.42
SOIL-CEMENT FILL
7.115
7.116
Mixing soil-cement .................................................................................................................... 7.42

Deposition and compaction of soil-cement fill ........................................................................ 7.42
24
2006 Edition
Page
No.
SPRAYED CONCRETE
7.117
7.118
7.119
7.120
7.121
7.122
7.123
7.124
7.125
Trial panel ..................................................................................................................................

Preparation of slope surfaces ....................................................................................................
Fixing reinforcement .................................................................................................................
Weepholes and joints in sprayed concrete ................................................................................
Equipment for spraying concrete ..............................................................................................
Spraying concrete ......................................................................................................................
Curing sprayed concrete ............................................................................................................
Inspection of sprayed concrete ..................................................................................................
Records of sprayed concrete .....................................................................................................
7.42
7.43
7.43
7.43
7.43
7.44
7.44
7.44
7.45
PROTECTIVE MESH FOR SLOPES

7.126
Fixing protective mesh for slopes ............................................................................................. 7.45
ROCK BOLTS
7.127
7.128
7.129
7.130
7.131
7.132
Trials for rock bolts ...................................................................................................................

Drilling, preparing and testing rock bolt holes .........................................................................
Fixing rock bolts ........................................................................................................................
Grouting rock bolts ....................................................................................................................
Proving rock bolts ......................................................................................................................
Records of rock bolts .................................................................................................................
7.45
7.45
7.46
7.46
7.46
7.46
ROCK DOWELS
7.133
7.134
7.135
Drilling and preparation of rock dowel holes ........................................................................... 7.47

Grouting rock dowels ................................................................................................................ 7.47
Records of rock dowels ............................................................................................................. 7.47
SOIL NAILS
7.136
7.137
7.138
7.139
Drilling for soil nails .................................................................................................................

Installation and grouting for soil nails ......................................................................................
Pull-out tests for soil nails .........................................................................................................
Soil-nail head .............................................................................................................................
7.48
7.48
7.50
7.52
MATS FOR SLOPE EROSION CONTROL

7.140
7.141
Preparation of surfaces .............................................................................................................. 7.52

Laying and fixing of mats for erosion control .......................................................................... 7.52
TESTING: OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND

MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY OF SOIL-CEMENT FILL
7.142
7.143
7.144
7.145
7.146
7.147
Testing: Optimum moisture content and maximum dry density of soil-cement fill ..............
Testing: test panels for sprayed concrete ..................................................................................
Samples: concrete cores from sprayed concrete ......................................................................
Testing: concrete cores from sprayed concrete ........................................................................
Compliance criteria: concrete cores from sprayed concrete ....................................................
Non-compliance: concrete cores from sprayed concrete .........................................................
25
7.53
7.53
7.54
7.54
7.54
7.54
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES FOR

ROCK BOLTS
7.148
7.149
7.150
Testing: Packer test .................................................................................................................... 7.54

Compliance criteria: Packer test ................................................................................................. 7.54
Non-compliance: Packer test .................................................................................................... 7.54
TESTING: ROCK BOLTS

7.151
7.152
7.153
Testing: rock bolts ..................................................................................................................... 7.55

Compliance criteria: rock bolts ................................................................................................. 7.55
Non-compliance: rock bolts ...................................................................................................... 7.55
PART 4: GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
7.154
7.155
7.156
7.157
7.158
Ground .......................................................................................................................................
Grout ..........................................................................................................................................
Grouting .....................................................................................................................................
Grouting stage ............................................................................................................................
Lugeon .......................................................................................................................................
7.56
7.56
7.56
7.56
7.56
MATERIALS
7.159
7.160
7.161
7.162
7.163
Materials for grout .....................................................................................................................

Grout for geotechnical works ....................................................................................................
Standpipes ..................................................................................................................................
Particulars of grouting for geotechnical work ..........................................................................
Trials for grouting ......................................................................................................................
7.56
7.56
7.57
7.57
7.57
DRILLING FOR GROUTING FOR

GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
7.164
7.165
Drilling for grouting for geotechnical works ........................................................................... 7.57

Standpipes and capping pipes ................................................................................................... 7.58
GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

7.166
7.167
7.168
7.169
7.170
7.171
7.172
Monitoring of grouting operations ............................................................................................

Grouting equipment ...................................................................................................................
Mixing grout ..............................................................................................................................
Pressure grouting .......................................................................................................................
Loss or leakage of grout ............................................................................................................
Making good holes ....................................................................................................................
Records of grouting for geotechnical work ..............................................................................
7.58
7.58
7.59
7.59
7.60
7.60
7.60
TESTING: GROUT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

7.173
Batch: grout for geotechnical works........................................................................................... 7.61
26
2006 Edition
TESTING: GROUT - BLEEDING

7.174
7.175
7.176
Samples: bleeding of grout ....................................................................................................... 7.61

Testing: bleeding of grout ........................................................................................................... 7.62
Non-compliance: bleeding of grout .......................................................................................... 7.62
TESTING: GROUT - FLOW CONE EFFLUX TIME

7.177
7.178
7.179
Samples: flow cone efflux time of grout .................................................................................... 7.62

Testing: flow cone efflux time of grout ...................................................................................... 7.62
Non-compliance: flow cone efflux time of grout ..................................................................... 7.62
TESTING: GROUT - CRUSHING STRENGTH

7.180
7.181
7.182
Samples: crushing strength of grout ......................................................................................... 7.62

Testing: crushing strength of grout ........................................................................................... 7.62
Non-compliance: crushing strength of grout ............................................................................ 7.63
TESTING: PACKER TESTS ON DRILLHOLES

FOR GROUTING AND GROUTED DRILLHOLES
7.183
7.184
7.185
7.186
Testing: Packer tests ..................................................................................................................

Compliance criteria: Packer tests ..............................................................................................
Non-compliance: Packer test on drillholes for grouting............................................................
Non-compliance: Packer test on grouted and regrouted drillholes .........................................
7.63
7.63
7.63
7.64
PART 5: GROUNDWATER DRAINAGE AND CONTROL

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
7.187
7.188
7.189
7.190
7.191
7.192
7.193
7.194
7.195
7.196
7.197
7.198
7.199
7.200
7.201
7.202
Caisson drain .............................................................................................................................

Geotextile filter ..........................................................................................................................
Filter pipe ...................................................................................................................................
Granular filter ............................................................................................................................
Prefabricated band drain .............................................................................................................
Raking drain ...............................................................................................................................
Relief drain ................................................................................................................................
Trench drain ...............................................................................................................................
Granular filter material ..............................................................................................................
Geotextile filter ..........................................................................................................................
Filter pipes .................................................................................................................................
Raking drains .............................................................................................................................
Relief drains ...............................................................................................................................
Fill material for trench drains ....................................................................................................
Caisson liners .............................................................................................................................
Prefabricated band drains ..........................................................................................................
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.65
7.66
7.66
7.67
7.67
7.68
7.68
SUBMISSIONS
7.203
7.204
7.205
7.206
7.207
7.208
Particulars of granular filters .....................................................................................................

Particulars of geotextile filter ....................................................................................................
Particulars of trench drains ........................................................................................................
Particulars of raking drains .......................................................................................................
Particulars of relief drains .........................................................................................................
Particulars of caisson drains ......................................................................................................
27
7.68
7.69
7.69
7.70
7.70
7.70
2006 Edition
Page
No.
7.209
7.210
7.211
7.212
Particulars of prefabricated band drains ...................................................................................

Particulars of filter pipes ...........................................................................................................
Particulars of groundwater control, drawdown and monitoring .............................................
Samples of materials .................................................................................................................
7.70
7.71
7.71
7.71
HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

7.213
7.214
7.215
7.216
Handling and storage of granular filter material ......................................................................

Delivery and storage of geotextile filter ...................................................................................
Storage of filter pipes ................................................................................................................
Delivery and storage of prefabricated band drains ..................................................................
7.72
7.72
7.72
7.72
GRANULAR FILTERS
7.217
7.218
Mixing granular filter material.................................................................................................... 7.72

Deposition and compaction of granular filter material ............................................................ 7.72
GEOTEXTILE FILTER
7.219
7.220
7.221
7.222
Damage to geotextile filter ........................................................................................................

Laying geotextile filter ..............................................................................................................
Protection of geotextile filte ......................................................................................................
Records of geotextile filter ........................................................................................................
7.72
7.73
7.73
7.73
RAKING DRAINS
7.223
7.224
7.225
Installation of raking drains ...................................................................................................... 7.73

Drilling for raking drains ........................................................................................................... 7.74
Records of drillholes for raking drains ..................................................................................... 7.74
TRENCH DRAINS
7.226
7.227
7.228
7.229
Excavation for trench drains .....................................................................................................

Geotextile filter surround for trench drains ..............................................................................
Bed for trench drains.................................................................
Deposition and compaction of fill material for trench drains ..................................................
7.75
7.75
7.75
7.75
RELIEF DRAINS
7.230
7.231
Trials for relief drains ................................................................................................................ 7.75

Fixing relief drains .................................................................................................................... 7.75
CAISSON DRAINS
7.232
7.233
7.234
Construction of caisson drains .................................................................................................... 7.75

Discharge of water from caisson drains ................................................................................... 7.76
Records of caisson drains .......................................................................................................... 7.76
28
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PREFABRICATED BAND DRAINS

7.235
Installation of prefabricated band drains .................................................................................. 7.76
GROUNDWATER CONTROL AND DRAWDOWN

7.236
7.237
7.238
7.239
7.240
Drawdown of groundwater table ..............................................................................................

Dewatering .................................................................................................................................
Groundwater recharge ...............................................................................................................
Monitoring of groundwater control and drawdown .................................................................
Records of settlement, groundwater control and drawdown ...................................................
7.77
7.77
7.77
7.78
7.78
TESTING: GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL

7.241
7.242
7.243
7.244
Batch: granular filter material ...................................................................................................

Samples: granular filter material ...............................................................................................
Testing: granular filter material .................................................................................................
Non-compliance: granular filter material .................................................................................
7.78
7.78
7.79
7.79
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL FOR TRENCH DRAINS

7.245
7.246
7.247
Batch: fill material for trench drains ......................................................................................... 7.79

Samples: fill material for trench drains .................................................................................... 7.79
Testing: fill material for trench drains ...................................................................................... 7.79
PART 6: GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
7.248
7.249
7.250
7.251
7.252
Datum station .............................................................................................................................

Geotechnical instrumentation ...................................................................................................
Monitoring mark ........................................................................................................................
Reference point ..........................................................................................................................
Survey station ............................................................................................................................
7.80
7.80
7.80
7.80
7.80
SUBMISSIONS
7.253
Particulars of geotechnical instrumentation ............................................................................. 7.80
GENERAL
GEOTECHNICAL
REQUIREMENTS
7.254
7.255
7.256
7.257
7.258
7.259
INSTRUMENTATION
Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation ..........................................................................

Location and arrangement of instruments ................................................................................
Installation of instruments .........................................................................................................
Tubes and cables for instruments ..............................................................................................
Maintenance of instruments ......................................................................................................
Records of geotechnical instrumentation .................................................................................
7.81
7.81
7.82
7.82
7.82
7.83
Page
No.
29
2006 Edition
MONITORING AND RECORDING

7.260
Recording readings .................................................................................................................... 7.83
SETTLEMENT PLATES
7.261
Installation of settlement plates ................................................................................................ 7.83
TILTMETER SYSTEM
7.262
Installation of tiltmeter system .................................................................................................. 7.84
TELLTALES
7.263
Installation of telltales ............................................................................................................... 7.84
STANDPIPE PIEZOMETERS
7.264
7.265
Standpipe piezometers ............................................................................................................... 7.84

Installation of standpipe piezometers ....................................................................................... 7.85
PART 7 : SLOPE AND RETAINING WALL RECORD SURVEY

GENERAL
7.266
Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 7.86
SUBMISSIONS
7.267
Particulars of slope and retaining wall record survey .............................................................. 7.86
PART 8 : PAINTING TO CONCRETE /

SPRAYED CONCRETE SURFACES
MATERIALS
7.268
Paint for concrete/ sprayed concrete surfaces .......................................................................... 7.87
SUBMISSIONS
7.269
Particulars of paint ..................................................................................................................... 7.87
30
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PAINTING TO CONCRETE /
SPRAYED CONCRETE SURFACES
7.270
Painting to concrete/ sprayed concrete surfaces ....................................................................... 7.87
APPENDIX 7.1
DYNAMIC PROBE TEST
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Apparatus ...................................................................................................................................
Procedure ...................................................................................................................................
7.88
7.88
7.88
7.88
SECTION 8
PILING WORKS
GENERAL
8.01
8.02
8.03
8.04
8.05
8.06
8.07
8.08
8.09
8.10
8.11

Earthworks ..................................................................................................................................
Reinforcement ............................................................................................................................
Concrete ......................................................................................................................................
Materials for grout ......................................................................................................................
Grouting ......................................................................................................................................
Prestressing .................................................................................................................................
Steelwork ....................................................................................................................................
Marine works ..............................................................................................................................
Code of practice for piling works ..............................................................................................
Safety of piling works ................................................................................................................
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
Hand-dug caisson .......................................................................................................................

Barrette ........................................................................................................................................
Large-diameter bored piles and socketted steel H-piles ...........................................................
Minipile .......................................................................................................................................
Founding rock .............................................................................................................................
8.3
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
MATERIALS
8.17
8.18
8.19
8.20
8.21
8.22
Steel piles ....................................................................................................................................

Pile shoes ....................................................................................................................................
Epoxy paint .................................................................................................................................
Bituminous coating material ......................................................................................................
Grout for piling works ................................................................................................................
Reinforcement connectors ..........................................................................................................
31
8.4
8.4
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
2006 Edition
Page
No.
SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEEL PILES

8.23
8.24
8.25
8.26
8.27
8.28
Surface treatment of steel piles .................................................................................................

Surface preparation of steel piles ..............................................................................................
Epoxy coatings to steel piles .....................................................................................................
Bituminous coatings to steel piles ............................................................................................
Surface treatment of extended steel piles .................................................................................
Removal of protective coatings to steel piles ...........................................................................
8.5
8.5
8.6
8.6
8.6
8.6
SUBMISSIONS
8.29
8.30
8.31
8.32
Particulars of piling works ........................................................................................................

Particulars of construction using bentonite slurry ....................................................................
Particulars of hand-dug caissons ...............................................................................................
Particulars of minipiles ..............................................................................................................
8.6
8.7
8.7
8.7
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

8.33
8.34
Handling and storage of piles ...................................................................................................

Handling and storage of bentonite ............................................................................................
8.8
8.8
GENERAL PILING WORKS REQUIREMENTS

8.35
8.36
8.37
8.38
8.39
8.40
8.41
Commencement of piling works ............................................................................................... 8.8

Prevention of damage due to piling works ............................................................................... 8.8
Monitoring of noise, vibration, ground movement and groundwater level ............................ 8.9
Ground investigation for piling works ..................................................................................... 8.9
Ground investigation for piles founded on rock ...................................................................... 8.9
Pre-drilling for piles founded on rock ...................................................................................... 8.9
Founding levels ......................................................................................................................... 8.10
PRELIMINARY PILES
8.42
Preliminary piles ........................................................................................................................ 8.10
DRIVEN PILES
8.43
8.44
8.45
8.46
8.47
8.48
8.49
8.50
8.51
8.52
Supports for driven piles ...........................................................................................................

Use of diesel hammer ................................................................................................................
Followers ...................................................................................................................................
Marking of piles ........................................................................................................................
Driving piles ..............................................................................................................................
Driving concrete piles ...............................................................................................................
Displaced piles ...........................................................................................................................
Re-drive checks .........................................................................................................................
Lengthening driven piles ...........................................................................................................
Measurement of set of driven piles ...........................................................................................
8.10
8.10
8.11
8.11
8.11
8.11
8.11
8.11
8.11
8.12
CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES

8.53
Excavation for cast-in-situ piles ................................................................................................ 8.12
32
2006 Edition
Page
No.
HAND-DUG CAISSONS
8.54
8.55
Excavation for hand-dug caissons ............................................................................................ 8.13

Sealing and scaling of hand-dug caissons ................................................................................ 8.13
BARRETTES
8.56
Excavation for barrettes ............................................................................................................ 8.14
MINIPILES
8.57
8.58
Excavation for minipiles ........................................................................................................... 8.14

Grouting trials for minipiles ...................................................................................................... 8.14
CONSTRUCTION USING BENTONITE SLURRY

8.59
8.60
8.61
8.62
Excavation using bentonite slurry ............................................................................................

Mixing of bentonite slurry ........................................................................................................
Protection of bentonite slurry material .....................................................................................
Disposal of bentonite slurry ......................................................................................................
8.14
8.15
8.15
8.15
FIXING REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

8.63
8.64
Fixing reinforcement for piles .................................................................................................. 8.15

Temporary protection on pile head ........................................................................................... 8.15
PLACING CONCRETE IN PILES

8.65
8.66
8.67
8.68
Cleaning and drying excavations for piles ...............................................................................

Placing concrete in piles ............................................................................................................
Removal of temporary casings to piles ....................................................................................
Empty bores above piles ...........................................................................................................
8.15
8.16
8.16
8.16
INSPECTION OF PILING WORKS

8.69
8.70
Inspection of excavations for piles ........................................................................................... 8.16

Inspection of installed piles ....................................................................................................... 8.17
TOLERANCES
8.71
8.72
8.73
8.74
Tolerances: steel bearing piles ..................................................................................................

Tolerances: precast concrete piles .............................................................................................
Tolerances: hand-dug caissons ..................................................................................................
Tolerances: pile installations .....................................................................................................
8.17
8.17
8.17
8.17
RECORDS OF PILING WORKS

8.75
8.76
8.77
8.78
Records of piles delivered/constructed in situ ..........................................................................

Records of pile driving ..............................................................................................................
Records of bentonite slurry .......................................................................................................
Records of load tests on piles ....................................................................................................
33
8.18
8.18
8.18
8.18
2006 Edition
Page
No.
8.79
8.80
8.81
Records of integrity tests on piles ............................................................................................. 8.19

Record drawings ........................................................................................................................ 8.19
Record of piling works .............................................................................................................. 8.19
TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON PILES

8.82
8.83
8.84
8.85
Testing: load tests on piles ........................................................................................................

Compliance criteria: load tests on piles ....................................................................................
Non-compliance: load tests on piles .........................................................................................
Proof drilling................................................................................................................................
8.19
8.20
8.20
8.20
TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM PILES

8.86
8.87
8.88
8.89
Samples: concrete cores from piles ..........................................................................................

Testing: concrete cores from piles ............................................................................................
Compliance criteria: concrete cores from piles ........................................................................
Non-compliance: concrete cores from piles .............................................................................
8.20
8.20
8.21
8.21
TESTING: NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS ON WELDS IN PILES

8.90
8.91
Testing: non-destructive tests on welds in piles ....................................................................... 8.21

Non-compliance: non-destructive tests on welds in piles ....................................................... 8.21
TESTING: INTEGRITY TESTS

8.92
8.93
8.94
Testing: integrity testing on piles and non-destructive integrity testing ................................. 8.21
Non-compliance: integrity tests on piles .................................................................................. 8.22
Sonic tests on bored cast-in-situ piles......................................................................................... 8.22
TESTING: BENTONITE SLURRY

8.95
8.96
8.97
8.98
Samples: bentonite slurry ..........................................................................................................

Testing: bentonite slurry ............................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: bentonite slurry .......................................................................................
Non-compliance: bentonite slurry ............................................................................................
8.23
8.23
8.23
8.23
APPENDIX 8.1
DETERMINATION OF THE SETTLEMENT OF PILES
BY LOAD TEST
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
Scope ..........................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..................................................................................................................................
Procedure: before testing ...........................................................................................................
Procedure: load test ...................................................................................................................
Procedure: after testing ..............................................................................................................
34
8.25
8.25
8.25
8.26
8.27
8.27
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 8.2
PILE DRIVING RECORD
Precast concrete, prefabricated steel and driven cast-in-place piles ........................................ 8.28
APPENDIX 8.3
PILE DRIVING RECORD
Bored cast-in-place piles ........................................................................................................ 8.30
APPENDIX 8.4
PILE RECORD
Piles cast in-hand-dug caissons ............................................................................................. 8.32
APPENDIX 8.5
PILE RECORDS
......................................................................................................... 8.34
APPENDIX 8.6
BENTONITE SLURRY RECORD
................................................................... 8.36
APPENDIX 8.7
PILE LOAD TEST RECORD
.................................................................................8.37
SECTION 9
CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL
AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
9.01
Nominal maximum aggregate size .......................................................................................... 9.3
MATERIALS
9.02
9.03
9.04
9.05
Sub-base material using virgin material ....................................................................................

Recycled sub-base material in lieu of virgin material...............................................................
Aggregates for bituminous materials .......................................................................................
Filler for bituminous materials ................................................................................................
35
9.3
9.3
9.4
9.5
2006 Edition
Page
No.
9.06
9.07
9.08
Bitumen .................................................................................................................................... 9.6

Bituminous emulsion ............................................................................................................... 9.6
Bituminous priming material ................................................................................................... 9.6
DESIGN OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS
9.09
9.10
Design procedure for sub-base material and bituminous materials ........................................ 9.6
Design of bituminous materials ............................................................................................... 9.7
SUBMISSIONS
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
Particulars of filler and bitumen for bituminous materials ................................................... 9.8

Particulars of mixes for sub-base material and bituminous materials .................................. 9.9
Particulars of recycled sub-base material .............................................................................. 9.9
Particulars of supplier of sub-base material and bituminous materials ................................ 9.9
Particulars of methods of laying and compacting sub-bases and bituminous materials ...... 9.10
Samples of sub-base material, aggregate, filler and bitumen ............................................... 9.10
TRIALS
9.17
9.18
9.19
9.20
9.21
9.22
9.23
9.24
Trial areas ...............................................................................................................................

Samples: trial areas ................................................................................................................
Testing: trial areas ..................................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: trial areas ..............................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial areas ...................................................................................................
Approved mix for bituminous materials other than bituminous roadbase material .............
Commencement of placing bituminous materials .................................................................
Changes in materials and methods of construction ...............................................................
9.10
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.11
9.12
9.12
9.12
HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF

MATERIALS
9.25
9.26
Handling and storage of sub-base material and bituminous materials ................................. 9.13
Transport of sub-base material and bituminous materials .................................................... 9.13
MIXING OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND

BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
9.27
9.28
9.29
Mixing of sub-base material and bituminous materials ........................................................ 9.13

Mixing plant for bituminous materials .................................................................................. 9.13
Mixing bituminous materials ................................................................................................. 9.14
PRELIMINARY WORK
9.30
Installation of utilities ............................................................................................................ 9.14
36
2006 Edition
Page
No.
LAYING AND COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE

MATERIAL
9.31
9.32
Laying and compaction of sub-base material using virgin material ..................................... 9.15
Laying and compaction of recycled sub-base material in lieu of virgin material ................ 9.16
LAYING AND COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS
9.33
9.34
9.35
9.36
9.37
Laying and compaction of bituminous materials ..................................................................

Laying bituminous materials by paving machine .................................................................
Laying bituminous materials by manual methods ................................................................
Compaction of bituminous materials and sub-base material ................................................
Joints in bituminous materials ...............................................................................................
9.16
9.17
9.17
9.18
9.18
PROTECTION OF SURFACES OF SUB-BASE

MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
9.38
Protection of surfaces of sub-base material and bituminous materials ................................ 9.19
TOLERANCES
9.39
9.40
9.41
Tolerances: alignment of carriageway ................................................................................... 9.19

Tolerances: level of carriageway ........................................................................................... 9.20
Tolerances: covers, frames and other hardware .................................................................... 9.20
TESTING: SURFACE REGULARITY

9.42
9.43
Testing: surface regularity ...................................................................................................... 9.20

Compliance criteria: surface regularity ................................................................................. 9.20
TESTING: SUB-BASE MATERIAL

9.44
9.45
9.46
9.47
Batch: sub-base material ........................................................................................................

Samples: sub-base material ....................................................................................................
Testing: sub-base material using virgin material ...................................................................
Testing: Recycled sub-base material in lieu of virgin material .............................................
9.20
9.21
9.21
9.21
TESTING: RELATIVE COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE

9.48
9.49
9.50
Testing: relative compaction of sub-base .............................................................................. 9.22

Compliance criteria: relative compaction of sub-base............................................................ 9.23
Non-compliance: relative compaction of sub-base ............................................................... 9.23
37
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: AGGREGATES, FILLER AND

BITUMEN FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
9.51
9.52
9.53
Batch: aggregates, filler and bitumen for bituminous materials ........................................... 9.23
Samples: aggregates, filler and bitumen for bituminous materials ....................................... 9.23
Testing: aggregates, filler and bitumen for bituminous materials ......................................... 9.24
TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS OTHER THAN

BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL
9.54
9.55
9.56
9.57
Batch: bituminous materials other than bituminous friction course material .......................
Samples: bituminous materials other than bituminous friction course material ....................
Testing: bituminous materials other than bituminous friction course material ....................
Compliance criteria: bituminous materials other than bituminous friction
course material .......................................................................................................................
9.25
9.25
9.26
9.26
TESTING: BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL

9.58
9.59
9.60
9.61
Batch: bituminous friction course material ...........................................................................

Samples: bituminous friction course material.........................................................................
Testing: bituminous friction course material .........................................................................
Compliance criteria: bituminous friction course material .....................................................
9.27
9.27
9.27
9.28
TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CORES

9.62
9.63
9.64
9.65
Samples: bituminous material cores ......................................................................................

Testing: bituminous material cores ........................................................................................
Compliance criteria: bituminous material cores ....................................................................
Non-compliance: bituminous material cores .........................................................................
9.28
9.29
9.29
9.29
TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH AND PERMEABILITY

9.66
9.67
9.68
Testing: texture depth and permeability ................................................................................ 9.30

Compliance criteria: texture depth ......................................................................................... 9.30
Compliance criteria: permeability ......................................................................................... 9.31
APPENDIX 9.1
DETERMINATION OF PERMEABILITY OF
FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
Scope ......................................................................................................................................
Apparatus .................................................................................................................................
Procedure ................................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ................................................................................................................
38
9.32
9.32
9.32
9.32
2006 Edition
SECTION 10
Page
No.
GENERAL
10.01
10.02
10.03
10.04
10.05
10.06
General requirements .............................................................................................................

Formwork and finishes ..........................................................................................................
Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................
Concrete ..................................................................................................................................
Curing compound ...................................................................................................................
Earthworks .............................................................................................................................
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
MATERIALS
10.07
10.08
10.09
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
10.16
Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................
Cement mortar for cradles .....................................................................................................
Fine aggregate ........................................................................................................................
Polyethylene sheeting ............................................................................................................
Joint filler ...............................................................................................................................
Joint sealant ............................................................................................................................
Bond breaker tape ..................................................................................................................
Groove forming strip ..............................................................................................................
Sleeves for dowel bars and tie bars ........................................................................................
Epoxy resin grout ...................................................................................................................
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.4
10.4
10.4
10.4
CONCRETE
10.17
10.18
Concrete mix .......................................................................................................................... 10.4

Cementitious content of concrete .......................................................................................... 10.4
SUBMISSIONS
10.19
10.20
10.21
Particulars of materials for joints ........................................................................................... 10.5

Particulars of methods of construction .................................................................................. 10.5
Samples of materials .............................................................................................................. 10.6
TRIALS
10.22
10.23
10.24
10.25
10.26
10.27
10.28
Compliance criteria: trial-mix concrete .................................................................................

Trial length .............................................................................................................................
Testing: trial length ................................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: trial length ............................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial length .................................................................................................
Commencement of concreting ...............................................................................................
10.6
10.6
10.7
10.7
10.7
10.7
10.7
10.29
Storage of materials for joints and polyethylene sheeting .................................................... 10.8
39
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PRELIMINARY WORK
10.30
10.31
10.32
Installation of utilities ............................................................................................................ 10.8

Preparation of formation and sub-base .................................................................................. 10.8
Laying polyethylene sheeting ................................................................................................ 10.8
FORMWORK
10.33
Formwork ............................................................................................................................... 10.8
FORMING JOINTS
10.34
10.35
10.36
10.37
10.38
10.39
10.40
Forming joints ........................................................................................................................ 10.9

Transverse joints .................................................................................................................... 10.9
Longitudinal joints ................................................................................................................. 10.9
Isolation joints ........................................................................................................................ 10.9
Forming grooves .................................................................................................................... 10.9
Protection of grooves ........................................................................................................... 10.10
Sealing joints ........................................................................................................................ 10.10
PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

10.41
Placing and compacting concrete ........................................................................................ 10.11
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
10.42
Construction joints ............................................................................................................... 10.11
SURFACE FINISH
10.43
10.44
Surface regulation ................................................................................................................ 10.11

Surface texturing .................................................................................................................. 10.12
CURING CONCRETE
10.45
Curing concrete .................................................................................................................... 10.12
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY

10.46
Protection of concrete carriageway ..................................................................................... 10.12
TOLERANCES
10.47
10.48
10.49
10.50
10.51
10.52
10.53
10.54
Tolerances: sub-base ............................................................................................................

Tolerances: formwork ..........................................................................................................
Tolerances: reinforcement ....................................................................................................
Tolerances: dowel bars and tie bars .....................................................................................
Tolerances: grooves ..............................................................................................................
Tolerances: covers, frames and other hardware ....................................................................
Tolerances: alignment of concrete carriageway ..................................................................
Tolerances: level of concrete carriageway ..........................................................................
40
10.13
10.13
10.13
10.13
10.13
10.13
10.13
10.14
2006 Edition
Page
No.

10.55
10.56
Testing: surface regularity .................................................................................................... 10.14

Compliance criteria: surface regularity ............................................................................... 10.15
TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH

10.57
10.58
Testing: texture depth ........................................................................................................... 10.15

Compliance criteria: texture depth ....................................................................................... 10.16
TESTING: CONCRETE
10.59
10.60
10.61
Testing: workability and compressive strength of concrete ................................................ 10.16

Compliance criteria: workability of concrete ...................................................................... 10.16
Samples: compressive strength of concrete ......................................................................... 10.16
TESTING: CONCRETE
TRIAL LENGTHS
10.62
10.63
10.64
CORES
FROM
Samples: concrete cores from trial lengths .......................................................................... 10.16

Testing: concrete cores from trial lengths ............................................................................ 10.16
Compliance criteria: concrete cores from trial lengths ....................................................... 10.17
TESTING: MATERIALS FOR JOINTS

10.65
10.66
10.67
10.68
Batch: joint filler, joint sealant .............................................................................................

Samples: joint filler, joint sealant ........................................................................................
Testing: joint filler, joint sealant ..........................................................................................
Testing: joint sealant ............................................................................................................
10.17
10.17
10.17
10.17
APPENDIX 10.1
DETERMINATION OF THE TEXTURE DEPTH OF
CARRIAGEWAYS
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Materials ...............................................................................................................................
Apparatus .............................................................................................................................
Procedure ..............................................................................................................................
Calculation ...........................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ..............................................................................................................
41
10.18
10.18
10.18
10.18
10.19
10.19
2006 Edition
SECTION 11
Page
No.

GENERAL
11.01
11.02
11.03
11.04
11.05
11.06
11.07
11.08

Earthworks .............................................................................................................................
Sub-base material and bituminous materials .........................................................................
Joints in concrete ....................................................................................................................
Formwork ...............................................................................................................................
Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................
Concrete ..................................................................................................................................
Steelwork ................................................................................................................................
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
11.3
MATERIALS
11.09
11.10
Cement mortar ........................................................................................................................ 11.3

Polyethylene sheeting ............................................................................................................ 11.3
PART 2: CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

MATERIALS
11.11
Concrete mix .......................................................................................................................... 11.4
SUBMISSIONS
11.12
Particulars of concrete profile barriers .................................................................................. 11.4
TRIALS
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.16
11.17
11.18
Trial length .............................................................................................................................

Testing: trial length ................................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: trial length ............................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial length .................................................................................................
Commencement of concreting ...............................................................................................
11.4
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5

11.19
11.20
Formwork ............................................................................................................................... 11.5

Finishes to concrete ................................................................................................................ 11.6
JOINTS IN CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

11.21
Joints in concrete profile barriers ........................................................................................... 11.6

42
2006 Edition
Page
No.
CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE PROFILE

BARRIERS
11.22
11.23
Construction by slip-form machine ....................................................................................... 11.6

Construction using precast units ............................................................................................ 11.6
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

11.24
Protection of concrete profile barriers ................................................................................... 11.6
TOLERANCES
11.25
Tolerances: concrete profile barriers ..................................................................................... 11.6
TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM TRIAL

LENGTHS
11.26
Testing: concrete cores from trial lengths .............................................................................. 11.7
PART 3: PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

GENERAL
11.27
Design of pedestrian guard-railing ........................................................................................ 11.8
MATERIALS
11.28
11.29
11.30
11.31
11.32
Steel ........................................................................................................................................ 11.8

Stainless steel ......................................................................................................................... 11.8
Aluminium ............................................................................................................................. 11.9
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets .................................................................................. 11.9
Mesh infill ............................................................................................................................ 11.10
FABRICATION OF PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

11.33
11.34
Galvanizing to steel .............................................................................................................. 11.10

Welding steel ........................................................................................................................ 11.10
SUBMISSIONS
11.35
11.36
Particulars of pedestrian guard-railing ................................................................................ 11.10

Samples of materials ............................................................................................................ 11.10
11.37
Storage of pedestrian guard-railing ...................................................................................... 11.11
43
2006 Edition
Page
No.
INSTALLATION OF PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

11.38
Installation of pedestrian guard-railing ................................................................................. 11.11
PART 4: UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS

MATERIALS
11.39
11.40
11.41
11.42
11.43
Beams ...................................................................................................................................
Posts ......................................................................................................................................
Cleats and struts ...................................................................................................................
Bolts and nuts .......................................................................................................................
Washers .................................................................................................................................
11.12
11.12
11.12
11.13
11.13
SUBMISSIONS
11.44
11.45
Particulars of untensioned beam barriers ............................................................................ 11.13

11.46
Storage of beams and posts .................................................................................................. 11.14
CONSTRUCTION OF UNTENSIONED BEAM

BARRIERS
11.47
11.48
11.49
11.50
Installation of untensioned beam barriers ............................................................................

Compacted earth footings ....................................................................................................
Concrete footings .................................................................................................................
Anchor blocks ......................................................................................................................
11.14
11.14
11.15
11.15
PART 5: KERBS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS

MATERIALS
11.51
11.52
Concrete kerbs, edgings and quadrants ............................................................................... 11.16

Granite kerbs, edgings and quadrants .................................................................................. 11.16
CONSTRUCTION OF KERBS, EDGINGS AND

QUADRANTS
11.53
11.54
Construction of precast concrete and granite kerbs, edgings and quadrants........................ 11.16
Construction of in-situ kerbs, edgings and quadrants ........................................................... 11.16
TOLERANCES
11.55
Tolerances: kerbs, edgings and quadrants ........................................................................... 11.17

44
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 6: FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED

AREAS
MATERIALS
11.56
Concrete for footways, cycletracks and paved areas .......................................................... 11.18
CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS

AND PAVED AREAS
11.57
11.58
In-situ concrete footways, cycletracks and paved areas ....................................................... 11.18

Flexible surfacing to footways, cycletracks and paved areas ............................................... 11.18
PROTECTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS

AND PAVED AREAS
11.59
Protection of footways, cycletracks and paved areas............................................................ 11.19
PART 7: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS FOR PAVING

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
11.60
Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 11.20
MATERIALS
11.61
11.62
11.63
11.64
11.65
11.66
11.67
Units .....................................................................................................................................
Precast concrete paving slabs ..............................................................................................
Precast concrete paving blocks ............................................................................................
Precast concrete paving setts ...............................................................................................
Concrete ................................................................................................................................
Additional requirements for Grade A units .........................................................................
Sand ......................................................................................................................................
11.20
11.20
11.20
11.20
11.21
11.21
11.21
SUBMISSIONS
11.68
11.69
11.70
11.71
Particulars of paving units ...................................................................................................

Particular of units additional requirements for Grade A units ...........................................
Samples of materials ..............................................................................................................
Samples of materials additional requirements for Grade A units ....................................
11.22
11.22
11.23
11.23

11.72
11.73
Handling and storage of units .............................................................................................. 11.23

Storage of sand ..................................................................................................................... 11.23
45
2006 Edition
Page
No.
LAYING UNITS
11.74
11.75
11.76
11.77
11.78
11.79
Laying units ..........................................................................................................................

Laying sand ..........................................................................................................................
Bedding paving slabs ...........................................................................................................
Bedding paving blocks and setts ...........................................................................................
Filling joints and compaction of units .................................................................................
Mortar and concrete seal ......................................................................................................
11.23
11.24
11.24
11.24
11.25
11.25
REINSTATEMENT OF UNITS
11.80
Reinstatement of units .......................................................................................................... 11.25
TOLERANCES
11.81
Levels ................................................................................................................................... 11.26
TESTING
11.82
11.83
11.84
11.85
11.86
11.87
11.88
Batching ................................................................................................................................
Testing requirements for units .............................................................................................
Bending strength test of paving slabs ..................................................................................
Compressive strength test of paving blocks ........................................................................
Additional testing for Grade A units: dimensional deviation of paving slabs,
blocks and setts ....................................................................................................................
Additional testing for Grade A units: slip/ skid resistance of paving slabs and
blocks .
Additional testing for Grade A units: water absorption value of paving slabs and
blocks
11.26
11.26
11.26
11.26
11.27
11.27
11.27
APPENDIX 11.1
DETERMINATION OF CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH OF INTERLOCKING BLOCKS
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Apparatus .............................................................................................................................
Procedure ..............................................................................................................................
Calculation ...........................................................................................................................
46
11.29
11.29
11.29
11.30
11.30
2006 Edition
SECTION 12
Page
No.
PART 1 : TRAFFIC SIGNS

GENERAL
12.01
12.02
12.03
12.04

Temporary traffic arrangements and control .........................................................................
Steelwork ................................................................................................................................
Traffic signs ............................................................................................................................
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
MATERIALS
12.05
12.06
12.07
12.08
12.09
Steel ........................................................................................................................................
Stainless steel .........................................................................................................................
Aluminium alloy ....................................................................................................................
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets ..................................................................................
Materials for faces of traffic signs .........................................................................................
12.3
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.5
FABRICATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
Posts for traffic signs ..............................................................................................................

Backing plates for traffic signs ..............................................................................................
Spill screens for traffic signs ..................................................................................................
Faces for traffic signs .............................................................................................................
Lacquer coatings ....................................................................................................................
Painting to faces for traffic signs ...........................................................................................
12.5
12.6
12.6
12.6
12.7
12.7
SUBMISSIONS
12.16
Particulars of traffic signs ...................................................................................................... 12.7
12.17
Storage of traffic signs ........................................................................................................... 12.8
CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY OF

TRAFFIC SIGNS
12.18
12.19
Construction and assembly of traffic signs ........................................................................... 12.8

Covering of traffic signs ........................................................................................................ 12.8
TESTING: TRAFFIC SIGNS

12.20
12.21
Testing .................................................................................................................................. 12.9

Compliance criteria ................................................................................................................ 12.9
47
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 2: ROAD MARKINGS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
12.22
Road markings ..................................................................................................................... 12.10
MATERIALS
12.23
12.24
12.25
12.26
12.27
12.28
Hot-applied thermoplastic material .....................................................................................

Cold-applied preformed material .........................................................................................
Cold plastic road marking......................................................................................................
Paint for road markings ........................................................................................................
Solid glass beads ..................................................................................................................
Functional life of the material ..............................................................................................
12.10
12.10
12.10
12.10
12.11
12.11
SUBMISSIONS
12.29
Test certificate and routine testing ....................................................................................... 12.11
DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

12.30
12.31
12.32
Delivery and storage of thermoplastic material .................................................................. 12.11

Storage of road marking paint material ............................................................................... 12.12
Storage of preformed material ............................................................................................. 12.12
LAYING ROAD MARKINGS

12.33
12.34
12.35
12.36
12.37
12.38
12.39
Preparation of surfaces .........................................................................................................

Laying hot-applied thermoplastic material ..........................................................................
Laying cold-applied preformed material .............................................................................
Use of road marking paint ...................................................................................................
Road marking performance for road users ..........................................................................
Temporary road markings ....................................................................................................
Skid resistance level .............................................................................................................
12.12
12.12
12.13
12.13
12.13
12.13
12.14
TOLERANCES
12.40
Tolerances............................................................................................................................... 12.14
REMOVING ROAD MARKINGS

12.41
Shot-Blasting Machine........................................................................................................... 12.14
PART 3: ROAD STUDS

MATERIALS
12.42
Road studs ............................................................................................................................ 12.15

48
2006 Edition
Page
No.
12.43
Bitumen grout ....................................................................................................................... 12.15
INSTALLATION OF ROAD STUDS

12.44
Installation of road studs ...................................................................................................... 12.15
49
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
SECTION 1
GENERAL
1.1
2006 Edition
1.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 1
GENERAL
INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS
Application of the
General Specification
for Civil Engineering
Works
1.01
(1)
The provisions contained in the Particular Specification and the
Drawings shall prevail over the provisions contained in this General
Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS).
(2)
The provisions contained in this General Specification for Civil
Engineering Works shall prevail over the provisions contained in British
Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice and similar standard documents
stated in the Contract.
Abbreviations
1.02
(1)
The following list shows the meaning of the abbreviations for the
common terms used in this GS but is not intended to be exhaustive:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
APHA
American Public Health Association
AWWA
American Water Works Association
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AS/NZS
Australian/New Zealand Standards
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
BQ
Bills of Quantities
BS
British Standards
BS EN
European Standard adopted as British Standards
BS EN ISO European Standards (EN) & International Organization
for Standardization for (ISO)s Standards adopted as
British Standards
CBR
California Bearing Ratio
CCTV
Closed circuit television
CD
Chart Datum (0.146 m below Principal Datum) Amd 2/2010
C&D
Construction and demolition
CI
Cast iron
CIPP
Lining with cured-in-place pipes
CP
British Standard Code of Practice
CS 1
Construction Standard CS1: 1990 Testing Concrete
CS 2
Construction Standard CS2: 1995 Carbon Steel Bars for
the Reinforcement of Concrete
CSF
Condensed Silica Fume
Amd 2/2010
CSSM
Construction Site Safety Manual
DI
Ductile iron
DDF
Disposal Delivery Form
DFT
Dry film thickness
DN
Nominal size
dn
Nominal size of tees and tapers
DRS
Daily Record Summary
EM&A
Environmental Monitoring and Audit
EPD
Environmental Protection Department
ET
Environmental Team
FGL
Finished ground level, or finished level of the permanent
works
GCC
General Conditions of Contract
1.3
2006 Edition
GEO
Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering and

Development Department
GI
Galvanized iron
GGBS
Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag
Amd 2/2010
GS
General Specification for Civil Engineering Works
HDPE
High-density polyethylene
HKSAR
Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
HOKLAS Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
HSFG
High strength friction grip
ISO
International Organisation for Standardization
JIS
Japanese Industrial Standards
LPG
Liquefied petroleum gas
PC
Portland cement
PD
Principal Datum
PFA
Pulverised-fuel ash
PFAC
Portland fly ash cement
PFC
Public Fill Committee
ppm
parts per million
PS
Particular Specification
PTFE
Polytetrafluoroethylene
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
QPME
Quality Powered Mechanical Equipment
QSPSC
Quality Scheme for the Production and Supply of
Concrete
Amd 2/2010
RAP
Reclaimed asphalt pavement
SCC
Special Conditions of Contract
SIS
Swedish Standards
SMM
Standard Method of Measurement for Civil Engineering
Works
SRPC
Sulphate resisting Portland cement
TTS
Trip-ticket system
ULSD
Ultra-low-sulphur diesel
uPVC
unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
VHS
Video Home System
VOC
Volatile Organic Compound
WIS
Water Industry Specification, Water Research Centre
(2)
The following list shows the meaning of the abbreviations for the units
used in this GS but is not intended to be exhaustive:
C
dB
g
g/mL
g/m2
ha
hr
Hz
J
kg
kHz
kJ
km
km/hr
kN
kPa
kV
degrees Celsius
decibels
gram
gram(s) per millilitre
gram(s) per square metre
hectare
hour
hertz
joule
kilogram
kilohertz
kilojoule
kilometre
kilometre(s) per hour
kiloNewton
kiloPascal
kiloVolt
1.4
2006 Edition
kW
L
L/min
L/s
m
m2
m3
m/s
Mg
Mg/m3
min
mL
mm
mm2
mm3
mm/s
MPa
N
N/mm
N/m2
No.
NTU
Pa.s
r/min
r/s
s
t
m
%
Glossary of terms
1.03
kiloWatt
litre
litre(s) per minute
litre(s) per second
metre
square metre
cubic metre
metre(s) per second
megagram
megagram(s) per cubic metre
minute
millilitre
millimetre
square millimetre
cubic millimetre
millimetre(s) per second
megaPascal
Newton
Newton(s) per millimetre
Newton(s) per square metre
number
nephelometric turbidity units
Pascal(s) second
revolution(s) per minute
revolution(s) per second
second
tonne
micrometer(micron)
percentage
(1)
Words and expressions to which meanings are assigned in any section
of the GS shall have the same meanings in other sections of the GS except
when the context otherwise requires.
(2)
Utilities are the installations (including cables, ducts and pipes) used to
supply or provide electricity, lighting, traffic control, telecommunications,
cable television, gas, water, drainage, sewerage and tramway, including all
associated protection, supports, ancillary structures, fittings and equipment.
Trials and approval
1.04
(1)
Reference in this GS to the approval of the Engineer shall mean
approval given by the Engineer in writing. Materials, methods of construction
and any other matters, which have been approved by the Engineer, shall not
be changed without the approval of the Engineer to the proposed changes.
(2)
Trials shall be carried out as stated in the Contract to demonstrate that
proposed materials and methods of construction will produce work which
complies with the specified requirements.
(3)
Trials shall be carried out before the relevant permanent work starts so
as to allow the Engineer a sufficient period to determine if the trial complies
with the specified requirements. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24
hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before the trial starts.
(4)
Trials shall be carried out using materials and methods of construction
of the types submitted to the Engineer, and at locations agreed by the
Engineer.
1.5
2006 Edition
(5)
If in the opinion of the Engineer, the work that complies with the
specified requirements has not been produced in the trial, particulars of
proposed changes to the materials or methods of construction shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Further trials shall be carried out until the work
that complies with the specified requirements has been produced in the trial
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Works for which trials are required
shall not commence, until in the opinion of the Engineer, the work that
complies with the specified requirements has been produced in the trial.
(6)
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials and methods of
construction used to produce the work that complies with the specified
requirements in a trial, shall not be changed unless further trials have been
carried out to demonstrate that the proposed changes are satisfactory.
British Standards,
European Standards
adopted as British
Standards, Codes of
Practice and other
standards
1.05
Specifications in
metric and imperial
units
1.06
(1)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, reference in this GS to British
Standards, European Standards adopted as British Standards, British
Standard Codes of Practice and similar standards shall be to that edition of
the document stated in Appendix 1.1 of this Section.
(2)
Later editions of British Standards, European Standards adopted as
British Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice and other similar
standards, or standards which are considered to be equivalent, shall not apply
unless approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall not be bound to give or
withhold his approval until the Contractor has provided him with a legal copy
of the relevant standard for information. If approval is obtained, the
Contractor shall provide two legal copies of the document for use by the
Engineer.
Amd 3/2010
(1)
Specifications in imperial units shall not be substituted for
specifications in metric units stated in the Contract unless approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Conversion of metric units to imperial units and of imperial units to
metric units shall be in accordance with the Hong Kong Government Metric
Reference Guidebook.
Dimensions from
Drawings
1.07
Dimensions shall not be obtained by scaling from the Drawings. Dimensions

that are not shown on the Drawings or calculable from dimensions shown on
the Drawings shall be obtained from the Engineer.
PROGRAMME
Programme
1.08
(1)
In addition to the programme to be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Clause 16 of GCC for Civil Engineering Works, the
Contractor shall submit within a further 14 days a programme showing a
detailed breakdown of the work to be carried out in the first 3 months, and an
outline for the remainder of the work. A programme showing the work
completed to date, a detailed breakdown of the work to be carried out in the
next 3 months and an updated outline for the remainder of the work shall be
submitted to the Engineer not later than 4 weeks before the commencement
of each subsequent 3-monthly period.
(2)
Programmes submitted in accordance with Clause 1.08 (1) shall be in
the form of a bar chart showing the earliest and latest start and finish dates for
1.6
2006 Edition
each activity, and the critical path.

(3)
The breakdown of the work to be shown for each Section of the Works
on the programme submitted in accordance with Clause 1.08 (1) shall be
comprehensive. It shall include the key activities, key dates and milestones
from the programme submitted under Clause 16 of GCC for Civil
Engineering Works, the information required under Clause 16 of GCC for
Civil Engineering Works and the effects of the matters listed in Clause 63 of
GCC for Civil Engineering Works, together with the following:
(a)
Work to be carried out, including testing and commissioning,
(b)
Fabrication, delivery and installation of materials to be fabricated

off the Site,
(c)
Delivery of critical materials originating from outside the

HKSARG,
(d)
Activities for which the Employer or Engineer is responsible,

including the issue of critical drawings and other information,
provision of materials by the Employer, nomination and approval
of Nominated Sub-contractors and consideration and approval of
drawings and proposals, and
(e)
Work to be carried out by Government departments, utility

undertakings and other contractors.
(4)
The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, co-ordinating and
agreeing with the utility undertakings a programme for their works. The
Contractor shall make full allowance for time and provision of facilities for
the utility undertakings in the preparation of his programmes.
CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE
Surveyor
1.09
(1)
The Contractor shall employ on the Site a Surveyor for setting out the
Works and for conducting slope and retaining wall record survey.
(2)
The Surveyor shall possess a Diploma/Higher Certificate in Land
Surveying from a Hong Kong technical institute/polytechnic or university, or
equivalent qualification appropriate to the nature of the survey work required
for the Contract, plus a minimum of 2 years of relevant experience in
engineering surveying.
Foreman for
concrete works
1.10
If structural concrete works are included in the Contract, the Contractor shall
employ on the Site a Foreman who is suitably experienced in concrete works.
The Foreman shall be on the Site at all times when concreting is in progress.
Supervision of piling
works
1.11
(1) If piling works are included in the Contract, the Contractor shall
employ on the Site a Construction Engineer who is required to visit the site
at such time and frequency as necessary and shall be present to supervise
inter alia, but not limited to, the following items:
(a) 100% check on the depth of excavation and the quality of retrieved
material at the founding stratum, and
1.7
2006 Edition
(b) 100% verification on the depth of the constructed piles by proof

drilling (for large-diameter bored piles) including the retrieval of
concrete and rock core samples for inspection and testing.
(2)
The Contractor shall also employ on the Site a Construction
Supervisor who shall be full time on site to supervise the piling works.
(3)
The Construction Engineer shall be a holder of a recognized degree in
civil/structural/geotechnical engineering with 5 years of relevant experience.
The Construction Supervisor shall either be a holder of a Higher
Diploma/Higher Certificate in civil/structural/geotechnical engineering with 3
years of relevant experience, or a holder of a Diploma/Certificate in the same
subjects with 5 years of relevant experience.
(4)
Particulars of Agent
and employees
1.12
This sub-clause was deleted by Amd 1/2007
(1)
The proposed Agent as an employee of the Contactor shall hold a
university degree acceptable to the Engineer and the HKIE academic
requirements for Corporate Membership, or an equivalent qualification, in
civil engineering or in a branch of civil engineering appropriate to the nature
of the work included in the Contract, and shall have at least two years of
relevant working experience. He must be bestowed with adequate
authority to receive and carry out the directions and instructions from the
Engineer and the Engineers Representative.
(2)
The following particulars of the proposed Agent, Surveyor,
Construction Engineer and Construction Supervisor for piling works and
foreman for concrete works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name,
(b)
Copy of Hong Kong Identity Card,
(c)
Details of qualifications, including copies of certificates, and
(d)
Details of previous experience.
(3)
The particulars of the proposed Agent, Surveyor, Construction
Engineer and Construction Supervisor for piling works shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval and the particulars of the proposed foreman for
concrete works shall be submitted to the Engineer for information.
(4)
The particulars of the proposed Agent, Surveyor, Construction
Engineer and Construction Supervisor for piling works shall be submitted
within 7 days of commencement of the Works. The particulars of the
proposed Foreman for concrete works shall be submitted within 7 days of his
appointment.
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND SAFETY OF THE

PUBLIC (Amd 1/2009)
1.8
2006 Edition
Construction safety
and safety of the
public (Amd 1/2009)
1.13
(1)
The Contractor shall keep on the Site a set of the current Construction
Site Safety Manual (CSSM) issued by the Environment. Transport and Works
Bureau (ETWB) of the Government of the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region (HKSAR). Attention of the Contractor is drawn to
Appendix III of Chapter 3 of the CSSM about the need to keep one set of the
legislation, regulations and/or codes of practice on the Site.
Amd 1/2007
(2)
Safety precautions for working in sewers, drains and other confined spaces
shall comply with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined
Spaces) Regulations. The major provisions of these Regulations are

contained in the current edition of the document A Brief Guide to the Factories
and Industrial Undertakings (Confined Spaces) Regulation issued by the Labour
Department of the Government of the HKSAR.
(3)
Divers shall undergo regular medical checks and obtain certificates of
fitness. Safety precautions for diving shall be in accordance with the current
edition of the Code of Practice: Safety and Health at Work for Industrial
Diving issued by the Labour Department of the Government of the HKSAR.
(4)
Adequate safety equipment including, as appropriate, safety helmets,
goggles, ear protectors, safety belts, safety equipment for working in sewers,
drains and confined spaces, equipment for rescue from drowning, fire
extinguishers, first aid equipment and other necessary safety equipment shall
be available on the Site at all times.
(5)
Safety equipment, scaffolds, working platforms, ladders and other
means of access, and lighting, signing and guarding equipment shall be
inspected and maintained regularly. Lights and signs shall be kept clean and
easy to read. Equipment that are damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not
in working order shall be repaired or replaced immediately.
(6)
Posters in both English and Chinese to draw attention to safety shall be
obtained from the Labour Department and displayed at prominent locations
around the Site including site offices, workshops and canteens.
(7)
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to ensure the
safety of the public at and adjoining the Site. The Contractor shall also take
all reasonable measures to prevent the public from entering those parts of the
Site where work is in progress or where there exists any potential hazard to
the public, and where necessary, adopt effective measures to prevent the
public from getting close to the dangerous areas of the Site or being
endangered by the construction activities. Posters and/or warning signs in
both Chinese and English drawing the attention of the public to the potential
hazards in connection with the Works shall be displayed at prominent
locations around the Site.
Amd 1/2009
WORK ON ROADS
Approval for
temporary traffic
arrangements and
control
1.14
(1)
In addition to any other requirements stated in the Contract, temporary
traffic arrangements shall be in accordance with conditions and restrictions
imposed by the Commissioner for Transport and the Commissioner of Police.
Temporary lighting, signage, guarding and traffic control arrangements shall
be in accordance with conditions and restrictions imposed by the Director of
1.9
2006 Edition
Highways. Traffic signs that are not prescribed by the Road Traffic Ordinance
or its subsidiary legislation shall be in accordance with conditions and
restrictions imposed by the Commissioner for Transport.
(2)
The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the
necessary approvals from the Commissioner for Transport, the Commissioner
of Police, the Director of Highways and any other relevant authority for
temporary traffic arrangements and control.
Temporary traffic
arrangements and
control
1.15
(1)
Temporary traffic diversions and pedestrian routes shall be provided
where work in roads or footways obstructs existing vehicular or pedestrian
access. The relevant work shall not commence until the approved
temporary traffic arrangements and control have been implemented.
(2)
Temporary traffic arrangements and control for work in roads and
footways shall comply with the requirements contained in the current edition
of the document `Code of Practice for Lighting, Signing and Guarding of
Road Works' issued by the Government of the HKSAR. A copy of the
document shall be kept on the Site.
(3)
Temporary traffic light signals shall be of a type approved by the
Commissioner for Transport and shall comply with the requirements
contained in the current editions of the documents `Type Approval Procedure
for Portable Traffic Light Signals' and `Specification for Vehicle
Actuated/Fixed Time Portable Traffic Signal Equipment' issued by the
Government of the HKSAR.
(4)
Temporary traffic signs, including posts, backing plates and faces,
shall comply with the requirements for traffic signs contained in Section 12
except as stated in Clauses 1.15(5) and (6).
(5)
The thickness of backing plates for temporary traffic signs that will be
erected for less than 6 months may be reduced to 1.5 mm. The posts for
signs may be constructed of timber or other material provided that in the
opinion of the Engineer the traffic signs will be stable and safe.
(6)
The Contractor shall design the arrangement of information on sign
the faces for temporary traffic directional signs. The details of the
background, borders and legends, including letters, numerals, characters and
symbols, shall comply with the requirements of the Commissioner for
Transport.
(7)
The Contractor shall inspect and regularly maintain the temporary
traffic arrangements and control, both day and night. He shall keep the traffic
lights, lights and signs clean and easy to read, and shall immediately repair or
replace the equipment that is damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not in
working order.
1.10
2006 Edition
Particulars of
temporary traffic
arrangements and
control
Use of roads and

footways
1.16
1.17
The following particulars of proposed temporary traffic arrangements and

control shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 7 days before
the traffic arrangements and control are implemented:
(a)
Details of traffic diversions and pedestrian routes,
(b)
Details of lighting, signage, guarding and traffic control

arrangements and equipment, and
(c)
Any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Commissioner for

Transport, the Commissioner of Police, the Director of
Highways or any other relevant authority, including copies of
applications, correspondence and approvals.
(1)
Roads, footways and cycle-tracks on the Site shall be maintained in a
clean and passable condition and shall not be used to store materials or park
construction plant or other vehicles, other than those required for immediate
use on the Works. The construction plant, materials and temporary works
shall be placed with minimum interference with or disturbance to the use of
any right of way by the public.
(2)
Measures shall be taken to prevent excavated material, silt or debris
from entering drainage systems in roads, footways and cycle-tracks. Entry of
water to gullies shall not be obstructed.
(3)
Surfaced roads on the Site and leading to the Site shall not be used by
tracked vehicles unless protection against damage is provided.
(4)
Construction plant and other vehicles leaving the Site shall be
properly cleaned, loaded and covered in such a manner that excavated
material, mud or debris is not deposited on roads. Measures to be adopted
shall include but not be limited to those specified under Clauses 25.15 and
25.26.
Work on roads and

footways
1.18
(1)
Work on roads on the Site shall be carried out in sections such that the
length of road occupied at any time does not exceed that stated in the
Contract and the width of road occupied at any time does not exceed the
width of one traffic lane unless permitted by the Engineer. Work on each
section shall be completed and the road shall be reinstated and opened to
traffic before work commences on the next section. Work on any section,
including loading and unloading, shall be carried out in such a manner that
traffic and utilities on the adjacent road and pedestrian access in the adjacent
footway are adequately maintained.
(2)
Before excavations are carried out on roads or footways, except in
areas covered with paving blocks or tiles, the limits of the area to be
reinstated shall be bounded by a continuous saw-cut groove. The groove shall
be at least 6 mm wide and at least 50 mm deep. Cutting the groove and
breaking out the road or footway shall be carried out in such a manner that
the adjacent road or footway, including edges, is not damaged.
(3)
Excavated material shall not be stored adjacent to excavations in roads
or footways unless permitted by the Engineer.
1.11
2006 Edition
(4)
Any vehicular access across excavations in roads shall be provided
with steel covers. The covers shall be designed to BS 449: Part 2 and shall
be capable of withstanding the full load of traffic permitted to use the road.
The covers shall be secured in position and shall have anti-skid coating so
that the skid resistance values of the covers measured in accordance with BS
3262 shall be not less than 45. Sufficient steel covers shall be kept on the
Site adjacent to excavations in roads to permit access for vehicles across the
excavations in case of emergency. When installed, the steel covers shall be
set to match the road surface smoothly so as to avoid/minimize any noise
nuisance by rocking under the action of traffic.
Amd 1/2007
(5)
Work on roads, footways and cycle-tracks shall be carefully planned to
minimize the period of temporary excavation. If the Contractor is unable to
proceed with the works after any excavation is carried out, he shall
immediately backfill or temporarily reinstate the excavation.
(6)
In respect of works covered by the excavation permits issued by
Highways Department and/or Lands Department as appropriate pursuant to
the Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance Cap 28 where the
Contractor is the Nominated Permittee and the Employer is the Permittee,
the Contractor shall comply with all conditions imposed on him as stated
in the excavation permits.
Amd 1/2007
Reinstatement of
roads and footways
1.19
Temporary diversions, pedestrian access and lighting, signage, guarding and

traffic control equipment shall be removed immediately they are no longer
required. Roads, footways and other items affected by temporary traffic
arrangements and control shall be reinstated to the condition existing before
the work started or to such other condition as may be agreed or instructed by
the Engineer.
CARE OF THE WORKS

Protection from
water
1.20
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all work shall be carried out,
as near as may be practicable in the circumstances, in dry conditions, except
where the work is required to be carried out in or with water or other fluids.
(2)
Where necessary and as far as practicable, the Works including
materials for use in the Works shall be kept free of water and protected from
damage due to water. Temporary drainage, pumping systems or other
effective measures approved by the Engineer shall be used. Silt and debris
shall be intercepted with traps before water is discharged from the Site.
(3) The discharge points of the temporary drainage and pumping systems
shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements with and obtain the necessary approvals and inspections from
the relevant authorities for discharging water to drains, watercourses or the
sea. The relevant work shall not start until the approved arrangements for
disposal of the water have been implemented.
(4)
Measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of new and existing
structures.
1.12
2006 Edition
Protection from
weather
1.21
(1)
Works shall not be carried out in weather conditions that may
adversely affect the works unless protection by methods agreed by the
Engineer is provided.
(2)
Permanent works, including materials for permanent works, shall be
protected by methods agreed by the Engineer from exposure to weather
conditions that may adversely affect the work or materials.
Protection of works
1.22
Finished works shall be protected with methods agreed by the Engineer from
damage that could arise from the execution of adjacent works. Works shall be
carried out in such a manner that works carried out by others, including
Government departments, utility undertakings and other contractors, is not
damaged.
DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

Damage and
interference
1.23
(1)
Works shall be carried out in such a manner that, as far as is
reasonable and practicable, there is no damage to or interference with the
following, other than such damage as is required to enable the execution of
the Works:
(a)
Watercourses;
(b)
Utilities;
(c)
Structures, roads including street furniture, or other property;
(d)
Public or private vehicular or pedestrian accesses; and
(e)
Trees, graves or burial urns.
(2) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer as soon as practicable of any
item, utility or thing which is not stated in the Contract as requiring diversion,
removal or relocation but which the Contractor considers as requiring
diversion, removal or relocation to enable the Works to be executed. The
Contractor shall not divert, remove or relocate any such item, utility or thing
without the prior approval of the Engineer.
(3)
Items which are damaged or interfered with as a result of the works
being carried out and items which are diverted, removed or relocated to
enable the works to be carried out, shall be reinstated to the same condition as
was existing before the works started or to such other condition as may be
agreed or instructed by the Engineer.
Watercourses and
drainage systems
1.24
(1)
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all river and
stream courses, drains and culverts within the Site until handover of the Site to
the Employer. Rivers and stream courses shall be maintained in accordance
the requirements of Clause 25.09. Maintenance of drains and culverts shall
include, but not be confined to, the periodic clearance of debris, weed growth
and other obstructions from the drains, culverts, manholes and flap valve
chambers to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure
throughout the contract period that the flow capacity is not reduced and the
quality of water is not worsened by execution of the Works.
1.13
2006 Edition
(2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for any temporary training or
diversion of natural streams/rivers, drainage systems, nullahs and
watercourses during execution of the Works and subsequent reinstatement.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer particulars of the diversion and
reinstatement proposals at least 21 days before the diversions are
implemented. The Contractor shall programme construction of the Works to
take account of all the necessary temporary diversions of the existing natural
streams/ rivers, nullahs, watercourses and drains. The Contractor shall
illustrate in his overall programme how the Works can be phased smoothly
with the various necessary diversions.
(3)
All diversions shall be of adequate capacity so as not to increase the
risk of flooding to any area within, upstream or downstream of the Site either
from heavy rainfall or high tides. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate
provision is made for dealing with flood flows. Where the design of diversion
proposals relies on contingency measures to quickly remove the installed
temporary works from the drainage systems in order to provide sufficient
flow capacity during adverse weather conditions, any such contingency
measures and associated procedures shall be demonstrated to be fail-safe.
The diversion shall be carefully planned to minimize disturbance caused to
the natural beds of river/streams and riparian vegetation. The diversion shall
be properly reinstated, including removal of any obstructions to flow, as soon
as practicable after the works are completed, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
(4)
The natural bottom and existing flow in the river shall be preserved
as much as possible to avoid disturbance to the river habitats. If
temporary access track on riverbed is unavoidable, this shall be kept to the
minimum width and length. Temporary river crossings shall be supported
on stilts above the riverbed. Stockpiling of construction material, if
necessary, shall be properly covered and located away from any natural
stream/river. Measures shall be taken to prevent excavated material, silt or
debris from being deposited or washed into existing streams and rivers,
drainage systems, nullahs, watercourses, diversion channels or the sea. The
measures to be adopted shall include but not be limited to those specified
under Clauses 25.07, 25.08 and 25.09.
(5)
Any sediment or debris that accumulates in any catchpit, manhole,
sump, trap, drain, drainage channel or watercourse, whether temporary,
existing or newly constructed, within the Site, shall be removed on a frequent
basis, or as directed by the Engineer.
(6)
Removal of existing vegetation alongside the riverbanks shall be
avoided or minimized. When disturbance to vegetation is unavoidable, all
disturbed areas shall be hydroseeded or planted with suitable vegetation to
blend in with the natural environment upon completion of works.
Utilities
1.25
(1)
The details of existing utilities are given for information only and the
accuracy of the details is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall make his own
enquiries and shall carefully excavate inspection pits to locate accurately the
utilities indicated to him by the utility undertakings.
(2)
Temporary supports and protection to utilities shall be provided by
methods agreed by the Engineer. Permanent supports and protection shall
be provided if instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer and the utility undertakings
without delay of the following:
1.14
2006 Edition
(a)
Damage to utilities,
(b)
Leakage of utilities,
(c)
Discovery of utilities not shown on the Drawings, and
(d)
Diversion, removal, repositioning or re-erection of utilities,

which is required to enable the execution of the Works.
(4)
The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to enable the utility
undertakings to proceed in accordance with the programme agreed between
the Contractor and the utility undertakings under Clause 1.08(4). The
Contractor shall maintain close liaison with the utility undertakings and shall
inform the Engineer of any delays in works by the utility undertakings.
(5)
Records of existing utilities encountered shall be kept by the
Contractor on the Site with a copy provided for the Engineer. The records
shall be agreed by the Engineer and shall contain the following details:
(a)
Location of utility,
(b)
Date on which utility was encountered,
(c)
Nature and size of utility,
(d)
Condition of utility, and
(e) Temporary or permanent supports provided.

(6)
Further to Clause 1.25(1), the Contractor shall submit for the
Engineer's agreement, at least 14 days before any excavation by mechanical
plant, a proposal for investigations to ascertain the nature, location and size of
existing utilities by hand-dug inspection pits. Such investigations by
inspection pits shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the duties,
responsibilities, obligations or liabilities imposed upon him by any of the
provisions of the Contract.
(7)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer in writing, the Contractor
shall carry out investigations to locate utilities in accordance with the
proposal referred to in Clause 1.25(6). The Contractor shall make his own
enquiries with the utility undertakings as and when required and should any
utility installations including cover tiles be exposed, the respective utility
undertakings shall be contacted to determine if all their utilities have been
located. Utility installations including cover tiles shall only be removed by
the utility undertakings concerned.
(8)
No excavation with mechanical plant shall commence until the nature,
location and size of utilities that may be affected by the excavation have been
ascertained and the setting-out details have been checked by the Engineer.
The nature includes the type of utilities, protective uPVC/GI ducts or
conduits, concrete surround, haunching and the like. The location includes
the top/bottom levels, the coordinates of the center-lines of the utilities and
the like.
(9)
The Contractor shall provide adequate and experienced site personnel
to control the operation of heavy mechanical plant in the proximity of
utilities.
1.15
2006 Edition
(10) The Contractor shall make arrangements to avoid any heavy

mechanical plant or vehicles standing or passing over buried pipe-work in
particular those at shallow depths with less than 1 metre overburden cover,
especially when the road surface is removed. Unless agreed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall not stockpile any material immediately over or
in the vicinity of any pipe-work.
(11) Pursuant to Clause 1.25(1), the Contractor shall carry out the Works in
such a manner to avoid any damage or interference with any concrete blocks
or structures attached to the utilities. The Contractor shall ensure that all
cable draw-pits, valve-pits and the like are not covered up or removed as a
result of his works and are accessible by utility undertakings at any time
during the course of the Works for emergency repair.
(12) Further to Clause 1.25(2), where utility installations are exposed, the
Contractor shall liaise with the utility undertakers about the necessary
protection for the exposed utilities and provide temporary protective
measures and warning signs to prevent damaging the utility installations.
Structures, roads and
other property
1.26
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of any damage to

structures, roads or other property not required for the execution of the
Works.
Access
1.27
Alternative access shall be provided if interference with existing public or

private vehicular or pedestrian access is necessary to enable the execution of
the Works. The arrangements for the alternative access shall be as agreed by
the Engineer. The permanent access shall be reinstated as soon as
practicable after the works are complete and the alternative access shall be
removed as soon as practicable after it is no longer required.
RECORDS
Records of wage rates
1.28
The average, high and low wage rates for workers of each trade employed
on the Site shall be entered on monthly wage return forms provided by the
Engineer, and the completed forms returned to the Engineer within 4 days
of the start of the succeeding month. For the purpose of completing the
returns, actual trades shall be entered as the equivalent trades stated in Table
1.1.
Records of
correspondence
1.29
Copies of correspondence relevant to execution of the Works (and not of a

confidential nature) received from or despatched to Government departments,
utility undertakings and other contractors employed by the Employer shall be
submitted to the Engineer for information as soon as possible, but in any case
not later than 7 days after receipt or despatch.
Records and reports
1.30
Reports and records, which are to be submitted to the Engineer, shall be in a

format agreed by the Engineer. Reports and records shall be signed by the
Contractor's agent or by another representative authorised by the Contractor.
1.16
2006 Edition
Table 1.1:
Equivalent trades
Actual trade
Equivalent trade
Office attendant
Labourer (unskilled)
Watchman
Working ganger
Ordinary worker in the trade in which he is

employed or, if the trade is not listed, lorry driver
Survey labourer
Concretor's labourer
Turf-layer
Bituminous
material layer
Shot-firer
Plasterer
Lorry checker
Motor driver (car/van)
Truck driver
Survey leveller
Plumber
Welder
Painter
Coxswain, barge
Engineer
Truck driver
Dredger crew,
barge crew
Diver's linesman
LIAISON WITH OTHERS

Liaison with
others
1.31
(1)
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with and obtain
the necessary approvals from Government departments, utility undertakings
and other duly constituted authorities for carrying out the Works.
(2)
The Contractor shall maintain close liaison with other contractors
employed by the Employer, and utility undertakings or other authorities who
are carrying out works on or adjacent to the Site. The Contractor shall ensure
as far as possible that the progress of the Works is not adversely affected by the
activities of such other contractors.
SITE CLEANLINESS
Site cleanliness
1.32
(1)
The Site shall be maintained in a clean and tidy condition. Materials,
including materials required for Temporary Works, shall be stored in an orderly
manner. The measures to be taken shall include but not limited to the following:
1.17
2006 Edition
(a)
Promptly remove all debris and litter on the site including those
dumped into the site from outside by the public.
(b)
Promptly remove debris and litter not within the site if the debris
and litter are in connection with the Works or disposal of by the
persons working on the site.
(c)
Keep traffic cones, temporary traffic lights and signs clean, secure
and in an orderly manner and refurbish, repaint and/or repair
hoardings and/or steel barriers half yearly.
(d)
Keep passageways clear and free of greasy dirt, waste and timber.
(2)
The Contractor shall assign a designated person, with adequate
knowledge, experience and authority, for the overall co-ordination, monitoring
and overseeing of the performance of the site on cleanliness and control of
mosquito breeding. Thereafter, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the
name and contact telephone number of the assigned person and any subsequent
change.
Prevention of
mosquito
breeding
1.33
(1)
Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding on the Site. The
measures to be taken shall include the following:
(a)
Empty cans, oil drums, packings and other receptacles that may
retain water shall be deposited at a central collection point and
those not required for future use shall be removed from the Site
regularly.
(b)
Standing water shall be treated at least once every week with an oil
which will prevent mosquito breeding.
(c)
Construction plant and other items on the Site which may retain
water shall be stored, covered or treated in such a manner that
water will not be retained.
(d)
Properly cover all water storage tanks, remove unnecessary

stagnant water and disused containers, or use non-hazardous
larvicide to prevent mosquito breeding as the last resort. The
Contractor shall submit the characteristics, mixing formulation
and method of application of the proposed larvicide to the
Engineer for approval before its use; and
(e)
Cut bamboo poles for scaffolding as near to the nodes of the poles
as possible.
(2)
Posters in both English and Chinese drawing attention to the dangers of
permitting mosquito breeding shall be obtained from the Government of the
HKSAR and displayed prominently on the Site.
Prevention of
dust
1.34
Works shall be carried out in such a manner that avoidable dust is not
generated. Measures to be adopted shall include but not be limited to those
specified under Clause 25.15.
1.18
2006 Edition
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials and
equipment
provided by the
Employer
1.35
(1)
Materials and equipment which are to be provided by the Employer will
be as stated in the Contract.
(2)
Materials and equipment provided by the Employer shall be collected by
the Contractor from the locations stated in Contract and delivered by the
Contractor to the Site. The Contractor shall inspect the materials and
equipment before taking receipt and shall immediately inform the Engineer of
any shortage or damage.
(3)
Materials or equipment provided by the Employer which are damaged
after collection shall be repaired by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Materials or equipment, which are lost or which in the
opinion of the Engineer are not capable of being or have not been repaired
satisfactorily, shall be replaced by the Contractor.
(4)
Crates and containers for materials or equipment provided by the
Employer shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
(5)
Equipment and materials provided by the Employer which are surplus to
the requirements of the Works shall be returned to the locations stated in the
Contract.
(6)
The Contractor shall protect and maintain equipment provided by the
Employer while it is on the Site and shall provide operatives, fuel and other
consumables required to operate the equipment.
Materials
1.36
(1)
Materials for inclusion in the permanent works shall be new or other
material as stated in the Contract or approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Certificates of tests by manufacturers that are submitted to the Engineer
shall relate to the material delivered to the Site. Certified true copies of
certificates may be submitted if the original certificates cannot be obtained from
the manufacturer. A letter from the supplier stating that the certificates relate
to the material delivered to the Site shall be submitted with the certificates.
(3)
Samples of materials submitted to the Engineer for information or
approval shall be kept on the Site and shall not be returned to the Contractor or
used in the permanent works unless permitted by the Engineer.
TESTING
Quality
assurance
schemes
1.37
Tests stated in the Contract may be omitted or reduced in number as agreed by

the Engineer if materials or articles delivered to the Site:
(a)
Bear the stamp of the registered certification trade mark of the BS

Institution, known as the BS Kitemark, or
(b)
Are covered by a manufacturer's quality assurance scheme stated in

the Contract or approved by the Engineer.
1.19
2006 Edition
Batches, samples
and specimens
1.38
(1)
A batch of material is a specified quantity of the material, which satisfies
specified conditions such that it may be assumed that all of the material in the
batch is of consistent type and quality. If one of the specified conditions is
that the material is delivered to the Site at the same time, material delivered to
the Site over a period not exceeding 7 days may be considered as part of the
same batch if in the opinion of the Engineer there is sufficient evidence that the
other specified conditions applying to the batch apply to all of the material
delivered over the period.
(2)
A sample is a specified amount, or a specified number of pieces or units,
taken from a batch for testing, such that the result of tests on the sample can be
taken as representing the quality of the batch as a whole.
(3)
Samples for
testing
1.39
A specimen is a portion of a sample that is to be tested.
(1)
For the purpose of this Clause and Clauses 1.40, 1.42 and 1.49, the
Employers laboratories shall mean:
(a)
The laboratories of the Employer such as Public Works

Laboratories (PWL), and
(b)
The laboratories currently appointed by the Employer.
(2)
Samples for laboratory tests or test locations for insitu tests shall be
randomly selected by the Engineer. In addition, the Engineer shall be free to
select samples he suspects to be defective. The test locations for insitu tests so
selected and, if applicable, the area/extent of Works covered by the tests, shall
be traceable by means of either a referenced co-ordinates system or a location
plan with defined test positions and levels.
(3)
Samples shall be representative and of sufficient size to enable all
specified tests to be performed.
(4)
Samples shall be taken on Site under close supervision of the Engineer
or by the Employers laboratories having no direct commercial relationship
with the Contractor or material supplier, and shall be clearly, indelibly and
individually marked for identification.
(5)
Once selected and taken, samples stored on Site before delivery to the
place of testing shall remain in the charge of the Engineer or the
Employers laboratories, who/which shall be given adequate facilities
(including sample store room) to keep samples securely under lock and
key inaccessible to unauthorised persons at all times.
(a)
Samples shall be protected, handled and stored in such a manner

that they are not damaged nor contaminated such that the
properties of the sample do not change. The method of storage
shall comply with the requirements of the relevant test methods.
(b)
Where insitu concreting works are to be carried out, the Contractor

shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, provide sufficient number
of steel container rooms (or the like) and curing tanks for storage
and curing test cubes to the satisfaction of the Engineer in
accordance with Clause 1.49(4).
1.20
2006 Edition
(6)
Samples shall be collected and delivered by the Contractor under close
supervision of the Engineer or by the Employers laboratories to the specified
place of testing. During transportation from Site to the specified place of
testing, all samples shall be securely locked in containers or suitably modified
vehicle compartments unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, with keys
kept by the Engineer or the Employers laboratories.
(7)
The transfer of samples from one place/person to another shall be clearly
documented and checked.
The person receiving the samples shall
acknowledge the receipt and confirm the identification of the samples. A
record showing:
(a)
When, where and by whom the samples are taken, and
(b)
Persons who have handled the samples before and during delivery
to the place of testing,
shall be prepared and maintained by the Engineer (with assistance of the

Employers laboratories when necessary) so that the samples delivered from
Site to the specified place of testing are traceable.
(8)
For those tests where supervisory attendance is essential for providing
guidance on Site or for obtaining test data, details of such supervisory site staff
present shall be recorded in relevant data sheets and/or sample submission
forms to enhance data integrity.
(9)
For the purpose of stock control to preclude the swapping of materials
under test and where applicable the unauthorised use of materials before receipt
of test results, the Contractor shall:
(a) Clearly identify all batches of materials arriving on the Site (the
identification marks so designed shall contain information which can
reveal the identity of the batch for each type of material such as the
Contract number, type of material, batch number and other
information as required by the Engineer);
(b) Keep stockpiles and stock items from which samples have been
taken pending test results separated from other materials by means
of labels denoting Stock under Test or similar agreed by the
Engineer;
(c) Establish and maintain a record system showing identification
marks, testing status of all materials (under test or approved for use
or rejected or re-test or omitted for testing, etc.), key dates (e.g. date
of testing) and locations of storage; and
(d) In connection with the above, submit a proposal for a stock
management system on Site peculiar to the Contract to prevent
unauthorised or uncontrolled use of materials for approval by the
Engineer at the commencement of the Contract and subsequent
supervision by the Engineer.
(10) Samples on which non-destructive tests have been carried out shall be
collected from the place of testing after testing and delivered to the Site or
other location instructed by the Engineer.
1.21
2006 Edition
(11) Samples which have been tested may be incorporated in the permanent
works provided that:
(a)
The sample complies with the specified requirements,
(b)
The sample is not damaged, and
(c)
Such use as permitted under Clause 1.36(3).
(12) Additional samples shall be provided for testing if in the opinion of the
Engineer:
(a) Material previously tested no longer complies with the specified
requirements, or
(b) Material has been handled or stored in such a manner that it is no
longer represented by previously tested samples.
Testing
1.40
(1)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, insitu tests and laboratory tests
shall be carried out by the Employers laboratories if the aforesaid tests can be
undertaken by the Employers laboratories. Testing shall not be carried out
in other laboratories unless permitted by the Engineer. If testing is permitted
to be carried out by the Contractor:
(a)
Independent laboratories with no affiliation as a legal entity to

the Contractor or its sub-contractors shall be used,
(b)
Laboratories accredited by HOKLAS for the relevant tests shall

be used, if available, in which case results shall be issued on
HOKLAS endorsed test reports,
(c)
Particulars of the laboratory proposed by the Contractor shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval, and
(d)
Tests shall be adequately supervised by the Engineer.
(2)
The Contractor shall be entitled to attend testing associated with the
Works that is carried out in the Employers laboratories, and to inspect
relevant records.
(3)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, equipment, apparatus and
materials for insitu tests and laboratory tests carried out by the Contractor shall
be provided by the Contractor. The equipment and apparatus shall be
maintained by the Contractor and shall be calibrated before testing starts and
at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer. Calibration requirements and
source of calibration applicable to all laboratory equipment shall follow those
recommended in the HOKLAS Supplementary Criteria No. 2 All Test
Categories - Equipment Calibration. The equipment, apparatus and
materials for insitu tests shall be removed by the Contractor as soon as
practicable after testing is complete.
(4)
Workability tests of fresh concrete shall be carried out by skilled
personnel of the Contractor.
Compliance of a
batch
1.41
(1)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the results of tests on samples or
specimens shall be considered as representing the whole of the batch from
which the sample was taken.
1.22
2006 Edition
(2)
A batch shall be considered as complying with the specified
requirements for the material if the results of specified tests for specified
properties comply with the specified requirements for the properties.
(3)
If additional tests are permitted and separate compliance criteria for the
additional tests are not stated in the Contract, the Engineer shall determine if the
batch complies with the specified requirements for the material on the basis of
the results of all tests, including the additional tests, for every property.
Raw records of
tests and test
reports
1.42
(1)
Raw records of insitu tests and laboratory compliance tests carried out
by the Contractor (excluding the laboratories engaged by the Contractor) shall
be submitted to the Engineer immediately after the tests, or at such other time
stated in the Contract, with a copy of the whole set of records kept by the
Contractor on the Site.
(2)
For all insitu tests and laboratory compliance tests, a test report shall be
submitted to the Engineer in sealed envelope within 7 days, or such other time
stated in the Contract, after completion of each test. The report shall contain
the following details:
(a)
Material or part of the work tested,
(b)
Location and area/extent of the batch from which the samples

were taken or location and area/extent of the part of the work,
(c)
Place of testing,
(d)
Date and time of each test,
(e)
Weather conditions in the case of insitu tests,
(f)
Technical personnel supervising or carrying out the tests,
(g)
Size and description of samples and specimens,
(h)
Method of sampling,
(i)
Properties tested,
(j)
Method of testing,
(k)
Readings and measurements taken during the tests,
(l)
Test results, including any calculations and graphs, and
(m)
Other details stated in the Contract.
(3)
All test reports compiled by the laboratories (which refer to the
Employers laboratories and those engaged by the Contractor) shall be
delivered directly to the Engineer in a sealed envelope without routing
through the Contractor.
(4)
Copies of test records carried out through the Employers laboratories
will be given to the Contractor on request.
1.23
2006 Edition
WORKMANSHIP AND TOLERANCES

Workmanship
1.43
Workmanship shall comply with best trade practice and with relevant British
Standard.
Tolerances
1.44
(1)
Tolerances stated in the Contract shall be measured perpendicular to the
specified lines unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2)
If adjacent parts of the Works are subject to different dimensional
tolerances then the most critical tolerance shall apply to all such works that
relate to each other in respect of dimension, line and level.
SITE ESTABLISHMENT
Use of the Site
1.45
(1)
The Site shall not be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than
for executing the Works or carrying out other works associated with the Works
and approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Concrete batching and mixing plant erected on the Site shall not be used
to provide concrete for work outside the Site.
(3)
Bituminous materials batching and mixing plant erected on the Site shall
not be used to provide bituminous materials for works outside the Site.
(4)
Rock crushing plant shall not be erected on the Site unless stated in the
Contract.
(5)
The location and size of stockpiles of materials, including excavated
material, within the Site shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Stockpiles shall
be maintained in a stable condition.
(6)
Entry to and exit from the Site shall be only gained at the locations stated
in the Contract or agreed by the Engineer.
Submission of
particulars
1.46
(1)
The following particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
not more than 14 days of the commencement of the Works:
(a)
Drawings showing the layout within the Site of the Engineer's and
Contractor's accommodation, project signboards, access roads and
major facilities required early in the Contract,
(b)
Drawings showing the layout and the construction details of the

Engineer's accommodation, and
(c)
Drawings showing the details to be included on project signboards.
(2)
Drawings showing the location of stores, storage areas, concrete and
bituminous materials batching and mixing plants, rock crushing plants and
other major facilities not required early in the Contract shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval as early as possible, but in any case not later than 28 days
before such facilities are constructed on the Site.
1.24
2006 Edition
Survey of the Site
1.47
A survey of the Site to establish the precise boundaries of the Site and the levels
within the Site will be carried out by the Engineer after site clearance, and
before other works start in each area to be surveyed. The Contractor shall
carry out the survey jointly with the Engineer and agree the result as soon as
practicable after completion of site clearance, before commencing other works
in the area surveyed.
Fences and signs

on the Site
1.48
(1)
Hoardings, fences, gates and signs on the Site shall be maintained in a
clean, presentable, stable and secure condition. Logos, pictures and text shall
be legible and not visually obstructed at all times.
(2)
Project signboards stated in the Contract shall be erected not more than 4
weeks, or such other period agreed by the Engineer, after the date for
commencement of the Works. Other advertising signs shall not be erected on
the Site unless permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
The Engineers permission shall be obtained before hoardings, fences,
gates or signs are removed. Hoardings, fences, gates and signs that are to be
left in position after completion of the Works shall be repaired and repainted as
instructed by the Engineer.
(4)
All components of site hoardings and signboards shall be metallic and
not be made of timber. Bolts and nuts shall be used to join the panels of
hoardings and signboards unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer's
Site
accommodation
1.49
(1)
For new accommodation to be erected, preference shall be given to the
used prefabricated units that are in good working and serviceable conditions.
The accommodation to be provided on the Site for the Engineer shall be ready
for occupation, including connection of all utilities, not more than 8 weeks after
the date of approval by the Engineer of the proposed location, layout,
construction details and measures against all foreseeable hazards such as
flooding, landslides, lightning, etc.
(2)
The accommodation shall be maintained in a clean, stable and secure
condition and shall be cleaned at least daily. The services of a full-time
attendant shall be provided for the Engineer.
(3)
Equipment provided for the use of the Engineer or persons authorised by
the Engineer shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition and all
consumables shall be replenished when required. Equipment shall, wherever
practicable, have Grade 1 Energy Efficiency Labels, or Energy Labels for
equipment operated only under the Recognition Type labelling system, under
the Hong Kong Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme. They shall include
features to facilitate the minimization of waste and consumables. Office
equipment must be able to handle use of paper on both sides. Consumables
shall be made from recycled material and shall be recyclable wherever
practicable. Measuring and testing equipment shall be calibrated before it is
used and at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer. Calibration requirements
as well as source of calibration applicable to all laboratory equipment shall
follow those recommended in the HOKLAS Supplementary Criteria No. 2 All
Test Categories - Equipment Calibration. Survey equipment shall be
maintained by the service agent and shall be calibrated by an approved
laboratory at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
Equivalent
replacements shall be provided for equipment that is out of service.
1.25
2006 Edition
(4)
Where insitu concreting works are to be carried out, steel container
rooms and curing tanks shall be provided on the Site, at the discretion of the
Engineer, according to the requirements stated in Appendix 1.2 and Appendix
1.3 respectively. In this connection, concreting works shall not commence
until curing tanks and container rooms (or the like) are completed and accepted
by the Engineer or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Where
directed by the Engineer, Employers laboratories shall be given sole access and
use of the steel container rooms and curing tanks together with all the
equipment provided under the Contract.
(5)
The Engineers permission shall be obtained before accommodation or
equipment is removed. Portable accommodation shall be moved at the times
instructed by the Engineer. Accommodation or equipment which is to be left
in position or become the property of the Employer after completion of the
Works shall be repaired, repainted and serviced as instructed by the Engineer.
The Contractor's
Site
accommodation
1.50
The Contractor's offices, sheds, stores, mess rooms, latrines and other
accommodation on the Site shall be maintained in a clean, stable and secure
condition. Living accommodation shall not be provided on the Site unless
stated in the Contract or approved by the Engineer.
Site utilities and

access
1.51
(1)
Temporary water, electricity, telephone, sewerage and drainage facilities
shall be provided for the Engineer's accommodation and for the Contractor's
use in carrying out the Works. The Contractor shall make all arrangements
with and obtain the necessary approvals from the relevant authorities for the
facilities.
(2)
Access roads and parking areas shall be provided within the Site as
required and shall be maintained in a clean, passable and stable condition with
regular suppression of dust as required in Section 25.
Transport for the

Engineer
1.52
(1) A new motor vehicle as transport for the Engineer will not always be
required. However, where a used motor vehicle will suffice, it shall not be
more than 2 years old when first brought to Site. Transport for the Engineer
shall be provided from the date of commencement of the Works unless
otherwise permitted or instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
The transport shall be for the exclusive use of the Engineer in connection
with supervision of Works and persons authorised by the Engineer and shall be
available at all times during normal working hours and at other times when the
Contractor is working or when instructed by the Engineer. The transport shall
not be used by the Contractor or other persons who are not authorised by the
Engineer.
(3)
The transport shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition
and shall be serviced regularly. Fuel, oil and other consumables, taxes,
licenses, insurances, toll charges and parking and mooring fees shall be
provided by the Contractor. The engines of land transport shall be propelled
by petrol, liquefied petroleum gas (LPG), electricity, hybrid of
petrol-electricity, or any other non-fossil fuels as approved by the Engineer.
Land transport shall be covered by fully comprehensive insurance, which
includes passenger liability and which allows the vehicle to be driven by any
driver.
(4)
A competent English-speaking driver shall be appointed and shall be
available to drive transport when required by the Engineer.
1.26
2006 Edition
(5)
Marine transport shall be equipped and manned in accordance with the
statutory requirements of the Marine Department and licensed under the
Merchant Shipping (Launches and Ferry Vessels) Regulations Chapter 281. A
qualified English-speaking coxswain shall be appointed and shall be available
when the marine transport is required by the Engineer.
(6)
Records of journeys shall be kept in logbooks provided by the Engineer.
Records shall include details of the times and purpose of journeys with
appropriate odometer readings and distances travelled. The person using the
transport or authorising the journey shall sign against the logbook entries.
Logbooks shall be presented for inspection when required by the Engineer and
all completed logbooks shall be handed over to the Engineer.
(7)
Equivalent transport shall be provided when transport is unavailable for
any reason.
(8)
The transport shall be provided until the end of the Maintenance Period
or such earlier date instructed by the Engineer.
Clearance of the
Site
1.53
Temporary Works that are not to remain on the Site after completion of the
Works shall be removed on completion of the Works or at other times instructed
by the Engineer. The Site shall be cleared and reinstated to the lines and levels
and to the condition existing before the Works started except as otherwise stated
in the Contract.
MEETINGS
Meetings
1.54
The Contractor's agent shall attend, and shall arrange for the representatives of
Sub-contractors, Government departments, transport companies, utility
undertakings and other Contractors to attend, meetings when required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in 48 hours (or such a
shorter period as agreed by the Engineer) before conducting meetings with
Government departments, transport companies, utility undertakings and/or
other Contractors and shall give the Engineer an opportunity to attend such
meetings.
PHOTOGRAPHS
Photographs
1.55
Colour photographs, including underwater photographs, showing the progress

of the Works and the quality of the materials and workmanship shall be taken at
the times and at locations instructed by the Engineer. Photographs shall be
captioned with the time, date and location. Selected prints shall be
authenticated by the Contractor and the Engineer by signing the back of the
prints and the following shall be provided for the Engineer:
(a)
A negative of each photograph,
(b)
One 3R print of each photograph,
(c)
Albums to store the photographs, and
(d)
Framed 8R prints of photographs selected by the Engineer.

1.27
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 1.1
STANDARDS
1.1.1
1.
BRITISH STANDARDS
BS4
Structural steel sections
BS 4: Part 1: 1980
Specification for hot-rolled sections
2.
BS 21: 1985
Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings

where pressure - tight joints are made on the threads
(metric dimensions)
3.
BS 29: 1976(1987)
Specification for carbon steel forgings above 150 mm

ruling section
4.
BS 65: 1991(2003)
Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings, also

flexible mechanical joints for use solely with surface
water pipes and fittings
5.
BS 144: 1990
Wood preservation using coal tar creosotes
6.
BS 146: 2002
Specification for blastfurnace cements with strength

properties outside the scope of BS EN 197-1 Amd 2/2010
7.
BS 373: 1957(1986)
Methods of testing small clear specimens of timber
8.
BS 381C: 1996
Specification for colours for identification, coding and

special purposes
9.
BS 410: 1986
Specification for test sieves
10. BS 416: 1990
Discharge and ventilating pipes and fittings, sand-cast or

spun in cast iron
11. BS 417: Part 2: 1987
Specification for galvanized low carbon steel cisterns,

cistern lids, tanks and cylinders - metric units
12. BS 427: 1990
Method for Vickers hardness test and for verification of

Vickers hardness testing machines
13. BS 434: 1984
Bitumen road emulsions (anionic and cationic)
BS 434: Part 1: 1984
Specification for bitumen road emulsions
BS 434: Part 2: 1984
Code of practice for use of bitumen road emulsions
14. BS 449: Part 2: 1969
Specification for the use of structural steel in building metric units
15. BS 534: 1990
Specification for steel pipes, joints and specials for

water and sewage
1.28
2006 Edition
16. BS 544: 1969
Specification for linseed oil putty for use in wooden

frames
17. BS 718: 1979(1985)
Specification for density hydrometers
18. BS 743: 1970
Specification for materials for damp-proof courses

Amd 4/2010
19. BS 812
Testing aggregates
BS 812: Part 1: 1975
Methods for determination of particle size and shape
BS 812: Part 2: 1995
Methods for determination of density
BS 812: Part 4: 1976
Chemical properties
BS 812: Part 101: 1984
Guide to sampling and testing aggregates
BS 812: Part 102: 1989
Methods for sampling
BS 812: Part 103
Methods for determination of particle size distribution
BS 812: Section 103.1: 1985
Sieve tests
BS 812: Section 103.2: 1989
Sedimentation test
BS 812: Part 105
Methods for determination of particle shape
BS 812: Section 105.1: 1989
Flakiness index
BS 812: Section 105.2: 1990
Elongation index of coarse aggregate
BS 812: Part 110: 1990
Methods for determination of aggregate crushing value

(ACV)
BS 812: Part 111: 1990
Methods for determination of ten per cent fines value

(TFV)
BS 812: Part 112: 1990
Method for determination of aggregate impact value

(AIV)
BS 812: Part 113: 1990
Method for determination of aggregate abrasion value

(AAV)
BS 812: Part 117: 1988
Method for determination of watersoluble chloride

salts
BS 812: Part 118: 1988
Method for determination of sulphate content
BS 812: Part 121: 1989
Method for determination of soundness
Amd 2/2008
Amd 2/2008
Amd 2/2008
20. BS 864: Part 2: 1983
Specification for capillary and compression fittings for

copper tubes
21. BS 873
Road traffic signs and internally illuminated bollards
1.29
2006 Edition
BS 873: Part 1: 1983
Road traffic signs and internally illuminated bollards.

Methods of test
22. BS 882: 1992
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for

concrete
23. BS 890:1995
Specification for building limes
24. BS 903
Physical testing of rubber
BS 903: Part A1: 1980(1988)
Determination of density
BS 903: Part A2: 1989
Determination of tensile stress-strain properties
BS 903: Part A3: 1982
Determination of tear strength (trouser, angle and

crescent test pieces)
BS 903: Part A4: 1990
Determination of compression stress-strain properties
BS 903: Part A5: 1974
Determination of tension set
BS 903: Part A6: 1969
Determination of compression set after constant strain
BS 903: Part A9: 1988
Determination of abrasion resistance
BS 903: Part A16: 1987
Determination of the effect of liquids
BS 903: Part A18: 1973(1985)
Determination of equilibrium water vapour absorption
BS 903: Part A19: 1986
Heat resistance and accelerated ageing tests
BS 903: Part A26: 1969
Determination of hardness
BS 903: Part A43: 1990
Method for determination of resistance to ozone

cracking (static strain test)
BS 903: Part C2: 1982
Determination of volume resistivity
25. BS 952
Glass for glazing
BS 952: Part 1: 1978
Classification
BS 952: Part 2: 1980
Terminology for work on glass
26. BS 970: Part 1: 1996
General inspection and testing procedures and specific

requirements for carbon, carbon manganese, alloy and
stainless steels
27. BS 1004: 1972(1985)
Specification for zinc alloys for die casting and zinc

alloy die casting
28. BS 1006: 1990
Methods of test for colour fastness of textiles and leather
29. BS 1010: Part 2: 1973
Draw-off taps and above-ground stopvalves
1.30
2006 Edition
30. BS 1014: 1975(1986)
Specification for pigments for Portland cement and

Portland cement products
31. BS 1070: 1973(1979)
Specification for black paint (tar-based)
32. BS 1052: 1980(1999)
Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering

purposes
33. BS 1155: 1986
Specification
extrusion
34. BS 1161: 1977(1984)
Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural

purposes
35. BS 1181: 1989
Specification for clay flue linings and flue terminals
36. BS 1191
Specification for gypsum building plasters
for natural
rubber
compounds
BS 1191: Part 1: 1973 (1994)
Excluding premixed lightweight plasters
BS 1191: Part 2: 1973 (1994)
Premixed lightweight plasters
for
37. BS 1199 and 1200: 1976
Specification for building sands from natural sources
38. BS 1203: 1979
Specification for synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and

aminoplastic) for plywood
39. BS 1204
Synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and aminoplastic)

for wood
BS 1204: Part 1: 1979(1991)

40. BS 1212
Specification for gap-filling adhesives

Float operated valves
BS 1212: Part 1: 1990
Specification for piston type float operated valves

(copper alloy body) (excluding floats)
BS 1212: Part 2: 1990
Specification for diaphragm type float operated valves

(copper alloy body) (excluding floats)
BS 1212: Part 3: 1990
Specification for diaphragm type float operated valves

(plastic bodied) for cold water services only (excluding
floats)
41. BS 1247: 1990
Manhole steps
42. BS 1336: 1971(1988)
Specification for knotting
43. BS 1369
Steel lathing for internal plastering and external

rendering
BS 1369: Part 1: 1987
Specification for expanded metal and ribbed lathing
1.31
2006 Edition
44. BS 1377: 1990 (as modified in

accordance with Geospec 3, entitled
Model
Specification
for
Soil
Testing, except for Clause 7.39(1)
where the year of edition remains to
be 1975)
Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes
45. BS 1387: 1985(1990)
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and

tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for
welding or for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
46. BS 1400: 1985
Specification for copper alloy ingots and copper alloy

and high conductivity copper castings
47. BS 1449-1.1: 1991
Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and

carbon-manganese plate, sheet and strip. General
specification
Amd 3/2010
Amd 3/2010
48. BS 1452: 1990
Specification for flake graphite cast iron
49. BS 1473: 1972
Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium

alloys for general engineering purposes - rivet, bolt and
screw stock
50. BS 1494: Part 2: 1967
Sundry fixings
51. BS 1610
Materials testing machines and force verification

equipment
BS 1610: Part 1: 1992
Specification for the grading of the forces applied by

materials testing machines when used in the
compression mode
52. BS 1722: Part 1: 1986
Specification for chain link fences
53. BS 1740: Part 1: 1971(1990)
Specification for wrought steel pipe fittings (screwed BS

21 R-series thread)
54. BS 1881: Part 124: 1988
Testing concrete.
concrete
Methods for analysis of hardened

Amd 2/2010
55. BS 1924: 1990
Stabilized materials for civil engineering purposes
56. BS 2000
Methods of test for petroleum and its products
57. BS 2015: 1965(1985)
Glossary of paint terms
58. BS 2451: 1963(1988)
Specification for chilled iron shot and grit
59. BS 2456: 1990
Specification for floats (plastics) for float operated

valves for cold water services
Amd 4/2010
1.32
2006 Edition
60. BS 2499
Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete

pavements
BS 2499: Part 1: 1993
Specification for joint sealants
BS 2499: Part 2: 1992
Code of practice for the application and use of joint

sealants
BS 2499: Part 3: 1993
Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete

pavements. Methods of test
61. BS 2523: 1966(1983)
Specification for lead-based priming paints
62. BS 2569: Part 1: 1964 (1988)
Protection of iron and steel by aluminium and zinc

against atmospheric corrosion
63. BS 2600
Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints

in steel
BS 2600: Part 1: 1983
Methods for steel 2 mm up to and including 50 mm

thick
BS 2600: Part 2: 1973
Methods for steel over 50 mm up to and including 200

mm thick
64. BS 2633: 1987
Specification for Class I arc welding of ferritic steel

pipework for carrying fluids
65. BS 2648: 1955
Performance requirements
laboratory drying ovens
66. BS 2760: 1973
Specification for pitch-impregnated fibre pipes and

fittings for below and above ground drainage
67. BS 2782
Methods of testing plastics
for
electrically-heated
BS 2782: Part 3:
Methods 320A to 320F: 1976
Tensile strength, elongation and elastic modulus
BS 2782: Part 3:
Method 365A: 1976(1989)
Determination of softness number of flexible plastics

materials
BS 2782: Part 3:
Method 365D: 1978(1983)
Determination of hardness of plastics and ebonite by the

ball indentation method
BS 2782: Part 4:
Methods 430A to 430D: 1983
Determination of water absorption at 23C.

Determination of water absorption at 23C with
allowance for water-soluble matter.
Determination of boiling water absorption.
Determination of boiling water absorption with
allowance for water-soluble matter.
BS 2782: Part 10: Method 1005: 1977

(U.K. national version of European
Standard EN 63: 1977 with identical
text)
Methods of testing plastics. Glass reinforced plastics.

Determination of flexural properties. Three point
method.
1.33
2006 Edition
68.
BS 2782: Part 6: Method 630A: 1994
Methods of testing plastics. Dimensional properties.

Determination of thickness by mechanical scanning of
flexible sheet
BS 2782: Part 6: Method 631A: 1993
Methods of testing plastics. Dimensional properties.

Determination of gravimetric thickness and yield of
flexible sheet
BS 2789: 1985
Specification for spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite

cast iron
69.
BS 2846: Part 3: 1975(1985)

BS 2846: Part 4: 1976(1985)
Determination of a statistical tolerance interval

Techniques of estimation and tests relating to means and
variances
70. BS 2869: Part 2: 1988
Specification for fuel oil for agricultural and industrial

engines and burners (classes A2, C1, C2, D, E, F, G and
H)
71. BS 2871: Part 1: 1971
Copper tubes for water, gas and sanitation
72. BS 2874: 1986
Specification for copper and copper alloy rods and

sections (other than forging stock)
73. BS 2910: 1986
Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded

circumferential butt joints in steel pipes
74. BS 2989: 1982
Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and

iron-zinc alloy coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and
slit wide strip
75. BS 3049: 1976
Specification. Pedestrian guard rails (metal)

Amd 4/2010
76. BS 3148: 1990
Methods of test for water for making concrete (including

notes on the suitability of the water)
77. BS 3262: Part 3: 1989
Specification for application of material to road surfaces
78. BS 3382: Part 1 & 2: 1961
Cadmium on steel components.

components
79. BS 3410: 1961
Specification for metal washers for general engineering

purposes
80. BS 3416: 1991 with AMD 7288
Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold

application, suitable for use in contact with potable
water
81. BS 3468: 1986
Specification for austenitic cast iron
82. BS 3505: 1986
Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

(PVC-U) pressure pipes for cold potable water
Amd 2/2008
1.34
Zinc on steel
2006 Edition
83. BS 3506: 1969
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe for industrial

uses
84. BS 3600: 1976(1988)
Specification for dimensions and masses per unit length

of welded and seamless steel pipes and tubes for
pressure purposes
85. BS 3601: 1987
Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with

specified room temperature properties for pressure
purposes
86. BS 3661
Methods for the determination of the colour fastness of

textiles
87. BS 3690: Part 1: 1989
Specification for bitumens for roads and other paved

areas
BS 3690: Part 2: 1989
Specification for bitumens for industrial purposes
88. BS 3692: 1967
Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts,

screws and nuts. Metric units
89. BS 3698: 1964(1979)
Specification for calcium plumbate priming paints
90. BS 3892: Part 1: 1997
Specification for pulverized-fuel ash for use with

Portland cement.
91. BS 3900
Methods of test for paints
BS 3900: Part A2: 1983
Examination and preparation of samples for testing
BS 3900: Part A6: 1996
Paints and varnishes. Determination of flow time by use

of flow cups
BS 3900: Part C2: 1994
Paints and varnishes. Surface-drying test. Ballotini

method
BS 3900: Part C3: 1990
Paints and varnishes. Determination of through-dry state

and through-dry time. Method of test
BS 3900: Part C5: 1992
Determination of film thickness
BS 3900: Part C6: 1983
Determination of fineness of grind
BS 3900: Part D4: 1974 (2000)
Comparison of contrast ratio (hiding power) of paints of

the same type and colour
BS 3900: Part D5: 1980
Measurement of specular gloss of non-metallic paint

films at 200, 600 and 850
BS 3900: Part E1: 1995
Bend test (cylindrical mandrel)
BS 3900: Part E2: 1992
Scratch test
BS 3900: Part E10: 1979(1989)
Mechanical tests on paint films - Pull-off test for

adhesion
1.35
2006 Edition
BS 3900: Part F8: 1976
Paints and varnishes. Determination of resistance to

humid atmospheres containing sulphur dioxide
BS 3900: Part G6: 1989 (2000)
Assessment of resistance to fungal growth
92. BS 3921: 1985
Specification for clay bricks
93. BS 3923: Part 1: 1986
Methods for manual examination of fusion welds in

ferritic steels
BS 3923: Part 2: 1972
Automatic examination of fusion welded butt joints in

ferritic steels
Amd 4/2010
94. BS 3987: 1974
Specification for anodic oxide coatings on wrought

aluminium for external architectural applications
95. BS 3998: 1989
Recommendations for tree work
96. BS 4019: 1993
Rotary core drilling equipment
97. BS 4027: 1996
Specification for Sulphate-resisting Portland Cement
98. BS 4043: 1989
Recommendations for transplanting root-balled trees
99. BS 4052: 1987
Method for determination of thickness loss of textile

floor coverings under dynamic loading
100. BS 4098: 1975 (1996)
Method for the determination of thickness, compression

and recovery characteristics of textile floor coverings
101. BS 4072: 1987
Wood preservation by means of copper/chromium/

arsenic compositions
102. BS 4102:1998
Specification for steel wire for general fencing purposes
103. BS 4147: 1980(1987)
Specification for bitumen-based hot-applied coating

materials for protecting iron and steel, including suitable
primers where required
104. BS 4168: Part 1: 1981
Specification for hexagon socket head cap screws
105. BS 4190: 2001
Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts,

screws and nuts
106. BS 4211: 1987
Specification for ladders for permanent access to

chimneys, other high structures, silos and bins
107. BS 4223: 1989 (1996)
Methods for determination of constructional details of

textile floor coverings with yarn pile
108. BS 4232: 1967
Specification for surface finish of blast-cleaned steel for

painting
109. BS 4246: 1996
Specification for high slag blastfurnace cement

Amd 2/2010
1.36
2006 Edition
110. BS 4254: 1983
Specification for two-part polysulphide-based sealants
111. BS 4320: 1968
Specification for metal washers for general engineering

purposes. Metric series
112. BS 4345: 1968(1986)
Specification for slotted angles
113. BS 4346
Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC

pressure pipes
BS 4346: Part 1: 1969
Injection moulded unplasticized PVC fittings for solvent

welding for use with pressure pipes, including potable
water supply
BS 4346: Part 2: 1970
Mechanical joints
unplasticized PVC
BS 4346: Part 3: 1982
Specification for solvent cement
and
fittings,
principally
of
114. BS 4360: 1986
Specification for weldable structural steels
115. BS 4393: 1969(1985)
Specification for tin or tin-lead coated copper wire
116. BS 4395
Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and

associated nuts and washers for structural engineering
BS 4395: Part 1: 1969
General grade
BS 4395: Part 2: 1969
Higher grade bolts and nuts and general grade washers
BS 4395: Part 3: 1973
Higher grade bolts (waisted shank), nuts and general

grade washers
117. BS 4428: 1991
Code of Practice for general landscape operations

(excluding hard surfaces)
118. BS 4447: 1973(1990)
Specification for the performance of prestressing

anchorage for post-tensioned construction
119. BS 4449: 1997(2001)
Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement

of concrete
120. BS 4466: 1989
Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and

cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete
121. BS 4482: 1985
Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the

reinforcement of concrete
122. BS 4483: 1998
Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of

concrete
123. BS 4486: 1980
Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and processed

high tensile alloy steel bars for the prestressing of
concrete
1.37
2006 Edition
124. BS 4504: Section 3.1: 1989
Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN

designated) - Specification for steel flanges
125. BS 4514: 1983
Specification for unplasticized PVC soil and ventilating

pipes, fittings and accessories
126. BS 4515: 1984
Specification for welding of steel pipelines on land and

offshore
127. BS 4550: 1Part 1: 1978
Methods of testing cement Sampling
128. BS 4551: 1980
Methods of testing mortars, screeds and plasters
129. BS 4568
Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric

threads of ISO form electrical installations
BS 4568: Part 1: 1970
Steel conduit, bends and couplers
BS 4568: Part 2: 1970(1988)
Fittings and components
130. BS 4570: 1985
Specification for fusion welding of steel castings
131. BS 4576: Part 1: 1989
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) rainwater

goods and assessories - Half-round gutters and pipes of
circular cross-section
132. BS 4604
Specification for the use of high strength friction grip

bolts in structural steelwork.
133. BS 4604: Part 1: 1970
Use of High Strength Friction Grip Bolts in Structural

Steelwork. Metric Series Part 1: General Grade
BS 4604: Part 2: 1970
Use of High Strength Friction Grip Bolts in Structural

Steelwork. Metric Series Part 2: Higher Grade (Parallel
Shank)
134. BS 4620: 1970(1988)
Specification for rivets for general engineering purposes
135. BS 4622: 1970(1983)
Specification for grey iron pipes and fittings
136. BS 4652: 1971(1979)
Specification for metallic zinc-rich priming paint

(organic media)
137. BS 4660: 2000
Specification for thermoplastics ancillary fittings of

nominal sizes 110 and 160 for below ground gravity
drainage and sewerage
138. BS 4662: 1970(1989)
Specification for boxes for the enclosure of electrical

accessories
139. BS 4677: 1984
Specification for arc welding of austenitic stainless steel

pipework for carrying fluids
140. BS 4682: Part 1: 1971
Determination of extension under mechanical action
1.38
2006 Edition
141. BS 4682: Part 3: 1981 (1996)
Determination of dimensional changes after exposure to

heat
142. BS 4756: 1971(1983)
Specification for ready mixed aluminium priming paints

for woodwork
143. BS 4772: 1988
Ductile piping and fittings
144. BS 4790: 1987 (1996)
Method for determination of the effects of a small

source of ignition on textile floor coverings (hot metal
nut method)
145. BS 4797: 1978
Method of test for textilesdetermination of resistance to

certain insect pests
146. BS 4848
Specification for hot-rolled structural steel sections
BS 4848: Part 2: 1975
Hollow sections
BS 4848: Part 4: 1972(1986)
Equal and unequal angles
BS 4848: Part 5: 1980
Bulb flats
147. BS 4865: Part 1: 1989
Specification for non-metallic flat gaskets (including

gaskets for flanges to BS 4772)
148. BS 4870: Part 1: 1981
Specification for approval testing of welding procedures

- Fusion welding of steel
149. BS 4872: Part 1: 1982
Specification for approval testing of welders when

welding procedure approval is not required - Fusion
welding of steel
150. BS 4873: 1986
Specification for aluminium alloy windows
151. BS 4921: 1988
Specification for sheradized coatings on iron or steel
152. BS 4933: 1973
Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk

head bolts and screws with hexagon nuts
153. BS 4942: 1981
Short link chain for lifting purposes
154. BS 5075: Part 1: 1982
Specification for accelerating admixtures, retarding

admixtures and water reducing admixtures
BS 5075: Part 3: 1985
Specification for superplasticizing admixtures
155. BS 5135: 1984
Specification for arc welding or carbon and carbon

manganese steels
156. BS 5150: 1990
Specification for cast iron gate valves
157. BS 5154: 1989
Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and

check, check and gate valves
1.39
2006 Edition
158. BS 5163: 1986
Specification for predominantly key-operated cast iron

gate valves for waterworks purposes
159. BS 5212: 1990
Cold-applied
pavements
160. BS 5215: 1986
Specification for one-part gun grade polysulphide-based

sealants
161. BS 5252F: 1976(2004)
Framework for colour co-ordination for building

purpose: colour matching fan
162. BS 5255: 1989
Specification for thermoplastics waste pipe and fittings
163. BS 5262:1991
Code of practice for external renderings
164. BS 5268: Part 2: 1988
Structural use of timber - Code of practice for

permissible stress design, materials and workmanship
165. BS 5284: 1976
Methods. Sampling and testing mastic asphalt and

pitchmastic used in building
166. BS 5289: 1976(1983)
Code of practice. Visual inspection of fusion welded

joints
167. BS 5325: 2001
Installation of textile floor coverings. Code of practice
168. BS 5385-1:1995
Wall and floor tiling. Code of practice for the design

and installation of internal ceramic and natural stone
wall tiling and mosaics in normal conditions
169. BS 5385: Part 2: 1991
Code of Practice for the design and installation of

external ceramic wall tiling and mosaics
170. BS 5395: Part 1: 1977(1984)
Code of practice for the design of straight stairs
171. BS 5400
Steel, concrete and composite bridges
joint
sealant
systems
for
concrete
BS 5400: Part 2: 1978
Specification for loads
BS 5400: Part 4: 1990
Code of practice for design of concrete bridges
BS 5400: Part 6: 1980
Specification for materials and workmanship, steel
BS 5400: Part 9: 1983
Bridge bearings
BS 5400: Section 9.2: 1983
Specification for materials, manufacture and installation

of bridge bearings
172. BS 5481: 1977(1989)
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for

gravity sewers
173. BS 5492:1990
Code of practice for internal plastering
174. BS 5493: 1977
Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel

structures against corrosion
1.40
2006 Edition
175. BS 5572: 1994
Code of practice for sanitary pipework
176. BS 5573: 1978
Code of practice for safety precautions in the

construction of large diameter boreholes for piling and
other purposes
177. BS 5589: 1989
Code of practice for preservation of timber
178. BS 5606: 1990
Guide to accuracy in building
179. BS 5756: 1980(1985)
Specification for tropical hardwoods graded for

structural use
180. BS 5808: 1991 (1996)
Specification for underlays for textile floor coverings
181. BS 5835:Part 1:1980.
Compactability test for graded aggregates.
182. BS 5837: 1991
Guide for trees in relation to construction
183. BS 5896: 1980
Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for

the prestressing of concrete
184. BS 5911
Precast concrete pipes, fittings and ancillary products
Amd 2/2010
BS 5911: Part 2: 1982
Specification for inspection chambers and street gullies
BS 5911: Part 3: 1982
Specification for pipes and fittings with ogee joints

Amd 4/2010
BS 5911: Part 114: 1992
Specification for porous pipes

Amd 4/2010
185. BS 5911-1: 2002
Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products.

Specification for unreinforced and reinforced concrete
pipes (including jacking pipes) and fittings with
flexible joints
186. BS 5911-3: 2002
Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products.

Specification for unreinforced and reinforced concrete
manholes and soakaways
Amd 4/2010
187. BS 5930: 1981
Code of practice for site investigations
188. BS 5931: 1980
Code of practice for machine laid in situ edge details for

paved areas
189. BS 5950: Part 2: 1985
Specification for materials, fabrication and erection: hot

rolled sections
190. BS 5980: 1980
Specification for adhesive for use with ceramic tiles and

mosaics
1.41
2006 Edition
191. BS 5996: 1980
Methods for ultrasonic testing and specifying quality

grades of ferritic steel plate
192. BS 6072: 1981(1986)
Method for magnetic particle flaw detection
193. BS 6089: 1981
Guide to assessment of concrete strength in existing

structures
Amd 3/2010
194. BS 6150: 1982
Code of practice for painting of buildings
195. BS 6262: 1982
Code of practice for glazing for buildings
196. BS 6323: 1982(1990)
Specification for seamless and welded steel tubes for

automobile, mechanical and general engineering
purposes
Amd 3/2010
BS 6323: Part 3: 1982(1990)
Specific requirements for hot finished seamless steel

tubes
Amd 3/2010
197. BS 6349: Part 1: 1984
Code of practice for maritime structures - General

criteria
198. BS 6362: 1990
Specification for stainless steel tubes suitable for

screwing in accordance with BS 21 `Pipe threads for
tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made
on the threads'
199. BS 6405: 1984
Specification for non-calibrated short link steel chain

(Grade 30) for general engineering purposes: class 1 and
2
200. BS 6431
Ceramic floor and wall tiles
BS 6431: Part 1: 1983
Specification for classification and marking, including

definitions and characteristics
BS 6431: Part 2: 1984
Specification for extruded ceramic tiles with a low water

absorption (E < 3%). Group A1
BS 6431: Part 3
Extruded ceramic tiles with a water absorption of 3% <

E < 6%. Group A11a
BS 6431: Part 3: Section 3.1: 1986
Specification for general products
BS 6431: Part 3: Section 3.2: 1986
Specification for products (terre cuite, cotto, baldosin

catalan)
BS 6431: Part 4
Extruded ceramic tiles with a water absorption of 6% <

E < 10%. Group A11b
1.42
2006 Edition
BS 6431: Part 4: Section 4.1: 1986
Specification for general products
BS 6431: Part 4: Section 4.2: 1986
Specification for specific products (terre cuite, cotto,

baldosin catalan)
BS 6431: Part 10: 1984 (1996)
Method for determination of dimensions and surface

quality
BS 6431: Part 11: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of water absorption
BS 6431: Part 12: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of modulus of rupture
BS 6431: Part 13: 1986 (1996)
Method for determination of scratch hardness of surface

according to Mohs
BS 6431: Part 14: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of resistance to deep abrasion.

Unglazed tiles
BS 6431: Part 15: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of linear thermal expansion
BS 6431: Part 17: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of crazing resistance. Glazed

tiles
BS 6431: Part 18: 1983 (1996)
Method for determination of chemical resistance.

Unglazed tiles
BS 6431: Part 19: 1984 (1996)
Method for determination of chemical resistance.

Glazed tiles
BS 6431: Part 20: 1984 (1996)
Method for determination of resistance to surface

abrasion. Glazed tiles
201. BS 6443: 1984
Method for penetrant flaw detection
202. BS 6463
Quicklime, hydrated lime and natural calcium carbonate
BS 6463: Part 1: 1984
Methods of sampling
BS 6463: Part 2: 1984
Methods of chemical analysis
BS 6463: Part 4: 1987
Methods of test for physical properties of hydrated lime

and lime putty
203. BS 6510: 1984
Specification for steel windows, sills, window boards

and doors
204. BS 6558: 1985
Optical fibres and cables
205. BS 6566
Plywood
206. BS 6577: 1985
Specification for mastic asphalt for building (natural

rock asphalt aggregate)
207. BS 6657: 1986
Guide for prevention of inadvertent initiation of

electro-explosive devices by radio-frequency radiation
1.43
2006 Edition
208. BS 6681: 1986
Specification for malleable cast iron
209. BS 6699: 1992
Specification for ground granulated blastfurnace slag

for use with Portland cement
Amd 2/2010
Precast, unreinforced concrete paving blocks.
Requirements and test methods
210. BS 6717:2001
211. BS 6700: 1987
Specification for design, installation, testing and

maintenance of services supplying water for domestic
use within buildings and their cartilages
212. BS 6744:2001
Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in

concrete. Requirements and test methods
213. BS 6779: Part 1: 1998
Highway parapets for bridges and other structures.

Specification for vehicle containment parapets of metal
construction
214. BS 6920
Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact

with water intended for human consumption with regard
to their effect on the quality of the water
BS 6920: Part 1: 1990
Specification
BS 6920: Part 2
Methods of test
BS 6920: Section 2.1: 1990
Samples for testing
BS 6920: Section 2.2
Taste of water
BS 6920: Subsection 2.2.1: 1990
General method of test
BS 6920: Subsection 2.2.2: 1990
Method of testing tastes imparted to water by hoses
BS 6920: Subsection 2.2.3: 1990
Method of testing tastes imparted to water by hoses for

conveying water for food and drink preparation
BS 6920: Section 2.3: 1990
Appearance of water
BS 6920: Section 2.4: 1988(1994)
Growth of aquatic microorganisms
BS 6920: Section 2.5: 1990
The extraction of substances that may be of concern to

public health
BS 6920: Section 2.6: 1990
The extraction of metals
BS 6920: Part 3: 1990
High temperature tests
215. BS 6925: 1988
Specification for mastic asphalt for building and civil

engineering (limestone aggregate)
216. BS 6949: 1988
Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold

application, excluding use in contact with potable water
1.44
2006 Edition
217. BS 7263: 1990
Precast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and

quadrants
BS 7263: Part 1:1990
Specification
BS 7263: Part 1: 2001
Precast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and

quadrants. Precast, unreinforced concrete paving flags
and complementary fittings. Requirements and test
methods
218. BS 8000:1989
Workmanship on Building Sites
219. BS 8004: 1986
Code of practice for foundations
220. BS 8005: Part 1: 1987
Guide to new sewerage construction
221. CP 144
Roof coverings
222. CP 144: Part 4: 1970
Mastic asphalt. Metric units
1.1.2
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

STANDARDS
1.
ASTM C 117-95
Test method for materials finer than 75-m sieve in mineral

aggregates by washing
2.
ASTM C 127-88
Test method for specific gravity and absorption of coarse

aggregate
3.
ASTM C 128-88
Test method for specific gravity and absorption of fine

aggregate
4.
ASTM C 131-81(1987)
Test method for resistance to degradation of small-size

coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles
Machine
5.
ASTM C 136-96a
Method for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates
6.
ASTM C 188-84
Test method for density of hydraulic cement
6a. ASTM C 535-81
Test method for resistance to degradation of large-size

coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los
Angeles Machine
7.
ASTM C 939-87
Test method of flow of grout for preplaced-aggregate

concrete
8.
ASTM C940-98a
Standard test method for expansion and bleeding

of freshly mixed grouts for preplaced-aggregate
concrete in the laboratory
Amd 2/2008
1.45
2006 Edition
9.
ASTM C 1028-89
Standard test method for determining the static coefficient of

friction of ceramic tile and other like surfaces by the
horizontal dynamometer pull-meter method
10. ASTM D 5-86
Test method for penetration of bituminous materials
11. ASTM D 113-86
Test method for ductility of bituminous materials
12. ASTM D 140-88
Method for sampling bituminous materials
13. ASTM D 242-85
Specification for mineral filler for bituminous paving

mixtures
14. ASTM D 546-88
Method for sieve analysis of mineral filler for road and

paving materials
15. ASTM D790-2000
Measurement/Properties of internal lining for repair of

pipelines and culverts: Flexural properties
16. ASTM D 854-83
Test method for specific gravity of soils
17. ASTM D 946-82
Specification for penetration-graded asphalt cement for use

in pavement construction
18. ASTM D 979-87
Methods for sampling bituminous paving mixtures
19. ASTM D 562-81 (1997)
Standard test method for consistency of paints measuring

krebs unit (KU) viscosity using a stormer-type viscometer
20. ASTM D 1559-82
Test method for resistance to plastic flow of bituminous

mixtures using Marshall apparatus
21. ASTM D 1754-87
Test method for effect of heat and air on asphaltic materials

(thin-film over test)
22. ASTM D 2000-86
Classification system for rubber products in automobile

applications
23. ASTM D 2027-76(1986)
Specification for cutback asphalt (medium-curing type)
24. ASTM D 2041-95
Test method for theoretical maximum specific gravity of

bituminous paving mixtures
25. ASTM D 2042-81(1985)
Test method for solubility of asphalt materials in

trichloroethylene
26. ASTM D 2171-88
Test method for viscosity of asphalts by vacuum capillary
27. ASTM D 2172-95
Test method for quantitative extraction of bitumen from

bituminous paving mixtures
28. ASTM D 2240
Standard test method for rubber property - durometer

hardness
29. ASTM D 2486-96
Standard test method for scrub resistance of wall paints
1.46
2006 Edition
30. ASTM D 2726-96a
Test method for bulk specific gravity of compacted

bituminous mixtures using saturated surface-dry specimens
31. ASTM D 3203-94
Test method for percent air voids in compacted dense and

open bituminous paving mixtures
32. ASTM D 3289-85
Test method for specific gravity or density of semi-solid and

solid bituminous materials by nickel crucible
33. ASTM D 3359
Standard test methods for measuring adhesion by

tape test
34. ASTM D 4329
Standard practice for fluorescent UV exposure of plastics
35. ASTM D 6307-05
Standard test method for asphalt content of hot-mix asphalt

by ignition method
Amd 1/2007
36. ASTM G 53-88
Practice for operating light and water-exposure apparatus

(fluorescent UV-condensation type) for exposure of
non-metallic materials
37. ASTM D4956-05
Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for

Traffic Control
1.1.3
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION

OFFICIALS (AASHTO) STANDARD
AASHTO Designation M252-81
1.1.4
Standard specification for corrugated polyethylene drainage

tubing
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
STANDARDS/
1.
AWWA C 203-86
Coal tar enamel protective coatings for steel water pipes
2.
ANSI/AWWA C210-97
Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and

Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for
Steel Water Pipelines
3.
ANSI/AWWA C213-01
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and

Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
4.
ANSI A118.6: 1992
Ceramic tile grouts
1.1.5
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE HKSAR

CS1: 1990 (Current version)
Testing Concrete
1.47
2006 Edition
CS2: 1995 (Current version)
1.1.6
SWEDISH STANDARDS
SIS 05 59 00
1.1.7
1.1.8
Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
Surface preparation standard for painting steel surfaces
AMERICAN PUBLIC HEALTH ASSOCIATION (APHA) STANDARDS

APHA 3500-K-C, 18th Edition (1992)
Potassium, inductively coupled plasma method
APHA 3500-Na-C, 18th Edition (1992)
Sodium, inductively coupled plasma method
APHA 4500-Cl-B, 18th Edition (1992)
Chloride, Argentometric method
APHA 4500-SO42-C, 18th Edition

(1992)
Sulphate, gravimetric method with ignition of residue
EUROPEAN STANDARDS ADOPTED AS BRITISH STANDARDS (BS EN)
1.
BS EN: 196-1: 1995
Method of testing of Cement Part 1: Determination of

strength
2.
BS EN: 196-2: 1995
Method of testing of Cement Part 2: Chemical analysis

of cement
3.
BS EN: 196-3: 1995

setting time and soundness
BS EN: 196-6: 1992

fineness
BS EN: 196-7: 1992
Method of testing of Cement Part 7: Methods of taking

and preparing samples of cement
BS EN: 196-21: 1992

the chloride, carbon dioxide and alkali content of cement
BS EN 197-1: 2000
Cement Part 1: Composition, specifications and

conformity criteria for common cements
4.
BS EN 287: Part 1: 1992
Approval testing of welders for fusion welding Steels
5.
BS EN 459: Part l: 2001
Building lime: definitions, specification and conformity

criteria
6.
BS EN 485: Part 1: 1994
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate.

Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
1.48
2006 Edition
BS EN 485: Part 2: 2004

Mechanical properties
BS EN 485: Part 3: 2003

Tolerances on dimensions and form for hot-rolled products
BS EN 485: Part 4:1994

Tolerances on shape and dimensions for cold-rolled
products
7.
BS EN 545: 2002
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for

water pipelines
8.
BS EN 571: Part 1: 1997
Non-destructive
principles
9.
BS EN 598: 1995

sewerage applications
10. BS EN 681-1: 1996
testing.
Penetrant
testing.
General
Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint

seals used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized
rubber
Amd 4/2010
11. BS EN 754: Part 1:1997
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Cold drawn rod/bar

and tube. Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
BS EN 754: Part 2:1997

and tube. Mechanical properties
BS EN 754: Part 3:1996

and tube. Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
BS EN 754: Part 4:1996

and tube. Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
BS EN 754: Part 5:1996

and tube. Rectangular bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 754: Part 6:1996

and tube. Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 754: Part 7:1998

and tube. Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 754: Part 8:1998

and tube. Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and
form
12. BS EN 755: Part 1: 1997
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube

and profiles. Technical conditions for inspection and
delivery
1.49
2006 Edition
BS EN 755: Part 2: 1997

and profiles. Mechanical properties
BS EN 755: Part 3: 1996

and profiles. Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 755: Part 4: 1996

and profiles. Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and
form
BS EN 755: Part 5: 1996

and profiles. Rectangular bars, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BS EN 755: Part 6:1996

and profiles. Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BS EN 755: Part 7:1998

and profiles. Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BS EN 755: Part 8:1998

and profiles. Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions
and form
BS EN 755: Part 9:2001

and profiles. Profiles, tolerances on dimensions and form
13. BS EN 934: Part 2: 2009
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Concrete

admixtures. Definitions, requirements, conformity,
marking and labeling
BS EN 934: Part 4: 2009
Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Admixtures for

grout for prestressing tendons. Definitions, requirements,
conformity, marking and labelling
Amd 2/2010
14. BS EN 969: 1996 (2000)

gas pipelines
15. BS EN 970: 1997
Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual

examination
16. BS EN 1008:2002
Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling,

testing and assessing the suitability of water, including
water recovered from processes in the concrete industry, as
mixing water for concrete
17. BS EN 1011: Part 4: 2000
Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic

materials. Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
18. BS EN 1097-2: 1998
Test for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates

Part 2 : Methods for the determination of resistance to
fragmentation
1.50
2006 Edition
19. BS EN 1342: 2001
Setts of natural stone for external paving. Requirements

and test methods
20. BS EN 1344:2002
Clay pavers. Requirements and test methods
21. BS EN 1346:1999
Adhesives for tiles. Determination of open time
22. BS EN 1348:1999
Adhesives for tiles. Determination of tensile

adhesion strength for cementitious adhesives
23. BS EN 1423:1998
Road marking materials. Drop on materials. Glass beads,

antiskid aggregates and mixtures of the two
24. BS EN 1436:1998
Road marking materials. Road marking performance for

road users
25. BS EN 1561: 1997
Founding. Grey cast irons
26. BS EN 1714: 1998
Non-destructive examination of welded joints. Ultrasonic

examination of welded joints
27. BS EN 1871:2000
Road marking materials. Physical properties
28. BS EN 10002: Part 1: 2001
Tensile testing of metallic materials. Method of test at

ambient temperature
29. BS EN 10025: 1993: 2004
Hot rolled products of non alloy structural steels
30. BS EN 10029: 1991
Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and

mass for hot rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above
31. BS EN 10045: Part 1: 1990
Charpy impact test on metallic materials. Test method (Vand U- notches)
32. BS EN 10048: 1997
Hot rolled narrow steel strip. Tolerances on dimensions

and shape
Amd 3/2010
33. BS EN 10051: 1991 + A1: 1997
Continuously hot-rolled uncoated plate, sheet and strip of

non-alloy and alloy steels. Tolerances on dimensions and
shape
Amd 3/2010
34. BS EN 10084: 2008
Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions
35. BS EN 10085: 2001
Nitriding steel. Technical delivery conditions
36. BS EN 10087: 1999
Free cutting steels. Technical delivery conditions for

semi-finished products, hot rolled bars and rods
37. BS EN 10088-1:2005
Stainless steels. List of stainless steels
BS EN 10088-2: 2005
38. BS EN 10095: 1999
Amd 4/2010
Amd 3/2010
Amd 3/2010
Amd 3/2010
Amd 3/2010
Stainless steels. Technical delivery conditions for

sheet/plate and strip of corrosion resisting steels for
general purposes
Amd 3/2010
Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys
1.51
Amd 3/2010
2006 Edition
39. BS EN 10137: 1996
Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural

steels in the quenched and tempered or precipitation
hardened conditions
40. BS EN 10149-3: 1996
Specification for hot-rolled flat products made of high

yield strength steels for cold forming. Delivery conditions
for normalized or normalized rolled steels
Amd 3/2010
41. BS EN 10223: 1998
Steel wire and wire products for fences
42. BS EN 10244-2: 2001
Steel wire and wire products. Non-ferrous metallic coatings

on steel wire. Zinc or zinc alloy coatings
43. BS EN 10250-4: 2000
Open steel die forgings for general engineering purposes.

Stainless steels
Amd 3/2010
44. BS EN 10293: 2005
Steel castings for general engineering uses
45. BS EN 10296-1: 2003
Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general

engineering purposes. Technical delivery conditions.
Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes
Amd 3/2010
BS EN 10296-2: 2005
Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general

engineering purposes. Technical delivery conditions.
Stainless steel
Amd 3/2010
Amd 4/2010
46. BS EN 10298:2005
Steel tubes and fittings for onshore and offshore pipelines.

Internal lining with cement mortar
47. BS EN 12004:2001
Adhesives for tiles. Definitions and specifications
48. BS EN 12373: Part 1: 2001
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodizing. Method for

specifying decorative and protective anodic oxidation
coatings on aluminium
49. BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001
Fixed, vertical road traffic signs - Part: 1 Fixed Signs
50. BS EN 13707: 2004
Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Reinforced bitumen

sheets for roof waterproofing. Definitions and
characteristics
Amd 4/2010
51. BS EN 22063: 1994
Metallic and Other Inorganic Coating-Thermal

Spraying-Zinc, Aluminium and Their Alloys (F)
52. EN 63: 1977 (same as BS 2782: Part

10: Method 1005: 1977)
Glass reinforced plastics. Determination of flexural

properties. Three point method.
53. PD 970: 2005
Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering

purposes. Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese
and alloy hot worked or cold finished steels
Amd 3/2010
1.1.9 EUROPEAN STANDARDS (EN) and/or INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION

FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) STANDARDS ADOPTED AS BRITISH
1.52
2006 Edition
STANDARDS (BS EN ISO)

1.
BS EN ISO 178: 2003
Measurement/Properties of internal lining for repair of

pipelines and culverts: Flexural properties
2.
BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 (Replaces

former BS 729)
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel

articles. Specifications and test methods
3.
BS EN ISO 3506-1: 2009
Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel

fasteners. Bolts, screw and studs
Amd 3/2010
BS EN ISO 3506-2: 2009
Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel

fasteners. Nuts
Amd 3/2010
4.
BS EN ISO 4624:2003
Paints and varnishes.
5.
BS EN ISO 8492: 2004
Metallic materials tube flattening test
6.
BS EN ISO 8501-1:2001
Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints

and related products. Visual assessment of surface
cleanliness.
Rust grades and preparation grades of
uncoated steel substrates and of steel substrates after
overall removal of previous coatings
7.
BS EN ISO 8502-3:2000

and related products -- Tests for the assessment of surface
cleanliness.
Assessment of dust on steel surfaces
prepared for painting (pressure-sensitive tape method)
BS EN ISO 8502-6:2000

and related products -- Tests for the assessment of surface
cleanliness. Extraction of soluble contaminants for
analysis -- The Bresle method
BS EN ISO 8503-1:1995

and related products. Surface roughness characteristics
of blast-cleaned steel substrates. Specifications and
definitions for ISO surface profile comparators for the
assessment of abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces
BS EN ISO 8503-2:1995

of blast-cleaned steel substrates. Method for the grading
of surface profile of abrasive blast-cleaned steel.
Comparator procedure
BS EN ISO 8503-3:1995

of blast-cleaned steel substrates.
Method for the
calibration of ISO surface profile comparators and for the
determination of surface profile. Focusing microscope
procedure
8.
1.53
Pull-off test for adhesion
2006 Edition
9.
BS EN ISO 8503-4:1995

of blast-cleaned steel substrates.
Method for the
calibration of ISO surface profile comparators and for the
determination of surface profile. Stylus instrument
procedure
BS EN ISO 9445: 2006
Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel narrow strip, wide

strip, plate/sheet and cut lengths. Tolerances on
dimensions and form
Amd 3/2010
10. BS EN ISO 9934: Part 1: 2001
Non-destructive testing.
General principles
Magnetic particle testing.
11. BS EN ISO 10601: 2008
Micaceous iron oxide pigments for paints. Specifications

and test methods
Amd 4/2010
12. BS EN ISO 11124-1:1997

and related products.
Specifications for metallic
blast-cleaning abrasives.
General introduction and
classification
13. BS EN ISO 11124-2:1997

blast-cleaning abrasives. Chilled-iron grit
BS EN ISO 11124-3:1997

blast-cleaning abrasives. High-carbon cast-steel shot
and grit
BS EN ISO 11124-4:1997

blast-cleaning abrasives. Low-carbon cast-steel shot
14. BS EN ISO 12944: 1998
Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel

structures by protective paint systems.
15. BS ISO 34-1: 2004
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tear

strength. Trouser, angle and crescent test pieces
16. BS ISO 37: 2005
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of

tensile stress-strain properties
17. BS ISO 48: 2007
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of

hardness (hardness between 10 IRHD and 100 IRHD)
18. BS ISO 188: 2007
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Accelerated ageing

and heat resistance tests
19. BS ISO 1431: 2004
Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Resistance to ozone

cracking. Static and dynamic strain testing
20. BS ISO 1817: 2005
Rubber, vulcanized. Determination of the effect of liquids
21. BS ISO 14654: 1999
Epoxy-coated steel for the reinforcement of concrete
Amd 4/2010
1.54
2006 Edition
22. BS ISO 14656:1999
1.1.10
1.1.11
Epoxy powder and sealing material for the coating of

steel for the reinforcement of concrete
JAPANESE INDUSTRIAL STANDARDS (JIS)

JIS Z 1902: 2000
Petrolatum tapes for corrosion protection
JIS A 6910 1988
Quality tests for multi-layer acrylic paint
INTERNATIONAL
STANDARDS
ORGANIZATION
FOR
STANDARDIZATION
(ISO)
1.
ISO 1183: 1999
Plastics - Methods for determining the density of

non-cellular plastics
2.
ISO 178: 2001
Plastics - Determination of flexural properties
3.
ISO 4591:1992
Plastics - Film and sheeting - Determination of average

thickness of a sample, and average thickness and yield of
a roll, by gravimetric techniques (gravimetric thickness)
4.
ISO 4593:1993
Plastics - Film and sheeting - Determination of thickness

by mechanical scanning
5.
ISO 9001:2000
Quality management systems - Requirements
1.1.12
1.1.13
WATER INDUSTRY SPECIFICATION, WATER RESEARCH CENTRE

WIS 4-34-04:1995 issue 2
Specification for renovation of gravity sewers by lining

with crude-in-place pipes
WIS 4-52-01: 1992
Polymeric anti-corrosion (barrier) coatings
National Water Council, UK

Manual
of
Sewer
Condition
Classification, 4th Ed, 2003
1.1.14
Coding system for recording of results
AUSTRALIAN/NEW ZEALAND STANDARDS (AS/NZS)

AS/NZS 4456.2:1997
Masonry units and segmental pavers

Methods of test. Method 2: Assessment of mean and standard
deviation
1.55
2006 Edition
AS/NZS 4456.14:1997
1.1.15
1.
Masonry units and segmental pavers - Methods of test.

Method 14: Determining water absorption properties
JTG F40-2004
(Technical Specifications for

Construction of Highway Asphalt Pavements)
Amd 2/2007
1.1.16 CANADIAN STANDARD Amd 2/2010

CSA-A23.5-M86 Amd 2/2010
Supplementary Cementing Materials
1.56
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 1.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL CONTAINER ROOM
General
1.2.1
As a reference, a standard steel container room of nominal size 6000 mm x

2500 mm x 2350 mm may accommodate up to a maximum of five standard
curing tanks (see Appendix 1.3 Clause 1.3.1(2)).
Equipment
1.2.2
Each steel container room shall be equipped with the following:

(a)
A security door-lock.
(b)
Windows with security metal grilles.
(c)
Fluorescent lighting.
(d)
Air-conditioner with heating and cooling facilities that is capable of

keeping the room temperature at 25C 5C.
(e)
Adequate number of power sockets for operating the curing tanks.
(f)
Water supply.
(g)
Drainage outlets for connecting to the drainage valves and overflow

system of the curing tanks.
1.57
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 1.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR CURING TANK
General
1.3.1
(1) The requirements for a curing tank shall be as stated in Appendix A of

CS1.
(2) As a reference, a standard curing tank of nominal size 1650 mm x 860
mm x 510 mm has a capacity to accommodate about sixty-four number of
150 mm concrete cubes.
(3) For curing tanks of different non-standard sizes, the number of curing
tanks required may be estimated on the basis of the capacity for a standard
curing tank of equivalent volume at the discretion of the Engineer, who may
require appropriate adjustments in the pump and heater capacities.
Equipment
Maintenance
1.3.2
1.3.3
(4)
Each curing tank shall be accessible for operation and maintenance.
(5)
At least one stand-by curing tank shall be provided at all times.
Each curing tank shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant material of

adequate strength such as galvanized sheet steel to BS EN ISO 1461:1999 for
hot-dip galvanized coating or BS 2569 for flame sprayed metal coating, fully
welded on all seams and equipped with the following accessories:
(a)
A lockable insulated lid (or cover) properly numbered.
(b)
A recirculating water pump and a stand-by pump, both of a waterproof

type and with capacity not less than 1000 litres per hour, earthed and
fitted internally at one end of the tank drawing water through a pipe
from the bottom to the diagonally opposite top of the tank at least 25
mm above the water level to stimulate efficient mixing of the water by
free falling.
(c)
A thermostatically controlled electric immersion heater and a stand-by

heater, both with power of not less than 3 kW and connected through a
temperature sensor for continual control of the water temperature at
27C 3C.
(d)
A set of three removable lower racks.
(e)
A drainage valve and an overflow system.
(f)
A steel stand supporting the water tank.
(g)
Minimum/maximum thermometers for measuring water temperature.
(h)
A switch panel.
Each curing tank shall be cleaned at regular intervals and the water in each
tank be changed at least once a month in accordance with CS1 or as directed
by the Engineer. In order to ensure adequate circulation of water and to
facilitate the removal of test cubes from the curing tank, a gap of at least 15
mm shall be provided between the test cubes and the sides of the tank.
1.58
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 2
SITE CLEARANCE
2.1
2006 Edition
2.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 2
SITE CLEARANCE
GENERAL
General requirements
2.01
The works and materials specified in Clauses 2.02 and 2.03 shall comply
with the sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this Section.
Pipes and manholes to

be abandoned
2.02
The abandonment of pipes and manholes shall comply with Section 5.
Earthworks
2.03
Earthworks, including blasting, shall comply with Section 6.
SITE CLEARANCE
Demolition
2.04
(1)
Areas adjacent to demolition works shall be protected from
damage resulting from the demolition.
(2)
Structures that are to be demolished shall be surveyed by the
Contractor and the result given to the Engineer, before demolition starts.
(3)
Particulars of the proposed methods of carrying out demolition
works, handling and sorting of recyclable materials and disposal of
construction and demolition waste shall be submitted to the Engineer for
information at least 14 days before the demolition starts.
The proposed methods shall enhance site safety, maximize recovery of
recyclable materials and minimize generation of construction and
demolition waste. The recommendations of the Code of Practice for
Demolition of Buildings (Year 2004), issued by the Buildings
Department, shall be followed.
Pipes and cables
2.05
The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the necessary
approvals from the relevant authorities for disconnecting utilities inside
and outside the Site. The ends of disconnected utilities shall be made
good and sealed; the positions of the ends shall be marked with marker
posts or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Trees
2.06
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of preservation and

protection of existing trees stipulated in Section 26 before commencing
site clearance.
Reinstatement
2.07
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, areas affected by site
clearance shall be reinstated as stated in Clause 2.07(2) to (5).
(2)
Fine fill material shall be deposited and compacted in voids that
are left in the ground.
(3)
Holes that are left in structures and pavements shall be made good
using material similar to that in the adjoining area.
2.3
2006 Edition
(4)
The ends of fences, walls, structures, utilities and other items shall
be made good in such a manner that the affected parts will not corrode or
deteriorate, and will remain stable.
(5)
Straining posts shall be fixed at the end of strained fences that have
been cut, and the fences shall be restrained.
Materials and
equipment for re-use
and storage
2.08
(1)
Items that are to be re-used or taken to store shall be dismantled
and removed by a suitable method so as to avoid damage or minimise the
damage if this is unavoidable. The items shall be cleaned before re-use
or taking to store.
(2)
Items that are to be re-used in the Works shall be kept in storage
areas provided by the Contractor. Storage areas shall be on levelled,
well drained and maintained hard-standing ground to facilitate cleansing
and minimize dust generation.
(3)
Items that are to be taken to the Employers store shall be
delivered by the Contractor.
(4)
Materials or equipment which are to be re-used or taken to store
and which are damaged due to the Contractor's negligence shall be
repaired by the Contractor by a method agreed by the Engineer.
Materials or equipment that are lost or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
not capable of being repaired satisfactorily shall be replaced by the
Contractor. Except for items which are to be re-used or taken to store,
demolished items, trees, shrubs, vegetation, boulders, debris, rubbish and
other items arising from site clearance shall be disposed of by the
Contractor and shall become the property of the Contractor when they are
removed from the Site.
2.4
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 3
3.1
2006 Edition
3.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 3
LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND
ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
GENERAL
General
requirements
3.01
The works and materials specified in Clauses 3.02 to 3.05 shall comply
Site clearance
3.02
Site clearance shall comply with Section 2. During site clearance,

where appropriate and as required by the Engineer, topsoil shall be
stripped and stockpiled by a method agreed by the Engineer and in an
area designated or agreed by the Engineer.
Earthworks
3.03
Earthworks shall comply with Section 6.
Landscape
hardworks
3.04
Landscape hardworks shall comply with Sections 4, 5, 11, 14, 16, 18, 22
and 24.
Geotechnical works
3.05
Geotechnical works shall comply with Section 7.
Weather and ground

conditions
3.06
Soiling, cultivation, planting and other similar landscape softworks and

establishment works operations shall not be carried out at times when
weather or ground conditions may, in the opinion of the Engineer,
adversely affect the permanent works.
Use of chemicals
3.07
Chemicals shall not be used for landscape softworks and establishment

works unless approved by the Engineer. Chemicals shall be used,
stored, mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Containers for chemicals shall be disposed of off
Site by methods agreed by the Engineer.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Landscape softworks
3.08
Landscape softworks are all works of a horticultural nature, and shall

include the placing, cultivation and preparation of topsoil and subsoil
layers, and the supply and planting of trees, shrubs and other plant
material, and any work essentially associated with these.
Landscape
hardworks
3.09
Landscape hardworks are the tree grills, tree guards and tree rings and
any other items stated as such in the Contract.
Establishment works
3.10
Establishment works are the regular inspections, cultivation, watering,

fertilizing and other operations specified to be performed during the
period stated in the Contract for such inspections and operations.
3.3
2006 Edition
MATERIALS
Seedling trees
Whip trees
Light standard trees
3.11
3.12
3.13
Seedling trees shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
Aged between 1 and 2 years,
(b)
A single slender stem,
(c)
A well developed vigorous root system,
(d)
Total height above soil level of at least 150 mm but not

exceeding 900 mm,
(e)
Grown and supplied in a container at least 75 mm in

diameter and 150 mm deep, or a tube at least 60 mm in
diameter and 150 mm long, and
(f)
Free of any pest, fungi and disease.
Whip trees shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
Aged between 2 and 3 years,
(b)
A single central stem well furnished with side branches

according to species,
(c)
A well developed vigorous root system,
(d)
Total height above soil level exceeding 900 mm but not

exceeding 2000 mm,
(e)

diameter and 200 mm deep, and
(f)
Free of any pest, fungi and disease.
Light standard trees shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A sturdy straight stem at least 1500 mm high from the root

collar to the lowest branch,
(b)
Stem diameter of at least 25 mm but not exceeding 45 mm

measured at a height of 1 m from the root collar,
(c)
According to species, either a well balanced branching head

or a well defined straight and upright leader with branches
growing out from the stem with reasonable symmetry,
(d)
Total height above the root collar exceeding 2000 mm but

not exceeding 3000 mm,
(e)
A rootball at least 300 mm in diameter and 300 mm deep,
3.4
2006 Edition
(f)
Standard trees
Heavy standard trees
Semi-mature trees
3.14
3.15
3.16
When container-grown trees are required, grown in a

container at least 350 mm in diameter and 400 mm deep, and
free of pests, fungi and disease.
Standard trees shall have the following characteristics:

(a)

(b)
Stem diameter exceeding 45 mm but not exceeding 75 mm

(c)

growing out from the stem with reasonable symmetry, and a
minimum length of 600 mm,
(d)

(e)
(f)
When container grown trees are required, grown in a

container at least 500 mm in diameter and 500 mm deep,
and
(g)
Free of pests, fungi and disease.
Heavy standard trees shall have the following characteristics:

(a)

(b)
Stem diameter exceeding 75 mm but not exceeding 150 mm

(c)

(d)

(e)
(f)
When container grown trees are required, grown in a

container at least 750 mm in diameter and 600 mm deep and
(g)
Semi-mature trees shall have all the following characteristics:

(a)

3.5
2006 Edition
(b) Stem diameter exceeding 150 mm measured at a height of 1

m from the root collar,
Small shrubs
Large shrubs
Conifers
3.17
3.18
3.19
(c)

(d)
Total height above the root collar exceeding 6000 mm,
(e)
(f)
A root system previously undercut a minimum of one year

before lifting, to encourage compact fibrous growth, and
(g)
Small shrubs shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A minimum of three vigorous, one-year old shoots with a

well balanced shape and bushy habit,
(b)
A well developed, vigorous root system,
(c)
Total height above soil level at least 300 mm but not

exceeding 600 mm,
(d)

(e)
Large shrubs shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A minimum of five vigorous, one-year old shoots, with a

well balanced shape and bushy habit to produce a diameter
2/3 of the height,
(b)
(c)
Total height above soil level exceeding 600 mm,
(d)

(e)
Conifers shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A well developed, upright stem well furnished with

vigorous leaf or needle bearing side shoots with good
symmetry,
(b)
(c)
For small conifers, total height above the root collar at least
1500 mm but not exceeding 2500 mm,
3.6
2006 Edition
(d) For large conifers, total height exceeding 2500 mm but not
exceeding 3500 mm,
Palms
Bamboos
Herbaceous plants
3.20
3.21
3.22
(e)
Grown and supplied in a container with dimensions not less

than the dimensions stated in the Contract, and
(f)
Palms shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A well developed, upright habit and vigorous fronds with

good symmetry,
(b)
(c)
For small palms, a minimum height from soil level to the

base of the lowest frond as stated in the Contract and a
rootball at least 300 mm in diameter and 300 mm deep, and
(d)
For medium palms, a minimum height from soil level to the

rootball at least 500 mm in diameter and 450 mm deep.
(e)
For large palms, a minimum height from soil level to the

rootball at least 700 mm in diameter and 600 mm deep, and
(f)
Bamboos shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
A well developed, vigorous root system, with a healthy

rhizome capable of shooting fresh culm,
(b)
For single stem species, a single shoot or trunk with total

height above soil level not less than the height stated in the
Contract,
(c)
For multi-stemmed species, a clump of at least four stems

with total height above soil level not less than the height
stated in the Contract,
(d)
Grown and supplied in container at least 450 mm in

(e)
Herbaceous plants shall have the following characteristics:

(a)
Well developed vigorous shoots in number not less than that

(b)
(c)
Total height above soil level or diameter of plant for clumps

not less than the height or diameter stated in the Contract,
3.7
2006 Edition
Ground covers
Climbers
3.23
3.24
(d)
Healthy well developed bulbs, corms, rhizomes or tubers,
(e)

(f)
Ground cover plants shall have the following characteristics:(a)
Well developed, vigorous shoots in number not less than

that stated in the Contract,
(b)
(c)
Total height above soil level at least 150 mm,
(d)

(e)
Climbers shall have all the following characteristics:(a)
A minimum of four vigorous, one-year old shoots at least

600 mm long unless otherwise specified,
(b)
(c)

(d)
Containerised plants
3.25
Containerised plants shall be grown in open ground and then lifted and
placed in a rigid or semi-rigid container of dark colour; plants shall be
left to grow in the containers for at least 3 months before being delivered
to the Site. The dimensions of containers shall not be less than the
relevant rootball or container dimensions stated in Clauses 3.11 to 3.24.
Containerised plants shall be well watered before despatch from the
nursery and shall remain in the containers until required for planting.
Grass seed
3.26
(1)
All seed shall be covered by an appropriately numbered seed
analysis report or certificate. The numbered reports or certificates shall
always refer to the number on the seed containers. The origin of all
seed and the name of the supplier shall be stated on the seed containers.
(2)
The quality of grass seed shall be gauged by purity, germination
percentage and freedom from weeds. The total weed seed content shall
not exceed 0.5% by mass and the total content of other crop seed shall
not exceed 1% by mass. The germination capacity of each constituent
of the mixture over a seven-day test period shall not be less than 80%,
and the purity of the mixture shall not be less than 90%.
(3)
The basic minimum grass seed mix for hydroseeding shall be as
follows, unless otherwise specified: (a)
Between April and August inclusive, the minimum seed mix

shall total 25 g/sq m and shall consist of: -
3.8
2006 Edition
Cynodon dactylon
Paspalum notatum
Other species from the list below
Chloris gayana
Eragrostis curvula (2% maximum)
Eremochloa ophiuroides
Cenchrus echinatus
(b)
Between September and March inclusive, the minimum

seed mix shall total 30 g/sq m and shall consist of :Cynodon dactylon
Paspalum notatum
Lolium perenne
Turf
3.27
(1)
13 15 g/sq m
8 10 g/sq m
0 4 g/sq m
15 g/sq m
10 g/sq m
5 g/sq m
Turf shall possess the following characteristics:(a)
Free of sticky clay, weeds, impurities, pests, fungi and

disease with grass of even density, green colour and capable
of healthy growth;
(b)
With a sufficiently fibrous root system to hold together

during handling;
(c)
Size of 500 mm x 300 mm with a minimum thickness of 50

mm and with an even thickness of grass sward and soil
thickness.
(2)
Turf species shall be one of the following species unless
otherwise specified:
Axonopus compressus
Cynodon dactylon
Eremochloa ophiuroides
Zoysia japonica
Zoysia matrella
Sprigs
3.28
Sprigs shall consist of Axonopus compressus, Cynodon dactylon,

Paspalum paspaloides and other stoloniferous grasses. Axonopus
compressus shall not be used on slopes exceeding 15 to the horizontal.
Sprigs shall be at least 100 mm long and shall be free of pests, fungi and
disease.
Plant name
3.29
In the event that botanical name, English common name and Chinese
common name are given for any plant specified, the botanical name
shall always take precedence.
Soil-mix
3.30
(1)
Soil-mix shall be ready and evenly mixed before delivery onto
the Site.
(2)
Soil-mix shall consist of friable, completely decomposed granite
and soil conditioner in the proportions of 3:1 by volume. Soil-mix
shall be free of grass or weed growth, sticky clay, salt, chemical
contamination, and any other deleterious materials and stones exceeding
25 mm diameter in any direction, and shall possess the following
properties:
3.9
2006 Edition
(a)
PH value between 5.5 and 7.0;
(b)
Organic matter more than 10%;
(c)
Nitrogen content more than 0.2%;
(d)
Extractable phosphorous (P) content more than 45 mg/kg;
(e)
Extractable potassium (K) content more than 240 mg/kg;
(f)
Extractable magnesium (Mg) content more than 80 mg/kg;
(g)
Soil texture content:

Sand (0.05 - 2.0 mm):
at the range of 20% - 75%;
Silt (0.002 - 0.05 mm):
at the range of 5% - 60%;
Clay (less than 0.002 mm): at the range of 5% - 25%.
Soil conditioner
3.31
(1)
Soil conditioner shall be organic material and shall be free of
weed growth, impurities, foreign materials, contamination and
substances injurious to plants.
Soil conditioner shall have the
following properties:
(a)
PH value between 5.0 and 7.5,
(b)
Moisture content measured in accordance with Clause

6.78(2) between 30% and 50%,
(c)
Fine and freely flowing consistency,
(d)
Stable composition,
(e)
Not capable of raising the temperature of the treated soil

more than 50C above the temperature of the untreated
soil,
(f)
Not giving off toxic nor obnoxious fumes,
(g)
Organic matter content not less than 85% (dry matter), and
(h)
Carbon: nitrogen ratio between 20 and 55.
Mulch
3.32
Mulch shall be a composted organic material either as stated in

Clause 3.31 for soil conditioner or granulated tree bark or wood
shavings, with a nominal size of 5 mm 20 mm.
Mulch for
hydroseeding
3.33
Mulch for hydroseeding shall be a proprietary type approved by the

Engineer and shall be a hydroseeding mulch manufactured from
cellulose or paper based materials.
Fertilizer
3.34
(1)
Pre-planting fertilizer shall be 15:9:15:2 (nitrogen/phosphorus/
potassium/magnesium) slow release granular fertilizer or an equivalent
approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Post-planting fertilizer shall be 12:12:17 (nitrogen/phosphorus/
potassium) granular fertilizer or an equivalent approved by the Engineer.
3.10
2006 Edition
(3)
Hydroseeding fertilizer shall be 15:15:15 (nitrogen/phosphorus/
potassium) or an equivalent approved by the Engineer.
(4)
Phosphate fertilizer shall be triple superphosphate powder or an
equivalent approved by the Engineer.
(5)
Fertilizer shall be supplied in sealed waterproof bags.
Soil binder
3.35
Soil binder shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and

shall consist of a binding medium applied in aqueous suspension by
spraying onto the surface of the soil to stabilise and condition the soil.
The binding agent shall not be injurious to plant growth.
Stakes, ties and guys
3.36
(1)
Metal stakes shall be 40 mm x 40 mm x 4 mm thick galvanized
mild steel angle painted with one coat of approved primer and one coat
of approved finishing coat before installation. Total length of stake
shall be 1800 mm or as specified to suit the height of the plant being
supported. All sharp edges of the metal stakes shall be removed to
avoid damage to the plant The primer and finishing coat shall be
approved by the Engineer before its application.
(2)
Bamboo stakes shall be bamboo poles of minimum 50 mm in
diameter. Total length of stake shall be 1500 mm or as specified to suit
the height of the plant being supported.
(3)
Ties shall be of dark colour and shall be one of the following
which shall be capable of adjustment after fixing, and shall be fitted with
flexible rubber or plastic sleeves to prevent chafing, rubbing or abrasion
of the plant:
(a)
5 mm diameter rot-proof rope,
(b)
3 mm overall diameter plastic coated wire,
(c)
3 mm diameter stainless steel braided wire with 20 mm

adjustable stainless steel screw clamp.
(4)
Guys shall be of dark colour and shall be one of the following
which shall be fitted with a flexible rubber or plastic sleeve to prevent
chafing, rubbing or abrasion of the plant, and a 100 mm long stainless
steel turnbuckle for adjustment:
(a)
8 mm diameter rot-proof rope,
(b)
4 mm overall diameter plastic coated wire,
(c)
4 mm to 6 mm diameter stainless steel braided wire with 20

mm adjustable stainless steel screw clamp.
(5)
Guying stakes shall be 25 mm x 25 mm x 5 mm thick galvanized
mild steel angle with 5 mm to 10 mm diameter hole drilled 30 mm from
the top before galvanizing, painted with one coat of approved primer
and one coat of approved finishing coat before installation. The primer
and finishing coat shall be approved by the Engineer before its
application.
3.11
2006 Edition
(6)
Clear unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic hosing 10
mm to 25 mm in diameter shall be used as guy cover and trunk
protection hosing or flexible rubber pad 2 mm thick and 150 mm wide
with length enough to wrap twice round the trunk shall be used as trunk
protection.
Protective fabric
material
3.37
Protective fabric material for hydroseeding shall be a proprietary type of

degradable fabric approved by the Engineer. The fabric shall not
degrade within 100 days of application or until the specified grass cover
has been established.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of seed
mixture, turf, sprigs,
soil conditioner,
soil-mix and water
3.38
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for landscape
softworks and establishment works shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval:
(a)
Origin of trees, shrubs, turves, sprigs and other plant

materials,
(b)
Details of nurseries,
(c)
A certificate or a numbered seed analysis report for each

seed mixture issued and covering results of tests carried out
within 6 months before the date of use of the seed showing
the species and variety of the seed, the date of testing and
including results of tests for:
- Percentage germination of pure seed in a fixed time under
standard laboratory conditions; and
- Percentage composition by weight, including details of
impurities,
(d)
A certificate of analysis for soil conditioner including details

of the composition and results of tests for the properties
stipulated for compliance in Clause 3.31(1) and the
following properties,
- Organic carbon content (using loss of ignition Ashing
Method of testing); and
- Nitrogen content (using Kjeldahl Method),
(e)
A certificate of analysis for soil-mix including details of the

composition and results of tests for the properties stipulated
for compliance in Clause 3.30(2), and
(f)
Source of water for watering.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days
before the relevant work starts.
3.12
2006 Edition
Particulars of
hydroseeding
3.39
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods
for hydroseeding shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Species and rate of application of grass seed,
(b)
Type and rate of application of fertilizer, mulch and soil

binder,
(c)
Type and colour of dye,
(d)
Type of protective fabric material, and
(e)
Details of the company employed to carry out the

hydroseeding and the equipment to be used.
(2)
before hydroseeding starts.
Samples of materials
3.40
(1)
Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval at the same time as particulars of the material
are submitted and before confirming orders, and delivery to and use on
the Site:
(a)
0.5 kg sample of each seed mixture,
(b)
A sample of 5 turves (each turf 500 mm x 300 mm with a

minimum thickness of 50 mm),
(c)
A sample of 10 sprig individuals of each species,
(d)
0.027 m sample of soil-mix,
(e)
0.027 m sample of soil conditioner,
(f)
0.027 m sample of each mulch,
(g)
0.5 kg sample of each fertilizer,
(h)
300 mm sample of each type of tree stake,
(i)
A sample of tree tie,
(j)
300 mm sample of tree guy,
(k)
A sample of tree guying stake, and
(l)
A sample of tree guy cover.
3
3
3
(2)
Samples of materials for landscape works and establishment
works may be inspected by the Engineer at nurseries and other sources
before the materials are delivered to the Site.
3.13
2006 Edition
HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

Handling and storage
of rootballed stock
3.41
Plants grown in open ground shall be well watered before lifting and
shall be lifted in such a manner that the specified rootball is obtained
with minimum disturbance to the roots. The rootball shall be securely
wrapped immediately after lifting to prevent loss of soil and moisture
using hessian, straw or other material agreed by the Engineer. The
wrapping material shall not be removed until the plant is required for
planting.

of container grown and
containerised stock
3.42
Container grown and containerised stock shall be well watered before

despatch from the nursery and shall remain in the containers until
required for planting.
Transport of plants
3.43
Plants shall be wrapped and protected to prevent mechanical damage

during lifting and transport. The trunk from soil level to the lower
branches of trees in the light standard, standard, heavy standard and
semi-mature categories shall be securely wrapped to prevent moisture
loss using hessian, straw or other material agreed by the Engineer. All
plant materials that are to be lifted and transported while in leaf shall be
covered with tarpaulin during transport to reduce excessive
transpiration. All materials used for protection of plants during
transport shall be removed before planting or as directed or agreed by
the Engineer.
Storage of plants
3.44
(1)
Plants shall be protected from exposure to conditions that may
affect the plant adversely.
(2)
Plants shall be protected from damage and damaged plants shall
not be used in the permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer. If
the Engineer permits damaged plants to be used, damaged material shall
be pruned as stated in Clause 3.86.
Storage of trees and

shrubs
3.45
Trees and shrubs which are not immediately planted in their permanent
positions shall be supported upright on level ground, regularly watered
and maintained in good condition.

of turf and sprigs
3.46
Turf and sprigs shall not be lifted when waterlogged or very dry and
shall be packed to avoid drying out. Turf and sprigs shall be stored by
spreading out and shall not be stacked. Turf and sprigs shall be kept
moist and in good condition and shall be delivered and laid within 36
hours after lifting.
Storage of grass seed
3.47
Grass seed shall be stored in bags off the ground in a clean, dry,
well-ventilated location free of vermin. Prolonged storage shall be
carried out under controlled conditions of temperature and humidity.
Storage of fertilizer
3.48
Fertilizer shall be stored off the ground in sealed waterproof bags and
shall be protected from exposure to conditions that may adversely affect
the fertilizer.
3.14
2006 Edition
PRE-PLANTING WORKS
Preparatory works
3.49
Before soiling or planting for landscape softworks and establishment

works starts, preparatory works shall be carried out by one or more of
the treatments stated in Clauses 3.50 to 3.57, as appropriate or as stated
elsewhere in the Contract.
Cleaning ground
3.50
Weeds, rubbish, litter, stones exceeding 25 mm diameter and all

deleterious material shall be removed from the surface of the ground.
Vegetation shall be cleared without using herbicide unless permitted by
the Engineer. If permitted, the herbicide shall be a proprietary type
approved by the Engineer and shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Ripping
3.51
The ground shall be ripped by drawing a tine through the soil to a depth of
300 mm at 500 mm centres. All obstructions to cultivation or deleterious
material brought to the surface shall be removed and voids left by the
ripping operation shall be filled with soil of the same type as existing.
Ground at a slope exceeding 15 to the horizontal shall not be ripped.
Contaminated ground
3.52
Ground that is contaminated by oil, chemicals or other substances,

which in the opinion of the Engineer may affect plant growth adversely,
shall be excavated to 500 mm below the contaminated depth and beyond
the extent of the contamination. Voids left by excavation shall be filled
with uncontaminated soil of the same type as existing.
Soiling
3.53
Soil-mix shall be spread and levelled to the depth stated in the Contract.
The depth of uncompacted soil-mix shall be sufficient to allow the level
of the area to comply with finished levels after natural settlement has
taken place. Placing and spreading of soil mix shall not take place
during periods of heavy rain, nor when the soil-mix is saturated. After
soiling, the Contractor shall take all necessary preventative measures to
control erosion and siltation and prevent the area from compaction.
Cultivation
3.54
(1)
Cultivation is the controlled decompaction of the upper layer
of soil to provide an evenly textured, friable planting medium with
sufficient air penetration and water retention for favourable plant
growth.
(2)
Cultivation of areas stated in the Contract or instructed by the
Engineer shall be carried out in accordance with the following or as
stated elsewhere in the Contract:
Minimum depth Pre-planting

fertilizer
of cultivation
(mm)
(g/m2)
Thickness of pre-planting
fertilizer and soil
conditioner over the
surface before cultivation
(mm)
150
25
100
300
50
200
450
75
300
3.15
2006 Edition
(3)
Cultivated soil shall be hand picked to remove any stones
exceeding 25 mm diameter and all other deleterious materials. All
such materials shall be disposed of from the Site.
Scarifying
3.55
Scarifying shall be carried out by loosening the soil to a depth of

between 10 mm and 20 mm using a pronged implement such as a rake
but without turning the soil.
Protection of prepared
ground
3.56
(1)
Prepared ground shall be protected from compaction, erosion and
siltation and shall not be used by construction plant, other vehicles or
pedestrian traffic.
(2)
Prepared ground that becomes compacted, eroded, silted up or
damaged shall be replaced or dealt with by methods agreed by the
Engineer.
Removal of material
3.57
Weeds, rubbish, litter, stones exceeding 25 mm diameter and deleterious

material removed during ground preparation shall be disposed of by the
Contractor by methods agreed by the Engineer.
PLANTING
General
3.58
(1)
Planting for landscape softworks and establishment works shall
be carried out as stated in Clauses 3.58(2) and 3.59 to 3.70.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, planting shall be
carried out between 1st March and 30th September except as stated in
Clause 3.06. If planting is permitted at other times, particulars of
changes to the materials and methods for planting shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
Use of excavated
material
3.59
Material excavated from planting pits, which complies with the

specified requirements for decomposed granite, may be used for
soil-mix. Material excavated from planting pits, which does not
comply with the specified requirements for decomposed granite, shall be
disposed of by the Contractor and shall be replaced by material which
complies with the specified requirements for decomposed granite.
Planting
3.60
(1)
Rootballs of light standard trees, standard trees, heavy standard
trees, semi-mature trees, conifers and palms shall be thoroughly soaked
with water for several hours before planting. The soil in the container
or rootball shall be moist and cohesive. Containers or rootball
wrapping shall not be removed until the time of planting and the rootball
shall not be disturbed by loosening or breaking.
(2)
Each plant shall be placed upright in the pit and set at the same
level as planted in the nursery or container.
(3)
Soil-mix shall be deposited and compacted in layers around the
rootball until level with the surrounding ground in such a manner that
the rootball is not disturbed. Plants shall be well watered to soak the
rootball and soil-mix immediately after planting.
3.16
2006 Edition
Staking, tying and

guying
3.61
(1)
Stakes shall be driven into the ground after the pit has been
excavated and before planting in such a manner that the rootball and
aerial parts of the plant are not damaged. The stake shall be secure
after driving and shall not be higher than 30% of the overall height of
the plant.
(2)
Guys and sleeves shall be fixed in such a manner that chafing,
rubbing and abrasion of the plant is prevented and shall be secured to a
well driven steel stake or other anchor. Each plant shall be fitted with
three guys secured at a point not higher than 60% of the overall height
of the plant. Turnbuckles shall be adjusted as necessary after planting.
(3)
Bamboo stakes shall be used in locations stated in the Contract
and where in the opinion of the Engineer it is impracticable to use steel
stakes or guys. Bamboo stakes shall be securely tied with "scaffold
tie" to form a tripod not exceeding 60% of the overall height of the
plant. The plant shall be secured to the tripod as stated in Clauses
3.61(1) and (2).
Mulching
3.62
After planting and watering, mulch shall be spread to a consolidated

thickness of at least 50 mm on areas of bare ground as stated in the
Contract.
Notch planting of
seedlings
3.63
Notch planting of seedlings shall be carried out by forming a notch

making two cuts at approximately 90 using a hand held pick or spade
with the apex pointing up any slope; the notch shall be sufficiently deep
to accommodate the root system of the seedling. The notch shall be
opened on the second cut to receive the plant and shall then be pushed
firmly back into place.
Pit planting of
seedlings, shrubs,
whips, climbers,
ground covers and
herbaceous plants
3.64
(1)
The size of pits for seedlings, shrubs, whips, climbers, ground
covers and herbaceous plants shall be 100 mm greater than the rootball
or container diameter and 50 mm deeper than the rootball or container.
50 g of pre-planting fertilizer shall be mixed into the soil-mix.
(2)
Each of the whips, which require to be staked as specified or as
instructed by the Engineer, shall be secured using one bamboo stake as
Clause 3.36(2) with one tie as Clause 3.36(3) or using other securing
method as approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
remove the staking or other securing measures from the Site at the end of
the period for establishment works or when instructed by the Engineer.
Pit planting of light

standard trees and
standard trees
3.65
(1)
The size of pits for light standard trees and standard trees shall be
200 mm greater than the rootball or container diameter and 100 mm
deeper than the rootball or container. The bottom of the pit shall be
broken up to a depth of 150 mm. 150 g of pre-planting fertilizer shall
be mixed into the soil-mix.
(2)
Each of the light standard trees and standard trees, which require
to be staked as specified or as instructed by the Engineer, shall be
secured using one of the following methods as specified or using other
securing method as approved by the Engineer:
3.17
2006 Edition
(a)
Three bamboo stakes as Clause 3.36(2) with two ties as

Clause 3.36(3),
(b)
Two metal stakes as Clause 3.36(1) with two ties as Clause

3.36(3).
(3)
remove the staking or other securing measures from the Site at the end of
the period for establishment works or when instructed by the Engineer.
Pit planting of
heavy standard tree
and semi-mature
trees
3.66
(1)
The size of pits for heavy standard trees and semi-mature trees
shall be 300 mm greater than the rootball or container diameter and
150 mm deeper than the rootball or container. The bottom of the pit
shall be broken up to a depth of 150 mm. 250 g of pre-planting
fertilizer shall be mixed into the soil-mix.
(2)
Each of the heavy standard trees not exceeding 4 m overall
height, which require to be staked as specified or as instructed by the
Engineer, shall be secured using three metal stakes as Clause 3.36(1)
with two ties as Clause 3.36(3) or using other securing method as
(3)
Each of the heavy standard trees exceeding 4 m overall height
and the semi-mature trees, which require to be staked as specified or as
instructed by the Engineer, shall be secured using three guys as Clause
3.36(4) with three guying stakes as Clause 3.36(5) or using other
securing method as approved by the Engineer.
(4)
remove the staking or guying or other securing measures from the Site at
the end of the period for establishment works or when instructed by the
Engineer.
Pit planting of
bamboo, conifers
and palms
3.67
Bamboos, conifers and palms shall be planted in accordance with the

following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Pit planting on
slopes
3.68
Height not exceeding

2000 mm
: Clause 3.64
Height exceeding 2000 mm

and not exceeding 2500 mm
: Clause 3.65
Height exceeding 2500 mm
: Clause 3.66
Pits excavated for planting on or adjacent to slopes shall not be left open
during wet weather.
GRASSING
Hydroseeding
3.69
(1)
Hydroseeding for landscape softworks and establishment works
shall be carried out as stated in Clauses 3.69(2) and 3.70 to 3.75.
3.18
2006 Edition
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, hydroseeding shall
be carried out between 1st March and 30th September except as stated in
Clause 3.06. If hydroseeding is permitted at other times, particulars of
changes to the materials and methods for hydroseeding shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Hydroseeding cover
3.70
Hydroseeding shall achieve a cover by grass species of at least 90% of

the surface area of each 10 m2 of the area to be hydroseeded not mote
than 100 days after the area has been hydroseeded. The grass cover
shall be healthy, vigorous and free of perennial and other weeds. The
method of determining the cover shall be as stated in Clauses 3.94 to
3.96.
Surface conditions
for hydroseeding
3.71
The surface to be hydroseeded shall be finished to a coarse open

textured surface and shall not be smooth or glazed. Finishing work on
slopes by machines shall be carried out across the slope. Vehicle track
marks and bucket teeth marks shall not be left parallel to the line of
maximum gradient of the slope.
Application of
hydroseeding
3.72
(1)
Hydroseeding shall be carried out using a proprietary type of
hydroseeding equipment unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Materials for hydroseeding shall be well mixed on the Site in the
hydroseeding equipment immediately before spraying, ensuring that
seed is not damaged.
(3)
At the time of spraying, fertilizer shall be applied at a minimum
rate of 60 g/m3. Mulch shall be applied at a minimum rate of 200 g/m2.
Soil binders shall be applied at the rate recommended by the
manufacturer, modified as necessary to suit conditions in Hong Kong.
Dye shall be used to demonstrate that adequate cover has been achieved,
unless in the opinion of the Engineer runoff or water-courses will be
coloured to an unacceptable level. Where used, dye shall be applied at
a maximum rate of 0.05 g/m2.
Amd 1/2007
(4)
The hydroseeding mixture shall be constantly agitated during
spraying to keep it homogeneous and avoid blockage to pipes.
Measures shall be taken during application to ensure that material is not
lost due to runoff.
(5)
Walking on areas that have been hydroseeded shall be restricted
to access for fixing protective material and for patching up.
Protective material
3.73
Areas that have been hydroseeded shall be covered with protective

material within 2 days of hydroseeding. The material shall be spiked
or stapled to the soil surface with a minimum of 150 mm overlap.
On sloping ground, the material shall be laid along the greatest slope and
shall be made to fully adhere to the hydroseeded surface by sprinkling
with water with an approved spray. Care must be taken not to sprinkle
excessive water onto the slope causing erosion of the slope. The
material shall also be applied to all areas to be subsequently re-sprayed.
remove the material from the Site at 10 weeks after placement or when
3.19
2006 Edition
Patching up
3.74
(1)
Immediately after germination and a general greening of the
hydroseeded area is apparent, areas where in the opinion of the Engineer
germination has been unsuccessful shall be re-sprayed. Areas affected
by repairs to washout and gullies and other erosion on slopes shall be
re-sprayed.
(2)
Areas that in the opinion of the Engineer are not accessible or are
too small for the use of a hydroseeder may be patched up by
broadcasting seed. The area shall be lightly scarified with a rake or
similar implement and the seed and fertilizer shall be broadcast over the
area at a rate of not less than 75 g/m2. The seed shall be covered by
lightly working into the surface or by spreading sufficient soil to just
cover the seed. Broadcast seeding shall be carried out using Cynodon
dactylon, Lolium perenne or Axonopus compressus.
Post-planting
fertilizer
3.75
Post-planting fertilizer shall be applied between 2 months and 9 months

after application of hydroseeding and, unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer, shall be applied between 1st March and 30th September.
Turfing
3.76
(1)
Turf shall not be laid on slopes exceeding 15 to the horizontal.
(2)
The area to be turfed shall be cultivated by applying pre-planting
fertilizer at a uniform rate of 40 g/m2 and shall then be raked and
consolidated to the required level. The finished level after turfing shall
be 25 mm above adjacent kerbs, paving, covers, frames and other
hardware.
(3)
The turves shall be laid on the prepared soil and shall be firmed
into position using wooden beaters; the beaters shall be frequently
scraped clean of accumulated soil or mud. A top dressing of soil-mix
shall be applied and well worked into joints and spaces. Irregularities
in finished levels due to variation in turf thickness or uneven
consolidation of the soil shall be adjusted.
(4)
Turfed areas shall be watered immediately after turf has been laid
and as often as is necessary to ensure establishment. If shrinkage
occurs and the joints open, soil-mix shall be worked in and well
watered.
(5)
Sprigging
3.77
Turf edges and margins shall be laid with whole turves.
(1)
Sprigging shall not be used on slopes exceeding 45 to the
horizontal.
(2)
The area to be sprigged shall be scarified before sprigging and sprigs
shall be evenly spread over the area at approximately 50 mm centres. The
area shall be topdressed with soil-mix to just cover the sprigs and
2
pre-planting fertilizer shall be applied at a uniform rate of 40 g/m .
Completion of
turfing and
sprigging
3.78
(1) Turfing and sprigging shall be considered to be complete when the

first flush of growth achieves 90% cover. The method of determining
the cover shall be as stated in Clauses 3.94 to 3.96.
(2)
Bare patches or areas that in the opinion of the Engineer fail to
become established shall be returfed or resprigged to maintain 90% cover
throughout the establishment period. Areas affected by repairs to
3.20
2006 Edition
washouts and gullies and other erosion shall be returfed or resprigged.
ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
Establishment
works
3.79
(1)
Establishment works shall be carried out for the period stated in
the Contract.
(2)
Establishment works shall be carried out as stated in Clauses
3.79(3) and 3.80 to 3.93.
(3)
All necessary measures shall be taken to ensure that grass, trees
and other plants become established and to keep the landscape softworks
neat and tidy and free of litter and rubbish.
Inspection of
establishment works
3.80
An inspection of landscape softworks and establishment works shall be

carried out jointly by the Contractor and the Engineer at monthly intervals
to determine the establishment works which are required. The Engineer
shall instruct the Contractor to carry out establishment works which in the
opinion of the Engineer are necessary; the work instructed shall be
completed within 14 days of the date of the Engineer's instruction.
Replacement of
plants and grass
3.81
(1)
Plants that in the opinion of the Engineer are dead, dying or
otherwise unsatisfactory shall be replaced. Replacement planting shall
be carried out in season as stated in Clause 3.58(2), unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer, using plant material of a similar size to that
already established. Measures shall be taken to ensure satisfactory
establishment of the replacement plants before the end of the period for
establishment works.
(2)
90% cover of the grass area shall be maintained throughout the
period for establishment works and the grass shall provide effective
cover of 90% of the area at the end of the period for establishment
works. The grass shall be healthy, vigorous and free of perennial and
other weeds.
Areas that in the opinion of the Engineer are
unsatisfactory shall be reseeded by hydroseeding or broadcast seeding as
stated in Clause 3.74(2) or returfed as stated in Clause 3.76 or sprigged
as stated in Clause 3.77. Measures shall be taken to ensure satisfactory
establishment of the replacement grass or turf before the end of the
period for establishment works.
Security of stakes,
ties and guys
3.82
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of stakes, ties and
guys throughout the establishment period. An inspection of stakes, ties
and guys shall be carried out each month by the Contractor. Broken,
damaged and other unsatisfactory stakes, ties and guys shall be replaced
and ties that are causing chafing or abrasion of the plant shall be
adjusted. Ties that are loosened shall be appropriately tightened, and
guying turnbuckles shall be adjusted as necessary to ensure guys are
taut.
Firming up plants
3.83
Plants that become loose as a result of wind rock or other causes shall be
firmed up. The Contractor shall carry out an inspection of the plants
each month and after heavy rain or wind for this purpose.
Watering
3.84
(1)
Fresh water shall be used for watering landscape softworks.
Water shall be applied using a rose or sprinkler of a type agreed by the
Engineer and in such a manner that compaction, washout of soil or
3.21
2006 Edition
loosening of plants will not be caused; any damage caused shall be made
good immediately.
(2)
All planted areas shall be watered to ensure successful
establishment of the plants. Plants reaching permanent wilting point
shall be watered immediately.
(3)
Grass shall not be watered in the period for establishment works
unless stated in the Contract.
Weeding
3.85
(1)
All grassed and planted areas shall be kept free of weeds throughout
the period for establishment works. Any unwanted plants including Mikania
micrantha found within the Site is considered as weeds and shall be
removed by the Contractor once it is identified or when instructed by the
Engineer throughout the period for establishment works.
(2)
Weeding shall be carried out by hand or by mechanical methods
agreed by the Engineer in such a manner that damage to the grass and
planted areas will not be caused. The Contractor shall not use chemicals
or fire for weeding operation, unless otherwise instructed or approved by
the Engineer. All weeds, litter and other rubbish resulting from the
weeding operation shall be disposed of from the Site by the Contractor.
Any ground cover plants, herbaceous plants, climbers, mulch or soil
disturbed or removed during the weeding operation shall be replaced.
(3)
Planted areas in bare ground shall be weeded to remove all
unwanted vegetative growth including aerial parts and roots, over the
complete area. Planted areas other than in bare ground shall be weeded
to remove all competing and overhanging vegetative growth by cutting
the growth down to not more than 50 mm above soil level.
Pruning
3.86
(1)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment,
and physical support, and shall take all necessary safety precautions to
protect the people engaged in the pruning work as well as the people and
property in the vicinity.
(2)
All pruning work shall be carried out in accordance with good
horticultural practice and the recommendations of BS 3998.
(3)
Pruning and removal of branches shall be done using sharp, clean
implements to give a single flat, sloping face.
(4)
Ragged, rough edges of bark or wood shall be trimmed cleanly
from around wounds with a sharp knife to the minimum extent that is
necessary so as to hasten wound closure, and twigs less than 15 mm
diameter shall be cut with sharp secateurs.
(5)
Pruning shall be carried out with the cut just above and sloping
away from an outward facing healthy bud, and removal of branch shall
be carried out by having the final cut of the last branch segment made
just outside the branch collar when it is present or at an angle being the
mirror image of the branch bark ridge when there is no branch collar, so
that no part of the stem is damaged or torn, and no snags or stumps are
left.
(6)
Large branches shall be removed in stages beginning with the
removal of the main weight of the branch from perimeter of crown in
towards the trunk and with the final cut of the last branch segment made
3.22
2006 Edition
in a way as described in sub-clause (5) of this Clause, without leaving a

stub and damaging the bark.
(7)
All cuts shall be made to avoid splintering or tearing of bark that
would catch water and encourage rot, and cracks, cavities or rotten wood
shall be cut back with a clean, sharp implement to remove the dead,
damaged and decayed tissue without damaging the living tissue.
(8)
Topping shall not be carried out in any circumstances.
(9)
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, any cuts or wounds
shall be left uncovered and no wound dressing shall be applied.
(10) Any material pruned from the trees shall be removed from the
Site as soon as possible, and any areas affected by the pruning work
shall be reinstated.
Grass cutting
3.87
(1)
Grassed areas shall be cut by manual or mechanical methods
agreed by the Engineer and in a manner that does not cause pulling of
roots or damage to planting in or near the grassed area. All cuttings
shall be raked off and disposed of within 24 hours after cutting.
(2)
Category 1 grass shall be as stated in the Contract and shall be
reduced by cutting to a height of 50 mm when it reaches 100 mm high.
(3)
Category 2 grass shall be as stated in the Contract and shall be
reduced by cutting to a height of 100 mm when it reaches 300 mm high.
(4)
Category 3 grass cutting shall be cutting of areas of hydroseeding
stated in the Contract to be subsequently maintained as mown grass
Litter collection
3.88
All litter exposed by grass cutting shall be gathered up and disposed of

within 24 hours. Any other litter within the grassed or planted areas
shall also be removed by the Contractor once it is identified or when
instructed by the Engineer throughout the period for establishment
works.
Post-planting
fertilizer
3.89
Post-planting fertilizer shall be applied not less than 100 days, and not
more than 300 days, after grassing or planting. The fertilizer shall be
applied at a rate of:
Control of pests,
fungi and disease
3.90
(a)
100 g/m for amenity grass and shrub planting,
(b)
100 g for each light standard, standard and heavy standard

tree,
(c)
50 g for each seedling and whip tree, and
(d)
40g/m
for grass on slopes and grass grown by
hydroseeding.
(1) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary measures to

protect the plants from pest, fungal and disease attack and all necessary
control measures to eradicate pests, fungi and disease from the infected
and/or infested plants. The Contractor shall regularly check for any
pest, fungal and disease attack, particularly during known periods of
activity.
3.23
2006 Edition
(2)
The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any such occurrence
and shall carry out pest, fungal and disease control measures by use of
pesticide, insecticide or fungicide and any other necessary chemical
treatment and associated arboriculture works to the infected and / or
infested areas, as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
comply with the following requirements in applying the pest, fungal and
disease control measures:
(a)
Environmentally friendly measures shall be adopted,
(d)
All pesticides, insecticides, fungicides and chemicals to be

used shall be proprietary products registered in Hong Kong,
(c)
Safety precautions as the manufacturers instruction shall be

strictly followed in using pesticides, insecticides, fungicides
and chemicals so as to avoid causing danger or harm to the
public and the environment, and
(d)
Plant parts pruned from diseased plants shall not be

stockpiled anywhere on the Site and shall be disposed of
from the Site.
Forking over
3.91
Surfaces of bare ground which in the opinion of the Engineer are subject
to surface panning or compaction of the soil shall be forked over in such
a manner that roots are not disturbed and plants are not loosened; plants
which are disturbed or loosened shall be firmed up and well watered
immediately.
Mulching
3.92
All mulch that is disturbed by replacement planting, weeding or

watering shall be made good. Additional mulching over areas of
forking-over and over areas disturbed by others shall be carried out if
Completion of work
3.93
Immediately before the end of the period for establishment works:

(a)
All tree and shrub planting shall be free of weeds,
(b)
All planted and grassed areas shall be free of litter,
(c)
All replacement planting and patching up of grass shall be

completed,
(d)
All stakes and ties shall be secure, and
(e)
All grassed areas shall be cut and the edges trimmed.
TESTING: GRASS COVER

Testing : grass cover
3.94
(1)
Tests shall be carried out to determine the grass cover. The tests
shall be carried out 100 days after grassing and at the end of the period
for establishment works. The grass shall be cut to a height of 300 mm
if necessary over the parts of the area to be tested.
3.24
2006 Edition
(2)
The number of tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
Testing to determine the grass cover will be carried out by the
Engineer.
(4)
Tests shall be carried out at locations, which in the opinion of the
Engineer are representative of the grassed area as a whole. At each test
location an approximately square area of 10 m2 shall be marked.
(5)
The percentage of bare ground other than rock and other hard
material in each 10 m2 test area shall be measured.
Compliance criteria:
grass cover
3.95
At least 90% of each test area shall be covered with grass.
Non-compliance:
grass cover
3.96
If the result of any test for grass cover of landscape softworks and
establishment works does not comply with the specified requirements
for grass cover the area shall be rehydroseeded or reseeded in
accordance with Clause 3.74 (1) or (2) as instructed by the Engineer,
depending upon the size of the defective area.
TREE TRANSPLANTING
Transplanting of
existing trees
3.97
(1)
For the purpose of this Clause, palms and conifers are also
considered as trees.
(2)
Before commencing any work to the trees on the Site, the
Contractor shall submit and obtain approval from the Engineer a
detailed method statement and programme for transplanting the existing
trees, outlining the method, sequencing, timing of operations, and the
location and type of machinery to be used for the following operations:
(a)
Protection before lifting and transplanting,
(b)
Root pruning, including the rootball size, and the number of

stages, the operations involved in each stage, and the period
between each stage of root pruning,
(c)
Crown pruning,
(d)
Excavating trenches for rootball preparation,
(e)
Design and construction of supporting measures,
(f)
Attaching lifting gear to the trees,
(g)
Protection during transit,
(h)
Temporary holding nursery, if required,
(i)
Lifting,
(j)
Transportation to new location, including routing,
(k)
Preparation of receptor site,

3.25
2006 Edition
(l)
Placement, backfilling, mulching and securing at receptor

site,
(m) Backfilling and making good the donor site,

(n)
Schedule of establishment works during the period for

establishment works.
(3)
Any tree transplanted or to be transplanted that dies or is
damaged to an extent that, in the opinion of the Engineer, replacement
planting is necessary, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense if the necessity for such work is, in the opinion of the Engineer,
due to neglect or failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any
obligation expressed or implied on the Contractors part under the
Contract. The Contractor shall provide replacement planting of new
trees of the same species and of similar size and form as the dead or
damaged ones before the death or damage or provide other alternative
replacement planting as agreed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
complete the replacement planting within 28 days of the Engineers
instruction or other time duration as agreed by the Engineer.
(4)
Rootball box sizes shall vary depending on the tree rootball size.
Allowance shall be made such that there is at least 150 mm clearance
between the rootball edge to the sides and at least 300 mm to the bottom
of the rootball box. This clearance shall be filled with moist peat or
other materials as agreed by the Engineer. Trench size shall be at least
300 mm wide and 1000 mm deep.
(5)
The Contractor shall allow the tree transplanting works in his
programme of Works in such a way that the root pruning to the approved
size of rootball shall commence as early as possible so as to ensure
maximum fibrous root growth before the transplanting operations.
(6)
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that
no damage is done to the tree during all processes of transplanting.
(7)
The application of root activator, where necessary, shall be
carried out according to the manufacturers instruction.
(8)
Transplanting operations shall be timed so as to enable
transplanting of the trees direct to the areas of proposed planting. No
lifting and transplanting operations shall commence until either the
receptor sites or the holding nursery are fully prepared as specified.
Any tree lifted must be transplanted and watered on the same day.
(9)
Lifting and transplanting operations shall be carried out only
following a period of consistent rainfall which has thoroughly watered
the trees to the satisfaction of the Engineer or following a thorough
watering of the trees by the Contractor at a rate agreed by the Engineer.
(10) Trees shall be lifted carefully to avoid damage to roots and to
obtain the approved size of rootball. Roots shall be cut free of ground,
not pulled, using a suitable implement to give a clean cut. All roots
greater than 50 mm diameter shall be treated with an approved sealant.
3.26
2006 Edition
(11) All trees to be transplanted shall be wrapped and protected to

prevent mechanical damage during lifting and transportation. They
shall also be protected against excessive sunlight, wind and drought.
Care shall be taken in packing to prevent over-heating with its resultant
loss of foliage.
(12) Trees transplanted direct to the receptor sites are to be planted in
accordance with the requirements in Clauses 3.58 to 3.68 unless
otherwise proposed in the Contractors method statement and approved
by the Engineer.
(13) Trees transplanted to the holding nursery are to be containerized
before planting, using containers appropriate to the approved rootball
size. They shall be planted in an upright position, allowing adequate
space for growth, and tied and staked securely to avoid damage to the
tree stems. Immediately following planting the trees shall be watered
thoroughly to ensure a thorough soaking of the roots.
(14) Trees shall be treated with establishment works immediately after
transplanting works, for a period of 12 months. Such establishment
works shall include all measures necessary to establish and maintain the
trees in an acceptable vigorous and healthy growing condition. The
establishment works shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements in Clauses 3.79 to 3.93 unless otherwise proposed in the
Contractors method statement and approved by the Engineer.
(15) Immediately after transplanting, the base of the trees shall be well
watered to thoroughly soak the rootball. The trees shall be well
watered in the evening and early morning only. Watering shall be
carried out daily during the dry season, generally from September to
April. Watering shall be carried out as required during the wet season.
(16)
At least two applications of fertilizer shall be carried out in the

period for establishment works.
(17)
Rootball areas shall be kept free of weeds at all time.
3.27
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 4
FENCING
4.1
2006 Edition
4.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 4
FENCING
GENERAL
4.01
Handrailing
4.02
Handrailing shall comply with Section 19.
Earthworks
4.03
Pedestrian
guardrailing
4.04
Pedestrian guardrailing shall comply with Section 11.
Formwork and
finishes to concrete
4.05
Formwork and finishes to concrete shall comply with Section 14.
Reinforcement
4.06
Reinforcement shall comply with Section 15.
Concrete
4.07
Concrete shall comply with Section 16.
Steelwork
4.08
Steelwork, including protective treatment, shall comply with Section 18.
Vehicular parapets
4.09
Vehicular parapets shall comply with Section 20.
MATERIALS
Wire
4.10
(1) Wire for fencing, including plastic coated wire, shall be galvanized
mild steel complying with BS 4102.
(2)
Barbed wire shall consist of two line wires and point wire formed
in accordance with BS 4102, Clause 4.1.
(3)
Galvanized coating to steel wire shall comply with BS EN
10244-2:2001.
(4)
Plastic coating to steel wire shall be green and shall comply with
BS 4102, Section 6.
Chain link fence
4.11
Chain link fence shall comply with BS 1722: Part 1 unless otherwise
stated in this Section.
Timber
4.12
Timber shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer.
Steel
4.13
Steel for fencing shall comply with the following:

Hot rolled sections
BS 4: Part 1
Hot rolled structural steel sections

Hollow sections
Weldable structural steel
BS 4848: Part 4
BS 4848: Part 2
BS 4360.
4.3
2006 Edition
Bolts, nuts, washers
and fittings
4.14
(1)
Bolts, nuts and washers for fencing shall comply with the
following:
ISO metric black hexagon
bolts, screws and nuts
: BS 4190
ISO metric black cup and

countersunk head, bolts
andscrews with hexagon
nuts
:
: BS 4933
Metal washers for general

engineering purposes
: BS 4320
(2)
The length of bolts shall be such that the threaded portion of each
bolt projects through the nut by at least one thread and by not more than
four threads.
(3)
Fittings, including eye bolt strainers, cleats, winding brackets,
stretcher bars, extension arms, hook bolts and base plates, shall be
galvanized mild steel.
(4)
Bolts, nuts, washers and fittings for fixing to concrete and timber
shall be galvanized. Bolts, nuts, washers and fittings for fixing to steel
shall have the same protective treatment as the steel.
(5)
Staples shall be D-section galvanized wire.
FABRICATION OF FENCING
Fabrication of
steelwork
4.15
Steelwork for fencing shall be fabricated in accordance with BS 5950:

Part 2.
Galvanizing to steel
4.16
(1)
Steel to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(2)
Galvanizing to steel shall be applied as far as possible after
welding, drilling and cutting are complete.
Welding steel
4.17
(1)
Welds to steel for fencing shall be full depth fillet welds. Weld
surfaces shall be clean and flush before application of the protective
coating.
(2)
Steel shall not be welded after galvanizing unless permitted by the
Engineer and if permitted, the welded areas shall be free of scale and slag
and shall be treated with an alternative galvanizing or zinc coating system
4.4
2006 Edition
POSTS AND GATES FOR FENCING

Concrete posts
4.18
(1)
Concrete posts and struts for fencing shall be precast using Grade
30/10 concrete. The finish to the formed surfaces shall be Class F4 and
the finish to the unformed surfaces shall be Class U5. The tops of posts
and all arises shall be rounded or chamfered.
(2)
Reinforcement for concrete posts and struts shall be Grade 250
plain round steel bars.
Gates
4.19
(1)
Steel gates shall be of welded construction. The frame shall be
square with the corners mitred or saddled.
(2)
Chain link infilling in gates shall be of the same type and size as
in the adjoining fence and shall be attached to the framework by
stretcher bars.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of fencing
4.20
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed fencing shall be
submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Drawings showing the fabrication details of gates, and
(b)
Details of the source, type and properties of the proposed

materials.
(2)
The particulars of the proposed fencing shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the fencing is erected.
4.21
The following samples of the proposed materials shall be submitted to

the Engineer at the same time as particulars of the proposed fencing are
submitted:
(a)
Each type of wire and fitting,
(b)
Chain link, and
(c)
Recast concrete, steel and timber posts.
Storage of fencing
4.22
(1)
Gates and concrete and steel posts and struts for fencing shall be
stored off the ground on level supports and in a manner which will not
result in damage or deformation to the materials or in contamination of
the materials.
(2)
Fencing shall be protected from damage and damaged fencing
shall not be used in the permanent works unless permitted by the
Engineer.
4.5
2006 Edition
ERECTING FENCING
Alignment of fencing
4.23
Fencing shall be erected to a smooth alignment with no abrupt

irregularities. The ground shall be trimmed or filled in such a manner
that the bottom of the fence will approximately follow the level of the
ground. The distance between the bottom of chain link mesh and
hoardings and the ground shall not exceed 100 mm and any gap between
the bottom of hoardings and the ground shall be sealed to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Posts for fencing
4.24
(1)
Straining posts for fencing shall be provided at all ends and
corners, at changes in direction, at abrupt changes in level, at gate posts
and at intervals not exceeding 30 m along straight lengths of fencing.
Struts shall be fitted to straining posts in the direction of each wire secured
to the post.
(2)
m.
Erecting posts for

fencing
4.25
Intermediate posts shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 3.5
(1)
Posts and struts for fencing shall be set in excavations for
foundations and the excavations shall be filled with Grade 30/20 concrete
up to 50 mm below ground level.
(2)
Struts shall be fitted into slots in concrete posts and shall be bolted
to steel posts.
(3)
The ground surface around posts shall be made good with the same
material as in the adjoining area.
Fixing wire for

fencing
4.26
(1)
Line wire, chain link mesh and barbed wire for fencing shall be
strained tightly between straining posts. Winding brackets shall be used
for straining between steel posts and winding brackets or eye bolt strainers
shall be used for straining between concrete posts. The tension in the
wire on each side of straining posts shall be equal. Wire shall not be
strained until at least 14 days after concrete has been placed in the
foundation.
(2)
Chain link mesh shall be secured at each straining post by a
stretcher bar and shall be tied to the line wire by tying wire at 150 mm
intervals.
(3)
Each line wire and each line of barbed wire shall be secured to
each intermediate post by one of the following methods as stated in Table
4.1.
(a)
A hairpin staple shall be passed through a hole in the post and

secured to the wire by three complete turns on each side of
the post.
(b)
A stirrup shall be passed through a hole in the post and the

ends bent over twice.
(c)
The wire shall be threaded through a hole in the post.
(d)
The wire shall be stapled to the post.

4.6
2006 Edition
(e)
Table 4.1:
Method of securing wire to intermediate posts
Type of
fence
Strained wire
Type of wire
Type of post
Method of securing
wire
Line wire
Concrete
(a), (b) or (c)
Steel
(a), (b) or (c)
Concrete
(a) or (b)
Steel
(a)
Line wire
Concrete
(a), (b) or (d)
Mesh wire
Steel
(a) or (c)
Barbed wire
Concrete
(a), (b) or (d)
Steel
(a)
Barbed wire
Chain link
Fixing gates
A hook bolt shall be passed through a hole in the post and

secured with a nut and washer.
4.27
Gates shall be hung plumb and shall not be installed until the wire has
been strained.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
4.28
Fencing shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
The position of posts shall be within 75 mm of the specified

position.
(b)
The level of the top of posts shall be within 25 mm of the

specified level.
(c)
Posts shall be vertical to within 5 mm in the height of the

post.
4.7
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 5
DRAINAGE WORKS
5.1
2006 Edition
5.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 5
DRAINAGE WORKS
GENERAL
5.01
Hardwood is strictly prohibited for being used in falsework and shoring of
trenches and pits unless approved by the Engineer.
Metalwork
5.02
Metalwork for handrailing, ladders, stairs, metal flooring, toe plates and
safety chains shall comply with Section 19.
Earthworks
5.03
Formwork
5.04
Concrete
5.05
Concrete shall comply with Section 16, except that recycled aggregates
may be used in the concrete if specifically permitted in the relevant clauses
of this Section
Materials for grout
5.06
Materials for grout shall comply with Section 16.
Water supply
pipeworks
5.07
Water supply pipeworks shall comply with Section 22.
Cable duct systems
5.08
Cable duct systems for electrical and mechanical installations shall comply
with Section 13.
Recycled Aggregates
5.09
Recycled aggregates, if proposed by the Contractor, shall be approved by

the Engineer before they are used in drainage works.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Pipes
5.10
Pipes for drainage works are pipes for conveying sewage and surface
water.
MATERIALS
Precast concrete
pipes and fittings
5.11
(1)
Precast concrete pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 5911-1.

Amd 4/2010
(2)
Precast concrete pipes and fittings shall have flexible spigot and
socket joints.
5.3
2006 Edition
Vitrified clay pipes
and fittings
5.12
(1)
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 65. The pipes
and fittings shall be glazed and shall be the normal chemical resistant type.
(2)
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall have flexible mechanical
joints.
DI pipes and fittings
5.13
(1)
DI pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 4772. Pipes and
fittings shall be lined internally with cement mortar and shall be coated
externally with bituminous coating.
(2)
Flexible joints in DI pipes and fittings shall be the push-in type and
shall be capable of withstanding a minimum angular deflection of 4.
Flexible joints shall also be capable of withstanding axial movements and
shall allow a minimum withdrawal of 38 mm when there is no deflection
of the joint.
(3)
Flanged joints in DI pipes and fittings shall be PN 16 rating
complying with BS 4504: Section 3.1.
(4)
Pipes that are to be built in to structures shall have puddle flanges
welded on.
Grey iron pipes and

fittings
5.14
Grey iron pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 4622.
uPVC pipes and

fittings
5.15
(1)
uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with the relevant British
Standard stated in Table 5.1.
(2)
uPVC pipes and fittings above ground shall have solvent welded
spigot and socket joints. uPVC pipes and fittings below ground shall
have either solvent welded spigot and socket joints or flexible spigot and
socket joints with elastomeric joint rings as stated in the Contract.
(3)
Joints and fittings for uPVC pressure pipes complying with BS
3506 shall comply with the following:
Injection moulded uPVC
fittings for solvent welding
for use with pressure pipes,
including water supply
: BS 4346: Part 1
Mechanical joints and fittings

principally of uPVC
: BS 4346: Part 2
(4)
Solvent cement for uPVC pressure pipes shall comply with BS
4346: Part 3.
(5)
The Class of uPVC pressure pipes complying with BS 3506 shall
depend on the pressure rating.
5.4
2006 Edition
GI pipes and fittings
5.16
(1)
GI pipes and fittings shall comply with the following:

Steel tubes and tubulars
suitable for screwing
to BS 21 pipe threads
: BS 1387, medium grade
Pipe threads for tubes and

fittings where pressure-tight
joints are made on the threads
: BS 21
Wrought steel pipe fittings

(screwed BSP thread)
: BS 1740: Part 1.
(2)
GI pipes and fittings shall be medium class thickness and shall be
galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO1461: 1999.
Table 5.1:
uPVC pipes and fittings

Use
Nominal diameter (mm)
British Standard
Gravity sewage
pipes and fittings
above ground
32
50
BS 5255
82
160
BS 4514
Gravity surface
water pipes and
fittings above
ground
63
75
82
160
BS 4514
Gravity sewage
and storm water
pipes and fittings
below ground
110
160
BS 4660
200
630
BS 5481
10
600
BS 3506
Pressure pipes
and fittings
above and
below ground
5.5
BS 4576: Part 1
2006 Edition
Bolts, nuts and
washers
5.17
(1)
Bolts, nuts and washers for flanged joints, detachable couplings and
flange adapters shall comply with the following:
ISO metric black
hexagon bolts,
screws and nuts
: BS 4190
Metal washers for

general engineering
purposes
: BS 4320.
The bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanised in accordance with
BS EN ISO1461: 1999 or treated with other suitable coating approved by
the Engineer.
(2)
Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall comply with BS EN ISO
3506-1&2, steel Grade A4 and property Class 80. Washers shall be
Grade 1.4401 in the softened condition complying with BS EN 10029, BS
EN 10048, BS EN 10051 + A1, BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445.
Amd 3/2010
(3)
Spheroidal graphite iron bolts shall be Grade 500/7 metal
complying with BS 2789.
(4)
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be insulated from electrochemically
dissimilar metal by non-metallic washers and sleeves.
Elastomeric joint
rings
5.18
(5)
Bolts and nuts shall be compatible with the type of joint and, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer, shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer as the joint.
(1)
Elastomeric joint rings shall be Type WC complying with BS EN
681-1. The rings shall be compatible with the type of joint and, unless
Amd 4/2010
(2)
Elastomeric joint rings for flanged pipes shall be the inside diameter
bolt circle type. The rings shall be natural rubber with a thickness of 3.2
mm and with other dimensions complying with BS 4865: Part 1.
Detachable couplings
and flange adapters
5.19
(1)
Detachable couplings and flange adapters shall be of a proprietary
type approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Detachable couplings and flange adapters shall accommodate the
angular deflection and straight draw stated in Table 5.2 for the different
nominal diameters of pipes connected.
5.6
2006 Edition
Table 5.2: Angular deflection and straight draw

Detachable coupling
Nominal diameter
of pipe
Straight
draw
Angular
deflection
10 mm
Flange adapter
Angular
deflection
Not exceeding 450 mm
exceeding 450 mm and

not exceeding 600 mm
2.5


1.5

exceeding 1800 mm
0.5
Anticorrosion tape
5.20
Straight
draw
5 mm
(1)
Anticorrosion tape shall be a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. The tape shall be a rubber/bitumen compound with fabric
reinforcement and shall be backed with PVC film. The tape shall have a
high resistance to cathodic disbonding, acids and alkalis and shall have the
minimum properties stated in Table 5.3.
(2)
Anticorrosion tape shall be applied to valves, flanged joints, slip-on
couplings and flange adapters. Type 1 shall be used for pipes smaller than
700 mm diameter and Type 2 shall be used for pipes 700 mm diameter and
above.
(3)
Primer and mastic filler for use with anticorrosion tape shall be
compatible with the tape and shall be a type recommended by the
manufacturer of the tape and approved by the Engineer.
5.7
2006 Edition
Table 5.3: Properties of anticorrosion tape

(except where stated the values shown are minimum values)
Value
Property
Type 1
Type 2
85
500
10
26
26
Tear strength (N)
20
36
Adhesion strength (N/mm)
- single layer
10
10
- double layer
15
15
Impact strength (J)
3.5
5 - 60
8 - 60
Total thickness (mm)
1.6
2.0
Mass (kg/m2)
1.8
2.4
Thickness of PVC backing (m)

Tensile strength (N/mm)
Elongation (%)
Holiday test voltage (kV)
Temperature range (C)
Bituminous coatings
5.21
(1)
Bituminous coatings shall comply with the following:

Bitumen based hot applied
coating material for
protecting iron and steel
including suitable primers
where required
Black bitumen coating
solutions for cold
application
: BS 4147, Type I,
Grade C
: BS 3416, Type II.
(2)
Bituminous coatings used for repairing joints and coatings shall be
compatible with the adjacent coatings.
5.8
2006 Edition
5.22
Aggregates for
granular bed and
granular fill
(1)
Granular bed shall be Type A material and granular fill shall be Type
B material.
(2)
Type A or Type B material shall consist of hard, clean, crushed slag,
gravel, crushed rock, crushed concrete or crushed inert demolition material
having a grading within the limits of Table 5.4. The ten percent fines
values shall be at least 50 kN. The material passing the 425 m BS test
sieve shall be non-plastic when tested in accordance with BS 1377.
(3) Type A and Type B materials shall be obtained from a source
(4) Aggregates for granular bed shall have the compacting fraction
values stated in Clause 5.88.
Table 5.4: Range of grading of Type A and Type B materials
BS test sieve
Metric
63
37.5
20
10
3.35
600
75
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
m
m
Percentage by mass passing

Type A
Type B
100
45 - 100
25 - 80
8 - 45
0 - 10
100
85 - 100
0 - 20
0-5
-
Table 5.5: Joint filler for concrete bed, haunch and surround
Nominal diameter of pipe
Thickness of joint filler (mm)
less than 450 mm
18
450 mm - 1200 mm
36
exceeding 1200 mm
54
5.9
2006 Edition
Joint filler and
compressible padding
5.23
(1)
Joint filler for joints in concrete bed, haunch and surround shall be a
firm, compressible, single thickness, non-rotting filler. The thickness of
the filler shall be as stated in Table 5.5.
(2)
Compressible padding between pipes and supports shall be bitumen
damp-proof sheeting complying with BS 743.
Polyethylene sheeting
5.24
Polyethylene sheeting shall be impermeable and shall have a nominal

thickness of 0.125 mm.
Precast concrete
manholes
5.25
Precast concrete manhole units shall comply with BS 5911-3. Cover

slabs and reducing slabs shall be reinforced as required to comply with the
load test requirements stated in BS 5911-3.
Amd 4/2010
Chambers and gullies
5.26
(1)
Precast concrete chambers and gullies shall comply with BS 5911:
Part 2. Cover slabs shall be reinforced as required to comply with the
load test requirements stated in BS 5911: Part 2. The types of cement for
the manufacture of precast concrete chambers and gullies, and cover slabs
shall be as stated in BS 5911: Part 2, or a combination of PFA and PC or
PFAC complying with BS EN 197-1. The PFA content shall not exceed
40% by mass of the cementitious content.
(2)
Vitrified clay gullies shall comply with BS 65.
Step irons
5.27
Step irons shall comply with BS 1247. Step irons shall be malleable cast
iron complying with BS 6681 and shall be hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999.
Manhole covers,
gully gratings and
kerb overflow weirs
5.28
(1)
Manhole covers, gully gratings and kerb overflow weirs shall be
Grade EN-GJL-150 cast iron complying with BS EN 1561. Bolts and
nuts shall comply with BS 4190.
Amd 4/2010
(2)
Covers, gratings and weirs shall be cleanly cast, free of air holes,
sand holes, cold shuts and chill and shall be neatly dressed and fettled.
Castings shall be free of voids whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusions or
other causes. Bolts and nuts shall not be over-tightened.
(3)
The dimensions of the different types of covers, gratings and weirs
shall be as stated in the Contract. The test loads which the covers and
gratings are required to withstand, and the minimum masses of covers
gratings and weirs, shall be as stated in Tables 5.6, 5.7 and 5.8.
(4)
Covers, gratings and weirs shall have the manufacturer's name cast
integrally with the unit in a raised form and shall be protected with
bituminous coating. Covers shall have a raised design on the top surface
as stated in the Contract.
5.10
2006 Edition
Table 5.6: Details of manhole covers and frames
Type of manhole cover
and frame
Minimum
mass
(kg)
Grade
180
Medium duty
130
Heavy duty
300
30
Frame
105
Heavy duty
300
30
Double triangular desilting
290
Heavy duty
300
30
165
Heavy duty
300
30
- Type MA2-29/29A & B
Heavy duty
300
20
- Type MA2-45/45A & B
Heavy duty
300
20
- Type MC2-29/29A & B
Medium duty
100
- Type MC2-45/45A & B
Medium duty
100
Minimum
mass
(kg)
Grade
28.0
Heavy duty
Frame
24.5
Heavy duty
300
20
Grating for double triangular
57.5
Heavy duty
300
20
- adjacent to kerb
33.5
Heavy duty
300
20
- away from kerb
36.5
Heavy duty
300
20
- adjacent to kerb
40.5
Heavy duty
300
20
- away from kerb
44.0
Heavy duty
300
20
61.5
Heavy duty
300
20
37.0
Heavy duty
300
20
Double triangular manhole
Test requirements
Diameter
Test
of block
load
(mm)
(t)
100
5
cover and frame

Double triangular manhole
cover for sewers
manhole cover for sewers

Frame
Double seal terminal manhole
cover for sewers
Table 5.7: Details of gully gratings and frames

Type of gully grating
and frame
Grating for hinged gully grating
Test requirements
Diameter
Test
of block
load
(mm)
(t)
300
20
Type GA2-325
gully grating Type GA1-450

Shallow frame
Deep frame
Grating for hinged gully

grating Type GA2-450
Frame
5.11
2006 Edition
Table 5.8: Details of kerb overflow weirs
Type of kerb overflow weir
Minimum
mass (kg)
Type 1-325
39.5
Type 3-325
31.5
Type 1-450
44.0
Type 3-450
36.5
Type 4-450
33.0
5.12
2006 Edition
Penstocks
5.29
(1)
Penstocks shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
Frames and gates shall be cast iron complying with BS EN

1561, Grade EN-GJL-220.
Amd 4/2010
(b)
Stems shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10084,

BS EN 10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN 10250-4
and PD 970, Grade 1.4401.
Amd 3/2010
(c)
Operating nuts shall be gunmetal complying with BS 1400,

Grade LG2.
(d)
Sealing faces shall be phosphor bronze complying with BS

2874, Grade PB 102.
(e)
Sealing strips at inverts of flush invert penstocks shall be

elastomer complying with ASTM D 2000.
(f)
Assembly and fixing nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel

complying with Clause 5.17(2).
(g)
Adjustable wedges shall be phosphor bronze complying with

BS 2874, Grade PB 102 or stainless steel complying with BS
EN 10084, BS EN 10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS
EN 10250-4 and PD 970, Grade 1.4401.
Amd 3/2010
(2)
Penstocks shall be designed for on-seating pressure or off-seating
pressure or both on-seating and off-seating pressures as stated in the
Contract.
(3)
Sealing faces shall be of rectangular sections and shall be fixed to
the frames and gates using taperhead screws of the same material as the
sealing faces.
(4)
Adjustable wedges shall have sufficient contact areas with the gates
to minimise wear.
(5)
Frames shall include guide rails or guide faces for gates.
Clearance within guides shall be as small as practicable such that the gates
will not vibrate under flow conditions.
(6)
Penstocks shall have rising stems unless otherwise stated in the
Contract. Rising stems shall have perspex protection tubes with open/close
indicators.
5.13
2006 Edition
Gate valves
5.30
(1)
Gate valves shall comply with BS 5150 and with the following
requirements:
(a)
Bodies and wedges shall be cast iron complying with BS EN

1561, Grade EN-GJL-220 and shall have renewable gunmetal
seat rings.
Amd 4/2010
(b)
Gunmetal for renewable seat rings shall be Grade LG2

(c)
Stem nuts shall be gunmetal complying with BS 1400, Grade

LG2.
(d)
Stems shall be aluminium bronze complying with BS 2874,

Grade CA 104.
(e)
Assembly and fixing nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel

complying with Clause 5.17(2).
(2)
Gate valves shall be double flange-ended solid wedge type with
nominal pressure designation PN 16. Flanges shall be PN 16 complying
with BS 4504: Part 1.
(3)
Gate valves shall have outside screw rising stems unless otherwise
stated in the Contract. Rising stems shall have perspex protection tubes
with open/close indicators.
(4)
Gate valves shall be fitted with a plate showing the operating
position of the valve in the closed, quarter closed, half closed,
three-quarters closed and open positions.
(5)
Chains for chain operated gate valves shall be mild steel complying
with BS EN 10084, BS EN 10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN
10250-4 and PD 970 and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS EN
ISO1461. The chains shall be continuous.
Amd 3/2010
Flap valves
5.31
(1)
Flap valves shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
Frames and flaps shall be cast iron complying with BS EN

1561, Grade EN-GJL-220.
Amd 4/2010
(b)
Sealing faces and hinge pins shall be gunmetal complying

with BS 1400, Grade LG2.
(2)
The flap shall be hung with double hinges and secured with hinge
pins.
(3)
Flanges for flange mounting types of flap valves shall be PN 16
complying with BS 4504: Part 1.
5.14
2006 Edition
Sludge valves
5.32
(1)
Sludge valves shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
Bodies and valve sections shall be cast iron complying with

BS EN 1561, Grade EN-GJL-220.
Amd 4/2010
(b)
Sealing faces and stem nuts shall be gunmetal complying with

BS 1400, Grade LG2.
(c)
Stems shall be aluminium bronze complying with BS 2874,

Grade CA 104.
(2)
The stems of sludge valves shall operate through non-rising stem
nuts housed in bridges bolted over the body sections.
(3)
Outlet flanges of sludge valves shall be PN 16 complying with BS
4504: Section 3.1.
Air valves
5.33
(1)
Air valves shall be of the elongated body type and shall have a
pressure rating of 3 bars unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2)
Dual orifice air valves shall have:

(a)
A small orifice valve for releasing air at working pressure, and
(b)
A large orifice valve for allowing air to pass at atmospheric

pressure during emptying and filling of pipework.
(3)
The bodies and covers of small and large orifice valves shall be cast
iron complying with BS EN 1561, Grade EN-GJL-220. The trim and
float shall be stainless steel complying with BS EN 10084, BS EN 10085,
BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN 10250-4 and PD 970, Grade 1.4401.
Amd 3/2010 & 4/2010
(4)
Small orifice valves shall have an adjustable Vitron orifice button to
ensure positive sealing. Large orifice valves shall have a Buna-N seat.
(5)
The valve inlet of small orifice valves shall be 75 mm diameter and
the valve outlet shall be 25 mm diameter. The venting orifice shall be 5
mm diameter. The valve inlet and the valve outlet of large orifice valves
shall be 75 mm diameter.
(6)
Air valves shall be provided with isolating gate valves.
5.15
2006 Edition
Fittings for penstocks
and valves
5.34
(1)
Handwheels and tee keys for penstocks and valves shall turn in a
clockwise direction for closing. Handwheels shall have smooth rims and
the direction of opening and closing shall be clearly cast on the handwheel.
The opening effort required at any point on the handwheel rim shall not
exceed 250 N when operated against the full unbalanced pressure.
(2)
Extension stems for penstocks and valves shall be stainless steel of
the same grade as the stems. Extension stems shall be connected with
muff couplings.
(3)
Handwheels, tee keys, headstocks, guide brackets for stems,
supporting brackets, surface boxes and other fittings for penstocks and
valves shall be cast iron complying with BS EN 1561.
Amd 4/2010
(4)
Bolts and nuts for fixing penstocks and valves to structures shall be
stainless steel complying with Clause 5.17(2). Bolts shall be indented
foundation bolts.
(5)
Grout for filling rebates and box-outs shall be of a proprietary type
approved by the Engineer and shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
Filling abandoned
pipes and manholes
5.35
(1)
Foam concrete for filling abandoned pipes, culverts, manholes and
voids shall be composed of PC (or PFAC), fine aggregate (from natural or
recycled aggregate), water, admixtures for accelerating or retarding the
setting time and foam to reduce the density and to produce a flowing self
levelling material.
(2)
As an alternative to foam concrete when permitted by the Engineer,
a grout of PC/PFA and water may be used. Sand and admixtures may not
be used in the PC/PFA grout unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
(3)
The PC/PFA grout shall consist of 15 parts of PFA to 1 part of PC
by mass together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve
a consistency suitable for flowing into the pipes, culverts, manholes and
voids.
SUBMISSIONS
5.16
2006 Edition
Particulars of pipes,
joints and fittings
5.36
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed pipes, joints and fittings
for drainage works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers literature, including details of:

- manufacturing process
- pressure and temperature ratings
- permissible values of straight draws and angular deflection
of flexible joints
- recommendations for handling, storage, laying, jointing and
repair
- drilling and tapping equipment for connections to pipes,
and
(b)
A certificate for each material showing the manufacturer's

name, the date and place of manufacture and showing that the
material complies with the requirements stated in the Contract
and including results of tests required in accordance with the
Contract.
(2)
The particulars, including certificates, shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the first delivery of the material to the
Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of the material
delivered to the Site.
Particulars of
anticorrosion tape
and joint filler
5.37
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed anticorrosion tape and
joint filler for drainage works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers literature for anticorrosion tape, and
(b)
Certificates for anticorrosion tape and joint filler showing the

manufacturers name, the date and place of manufacture and
showing that the material complies with the requirements
stated in the Contract and including results of tests in
accordance with the Contract.
(2)
Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of the material delivered
to the Site.
Particulars of
aggregates for
granular bed
5.38
(1)
A certificate for each type of aggregate showing the source of the
aggregate and showing that the aggregate complies with the requirements
stated in the Contract, and including the results of tests in accordance with
the Contract, shall be submitted to the Engineer for the proposed
aggregates for granular bed for drainage works.
(2)
Engineer at least 14 days before the first delivery of the aggregate to the
Site and thereafter each time the source is changed.
5.17
2006 Edition
Particulars of
manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.39
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for manholes,
chambers and gullies for drainage works shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
A certificate for each type of manhole and chamber unit and

for each type of gully showing the manufacturer's name, the
date and place of manufacture and showing that the materials
comply with the requirements stated in the Contract and
including results of tests required in accordance with the
Contract,
(b)
A certificate for step irons showing the manufacturer's name,

the date and place of manufacture and showing that the step
irons comply with the requirements stated in the Contract, and
including results of tests required in accordance with the
Contract, and
(c)
A certificate for each type of manhole cover, gully grating and

kerb overflow weir showing the manufacturer's name, the date
and place of manufacture and showing that the materials
comply with the requirements stated in the Contract and
including results of tests in accordance with the Contract.
(2)
Particulars of
penstocks and valves
5.40
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed penstocks and valves for
drainage works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturer's literature, including details of:

- Materials
- Pressure ratings
- Recommendations for handling, storage and installation,
(b)
Drawings showing details of the penstocks and valves,

including lengths of stems and details of handwheels, tee
keys, extension stems, headstocks, guide brackets for stems,
supporting brackets, surface boxes and other fittings, and
positions and sizes of rebates and box-outs.
(2)
before the first delivery of the material to the Site.
Particulars of foam
concrete and PC/PFA
grout
5.41
(1)
The following particulars of the foam concrete and grouting
procedure for filling abandoned pipes, culverts, manholes and voids shall
be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Proportions of each constituent,
(b)
Source of supply,
(c)
Details of mixing,
(d)
Setting time,
5.18
2006 Edition
(e)
Strength,
(f)
Shrinkage expected (for PC/PFA grout),
(g)
Details of mixing and grouting equipment, and
(h)
Method of grouting, including details of trials.
(2)
before grouting starts.
Particulars of tests
5.42
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed procedures for tests on
pipelines and penstocks for drainage works shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Test equipment and method of setting up the equipment,
(b)
Calibration certificates for pressure gauges,
(c)
Procedure for carrying out the test, and
(d)
Programme for testing.
(2)
before the test starts.
Particulars of CCTV
inspections
5.43
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed procedure for CCTV
inspections shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Names and experience of persons carrying out or supervising

the inspections,
(b)
Details of equipment,
(c)
Details of the format of report, and
(d)
Examples of video films and photographs obtained from

inspections employing the same equipment.
(2)
The particulars of the procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer
at least 28 days before the inspection starts.
Particulars of
diversions of flow
5.44
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer particulars of the proposed

procedures for diversions of existing flows shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the diversion starts.
TRANSPORT,
MATERIALS
Transport, handling
and storage of pipes,
joints and fittings
5.45
HANDLING
AND
STORAGE
OF
(1)
Pipes, joints and fittings for drainage works shall be transported,
handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and in a manner which will not result in damage or
deformation to the pipes, joints and fittings or in contamination of the
pipes, joints and fittings.
5.19
2006 Edition
(2)
Pipes, joints and fittings shall be protected from damage and
damaged pipes, joints and fittings shall not be used in the permanent work
unless permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
uPVC pipes, joints and fittings shall be protected from exposure to
conditions which may affect the material.
(4)
Bolts and nuts shall be packed in sealed metal containers.
(5)
Elastomeric joint rings shall be packed in bags and lubricant for
joints shall be stored in sealed containers marked to identify the contents.
The rings and lubricant shall be protected from exposure to conditions that
may affect the material.
Handling of pipes and
fittings
5.46
(1)
Pipes and fittings shall be handled manually or by using lifting
appliances or chains, wire rope or canvas slings of a type recommended by
the pipe manufacturer and agreed by the Engineer. Hooks shall not be
used.
(2)
Slings shall be placed around the pipes and fittings and padding
shall be provided at points of contact between pipes and fittings and metal
lifting appliances or slings. Pipes shall not be handled by means of metal
slings passed through the pipes.
(3)
Pipes and fittings shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock
loading or dropping and shall not be rolled down ramps unless permitted
by the Engineer. If permitted, the ramps shall be padded.
Storage of pipes
5.47
(1)
Pipes shall be stored horizontally at least 75 mm above the ground
on wedged timber bearers. The bottom layers and the outer pipes in each
layer shall be securely wedged to prevent sideways movement.
(2)
Socket and spigot pipes shall be stored with the sockets alternating
and in such a manner that loads are not applied to the sockets.
(3)
The height of stacks of pipes shall not exceed 2 m unless
recommended by the manufacturer and permitted by the Engineer.
(4)
Pipes shall not be strung out along the route of the pipeline unless
permitted by the Engineer.
Storage of
anticorrosion tape
and joint filler
5.48
Anticorrosion tape and joint filler shall be stored in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations in a dry, weatherproof store with a raised
floor.

of aggregates for
granular bed
5.49
Aggregates for granular bed shall not be handled or stored in a manner that
will result in mixing of the different types and sizes or in contamination of
the aggregates. Different types and sizes of aggregates shall be stored in
separate stockpiles.
5.20
2006 Edition
of units for manholes,
chambers and gullies
5.50
(1)
Units for manholes, chambers and gullies shall be lifted only at the
lifting points recommended by the manufacturer and shall not be subjected
to rough handling, shock loading or dropping.
(2)
Units for manholes, chambers and gullies shall be stored off the
ground on level supports and in a manner that will not result in damage to
the units or in contamination or deformation of the units. The units shall
be protected from damage and damaged units shall not be used in the
permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer.
Storage of covers,
gratings, weirs
5.51
Manhole covers, gully gratings, kerb overflow weirs, penstocks and

valves, including fittings, shall be stored off the ground on level supports
and in a manner which will not result in damage to the units or in
contamination or deformation of the units. The units shall be protected
from damage and damaged units shall not be used in the permanent work
EXCAVATION
Excavation
5.52
(1)
Excavation for any section of a trench for drainage works shall not
commence until the nature, location and size of existing utilities which
may be affected by the excavation have been ascertained and the setting
out details have been approved by the Engineer.
(2)
The effective trench width of trenches for drainage works shall not
exceed the relevant effective trench widths stated in Table 5.9 for the
different diameters of pipe. The effective trench width shall be measured
as stated in the Contract.
5.21
2006 Edition
Table 5.9: Effective trench widths
Nominal
diameter
of pipe
(mm)
Effective
trench
width
(mm)
Nominal
diameter
of pipe
(mm)
Effective
trench
width
(mm)
100
550
1125
2200
150
600
1200
2300
225
700
1350
2450
300
750
1500
2600
375
1050
1650
2800
450
1150
1800
2950
525
1200
1950
3150
600
1350
2100
3350
675
1450
2250
3400
750
1500
2400
3500
825
1600
2550
3650
900
1900
2700
3800
975
2000
2850
3950
1050
2050
3000
4150

Laying pipes
5.53
(1)
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect trenches,
bedding, pipes, joints, fittings and valves before pipe-laying for drainage
works starts. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before pipe-laying starts in any part
of the permanent work.
(2)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before pipe-laying
starts in any part of the permanent work.
(3)
The Contractor shall inspect pipes, joints, fittings and valves,
including internal and external coatings, immediately before and after
pipe-laying. Valves shall be inspected to ensure that they are in working
order and are capable of being fully opened and closed. Deleterious
material shall be removed and damage shall be repaired immediately
before and after pipe-laying.
5.22
2006 Edition
(4)
The inside of pipelines shall be kept clean and free of water, dirt,
stones, debris and deleterious material. Except when pipes are being
jointed, the open ends of pipelines shall be sealed with a wooden plug or
stopper or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(5)
Measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipes.
(6)
Pipe-laying, testing and backfilling shall follow as closely as
practicable on excavation of the trench.
(7)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, pipelines shall be laid
in an uphill direction with sockets facing uphill.
(8)
Pipes shall be laid in such a manner that water will not pond in
locations with zero or shallow gradients and such that the pipes will
comply with the specified tolerances.
Bedding pipes
5.54
(1)
Surfaces on which pipes for drainage works will be laid shall be
cleaned and objects that may damage the pipes shall be removed before
pipes are laid.
(2)
The bottom of trenches on which pipes will be laid directly shall be
shaped to support the pipes uniformly along the length of the barrel.
Holes shall be dug to prevent pipes resting on the sockets and to allow the
pipes to be jointed.
CUTTING PIPES
Cutting pipes
5.55
(1)
Pipes for drainage works shall be cut and the ends shall be prepared
in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Purpose-made
equipment recommended by the manufacturer or approved by the Engineer
shall be used for cutting the pipes.
(2)
Cut ends of pipes shall be square or cut to the correct angle and
without damage to the pipe or coating. Cut ends shall be trimmed and
chamfered to suit the type of joint and in such a manner that elastomeric
joint rings will not be damaged by the cut end.
(3)
Pipes requiring to be cut to form closing lengths shall not be cut
until adjacent pipes have been laid and jointed and the length to be cut can
be accurately measured.
(4)
Reinforcement in precast concrete pipes that are cut shall be cut
back flush with the concrete and protected with epoxy resin or by other
methods agreed by the Engineer.
(5)
Pipes which terminate at the inside face of structures shall be cut
such that the end of the pipe is flush with the face.
5.23
2006 Edition
JOINTING PIPES
Jointing pipes
5.56
(1)
Pipes for drainage works shall be jointed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and using jointing equipment and
jointing materials recommended by the manufacturer or approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
jointing. Deleterious material shall be removed and damage shall be
repaired immediately before and after jointing. Surfaces that are to be
jointed and jointing materials shall be cleaned immediately before jointing.
Pipes shall be cleaned out with clean water.
(3)
All joints in pipelines shall be watertight.
(4)
The widths of gaps at joints shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and shall be achieved by marking the
outside of the pipe, by using metal feelers or by other methods agreed by
the Engineer. The position of elastomeric joint rings shall be checked by
using metal feelers after jointing.
(5)
Gaps at joints in pipes shall be protected after jointing, by methods
agreed by the Engineer, to prevent dirt, stones or other material entering
the joint.
Flanged joints
5.57
(1)
Flanged joints in pipes for drainage works shall be made as stated in
Clauses 5.57(2) and (3).
(2)
Bolts holes in flanged joints and joints incorporating bolted
components shall be correctly orientated before the bolts are tightened.
The correct size of bolts and nuts shall be used. Bolt threads shall be
lubricated and bolts shall be tightened using the correct size of spanner.
Bolts shall be tightened in diametrically opposite pairs working around the
bolt circle until all bolts are tightened to the torque recommended by the
manufacturer.
(3)
Bolt holes in flanged joints shall be orientated symmetrically about
the vertical diameter with no bolt holes on the vertical diameter.
Elastomeric joint rings shall be the correct size and shall not protrude into
the bore of the pipe. The rings may be temporarily fixed to the face of
the flange using a minimum amount of adhesive of a type recommended
by the manufacturer. Jointing compound or paste shall not be used for
this purpose.
Flexible collar joints
5.58
(1)
Flexible collar joints in pipes for drainage works shall be made as
stated in Clauses 5.58(2) to (4).
(2)
The elastomeric joint rings shall be placed in position inside the
grooves of the sleeve. The ends of the pipes shall be well smeared with
lubricant over a distance of at least 100 mm from the end of the pipe.
5.24
2006 Edition
(3)
The sleeve shall be placed on the end of the laid pipe and pushed
home to the location mark on the pipe. The location mark shall be at a
distance of half the length of the sleeve minus 3 mm from the end of the
pipe unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
(4)
The pipe that is to be jointed to the laid pipe shall be placed in the
sleeve and pushed home to the location mark on the pipe.
Push-in joints
5.59
Push-in joints in pipes for drainage works shall be made by smearing the
elastomeric joint ring with lubricant and placing the ring in position on the
spigot end of the pipe. The spigot shall be placed in the socket of the laid
pipe and pushed home.
Detachable joints
5.60
(1)
Detachable joints in pipes for drainage works shall be jointed as
stated in Clauses 5.60(2) and (3).
(2)
Both CI flanges, the elastomeric joint rings and the central collar
shall be placed over the ends of the pipes before the pipes are placed to the
required line and level. A gap of between 5 mm and 6 mm shall be left
between the ends of the pipes.
(3)
The flanges, elastomeric joint rings and central collar shall be
moved into position at the ends of the pipes. The central collar shall be
positioned centrally over the gap between the ends of the pipe before the
bolts are tightened.
Flange adapters
5.61
Joints with flange adapters in pipes for drainage works shall be made by
placing the flange adaptor on the plain end before the bolts are tightened.
Solvent welded joints
5.62
Solvent welded joints in pipes for drainage works shall be made by

applying solvent cement to the pipes to be jointed and pushing the pipes
home. Excess solvent shall not be applied and surplus solvent shall be
removed after jointing. Solvent welded pipes jointed outside the trench
shall not be placed in the trench until the solvent setting period
recommended by the manufacturer has elapsed. In addition, any material
or thing contaminated by the solvent shall not be left in the pipe or trench.
Screw joints
5.63
Screw joints in pipes for drainage works shall be made using a threaded
coupler. The threaded surfaces of the pipes and coupler shall be cleaned
and the threads shall be painted with two coats of bituminous paint. The
pipe thread shall be wrapped with three turns of spun yarn or other
material approved by the Engineer and the joint tightened using purposemade tools. Coal tar compounds or white lead paint shall not be used.
Locking nuts to branch connections shall be tightened.
Branch
connections shall not protrude inside the pipe.
5.25
2006 Edition
PROTECTION OF JOINTS
Protection of joints
5.64
(1)
Flanged joints, detachable couplings and flange adapters on buried
pipes for drainage works shall be protected as stated in Clauses 5.64(2) to
(4).
(2)
The joint, including bolts and nuts, shall be cleaned to remove all
moisture, dust, oil, grease and deleterious material. Bolts and nuts shall
be painted with two coats of bituminous point and the joint shall be coated
with primer. Mastic filler shall be applied in such a manner that all
depressions, corners and voids between the bolts and nuts are filled and a
smooth surface is available on which to apply the anticorrosion tape.
(3)
At least two layers anticorrosion tape shall be applied to all parts of
the joint and to the adjacent pipe for at least 200 mm beyond each end of
the joint. The tape shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be wrapped spirally around the joint and pipe
with at least 55% overlap per spiral.
(4)
The tape shall be moulded manually after application to take up the
contours of the parts being protected.
REPAIRS TO COATINGS AND LININGS

Repairs to coatings
and linings
5.65
Damage to coatings and linings of pipes for drainage works shall not be
repaired unless permitted by the Engineer. If permitted, repairs shall be
carried out using materials recommended by the manufacturer and

Thrust and anchor
blocks
5.66
(1)
Thrust or anchor blocks shall be used to resist forces at bends,
branches and stopends in pressure pipelines for drainage works except
where self anchoring joints are used. Concrete for thrust and anchor
blocks shall be Grade 20. The aggregates for the Grade 20 concrete
shall be natural stone, crushed rock, crushed concrete or recycled
aggregates.
(2)
The bearing face, and other faces stated in the Contract, of concrete
anchor and thrust blocks shall be cast directly against undisturbed ground.
The faces of excavations shall be trimmed to remove loose material before
concreting. Excavation required for the block beyond the trench width
shall be carried out after the pipe or fitting has been jointed. Excess
excavation beyond the face at the block shall be filled with concrete of the
same Grade as the block.
(3)
Internal pressure shall not be applied to the pipeline until thrust and
anchor blocks have developed the specified grade strength.
5.26
2006 Edition

Granular bed
5.67
(1)
The granular bed to pipelines for drainage works shall be
constructed as stated in Clauses 5.67(2) to (4).
(2)
Aggregates for the granular bed shall be deposited in the trench in
layers not exceeding 150 mm thick and for the complete width of the
trench. Each layer shall be compacted using a plate vibrator or by other
(3)
Holes shall be dug in the granular bed to prevent pipes resting on
the sockets and to allow the pipes to be jointed. The pipes shall be laid
directly on the granular bed. Temporary supports shall not be used.
(4)
After the pipes have been jointed, aggregate shall be deposited in
layers not exceeding 150 mm thick equally on both sides of the pipe to the
specified level for the complete width of the trench. Each layer shall be
compacted using a plate vibrator or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer.
Concrete bed, haunch

and surround
5.68
(1)
The concrete bed, haunch and surround to pipelines for drainage
works shall be constructed as stated in Clauses 5.68(2) to (7).
(2)
20.
Concrete for the concrete bed, haunch and surround shall be Grade
(3)
Polyethylene sheeting or a blinding layer shall be placed on the
trench bottom before concreting.
(4)
Pipes shall be supported at the required level by Grade 20 precast
concrete wedges, blocks or cradles or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer. One support shall be placed adjacent to each end of each pipe
and the spacing between supports shall not exceed 3 m. Compressible
sheeting shall be placed between the pipes and supports.
(5)
Flexible joints shall be formed in the concrete bed, haunch and
surround at flexible joints in pipelines. Joint filler shall be placed next to
the flexible joint in the pipeline and shall extend for the complete
thickness of the bed, haunch and surround.
(6)
Concrete shall be placed evenly over the complete width of the bed
and over the complete length of the pipe being concreted up to a level of
25 mm below the underside of the pipe. Concrete shall then be placed
on one side of the pipe only and worked under the pipe until the concrete
spreads under the pipe. Concrete shall then be placed equally on both
sides of the pipe to the specified level.
(7)
Pipes for drainage works which are 1 m or less below the surface
of a carriageway shall be protected with Grade 20 concrete surround.
(8)
The aggregate for Grade 20 concrete stated in (1) to (7) of this
clause shall be natural stone, crushed rock, crushed concrete, or recycled
aggregates if available and if proposed by the Contractor. Such Grade 20
concrete shall have the following minimum cementitious content:
5.27
2006 Edition
Exposure condition*
Minimum cementitious content (kg/m3)
Moderate
280
Severe
330
[* Exposure condition shall be as stated in the Contract]

Fill material surround
5.69
Fill material surround to pipelines for drainage works shall be deposited

and compacted as stated in Clauses 6.43 and 6.48.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: pipelines
for drainage works
5.70
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 5.70(2), pipelines for drainage works
shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The line of gravity pipelines shall be within 20 mm of the

specified line.
(b)
The invert level of gravity pipelines shall be within 6 mm of

the specified invert level and shall be such that there is no
backfall at any point.
(c)
The line of pressure pipelines shall be within 50 mm of the

specified line.
(d)
The invert level of pressure pipelines shall be within 20 mm

of the specified invert level.
(2)
Termination pipes in pipelines for drainage works which are
designed to connect to pipes or fittings laid by others shall comply with the
following requirements:
(a)
The position of the centre of the termination face of the pipe

in the longitudinal direction shall be within 10 mm of the
specified position.
(b)
The position of the centre of the termination face of the pipe

in the lateral direction shall be within 3 mm of the specified
position.
(c)
The gradient of the termination pipe shall be within 0.5 of

the specified gradient.
(d)
The invert level at the termination face of the pipe shall be

within 3 mm of the specified invert level.
CONNECTIONS
Connections to
structures
5.71
(1)
The joints between pipes for drainage works and structures into
which the pipes are built shall be watertight. Protective coatings shall be
removed over the length to be built in before the pipe is built in. Pipe
collars and sockets shall not be built in to structures.
5.28
2006 Edition
(2)
Two flexible joints shall be provided in pipelines adjacent to the
outside faces of structures into which pipes will be built. The distances
from the outside face of the structure to the first joint and from the first
joint to the second joint shall be as stated in Table 5.10.
(3)
The ends of pipes, which are built in to structures, shall be
temporarily sealed with a blank flange, brickwork or timber boarding as
instructed by the Engineer. The temporary seals shall be left in position
until the Engineer instructs their removal.
Table 5.10: Flexible joints at structures
Position of first flexible joint
From structure
Diameter of pipe
Minimum
Maximum
150 mm
not exceeding
450 mm
500 mm or
diameter of
pipe,
whichever
is less
exceeding 450 mm
but not exceeding
1050 mm
450 mm - 800 mm
900 mm - 1200 mm
exceeding 1050 mm
Connections to pipes
Distance of second
flexible joint from
first flexible joint
1500 mm - 1800 mm
5.72
(1)
Pipe saddles shall be connected to concrete or vitrified clay pipes
by bedding the saddle on a cement mortar bed and forming a cement
mortar fillet to provide at least 50 mm cover to the base of the saddle.
Cement mortar shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions 1:3 by
mass.
(2)
uPVC pipe saddles shall be fixed to uPVC pipes by means of a
purpose-made mechanical clip or solvent cement of a type recommended
by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, branch pipelines shall
be connected to main pipelines using Y-junctions of the same type and
strength as the stronger of the pipes being jointed. The angle of the
Y-junction shall be between 30 and 45.
(4)
Pipes which are to be connected to concrete or clay pipes without
a Y-junction or purpose-made pipe saddle shall be cut on a splay to form
a junction such that the incoming pipe is at an angle of between 30 and
60 to the main pipe upstream of the joint. The hole that is cut in the main
pipe to which a connection is to be made shall be of a suitable elliptical
shape to suit the cut end of the branch pipe. The length of the branch pipe
shall be such that:
(a)
The cut end of the pipe rests on the outside barrel of the
main pipe, and
5.29
2006 Edition
(b)
The cut pipe does not project inside the main pipe.
The joint between the cut pipe and the main pipe shall be sealed
externally and, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, sealed
internally flush with the main pipe with cement mortar. Cement mortar
shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions 1:3 by mass.
(5)
The positions of the pipe junctions relative to the manhole or
structure immediately downstream shall be measured and recorded
before backfilling.
(6)
The ends of connecting pipes, which are not required for
immediate use, shall be sealed with a blank flange, brickwork or other
methods instructed by the Engineer and the position measured and
recorded before backfilling.
MANHOLES,
CHANNELS
Manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.73
CHAMBERS,
GULLIES
AND
(1)
Bases, inverts and benching for precast concrete manholes shall
be constructed in-situ using Grade 20 concrete, unless otherwise stated in
the Contract.
(2)
Precast concrete units for manholes and chambers shall be set
vertically with step irons staggered and vertically aligned above each
other. Joints between precast units shall be the rebated type and shall be
sealed with cement mortar. Lifting holes shall be filled with cement
mortar. Surplus cement mortar shall be removed and joints shall be
pointed.
(3)
Concrete surround to manholes, chambers and gullies shall be
Grade 20 concrete. Joints in concrete surround shall be staggered by at
least 150 mm from joints in the precast units. Concrete surround to
gullies shall be placed up to the sides of the excavation.
(4)
The frames for manhole covers and gully gratings shall be set to
the same levels as the surrounding surface, allowing for falls and
cambers, using brickwork and/or concrete as specified in the Contract.
The number of courses of brickwork used below frames shall not exceed
three and the minimum grade for concrete shall be Grade 20.
(5)
Cement mortar for fixing manhole covers and gully gratings in
position and bonding brickwork shall consist of cement and sand in the
proportions 1:3 by mass.
(6)
Excavations around manholes and chambers in carriageways
shall be filled using Grade 10 concrete up to the carriageway formation
level. Fill material for excavations around other manholes and
chambers shall be fine fill material.
5.30
2006 Edition
Concrete open
channels
5.74
(1) The top surfaces of side-walls of concrete open channels shall be

constructed to the same levels as the adjoining permanent works. Excess
excavation beyond the channel walls shall be filled with Grade 10
concrete.
(2) Expansion joints in concrete channels shall comply with Section
16. Expansion joints shall be provided at intervals of 10 m maximum
in all concrete channels. Joints for channels, berm slabs, aprons and
walls etc. shall be on the same alignment.
MARKER BLOCKS
Marker blocks
5.75
(1)
The ends of pipes that do not terminate at a manhole, chamber, gully
or structure shall be marked with marker blocks. The blocks shall be 150 mm x
150 mm x 150 mm and shall be constructed using Grade 20 concrete.
(2)
A wire shall be connected from a hook on the underside of the
block to the plug on the end of pipes.
(3)
Marker blocks shall be set flush with level of the adjacent permanent
works and shall have the letters `CD' marked on the upper surface.
INSTALLATION OF PENSTOCKS AND VALVES

Installation of
5.76
(1)
Penstocks and valves shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and in the closed position.
(2)
Frames for penstocks shall be fixed in position leaving a 20 mm
gap between the frame and the concrete surface. Contact between the
penstock door and frame shall be checked using a feeler gauge 0.1 mm
thick or other size recommended by the manufacturer.
(3)
Box-outs and rebates for penstock and valve frames and gaps
between frames and concrete surfaces shall be filled with cement mortar.
(4)
After installation, penstocks and valves shall be cleaned and
moving parts shall be lightly greased and checked for ease of operation.
Penstocks and valves shall be left in a closed position.
PIPES AND MANHOLES TO BE ABANDONED

Pipes and manholes
to be abandoned
5.77
(1)
If the top of a pipe or culvert, or the bottom of a manhole,
chamber or gully, which is to be abandoned is 1 m or less below the
finished ground level, the pipe, manhole, chamber or gully shall be
removed and disposed of unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
The void shall be filled with foam concrete, granular fill material, special
fill material (or recycled aggregates proposed by the Contractor) as
directed by the Engineer.
5.31
2006 Edition
(2)
If the top of a pipe or culvert, or the bottom of a manhole,
chamber or gully, is more than 1 m below the finished ground level, the
pipe, culvert, manhole, chamber or gully shall be filled with foam
concrete or grout as stated in Clause 5.35.
(3)
Manholes, chambers and gullies that are to be abandoned shall be
demolished to 1 m below finished ground level unless otherwise stated
in the Contract. Abandoned pipes, culverts, manholes, chambers and
gullies shall be filled with foam concrete or grout, by pumping or by
gravity. The lowest point of abandoned pipelines shall be sealed with
concrete, bricks or by other methods approved by the Engineer. Filling
shall start from the lowest point and shall continue until all voids are
completely filled.
CLEANING OF PIPELINES
Cleaning of pipelines
5.78
(1)
Pipelines for drainage works shall be cleaned by pigging, by
high- pressure water jetting or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Manholes and chambers shall be cleaned and washed. Cleaning shall
be carried out after:
(a)
the pipeline has been tested,
(b)
Temporary Works required for testing have been removed,

and
(c)
parts of the pipeline removed for testing have been

reconnected.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, pipelines shall be
cleaned not more than 7 days before the pipeline is handed over.
(3)
Materials excavated/cleared from pipelines shall be disposed of
at dumping site(s) provided by the Contractor or the Employer. They
shall be handled in an environmentally responsible manner without
causing pollution or nuisance to the public as far as possible. In
particular :
(a)
Materials excavated/cleared shall either be placed in bags

as soon as possible after excavation or, if they are
temporarily stockpiled on roads/footpaths or areas close to
the public, be covered and underlain by tarpaulin sheets to
minimize fouling of the ground and escape of odour. The
ground shall be cleansed after removal of the materials.
(b) The materials shall be dewatered before disposal in

accordance with the requirements of the dumping site if
necessary.
During transportation of the materials,
measures shall be taken to prevent leakage of foul water
onto roads and public areas and escape of odour.
5.32
2006 Edition
INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
Inspection of
pipelines
5.79
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the cleanliness, bore,

linearity and joints of pipelines of 450 mm diameter or less shall be
checked by pulling a mandrel through the completed pipeline, or parts of
the pipeline if permitted by the Engineer, after cleaning. The mandrel
shall be 750 mm long and 12 mm less in diameter than the nominal
diameter of the pipe.
Inspection of
pipelines by CCTV
5.80
The procedure for internal inspection of pipelines by CCTV shall be as

stated in Appendix 5.1.
TESTING: PIPES FOR DRAINAGE WORKS

Batch:
pipes for drainage
works
5.81
A batch of pipes or fittings for drainage works is any quantity of pipes or

fittings of the same type and nominal diameter, manufactured by the
same manufacturer, covered by the same certificates and delivered to the
Site at any one time.
Samples: pipes for

drainage works
5.82
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, one sample of pipe for

drainage works and each type of fitting shall be provided from each 50
pipes or fittings or part thereof in a batch.
Testing: pipes for

drainage works
5.83
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, each sample of pipes
and fittings for drainage works shall be tested in accordance with the
relevant British Standard.
(2)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with the following:

Concrete pipes and fittings
: BS 5911-1
Vitrified clay pipes,

fittings and joints
: BS 65
Ductile iron pipes and fittings
: BS 4772
Grey iron pipes and fittings
: BS 4622
uPVC pipes for industrial

purposes
: BS 3506
uVC soil and ventilating

pipes, fittings and accessories
: BS 4514
uPVC rainwater goods
: BS 4576: Part 1
uPVC underground drain

pipes and fittings
: BS 4660
Plastic waste pipes and

fittings
: BS 5255
uPVC pipes and fittings for

gravity sewers
: BS 5481
5.33
Amd 4/2010
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
pipes for drainage
works
5.84
(1)
If the result of any test required in accordance with the relevant
British Standard for pipes and fittings for drainage works does not
comply with the specified requirements for the test, one additional
sample shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for the
property shall be carried out.
(2)
The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified
requirements for the property if the result of any additional test does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property.
TESTING: AGGREGATES FOR GRANULAR BED

Batch:
aggregates for
granular bed
5.85
A batch of aggregates for a granular bed is any quantity of aggregates for

granular bed of the same type, produced at the same time in the same
place, covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site at any
one time.
Samples:
aggregates for
granular bed
5.86
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of
aggregates for a granular bed shall be provided from each batch of
aggregates for granular bed delivered to the Site.
(2)
The size of each sample shall be 40 kg.
(3)
102.
The method of sampling shall be in accordance with BS 812: Part
(4)
The moisture content of the sample shall be representative of the
moisture content of the material in the batch.
Testing:
aggregates for
granular bed
5.87
Each sample of aggregates for a granular bed shall be tested to determine

the particle size distribution and the ten percent fines value in
accordance with BS 812:Part 103 and BS 812:Part 111, and the
compaction fraction value in accordance with Appendix 5.2.
compaction fraction
value
5.88
The results of tests for compaction fraction value of aggregates for a

granular bed shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The compaction fraction value for a bed for pipes not

exceeding 300 mm nominal diameter shall not exceed 0.3.
(b)
The compaction fraction value for a bed for pipes exceeding

300 mm nominal diameter shall not exceed 0.15.
TESTING: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

MANHOLES, CHAMBERS AND GULLIES
Batch:
manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.89
FOR
A batch of precast concrete units for manholes, chambers or gullies is

any quantity of precast concrete units for manholes, chambers or gullies
of the same type and size, manufactured by the same manufacturer,
covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site at any one
time.
5.34
2006 Edition
Samples:
manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.90
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of precast units

for manholes, chambers or gullies shall be provided from each 50
precast concrete units for manholes, chambers or gullies or part thereof
in a batch.
Testing:
manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.91
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, each sample of
precast concrete units for manholes, chambers or gullies shall be tested
in accordance with the relevant British Standard.
(2)
Non-compliance:
manholes, chambers
and gullies
5.92

Precast concrete units
for manholes
: BS 5911-3
Inspection chambers
and gullies
: BS 5911: Part 2.
Amd 4/2010
(1)
If the result of any test required in accordance with the relevant
British Standard for precast concrete units for manholes, chambers or
gullies does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, one
additional sample shall be provided from the same batch and additional
tests for the property shall be carried out.
(2)
TESTING: MANHOLE COVERS, GULLY GRATINGS

AND KERB OVERFLOW WEIRS
Batch:
covers, gratings and
weirs
5.93
A batch of manhole covers, gully gratings or kerb overflow weirs is any

quantity of covers, gratings or weirs of the same type, manufactured by
the same manufacturer, covered by the same certificates and delivered to
the Site at any one time.
Samples:
weirs
5.94
One sample of manhole covers, gully gratings or kerb overflow weirs

shall be provided from each 20 covers, gratings or weirs or part thereof
in a batch.
Testing:
weirs
5.95
(1)
Each sample of manhole covers, gully gratings or kerb overflow
weirs shall be weighed and subjected to a load test.
(2)
The method of testing shall be as stated in Appendix 5.3. The
test loads shall be as stated in Table 5.6 and Table 5.7.
Compliance criterion:
resistance to fracture
of covers and gratings
5.96
Manhole covers and gully gratings shall withstand the test load without
fracturing or cracking.
Non-compliance:
mass of covers,
gratings and weirs
5.97
(1)
If any manhole cover, gully grating or kerb overflow weir does
not comply with the specified requirements for mass, every cover,
grating and frame in the batch shall be weighed to determine its mass.
(2)
If any cover, grating or weir does not comply with the specified
requirements for mass, it shall not be used in the permanent work.
5.35
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
resistance to fracture
of covers and gratings
5.98
(1)
If any manhole cover or gully grating does not comply with the
specified requirements for resistance to fracture, two additional samples
shall be provided from the same batch and tested to determine their
resistance to fracture.
(2)
requirements for resistance to fracture if the result of any additional test
does not comply with the specified requirements for resistance to
fracture.
TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF PENSTOCKS

Testing:
watertightness of
penstocks
watertightness of
penstocks
Non-compliance:
watertightness of
penstocks
5.99
5.100
5.101
(1)
Penstocks that are to be tested shall be tested for watertightness
after installation by applying pressure using a head of water applied to
one face of the penstock and no head of water on the other face. The test
pressure and the face on which the pressure is to be applied shall be as
(2)
The method of testing shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
The test pressure shall be maintained for 24 hours.
The results of tests for watertightness of penstocks shall comply with the
(a)
There shall be no leaks through the penstock during the test.
(b)
There shall be no leaks or damp patches visible at the joint

between the penstock and the structure during the test.
If the result of any test for watertightness of penstocks does not comply
with the specified requirements, the Contractor shall investigate the
reason. Remedial or replacement work approved by the Engineer shall
be carried out and the penstock shall be re-tested.
TESTING: GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE

WORKS
Testing:
gravity pipelines for
drainage works
5.102
(1)
Gravity pipelines for drainage works shall be tested as stated in
Clause 5.102(2) to (6).
(2)
Gravity pipelines for sewage shall be tested by the methods stated
in Table 5.11 at the following times:
(a)
After the pipes have been jointed and the bedding has been
placed and immediately before haunch or surround is placed
or fill material is deposited, and
(b)
After haunch and surround has been placed and fill material
has been deposited and compacted, and
(c)
Not more than 7 days before the pipeline is handed over.

5.36
2006 Edition
(3)
Gravity pipelines for surface water shall be tested by the methods
stated in Table 5.11 at the following times:
(a)
placed and immediately before haunch or surround is placed
or fill material is deposited, or
(b)
has been deposited and compacted.
(4)
Water tests and air tests on pipelines shall be carried out on the
complete pipeline between manholes, chambers and structures.
Pipelines shall not be tested in parts unless permitted by the Engineer or
unless the specified test pressure would otherwise be exceeded. Short
branch pipelines shall be tested with the main pipeline and long branch
pipelines shall be tested separately.
(5)
Infiltration tests shall be carried out on the complete pipeline
between manholes, chambers and structures, including manholes,
chambers and branches within the pipeline system.
(6)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with Appendix 5.4.
Table 5.11: Testing gravity pipelines

Type of
pipeline
Sewage
Sewage
Diameter
of pipeline
Not exceeding
900 mm
Exceeding
900 mm
Surface
water
Not exceeding
900 mm
Surface
water
Exceeding
900 mm
Time of test
Method of testing
As Clause 5.102(2)(a)
Water test or air test
As Clause 5.102(2)(b)
As Clause 5.102(2)(c)
Infiltration test
Visual inspection
As Clause 5.102(2)(c)
Infiltration test
or
Visual inspection
5.37
2006 Edition
drainage works
Non-compliance:
drainage works
5.103
5.104
The results of tests on gravity pipelines for drainage works shall comply
with the following requirements:
(a)
The leakage of water from the pipeline determined by the

water test shall not exceed the permitted leakage calculated in
accordance with Clause 5.4.8 of Appendix 5.4.
(b)
There shall be no discernable leakage from the pipe or from

any joint during the water test.
(c)
The air pressure shall remain above 75 mm head of water at

the end of the air test.
(d)
There shall be no infiltration or damage to pipes or joints as

determined by the visual inspection.
If the result of any test on gravity pipelines does not comply with the
specified requirements for the test, the Contractor shall investigate the
reason. Remedial or replacement work approved by the Engineer shall be
carried out and the pipeline shall be re-tested.
TESTING: PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE

WORKS
Testing
pressure pipelines for
drainage works
5.105
(1)
Pressure pipelines for drainage works shall be tested as stated in
Clauses 5.105(2) to (7).
(2)
The pipeline shall be tested at the following times:

(a)
placed and immediately before haunch or surround is placed or
fill material is deposited, and
(b)
has been deposited and compacted.
(3)
The test stated in Clause 5.105(2)(a) shall not be carried out on parts
of a pipeline unless permitted by the Engineer or unless the specified test
pressure would otherwise be exceeded. The test stated in Clause
5.105(2)(b) shall be carried out on the complete pipeline.
(4)
The test pressure shall be as stated in the Contract. If the test
pressure is not stated in the Contract, the test pressure shall be 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure in the part of the pipeline tested.
(5)
Tests shall not be carried out simultaneously on more than one
pipeline in the same trench.
(6)
(7)
Testing of pressure pipelines by means of tests on individual joints
shall not be carried out instead of tests stated in Clauses 5.105(2) to (6)
unless permitted by the Engineer. If permitted, the method of testing and
the compliance criteria shall be as approved by the Engineer.
5.38
2006 Edition
drainage works
Non-compliance:
drainage works
5.106
5.107
The results of tests on pressure pipelines for drainage works shall comply
(a)

pressure test shall not exceed the permitted leakage calculated
in accordance with Clause 5.5.4 of Appendix 5.5.
(b)
There shall be no discernable leakage of water from the

pipeline or from any joint during the pressure test.
If the result of any test on pressure pipelines for drainage works does not
comply with the specified requirements for the test, the Contractor shall
investigate the reason. Remedial or replacement work approved by the
Engineer shall be carried out and the pipeline shall be re-tested.
REPAIR OF PIPELINES
INTERNAL LINING
General
5.108
AND
CULVERTS
BY
(1)
The internal lining for repair of cracking and leakage in drainage
pipelines and culverts shall be specifically developed and manufactured
by a proprietary manufacturer for such purpose, and be of the following
types:
(a)
Lining with cured-in-place pipes (CIPP);
(b)
Other types of lining approved by the Engineer.
(2)
The lining shall be installed in the whole length of pipeline/culvert
from manhole to manhole, installed in part of the pipeline/culvert between
two manholes, or be a sleeve for repair of a short section of the
pipeline/culvert as specified in the Contract.
(3)
Grouting of the annular space between the lining and the wall of
the existing pipe shall comply with Section 7 Part 4.
Materials
5.109
(1)
Cured-in-place lining shall be a tube of fibrous materials
manufactured from synthetic or mineral fibre, impregnated with a resin
that is thermosetting, ambient-cured or otherwise. The tube may contain
plastic coatings and/or reinforcement material. The materials shall
comply with Section 4 of Water Industry Specification WIS 4-34-04:
Specification for Renovation of Gravity Sewers by Lining with
Cured-in-place Pipes, Water Research Centre, March 1995: Issue 2 or
equivalent standards.
(2)
Other types of linings shall conform to internationally recognised
specifications and their manufacturers specifications.
5.39
2006 Edition
Design of lining
5.110
The lining shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with the

procedures given in Sewerage Rehabilitation Manual, 4th Edition,
Water Research Centre, 2001. The material shall be designed to resist
external loading as well as stresses developed during installation and
during its lifetime. Linings for repair of pipes with leakage and/or minor
structural deficiencies only shall be able to resist external loading due to
ground water pressure. Linings for repair of pipes in poor structural
condition which cannot withstand existing design loading shall be able
to resist all external loading including traffic loads, earth loads and
ground water pressure. The external loadings to be designed for are
either specified in the Contract or will be determined by the Engineer on
a case-by-case basis.
Submissions
5.111
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed lining materials and

methods of carrying out the lining works shall be submitted for
approval by the Engineer before commencement of works :
(a)
Materials and equipment for the works, method of

installation, method of sampling and design statement with
supporting calculations;
(b)
Reports of tests on the lining materials including type tests

on short term and long term structural properties to support
the design calculations;
(c)
Performance tests to be carried out on the finished lining

and the compliance criteria of such tests;
(d)
Arrangements for dealing with lateral branch connections

along the pipeline to be lined, if any;
(e)
Where grouting is required, the details of grout mix,

including admixtures;
(f)
Where grouting is required, the method of grouting,

including grouting stages, order of working, re-grouting,
controlling of seepage, methods of monitoring and
instrumentation.
(2)
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a
certificate showing that the manufacturer has provided adequate training
to the Contractors staff in respect of the relevant skills in proper
production, handling and installation of the lining. The certified
personnel shall submit a method statement to the Engineer.
5.40
2006 Edition
Installation of lining
5.112
(1)
The lining shall be installed by means of trenchless method. No
excavation is permitted unless the Contractor can demonstrate that access
through manholes is not adequate for installation.
(2)
Before installation, the Contractor shall clean and clear the
pipeline thoroughly and remove all loose material, deposits and
obstructions that may affect the proper installation of the lining.
(3)
After cleaning the surfaces of the pipeline and before installation
of the lining, a CCTV confirmatory survey shall be carried out as
required. All pertinent information such as the position, size and angle
of approach of all lateral connections shall be recorded and logged. The
Contractor shall submit a sample log sheet to the Engineer for approval.
On completion of installation of lining and before re-commissioning the
pipeline, a CCTV post-installation survey shall be carried out. The
Contractor shall provide two copies of a video record of the CCTV
confirmatory survey and the post-installation survey, where required to be
carried out, and two copies of log sheets to the Engineer within 2 working
days of completion of the lining works.
(4)
The method of installation shall follow the manufacturers
recommendations, or shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall produce a smooth, corrosion-resistant and durable internal lining of
adequate strength with its outer surface in close and firm contact with the
pipeline interior after completing the installation.
(5)
For in-situ internal sleeve lining, the sleeve shall be brought into
position in the pipeline/culvert and installed by an inflatable packer,
mandrel or other approved remote-controlled method.
(6)
During installation, the Contractor shall, where necessary, provide
temporary diversion of all existing flow from the pipe/box culvert and its
lateral branch connections thus providing dry and workable conditions for
the Works.
(7)
The annular space between the lining and the existing pipe wall, if
any, shall be filled by pressure grouting or other methods recommended
by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. For linings designed
to be close-fit against the existing pipe wall, the Contractor shall still
check the ends of the lining for presence of voids between the lining and
the existing pipe wall after completion of installation, and seal up such
voids by an approved sealant to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(8)
For cured-in-place linings, the finished lining shall, as far as
possible, be free of visual defects including foreign inclusions, dry spots,
air bubbles, pinholes and pimples. Wrinkling of more than 2% of the
internal pipe diameter or the least internal dimension of the box culvert
will not be accepted.
(9)
After completion of installation of lining, lateral branch
connections sealed up by the lining shall be re-opened using a robotic
cutting device with CCTV camera, or other trenchless methods approved
by the Engineer. The annular gap between the liner and the lateral shall
be sealed up.
5.41
2006 Edition
Performance tests on
internal lining
materials
5.113
(1)
The Contractor shall carry out performance tests on the lining
materials to check compliance against the standards/material properties
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
(2)
For cured-in-place lining, the wall thickness and the short-term
flexural (bending) properties on samples shall be determined as the
performance control tests on the finished lining. The method of test
shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer, and
shall be selected from the following standards (one test for flexural
properties and one for wall thickness) :
Test on
Flexural properties
Wall thickness
Standards
BS EN ISO 178: 2003;
ISO 178: 2001;
BS 2782: Part 10: Method 1005: 1977;
EN 63: 1977;
ASTM D790-2000
BS 2782: Part 6: Method 630A: 1994;
ISO 4593: 1993;
BS 2782: Part 6: Method 631A: 1993;
ISO 4591: 1992
The wall thickness shall be determined at a minimum of 5 locations.

The measuring device shall be accurate to 0.1mm. The wall
thickness at all points shall be not less than the specified design
thickness and may be up to 15% greater.
If the flexural properties are tested according to BS EN ISO 178 : 1997,
BS 2782 : Part 3 : Method 335A :1993, ISO 178 : 1993, the cross head
displacement rate shall be 10mm/min.
The 90% lower confidence limits of short term flexural modulus Eo,
flexural stress at first break b and flexural strain at first break b
shall be not less than the respective design values declared by the
supplier.
If any result of the above tests on flexural properties of the samples fails
to meet the acceptance criteria, the Contractor shall carry out test on
samples taken from the finished lining to determine the creep modulus
in accordance with Clause 8.7 of Water Industry Specification WIS
4-34-04, March 1995: Issue 2, (1000 hours or as otherwise agreed) for
validation against the manufacturers creep data.
If any wall thickness determined in the sample testing fails to meet the
design thickness but the result of tests on flexural properties is up to the
acceptance criteria, the actual wall thickness measured on finished lining
shall not be less than the design thickness.
(3)
For in-situ internal sleeve lining, the Contractor shall, in addition
to other tests specified in this clause, also test the repaired location for
leakage by a proprietary joint tester according to the testing procedures
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The
test results shall satisfy the compliance criteria equivalent to those stated
in Clause 5.103 (for gravity pipelines) or Clause 5.106 (for pressure
pipelines).
5.42
2006 Edition
(4)
For other types of lining, they shall be sampled and tested
according to internationally recognised specifications and their
manufacturers specifications, and/or as specified by the Engineer as a
condition of approval in accordance with sub-clause (1) of Clause
5.111.
(5)
If the result of any performance test on the samples fails to meet
the compliance criteria, the Engineer may instruct that the test be
repeated on samples taken from the finished lining for validation against
the manufacturers data. The number of samples of the finished lining
to be taken and the positions of taking samples shall be determined by
the Engineer.
(6)
The Contractor shall propose 3 laboratories capable of carrying
out the required tests for selection and approval by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall select one laboratory for testing and one laboratory as
backup in case the performance of the selected laboratory is
unsatisfactory. As required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide assistance in delievering the samples to the approved laboratory
for carrying out the performance tests based on the Contractors
approved testing proposal. Test reports and the tested samples shall be
sent to the Engineer directly by the approved laboratory.
(7)
The maximum number of samples which may be ordered by the
Engineer for each type of performance test shall be one per 50m of lined
pipe/culvert.
5.43
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 5.1
CCTV INSPECTION OF PIPELINES
Scope
5.1.1
This method covers the internal inspection of pipelines by means of

closed circuit television.
Equipment
5.1.2
The following equipment is required:

(a)
A CCTV colour camera with integral lighting unit. The camera

shall be a type designed and constructed for the specified
purpose and shall be capable of operating in 100% relative
humidity. The camera shall be fitted with a rotating mirror for
complete circumferential viewing. The system shall be capable
of producing an accurate, clear and high quality picture of the
entire periphery of the pipe on the monitor screen and recording
tape. The camera and lighting unit shall be mounted on a
self-propelled crawler or on skids linked to a manual or power
operated winch.
(b)
A monitor screen that displays the camera view during the

inspection. The monitor screen shall be housed in covered
accommodation with facilities for inspection by the Engineer
and others.
(c)
A screen writer which displays on the monitor screen details of

the inspection including date, location, pipe material, diameter
of pipe, direction of view and comments on the condition of the
pipe.
(d)
A measuring device that displays the camera location

automatically on the monitor screen. The device shall be
capable of measuring the location to within an accuracy of 0.1%
of the length of the pipeline or 0.3m whichever is the greater.
(e)
A control unit which controls camera movement, lighting

intensity, focusing and recording.
(f)
A video recording system approved by the Engineer to record

the inspection and information displayed on the monitor screen.
(g)
A digital camera capable of producing photographs with the

date.
5.44
2006 Edition
Procedure
Recording of results
5.1.3
5.1.4
The procedure shall be as follows:

(a)
The camera shall be moved through the pipeline in the direction

instructed by the Engineer. The speed of the CCTV camera in
the sewer or drain shall be limited to not more than 0.1m/s for
sewers and drains of diameter less than or equal to 200mm,
0.15m/s for sewers and drains of diameter exceeding 200mm, or
such other speed as agreed by the Engineer to enable all details
to be extracted from the video recording system. If the camera
cannot pass through the complete pipeline in one operation, the
inspection may be carried out from both ends of the pipeline.
(b)
The camera shall be stopped whenever instructed by the

Engineer to allow inspection by the Engineer.
(c)
The video recording system shall be operated during the

complete inspection to provide a continuous record of the
inspection and information on the monitor screen.
(d)
Photographs of the monitor screen shall be taken whenever

(1)
Records of the inspections shall be kept by the Contractor on the
Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of
completion of the inspection. The report shall contain the following
details:
(a) Key map showing pipelines inspected and associated
manholes, chambers and structures,
(b) Tables listing details of inspection, including date, location,
pipe material, diameter of pipe, chainage, manholes,
junctions and other features and the condition of pipes and
joints.
The condition of pipes and joints shall be
illustrated by a coding systems in accordance with the
Manual of Sewer Condition Classification 4th Edition
(2003) published by the U.K. National Water Council, and
(c) A summary showing the number and type of defects in each
pipeline inspected.
The summary shall include
photographs to illustrate degree of mortar loss, size of a
crack/fracture, size of a void or any other quantifiable
defect. A suitable metric scale shall be included and be
clearly visible and in focus within the photograph.
5.45
2006 Edition
(2)
The following items shall be submitted at the same time as the
report:
(a) Video providing a continuous record of the inspection and
information. The media shall be of high quality, new and
unused before recording and shall be of a digital format
(DVD+/-R or CD-R) or Video Home System (VHS) format,
subject to approval by the Engineer; and
(b) Photographs of the monitor screen including date and
chainage. The photographs shall be 3R size and shall be
mounted in photograph albums.
5.46
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 5.2
DETERMINATION OF THE COMPACTION FRACTION
VALUE OF AGGREGATES FOR GRANULAR BED
Scope
5.2.1
This method covers the determination of the compaction fraction value of

aggregates for granular bed.
Apparatus
5.2.2
The following apparatus is required:
Procedure
Calculation
5.2.3
5.2.4
(a)
A steel open-ended cylinder, 150 mm internal diameter by 250 mm

high, with a wall thickness of not less than 3.5mm.
(b)
A steel rammer of 40 mm diameter weighing approximately 1 kg.
(c)
A steel rule calibrated to 1 mm.

(a)
The sample shall be placed on a clean surface and shall be divided

by quartering or by using a riffle box to obtain a specimen weighing
approximately 10 kg.
(b)
The cylinder shall be placed on a firm level surface and shall be

filled without tamping with material taken from the sample.
Surplus material shall be struck off level with the top of the cylinder,
and cleared from the area around the cylinder.
(c)
The cylinder shall be lifted clear of the contents and placed

alongside the material.
(d)
Approximately one quarter of the material shall be placed in the

cylinder and compacted using the rammer until no further
compaction can be achieved. The procedure shall be repeated for
each of the remaining three quarters of the material. The top
surface shall be compacted as level as practicable.
(e)
The distance (d) from the top of the cylinder to the top surface of the
material shall be measured to the nearest 1 mm.
The compaction fraction value of the material shall be calculated from the
equation:
Compaction fraction value = d/h
Where:
-
d is the distance from the top of the cylinder to the top surface
of the material (mm),
h is the height of the cylinder (mm).
5.47
2006 Edition
Reporting of results
5.2.5
The following shall be reported:

(a)
Identification of sample.
(b)
The compaction fraction value to the nearest 0.01.
(c)
Source and type of material.
(d)
Date of test.
(e)
That the test method used was in accordance with this Specification.
5.48
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 5.3
DETERMINATION OF THE RESISTANCE TO
FRACTURE OF MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY
GRATINGS
Scope
5.3.1
This method covers the determination of the resistance to fracture of

manhole covers and gully gratings by means of a load test.
Equipment
5.3.2
Procedure
5.3.3
5.3.4
(a)
The manufacturer's recommended frame for the manhole cover or

gully grating or a fabricated test frame of a type agreed by the
Engineer which will simulate the normal conditions of use of the
cover or grating.
(b)
A circular hardwood bearing block faced with hard rubber or other

resilient material. The diameter of the block shall be as stated in
Table 5.6 or Table 5.7 for the relevant cover or grating. The block
shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that the load is equally
distributed over the whole area of the block.
(c)
Test loads.
(d)
Equipment for measuring the loads applied, readable and accurate to

0.05 t or 2% of the specified test load, whichever is greater.

(a)
The full bearing area of the frame shall be rigidly supported.
(b)
The cover or grating shall be placed in the frame. The bearing

block shall be placed centrally on the cover or grating.
(c)
The specified test load as stated in Table 5.6 and 5.7 shall be applied
without shock.
(d)
The specified test load shall be maintained for at least 30 seconds

and removed.

(a)
Identification of sample.
(b)
The load applied, to the nearest 0.05 t or 2% of the specified test

load, whichever is greater.
(c)
Details of any fracture or cracks.
(d)
5.49
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 5.4
TESTS ON GRAVITY PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE
WORKS
Scope
5.4.1
This method covers water tests, air tests, visual inspections and infiltration
tests on gravity pipelines for drainage works.
Equipment
5.4.2
Procedure:
before tests and
inspections
Procedure:
water test
5.4.3
5.4.4
(a)
Expanding disc stoppers, air bags or other methods of sealing pipes

agreed by the Engineer.
(b)
Struts and wedges.
(c)
Force pump for water test.
(d)
Standpipe for water test.
(e)
Measuring vessel for water test, readable and accurate to 0.01 litre.
(f)
U-tube for air test.
(g)
Trolleys to obtain access inside pipelines for visual inspections.

Mechanical fans shall be provided to ensure that an adequate air
supply is available. Engine-driven fans shall be fitted with a
flexible exhaust or other methods of keeping exhaust fumes clear of
the fresh air intake.
The procedure before tests and inspections shall be as follows:

(a)
Debris and water shall be removed from the pipeline.
(b)
Openings to the pipeline shall be sealed using expanding disc

stoppers, air bags or other methods agreed by the Engineer and the
seals secured against movement.
The procedure for the water test shall be as follows:

(a)
The pipeline shall be filled with water and shall be kept filled for
two hours before testing starts to allow absorption to take place.
(b)
A test pressure of 1.2 m head of water above the soffit of the pipe at
the high end shall be applied at the standpipe and maintained for 30
minutes. The test pressure applied shall not exceed 6 m head of
water at the invert of the low end of the pipe.
(c)
The head of water at the standpipe shall be topped up at 5-minute

intervals during the test, and shall be filled to the specified head at
the end of the test period. The amount of water added to the
standpipe shall be measured using the measuring vessel.
(d)
The leakage of water from the pipeline shall be measured as the

amount of water added to maintain the specified head of water.
5.50
2006 Edition
Procedure:
air test
5.4.5
The procedure for the air test shall be as follows:

(a)
Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a test pressure of slightly
more than 100 mm of water is registered on a U-tube manometer
connected to the pipeline. Five minutes shall be allowed for
stabilisation of the air temperature, and the air pressure shall then be
adjusted to 100 mm of water.
(b)
The pressure shall be read from the U-tube at the end of a

five-minute period without further pumping.
Procedure:
visual inspection
5.4.6
The inside of the pipeline shall be inspected visually, and infiltration or

damage to pipes or joints shall be recorded.
Procedure:
infiltration test
5.4.7
The procedure for the infiltration test shall be in accordance with BS 8005:
Part 1 Clause 13.6.
Calculation
5.4.8
The permitted leakage of water from the pipeline during the water test shall
be calculated from the equation:
Permitted leakage = d x l x
t
60
litre
where:
5.4.9
d is the internal diameter of the pipe (m),
l is the length of pipeline tested (m),
t is the test period (min).

(a)
The nominal internal diameter of the pipe.
(b)
The location and length of pipeline tested to the nearest 0.3 m.
(c)
The test pressure applied during the water test to the nearest 0.01 m,
and during the air test to the nearest 1 mm head of water.
(d)
The test period to the nearest 1 min.
(e)
The leakage and permitted leakage for the water test to the nearest
0.1 litre.
(f)
The amount of infiltration for the infiltration test to the nearest 0.1
litre.
(g)
Details of any discernable leakage of water from the pipe or from

any joint during the water test.
(h)
5.51
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 5.5
TESTS ON PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR DRAINAGE
WORKS
Scope
5.5.1
This method covers the determination of the leakage of water from

pressure pipelines for drainage works by means of a pressure test.
Equipment
5.5.2
Procedure
5.5.3
(a)
Blank flanges or caps.
(b)
Struts and wedges.
(c)
Temporary concrete blocks or other anchors.
(d)
Force pump.
(e)
Pressure gauge, readable and accurate to 0.01 m head of water.

The gauge shall be either a conventional circular type of at least 300
mm diameter or shall be a digital indicator type.
(f)
Measuring vessel, readable and accurate to 0.01 litre.

(a)
Pipes and valves shall be cleaned and the operation of valves shall
be checked. Air valves shall be isolated.
(b)
Blank flanges or caps shall be fixed to the ends of the pipeline, or

part of the pipeline, to be tested. Tests shall not be made against
closed valves unless permitted by the Engineer.
(c)
The blank flanges and caps and closed valves against which tests are
made shall be secured with struts and wedges against temporary
concrete blocks or other anchors. The blocks shall be completed
and shall have hardened sufficiently before testing starts. Thrust
and anchor blocks, pipe straps and other devices required to prevent
movement of pipes and fittings shall be completed before testing
starts.
(d)
The pipeline shall be filled with water and all air shall be removed.
Measures shall be taken during filling to provide free outlets for air
and to prevent water hammer.
(e)
The pressure in the pipeline shall be increased to working pressure

and the pipeline shall remain filled at this pressure for 2 hours to
allow absorption to take place and to achieve conditions that are as
stable as practicable.
(f)
The pressure in the pipeline shall be increased slowly by pumping

water into the pipeline using a force pump until the specified test
pressure is reached at the lowest part of the pipeline being tested.
5.52
2006 Edition
Calculation
5.5.4
(g)
The pressure in the pipeline shall be maintained at the specified test

pressure, using the force pump if necessary, for a period of at least 1
hour.
(h)
At the end of the 1 hour period the pressure shall be increased, if

necessary, to the specified test pressure and pumps and water supply
points shall be disconnected.
(i)
The pipeline shall be left in this condition for a test period of 1 hour.
No water shall be allowed to enter the pipeline during the test
period.
(j)
At the end of the test period the pressure in the pipeline shall be
recorded.
(k)
The pumps and water supply points shall be reconnected and the
pressure shall be increased to the specified test pressure.
(l)
Water shall be drawn off from the pipeline until the pressure in the
pipeline is the same as at the end of the test period. The leakage of
water from the pipeline shall be measured as the amount of water
drawn off.
(1)
The average test pressure (P) shall be calculated as the average of
the specified test pressure and the pressure at the end of the test period.
(2)
The permitted leakage of water from the pipeline during the pressure
test shall be calculated from the equation:
Permitted leakage = d x l x t
12
where:
5.5.5
xP
litre
d is the nominal internal diameter of the pipe (m),
l is the length of pipeline tested (km),
t is the test period (hr),
P is the average test pressure (m).

(a)
The nominal internal diameter of the pipe.
(b)
The location and length of pipeline tested to the nearest 0.3 m.
(c)
The test period to the nearest one minute.
(d)
The specified test pressure to the nearest 0.01 m head of water.
(e)
The pressure at the end of the test period to the nearest 0.01 m head
of water.
(f)
The average test pressure to the nearest 0.01 m head of water.
5.53
2006 Edition
(g)
The leakage and permitted leakage to the nearest 0.1 litre.
(h)
Details of any discernable leakage of water from the pipeline during

the test.
(i)
5.54
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 6
EARTHWORKS
6.1
2006 Edition
6.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 6
EARTHWORKS
GENERAL
Reclamation
6.01
Reclamation shall comply with Section 21 except as stated in this Section.
Trip-ticket System
6.02
The disposal of construction and demolition materials generated from the

Contract shall comply with the Trip-ticket System promulgated by the
Environment, Transport and Works Bureau.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Areas of fill
6.03
Areas of fill are areas within the Site, including areas in embankments,
platforms and slopes and in excavations for structures, pits and trenches, in
which fill material is deposited and compacted as part of the permanent work.
Earthworks final
surface
6.04
Earthworks final surface is the surface to which the work included in

Section 6 is finished.
Inert construction
and demolition
material
6.05
Inert construction and demolition material shall mean rock, rubble, earth,
soil, concrete, asphalt, brick, tile and masonry generated from construction
and demolition works.
Earthworks material
6.06
Earthworks material may consist of soil, rock, or inert construction and

demolition material on or below the Site at the commencement of the
Contract, or which is imported to the Site to carry out the Works.
Formation
6.07
Formation is that part of the earthworks final surface on which a pavement,

structure or utility, is constructed, or on which the blinding or bedding for a
pavement, structure or utility is placed.
Intermediate areas of
fill
6.08
Intermediate areas of fill are areas of fill which are stated in the Contract as
such, and in which fill material is deposited and compacted directly into
shallow water or onto naturally occurring soft ground.
MATERIALS
Fill material
6.09
(1)
Fill material shall consist of naturally occurring or processed
material, or inert construction and demolition material, which at the time of
deposition is capable of being compacted in accordance with the specified
requirements to form stable areas of fill.
(2)
Fill material shall not contain any of the following:

(a) Material susceptible to volume change, including marine mud,
soil with a liquid limit exceeding 65% or a plasticity index
exceeding 35%, swelling clays and collapsible soils,
6.3
2006 Edition
(b)
Peat, vegetation, timber, organic, soluble or perishable

material,
(c)
Dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to

combustion, and
(d)
Metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material.
(3)
The different types of fill material shall have the particle size
distributions within the ranges stated in Table 6.1.
(4)
Special fill material shall consist of material which has a liquid limit
not exceeding 45%, a plasticity index not exceeding 20% and a coefficient
of uniformity exceeding 50.
(5)
Granular fill material shall consist of clean, hard and durable
material including recycled aggregates, rock and concrete.
(6)
Rock fill material shall consist of pieces of concrete or hard and
durable rock of which the maximum size shall not be greater than three
times the minimum dimension of individual pieces and in the opinion of
the Engineer not more than 30% by mass is discoloured or shows evidence
of decomposition.
(7)
Recycled rock fill material (Grade 200) shall be recycled rock or
inert construction and demolition material which is hard and durable, and
free from cracks, veins, and other evidence of decomposition.
(8)
For works which use grade 200 rock fill material as specified in the
contract, priority shall be given to using grade 200 recycled rock fill
material unless the material is found inappropriate by the Engineer.
(9)
The soluble sulphate content of fill material placed within 500 mm
of concrete, cement bound material or cementitious material shall not
exceed 1.9 grams of sulphate, expressed as SO3, per litre.
(10) The total sulphate content, expressed as SO3, of fill material placed
within 500 mm of metalwork shall not exceed 0.5% by mass.
(11) Well-graded material shall consist of material that has a coefficient
of uniformity exceeding 10.
(12) Uniform-graded material shall consist of material that has a
coefficient of uniformity of 10 or less.
Amd 4/2009
6.4
2006 Edition
Table 6.1: Particle size distributions of fill material

Type of fill material

Size
BS test sieve
400 mm
200 mm
75 mm
20 mm
600 m
63 m
Fine fill material
100
General fill material
100
75-100
Special fill material
100
0-45
Granular fill material
100
0-5
Rock fill material/
100
20-75
0-50
Recycled rock fill material

(Grade 200)
Rock fill material
(Grade 400)
Amd 4/2009
100
20-75
10-30
0-25
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
earthworks
6.10
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of
construction for earthworks shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of construction plant and haulage vehicles,
(b)
Methods of excavation and of deposition and compaction of

fill material,
(c)
Use of different types of excavated material and sources of

imported fill material,
(d)
Arrangements for stockpiling, sorting and separating

excavated material, earthworks material and fill material, and
for reusing and disposing of such materials,
(e)
Methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material,
(f)
Methods of controlling surface water and groundwater and of

protecting earthworks and earthworks material from damage
due to water and from weather conditions which may affect
the earthworks or earthworks material,
(g)
Methods of monitoring groundwater levels, and
(h)
Methods of monitoring the ground and structures for

movements.
(2)
6.5
2006 Edition
Particulars of blasting
6.11
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed blasting procedures shall
(a)
Any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Commissioner

of Mines, including copies of applications, licences, permits
and correspondence,
(b)
Names, qualifications and experience of the persons

responsible for the design and supervision of blasting
operations,
(c)
Location, diameter, inclination and depth of holes to be

charged with explosive,
(d)
Type and total mass of explosive to be used and its mass and
distribution in each hole,
(e)
Dimensions of stemming and decking,
(f)
Initiation sequence, delay periods and mass of explosive per

delay,
(g)
Burden and bench height,
(h)
Ratio of diameter of explosive to diameter of hole,
(i)
Arrangements for and methods of instrumentation and

monitoring the effects of blasting,
(j)
Details of velocity seismographs, including manufacturer's

literature,
(k)
Method of controlled blasting,
(l)
Details of blasting trials, and
(m) Protective measures.

(2)
The particulars, other than particulars relating to blasting trials, shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least 48 hours before the relevant blasting
starts. Particulars relating to blasting trials shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the blasting trials are carried out.
GENERAL EARTHWORKS REQUIREMENTS

Ownership of
earthworks material
6.12
(1)
Earthworks material within the Site at the commencement of the
Contract shall remain the property of the Employer except as stated in
Clause 6.12(2).
(2)
Earthworks material that needs to be disposed of by the Contractor
shall become the property of the Contractor when it is removed from the
Site and shall be disposed of in tips provided by the Contractor, unless
otherwise stated in the Contract.
6.6
2006 Edition
Temporary Works for

earthworks
6.13
(1)
The design of Temporary Works associated with earthworks,
including temporary slopes, stockpiles and drainage, shall be such that the
risk of failure is not more than that which would be adopted if the
Temporary Works were to be permanent. Allowance may be made in the
design of the Temporary Works for the shorter design life and for the risk to
persons and property and the surface water and groundwater conditions
that are likely to occur during construction.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide details to the Engineer to demonstrate
that the design of Temporary Works has been considered and incorporated
measures, which minimise excavation of materials.

of earthworks
material
6.14
(1)
Earthworks material shall not be handled or stored in a manner which
will result in segregation, deterioration, erosion or instability of the material.
(2) Different types of earthworks material shall be kept separate from
each other. Earthworks material that is suitable for use as fill material shall
be maintained in a suitable condition and shall not be contaminated.
(3)
Material handling and storage areas shall be levelled and well
drained. Stockpiles of material shall be sprayed with water or a dust
suppression chemical to minimize dust generation.
Protection from water

and weather
6.15
(1) Earthworks after site clearance, excavation or filling and earthworks

material after excavation shall be kept free of water and shall be protected
from damage due to water and from exposure to weather conditions which
may affect the earthworks or earthworks material. The measures to be
taken shall include the following:
(a)
As stated in Clauses 1.19 and 1.20.
(b)
Surfaces shall be maintained in a stable condition and shall be

formed to falls to shed water and to prevent ponding.
(c)
The area of exposed surfaces shall be kept to a minimum.
(2)
Excavations for structures, pits and trenches shall not be carried out
on or adjacent to slopes unless measures are taken to drain the excavation
and to prevent water from the excavation entering the slope.
Earthworks material
allowed to become
unsuitable or to
deteriorate
6.16
(1)
Earthworks material which has been used, or is required for use, in
the permanent work and which is allowed to become unsuitable such that
in the opinion of the Engineer it no longer complies with the specified
requirements for that type of material shall be replaced or dealt with by
(2)
Earthworks material which is not stated in the Contract to be
excavated and which the Contractor causes or allows to deteriorate such
that in the opinion of the Engineer the permanent work will be affected
shall be replaced or dealt with by methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Material provided to replace earthworks material, which has been
allowed to become unsuitable, or which the Contractor causes or allows to
deteriorate, shall be an equivalent material approved by the Engineer. The
replacement material shall have the same volume after compaction as the
material replaced.
(4)
The material that is to be replaced shall be disposed of by the

6.7
2006 Edition
Additional excavation
and stabilisation
6.17
Contractor.
(1)
Earthworks material which is not stated in the Contract to be
excavated but which in the opinion of the Engineer has inadequate
strength, durability or stability shall be dealt with by additional excavation
or filling as stated in Clause 6.17(2) or by stabilisation as stated in Clause
6.17(3) or by other methods instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
Additional excavation shall be carried out and the resulting voids
shall be dealt with as follows:
(a)
General fill material, fine fill material or special fill material

shall be deposited and compacted below areas of fill and
below formations other than in rock.
(b)
Grade 10 concrete shall be placed and compacted below

formations in rock.
(c)
Granular fill material shall be deposited below standing water.
(3)
Stabilisation shall be carried out using rock fill material (Grade 400)
deposited directly into the original unstable material and compacted to
form a stable foundation on which to construct the subsequent work.
Removal of
earthworks material
6.18
Earthworks material that is required for use in the permanent work as fill
material shall not be removed from the Site unless permitted by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer before any earthworks
material is removed from the Site.
EXCAVATION
Disposal of excavated
material
6.19
(1)
The Contractor shall take measures to sort and separate excavated
material on site for use in the permanent works as required in the
environmental protection measures unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
Excavated material, which in the opinion of the Engineer cannot be
selected, processed or mixed in a practical manner to make it suitable for
use in the permanent works, as fill material shall be disposed of by the
Contractor unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2)
Excavated material that is surplus to the requirements of the
permanent work shall be disposed of by the Contractor unless otherwise
stated in the Contract. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the
Contract, take all practical measures to sort and separate the surplus
material according to its nature before disposal as required in the
environmental protection measures and dispose of the material off-site
using the Trip-ticket System.
Use of excavated
material
6.20
(1)
Excavated material required for use in the permanent work which is
capable of being selected, processed and mixed to make it suitable for use
as fill material shall not be used for any other purposes unless permitted by
the Engineer.
(2)
Excavated material that is required for use in the permanent work as
fill material and which the Engineer permits to be removed from the Site or
used for other purposes shall be replaced by an equivalent material
approved by the Engineer. The replacement material shall have the same
6.8
2006 Edition
Obstructions in
excavations
6.21
volume after compaction as the material replaced.

(1)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay of the
nature and location of any unforeseen obstruction encountered during
excavation.
(2)
Boulders that intersect the earthworks final surface or formation
shall be dealt with as excavation proceeds by methods agreed by the
Engineer. Boulders shall not be left protruding unless permitted by the
Engineer.
Excavation
6.22
(1)
Temporary supports or other methods shall be used to maintain
excavations in a stable condition and to prevent settlement of structures or
utilities due to excavation or dewatering.
(2)
Construction plant or other vehicles shall not be operated or parked
adjacent to excavations and earthworks material or other materials shall not
be placed adjacent to excavations unless this has been allowed for in the
design of the Temporary Works for the support of the excavation.
Excavations adjacent
to structures and
utilities
6.23
(1)
Excavations shall be carried out by hand adjacent to utilities that are
known, proven or suspected to exist.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer excavations next to
structures shall be carried out by hand.
Excavations for
structures, pits and
trenches
6.24
(1)
Excavations for structures, pits and trenches shall be the minimum
size necessary to construct the permanent work. The sides of excavations
shall be vertical unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(2)
The length of trench excavation left open at any one time shall not
exceed that agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Unless permitted by the Engineer, trenches for utilities in fill areas
shall not be excavated until the fill material has been deposited and
compacted up to the earthworks final surface or formation or up to 1 m
above the top of the utility, whichever is lower.
BLASTING TRIALS
Blasting trials
6.25
(1)
Blasting trials shall be carried out for each proposed blasting
procedure to demonstrate that:
(a)
The procedure is safe,
(b)
The resulting ground vibrations at locations stated in the

Contract or instructed by the Engineer can be satisfactorily
predicted, recorded and are within acceptable limits, and shall
not adversely affect the safety and stability of adjoining
structures, installations, slopes and land, and
(c)
The specified tolerances for earthworks final surfaces and

formations can be achieved.
(2)
Blasting trials shall be completed at least 7 days before the related
blasting starts.
6.9
2006 Edition
(3)
Blasting trials shall be carried out in accordance with the trial
procedure submitted to and agreed by the Engineer. The location and size
of blasting trials shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
Controlled blasting
trials
6.26
Blasting trials for pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting

shall be carried out to form a face at least 6 m wide by 6 m high. The
blasting trials shall be carried out on rock which has similar properties to
that of the earthworks final surface and which is at least 6 m away from the
earthworks final surface.
Results of blasting
trials
6.27
If in the opinion of the Engineer any aspect of the proposed blasting

procedure as demonstrated by blasting trials is unsatisfactory, particulars of
proposed changes to the procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Further blasting trials shall be carried out until the procedure is satisfactory.
Commencement of
blasting
6.28
Blasting shall not proceed until in the opinion of the Engineer the
procedure as demonstrated by the relevant blasting trials is satisfactory.
Changes in blasting
procedure
6.29
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the satisfactory blasting procedure shall

not be changed. Further blasting trials shall be carried out to demonstrate
proposed changes to the procedure unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
BLASTING
Statutory
requirements for
blasting
6.30
Blasting operations and the supply, transportation, storage, use and disposal
of explosives shall be in accordance with conditions and restrictions
imposed by the Commissioner of Mines. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements with and obtain all licences and permits from the
Commissioner of Mines in connection with blasting operations.
Recording vibrations
due to blasting
6.31
(1)
Measurements of vibrations due to blasting shall be taken at
locations stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer at all times
when blasting is carried out. Records of the vibrations shall be kept by the
Contractor on the Site and a copy provided for the Engineer.
Arrangements for installing instruments and taking measurements both
inside and outside the Site shall be made by the Contractor.
(2)
Vibrations due to blasting shall be measured in terms of peak particle
velocity, peak particle acceleration and vibrational amplitude. The peak values
shall be taken as the maximum resultant calculated by vector summation of
the three components of velocity and amplitude respectively, measured as
instantaneously as the resolution of the recording instrument permits.
(3)
Measurements shall be made with velocity seismographs of a type
agreed by the Engineer. Seismographs shall be capable of:
(a)
Recording vibrations in terms of peak particle velocity and

vibrational amplitude over a frequency of 0 200 Hz in three
mutually perpendicular directions, and
(b)
Producing a permanent record of vibrations by tracing an

ultra-violet light beam on sensitised paper, or by other methods
6.10
2006 Edition
(4)
The accuracy of seismographs shall be checked before blasting trials
are carried out and at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
Preparatory work for
blasting
6.32
Before assessments of blasting safety precautions are made, all vegetation,

overburden and soft or loose material shall be removed to expose the rock
that is to be blasted.
Notification of
blasting
6.33
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer by not later than noon of the
previous day of his intention to bring any explosives to the Site or to carry
out any blasting.
Storage of explosives
6.34
Explosives and detonators shall not be stored on the Site overnight unless
permitted by the Commissioner of Mines. Explosives and detonators which
are not used by the end of each day shall be disposed of as stipulated by the
Commissioner of Mines.
Restrictions on
blasting times
6.35
Blasting shall not be carried out at the following times:
Blasting
6.36
(a)
On General Holidays,
(b)
Before 8:30 a.m. or after 5:30 p.m. on any day,
(c)
Unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines, when a

Hong Kong Observatory thunderstorm warning is in force, and
(d)
Unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines, when strong

wind signal or storm signal No. 3 or higher is hoisted.
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines, screens
and other protective covers shall be erected to prevent the projection of
flying fragments of material resulting from blasting. The screens shall be
constructed using wire mesh securely supported on steel frames. The
nominal diameter of the wire shall be at least 3.5 mm and the wire mesh
size shall not exceed 25 mm.
(2)
Unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines, plaster blasting
shall not be used.
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines blast
holes shall be stemmed and decked using free-flowing granular material.
Charges shall be covered with thick gunny sacking and 2 m by 2 m squares
of steel fabric reinforcement weighed down with filled sandbags. Surface
detonating cords, knots, detonating relay conductors and initiating
detonators shall be covered with a 300 mm thickness of sand or soil.
(4)
Unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines electrical
detonators shall not be used within 60 m of overhead power lines. The use
of electrical detonators in the vicinity of static or mobile radio transmitters
shall comply with BS 6657.
(5)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines delay
blasting with millisecond delays shall be used for all blasting, except as
stated in Clause 6.37(5).
(6)
Unless permitted by the Engineer blasting shall not be carried out

6.11
2006 Edition
within a distance of:
(a)
60 m from water retaining structures or water tunnels, and
(b)
6 m from water mains or other water supply structures or

installations.
(7) Unless permitted by the Engineer the vibrations at structures and

installations due to blasting measured in terms of peak particle velocity and
vibrational amplitude shall not exceed the values stated in Table 6.2.
(8) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the vibration at

adjoining slopes and land due to blasting measured in terms of peak
particle acceleration and peak particle velocity shall not exceed the
values stated in the Contract.
Table 6.2:
Restrictions on peak particle velocity and vibrational amplitude

Type of structure or
Installation
Peak particle
velocity (mm/s)
Vibrational
amplitude (mm)
Water retaining structures

Water tunnels
13
0.1
Water mains
Other structures and pipes
25
0.2
Controlled blasting
6.37
(1)
Earthworks final surfaces which are to be formed by blasting and
which slope at a gradient exceeding 2 vertical to 1 horizontal and exceed 3
m in height shall be formed by pre-splitting. Other methods of controlled
blasting shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(2)
Pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting shall be
carried out in such a manner that the rock mass is cleanly split on the
required plane to within the specified tolerances and such that rock outside
the earthworks final surface is not shattered or loosened.
(3)
Faces formed by pre-splitting or other methods of controlled
blasting shall not exceed 15 m in height in any one blasting operation
(4)
If an earthworks final surface is to be formed by pre-splitting or
other methods of controlled blasting:
(a)
Other blast holes shall be located at a sufficient distance from

the earthworks final surface to avoid damaging the surface,
and
(b)
The row of blast holes nearest to that surface shall be parallel

to the row of pre-splitting holes.
(5)
Pre-splitting shall consist of a single row of holes drilled at the
appropriate inclination along the line of the earthworks final surface. The
holes shall be loaded with explosives not exceeding half the diameter of the
hole. The explosives shall be detonated simultaneously or with the
6.12
2006 Edition
minimum amount of delay necessary to reduce ground vibrations.
(6)
Holes for pre-splitting shall be at least 50 mm diameter and the ratio
of the distance between the centre of the holes and the diameter of the hole
shall not exceed 10. The holes shall be within a distance of 0.015 times the
length of the hole from their designed position.
(7)
Holes for pre-splitting shall not be drilled into the sub-grade below
berm levels. Rock that remains in position on berms after blasting shall be
removed by methods other than blasting.

Types of fill material
6.38
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, areas of fill shall be formed of

general fill material.
Sources of fill
material
6.39
Except in public filling area as stated in Clause 6.58, fill material shall be
obtained from excavation within the Site. If there is insufficient fill
material of the required types within the Site, imported fill material shall be
provided by the Contractor from sources outside the Site.
Surface preparation
for fill material
6.40
Except as stated in Clause 6.56, surfaces on which fill material is to be

deposited shall be prepared after site clearance in accordance with the
(a)
Topsoil, grass, and other organic matter shall be removed.
(b)
Soft spots, boulders and other materials, which in the opinion

of the Engineer are unsuitable or unstable, shall be removed.
(c)
Watercourses shall be diverted as stated in the Contract.
(d)
Benches shall be cut and sub-soil drainage systems installed as

(e)
Voids shall be dealt with as stated in the Contract or instructed

by the Engineer.
(f)
Surfaces other than rock shall be scarified to a depth of 200

mm and compacted to the same standard as the fill material
that is to be deposited.
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before deposition of fill
material starts in any area of fill.
Commencement of
deposition of fill
material
6.41
Haulage of fill
material
6.42
Haulage of fill material to an area of fill shall proceed only when the
compaction plant operating at the area to be filled is sufficient to achieve
the specified requirements for relative compaction of the fill material.
Deposition of fill
material
6.43
(1)
Fill material obtained from excavations within the Site shall be
deposited in its final location as soon as practicable after it has been
excavated.
(2)
Fill material shall be deposited in layers of a thickness appropriate
to the compaction method to be used. In deposition of fill material, the
Contractor shall ensure that a good bond is achieved between layers of fill,
6.13
2006 Edition
and unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, no material shall be placed
on previously compacted layers unless the surface has been scarified or
otherwise broken up and, if necessary, watered.
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, layers of fill material
shall be horizontal, except for any gradient required for drainage, and the
thickness of each layer shall be uniform over the area to be filled. The fill
material shall be brought up from the bottom in uniform horizontal
layers, with the top of each layer graded to enable surface water to drain
readily.
(4)
Except in excavations for structures, pits and trenches, if the
difference in level between adjacent areas to be filled exceeds 1 m, the
edge of the higher area shall be benched before fill material is placed
against it.
(5)
Execution of the Works shall be controlled in such a manner that
any compaction of the fill material resulting from the passage of
construction plant or haulage vehicles is uniform.
(6)
Except as stated in Clause 6.56, fill material shall not be deposited
by end-tipping, by pushing loose material down slope faces or by other
methods which may result in segregation or inadequate compaction of the
fill material.
Overfilling
6.44
In areas of fill formed of material other than rock fill material, earthworks
final surfaces sloping at a gradient exceeding 1 vertical to 3 horizontal shall
be formed by overfilling and cutting back after compaction. Over-filling
shall extend beyond the earthworks final surface by a horizontal distance of
0.5 m or three times the thickness of the compacted layer, whichever is
greater.
Deposition of fill
material adjacent to
structures and utilities
6.45
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 6.45(4), fill material deposited within
0.5m of a structure or utility shall be fine fill material unless otherwise
stated in the Contract. In addition, the material may contain up to 5% by
weight of fresh, slightly decomposed or moderately decomposed rock
fragments of up to 200 mm provided that these do not cause any damage to
structures, nor do they interfere with the compaction requirements.
(2)
Fill material shall not be deposited adjacent to or above structures or
utilities until the construction of the structure or utility is sufficiently
advanced to accept the imposed forces without disturbance or damage.
(3)
Fill material shall be deposited evenly on all sides of structures and
utilities and in such a manner that the structure or utility is not disturbed or
damaged.
(4)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, fill material around water,
sewage and drainage pipes which are laid as part of the permanent work shall
be special fill material. They shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 100
mm thick to a level of 300 mm above the top of the pipe. The fill material
shall be deposited in such a manner that the layer on one side of the pipe is
not more than 100 mm higher than the layer on the other side.
6.14
2006 Edition
Deposition of rock fill

material
6.46
(1) The final compacted thickness of each layer of rock fill material
shall exceed 1.5 times and shall not exceed twice the nominal Grade size of
the rock fill material.
(2)
The surface voids of each layer of rock fill material shall be filled
with fragments of rock before the next layer is deposited. The final
surface of rock fill material shall also be blinded with fine fill material.
Deposition of fill
material in
excavations for
structures, pits and
trenches
6.47
If sheet piling, timbering or other temporary supports to excavations for

structures, pits and trenches are not to be left in place, the sheet piling,
timbering or supports shall be removed as deposition of fill material
proceeds. The supports shall be removed in such a manner that the
stability of the adjacent ground is maintained and the compacted fill
material is not disturbed.
COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

Compaction of fill
material
6.48
(1)
Fill material in areas of fill shall be compacted in layers to a stable
condition as soon as practicable after deposition and in a manner
appropriate to the location and to the material to be compacted.
(2) The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before the next
layer is deposited on each layer of compacted fill material.
(3)
Except as stated in Clauses 6.50(2), 6.52(1), 6.54(2), 6.57 and 6.66,
fill material shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least
95% throughout unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
Moisture content of
fill material
6.49
Fill material other than rock fill material and material as stated in Clause
6.52(1) shall be at optimum moisture content during compaction. The
tolerance on the optimum moisture content percentage shall be 3%,
provided that the fill material is still capable of being compacted in
accordance with the specified requirements to form stable areas of fill. All
necessary measures shall be taken to achieve and maintain the specified
moisture content.
Compaction of fill
6.50
(1)
Fill material shall be compacted in such a manner that structures or
utilities are not disturbed or damaged.
(2)
Fill material around water, sewage and drainage pipes, which are
constructed as part of the permanent work, shall be compacted by
hand-rammers or manually operated power equipment. Fill material
within 300 mm above the top of sewage and drainage pipes shall be
compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 85% throughout.
Compaction of
rock fill material
6.51
(1)
Every layer of rock fill material shall be compacted by at least eight
passes of a vibrating roller or by other equivalent compaction method
approved by the Engineer. The final surface of rock fill material shall be
compacted by at least two additional passes of a vibrating roller or by other
equivalent compaction method approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Vibratory rollers used for the compaction of rock fill material shall
have a static load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 2 kN for layers with
a compacted thickness not exceeding 500 mm and at least 4 kN for layers
with a compacted thickness exceeding 500 mm.
6.15
2006 Edition
Compaction of
general fill material
with a large portion of
coarse material
6.52
(1)
For general fill material of which less than 90% passes a 20 mm BS
test sieve, it is difficult to determine of the moisture content and maximum
dry density according to Clauses 6.75(2), 6.75(3), 6.78(2), 6.81(5) and
6.81(6). This type of material shall be compacted to the requirements of
Clauses 6.52(2), 6.52(3) and 6.52(4).
(2)
Each horizontal layer of general fill material shall be spread and
levelled with a thickness not less than 1.5 times of the maximum size of the
general fill material and not exceeding the maximum depth of compacted
layer in accordance with Table 6.2A. If there is a presence of over-sized
coarse material in the general fill, the over-sized coarse material shall be
removed or broken down to sizes acceptable to the Engineer. Each layer
shall be systematically compacted by a vibratory roller with the stipulated
minimum number of passes corresponding to the minimum static load per
100 mm width of the roller.
(3)
The number of passes of the roller shall only be counted when the
roller is travelled on the material to be compacted at a speed of not more
than 2 km per hour with full vibration. Plant other than a vibratory roller
carrying out material spreading or providing some preliminary compaction,
to assist the use of heavier plant, shall be disregarded in counting the
number of passes.
(4)
Variation from the method or the use of plant different from that
specified in Clause 6.52(2) will be permitted only if the Contractor
demonstrates at site trials that equivalent compaction is achieved by the
alternative method or plant. The procedure to be adopted for these site
trials shall be agreed with and approved by the Engineer.
(5)
Without prejudice to the provision of the Conditions of Contract and
in order that the Engineer may take proper provision for the supervision of
compaction in the permanent work, the Contractor shall, not less than 24
hours before he proposes to carry out compaction processes, apply in
writing to the Engineer for permission to do so.
(6)
When materials of widely divergent grading are used in
embankments and fill areas, they shall be spread and compacted in separate
clearly defined areas.
(7)
If more than one class of material is being used in such a way that
in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practicable to define the areas in
which each class occurs, compaction plant shall be operated as if only the
material that requires the greatest compaction effort is being compacted.
6.16
2006 Edition
Table 6.2A: Compaction requirement for general fill material with a large portion of coarse material
Force per 100
mm width
(kN)
Well-graded material
Maximum depth of
compacted layer (mm)
0.25 0.45
0.46 0.70
0.71 1.25
1.26 1.75
1.76 2.30
2.31 2.80
2.81 3.50
3.51 4.20
4.21 4.90
125
150
150
175
200
225
250
Uniform-graded material
Minimum no.
of passes
Maximum depth of
Minimum no.
of passes
12
8
4
4
4
4
4
150
150
150
200
225
250
275
300
300
16
12
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
COMPLETION OF EARTHWORK SURFACES

Completion of
earthwork final
surfaces
6.53
(1) Earthwork final surfaces shall be completed to a stable condition as

soon as practicable after excavation or after deposition and compaction of
fill material has been completed. The subsequent permanent work or
surface protection shall be carried out as soon as practicable after the
earthworks final surface has been completed.
(2)
Earthworks final surfaces shall be completed to smooth alignments
without abrupt irregularities unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
Completion of
formations
6.54
(1)
Formations above structures or utilities shall be completed after
construction of the structure or utility.
(2)
Except in excavations in rock and in areas of fill formed of rock fill
material or fill material as stated in Clause 6.52(1), formations shall be
compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 98% to a depth of 200
mm below the formation.
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, proof rolling shall be
carried out on formations. The formation shall be rolled in the presence of
the Engineer by at least two passes of a non-vibrating rubber tyred roller.
The roller shall have a static load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 4 kN
and shall travel at a speed not exceeding 2 km/h. Any defect in the
formation which is revealed during proof rolling by deformation of the
formation which in the opinion of the Engineer is excessive shall be made
good as instructed by the Engineer.
(4)
After all other formation work and testing have been completed and
damage caused by testing reinstated, formations for pavements shall be
rolled with one pass of a smooth steel-wheeled non-vibrating roller. The
roller shall have a load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 2 kN.
(5)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, formation surfaces that
will not be immediately covered by the subsequent permanent works shall
be protected by methods agreed by the Engineer.
6.17
2006 Edition
Protection of
earthwork final
surfaces and
formations
6.55
(1)
Earthwork final surfaces and formations shall be maintained in a
stable condition and shall be protected from damage due to water or other
causes and from exposure to conditions which may adversely affect the
surface.
(2)
Formation shall not be used by construction plant or vehicles other
than those which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are essential to construct
the subsequent work.
INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

Deposition of fill
material in
intermediate areas of
fill
6.56
Fill material may be deposited in intermediate areas of fill by end-tipping

or by pushing into position until, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is
sufficient to form a stable foundation on which to construct the subsequent
work.
Compaction of fill
material in
intermediate areas of
fill
6.57
Fill material in intermediate areas of fill up to the level stated in Clause

6.56 shall be compacted to a degree, which in the opinion of the Engineer
is practicable. Except as stated in Clause 6.52(1), fill material above the
level stated in Clause 6.56 shall be compacted to obtain a relative
compaction of at least:
(a)
90% throughout,
(b)
95% within 1.5 m of earthworks final surfaces and formations,

and
(c)
98% within 200 mm of formations.
EARTHWORKS IN PUBLIC FILLING AREA

Public filling area
6.58
Public filling area shall mean any area or portion of

earthworks/reclamation works to receive inert construction and demolition
material, and other materials disposed of by the public as stated in the
Contract.
Public fill
6.59
Public fill shall mean inert construction and demolition material that is
disposed of at a public filling area.
Combined reception
and exit offices
6.60
(1)
Combined reception and exit offices for the operation of a public
filling area shall be provided at the location shown on the Drawings.
(2)
The Contractor shall design and provide the combined reception
and exit office in accordance with the schematic layout shown on the
Drawings. The combined reception and exit office shall comply with
the following requirements:
(a)
Each shall consist of two floors and shall be constructed on a

1300mm high raised hollow platform. The upper floor is an
inspection cabin, which shall be designed to withstand at least
5kPa live load and equipped with staircases and guard railings.
6.18
2006 Edition
(3)
(b)
Windows of sliding type with locks and security bars shall be

provided at the sides to enable a clear view of the approaching
traffic. All windows shall be provided with venetian blinds.
(c)
Collision barriers, collision bollards, separation barriers,

red/green light type automatic signaling system and drop-bars
shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.
(d)
An overhead water-spraying system shall be installed at each

of the reception hallways. It shall consist of groups of nozzles
and shall be supported firmly with posts standing on the
ground. Each overhead water-spraying system shall be capable
of emitting 100 litres of water in 30 seconds.
(e)
The roof and all walls shall be fully lined, well insulated,
waterproof and painted.
(f)
All doors shall have secure and efficient locks.
(g)
A surveillance system shall be installed in each combined

reception and exit office at locations agreed by the Engineer.
The surveillance system shall consist of closed circuit digital
colour video camera, closed circuit video duplex multiplexer
and the accessories with schedule as stated in the Contract.
The surveillance system shall be operated in accordance with
Clause 6.60(3).
(h)
Weighbridge system shall be installed at each combined

reception and exit office at locations as agreed with the
Engineer to measure and record the weight of each and every
dump truck using the public filling area. The weighbridge
system shall be calibrated by a suitable method and at
frequency as agreed with the Engineer.
The surveillance system shall be operated as follows: (a)
The camera of the surveillance system shall allow continuous

recording and close surveillance of activities within the public
filling area during the operation hours.
(b) Images captured by the cameras shall be continuously

recorded by DVD recorders. Each recorded DVD shall be kept
for at least 6 months. The Contractor shall insert and replace
the DVD for the surveillance system so as to ensure the
continuous recording of the operation activities.
(c)
The position and angle of each camera of the surveillance

system shall be as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any relocation and/or adjustment
required.
(4)
Detailed proposals for the combined reception and exit offices shall
be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval within 14 days
of the date for commencement of the Works. The proposal shall include
locations, layouts, associated facilities and construction details.
6.19
2006 Edition
(5)
Within 28 days of the date of approval by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall complete the construction of the combined reception and
exit offices that shall be ready for occupation and operation.
(6)
The combined reception and exit offices shall be maintained in a
clean, stable and secure condition daily.
(7)
Equipment provided for the use of the Engineer shall be
maintained in a clean and serviceable condition and all consumables shall
be replenished as instructed by the Engineer.
(8)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before the
combined reception and exit office or equipment is removed. The
combined reception and exit office or equipment which are to be left in
position or become the property of the Employer after completion of the
Works shall be repaired, repainted and serviced as instructed by the
Engineer.
Reception areas,
queuing areas and
access roads
6.61
(1)
Reception areas, queuing areas and access roads shall be provided
in accordance with the Drawings.
(2)
The Contractor shall operate and maintain reception areas, queuing
areas and access roads complying with the following requirements:
(a) The riding surfaces shall be kept in good condition without
excessive bumps and depressions,
(b) The surfaces shall be kept in wet condition so as to minimize
dust generation,
(c) The surfaces shall be kept free of grease, debris and the like, and
(d) Measures shall be taken to prevent ponding and flooding.
Management of dump
truck movements
6.62
(1)
The Contractor shall manage entry to and exit from the public
filling area to:
(a)
Maintain orderly traffic conditions at the reception areas,

queuing areas and access roads,
(b)
Ensure all dump trucks are inspected and weighed at the

combined reception and exit offices before and after
deposition. In the event that the materials carried by a dump
truck are inspected as not acceptable, the Contractor shall
direct the dump truck to leave the Site as instructed by the
Engineer, and
(c)
Direct dump trucks to the designated deposition point for

deposition.
(2)
The maximum speed of dump trucks within the public filling area
shall be restricted to 10km per hour.
Upon instruction by the Engineer, the Contractor shall within three hours
tow away any broken down dump truck from an operation area to a safe
area within the Site as agreed with the Engineer so as not to disrupt the
operation of the public filling area.
6.20
2006 Edition
(3)
The Contractor shall supply and erect temporary traffic signs,
including speed limit signs, for directing dump trucks and traffic
diversion within the public filling area.
Temporary haul roads
and drains
6.63
(1)
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary haul roads
and drains to suit the programme of deposition and shall remove all
temporary drainage systems after the Works. Lighting facilities shall be
provided along the temporary haul roads and at each deposition point to
ensure safe operation.
(2)
The Contractor shall design the temporary haul roads and drains to
ensure good riding condition and safety. All temporary haul roads shall
be paved with granular material. The Contractor shall submit the details
of the proposed temporary haul roads and drains to the Engineer for
agreement 14 days before implementation or commencement of
associated work whichever is earlier.
(3)
The Contractor shall grade, regulate and compact all temporary
haul roads as instructed by the Engineer to prevent undulation.

of wet soil
6.64
(1) Public fill may consist of wet soil. Wet soil may be any naturally
occurring or processed material, which at the time of deposition is unable
to be compacted in accordance with the specified requirements to form a
stable area of fill.
(2)
The Contractor shall plan the Works by allowing stockpiling space
as agreed with the Engineer for handling wet soil. The Contractor shall
process the wet soil received including mixing it with pubic fill to make it
suitable for compaction and use in the Works. The processed material
shall be handled and stored in accordance with Clause 6.14. The
proposed method of processing and mixing shall be agreed with the
Engineer at least 7 days before any processing and mixing starts.
Deposition of public
fill
6.65
Clauses 6.43(2), 6.43(3), 6.43(4), 6.43(5), 6.43(6), 6.44, and 6.56 shall
apply to deposition of public fill.
Compaction of public
fill
6.66
(1)
In addition to Clauses 6.48(1), 6.48(2) and 6.50(1), public fill shall
be compacted to the requirements of Clauses 6.66(2), 6.66(3) and
6.66(4).
The Contractor shall submit the proposed method of
compaction including the proposed compaction plant, thickness of
compacted layer and minimum number of passes to the Engineer for
approval at least 7 days before any compaction starts.
(2)
Each horizontal layer of public fill shall be spread and levelled
with a thickness not exceeding the maximum depth of a compacted layer
in accordance with Table 6.2B. Each layer shall be systematically
compacted by the compaction plant with the minimum number of passes
(3)
Definitions and requirements associated with Table 6.2B are as
follows:
(a)
Where combinations of different types or categories of plant

are used, the compaction requirements shall be:
-
The depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant

requiring the least depth of layer; and
6.21
2006 Edition
The number of passes shall be that for the type of plant

requiring the greatest number of passes.
(b)
The number of passes of the roller shall only be counted

when the roller is travelled on the materials to be compacted
at a speed of not more than 2 km per hour with full vibration
where appropriate.
(c)
The plant other than the approved compaction plant by the

Engineer as stated in Clause 6.66(1) to carry out material
spreading or to provide some preliminary compaction only to
assist the use of heavier plant shall be disregarded in
counting the number of passes.
(d)
The force per 100 mm width is the total weight on the roll
divided by the total roll width. Where a smooth-wheeled
roller has more than one axle the machine will be assessed on
the basis of the axle giving the highest value of force per 100
mm width.
(e)
Wheel load is the total weight of the roller divided by the

number of wheels.
(f)
Vibratory rollers are machines having means of applying

mechanical vibration to one or more rolls.
-
The requirements for vibratory rollers are based on the use

of the lowest gear on a self-propelled machine and a
towing speed of 1800 - 2400 m/hour for a towed machine.
If higher gears or speed are used, an increased number of
passes shall be provided in proportion to the increase in
speed of travel.
Vibratory rollers operating without their vibration

mechanism in use will be classified as smooth-wheeled
rollers.
Vibratory rollers shall only be operated with their

vibration mechanism operating at the frequency of
vibration recommended by the manufacturers. All such
rollers shall be equipped with a device automatically
indicating the frequency at which the mechanism is
operating.
(g) Vibrating-plate compactors are machines having a base-plate

to which a source of vibration consisting of one or two
eccentrically weighted shafts is attached.
-
The static pressure under the plate of a vibrating-plate

compactor is calculated by dividing the total weight of the
machine in working order by the area in contact with
compacted material.
Vibrating-plate compactors shall be operated at the

frequency of vibration recommended by the manufacturer.
They shall normally be operated at travelling speeds of
6.22
2006 Edition
less than 900 m/hour but, if higher speeds are necessary,
the number of passes shall be increased in proportion to
the increase in speed of travel.
(h)
Vibro-tampers are machines in which an engine-driven

reciprocating mechanism acts on a spring system, through
which oscillations are set up in a base-plate.
(i) Power rammers are machines that are actuated by explosions

in an internal combustion cylinder, each explosion being
controlled manually by the operator.
(4)
Variation from the methods or the use of plant different from that
specified in Clause 6.66(2) will be permitted only if the Contractor
demonstrates by site trials that equivalent compaction effect is achieved
by the alternative method or plant. The procedure to be adopted for
these site trials shall be agreed with and approved by the Engineer.
(5)
Without prejudice to the provision of the Conditions of Contract
and in order for the Engineer to make proper provision for the
supervision of compaction in the permanent work, the Contractor shall,
not less than 24 hours before he proposes to carry out compaction
processes, apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to do so.
6.23
2006 Edition
Table 6.2B: Compaction requirement

Type of compaction plant
Smooth-wheel roller
Grid-roller
Pneumatic-tyre roller
Vibratory roller
Vibratory-plate compactor
Vibro-tamper
Power rammer
Use of fill material

adjacent to structures
and utilities in public
filling area
6.67
Category
Force per
100 mm width
2.1 2.6 kN
2.61 5.2 kN
More than 5.2 kN
Force per
100 mm width
5.3 7.8 kN
More than 7.8 kN
Wheel load
2 - 2.5 tonnes
2.6 - 4 tonnes
4 - 6 tonnes
6 - 8 tonnes
8 - 12 tonnes
More than 12 tonnes
Force per
100 mm width
0.71 1.25 kN
1.26 1.75 kN
1.76 2.3 kN
2.31 2.8 kN
2.81 3.5 kN
3.51 4.2 kN
4.21 4.9 kN
Static pressure under
base plate (kN/m2)
13.8 - 17.2
17.3 - 20.7
More than 20.7
Mass (kg)
50 65
66 75
More than 75
Mass (Kg)
100
More than 500
Maximum depth of
Minimum no.
of passes
125
125
150
10
8
8
125
150
12
12
125
125
125
150
150
175
12
10
10
8
8
6
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
12
8
4
4
4
4
4
100
150
200
6
6
6
100
125
150
3
3
3
150
275
6
12
Fill material shall be used adjacent to structures and utilities in public

filling areas as stated in the Contract. Fill material shall comply with
Clause 6.09. The use of fill material shall comply with Clauses 6.45,
6.47 and 6.50.
6.24
2006 Edition
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
earthworks final
surfaces and
formations
6.68
(1)
Earthworks final surfaces and formations shall be within the
tolerances of the specified lines and levels stated in Table 6.3. The
tolerances for formations do not apply to pipes or preformed structures that
require to be supported over their complete length or area.
(2)
In excavation, a positive tolerance refers to insufficient excavation
and a negative tolerance refers to excess excavation. In areas of fill, a
positive tolerance refers to excess fill material and a negative tolerance
refers to insufficient fill material.
Table 6.3:
Tolerances for earthworks final surfaces and formations
Type of surface
Formations for structures

and utilities
Formations for pavements,

including carriageways,
footways, cycletracks,
paved areas, aircraft
pavements and railway
trackbeds.
Earthworks final surfaces
other than formations, with
a gradient not exceeding 1
vertical to 10 horizontal
Other earthworks final
Surfaces
Method of forming surface
Tolerance (mm)
+
Excavation except in rock
25
Excavation in rock
150
Deposition and compaction of

fill material
25
50
Excavation in rock
150

fill material
50
100
Excavation in rock
200

fill material
100
100
100
Excavation in rock
100
200

fill material
100
100
6.25
2006 Edition
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS
Batch:
Samples:
material
fill material
fill
6.69
6.70
A batch of fill material is any quantity of fill material of the same type and
which in the opinion of the Engineer has similar properties throughout.
For the purpose of testing for moisture content and relative compaction a
batch shall, in addition to the above, be fill material which is deposited in a
single layer in any area of fill presented by the Contractor for testing on
one occasion.
(1)
Each sample of fill material shall consist of at least four increments
taken from different parts of the batch. The increments shall be combined
and thoroughly mixed and shall then be divided by quartering or by using a
riffle box to obtain specimens of an appropriate size to carry out the
individual tests.
(2)
The size of samples of fill material other than rock fill material
shall be in accordance with Geospec 3, Clauses 2.5.1, 4.2 and Table 2.1.
Each sample of rock fill material of Grade size not exceeding 200 shall
have a mass of at least 250 kg and each sample of rock fill material of
Grade size exceeding 200 shall have a mass of at least 1000 kg.
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - PARTICLE SIZE

DISTRIBUTION, LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTICITY INDEX,
COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY AND SULPHATE
CONTENT
Samples: particle
size distribution,
liquid limit, plasticity
index, coefficient of
uniformity, sulphate
content
Table 6.4:
6.71
Samples of fill material to be tested for particle size distribution, liquid

limit, plasticity index, coefficient of uniformity and sulphate content shall
be delivered at least 14 days, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer,
before deposition of the fill material starts. The number of samples to be
provided from each batch shall be as stated in Table 6.4.
Number of samples to be tested for particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index,
coefficient of uniformity, sulphate content, optimum moisture content and maximum dry
density
Description
Size of batch
Special fill
material
0 - 3,000 m3
No. of samples per batch

3
Exceeding 3,000 m3
Fill material other
than special fill
material
1 for each 1,000 m3 or

part thereof
3
0 - 15,000 m3
Exceeding 15,000 m3
6.26
1 for each 5,000 m3 or

part thereof
2006 Edition
Testing: particle size

distribution, liquid
limit, plasticity index,
coefficient of
content
6.72
(1)
Each sample of fill material taken as stated in Clause 6.71 shall be
tested to determine the particle size distribution. In the case of special fill
material, testing shall include calculation of the coefficient of uniformity as
stated in Clause 6.72(4). Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, each
sample of fill material other than rock fill material shall be tested to
determine the liquid limit and the plasticity index of that portion of the fill
material passing a 425m BS test sieve. Each sample of fill material, which
will be deposited within 500 mm of concrete, cement, bound material,
cementitious material or metalwork shall be tested to determine the soluble
sulphate content.
(2)

Particle size distribution
: Clause 6.72(3)
Liquid limit
: Test Method 6.1 of Geospec 3
Plasticity index
Soluble sulphate content
Total sulphate content
(3)
The particle size distribution of fill material passing a 75 mm BS
test sieve shall be determined in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method
8.1 or 8.2, whichever as instructed by the Engineer. The size of particles
of fill material, which do not pass a 75 mm BS test sieve, shall be taken as
the largest dimension measured in any plane.
(4)
The coefficient of uniformity (Cu) shall be calculated from the
equation:
Cu = D60/D10
where:
- D60 and D10 are the equivalent sieve sizes in millimetres,
interpolated from the particle size distribution curve,
through which 60% and 10% of the fill material would pass
respectively.
Non-compliance:
particle size
distribution, liquid
limit, plasticity index,
coefficient of
content
6.73
(1)
If the result of any test for soluble sulphate content of fill material
does not comply with the specified requirements for soluble sulphate
content, each sample shall be tested to determine the total sulphate content.
(2)
If the result of any test for particle size distribution, liquid limit,
plasticity index, coefficient of uniformity or total sulphate content of fill
material does not comply with the specified requirements for the property,
additional samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional
tests for the property shall be carried out. The number of additional
samples shall be as stated in Table 6.4.
6.27
2006 Edition
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - OPTIMUM MOISTURE

CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
Samples: optimum
moisture content,
maximum dry density
6.74
(1) Samples of fill material to be tested for optimum moisture content

and maximum dry density shall be delivered at least 72 hours, or such
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before deposition of the fill material
starts. The number of samples to be provided from each batch shall be as
stated in Table 6.4.
(2)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the exact location in
which the fill material from which each sample is taken is to be deposited.
(3) Samples to be tested for optimum moisture content and maximum
dry density shall also be taken after the fill material has been deposited in
its final position, at intervals of not more than 28 days.
(4)
Testing:
optimum moisture
content, maximum
dry density
6.75
Samples shall not be provided from:

(a)
Fill material including rock fill material which contains an

insufficient proportion of particles passing a 20 mm BS test
sieve to permit determination of the moisture content and
maximum dry density, and
(b)
Fill material that is to be deposited as stated in Clause 6.56.
(1)
tested to determine the optimum moisture content and the maximum dry
density.
(2)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with Geospec 3,
Test Method 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8, whichever is
(3)
If agreed by the Engineer, the Hilf method stated in Appendix 6.3
may be used instead of the methods stipulated in Clause 6.75(2) to
determine the optimum moisture content and maximum dry density.
(4)
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is any undue discrepancy
between the results of tests for optimum moisture content of fill material
using methods stipulated in Clause 6.75(2) and the results of tests using the
Hilf method, the results of tests using methods stipulated in Clause 6.75(2)
shall prevail.
Consistency:
optimum moisture
content, maximum
dry density
6.76
If the result of any test for optimum moisture content or maximum dry
density of fill material indicates that the batch contains material which in
the opinion of the Engineer, differs to such an extent that subsequent tests
for relative compaction may be affected, the batch shall be divided into
smaller batches. Each of the smaller batches shall comprise material with
similar properties throughout. Additional samples shall be provided from
each of the smaller batches and additional tests for optimum moisture
content and maximum dry density shall be carried out. The number of
additional samples shall be as stated in Table 6.4.
6.28
2006 Edition
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL - MOISTURE CONTENT:

Samples:
moisture content
6.77
(1)
Samples of fill material to be tested for moisture content shall be
taken during deposition and compaction of fill material and shall be
delivered not more than 1 hour after the fill material has been deposited in
its final position.
(2)
The number of samples to be provided from each batch shall be as
stated in Table 6.5. Samples shall not be provided if, in accordance with
Clause 6.74(4)(a) or (b), the optimum moisture content has not been
determined.
Testing:
moisture content
6.78
(1)
tested to determine the moisture content.
(2)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with one of the
following methods:
(a)
Method 1 : Geospec 3, Test Method 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is

instructed by the Engineer
(b)
Method 2 : Microwave oven drying method as stated in

Appendix 6.2.
Method 1 shall be used unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

moisture content
6.79
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is any undue discrepancy between

the results of tests for moisture content of fill material using Method 1
and the results of tests using Method 2 in Clause 6.78, the results of tests
using Method 1 shall prevail.
Non-compliance:
moisture content
6.80
If the result of any test for moisture content of fill material differs from
the optimum moisture content by more than the specified amount and if
instructed by the Engineer, the moisture content of the whole of the batch
of fill material shall be adjusted. Additional samples shall be provided
from the same batch and additional tests for moisture content shall be
carried out. The number of additional samples shall be as stated in
Table 6.5.
Table 6.5:
Number of samples to be tested for moisture content and number of tests for relative
compaction
No. of samples/No. of tests per batch
Description
Size of area of fill in batch
Areas of fill in excavations

for structures, pits and
trenches and on
formations
0 - 100 m2
100 - 500 m2
2 for each 100 m2 or part thereof
exceeding 500 m2
Other areas of fill
0 - 1 ha

1 - 10 ha
exceeding 10 ha
6.29
2006 Edition
TESTING:
FILL
COMPACTION
Testing:
relative compaction
6.81
MATERIAL
RELATIVE
(1)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, each batch of fill
material shall be tested to determine the relative compaction. Tests shall
be carried out after the fill material has been deposited and compacted in
its final position. The number of tests on each batch shall be as stated in
Table 6.5. Tests shall not be carried out on:
(a)
Fill material including rock fill material which contains an

insufficient proportion of particles passing a 20 mm BS test
sieve to permit determination of the relative compaction, and
(b)
Fill material that has been deposited as stated in Clause 6.56.
(2)
Tests shall be carried out at positions, which in the opinion of the
Engineer are representative of the batch of compacted fill material as a
whole.
(3)
Testing will be carried out by the Engineer.
(4)
The relative compaction of fill material shall be determined in
accordance with one of the following methods:
(a) Method 1:
Geospec 3, Test Method 11.4
RC = IDD/MDD x 100%
where:
- IDD is the in-situ dry density determined as stated in Clause
6.81(5)
- MDD is the maximum dry density determined as stated in
Clause 6.75(2)
(b)
Method 2:
The relative compaction (RC)

calculated from the equation:
shall
be
RC = IBD/MCBD x 100%
where:
- IBD is the in-situ bulk density determined as stated in
Clause 6.81(5)
- MCBD is the maximum converted bulk density determined
by the Hilf method as stated in Appendix 6.3
Method 1 shall be used unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(5)
The in-situ bulk density and the in-situ dry density of fill material
shall be determined in accordance with one of the following methods:
6.30
2006 Edition
(a) Method 1 :
Geospec 3, Test Method 11.1 or 11.2
(b) Method 2:
Nuclear densometer method as stated in

Method 1 shall be used unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

(6)
The maximum converted bulk density of fill material of which
more than 5% is retained on a BS 20 mm test sieve, shall be adjusted as
stated in Appendix 6.4.
Compliance criterion:
relative compaction
6.82
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is any undue discrepancy between

the results of tests for relative compaction of fill material using Method 1
and the results of tests using Method 2 in Clause 6.81, the results of tests
using Method 1 shall prevail.
Non-compliance:
relative compaction
6.83
If the result of any test for relative compaction of fill material does not
comply with the specified requirements for relative compaction, additional
tests for relative compaction shall be carried out on the same batch. The
number of additional tests shall be as stated in Table 6.5.
6.31
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 6.1
TEST METHODS FOR FILL MATERIAL
General
6.1.1
The definitions, terms, abbreviations symbols, and grouping of materials

stated in BS 1377 shall apply except as stated in Clauses 6.1.2 and 6.1.3.
Terms and symbols
6.1.2
Terms used in the GS, and in BS 1377 are identified in the GS by the
abbreviations and symbols stated in Table 6.1.1.
Table 6.1.1: Abbreviations and Symbols
Abbreviation/
Symbol
Term
BD
Bulk density
CBD
Converted bulk density
DD
Dry density
IBD
In-situ bulk density
IDD
In-situ dry density
MDD
Maximum dry density
MCBD
Maximum converted bulk density
RC
Relative compaction
Moisture content
wi
In-situ moisture content
wo
Optimum moisture content
Grouping of material
6.1.3
(1)
Fine-grained material is material of which at least 90% passes a 2
mm BS test sieve.
(2)
Medium-grained material is material of which at least 90% passes a
20 mm BS test sieve and more than 10% is retained on a 2 mm BS test
sieve.
6.32
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 6.2
DETERMINATION OF THE MOISTURE CONTENT
OF FINE GRAINED AND MEDIUM GRAINED
MATERIAL BY THE MICROWAVE OVEN DRYING
METHOD
Scope
6.2.1
This method covers the determination of the moisture content of finegrained and medium-grained material as a percentage of the mass of the
dry material.
Apparatus
6.2.2
Procedure
6.2.3
(a)
A microwave oven with a timer and an adjustable power setting.
(b)
An airtight container of microwave safe and non-reflective material.
(c)
A balance readable and accurate to 0.01g.
(d)
A desiccator containing anhydrous silica gel.

(a)
The container shall be cleaned, dried and weighed to the nearest

0.01g (m1).
(b)
A specimen shall be crumbled and placed loosely in the container

and the lid shall be replaced. Each specimen of fine-grained
material shall be at least 30 g and each specimen of medium-grained
material shall be at least 300 g. Specimens of medium-grained
material may be tested in several parts each less than 300 g and the
results aggregated.
(c)
The container and contents shall be weighed to the nearest

0.01g (m2).
(d)
The lid of the specimen container shall be removed and the

container with its lid and contents shall be placed in the microwave
oven and dried. The specimen shall be considered to be dry when,
after an initial drying period, successive weighings at intervals of 1
minute produce results that are the same to the nearest 0.01g.
Alternatively, the oven may be set to an appropriate time and power
setting to dry the specimen as determined by calibration of the oven
on soil of a similar type.
(e)
After drying, the container and contents shall be removed from the
microwave oven and placed in the desiccator to cool.
(f)
The lid shall be replaced and the container and contents shall be
weighed to the nearest 0.01g (m3).
6.33
2006 Edition
Calculation
6.2.4
The moisture content of the material (w) shall be calculated as a percentage

of the dry mass of the material from the equation:
w = (m2 - m3)/(m3 - m1) x 100%
where:
- m1 is the mass of the container (g)
- m2 is the mass of the container and
contents before drying (g)
- m3 is the mass of the container and
contents after drying (g)
6.2.5

(a)
Source and identification of the soil.
(b)
The moisture content of the material to the nearest 0.1%.
(c)
6.34
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 6.3
DETERMINATION
OF
THE
MAXIMUM
CONVERTED BULK DENSITY BY THE HILF
METHOD
Scope
6.3.1
This method covers the determination of the maximum converted bulk

density and the difference between the optimum moisture content and the
in-situ moisture content of a material by relating the converted bulk density
and the moisture added.
Apparatus
6.3.2
Procedure
6.3.3
(a)
Apparatus in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 10.1 or 10.2,

whichever as instructed by the Engineer.
(b)
Apparatus for determination of the moisture content in accordance

with either Geospec 3, Test Method 5.1 or 5.2 or Appendix 6.2,
whichever as instructed by the Engineer.
(c)
Apparatus to extract specimens from the mould.
(d)
Apparatus, such as a warm air blower, for rapid drying of the

material.

(a)
A sample of material shall be taken immediately after completing

the in-situ bulk density test at the same location as the test. The
sample shall be obtained by digging to the same depth as that of the
in-situ bulk density test, keeping the sides of the excavation vertical
and the bottom flat and level. The size of the sample shall be
sufficient to yield a minimum of 10 kg after screening over a 20 mm
BS test sieve.
(b)
The sample shall be weighed to the nearest 0.01 g.
(c)
The sample shall be screened over a 20 mm BS test sieve, ensuring

that moisture loss is kept to a minimum and that any free moisture
appearing in the containers is worked back into the sample.
(d)
The amount retained on the sieve shall be weighed to the nearest

0.01 g and expressed as a percentage of the mass of the sample. If
the percentage exceeds 5%, an adjustment for coarse material shall
be made in accordance with Appendix 6.4. If the percentage does
not exceed 5%, no adjustment is required.
(e)
The material to be tested shall be thoroughly mixed and divided by

quartering or by using a riffle box to obtain a minimum of four
specimens of at least 2500 g each, ensuring that moisture loss is kept
to a minimum. Alternatively, if it has previously been ascertained
that the material is not susceptible to crushing, a single specimen of
at least 2500 g may be used for repeat testing.
6.35
2006 Edition
(f)
Each specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.01 g and the result
shall be taken as the mass of the specimen at the in-situ moisture
content.
(g)
Each specimen and any remaining material shall be placed in

separate moisture-tight containers and the containers sealed.
(h)
The converted bulk density of at least three specimens shall be

plotted against the amount of water added or removed as a
percentage of the mass of the specimen at the in-situ moisture
content (z) on a graph as shown in Civil Engineering and
Development Department Standard Drawing No. C2006, in
accordance with the procedure stated in Clause 6.3.3(i) to (o).
(i)
The first point on the graph shall be obtained as follows:
(j)
A specimen shall be compacted at its in-situ moisture content

in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 10.1, Clause
10.1.5 or Test Method 10.2, Clause 10.2.5, whichever is
A diametrical slice of approximately 400 g to 500 g shall be

cut from the specimen along its entire length. The in-situ
moisture content of the slice (w i ) shall be determined in
accordance with either Geospec 3, Test Method 5.1 or 5.2 or
Appendix 6.2, whichever as instructed by the Engineer.
The bulk density (BD 1 ) shall be calculated as stated in

Clause 6.3.4(1) and plotted on the 0% ordinate of the graph
as the converted bulk density (CBD1).
The second point on the graph shall be obtained as follows:

-
A second specimen shall be examined and, if the in-situ

moisture content obviously exceeds the optimum moisture
content, the procedure stated in Clause 6.3.3(k) shall be
followed.
The moisture content of the specimen shall be increased by

adding an amount of water equal to 2% of the mass of the
specimen. The specimen shall be thoroughly mixed and
compacted in accordance with the method stipulated in
Clause 6.3.3(i).
The bulk density (BD 2 ) shall be calculated as stated in

Clause 6.3.4(1), adjusted to converted bulk density (CBD2)
as stated in Clause 6.3.4(2) and plotted on the +2% ordinate
of the graph.
6.36
2006 Edition
(k)
If the in-situ moisture content of the second specimen obviously

exceeds the optimum moisture content, the specimen shall be
dried until the amount of water removed is approximately 2% of
the mass of the specimen and cooled. The specimen shall be
thoroughly mixed and compacted in accordance with the method
stipulated in Clause 6.3.3(i). The amount of water removed
shall be determined. The bulk density (BD2) shall be calculated
as stated in Clause 6.3.4(1), adjusted to converted bulk density
(CBD2) as stated in Clause 6.3.4(2) and plotted on the negative
ordinate of the graph at a point which corresponds to the amount
of water removed.
(l)
The third point on the graph shall be obtained as follows:

-
If the plotted value of CBD2 is equal to or greater than the

plotted-value of CBD 1 , the moisture content of a third
specimen shall be increased by adding an amount of water
equal to 4% of the mass of the specimen. Alternatively, if
the procedure stated in Clause 6.3.3(k) has been followed, the
specimen shall be dried until the amount of water removed is
approximately 4% of the mass of the specimen after cooling.
If the plotted value of CBD2 is less than the plotted value of

CBD1, the third specimen shall be dried until the amount of
water removed is approximately 2% of the mass of the
specimen after cooling. Alternatively, if the procedure stated
in Clause 6.3.3(k) has been followed, the moisture content
shall be increased by adding an amount of water equal to 2%
of the mass of the specimen.
The specimen shall be thoroughly mixed and compacted in

accordance with the method stipulated in Clause 6.3.3(i).
The amount of water removed shall be determined.
The bulk density (BD3) shall be calculated as stated in Clause

6.3.4(1), adjusted to converted bulk density (CBD3) as stated
in Clause 6.3.4(2) and plotted on the graph at a point which
corresponds to the amount of water added or removed.
(m)
If the centre point of the three points plotted is lower than one of the
other two points, or is higher than one point and equal to the other,
an additional point or points shall be obtained by proceeding in 2%
increments or decrements as appropriate.
(n)
If it is apparent that the moisture condition of the material is such

that a total of five points will not result in the determination of the
optimum moisture content, increments and decrements of 3%
moisture content may be adopted for the entire procedure.
(o)
A smooth approximately parabolic curve shall be drawn to the

plotted points. The peak value of the curve shall be determined as
the maximum converted bulk density (MCBD).
6.37
2006 Edition
Calculation
6.3.4
(p)
The amount of water added or removed as a percentage of the mass

of the specimen at the in-situ moisture content corresponding to the
maximum converted bulk density shall be determined (zm).
(q)
The value of the moisture correction curve passing through the peak
value of the plotted parabolic curve shall be determined (zc). If
there is no moisture correction curve passing through the peak value
of the curve, a moisture correction curve shall be drawn through the
peak by interpolating to the nearest 0.1%.
(1)
The bulk density (BD) shall be calculated from the equation:

BD = (m2 - m1)/V
Mg/m3
where:
- m1 is the mass of the mould and base (g)
- m2 is the mass of the mould, base and wet material (g)
- V is the volume of the mould (mL)
(2)
The converted bulk density (CBD) shall be calculated from the
equation:
CBD = BD/(1+z/100) Mg/m3
where:
- z is the amount of water added or removed as a percentage
of the mass of the specimen at the in-situ moisture content
- z is negative for values below the in-situ moisture content
(3)
The difference between the optimum moisture content (wo) and the
in-situ moisture content (wi) of the material shall be calculated from the
equation:
wo - wi = zm + zc %
where:
- z m is the amount of water added or removed as a
percentage of the mass of the specimen at the in-situ
moisture content corresponding to the maximum converted
bulk density (%)
- zc is the value of the moisture correction curve passing
through the peak value of the plotted parabolic curve (%)
(4)
The optimum moisture content (wo) shall be calculated from the
equation:
wo = wi + (1 + wi/100) zm %
where:
- wi is the in-situ moisture content of the material (%)
6.38
2006 Edition
(5)
The maximum dry density (MDD) shall be calculated from the
equation:
MDD = MCBD/(1 + wi/100) Mg/m3
where:
-
MCBD is the maximum converted bulk density of the

material (Mg/m3)
(6)
The relative compaction (RC), if required, shall be calculated from
the equation:
RC = IBD/MCBD x 100%
where:
-
6.3.5
IBD is the in-situ bulk density of the material determined in

accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 11.1 or 11.2 as
appropriate to the grain size of the material

(a)
Source and identification of the soil.
(b)
The graph showing the plotted points and the parabolic curve
passing through them.
(c)
The maximum converted bulk density to the nearest 0.01 Mg/m3.
(d)
The optimum moisture content to the nearest 0.1%.
(e)
The maximum dry density to the nearest 0.01 Mg/m3.
(f)
The relative compaction to the nearest 0.1%, if determined.
(g)
The percentage retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve and the

percentage retained on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve to the nearest 1%,
if applicable.
(h)
Whether the test was carried out using individual specimens or

repeat testing of a single specimen.
(i)
Whether a manual or an automatic compaction rammer was used.
(j)
6.39
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 6.4
ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED
BULK DENSITY FOR THE DETERMINATION OF
THE RELATIVE COMPACTION
Scope
6.4.1
This method covers the adjustment of the maximum converted bulk

density determined in accordance with Appendix 6.3 for the
determination of the relative compaction of a material containing more
than 5% of the mass of the material at the in-situ moisture content
retained on a 20 mm BS test sieve.
Apparatus
6.4.2
Procedure
6.4.3
(a)
Apparatus in accordance with Appendix 6.3.
(b)
A 20 mm and a 37.5 mm BS test sieve.
(c)
A mould with collar as used for determination of the California

Bearing Ratio (CBR mould).
(d)
An extrusion device as used for determination of the California

Bearing Ratio.

(a)
If the amount of material retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve

exceeds 5% and does not exceed 20%, the material passing the sieve
shall be compacted in accordance with Appendix 6.3. The
maximum converted bulk density (MCBD20) shall be determined
and adjusted as stated in Clause 6.4.4.
(b)
If the amount of material retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve

exceeds 20%, the retained material shall be screened over the 37.5
mm BS test sieve. The procedure stated in either Clause 6.4.3(c)
or Clause 6.4.3(d) as appropriate shall be followed.
(c)
If the amount of material retained on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve does

not exceed 5%, the procedure stated in Clause 6.4.3(e) shall be
followed.
(d)
If the amount of material retained on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve

exceeds 5% and does not exceed 20%, the retained material shall be
replaced with an equal mass of material which is of a similar nature
and which is retained on a 20 mm BS test sieve but passes a 37.5
mm BS test sieve. The procedure stated in Clause 6.4.3(e) shall be
followed.
(e)
The procedure stated in Appendix 6.3 shall be followed except that

the material shall be compacted into the CBR mould and each layer
shall be subjected to 62 blows of the rammer.
6.40
2006 Edition
Calculation
6.4.4
The maximum converted bulk density (MCBD) shall be calculated from

the equation:
where:
- MCBD20 is the maximum converted bulk density of the
material passing the 20 mm BS test sieve (Mg/m3)
- z is the amount of water added as a percentage of the mass
of the specimen at the in-situ moisture content
corresponding to the maximum converted bulk density (%)
6.4.5

(a)
The source and identification of the soil.
(b)
The results in accordance with Appendix 6.3.
(c)
The mass of the original material not passing the 20 mm and 37.5
mm BS test sieve as a percentage of the mass of the material at the
in-situ moisture content to the nearest 0.1%.
(d)
The type of mould used.
(e)
The number of blows per layer.
(f)
Whether the specific gravity was measured or assumed and, if

measured, the method used.
(g)
That the test method used was in accordance with this Specification,
and the results have been adjusted in accordance with this
Appendix.
6.41
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 7
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
7.1
2006 Edition
7.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 7
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
GENERAL
7.01
Site clearance
7.02
Site clearance shall comply with Section 2.
Drainage works
7.03
Drainage works shall comply with Section 5.
Earthworks
7.04
Concrete
7.05
Prestressed ground
anchors
7.06
Prestressed ground anchors shall comply with the requirements stated in the
Contract.
Reinforced fill
structures
7.07
Reinforced fill structures shall comply with the requirements stated in the
Contract.
TRIALS
Trials for geotechnical
works
7.08
Details of trials to be carried out for geotechnical works shall be as stated in

the Contract.
7.3
2006 Edition
PART 2: GROUND INVESTIGATION

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
(The meanings hereby respectively assigned to the following words and
expressions shall only be applicable to Clauses 7.29 to 7.83.)
Amd 2/2007
Block Sample
7.09
A Block Sample is an undisturbed sample recovered by in-situ hand

trimming of a block of material from the surrounding soil.
Bulk Sample
7.10
A Bulk Sample is a sample of at least 10 kg mass, which is representative

of the grading of the material at the point of sampling.
Inspection Pit
7.11
An Inspection Pit is a pit for locating and identifying underground utilities

and structures.
Jar Sample
7.12
A Jar Sample is a disturbed sample of at least 0.7 kg mass contained in a

transparent airtight jar, which has a screw cap with an airtight sealing
ring.
Sample
7.13
A Sample is any quantity of material obtained from the ground for the
purposes of inspection, logging or testing.
Slope Surface Stripping
7.14
Slope Surface Stripping is the removal of surface protection and

vegetation from existing slopes to expose underlying soil or rock for
inspection.
Trial Pit
7.15
A Trial Pit is a pit for inspecting and logging the ground and in which to
carry out in-situ testing and sampling.
Trial Trench
7.16
A Trial trench is any excavation with dimensions larger than a trial pit on
plan.
U76/U100 Sample
7.17
A U76/U100 Sample is an undisturbed sample recovered by advancing a

thin-walled tube of approximately 76 mm/100 mm diameter with a cutting
edge into the soil.
Undisturbed Soil
Sample
7.18
An Undisturbed Soil Sample is a sample complying with Class 1 or

Class 2 of BS 5930.
Ground Investigation
7.19
Ground Investigation is the works carried out on site to investigate the

subsurface conditions.
Ground Investigation
Site
7.20
A Ground Investigation Site is the area required to be investigated as

indicated on the drawings issued from time to time by the Engineer,
Investigation Station
7.21
An Investigation Station is the area within 2m from the specified point or

area.
Common Ground
7.22
Common Ground is material of clay, silt, sand, gravel, cobbles and all
other types of material other than rock or boulders.
Rock
7.23
Rock is naturally occurring material of Grades I to III as classified in

Table 4 of Geoguide 3 Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions.
Boulders
7.24
Boulders are rock fragments greater than 200 mm in size.
7.4
2006 Edition
Cobbles
7.25
Cobbles are rock fragments 60 mm to 200 mm in size.
Gravel
7.26
Gravel is soil particles 2 mm to 60 mm in size.

Amd 2/2007
Hard Strata
7.27
Hard Strata are natural or man-made materials which cannot be

penetrated except by the use of rotary drilling or powered breaking tools.
AGS Digital Format
7.28
AGS Digital Format is a data format that complies with the Third Edition
of the Association of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Specialists
(AGS) publication "Electronic Transfer of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Data".
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of ground
investigation
7.29
(1) The following particulars of proposed materials and methods for

ground investigation shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of drilling and in-situ testing equipment,
(b)
Details of sampling equipment, and
(c)
Details of filter materials and fill materials for drilling and

testing,
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at

least 7 days before the relevant work starts.
INSPECTION PITS, TRIAL PITS AND SLOPE

SURFACE STRIPPING
Inspection pits
7.30
(1) Inspection pits shall not be less than 0.25 m2 in plan and not less
than 1.5 m deep, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
(2) Small disturbed samples shall be taken every 0.5 m in all Common
Ground layers encountered in the inspection pit for logging
purposes, commencing at ground level or below any concrete or
road surfacing layers.
Trial pits and trial

trenches
7.31
(1) Trial pits shall have nominal plan dimensions of 1.5 m x 1.5 m to
their full depth of excavation, unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer or due to restricted space at the pit location or where
prevented by the presence of hard strata. Where trial pits are
excavated on sloping ground the base of each pit shall be horizontal
and any instructed termination depth shall be taken as the depth of
excavation at the mid-point of the base to original ground level.
(2) Any trial pit or trial trench left open overnight, shall be provided
with both a strong wooden cover securely battened down and
appropriate fencing to prevent persons and animals from falling into
the excavation.
7.5
2006 Edition
(3) Before commencing any excavation, three dynamic probing tests
shall be performed in a triangular pattern not more than 800 mm
apart around the centre of each proposed trial pit, unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer. In trial trenches, one dynamic probing
test shall be carried out for each 1.0 m2 of plan area of the
excavation, equally spaced, unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer. All probes shall be terminated at the initial instructed
depth of the trial pit or trial trench. On sloping ground, each
individual dynamic probing test shall be terminated at the instructed
base of the trial pit or trial trench. A second attempt shall be made
for each test if refusal is met before the instructed termination
depth, at a distance of not less than 150 mm from the original
position. Dynamic probing tests shall be carried out in accordance
with Clause 7.69.
(4) The preliminary results of the dynamic probing tests carried out
prior to excavation shall be submitted to the Engineer, with the
relevant daily site records for each trial pit or trial trench excavated.
They shall be included in the Final Field Work Report and provided
in AGS digital format.
(5) Trial pits and trial trenches shall be excavated vertically by manual
methods to the termination requirements or depths instructed by the
Engineer. Benching and shoring shall be carried out as necessary
and as agreed by the Engineer. Hardwood shall not be used for
shoring purposes. Powered tools shall only be used with the
agreement of the Engineer.
(6) Steel ladders or products having equivalent functions or
performance as agreed by the Engineer shall be provided as
necessary.
(7) If instructed by the Engineer, the excavated material shall be
removed from the site and the same or similar material shall be
imported for subsequent backfilling.
Otherwise, material
excavated from trial pits and trial trenches shall be safely stockpiled
and protected from the weather. For excavations on sloping
ground, the material shall be protected in such a manner that it does
not fall or wash downhill or in any way enter surface water drainage
systems. All necessary measures shall be taken to prevent the
ingress of surface water into the excavations.
(8) No logging or photography of each trial pit or trial trench shall be
carried out until the termination of each excavation has been
Pumping from trial
pits and trial trenches
7.32
Trial pit and trial trench excavations shall be kept free from water. The
base of each excavation shall be clearly visible during logging and taking
photographs.
Backfilling of
inspection pits, trial
pits or trial trenches
7.33
(1) Inspection pits shall be plugged at the bottom with concrete or

similar material, and backfilled on completion of the drillhole.
Trial pits and trial trenches shall be backfilled within 2 working
days of the date of issue of an instruction from the Engineer. The
backfill material shall not contain material exceeding 200mm in
size, refuse, metal, rubber or synthetic material, peat, vegetation,
perishable material or toxic material or material susceptible to
7.6
2006 Edition
combustion or to volume change. The ground surface shall be
restored to its condition prior to the excavation, i.e. any pitching,
paving, chunam, concrete or turf shall be replaced.
(2) The backfill material shall be compacted mechanically in successive
layers of not more than 150 mm thick.
(3) As backfilling of each trial pit or trial trench proceeds, timber,
sheeting and other excavation supports shall be progressively
removed, but the removal of such supports shall not endanger the
stability of the Works.
(4) Notwithstanding sub-clause (1) above and Clause 6.09, for a trial pit
or trial trench carried out under an Excavation Permit, the
excavation works including backfilling and reinstatement shall
comply with the Conditions of the Excavation Permit. Satisfactory
compaction of backfill shall be demonstrated by testing for relative
compaction instead of by dynamic probing. Relative compaction
testing shall be carried out for every metre depth of backfill in each
trial pit and trial trench, at locations instructed by the Engineer.
The more stringent requirement shall prevail in case of any
ambiguities or discrepancies between this General Specification and
the Conditions of an Excavation Permit.
Amd 1/2007
(5) On completion of backfilling and prior to any reinstatement of the

ground surface at the location of any trial pit or trial trench, a
further set of dynamic probing tests shall be carried out unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Three such tests shall be
carried out in a triangular pattern not more than 0.80 m apart around
the centre of each trial pit. In trial trenches, one such test shall be
carried out for each 1 m2 of plan area of the excavation, equally
spaced. Each test shall be terminated at the level of the excavated
base of the respective trial pit or trial trench. A second attempt
shall be made for each test if refusal is met before the required
depth, at a distance of not less than 150 mm from the first test. All
dynamic probing tests shall be carried out in accordance with
Clause 7.69. The average dynamic probing test value of the
post-backfilled set of probes, at any level within the excavation
depth of the pit or trench excavation, shall be not less than 80% of
the average value of the pre-excavation set of probes at the same
level, and no less than 10 blows/100 mm. Notwithstanding this
requirement, any subsequent depression of the ground surface
occurring due to settlement shall be filled in and compacted. The
results of the dynamic probing tests shall be submitted to the
Engineer with the relevant daily site records for each trial pit or trial
trench excavated.
Slope surface
protection stripping
7.34
(1)
Surface protection, including that containing reinforcement shall be

stripped and disposed of, from slopes to expose underlying
Common Ground or rock. The width of stripping shall be 500
mm, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, with the axis of
the strip parallel to the dip of the slope. The underlying Common
Ground shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 100 mm and up
to 300 mm as instructed by the Engineer. All excavation shall be
7.7
2006 Edition
terminated if boulders, rock or hard strata are encountered, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. The stripping shall start at
the top of the slope or where instructed by the Engineer and shall
proceed downwards.
(2)
If instructed by the Engineer, the stripping shall be limited to

specified intervals (windows) along the instructed length. A
record for the full instructed length of the stripping shall be
provided to the Engineer.
Access
7.35
Access shall be provided for inspection by the Engineer.
Protection of stripped
surface
7.36
Stripped areas shall be covered up at the end of each working day and
during rainstorms to prevent the ingress of water into the slope and to
minimise the channelling of rainwater run-off.
Reinstatement of
stripped surface
7.37
Stripped areas shall be reinstated in form, colour and conditions similar to

the original. The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before
reinstatement starts.
Disturbed samples
from trial pits, trial
trenches or slope
stripping
7.38
(1) Small disturbed samples shall be taken in all trial pits and trial
trenches at the top of each Common Ground layer encountered and
then at intervals of 0.5 m in any layer thicker than 0.5 m. Small
disturbed samples shall be taken in Common Ground every 0.5 m
along each stripping, commencing at the base. The disturbed
samples shall be representative of the composition of the Common
Ground exposed. Samples of material predominantly coarser
grained than sand, or if instructed by the Engineer, shall be placed
in large polythene bags. Other material shall be placed in airtight
plastic containers, of minimum 100 mm diameter, with a screw top.
Sufficient material shall be taken to fill the bag or container, which
shall be sealed immediately after recovery. Each sample shall be
labelled as specified in Clause 7.55, including the face number from
which the sample was taken.
(2) Large disturbed samples of at least 25 kg shall be taken in trial pits,
trial trenches or from slope stripping, if instructed by the Engineer.
All large disturbed samples shall be placed in heavy-duty polythene
bags immediately after they are taken, and securely fastened.
Before taking samples from slope stripping, a minimum of 100 mm
of material, or other thickness, as instructed by the Engineer, shall
be removed first.
Records of inspection
pits
7.39
Details of each inspection pit shall be included in the relevant daily site
record and drillhole record. A photograph taken vertically downwards
into each inspection pit shall be submitted together with the daily site
record for the relevant drillhole. A board showing the contract number
and drillhole number, and the depth indicator used shall be clearly
visible in the photograph.
Records of trial pits

and trial trenches
7.40
(1)
The format of daily site records shall be similar to figure 7 of

Geoguide 2 and to the approval of the Engineer. The
following additional shall be included:
(a)
Contractor's name,
Investigation title,
7.8
Contract
number
and
Ground
2006 Edition
(2)
(b)
weather conditions,
(c)
depths and details of all sampling and field testing including

total blow count for driven samples and sample recovery, and
(d)
any other relevant information e.g. comments on stability,

maximum and average trial pit and trial trench depths and
plan dimensions, water inflow, powered tools used.
Preliminary and final records shall show the following

information:
(a)
for trial pits, the co-ordinates of the centre of the pit, for trial
trenches, coordinates of both ends of the longer axis,
(b) for trial pits located on level or sloping ground, the reduced
level at the centre of the pit; for trial trenches, the reduced
levels of both ends of the longer axis,
(c)
water levels with full details of fluctuation and seepage.

no groundwater is encountered then this shall be stated,
If
(d) a hand drawn (preliminary) and computer-generated (final)

representation of the features and material types encountered
in each face and the base of the trial pit or trial trench. Fill
shall be shown as its constituent materials in the face sketch
and its legend pattern in the legend column,
(e)
stability conditions during excavation,
(f)
the size and orientation of any services encountered,
(g) a sketch showing the dimensions of any sub-surface

structures, including foundations exposed in the excavations,
and
(h) a remarks section which shall include groundwater and wall
stability observations, average and maximum depths, use of
shoring and details of any obstruction encountered. If the
required number of dynamic probing tests was not carried
out, the excavation was terminated earlier than specified, or
the plan area of the excavation was reduced, these facts shall
be noted with reasons.
Photographs of trial
pits or trial trenches
7.41
(1) Within 2 working days of the date of approval of any trial pit or
trial trench it shall be photographed using a reference board with
maximum dimensions of 300 mm (width) by 450 mm (length).
Each face and the base shall be photographed.
(2) Each photograph shall cover a length of the excavated face of
between 1.5 m and 2.0 m in both vertical and horizontal directions.
Where more than one photograph is required to cover the full
excavated depth or length of a face, the overlap between adjacent
photographs shall be between 10% and 20%.
7.9
2006 Edition
(3) Each photograph shall identify the face of the excavation and shall
contain a natural scale. In the case of trial trenches, it shall also
identify the location of the photograph by the metrage along the
face of the excavation.
(4)
Slope stripping
records
7.42
One colour print of minimum size 85 mm x 125 mm of each trial

pit or trial trench photograph shall be supplied with the
preliminary records. Each copy of the Final Field Work Report
shall contain colour photocopies of A4 mounted prints of
minimum size 125 mm x 175 mm. Within 3 weeks of the award
of the Contract, the name(s) of the suppliers and samples of the
colour photocopies shall be submitted for the Engineers approval.
The quality of the colour photocopies shall be maintained as
approved throughout the Contract.
Preliminary and final slope stripping records shall be either a hard copy
or soft copy as determined by the Engineer. A hard-copy record shall
be printed double sided on recycled paper. A soft copy record shall be
in read-only format. Each record shall include descriptions of strata
(including decomposed rock) encountered and levels and co-ordinates
of the top and bottom of strips, berms, benches and changes in type of
slope surfacing. The survey results shall include all points on each
strip where there is a change in gradient. Any other salient features
shall be noted e.g. dip and dip direction of joints. The direction and
bearing of the slope and the results of any in situ testing carried out
shall be shown on the record. The record shall include a dimensioned
sketch of the strip cross-section.
DRILLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

Drilling rigs for
ground investigation
7.43
Drilling rigs shall meet the following requirements:

(a)
drilling rigs shall be of the hydraulic feed type having the capacity
to drill in the sizes and to the termination requirements or depths
instructed,
(b)
drilling rigs shall be capable of providing stable drill-string rotation

at speeds in the range 50-1250 rpm and have a minimum ram
stroke length of 400 mm if applicable. The rigs shall be fitted
with a tachometer, a hydraulic feed pressure gauge of an
appropriate scale and a pressure gauge for reading water flushing
pressure. The hydraulic feed pressure readings shall be readily
converted to loads transferred to the bit in pounds or kilograms
according to the manufacturer's specification. In order to provide
a means of measuring penetration and estimating the rate of
advance, a rigid rod, clearly graduated in 10 mm increments, shall
be permanently attached to, and parallel with, the hydraulic feed
rams, and
(c)
if the flushing medium is water, the pump shall be equipped with a

gearbox and shall be capable of delivering up to 2 L/s. It shall
incorporate a surge bottle to reduce fluctuations in water pressure
and the suction hose shall be fitted with a suitable filter. It shall
have a by-pass system allowing full control of water flow at all
pump delivery rates.
7.10
2006 Edition
Drilling equipment for
ground investigation
7.44
(1) The core barrels, drill rods and drill bits of drilling equipment for
ground investigation shall be of a type appropriate to the purpose
of the drilling and sampling. Drill bits shall be diamond, tungsten
carbide or combination tipped core bits, of a type appropriate to the
purpose of the drilling and sampling and suitable for the percentage
core recovery and diameters required by the Contract. Triple tube
core barrels shall be provided with bits suitable for air-foam flush.
The type and make of core barrels shall be approved by the
Engineer.
(2) The size of casings shall be appropriate to the drilling, coring,
sampling, testing and other installation requirements.
(3) Only standard nominal lengths of casing and drill rods shall be
used. The mixing of standard nominal imperial and metric
lengths shall not be permitted.
(4) Casings and drill rods shall be straight, in good condition, clean at
the time of drilling and free from scale, dirt and other loose
material.
(5) All accessories and spare parts shall be as supplied or
recommended by the same manufacturer unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. They shall be compatible with the
equipment in use and with each other. Sufficient spares for core
barrels, core bits, core lifters and other accessories shall be
available for use on site without causing any delay to drilling
operations. The condition of the core bit in use shall be carefully
monitored and if any damage occurs, such as breaking of teeth, it
shall be replaced immediately.
(6) Core barrels shall always be maintained in proper working order
and particular attention shall be paid to the condition of the
extrusion piston. The rubber O-rings shall be maintained in good
condition so that no water escapes past the piston during extrusion
of the cores.
(7) Sediment catcher tubes attached to the top of the core barrels shall
be used if instructed by the Engineer. The tube shall have the
same external diameter as the core barrel, and be approximately
0.75 m long.
(8) Core barrels and drill rods shall be stored on steel frame trestles.
Drilling for ground

investigation
7.45
(1) Drillholes for ground investigation shall be sunk by rotary

methods. The methods and equipment used shall be such that:
(a)
The soil encountered and the levels at which changes in

ground conditions occur can be accurately identified,
(b)
The specified sampling requirements can be achieved,
(c)
In-situ tests can be carried out and field installations can be

incorporated at any depth in the drillhole, and
(d)
Consistency of measurement and minimal disturbance of the

ground is achieved.
7.11
2006 Edition
(2) No nominally vertical hole shall deviate from the vertical direction
by more than 0.5 unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. For
inclined drillholes, neither the inclination nor the bearing shall
differ from the instructed values by more than 2 throughout the
length of the hole.
(3) The type and state of the core bit, feed rates and management of the
drill string shall be such that the specified minimum acceptable core
recovery in any single core run can be obtained where the condition
of the ground permits.
(4) In Grade III rock or better, 3 m core runs may be used. For Grade
IV or V, maximum core run lengths shall be limited to 1.5 m. If
the percentage core recovery in a core run is less than that specified
in Clause 7.64 the following run shall be reduced by 50%, to a
minimum length of 0.5 m. Notwithstanding this requirement, with
the approval of the Engineer, the core barrel shall be withdrawn and
core removed more frequently as necessary to secure the maximum
possible core recovery.
(5) Common Ground around the bottom of a drillhole shall not be
unduly disturbed by water entering or leaving the hole, or by stress
relief. The water level in a drillhole shall be kept at least 1 m to 2
m above the ambient groundwater level at all times, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Rapid a withdrawal of rods
and sampling equipment, causing rapid fluctuation in the water
level inside the casing, shall be avoided.
(6) Casings shall be advanced concurrently with the removal of
material in such a manner that loss of ground is avoided. Larger
casings shall be set concentric with drillholes that are being reamed.
(7) Drilling lubricants other than clean water shall not be used, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Categories of core
drilling
7.46
Three categories of core drilling shall be available:

(a)
Category A - Water/Air-foam flush with triple tube core barrels

using split inner tube (4C-MLC, HMLC or NMLC).
(b)
Category B - Water/Air-foam flush with double tube core barrels

(T2-101, TNW or products having equivalent functions or
performance approved), and
(c)
Category C - Water/Air-foam flush with single tube core barrels.
Rotary open hole

drilling
7.47
A hole up to 170 mm in diameter, to a maximum depth of 40 m in

Common Ground or Rock, Hard Strata without the recovery of core or
samples, shall be advanced, if instructed, by means of a tricone roller bit,
drag bit or other non-coring bit with water as the flushing medium.
Air-Foam Drilling
7.48
An appropriate air-compressor and all necessary ancillary equipment

shall be provided to carry out drilling with air-foam flush to the
Engineers satisfaction. The foam return shall be the consistency of
thick shaving cream and the hole shall be kept full of foam at all times.
The foam shall either be fully biodegradable or water soluble and
arrangements shall be made for the collection and removal or dispersal of
the foam returns, if required. The proposed foam additive and mixes
7.12
2006 Edition
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. A typical arrangement of
air-foam mixing and flushing system is shown in Figure 12, Geoguide 2.
Disposal of flush
returns
7.49
The flushing medium for drilling shall be passed through a sedimentation

basin to remove drilling cuttings/arisings and shall either be reused or,
where permitted, be discharged to surface drains or natural stream
courses. Measures shall be taken to prevent the flushing medium
seeping through the ground. Re-circulation pits or re-circulation tanks
shall be provided at the drillhole locations if the flush returns cannot be
discharged safely or if instructed by the Engineer.
Backfilling of
drillholes and rotary
open holes
7.50
(1) All drillholes and rotary open holes in which no instrumentation

will be installed shall be backfilled with cement bentonite grout
within one working day of the completion of the hole. The grout
shall be a pumpable mix of cement and bentonite in the proportion
of 4:1 by dry weight, or an alternative mix agreed by the Engineer.
The water content of the grout shall be limited to that necessary for
proper mixing and placement. In no case shall the water cement
ratio exceed 3. The resulting grout shall be free of lumps and
foreign material. A method statement shall be submitted for the
Engineers approval. A demonstration of the proposed equipment,
material, mixing, handling and placement procedures including
appropriate quality controls and checks to be adopted shall be
given.
(2) For each drillhole backfilled with grout, the viscosity of the grout
measured by Marsh Funnel and specific gravity of the grout
measured by Mud Balance or any instrument of sufficient accuracy
to permit measurement within 0.01 g/cc shall be recorded. A
labelled jar sample of grout from each hole shall be kept.
(3) Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the grout shall be fed
into the bottom of the hole using a suitable pump and a tremie pipe,
the end of which shall always be maintained below the grout/water
interface. Casing shall be removed in stages during grouting to
ensure that the entire hole is backfilled. Grout level shall be
checked at least 24 hours after initial grouting, and any significant
drop in grout level shall be topped up with additional grout, or
backfilled with material agreed by the Engineer. Any subsequent
depression shall be levelled and compacted.
(4) Only if instructed by the Engineer shall granular material, cement
mortar or other materials be used to backfill the holes. Under no
circumstances shall cement-bentonite balls (i.e. mixed paste) be
used to backfill the hole.
(5) A complete record of backfilling operations including the quantity
of grout placed, the drop in grout level after 24 hours, the viscosity
and specific gravity of the grout and any other relevant information
shall be included in the Daily Site Record and shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 3 days of completion of backfilling.
(6) For backfilling involving an Excavation Permit, the work shall
comply with the requirements set out in the Conditions of the
Excavation Permit. If there are any discrepancies between this
clause and the Conditions of the Excavation Permit, the more
stringent requirement shall prevail.
7.13
2006 Edition
Sampling from
drillholes
7.51
(1) Jar samples from drillholes shall be taken from the cutting shoe of
each undisturbed sample, from any anomalous material, from each
standard penetration test and at other locations as instructed by the
Engineer.
(2) All loose material and material disturbed by drilling or in-situ tests
shall be removed from the sides and bottom of the drillhole before
each undisturbed sample is taken.
Records of drillholes
7.52
(1) Records of drillholes for ground investigation shall be kept on the Site.
Drillhole logs shall be comprehensive and shall be in a form similar to
that shown in Figure 44 of `Geoguide 2: Guide to Site Investigation',
Hong Kong Government, 1987. Soil and rock descriptions shall
comply with those stated in the insert titled `Checklist for Soil
Descriptions' and `Checklist for Rock Descriptions' in `Geoguide 3:
Guide to Rock and Soil Descriptions', Hong Kong Government, 1988
or with any other system agreed by the Engineer.
(2) Drillhole logs shall be drawn to a constant vertical scale of 1:50
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer and shall contain the
following details:
(a)
Information shown and in the format in Figure 44 and

paragraphs 40.2.6 (2), (4) and (5) of `Geoguide 2: Guide to
Site Investigation', Hong Kong Government, 1987,
(b)
Reduced levels of observation well bases, piezometer tips,

and sand filter layers,
(c)
Details of utilities identified in the inspection pit excavated

at the drillhole location.
SAMPLING FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

Supply of sampling
equipment and
containers
7.53
All the sampling equipment and containers shall conform to the

requirements of Geoguide 2 and this General Specification.
Specifications and examples of the proposed equipment and containers to
use shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the
commencement of the Contract.
(a)
For general purpose open tube samples and thin-walled

samples, the sample tube and cutting shoe shall be free of rust,
pitting, burring or any other defect. The use of oil inside the
sampler shall be limited to the minimum practical. Each
sample tube shall have a unique reference number and the word
`TOP' engraved on its exterior at one end. The sample tube
shall be driven with the end marked `TOP' uppermost. The
dimensions, construction and condition of each sample tube;
cutting shoe and adaptor head shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to sampling. The adaptor head shall be fitted
with a ball valve to permit the exit of air or water during driving
and to assist in retaining the sample during withdrawal, and it
shall have an allowance for over-driving. In soil of low
cohesion such as silt and silty fine sand the sampler shall be
equipped with a basket core retainer to enhance core recovery.
7.14
2006 Edition
General sampling
requirements
7.54
(b)
U100, U76 and U40 thin-walled samplers shall be approved

102 mm (for U100), 78 mm (for U76) and 42 mm (for U40)
diameter open drive sample tubes made from thin-walled
seamless cadmium plated or stainless steel. They shall be
not less than 450 mm (for U100), 350 mm (for U76) and 200
mm (for U40) in length fitted with a cutting shoe tapered at
an angle not exceeding 20. The area ratio of the sampler as
defined in Figure 13 of `Geoguide 2: Guide to Site
Investigation', Hong Kong Government, 1987 shall not
exceed 30%.
(c)
Piston samplers shall be a thin-walled fixed piston sampler to

the approval of the Engineer. The piston sampler shall be
capable of operating to a depth of at least 20 m below ground
level with no lateral movement during the actual sampling
operation. The design and maintenance of the sampler shall
be such that a partial vacuum is formed over the retained
sample in the tube. The minimum recovered sample length
shall be 900 mm. The thin-walled tube shall have an
external diameter of 75 mm or 100 mm as instructed by the
Engineer. The area ratio of the sampler as defined in Figure
13 of `Geoguide 2: Guide to Site Investigation', Hong Kong
Government, 1987 shall not exceed 10%.
(1) Both disturbed and undisturbed samples shall be taken from an

Investigation Station at the depths and intervals instructed by the
Engineer. All samples shall be transported and delivered in core
boxes or in any other containers as specified.
(2) Small disturbed samples shall be taken in drillholes from the cutting
shoe of each undisturbed sample, from any anomalous material,
from each standard penetration test and at other locations as
(3) In all drillholes, small disturbed samples of Common Ground shall
be taken on entering each new stratum (including decomposed rock)
and every 1.0 m in between other small disturbed samples from
cutting shoes or core bits. They shall be taken with a driven
sample tube or other method approved by the Engineer. The
disturbed sample shall be representative of the composition of the
Common Ground.
Numbering and
labelling of samples
7.55
(1) A reference number shall be assigned to each Common Ground

sample (both disturbed and undisturbed) and groundwater samples
taken, commencing with samples obtained from the inspection pit,
if excavated. The number shall be unique for that Investigation
Station and shall be in order of depth below ground level. The
number shall also be shown on the records adjacent to the sample
symbol.
(2) All sample containers and tube samples shall be clearly marked
both on the side and the top of the sample with a permanent marker
pen with the following information:
7.15
2006 Edition
(a)
Works Order number, if any,
(b)
Reference number of the Investigation Station,
(c)
Reference number of the sample,
(d)
Date of sampling, and
(e)
Depth of the top of the sample below existing ground level.
(3) Each core box shall be identified by the following information,

which shall be clearly marked on the top, both ends and beneath the
core box lid using waterproof ink or paint:
(a) Contract number,
(b) Works Order number, if any,
(c) Ground Investigation title,
(d) Investigation Station number,
(e) Depths of material contained, and
(f) Core box number.
(4) The depths at which each core run started and finished shall be
recorded at the ends of each core run by permanent marker pen on
the edge of the box or on wooden blocks which fit between the
dividing slats. If a core run is contained in two sequential core
boxes, the abbreviation "cont'd" shall be used on the adjacent edges
of the core boxes.
Sealing of common
ground tube samples
7.56
(1) Once a sample tube has been detached or removed from the
sampling equipment, the visible ends of the sample shall be cleared
of any disturbed material, and the edges trimmed at 45. After
cleaning the sides of the tube above the recovered sample, the ends
shall be coated with three successive thin films of just molten
microcrystalline wax. A metal foil disc shall then be added and
followed by more molten wax to give a total thickness of not less
than 20 mm. Any space remaining in the ends of the sample tube
shall be solidly filled with damp sawdust or other material approved
by the Engineer and the ends of the sample tube shall be covered
with tight fitting rubber caps.
(2) The tubes containing samples shall be handled with care to avoid
any possible disturbance, stored in a cool and dry location and
protected against the sun or inclement weather whilst on site.
(3) The material from the cutting shoe/core bit shall be immediately
placed in a plastic container of minimum diameter 100 mm, with a
screw top. They shall be arranged securely in the corebox in their
proper sequence.
7.16
2006 Edition
7.57
Core boxes shall be 1.05 m in length, 0.45 m in width and of sound

robust construction, able to withstand the weight of the cores and
stacking of the boxes. The lid shall be fitted with metal hinges, hasp
and staple and a locking device. Rope strands shall be attached to each
end of the core box for lifting. Boxes shall be provided with rigid
separating slats.
Delivery and storage of 7.58

samples
(1) All samples, including cores, obtained from Ground Investigations

shall be delivered to the storage facilities location specified by the
Engineer, within 3 working days of the date of completion of the
field work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Core boxes
(2) Samples shall be stored in a cool and dry location and protected
against the sun or inclement weather. Block samples shall be
stored in their correct orientation. All samples recovered from
vertical/sub-vertical or horizontal/sub-horizontal drillholes shall be
stored and transported in their correct orientation, and in
purpose-built racks which shall hold the samples securely. Core
boxes shall be stacked by Investigation Station and box order.
(3) Samples shall be delivered to the laboratory specified by the
Engineer within 3 working days of receipt of an instruction. Any
discrepancies between the laboratory testing schedule attached to
the instruction and the samples, such as incorrect sample depths or
reference numbers, shall be raised with the Engineer prior to
delivery. A signed delivery docket shall be obtained to record the
delivery and all the samples shall be checked off with a
representative from the laboratory.
(4) On completion of the laboratory testing, the Engineer may require
the samples to be removed from the laboratory. These samples,
together with any samples kept at designated storage facilities shall
be delivered or disposed of as directed by the Engineer. A list of
the samples delivered, agreed by the person receiving the samples
where possible, shall be sent to the Engineer.
Undisturbed tube
sampling of common
ground in drillholes
7.59
Before an attempt to take an undisturbed sample from a drillhole is

made, all loose material and material disturbed by drilling or field testing
shall be removed from the hole. On recommencement of work at the
start of each shift during the progress of a drillhole, a minimum of 0.3 m
of material shall be removed before the next undisturbed sample is taken,
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Retractable triple tube

core sampling
7.60
(1) Undisturbed samples of Common Ground shall be taken in

drillholes using a triple tube retractable core barrel (Geoguide 2)
fitted with either a detachable rigid clear ABS plastic or rigid
opaque PVC or Polyethylene (PE) liner.
7.17
2006 Edition
(2) The dimensions of the core barrel and liner shall be as follows:
Core Barrel
Liner
Item
Outer Tube
Inner Tube
Cutting Shoe
(Leading Edge)
Drill Bit
ID
OD
Ovality
Bow
Length
Wall Thickness
OD
ID
OD
ID
OD
OD
Dimension (mm)
98.5 2.0
78.0 1.0
85.0 89.0
72.5 1.0
77.2 1.0
101.1 2.0
74.0 1.0
77.0 1.0
0.5
3 per metre
1000 5
1.5 minimum
(3) Face-discharge bits made of steel and set with tungsten carbide
inserts in a saw tooth profile shall be used. The drill bit shall have
groove cuts on the external sidewall to facilitate return of flushing
fluid.
(4) The cutting shoe shall have an area ratio of 10 to 15%. The ID of
the leading edge of the cutting shoe shall be smaller than the ID of
the liner tube with an inside clearance between 1.5 and 3.5%.
Three lengths of cutting shoes, referred to as "long", "medium" and
"short" with decreasing lengths of protrusion beyond the drill bit
when mounted, shall be available. The "long" shoe with a
protrusion of not more than 50 mm shall be used generally for
looser or softer soils, and the "medium" or "short" shoes for denser
or stiffer soils.
(5) The liner shall fit tightly inside the inner tube, in both radial and
longitudinal directions. The liners shall be obtained from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Within 3 weeks of award
of the Contract, the name(s) of the suppliers, material specification
and examples of the liners proposed, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. If approved, the quality of the liners shall
be maintained for the duration of the Contract.
(6) The barrel, drill bit and cutting shoe shall be free from significant
defects and in good working condition. A sediment tube may be
attached to the top of the barrel to trap the cuttings falling out of
suspension from the flushing medium. A core retainer of suitable
design may be used only when it is necessary to reduce the risk of
sample loss.
(7) Prior to lowering the barrel down the drillhole, it shall be checked
to ensure that the inner barrel rotates freely, the retractor spring
works and that the check valve at the top of the inner barrel is
functioning properly.
(8) The bottom of the drillhole shall be cleaned out properly prior to
sampling to the specified sampling commencement depth within a
tolerance of 25 mm, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
7.18
2006 Edition
(9) In order to alleviate disturbance to the soil being sampled, the
applied flushing pressure shall be kept to a minimum. An
optimum combination of the applied bit pressure and rotation speed
shall be used to achieve a steady penetration but this shall not be so
slow as to cause unnecessary disturbance by the flushing medium.
(10) Successful sampling shall mean a minimum recovery of 80% of the
sampled length when water flush is being used, and 90% of the
sampled length when air-foam flush is being used. If sampling is
not successful, the hole shall immediately be cleared of material
disturbed by the sampling process and another attempt shall be
made from the level of the base of the failed attempt.
(11) If continuous retractable triple tube core sampling has been
instructed and the second attempt also proves unsuccessful the
Engineer shall be informed immediately, or as early as possible on
the next working day, and a proposal made for improving sample
recovery for the Engineer's approval.
(12) If interval sampling has been instructed and the second attempt also
proves unsuccessful, a Standard Penetration Test with a liner sample
shall be performed and the sampling sequence instructed shall be
continued. If two consecutive sequences of failed undisturbed
sampling occur in any one drillhole the Engineer shall be informed
immediately, or as soon as possible the next working day. The
sampling sequence shall be continued unless otherwise instructed.
Piston sampling
7.61
(1) Undisturbed samples of Common Ground shall be taken in

drillholes using a thin-walled stationary piston sampler. The
sampling tube shall be 1000 mm long, formed from stainless steel
with an integral cutting edge and shall have an internal diameter of
75 mm or 100 mm (1 mm) as directed by the Engineer. The area
ratio of the tube shall not exceed 10% and the cutting edge taper
angle shall not exceed 15. No inside clearance shall be permitted.
The sampling operation shall ensure the sampling tube is pushed
into the soil vertically at a steady rate with no lateral deflection.
The design and performance of the sampler shall be such that a
vacuum is formed over the retained sample in the tube.
(2) The minimum recovery shall be 90% of the sampled length. If the
length of sample recovered is less than that specified, the hole shall
immediately be cleared of material disturbed by the sampling
process and another attempt shall be made from the level of the base
of the failed attempt. If this second sampling attempt also fails to
recover the minimum specified, the sampling sequence instructed
shall be continued but the Engineer shall be informed immediately,
or as early as possible the next working day.
(3) Purpose-built sample boxes shall be provided for transporting and
storing all piston samples in a vertical position. Each box shall be
used to transport two piston samples. These boxes shall be robust,
water-tight, and shall be fitted with hinged top and rope-strand
lifting handles. The inside of the box shall be provided with
styrofoam padding which holds the samples tightly in place.
7.19
2006 Edition
U100 and U76

sampling
7.62
(1) General
(a) Samples of Common Ground shall be taken in drillholes, trial
pits and trial trenches using 101 mm (1 mm) [for U100] or 77
mm (1 mm) [for U76] internal diameter open sample tubes.
The tubes shall be thin walled seamless stainless steel or
galvanised mild steel not less than 450 mm in length fitted with
a cutting shoe tapered at an angle not exceeding 20. The area
ratio of the sample tube cutting shoes shall not exceed 30% and
inside clearance between the shoe and each tube shall not
exceed 2% unless a core retainer is used, in which case the
inside clearance shall not exceed 4%. Each sample tube shall
have the word "TOP" marked on its exterior at the end driven
uppermost. The minimum recovery shall be 80% of the
sampled length.
(b) The adaptor head at the top of the sample tubes shall be fitted
with a ball valve to permit the exit of air or water during driving
and to assist in retaining the sample during withdrawal. The
use of oil inside the sample tubes shall not be permitted and care
shall be taken to ensure that the sample is not compressed by
over-driving.
(c) All recovered samples shall be stored and transported vertically,
in their correct orientation, in purpose-built racks which shall
hold the tubes securely.
(2) In Drillholes
(a) The sampler shall be driven by means of either a jarring link
(i.e. drilling rods delivering the impact at the adaptor head of
the sampler), a sliding hammer arrangement to the approval of
the Engineer or a single ram stroke. No vertical pull-up action
shall be applied to the sampling tube during the lift-up of any
hammering operation. The total depth driven or pushed and,
where relevant, the number of blows used shall be recorded in
the daily site records. Where driven samples are instructed in
Common Ground of low cohesion, such as silts and silty fine
sands, a core retainer of suitable design shall be provided to
improve sample recovery. In cohesive Common Ground, the
initial attempt to obtain a sample shall be made without the use
of a core retainer.
(b) Before withdrawal from the drillhole, the sampler shall be
rotated through two complete revolutions to shear the Common
Ground horizontally at the bottom of the cutting shoe. If
necessary, this operation shall be delayed to allow the
development of sufficient adhesion inside the tube. The
sampler shall then be withdrawn smoothly so as to cause
minimal disturbance to the sample.
(c) If an initial attempt to take a U100 or U76 sample in a drillhole
recovers a length of sample less than specified, the hole shall
immediately be cleared of material disturbed by the sampling
process and another attempt shall be made from the level of the
base of the failed attempt, using a core retainer. Should the
second attempt also prove unsuccessful, a Standard Penetration
7.20
2006 Edition
Test with a liner sample shall be performed, and the sampling
sequence as instructed shall be continued. If two consecutive
sequences of failed sampling occur in any one drillhole, the
Engineer shall be informed immediately, or as soon as possible
the next working day.
(3) In Trial Pits and Trial Trenches
(a) Prior to sampling in trial pits or trial trenches, all disturbed
material shall be cleared in order to expose Common Ground in
its natural condition. The samples shall be taken using a
sliding hammer arrangement with care being taken to ensure
that no lateral movement takes place during driving with the use
of guide frame as necessary. The proposed method of driving
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The sample tubes
shall then be removed by excavating around them.
(b) If a driven sample in a trial pit or trial trench recovers less than
that specified a second attempt shall be made beside the first,
but not closer than one tube diameter to the first attempt. If
this second attempt fails then a third and final attempt shall be
made at a distance of at least one tube diameter from any
previous attempt. If the third attempt fails the Engineer shall
be informed immediately, or as soon as possible the next
working day.
Block samples
7.63
(1) Block samples of Common Ground shall be taken either from the
sides or bottom of trial pits or trial trenches or from slope stripping.
Samples shall be not less than 230 mm cube.
(2) The top and four sides of the sample, but not the base, shall be
excavated, trimmed, wrapped in aluminium foil and waxed. A
wooden box, with two opposite sides removed, shall then be placed
over the prepared sample such that a minimum annulus of 25 mm
exists between the inside of the box and the sample. The top and
side annuli shall then be filled using polyurethane by means of two
reagents. After hardening of the polyurethane, the top of the box
shall be attached and the sample carefully broken away at its base at
a depth of no less than 50 mm below the base of the sample. The
sample shall then be carefully inverted and the "base" trimmed,
wrapped in aluminium foil and waxed before the basal annulus is
filled with polyurethane. After hardening, the base of the wooden
box shall be attached. The top and bottom of the sample shall be
clearly marked on the box, as shall the direction of magnetic north
relative to the in situ sample.
Recovery of cores
7.64
Total core recovery is defined as the length of core recovered expressed

as a percentage of the length of the core run carried out. The total core
recoveries given below are the minimum which shall normally be
accepted for the categories of drilling defined in Clause 7.46:
7.21
2006 Edition
Minimum Acceptable Total Core Recovery for Category of Drilling (%)
Ground
Conditions
A
(Air-foam
flush)
A
(Water
flush)
98
80
Rock of
Decomposition
Grade I To III or
Concrete or
Boulder
Common
Ground
98
B
(Water/
Air-foam
flush)
95
C
(Water/
Air-foam
flush)
90
N/A
N/A
N/A
Amd 2/2007
Extrusion and
handling of cores
7.65
(1) All cores shall be removed from double tube core barrels using a
hydraulic extruder, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Under no circumstances shall air pressure be used for the extrusion
of cores. The extruder shall apply a continuous pressure to one
end of the core whilst the barrel is in a horizontal position. Only
gentle hammering with a wooden mallet on the side of the core
barrel to free wedged pieces shall be permitted.
(2) Cores from single and double tube core barrels shall be carefully
extruded onto split plastic piping of similar diameter to the core
such that the core fits tightly into the pipe and is not free to rotate.
If instructed by the Engineer, or if the recovered core is heavily
jointed or fragmented and is likely to be disturbed during
transportation, it shall also be wrapped in self-clinging transparent
film, or similar approved by the Engineer.
(3) Cores from split inner tube triple tube core barrels shall be wrapped
in self-clinging transparent film and then aluminium foil and
carefully transferred into split plastic piping of the same internal
diameter as the split inner tubes.
(4) As core is extruded it shall be arranged in core boxes in a proper
sequence starting with the shallowest core on the left side nearest
the hinge and then working along the slat and subsequently
outwards towards the hasp (i.e. from left to right with the box lid on
the far side of the box as the core is placed). Slats shall be
positioned and secured such that the core is restrained from
movement.
(5) Fractured core shall be packed securely. At no time should any
core be loose in the box. Core losses in individual core runs shall
be shown by wooden blocks or polystyrene of square cross section
to fill the core box, of a length equal to the core lost.
7.22
2006 Edition
(6) Until the boxes containing the cores are transported from the site
they shall be neatly stored at the drillhole locations in such a
manner that inspection of the cores can easily be made. The boxes
shall be stored under cover and protected from the weather. All
core boxes shall be carefully transported to avoid damage and
disturbance to the contents.
Photographs of core
boxes
7.66
(1) Within 3 working days of the date of completion of the drillhole, the
samples and/or cores contained within each core box shall be
photographed. The core shall be evenly lit with no shadows, the
core box and reference board in each photograph shall fill the frame,
and the focal plane of the camera and the plane of the core box shall
be parallel.
(2) The photograph shall contain a reference board of minimum
dimensions 350 mm (height) by 1000 mm (length). The reference
board shall contain:
(a) the Ground Investigation title,
(b) the core box number,
(c) the depth below ground level at the start and finish of all
material in the core box, and
(d) a reference scale over the entire board length marked in 100mm
units.
(3) All cores, except those susceptible to deterioration on contact with
water, shall be thoroughly moistened before being photographed.
Where coreboxes contain disturbed samples, the lids shall be
removed from the containers so that the contents are visible in the
photograph. The first disturbed sample in any photographed core
box shall be identified by its unique sample number and depth so
that subsequent disturbed samples in that box can also be identified.
(4) One full set of colour prints of minimum size 85 mm x 125 mm
shall be supplied with the preliminary records.
Colour
photocopies of A4 mounted prints of minimum size 200 mm x 250
mm shall be supplied in each copy of the Final Field Work Report.
Within 3 weeks of award of the Contract, the name(s) of the
proposed supplier of the colour photocopies and samples shall be
supplied for the Engineers approval. If approved, the quality of
the colour photocopies shall be maintained for the duration of the
Contract.
Groundwater samples
7.67
Groundwater samples shall be taken from drillholes, trial pits or trial

trenches, if instructed by the Engineer. Where water has been used for
drilling, a volume of water at least equivalent to that of the drillhole
volume shall be bailed out before sampling. Each sample taken shall
not be less than 2 litres and shall be placed in a sterilized airtight bottle
of sufficient capacity. Bottles shall be flushed out twice with the water
to be sampled before use.
7.23
2006 Edition
IN-SITU TESTING
Standard penetration
tests
7.68
(1) The apparatus and procedure for standard penetration tests shall
comply with BS 1377:1990 (Part 9, Test 3.3), amended by this
Clause as necessary.
The drive hammer shall be a type
incorporating an automatic trip mechanism to ensure free fall. The
steel anvil of the drive assembly shall have a diameter of
145 5 mm. The guide rod arrangement that permits the hammer
to drop with minimal resistance shall have an outer diameter of at
least 3 mm smaller than the diameter of the central hole of the
hammer.
(2) A cone ended adaptor with a 30 half angle shall be available to
replace the open-ended driving shoe for use in gravelly Common
Ground, or if instructed by the Engineer.
(3) If a liner sample is required in conjunction with the test, the split
barrel sampler shall have an enlarged internal diameter to
accommodate a thin stainless steel or aluminium liner of 35 mm
internal diameter which shall fit tightly inside. The internal
diameter of the liner may be up to 0.2 mm larger but in no case be
smaller than that of the drive shoe. The liner shall have a smooth
internal surface and may comprise two separate sections of equal
length. The enlarged split barrel shall not be used without a liner
in place. After the sampler has been withdrawn from the drillhole,
the liner and the retained soil shall be treated in the same manner as
an undisturbed sample.
(4) Standard penetration tests shall be carried out below the level of the
casing. The base of the drillhole shall be fully cleaned before the
test starts. Jar samples shall be taken from the split-barrel shoe
after each test.
(5) The number of blows of the drive hammer required to achieve each
75 mm of shoe penetration until a total penetration of 450 mm has
been achieved shall be recorded. The N-value shall be recorded as
the sum of the number of blows of the drive hammer required to
achieve the last 300 mm of shoe penetration.
(6) If the full penetration of the seating drive is not achieved after 50
blows of the drive hammer, the number of blows and the
penetration achieved (in millimetres) shall be recorded and the test
continued with the test drive from that point.
(7) If the full penetration of the test drive is not achieved after 100
blows of the drive hammer, the number of blows and the
penetration achieved (in millimetres) shall be recorded and the test
terminated unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(8) The water level in the drillhole at the time of test shall be recorded
and reported. When testing below the groundwater table particular
care shall be taken to maintain the water level in the drillhole at or
above the ambient groundwater level.
7.24
2006 Edition
(9) If instructed by the Engineer, the Standard Penetration Test split
spoon sampler shall be provided with a liner. After withdrawing
the sampler from the hole, the liner containing the Common Ground
sample shall be sealed in accordance with Clause 7.56.
(10) If liner samples have not been instructed, the sample recovered
from the split spoon shall be immediately placed in a plastic
container of minimum diameter of 100 mm, with a screw top. It
shall then be arranged securely in the core box with the core, in
proper sequence.
(11) Test results shall be submitted with daily site records and with both
preliminary and final drillhole records. Test results shall be
reported as shown in the table below:
Seating
Drive
17,25
Test Drive
17,25
17,25
27,23/35 mm
50/20 mm
Dynamic probe tests
7.69
Summary
Remarks
25,27,22,23
N=97
Full penetration.
38,62/50 mm
100/125 mm
Test terminated
in increment 4.
35,27,38/30 mm 100/180 mm
Test terminated
in increment 5.
25,27,22,23
N=97
35,27,38/30 mm 100/180 mm
Test drive
commenced after
completion of 50
blows in the
seating drive.
Test drive
commenced after
completion of 50
blows in the
seating drive: test
terminated in
increment 3.
(1) Dynamic probe test equipment shall be generally as shown in

Geoguide 2, Figure 36 and amplified below:
(a) The mass of the hammer shall be 10.0 kg 0.1 kg. The ratio
of the length to the diameter of the hammer shall be between 1
and 2. The hammer shall be provided with an axial hole with
a diameter which is 2-3 mm larger than the diameter of the
guide rod,
(b) the anvil shall be rigidly fixed to the extension rods. The
mass of the anvil shall be between 1.5 kg and 1.8 kg and the
diameter between 60 mm and 70 mm. The combined mass of
the anvil, guide rod and upper anvil shall not exceed 5.0 kg,
(c) the hammer shall fall freely and not be connected to any object
which may influence the acceleration or deceleration of the
hammer. The hammer shall be stationary in its upper position
prior to release. The fall shall be 300 mm 5 mm,
7.25
2006 Edition
(d) the diameter of the rods shall be between 11 mm and 13 mm
and the length 1000mm 10 mm. The rods shall be straight
and shall be connected so as to bear against each other over
their full area by means of external couplers of maximum
diameter 20 mm,
(e) the diameter of the point shall be 25 mm 0.2 mm. The
cylindrical portion of the point shall have a length of 25 mm
1 mm. The point shall have a conical tip with an apex angle
of 45 2.
(2) The probing shall be carried out by the method described in
Appendix 7.1
(3) If refusal is met at a depth of less than 3 m, then a second test shall
be carried out at a distance of between 0.3 m and 0.6 m from the
first test.
(4) All probe holes shall be sealed on completion with cement grout
consisting of cement and water in the proportions 0.4:1 by mass,
for at least the top 600 mm.
(5) For dynamic probing tests that are not related to trial pit or trial
trench excavations, preliminary results shall be submitted within 6
working days of the date of completion of all dynamic probing
testing instructed or as directed by the Engineer.
Vane shear tests
7.70
(1) Vane shear tests shall be carried out as specified in BS 1377:1990

(Part 9, Test No. 4.4), amended by this Clause.
(2) Vanes capable of measuring shear strengths up to approximately
75 kPa shall be available. The area ratio of each vane blade shall
be less than 12%. The torque measuring instrument shall be
calibrated by a method approved by the Engineer and a copy of the
most recent certified calibration chart shall be submitted with each
set of vane test results and be included in the Final Field Work
Report.
(3) The vane shall be advanced to the test depth and the torque
applicator assembly shall be carefully connected. After a pause of
5 minutes, the vane shall be rotated at a constant rate of between
0.1 and 0.2 degrees/second. Readings shall be taken at intervals of
each 5 rotation. The maximum torque required to rotate the vane
shall be recorded. The vane shall then be rotated rapidly through
12 revolutions without taking any readings. After a further pause
of 5 minutes, the test procedure shall then be repeated in order to
obtain the remoulded (disturbed) undrained shear strength.
(4) Preliminary results shall be submitted in a format agreed by the
Engineer with the corresponding Investigation Station preliminary
records. Final results of undrained shear strength, corrected using
the torque head calibration curve, shall be submitted with the Final
Field Work Report in a format agreed by the Engineer. For tests
on Common Ground, the residual value of undrained shear strength
shall be reported.
7.26
2006 Edition
In situ density tests
7.71
(1) In situ density tests shall be carried out in accordance with

Geospec 3, Test 11.1 or 11.2.
(2) Preliminary results shall be submitted using a HOKLAS approved
worksheet along with the Preliminary Records of the trial pit or trial
trench in which the test was performed. The Final Field Work
Report shall contain the results presented on a HOKLAS endorsed
test report.
Falling or rising head

permeability test
7.72
(1) If instructed by the Engineer, a falling or rising head permeability

tests shall be performed in a drillhole. The drillhole shall be
flushed prior to carrying out the test. The installation shown in
Geoguide 2, Figure 27, shall be used unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer. The graded filter material and sand shall be to the
approval of the Engineer and shall be placed in the hole by tremie
pipe. The groundwater level shall be allowed to equalise in the
completed installation for at least one hour before the test
commences.
(2) The method of flushing of the bottom of the hole for field
permeability tests shall be as follows:
(a) Clean water shall be introduced to the cased hole through a
38 mm diameter pipe fed from a storage tank. The feed pipe
shall contain a perforated section 480 mm in length consisting
of 20 rings of holes at 25 mm centres, each containing 4 holes
of 6 mm diameter. The end of the perforated section of pipe
shall be capped. The complete perforated section shall be
positioned such that it is just below the existing ground water
level in the borehole.
(b) The flushing water shall be withdrawn from the casing through
a 38 mm diameter pipe positioned with its open end between
150 mm and 200 mm above the base of the borehole. The
discharge shall be by means of a pump of sufficient capacity to
extract the flushing water from the base of the borehole.
Control of the flow of clean water and discharge water shall be
by means of valves positioned on the inflow pipe and the
discharge pipe.
(3) For a falling head permeability test the water level in the piezometer
shall be raised by adding clean water by a minimum of 3 m, or the
maximum practical. The water level shall then be allowed to
equalise with the groundwater level.
Water levels in the
piezometer shall be measured by means of a suitable dip meter at
the following elapsed times in minutes from the start of the test:
0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180.
The test shall be terminated at 180 minutes, or earlier if:
(a) the water level has returned to its initial level, or
(b) a head ratio (the ratio of water head at any time during the test
to the initial head at the commencement of test) of 0.3 is
achieved, or
7.27
2006 Edition
(c) instructed by the Engineer.
(4) For a rising head permeability test, the water level in the piezometer
shall be lowered by pumping by a minimum of 3 m, or the
maximum practical. The water level shall then be allowed to
equalise with the groundwater level.
Water levels in the
piezometer shall be measured following the same procedure as for a
falling head test.
(5) Both types of permeability test shall be repeated once to
demonstrate that consistent results have been obtained. If the
results differ by more than 20% then the test shall be repeated again.
(6) Preliminary results of a falling and rising head permeability test
shall be submitted on a record sheet to the approval of the Engineer,
together with the corresponding Investigation Station preliminary
record.
Response test
7.73
(1) A response test shall be performed in any piezometer or standpipe

within 3 working days of the completion of the installation, in order
to prove its successful operation. The test shall be carried out as
for a falling head permeability test except that it shall be terminated
after 60 minutes or when the water level has returned to its initial
level, whichever is sooner.
(2) Preliminary results shall be submitted on a record sheet, to the
approval of the Engineer, with the corresponding Investigation
Station preliminary record.
Constant head
permeability test
7.74
(1) For a constant head permeability test in a drillhole, the procedure

for flushing the hole, setting up the installation and allowing the
ambient groundwater level to equalise, shall be the same as for a
falling or rising head permeability test.
(2) Clean water shall be fed into the piezometer at a constant rate until
a constant water level is established or until the water level is 0.3 m
below the top of the piezometer tube. The constant rate of inflow
to maintain a constant head shall be recorded. A flow meter
capable of measuring flows down to 0.1 litre shall be used.
(3) Cumulative inflow readings shall be recorded, once the constant
head has been achieved, in the following sequence:
(a) 4 readings at 15 second intervals,
(b) 9 readings at 1 minute intervals,
(c) 4 readings at 5 minute intervals, and
(d) readings at 10-minute intervals until the inflow values do not
differ by more than 10% in any 10 minute interval.
(4) Preliminary results shall be submitted on a record sheet, to the
approval of the Engineer, with the corresponding Investigation
Station preliminary record.
7.28
2006 Edition
Packer (water
absorption) test
7.75
(1) If instructed by the Engineer single or double packer tests shall be

carried out in vertical or inclined drillholes in TNW and T2-101
size. Testing shall follow the method described in Geoguide 2.
The general arrangement of the tests shall be as shown in
Geoguide 2, Figure 31.
(2) At the commencement of the Contract, and at other times if
instructed by the Engineer, calibration of the equipment for friction
head loss shall be carried out by connecting the pressure gauges,
flow meter and supply pipe headworks, three or four different
lengths of drill rod and the packer with its tailpipe to the water
supply. Water shall be pumped through the system and flow rates
recorded for several values of back pressure. A graphical
relationship of flow against pressure loss for the number of drill
rods used shall be established and submitted to the Engineer. It
shall be included in the Final Field Work Report if packer tests are
carried out.
(3) A single packer test shall be carried out by expanding a hydraulic or
pneumatic packer in the drillhole (not in the casing) to create a seal
at the top of the test section. All rods and couplings must be
watertight and the threads of drilling rods supplying the water to the
test section shall be wrapped with thread sealing tape. The length
of test section required shall be instructed by the Engineer. The
drillhole below the packer shall be filled with water and kept full at
the specified water pressure for 15 minutes immediately before the
test commences. The flow meter used shall be capable of
measuring flow quantities to the nearest 0.1 litre. The water levels
in the drillhole above the packer shall be monitored at regular
intervals during the test, by means of a suitable dip meter, to check
whether leakage is occurring around the packer.
(4) The acceptance of water by the test section shall then be measured
and recorded at successive pressures as instructed by the Engineer,
the maximum of which will not exceed 75% of the effective
overburden pressure at the mid-depth of the test section. A
calibrated pressure gauge capable of measuring the required
pressure to the following accuracies shall be used:
(a) 0 - 100 kPa Maximum Value (accurate to 5 kPa),
(b) 0 - 200 kPa Maximum Value (accurate to 10 kPa),
(c) 0 - 500 kPa Maximum Value (accurate to 20 kPa), and
(d) 0 - 1000 kPa Maximum Value (accurate to 20 kPa).
(5) At each pressure, the flow of water into the drillhole shall be
measured over three periods, each of 5 minutes duration. If the
first two readings do not differ by more than 10%, the third reading
is not required. A complete test shall comprise measurement of
the flow through the full cycle of pressures and any calibration tests
required by the Engineer.
7.29
2006 Edition
(6) Packer tests using single or double packers may also be required
after the drillhole has been completed. The double packer test
shall be performed as for a single packer test, except that the water
pressure shall be applied to a specified length of drillhole isolated
between two packers.
(7) Preliminary results shall be submitted on record sheets with the
corresponding Investigation Station preliminary records. The
record sheet used shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
Impression packer tests 7.76
(1) If instructed by the Engineer, a drillhole impression packer survey

shall be performed in a vertical or inclined drillhole in TNW or
T2-101 size, in accordance with Geoguide 2, using equipment and
methods to the approval of the Engineer. The equipment shall be
capable of surveying a minimum 1.5 m length of drillhole for each
test.
(2) The survey shall be carried out by inserting the impression packer
device into the drillhole to the depths instructed by the Engineer,
expanding the packers and obtaining an impression of the drillhole
wall on the thermoplastic film surrounding the packers. The
survey shall be referenced to a known direction by means of a
downhole compass. Sufficient time shall be allowed for the
compass to set following the expansion of the packer. Great care
shall be taken when placing the thermoplastic film onto the packers
and when transferring the north point from the compass to the film.
(3) If an impression packer survey is instructed over a continuous
length of drillhole longer than the length of the impression packer
itself, successive impression packer test sections shall overlap by a
minimum of 250 mm to ensure continuity of information and
cross-checking of the north direction between successive test
sections.
Inclination and
bearing measurements
7.77
(1) If instructed by the Engineer, the inclination and bearing of a

drillhole shall be measured using a single-shot or multi-shot
photographic survey tool or similar instrument approved by the
Engineer.
(2) The results of each test shall be reported on the daily site records
and the average inclination and bearing over the length of the
drillhole shall be stated on both the preliminary and final drillhole
records. The original film data shall be submitted with the daily
site records.
REPORTS FOR GROUND INVESTIGATION

General
7.78
Unless otherwise stated, records and reports may be either a hard copy or
soft copy, as instructed by the Engineer. A hard-copy shall be printed
double sided on recycled paper. A soft copy shall be in read-only format.
The records and reports shall be in a format to the approval of the
Engineer.
7.30
2006 Edition
Site log book
7.79
For each Investigation Station, a Site Log Book shall be maintained in a

format to the approval of the Engineer. All visitors to an Investigation
Station shall sign the Site Log Book on each visit. The Site Log Book
shall also be used to record all verbal requests at that particular
Investigation Station and shall be countersigned by the authorized
personnel making the request before the work is carried out. The Site
Log Book shall be copied to the Engineer within 3 working days of the
date of completion of the field work for each Investigation Station.
Daily site records
7.80
During the progress of any field work, one copy of all daily site records
relevant to a particular Investigation Station shall be submitted to the
Engineer within 3 working days, with additional copies (up to a maximum
of 3) if instructed.
Preliminary records
7.81
(1) One copy of Investigation Station preliminary records and additional

copies (up to a maximum of 3), as instructed, shall be submitted to
the Engineer. Preliminary drillhole records shall be submitted
within 6 working days of the date of completion of the Investigation
Station excluding backfilling and reinstatement.
Preliminary
records of trial pit, trial trench, or slope stripping shall be submitted
within 6 working days of the date of completion of coring, excavation
and field testing for the Investigation Station to which they refer.
(2) Preliminary records of all field testing shall be submitted within the
times specified in the Contract and on the forms specified.
Preliminary records shall show all the information required for the
final records except the co-ordinates and levels of the Investigation
Station, which shall be submitted within 6 working days of the
completion of the last Investigation Station.
Submission of Final
Field Work Report
7.82
(1) Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, four copies of the Final
Field Work Report, dated and certified as checked and complete, shall
be submitted for approval.
(2) The Final Field Work Report shall be typed and contain all the
information obtained from the investigation. Each Final Field Work
Report shall contain:
(a) a factual description, prepared by the Geotechnical Engineer, of
the nature and methods of the particular Ground Investigation
carried out
(b) if drillholes have been sunk, a summary table of the depths and
thicknesses of all strata (including decomposed rock and rock)
encountered at each drillhole location and the reduced level of
each stratum boundary,
(c) a copy of the location plan amended as necessary to show the
exact position of each completed Investigation Station,
(d) a table of the as-drilled co-ordinates,
(e) Investigation Station final records together with data in AGS
digital format to the approval of the Engineer,
(f) colour photocopies of any photographs taken,
7.31
2006 Edition
(g) a Contract Data Summary sheet in a format to the approval of
the Engineer, on the second page of each copy
(3) One copy of the Final Field Work Report shall be marked "Master
Copy" and shall contain negatives and one set of colour prints of any
photographs taken.
Submission of digital
image of Final Field
Work Report
7.83
(1) Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, five copies of a digital

image of the Final Field Work Report shall be delivered to the
Engineer. Each digital image shall be stored in a single file on a
CD-ROM and placed in a plastic protective pocket. Four copies
shall be attached to the hard copy of the Final Field Work Report at
the time of delivery. The fifth copy shall be provided separately at
the same time.
(2) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the digital image of the
Final Field Work Report shall be in Acrobat format.
(3) The first page of the digital image shall be a scanned image of the
first of page of the Report signed by the person certifying it as
complete and checked. The digital image shall contain the complete
contents of the report, including all drawings.
(4) The resolution of all colour images shall not be less than 150 dots per
inch (dpi) with colour depth of 24-bit true colour. The resolution of
black and white images shall not be less than 200 dpi.
(5) Each compact disc submitted shall be securely and clearly labelled.
7.32
2006 Edition
PART 3: SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

MATERIALS
Cement mortar
7.84
(1)
Cement mortar for in-filling joints in rock faces, for bedding rock for
masonry infilling and for surfacing slopes shall consist of Portland Cement
(PC) and sand in the proportions 1:3 by volume.
(2)
PC shall comply with BS EN 197-1.
(3)
Sand shall be natural sand or crushed natural stone complying with
BS 1200.
Rock for masonry
infilling
7.85
Rock for masonry infilling shall not exceed 300 mm in size and shall be
obtained from a source approved by the Engineer.
Soil-cement
7.86
(1)
Soil-cement shall consist of PC, sand and inorganic soil in the
proportions 1:3:12 by mass unless otherwise stated. The mix proportion of
soil-cement is 1:3:40 by mass when it is applied to the top layer (maximum
300 mm thick) or other areas as directed or agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
PC shall comply with BS EN 197-1.
(3)
Sand shall comply with BS 1200.
(4)
Inorganic soil shall be free of organic matter and shall contain not
more than 30% of soil particles passing a 63 m BS test sieve.
Aggregates for sprayed
concrete
7.87
The nominal maximum aggregate size of aggregates for sprayed concrete

shall not exceed 10 mm.
Reinforcement for
sprayed concrete
7.88
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer fabric reinforcement including

A393 and A252 for sprayed concrete shall comply with to BS 4483 except
that the 50 mm x 50 mm x 2.7 mm (wire diameter) hot-dip galvanized steel
welded mesh shall have tensile strength not less than 275N/mm2.
Protective mesh and

fixings
7.89
(1)
Protective mesh for slopes shall be PVC coated galvanized steel wire
woven into a double twist hexagonal mesh. Each hexagon shall be 80 mm
x 60 mm. The steel wire shall be at least 2.2 mm diameter and the PVC
coating shall be at least 0.4 mm thick. PVC coating on steel wire shall
comply with BS 4102:1990 or equivalent. The colour of PVC coating is
to be approved by the Engineer. Wire for protective mesh shall comply
with BS 1052: (1999). Galvanized coating on wires shall comply with
BS EN 10244-2:2001. The tolerance on the opening of mesh shall
comply with BS EN 10223-2:1998.
(2)
Tying wire for protective mesh shall be 2.2 mm diameter PVC coated
galvanized soft annealed steel wire.
(3)
Bolts for fastening protective mesh to rock or structure shall be
galvanized mild steel hooks as stated in the Contract.
(4) Stainless steel anchor bolts and accessories for fastening protective
mesh to soil nail heads shall be as stated in the Contract.
7.33
2006 Edition
(5)
Hooks, fixing pins, steel plates and washers for fixing the protective
mesh to slope face shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall be
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(6)
Rock bolts
7.90
Galvanizing shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(1)
Rock bolts shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
Rock bolts shall comply with CS 2 and shall be mild steel or high yield
deformed steel as stated in the Contract. Rock bolts shall be galvanized to
BS EN ISO 1461:1999. Rock bolts shall have non-corrodible centralizers
capable of ensuring an even annulus of grout as approved by the Engineer.
(2)
The rated working load of rock bolts shall not exceed 50% of the
ultimate tensile strength. A reduction of 4 mm in the diameter of the bolt
shall be taken into account for corrosion when calculating the ultimate
tensile strength.
(3)
Nuts for rock bolts shall be of grade 4 steel and comply with BS
4190:2001. Connectors shall comply with Section 15 of this GS.
Bearing plates shall be of grade 43A steel plate and comply with BS 4360.
Holes in steel plates for rock bolt heads shall be drilled perpendicular to
the face of the steel plate and the centre of the hole shall be at a position of
within 2 mm from the centroid of the plate. The clearance between the
steel bar and the hole of the steel plate shall not be more than 2 mm. All
nuts, connectors and bearing plates shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO
1461:1999. Rock bolts shall have non-corrodible centralizers capable of
ensuring an even annulus of grout as approved by the Engineer. Grease
shall comply with Table 1 of Geospec 1.
Grout for rock bolts
7.91
Grout for rock bolts shall be as stated in Clauses 7.160 and 7.168 except that
the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
Rock dowels
7.92
Rock dowels shall comply with CS 2 and shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO

1461:1999. Rock dowels shall have non-corrodible centralizers capable
of ensuring an even annulus of grout around the steel bar as approved by
the Engineer.
Grout for rock dowels
7.93
Grout for rock dowels shall be as stated in Clauses 7.160 and 7.168 except
that the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
Soil nails
7.94
(1)
Soil nail bars shall be of high yield deformed bars and comply with
CS2. Nuts shall be of Grade 4 steel and comply with BS 4190: 2001.
Connectors shall comply with Section 15. Bearing plates shall be of
Grade 43A steel plate and comply with BS 4360: 1986. Permanent
casings shall comply with BS4019: 1974. Holes in steel plates for soil
nail heads shall be drilled perpendicularly to the face of the steel plate and
the centre of the hole shall be at a position of within 2 mm from the
centroid of the plate. The clearance between the steel bar and the hole of
the steel plate shall not be more than 2 mm. All steel components for soil
nails shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(2)
Soil nails shall have non-corrodible centralizers capable of ensuring
an even annulus of grout around the steel bar. The nominal diameter of
the centralizers shall not differ from the specified diameter of the drillhole
by more than 10 mm. Wires and ties for fixing and anchoring packers,
centralizers and grout pipes etc. shall be made of non-corrodible materials.
The spacing of the centralizers and the suitability of the method of fixing
7.34
2006 Edition
the centralizers, grout pipes and corrugated sheathing where required shall
be determined by carrying out trials on site until no damage, deformation
and displacement of the centralizers, grout pipes and corrugated sheathing
are observed on completion of assembling all components, during
inserting and withdrawing the soil nails. Once approval is given, no
change to the type, method and arrangement of fixing of the centralizers,
grout pipe and corrugated sheathing shall be made without the prior
approval of the Engineer.
(3)
For soil nails using threaded type reinforcement connectors but
without galvanized coating on either the threads inside the connectors or
the threads at the ends of reinforcement bars, heat-shrinkable sleeve of a
proprietary type as approved by the Engineer shall be used as an
alternative to galvanization as a corrosion protection measure to the
connections. Any rust on the threads of reinforcement bars and
connectors shall be thoroughly cleaned before being connected together.
(4)
Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer, the heat-shrinkable sleeve for reinforcement connectors shall
be made of a layer of radiation cross-linked polyethylene and a layer of
anti-corrosion mastic sealant material. The properties of polyethylene
and mastic sealant materials shall comply with the following
requirements:
Property
Test Method
Unit
Acceptance
Properties of polyethylene
Tensile strength at 23C
(Cross head speed:
50mm/min.)
ISO R527
MPa
17
Ultimate elongation at 23C

(Cross head speed:
50mm/min.)
ISO R527
350
ISO 974
-40
ISO 62
% increase
in weight
0.1
Impact brittleness
Water absorption at 23 C, 24
hrs.
Properties of mastic sealant material

ASTM D2671
(Procedure A)
Corrosion effect
No
corrosion
Peel strength to steel at 23C

(Cross head speed :
100mm/min.)
DIN 30672
N/cm
Shear strength at 23C (Cross

head speed : 50mm/min.)
ISO 4587
N/cm2
10
ASTM E28
70
Softening point
7.35
2006 Edition
Soil nails with doublecorrosion protection
7.95
(1) Materials for soil nails with double-corrosion protection shall comply
with Clause 7.94 unless otherwise specified in the following sub-clauses.
(2) Corrugated sheathing for the double corrosion protection shall be a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be made of high
density thermoplastic materials which shall be homogeneous, thermally
stable, chemically inert and resistant to chemical, bacterial and fungal
attack. The wall thickness of the sheathing shall be at least 1.0 mm.
Plastic sheathing and all associated components shall comply with the
requirements as stipulated in Table 2 of the Model Specification for
Prestressed Ground Anchors (GEOSPEC 1).
(3) Finished internal and external surfaces of the sheathing shall be
smooth, clean and free of flaws, pin-holes, bubbles, cracks and other
defects. Sheathing and all associated components shall be used in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
(4)
Sheathing and other plastic protective components shall:

(a)
not contain any substances that will promote corrosion;
(b)
be covered to prevent exposure to ultra-violet light from direct

or indirect sunlight;
(c)
be resistant to slip; and
(d)
be capable of withstanding the applied handling stresses, the

hydrostatic and grouting pressures.
(5) Centralizers shall be provided on the steel bar and the sheathing at
suitable intervals to meet the following requirements:
(a)
The steel bar shall be positioned in the sheathing so that a

minimum grout cover to the bar of 10 mm is maintained; and
(b)
There shall be minimum clearance of 15 mm between the

sheathing and the sides of the drillholes or casing.
(6) Corrugated sheathing shall be embedded at least 50 mm into soil nail

head.
Grout for soil nails
7.96
Grout for soil nails shall be as stated in Clauses 7.160 and 7.168 except
that the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 and PFA shall not be used
unless agreed by the Engineer.
Non-biodegradable
mats for erosion
control
7.97
(1) Non-biodegradable mats for erosion control shall be woven and

ultraviolet stabilized mats. The mats shall have the material properties
(2) The mats must be produced by proprietary manufacturers and
specifically designed for the erosion control of sloping ground.
(3) The colour of the mats shall be black or dark green or other colour as
directed or approved by the Engineer.
7.36
2006 Edition
Biodegradable mats
for erosion control
7.98
(1) Biodegradable mats for erosion control shall be woven coir mesh
mats or woven jute mats. The mats shall have the material properties
(2) The mats must be produced by proprietary manufacturers and
specifically designed for the erosion control of sloping ground.
Wire mesh for erosion

control
7.99
Wire mesh for erosion control shall comply with Clause 7.89(1). Unless
otherwise specified in the Drawings, the wire mesh shall be fixed onto the
slope surface by means of anchor bolts and/or fixing pins. The fixing pins,
steel plates and washers for fixing the wire mesh to slope face shall comply
with Clause 7.89. Galvanized coating on wires shall comply with BS EN
10244-2:2001. The anchor bolts, nuts and washers for fixing the wire mesh
to soil nail heads shall be stainless steel complying with Section 5. Details
of the anchor bolts and fixing pins shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
Anchor bolts and accessories shall have the following
properties:
(a)
The minimum size of the anchor bolts shall be M8.
(b)
The components of the anchor bolts shall include:

(i)
Hexagonal bolt or threaded rod with hexagonal

nut.
(ii)
Washer with minimum diameter of 20 mm.
(c)
The length and diameter of the drillholes and the minimum

size and embedment depth of the anchor bolts shall be as
stated in the Contract or otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
(d)
The mean ultimate tensile resistance and mean ultimate

shear resistance of the anchor bolts shall be 31 kN and 47
kN respectively in non-crack concrete with concrete
strength at 30 N/mm2.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of access
7.100
Particulars of the proposed means of access for slope treatment works,

including access structures and reinstatement, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval at least 14 days before the slope treatment works
start.
Particulars of sprayed
concrete
7.101
(1)
construction shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Type and performance of mixing and spraying plant,
(b)
Details of water sprays and associated pumps for surface

spraying,
(c)
Method of curing,
(d)
Details of trial panels and test panels,

7.37
2006 Edition
(e)
Methods of measuring surface temperature and moisture

content of the soil,
(f)
Methods of achieving the specified thickness of sprayed

concrete and the specified cover to reinforcement and methods
of measuring the thickness and cover after spraying
(g) Method of fixing reinforcement,

(h) Details of materials and mix design,
(i)
Details of dry mix process and/or wet mix process for

applying sprayed concrete,
(j)
Name and details of the experience of the shotcretors,
(k) Details of working platform,

(l)
Method of forming expansion joints, and
(m) Sequence of spraying on sloping surfaces.

(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 14 days before sprayed concrete is used.
Particulars of rock
bolts
7.102
(1)
The following particulars of the materials and methods of
construction for rock bolts shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of rock bolts, nuts, washers, bearing plates,

connectors, sleeves, grease and centralizers,
(b)
Methods of tensioning and grouting,
(c)
Proposed working loads,
(d)
Previous performance records, and
(e)
Details of equipment for testing rock bolts, including test and

calibration certificates
(f)
Details of working platform and drilling equipment, including

method of drilling and size of drillholes,
(g)
Details of equipment for Packer tests in drillholes including

test and calibration certificates,
(h)
Grout mix details and grouting equipment.
(2)
least 28 days before pull-out trials start. All equipment for testing rock
bolts shall be tested and calibrated by approved laboratories within 6
months prior to the date of carrying out the tests.
7.103
A sample of a complete rock bolt shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval of the source and type of rock bolt at the same time as
particulars of rock bolts are submitted.
7.38
2006 Edition
Soil nails
7.104
(1)
The following particulars of materials and methods of
construction for soil nails shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of and assembled component samples comprising

of soil nail bars, coupling sleeves, nuts, washers, plates,
connectors, centralizers, grout pipes, corrugated
sheathing, packers for isolating the bond length and plugs
capable of sealing the drillholes and withstanding the
pressure head maintained on the grout during grouting,
(b) Details of galvanizer to be employed for galvanizing the

steel components and method of making good any
damaged galvanized coating,,
(c)
Details of heat-shrinkable sleeve for protecting the

connections between reinforcement bars if galvanized
coating to either the threads inside connectors or at the
ends of reinforcement bars is not applied, together with
details of the heat application equipment for shrinking the
sleeves.
(d) Method of repairing damaged heat shrinkable sleeves

during heat application or other installation process of soil
nails,
(e)
Details of corrosion protection for the threaded portion of

the steel bar at soil nail head,
(f)
Details of working platform,
(g) Details of temporary support to drillholes,

(h) Details of permanent casing,
(i)
Method of storing materials,
(j)
Method of drilling and details of drilling equipment,
(k) Method of assembling soil nail bars,

(l)
Method of installing soil nail bars into drillholes,
(m) Method of grouting and details of grouting equipment,

(n) Details of equipment for measuring the volume of grout
injected into each drillhole together with the accuracy and
method of calibrating the equipment,
(o) Details of equipment for testing soil nails, including test
and calibration certificates,
(p) Details of testing assembly including details of datum for
deformation measurement and bearing pad, and
(q) Method of constructing soil nail heads.
7.39
2006 Edition
(2)
least 28 days before pull out tests commence.
Mats for erosion
control
7.105
The following particulars of materials and methods of construction for

mats for erosion control shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 14 days prior to installation:
(a) Details and samples of materials,
(b) Manufacturers literature including recommended sequence
of mats installation and hydroseeding,
(c) Method of drilling holes, lapping, fixing and anchor,
(d) Method of placing and tamping of soft soil into the mats, if
required,
(e) Details of equipment, and
(f) A certificate from the manufacturer on the compliance of the
materials, as and where appropriate.
Wire mesh for erosion

control
7.106
The following particulars of materials of wire mesh, anchor bolts and

method of construction shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 14 days prior to installation:
(a)
Details and samples of wire mesh and anchor bolts,
(b)
Method of drilling holes for the bolts and details of

drilling equipment, and
(c)
Certificates from the manufacturer showing that the wire

mesh and anchor bolts comply with requirements as
PRELIMINARY WORKS
Access to slopes
7.107
(1)
Means of access consisting of scaffolding constructed of sound
bamboo, metal or other materials agreed by the Engineer shall be
installed to enable the Engineer to examine slope treatment works. The
scaffolding shall allow access to within 0.8 m of the slope face. Hand
and foot holds for climbing shall be provided by bamboo or metal
members at centres not exceeding 0.5 m vertically and 0.8 m
horizontally.
(2)
A system of safety ropes shall be installed on the scaffolding.
Safety ropes shall be 12 mm diameter and shall have a breaking force of
at least 18 kN. The system of safety ropes shall consist of:
(a)
Vertical ropes at not more than 3 m centres horizontally

securely anchored to the crest of the slope, and
(b)
Horizontal ropes at not more than 3 m centres vertically.
7.40
2006 Edition
The system of safety ropes shall be constructed in such a manner that the
ropes are tied at not more than 3 m spacings in both directions to form a
net.
(3)
The scaffolding shall be provided for the purpose of carrying out
inspection to the slope by the Engineer and shall not be used for carrying
out site operations without the permission of the Engineer.
(4)
Where rock slope works are included in the Contract, sufficient
time shall be allowed in the programme for the Engineer to inspect the
rock slope, check the stability, design slope treatment works and determine
the extent of the works required, taking into account of any specified time
stated in the Contract that the Engineer may require for the inspection and
design of slope treatment works.
Protection fences and
barriers
7.108
(1)
Protection fences and barriers for slope treatment works shall be
constructed as stated in the Contract before slope treatment work starts.
(2)
Damage to protection fences and barriers shall be repaired
immediately. The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before
protection fences and barriers are dismantled.
Preparation for slope

treatment works
7.109
(1)
Vegetation shall be cleared and existing impermeable surfaces and
topsoil shall be removed from existing soil slopes before slope treatment
works start.
(2)
Surface of slopes shall be trimmed and scarified before slope
treatment works start. On completion of trimming and scarifying, any
loose materials shall be removed from the surface of slopes by means of
water jet coupled to compressed air for rock slopes or other hard surfaces
and air jet for soil slopes unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(3)
Rock faces and joints, and the surface and joints of retaining walls
shall be cleaned of moss, vegetation and loose material, immediately
before slope treatment works start, and surplus water shall be removed
by an air jet. Water flowing from or across the rock face shall be
diverted by relief drains or by other methods agreed by the Engineer
before the application of impermeable surfaces.
(4)
Any slope surface that has been stripped for inspection by the
Engineer without any further slope work shall be reinstated to its original
condition.
ROCK SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

Scaling and trimming
of rock slopes
7.110
Rock scaling shall only be carried out on areas as directed by the Engineer.
Rock scaling shall include the removal of all loose blocks of any size using
hand tools, or boulders not exceeding 0.2 m3 in volume using powered
mechanical equipment. Scaling and trimming of rock slopes shall be
carried out in such a manner that soil and rock is removed from the slope
face without affecting the stability and integrity of the slope. Measures
shall be taken to prevent uncontrolled falls of debris arising from scaling
and trimming works. Scaling and trimming of rock slopes shall be
carried out using hand-held tools. All material removed or excavated by
scaling and trimming and loose fragments of soil and rock shall be
7.41
2006 Edition
removed from the slope. Rock faces shall be cleaned using a water jet
coupled to compressed air after scaling and trimming is complete.
Rock splitting
7.111
Rock splitting shall be carried out using percussive hammers, drills,

hydraulic splitters, chemical expanding agents, hand-tools or other
Removal of boulders
7.112
Boulders that are to be removed from slopes shall be broken down by

means of line drilling, expansive grouts, rock breakers or other methods
agreed by the Engineer. For the purpose of this Clause, a boulder to be
removed on rock slopes shall qualify as boulder only if it exceeds 0.2 m3
in volume before excavation and it cannot be removed without the use of
powered mechanical equipment.
Sealing and infilling

of rock joints
7.113
Joints in rock faces shall be sealed with Grade 20/20 concrete, cement
mortar or masonry as stated in the Contract. Rock for masonry infilling
shall be bedded in cement mortar. Relief drains instructed by the
Engineer shall be installed before rock joints are sealed or infilled.
Concrete buttresses
7.114
(1)
Concrete for buttresses shall be Grade 20/20 unless otherwise
(2)
Drainage which is required behind buttresses shall consist of relief
drains connected to 50 mm diameter uPVC outlet pipes laid at a gradient
of at least 1 in 50. The uPVC pipes shall be securely fixed to the
formwork before concreting starts.
SOIL-CEMENT FILL
Mixing soil-cement
7.115
Soil-cement shall be thoroughly mixed in a concrete mixer. Small

quantities of soil-cement shall not be hand mixed unless permitted by the
Engineer. The method of mixing soil-cement shall be agreed by the
Engineer.
Deposition and
compaction of
soil-cement fill
7.116
(1)
Soil-cement fill shall be deposited in its final position and
compacted no more than 30 minutes after the cement has been added to
the mix.
(2)
Soil-cement fill shall be compacted to specification as stated in
Section 6 to obtain a relative compaction of at least 95% throughout.
Soil-cement fill shall be at optimum moisture content during compaction.
The tolerance on the optimum moisture content percentage shall be 3.
SPRAYED CONCRETE
Trial panel
7.117
A trial panel at least 50 mm thick and at least 3 m x 3 m shall be

constructed for sprayed concrete on the surface to be treated. The average
percentage rebound shall be estimated for each trial panel and shall be used
in the calculations of the cement content of the applied concrete. Where
required by the Engineer, trial panels shall be constructed for different types
of spraying equipment or different shotcretors. Test panels to establish the
suitability of sprayed concrete mix, spraying equipment and shotcretors
shall be made and tested as stated in Clauses 7.143 to 7.147.
7.42
2006 Edition
Preparation of slope
surfaces
7.118
(1)
Weak material along joints or seams in slope surfaces to which
sprayed concrete will be applied shall be removed to a depth equal to the
width of the weak zone.
(2)
If the soil surface temperature exceeds 25C or the moisture content
is less than 10%, the surface to be sprayed shall be watered using sprays
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Hoses without sprays shall
not be used. Spraying of water onto the slope surface shall be carried out
not more than 1 hour before spraying of concrete starts.
(3)
Before sprayed concrete is applied, all tree trunks, railings,
channels, utilities, pipes, structures, street furniture or other facilities
adjacent to or within the sprayed concrete area shall be protected with
approved means from being contaminated by sprayed concrete or
rebound particles. All contaminated surfaces shall be cleaned and made
good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Fixing reinforcement
7.119
Fabric reinforcement for sprayed concrete shall be fixed securely to the

slope by steel nails or rawl bolts and shall be laid without sharp bends or
creases. The cover to the reinforcement shall be at least 20 mm and laps
between adjacent sheets shall be at least 150 mm. The fabric
reinforcement shall be placed centrally in the sprayed concrete and be
supported clear of the ground and away from all surface irregularities
with adequate number of cover blocks
Weepholes and joints

in sprayed concrete
7.120
(1)
50 mm diameter weepholes shall be constructed:

(a)
(b)
On soil surfaces at 1.5 m staggered centres in each

direction, and
On rock faces, on rock joints and at locations/spacings as
directed by the Engineer.
(2)
All weepholes shall extend through the full thickness of the
sprayed concrete and shall be laid with an outward inclination of 1 in 10.
(3)
On soil slopes, expansion joints shall be constructed in sprayed
concrete in line with the expansion joints of the adjacent channels, berm
slabs and concrete structures etc. or at 15m intervals maximum in case
there is no channels, berm slabs or concrete structures.
(4)
Construction joints in sprayed concrete shall comply with the
requirements specified in Section 16.
Equipment for
spraying concrete
7.121
(1)
Sprayed concrete shall be applied using the dry process in which
water and admixtures shall be added at the nozzle. Alternatively, sprayed
concrete shall be applied using the wet process in which wet ready-mixed
concrete shall be supplied to the nozzle.
(2)
Equipment for the dry-mix process shall be capable of projecting a
mixture of cement, fine and coarse aggregate and water at high velocity on
to the surface of the slope to produce a dense homogenous cover. The
equipment shall be fitted with weight-batching facilities.
(3) Equipment for the wet-mix process shall be capable of

projecting a mixture of wet ready-mixed concrete at high velocity on to
the surface of the slope to produce a dense homogenous cover.
7.43
2006 Edition
Only skilled operators experienced in the use of sprayed concrete
and approved by the Engineer shall be employed as shotcretors.
(4)
Spraying concrete
7.122
(1)
The surface temperature and moisture content of the soil shall be
measured, and the results submitted to the Engineer, immediately before
sprayed concrete is applied.
(2)
For the dry-mix process, the aggregate and sand for sprayed
concrete shall be kept dry before mixing. The water shall be added at the
nozzle at the instant of application. The air and water supply, the rate of
application and all other factors affecting the quality of the work shall be
adjusted to produce dense concrete with no sloughing. For the wet-mix
process, the ready-mixed concrete shall comply with Section 16 of GS
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. For both the dry-mix process
and the wet-mix process, rebound material shall not be reused and shall be
removed within 8 hours of spraying.
(3)
Sprayed concrete shall be applied in layers not exceeding 50 mm
thick to the total thickness stated in the Contract. The maximum panel
dimension shall not exceed 15 m2.
(4)
Sprayed concrete shall be applied perpendicularly to the surface to
be sprayed and the nozzle shall not be positioned farther than 1.5 metres
from the surface during spraying.
(5)
Colour pigment approved by the Engineer shall be mixed
thoroughly with the sprayed concrete mix. A layer of 25 mm thick of
the coloured sprayed concrete shall be applied to form the total thickness
of sprayed concrete stated in the Contract.
(6)
Details of the colour pigments (e.g. specification and colour
samples etc.) and the method statement shall be submitted for the
Engineers approval prior to application. The pigment shall comply with
ASTM C979 and shall have the characterization of light fast, lime proof,
weather resistance and durable like concrete. Colour to be employed
shall be directed by the Engineer.
Curing sprayed
concrete
7.123
Sprayed concrete shall be cured for at least 4 days after application by

either Method 1, Method 2 or Method 3 as stated in Section 16.
Inspection of sprayed
concrete
7.124
Completed areas of sprayed concrete shall be sounded using a wooden

mallet. Cores of 75 mm diameter shall be taken from the completed
sprayed concrete area at the rate of 1 no. per every 150 m2 of sprayed
surface or part thereof at locations determined by the Engineer, for
checking the quality and thickness of the sprayed concrete as well as
cover to reinforcement. Whenever any defect is found, further
investigation shall be carried out to locate the extent of the defect.
Areas which in the opinion of the Engineer are substandard or hollow shall
be removed and re-sprayed. Core holes shall be reinstated with cement
mortar of colour matching the adjacent surfaces.
7.44
2006 Edition
Records of sprayed
concrete
7.125
Records of sprayed concrete operations shall be kept by the Contractor

on the Site and shall be submitted daily to the Engineer. The records shall
contain details of the quantities of all materials used at each location.
The records could be either a hard copy or soft copy as agreed by the
Engineer. The hard-copy report shall use recycled papers. The soft copy
shall be in read-only format and the hard copy shall be double side printed
as agreed by the Engineer.
PROTECTIVE MESH FOR SLOPES

Fixing protective mesh
for slopes
7.126
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, protective mesh for slope shall
be orientated, laced and suspended down and fixed onto the slope face
with dowels or steel hooks at intervals not exceeding 3 m. The
diameter of the drillholes for dowels or steel hooks shall be at least 20
mm larger than the diameter of the dowels or steel hooks. The method
of drilling and cleaning of drillholes shall be as stated in Clause 7.128(1)
and (2). The last column or row of dowels or steel hooks fixing the
edges and base of the protective mesh shall be positioned not more than
300 mm from the respective edges/base of the mesh. Laps in mesh
sheets in vertical direction shall be avoided as far as possible, however
where necessary, the laps shall be at least 300 mm minimum wide and
the lapping sheets shall be laced with 2.2mm nominal diameter
galvanized and PVC-coated binding wire at the centre of the lap in the
same way as adjacent vertical sheets.
ROCK BOLTS
Trials for rock bolts
7.127
The design bond length of rock bolts with bonded anchorages shall be
determined for each rock type by a pull-out trial. The proof load of a
pull-out trial shall be twice the working load. Pull-out trials shall be
carried out on two bolts for each combination of rock bolt and rock type.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the bolts used in trials shall
be discarded and shall not form part of the permanent works, and the
hole shall be sealed by grouting.
Drilling, preparing
and testing rock bolt
holes
7.128
(1)
Holes for rock bolts shall be drilled at the locations instructed by
the Engineer. The diameter of the hole shall be at least 20 mm larger
than the diameter of the rock bolt or the outer diameter of the connectors,
if used, whichever is larger. The method of drilling shall be rotary or
rotary percussive with water flush or air flush accompanied by the
operation of an effective dust extraction and filtering device. Holes shall
be drilled to provide 50 mm cover to the end of bolts for which cement
grout is used to form the bond length.
(2)
Holes for rock bolt shall be flushed with clean water before rock
bolt installation starts until the return water runs clear. Standing water
shall be blown out from the hole using compressed air after flushing.
(3)
Holes for rock bolts shall be tested by the Packer test as stated in
Clauses 7.148, 7.149 and 7.150 and the results of the tests shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval, before installation of rock bolts
starts.
7.45
2006 Edition
Fixing rock bolts
7.129
(1)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before
installation of rock bolts starts.
(2)
Rock bolts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3)
Rock bolts shall be fully grouted after stressing. Heat-shrinkable
plastic sleeves of an approved type shall be provided to the free length of
rock bolts.
(4)
Installation of rock bolts, including grouting of the free length and
installation of head protection, shall be completed as soon as practicable
and not more than 14 days after completion of the drillhole.
(5)
Rock bolts with a grouted anchorage shall not be stressed until the
grout crushing strength has attained a value of 21 MPa when tested in
accordance with Clauses 7.180, 7.181 and 7.182.
Grouting rock bolts
7.130
(1)
Grouting for rock bolts shall be in accordance with Section 7, Part
4, except as stated in the followings:(a)
Grout shall be introduced at the lower end of drillholes

with downward inclinations and shall displace all air and
water through the top of the drillhole.
(b)
Packers and return ducts which maintain a head on the

grout until the grout has set shall be used for drillholes
with upward inclinations or with inadequate downward
inclinations. The packers and ducts shall be such that
separate grouting of the anchorage zone and free-length
zone of the drillhole can be carried out. The head to be
maintained on the grout shall be as approved by the
Engineer.
Proving rock bolts
7.131
Each installed rock bolt shall be proved as stated in Clauses 7.151 to

7.153. Rock bolts shall be locked off at 1.1 times the working load after
proving. The complete bolt head assembly shall be encased by a
concrete block after locking off.
Records of rock bolts
7.132
Records of installation of rock bolts shall be kept by the Contractor on

the Site and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 7
days after each installation operation. The records could be either a hard
copy or soft copy to be determined by the Engineer. The hard-copy
report shall use recycled papers. The soft copy shall be in read-only
format and the hard copy shall be double side printed as agreed by the
Engineer. Records shall contain the following:
(a)
Rock bolt identification number,
(b)
Drilling details, including:

- Date and time drilling started and finished
- Machine and operator identification
- Location, level, inclination, bearing, length and diameter
of drillhole
- Rate of penetration at 0.5 m intervals,
7.46
2006 Edition
(c)
Water tightness of drillhole, including:

- Date and time water test started and finished
- Details of any pre-grouting and redrilling
- Length of test zone
- Water pressure applied
- Duration of test
- Measured water absorption rate,
(d)
Details of steel bolts, including:

- Type and diameter
- Bond length
- Overall length
- Number and type of centralising spacers
- Stressing record and lock-off load, and
(e)
Details of grouting, including:

- Date and time grouting started and finished
- Details of any packers used and length of grouted zones
- Head maintained on grout during setting
- Volume of grout accepted
- Identification marks of grout cubes.
ROCK DOWELS
Drilling and
preparation of rock
dowel holes
7.133
The drilling and preparation of holes for rock dowels shall be as stated in
Clause 7.128(1) and (2).
Grouting rock dowels
7.134
(1)
Grouting for rock dowels shall be in accordance with Section 7,
Part 4, except as stated in Clause 7.134 (2).
(2)
Rock dowels shall be grouted over the complete length of the
drillhole in which the dowel is installed. Centralisers as stated in the
Contract shall be fitted to rock dowels before grouting to ensure an even
annulus of grout. No jacking or hammering of the dowels shall be
carried out during the whole process of insertion of dowels into
drillholes. Grout shall be introduced at the lower end of drillholes with
downward inclinations and shall displace all air and water through the
top of the drillhole.
Records of rock dowels
7.135
Records of installation of rock dowels shall be kept by the Contractor

and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 7 days after
each installation operation. The records could be either a hard copy or
soft copy, as agreed by the Engineer. The hard-copy report shall use
recycled papers. The soft copy shall be in read-only format and the hard
copy shall be double side printed as agreed by the Engineer. The records
shall contain details of the location, length, inclination and level of each
rock dowel installed.
7.47
2006 Edition
SOIL NAILS
Drilling for soil nails
7.136
(1)
Drilling for soil nails shall comply with Clauses 7.164(4) and (5)
and the following sub-clauses of this Clause. The set up of drilling plant
and ancillary equipment shall be in such a manner that water, dust, fumes
and noise generated during of drilling operation shall be sufficiently
diverted, controlled, suppressed and muffled.
(2)
Drilling for soil nails shall be carried out using rotary or
percussive type drills with air as the flushing medium unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer. Temporary support shall be provided to
drillholes to prevent the collapse of drillholes until after the completion of
grouting, including but not limited to the use of temporary casing.
Drillholes shall be cleared of all debris and standing water immediately
before installation of soil nails. All necessary equipment and assistance
shall be provided to the Engineer to check the inclination, diameter,
bearing, cleanliness and length of all drillholes.
(3)
Where instructed by the Engineer, drilling records including
reference numbers of soil nails, date and time of drilling, penetration rate,
description of strata of materials penetrated and any special observations
during drilling such as underground voids encountered, collapse of hole,
groundwater encountered, appropriate depth to ground water and depth of
zone of no air return etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 2
working days after completion of drilling in a format agreed by the Engineer.
(4)
Where required in the Contract or ordered by the Engineer,
permanent steel casing of appropriate internal diameter and of 6.3 mm
minimum thick shall be installed and left in place with soil nails. Unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer, the bottom 2 m length of drillhole
shall be left unsupported by permanent casing.
(5)
The dimensions of soil nail heads and the orientation of soil nails
shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings or instructions given
by the Engineer.
(6)
The permitted deviation of drillholes shall be +2o to the specified
vertical and horizontal alignments. The diameter of drillholes shall be
the minimum diameter as specified. The grout cover to the lower end of
steel bar shall be at least 50 mm.
(7)
No drilling shall be carried out within 10 metres radius of any
freshly grouted soil nails, including soil nails for pull out tests, grouted
less than 12 hours previously
Installation and
grouting for soil nails
7.137
(1)
Soil nails shall be installed and grouted as soon as possible after
drilling. In any case, each drillhole shall not be left unsupported for more
than 3 days. All drillholes shall be checked for cleanliness prior to
installation of soil nails. For soil nail bars with threaded type connectors,
each length of the steel bars shall be tightened by means of an appropriately
sized wrench. During the whole process of installation, no jacking or
hammering of the soil nail bars shall be carried out. Grouting for soil nails
shall comply with Clauses 7.154 to 7.160, 7.162, 7.163, 7.166, 7.167(1) to
7.167(6), 7.168, 7.170, 7.172(1), 7.173 to 7.182 and the following
sub-clauses of this Clause.
7.48
2006 Edition
(2)
The gross volume of the drillholes, discounting the volume of all
cast in components of each of the soil nails to be grouted shall be calculated
and recorded on the request forms for inspection of soil nail installation.
(3)
The grout pipe shall terminate at a point within 150 mm above the
lower end of the steel bar and no side cut hole shall be made on the grout
pipe except that the cut is made within 150 mm above the lower end.
Grout pipe shall be fixed onto the steel bar or corrugated sheathing (in case
of double corrosion protection soil nails) by non-corrodible ties at spacings
of not more than 2 m. Grout pipes shall not be removed from drillholes
after insertion and the part protruding from drillholes after grouting shall be
trimmed down to the base of soil nail head .
(4)
Where heat-shrinkable sleeve is used, the heat-shrinkable sleeve
shall be heat-shrunk by means of an apparatus approved by the Engineer,
and it shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
The sleeve shall have sufficient length and shall be positioned such that a
minimum 100 mm length of reinforcement bar beyond the connector is
protected by the sleeve after completion of heat-shrinking. No lapping of
the sleeve shall be allowed. The sleeve thickness shall not be less than 1.0
mm after heat-shrinking. Finished surface of the sleeve shall be smooth,
free of trapped air pockets, flaws, holes, cracks, burn marks and other
defects. Any defects or damages found on the sleeve shall be made good
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(5)
Soil nails shall be grouted on the day when the steel bars are
inserted into drillholes. Soil nails which are not grouted after insertion and
are left in drillhole overnight shall be withdrawn from the drillhole and the
drillhole shall be checked for cleanliness and obstructions prior to
re-insertion.
(6)
After insertion of steel bar into the drillhole, the top end of the
drillhole shall be sealed with an appropriate plug capable of withstanding a
grout pressure head, which is maintained during the first hour after
completion of grouting as described in sub-clause (8) of this Clause. An
outlet pipe extending above the slope surface shall be installed through the
plug to allow discharge of air, water and grout from the upper end of the
drillhole during grouting. The arrangement of outlet pipe and sealing
plug shall be submitted for the agreement of the Engineer and a site trial
shall be carried to demonstrate that the set up performs satisfactorily.
(7)
Soil nails shall be grouted over their entire length of steel bar in one
single operation. Grout shall be injected into drillhole through the grout
pipe to the lower end of drillhole such that air and water are displaced from
the drillhole as grouting proceeds. When the consistency of the grout
flowing out of the outlet pipe is the same as the injecting grout, the grouting
operation shall stop and the inlet grout pipe sealed. A pressure head of at
least 300mm of grout measured from the top of drillhole shall be maintained
in the outlet pipe during the first hour after completion of grout. Any
settlement of the grout level inside the outlet pipe observed shall be
replenished with fresh grout immediately.
(8)
The set up of grouting plant and ancillary equipment shall be in
such a manner that water, spillage of grout, dust, fumes and noise generated
during the grouting operation shall be sufficiently diverted, controlled,
suppressed and muffled.
7.49
2006 Edition
(9)
The volume of grout used for grouting each drillhole and the
volume used for refilling each drillhole after grout settlement shall be
recorded. A copy of the records shall be submitted to the Engineer not
more than 3 days after each grouting operation. The records shall include
all details as required in Clause 7.172(1)(a) to 7.172(1)(f) and the following:
(a)
volume of grout spilled from the drillhole,
(b)
volume of grout added to the outlet pipe after grout

settlement.
(10) Any excessive grout loss shall be reported to the Engineer

immediately. If a drillhole cannot be fully filled with grout after injecting a
volume of grout equal to 10 times the calculated gross volume of the
drillhole, discounting the volume of all cast-in components, the grouting
operation shall immediately cease for that drillhole unless otherwise agreed
by the Engineer. The grouted length of the drillhole shall be reported to the
Engineer and proposals for completing the grouting for that drillhole shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval as soon as possible.
(11)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, for soil nails with
double corrosion protection the annular space between the wall of
drillhole and corrugated sheathing shall be grouted first in a continuous
operation. The annular space between corrugated sheathing and steel
bars shall be grouted immediately afterwards in a continuous operation.
Pull-out tests for soil
nails
7.138
Soil nails for pull-out tests shall be installed and tested prior to the
installation of permanent soil nails. The number of pull-out tests shall be
as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. Soil nails
subjected to pull-out tests shall not form part of the permanent works. The
details of the testing arrangement including the set-up and support for the
testing apparatus shall be submitted for the Engineers approval. The
apparatus for measuring loads and deformations shall have an accuracy of
5 kN and 0.05 mm respectively. The apparatus for measuring deformation
shall be capable of measuring a displacement of up to 50 mm. The
apparatus shall be tested and calibrated by approved laboratories not more
than 6 months prior to the date of carrying out the tests. Test and
calibration certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer at least one week
before the test. Drilling records of holes selected for pull-out tests shall be
provided to the Engineer within 24 hours of drilling. The following
procedure shall be adopted: (a)
The loading apparatus shall be set up in such a way that no

loading, other than the pull-out load, acts on the steel bar at
the nail head. The reaction of the pull-out load from the
loading apparatus shall act on a sufficiently sized rigid
bearing plate placed against a temporary cut face at normal
to the alignment of the steel bar to ensure adequate load
spreading and to avoid eccentric loading. Monitoring
instruments shall be carefully positioned and independently
supported to record the extension of the soil nail steel bar
and any movement of the steel bearing plate.
(b)
The soil nail shall be grouted over the length as specified in

the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The length
to be grouted shall be isolated by means of a packer that
can prevent grout from leaking through to the free-length
7.50
2006 Edition
section during grouting and that can ensure that the
proposed bonded section is effectively grouted to the
required length as shown in the Drawings.
The entire
free length of the steel bar shall be properly debonded or
capped to ensure that the test load can be directly
transferred to the bonded zone in case of grout leak through
the packer. The pull-out test shall not be carried out until
the grout has reached a cube strength of 21 MPa.
(c)
The maximum test load shall be either 90% of the yield

load of the steel bar of the test nail (Tp) or the ultimate
soil/grout bond load (Tult).
(d)
The test nail shall be loaded in stages: from the initial load
(Ta) via two intermediate test loads (TDL1 and TDL2) to the
maximum test load. TDL1 and TDL2 are the loads that
result in the bonded zone tested to the design working bond
strength and 2 times the working bond strength
respectively. Ta shall not be greater than TDL1 or 5% of
Tp. All loadings including Ta, TDL1, TDL2 and Tp shall be
specified in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(e)
During the first two loading cycles, the intermediate loads,

TDL1 and TDL2, shall be maintained for 60 minutes for
deformation measurement. After the measurement has been
completed, the load shall be reduced to Ta and the residual
deformation shall be recorded. In the last cycle, the test
load shall be increased gradually from Ta straight to
maximum test load and then maintained for deformation
measurement. The measurement at each of the cycles shall
be taken at time intervals of 1, 3, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and
60 minutes. The test nail is considered to be able to sustain
the test load if the difference of nail movements at 6 and 60
minutes does not exceed 2mm or 0.1 % of the grouted
length of the test nail. In this case, the test shall proceed to
the next loading cycle or be terminated if the test nail is
subject to TP.
(f)
If the nail fails to sustain the test load TDL1, TDL2 or Tp, the
test shall be terminated and the nail movement against
residual load with time shall be recorded.
The
measurements shall be taken at time intervals of 1, 3, 6, 10
and every 10 minutes thereafter over a period for at least two
hours. Where required the measurements shall be
continued and at intervals as directed by the Engineer.
(g)
Throughout the test, the soil nail movement versus the applied
load shall be measured, plotted on a graph and recorded along
with all other relevant information. All the results shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 3 days of completion of the
test.
(h)
Where required, the whole soil nail shall be pulled out from
the drillhole for the Engineers inspection. Where the steel
bar remains in-situ after the pull-out test, the bar shall be
cut-off flush with the finished ground and the remaining part
of the drillhole grouted.
7.51
2006 Edition
Soil-nail head
7.139
(1)
Soil-nail heads shall be constructed in accordance with the details
as specified in the Contract. A method statement for the construction of
soil nail heads shall be submitted for the Engineers agreement.
(2)
The threads at the top end of soil nail bars shall be thoroughly
cleaned, properly treated with galvanized coating or protected with
approved zinc-rich paint prior to construction of soil nail heads.
(3)
Steel reinforcement for soil nail heads shall be of grade 460 steel
and comply with CS2 requirements. Concrete for soil nail heads shall be
Grade 30/20 concrete or 30 MPa sprayed concrete and comply with GS
Section 16 requirements.
(4)
Concreting of soil-nail heads shall be carried out in a manner which
ensures that the placed concrete is adequately compacted. Unless agreed
otherwise by the Engineer, concreting of soil-nail heads using sprayed
concrete shall be applied in two stages, allowing the bearing plate to be
positioned firmly against the first stage concrete. The method statement as
referred to in sub-clause (1) of this Clause shall include proposal for the
construction sequence of 2-stage sprayed concrete soil nail heads. Trial
runs shall also be conducted to demonstrate to the Engineer that the
proposed method statement will produce satisfactory results and the
rebound of sprayed concrete material is minimal.
(5)
Any temporary excavation for constructing soil nail heads,
including overbreaks shall be backfilled with Grade 30/20 concrete, 30 MPa
sprayed concrete or other material as agreed by the Engineer.
(6)
Where instructed by the Engineer, a maximum of 3 concreted
soil-nail heads shall be uncovered from the batch of soil nail heads cast on
any one day at any site for examination of the quality of soil-nail heads. If
defective workmanship is identified in any one of the uncovered soil-nail
heads, the whole batch of soil nail heads cast on the same day at that site
shall be deemed to be defective. All the remaining soil nail heads cast on the
same day at that site shall be broken up for the Engineers examination.
The soil-nail heads shall be recast and re-examined to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
MATS FOR SLOPE EROSION CONTROL

Preparation of
surfaces
7.140
Areas to be applied with mats shall be cleared of all rubbish, debris and
loose soils. All local irregular spots and areas shall be either trimmed or
filled with compacted fill material or compacted soil cement to provide
smooth surfaces unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The
finished slope surfaces shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to
installation of mats.
Laying and fixing of

mats for erosion
control
7.141
Mats for erosion control shall be laid and fixed onto sloping ground in
accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures and in
compliance with the following requirements:
7.52
2006 Edition
(a) the mats shall be anchored along the slope crest and each
berm level with at least 200 mm length embedded into the
ground or underneath the concrete berm slabs. The mats shall
also be embedded at least 200 mm into any adjacent
structures to be constructed. The mats shall be rolled out
from top down the slope surfaces. Sufficient hot-dip
galvanized anchorage pins at a maximum spacing of 1 m
centre to centre shall be provided to ensure the mats are in
complete and total contact with the ground at every place.
In areas of irregularities due to exposed rocks or existing
structures, additional anchorage pins shall be provided to
prevent any gap or void forming underneath the mats.
Lapping between mats shall be at least 150 mm and shall be
formed with the upslope mat over the downslope mat. No
lapping shall be formed within 1 m of any intersection of two
slope surfaces which have a sharp difference in slope
gradient or strike direction,
(b) where recommended by the manufacturer of the mats for
erosion control, on completion of laying and anchoring of
the mats, soft soil shall be placed and tamped into the mats
and all voids within the mats shall be completely filled to
form an integral composite structure,
(c) the sequence of hydroseeding and laying of mats shall be in
accordance with the manufacturers recommended sequence.
The protective materials for hydroseeding shall be laid on
top of the erosion control mat, if specified.
TESTING: OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND

MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY OF SOIL-CEMENT FILL
Testing:
Optimum
moisture content and
maximum dry density
of soil-cement fill
7.142
The maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of soil-cement

fill shall be as stated in Section 6 except that the method of testing shall
be the Vibrating Hammer Test Method in accordance with BS 1924.
TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM SPRAYED

CONCRETE
Testing: test panels
for sprayed concrete
7.143
(1)
The strength of sprayed concrete shall be determined from
concrete cores cut from a test panel constructed at the same time as
sprayed concrete is applied.
(2)
One test panel shall be constructed for each application in a day or
as directed by the Engineer.
(3)
The test panel shall be 250 mm thick and shall be at least 1 m x 1
m.
The panel shall be constructed by spraying concrete into the
mould at the same time as the concrete to be tested is applied. The test
panel shall be cured by the same method as the sprayed concrete.
7.53
2006 Edition
Samples:
concrete
cores from sprayed
concrete
7.144
(1)
Three concrete cores shall be provided from each test panel.
Cores shall not be taken within 125 mm from the edges of the panel.
(2)
Concrete cores shall be 100 mm diameter and shall be the full
depth of the test panel.
(3)
The method of taking concrete cores shall be in accordance with
CS1.
Testing: concrete
cores from sprayed
concrete
7.145
(1)
Each concrete core shall be tested to determine the compressive
strength and density.
(2)
The method of preparing and testing the cores to determine the
compressive strength shall be in accordance with CS1. The method of
testing the cores to determine the density shall be in accordance with
CS1. Three concrete cores shall be tested at 28 days.
concrete cores from
sprayed concrete
7.146
The results of tests for compressive strength of concrete cores shall be

interpreted in accordance with BS 6089. Adjustments to the measured
strength in respect of the age of the core when tested shall not be made
unless permitted by the Engineer. The minimum compressive strength
of concrete cores, converted to the estimated in-situ cube strength in
accordance with BS 6089, shall be the specified grade strength at 28
days.
Non-compliance:
concrete cores from
sprayed concrete
7.147
If the result of any test for compressive strength or density of concrete

cores from sprayed concrete does not comply with the specified
requirements for the property, particulars of proposed changes to the
materials, mix design, methods of production or methods of construction
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial mixes shall be made and
further trial panels shall be constructed unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.

ROCK BOLTS
Testing: Packer test
7.148
(1)
The water loss from drillholes for rock bolts shall be determined
by the Packer test. The number of drillholes to be tested shall be
(2)
The Packer test shall be carried out on the bond length of the
drillhole at a test pressure of 100 kPa. The method of testing shall be as
stated in Clause 7.183.
Packer test
7.149
The water loss determined by the Packer test in the grouted hole shall not
exceed 5 Lugeons when measured over a 10 minute period.
Non-compliance:
Packer test
7.150
If the result of any Packer test on drillholes for rock bolts does not
comply with the specified requirements for the test, the drillhole shall be
grouted, re-drilled and retested. Grouting, re-drilling and retesting shall
be continued until the result of the Packer test complies with the
specified requirements for the test.
7.54
2006 Edition
TESTING: ROCK BOLTS

Testing: rock bolts
7.151
Each installed rock bolt shall be tested to determine the loss in stress by
applying a test load of 1.5 times the working load for 5 minutes.
rock bolts
7.152
The loss in stress in installed rock bolts shall not exceed 5% of the test
load in 5 minutes.
Non-compliance: rock
bolts
7.153
(1)
If the result of any test for loss in stress of installed rock bolts
does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, an
additional test for loss of stress shall be carried out on the rock bolt.
(2)
If the result of any additional test for loss of stress of installed
rock bolts does not comply with the specified requirements for the test,
the rock bolt shall be replaced.
7.55
2006 Edition
PART 4: GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Ground
7.154
Ground, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is fill material,
soil and rock and the interfaces between fill material, soil and rock and any
structures.
Grout
7.155
Grout, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is cement grout,
cement-sand grout, cement-bentonite grout and proprietary grout approved
by the Engineer.
Grouting
7.156
Grouting, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is the mixing
and injection of grout through predrilled or preformed holes.
Grouting stage
7.157
Grouting stage, for the purpose of grouting for geotechnical works, is the
discrete length of drillhole into which grout is to be injected in a continuous
operation.
Lugeon
7.158
Lugeon is a water loss of 1 litre per minute per metre length of hole tested
at an effective pressure of 1 MPa.
MATERIALS
Materials for grout
7.159
Materials for grout shall comply with Section 16 except as stated in this
Section.
Grout for geotechnical

works
7.160
(1)
Cement grout for geotechnical works consists of PC, PFA, sand and
water. Admixtures shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
The use of PFA in cement grout shall follow the same requirements of PFA
in concrete as specified in Section 16.
(2)
Sand for grout shall be clean dry sand complying with BS 1200 and
shall have a particle size distribution such that 100% passes a 2 mm BS test
sieve and not more than 30% passes a 0.2 mm BS test sieve.
(3)
Water for grout shall be clean fresh water having a temperature not
exceeding 30C or less than 5C.
(4)
Cement grout shall have a minimum crushing strength of 30 MPa at
28 days.
(5)
The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 0.5% by volume 3
hours after mixing or 1.0% maximum when measured at 231.7oC in a
covered glass or metal cylinder of 100 mm internal diameter and with a
grout depth of approximately 100mm. In addition, the water shall be
reabsorbed by the grout within 24 hours.
(6)
The flow cone efflux time of grout shall not be less than 15 seconds.
7.56
2006 Edition
Standpipes
7.161
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer standpipes for grouting shall be

standard black metal pipe complying with BS 1387. With the permission
of the Engineer, non-metallic grout pipe may be used for grouting rock
dowels, rock bolts and soil nails. Where metal standpipes are used for
grouting rock dowels, rock bolts and soil nails, they shall be extracted
from drillholes as grouting proceeds.
Particulars of grouting
for geotechnical works
7.162
(1)
construction for grouting for geotechnical works shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Details of drilling, grouting and testing equipment,
(b)
Details of grout mix, including admixtures,
(c)
Methods of storing, mixing and injecting grout,
(d)
Methods of drilling, cleaning, capping and sealing grout holes,
(e)
Methods of grouting, including grouting stages, order of

working and regrouting methods,
(f) Methods of controlling surface water, groundwater, grout

leakage and ground movement, including methods of containing
overflowing grout, grout spill, monitoring and instrumentation,
and
(g) Safety and hazard risk control measures, including bursting of
high pressure grout pipes.
(2)
least 28 days before grouting starts.
Trials for grouting
7.163
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer a grouting trial shall be carried

out. The extent and depth of holes for grouting trials and the tests to be
carried out shall be as stated in the Contract.
DRILLING FOR GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL

WORKS
Drilling for grouting
7.164
(1)
Holes in rock for grouting for geotechnical works shall be drilled
using rotary or percussion type drills. The tolerance for the holes shall be as
stated in Clause 7.45(1) and (2) except that for drillholes of soil nails shall
be as stated in Clause 7.136(6). Grease and other lubricants shall not be
used in the flushing medium or on the rods, except around the threads at the
ends of the rods. Drilling methods that result in drill cuttings causing
blockages such that grouting cannot be performed satisfactorily shall not be
used.
(2)
The set-up of drilling plant and ancillary equipment shall be in such
a manner that water, dust, fumes and noise generated in the course of
drilling and grouting operation shall be sufficiently diverted, controlled,
suppressed and muffled. The flushing medium for drilling shall be clean
water or air as agreed by the Engineer.
7.57
2006 Edition
(3)
The minimum size of hole for grouting in rock shall be 40 mm.
(4)
Holes in soil for grouting for geotechnical works shall be drilled by
a method which is suitable to the ground conditions and which is approved
by the Engineer.
(5)
The location of all underground obstructions and utilities shall be
determined by the Contractor before drilling starts and the drilling pattern
shall take account of the location of obstructions and utilities.
(6)
Casings required to prevent the collapse of grout holes shall be as
stated in Clause 7.44. Casings shall be removed immediately before or
simultaneously with the grouting or sleeve grouting operation in such a
manner that the grout hole will not collapse and the injection of grout will
not be hindered.
(7)
Grout holes shall be flushed clean with water or compressed air
introduced at the bottom of the hole after drilling is complete. The holes
shall be protected with capping pipes or standpipes to prevent subsequent
collapse or clogging after flushing.
(8)
Grout holes that have been drilled more than one day before
grouting of the hole starts shall be reflushed with water or compressed air
immediately before grouting is commenced and excess flushing water shall
be removed by air jet. Holes drilled in soft ground or in ground other than
rock and in which sleeve grouts are proposed as part of the grouting
operation shall be sleeve grouted as soon as practicable after drilling.
Standpipes and
capping pipes
7.165
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, grout holes shall be
capped after drilling and before grouting. Capping shall be by a suitably
sealed grout connection, standpipe, packer or other methods agreed by the
Engineer. The cap shall seal the hole to prevent contamination or
clogging of the hole until grouting operations start.
(2)
Standpipes, if stated in the Contract, shall be installed in holes after
drilling. The pipe shall be sealed into the hole using cement grout
consisting of PC and water in the proportions 1:1 by volume.
GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

Monitoring of
grouting operations
7.166
(1)
Instrumentation shall be installed to monitor heave, bulging,
settlement, lateral movement, deformation or fracturing of the ground or
structures due to grouting operations. Records of monitoring shall be kept
by the Contractor on the Site and a copy provided for the Engineer.
Arrangements for installing instruments and taking measurements inside
and outside the Site shall be made by the Contractor.
(2)
The accuracy of the instruments shall be checked before grouting
starts and at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
Grouting equipment
7.167
(1)
Grouting equipment for geotechnical works shall be a type, quantity
and size suitable for the grouting required. The equipment shall be kept
clean and in good working order.
7.58
2006 Edition
(2)
Standby grouting equipment shall be available at all times and shall
be capable of being brought into operation immediately in the event of
breakdowns during grouting operations.
(3)
Grout mixers shall be high-speed colloidal mixers having a rotor
speed of at least 1000 r/min and capable of producing a colloidal grout mix.
Mixers shall be fitted with a water volume-measuring device for batching
purposes.
(4)
Holding tanks shall be fitted with an agitator to provide continuous
agitation of the grout at 100 r/min. The tank shall be fitted with a dipstick
to allow continuous measurement of the volume of grout in the tank. A
2.36mm removable screen shall be provided between the tank and the
pump or grout lines.
(5)
Grout pumps shall be a positive displacement type. Pumps shall be
fitted with bypass valves to allow a standby pump to be brought into
operation.
(6)
Working pressure gauges shall be accurate to within 3% and shall be
calibrated against a test gauge before grouting starts and at weekly
intervals. A test gauge with accompanying calibration certificates shall be
kept on the Site for the purpose of calibrating working gauges. Working
gauges shall be numbered and a record shall be kept of gauge number,
shifts worked, calibration dates and repairs undertaken. Records shall be
kept on the Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all
times.
(7)
Packers shall be such that they seal holes in rock at the specified
level and shall be capable of withstanding the maximum grout or water
pressure to be used at that level without leakage. Packers may be of the
mechanical or inflatable rubber type. A sufficient number of packers of a
size to suit the holes shall be available on the Site.
Mixing grout
7.168
(1)
Grout for geotechnical works shall be mixed by volume or batched
by weight as agreed by the Engineer. The mix proportions may be
adjusted if approved by the Engineer depending on the results of the trial
grouting, water tests in the hole or the results of previously grouted holes.
(2)
Grout shall be mixed by adding approximately two-thirds of the
cement to the water adding any admixture and adding the remaining
one-third of cement. Other mixing procedures shall not be used unless
(3)
The time for which grout shall be mixed in high speed mixers shall
be suitable for the type of mixer used. Grout shall be continuously
agitated in a holding tank after mixing and shall be screened before being
circulated in the grout lines. Mixed grout shall be continuously circulated
in such a manner that grout which is not taken in a hole can be returned to
the holding tank.
(4)
Grout to which a retarding agent has not been added, and which is
not used within 30 minutes of mixing, shall not be used for grouting.
Pressure
grouting
7.169
(1)
Holes in rock shall be grouted in grouting stages not exceeding 3 m.
Grouting may be carried out in either an upstage or a downstage sequence.
7.59
2006 Edition
(2)
Ground other than rock shall be grouted in such a manner that grout
can be injected at various points along the grout hole in a multi-stage
operation. The grouting method shall employ perforated pipes with
rubber sleeve valves unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
Grouting pressures shall initially be 100 kPa per 4-metre depth of
hole and shall not exceed the overburden pressure unless permitted by the
Engineer.
(4)
Holes shall be grouted in a continuous operation at the grouting
stages and pressures stated in the Contract. Unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer grouting shall be carried out by injecting the grout under
pressure into each grouting stage of the hole until the grouting stage refuses
to take further grout.
(5)
If in the opinion of the Engineer grouting of any hole or grouting
stage has not been completed due to excessive grout takes, low pressures,
excessive leakage or other causes, the hole shall be redrilled or flushed out
with water and re-injected with grout.
Loss or leakage of
grout
7.170
(1)
If during the grouting of any hole, grout is found to flow from
adjacent grout holes in quantities, which in the opinion of the Engineer are
sufficient to interfere seriously with the grouting operation or to cause
appreciable loss of grout, the holes shall be temporarily capped. If in the
opinion of the Engineer capping is not essential, ungrouted holes shall be
left open to allow air and water to escape.
(2)
If during the grouting of any hole grout is found to flow from joints
in the geological formation at the Site or any other location, the leaks shall
be plugged or caulked in a manner agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
If during the grouting of any hole the grout-take increases suddenly
by a significant amount, the Engineer shall be informed immediately.
Making good holes
7.171
(1)
Grout holes through concrete shall be made good using concrete
agreed by the Engineer. The concrete shall be firmly compacted and shall
be finished to match the adjacent surface.
(2)
Uncapped holes in rock shall be topped up after grouting using
cement grout consisting of PC and water in the proportions 1:1 by volume,
or 1:3 cement sand mortar.
Records of grouting
7.172
(1)
Records of grouting for geotechnical works shall be kept by the
Contractor on the Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer
at all times. Records shall include the following details:
(a)
Hole location and reference number,
(b)
Depth of hole,
(c)
Type of grout and grout mix proportions,
(d)
Volume of grout injected,
(e)
Grouting pressures, and
(f)
Times and details of any interruptions, leakages and equipment

malfunctions.
7.60
2006 Edition
(2)
A record of grouting for each hole shall be submitted to the Engineer
within 24 hours of completion of grouting of the hole. The record shall
contain the following details:
(a)
(b)
Grouting stage numbers and lengths,
(c)
Collar level and hole inclination,
(d)
Details of grout injections including the information stated in

Clause 7.172(1), and
(e)
Details of the grouting procedure, including any stoppages,

leaks to other holes, surface leaks and ground movement.
(3)
A record of the testing for each hole, including test results, shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of completion of testing of a
hole. Records of Packer tests shall contain the following details:
(a)
(b)
Depth of packer in the hole,
(c)
Date and time of test,
(d)
Type of gauge or meter and identifying reference number,
(e)
Test readings for each 5 minute period,
(f)
Calculated test results in Lugeons, and
(g)
Details of any equipment malfunctions, sudden water losses or

blockages, surface leakage or other variations in test
procedure.
(4)
A report of grouting for each part of the Works as stated in the
Contract, including record drawings and logs of holes, shall be submitted to
the Engineer within one week of completion and testing of grouting for that
part of the Works. The form of records, logs and record drawings shall be
as agreed by the Engineer.

Batch:
grout for
geotechnical works
7.173
A batch of grout for geotechnical works is any quantity of grout used for
grouting geotechnical works in one continuous operation in one day.
TESTING: GROUT - BLEEDING

Samples:
of grout
bleeding
7.174
(1)
One sample of grout shall be provided from each batch of grout for
geotechnical works to determine the amount of bleeding of the grout.
7.61
2006 Edition
(2)
Samples shall be provided not more than 30 minutes after the grout
has been mixed and shall be protected from moisture content changes
before the tests for amount of bleeding are carried out.
Testing:
grout
bleeding of
7.175
(1)
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 7.174 shall be
divided into three specimens. Each specimen shall be tested to determine
the amount of bleeding.
(2)
Grout for geotechnical works shall be tested for bleeding in
accordance with ASTM C940-98a. Bleeding tests shall be completed
immediately prior to each application in a day or as directed by the
Engineer.
Non-compliance:
bleeding of grout
7.176
If the result of any test for amount of bleeding of grout for geotechnical
works does not comply with the specified requirements for amount of
bleeding, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or
methods of production shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further
grouting trials shall be carried out unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
TESTING: GROUT - FLOW CONE EFFLUX TIME

Samples:
flow cone
efflux time of grout
7.177
geotechnical works to determine the flow cone efflux time of the grout.
Testing:
flow cone
efflux time of grout
7.178
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 7.177 shall be tested to

determine the flow cone efflux time. The method of testing shall be in
accordance with ASTM C939.
Non-compliance:
flow cone efflux time
of grout
7.179
If the result of any test for flow cone efflux time of grout does not comply
with the specified requirements for flow cone efflux time, particulars of
proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or methods of production
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further grouting trials shall be carried
out unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

Samples:
crushing
strength of grout
7.180
(1)
geotechnical works to determine the crushing strength of the grout.
(2)
Samples shall be provided not more than one hour after the grout has
been mixed and shall be protected from moisture content changes before
test cubes are made.
Testing:
crushing
strength of grout
7.181
(1)
Nine 100 mm test cubes shall be made from each sample of grout
taken as stated in Clause 7.180. Three test cubes shall be tested to
determine the crushing strength at 3 days, three test cubes shall be tested to
determine the crushing strength at 7 days and three test cubes shall be
tested to determine the crushing strength at 28 days. For permanent soil
nails and rock dowels, the test cubes for determining the crushing strength
at 3 days and 7 days can be omitted.
7.62
2006 Edition
(2)
The method of making, curing and testing the test cubes shall be to
specification as stated in Section 16.
Non-compliance:
crushing strength of
grout
7.182
If the result of any test for crushing strength of grout for geotechnical
works does not comply with the specified requirements for grout,
particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or method of
production shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial mixes shall be
made and further grouting trials shall be carried out unless otherwise

GROUTING AND GROUTED DRILLHOLES
Testing: Packer tests
7.183
(1)
The water loss from drillholes for grouting and from grouted and
regrouted drillholes shall be determined by the Packer test.
(2)
The number of drillholes for grouting to be tested to determine the
water loss shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
Every grouted drillhole and every regrouted drillhole shall be tested
to determine the water loss.
(4)
Packer tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5930,
Chapter 21.5 and Clause 7.183(5) to (8)
(5)
Tests shall be carried out using clean water, in grouting stages not
exceeding 3 m in length. The rate of flow of water in the test shall be
determined to an accuracy of 10% for flows exceeding 1 L/min.
(6)
The test pressure shall be equal to the overburden pressure and shall
not exceed the specified maximum grouting pressure for the grouting stage
being tested.
(7)
The test shall be carried out between a packer and the base of the
hole for grouting stages at the base of a hole and shall be carried out
between two packers in other cases.
(8)
The test shall be carried out by pumping water at the specified
pressure into the grouting stage being tested and measuring with a volume
meter the water loss over three consecutive 10 minute periods. The result
shall be calculated in Lugeons for each 10 minute period.
Packer tests
7.184
The water loss determined by the Packer test in the grouted hole shall not
exceed 5 Lugeons when measured over a 10-minute period.
Non-compliance:
Packer test on
drillholes for grouting
7.185
If the result of any Packer test on drillholes for grouting does not comply
with the specified requirements for the test, the drillhole shall be grouted,
re-drilled and retested. Grouting, re-drilling and retesting shall continue
until the result of the Packer test complies with the specified requirements
for the test.
7.63
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
Packer test on grouted
and regrouted
drillholes
7.186
If the result of any Packer test on grouted drillholes or regrouted drillholes

does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the grout shall
be removed and the drillhole shall be regrouted and retested. Removal of
grout, regrouting and retesting shall continue until the result of the Packer
test complies with the specified requirements for the test.
7.64
2006 Edition
PART 5: GROUNDWATER DRAINAGE AND CONTROL

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Caisson drain
7.187
Caisson drain is an excavated vertical shaft, with or without raking drains,

to provide drainage by intercepting and lowering the groundwater level in
the vicinity.
Geotextile filter
7.188
Geotextile filter is a permeable sheet of synthetic material used like a

granular filter for filtration and in-plane drainage.
Filter pipe
7.189
Filter pipe is a perforated or non-perforated pipe used for draining

groundwater.
Granular filter
7.190
Granular filter is a graded sand or gravel placed against a soil to prevent

the migration of fine particles out of the soil caused by water flow, and
graded such that free discharge of water flowing into the filter is allowed.
Prefabricated band
drain
7.191
Prefabricated band drain is a synthetic drain which, when installed in a soil

strata, acts as a drainage medium for dissipation of pore water pressure.
Raking drain
7.192
Raking drain is a drillhole, with or without perforated filter pipes and

geotextile filter sheath, installed generally at an upward inclination for
groundwater lowering by gravity flow.
Relief drain
7.193
Relief drain is a synthetic drain installed on slope surfaces or in

excavations to divert water seepage before applying sprayed concrete,
masonry dentition or other construction.
Trench drain
7.194
Trench drain is a trench wholly or partly filled with granular material or

clean crushed rock, with or without filter pipes and geotextile filter.
MATERIALS
Granular filter
material
7.195
(1) Granular filter material for granular filter, trench drains and caisson
drains shall consist of durable, inert, natural material free of clay, organic
material and other impurities.
(2) Granular filter material shall have the particle size distribution stated
in the Contract.
Geotextile filter
7.196
Geotextile filter shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and

shall have the properties stated in the Contract.
7.65
2006 Edition
Filter pipes
7.197
(1)
(2)
Filter pipes shall comply with the following:

Precast concrete pipes
: BS 5911
Vitrified clay pipes
: BS 65
DI pipes
: BS 4772
Steel pipes
: BS 534
Porous concrete pipes
: BS 1194
Perforated concrete pipes
: BS 5911
Pitch fibre pipes
: BS 2760
uPVC pipes
: BS 4660 or BS 3506
Corrugated polyethylene
tubing
: AASHTO Designation
M252
Class O UPVC pipes shall not be used.
(3)
The perforations in perforated pipes shall be cleanly cut and shall be
uniformly spaced along the length and circumference of the pipe.
(4)
Raking drains
7.198
UPVC plastic pipes shall be jointed by couplers.
(1)
Type O raking drains shall be unlined raking drains. Drain holes
shall be at least 40 mm diameter.
(2)
Type 1 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of
a single perforated pipe with a non-perforated invert.
(3)
Type 2 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of
a single perforated pipe with a non-perforated invert and enclosed within a
geotextile filter sheath.
(4)
Type 3 raking drains shall be double pipe raking drains consisting
of an outer permanent pipe and an inner removable pipe enclosed within a
geotextile filter sheath. The outer and inner pipes shall be perforated
pipes with a non-perforated invert.
(5)
Pipes for raking drains shall be perforated pipes with
non-perforated invert as approved by the Engineer. The portion of
openings in the perforated pipe shall cover between approximately
two-thirds 50% and 70% of the circumference of the pipe. The
percentage of opening areas to overall surface area of the pipe shall not be
less than 14% for 40 mm diameter pipe, nor less than 8% for 65 mm or
above diameter pipe. The pipe material shall have the following physical
properties or having equivalent functions:
(a) Material: non-metallic
(b) Minimum tensile strength: 21,300 kN/m2
(c) Minimum compressive strength: 22,000 kN/m2
7.66
2006 Edition
(d) Minimum flexural strength: 6,800 kN/m2
(6)
Couplers for filter pipes shall also have non-perforated invert and
shall be of similar strength and durability of the pipe materials. The
lapped length of coupler and each end of the filter pipes shall be at least
100 mm. The elongation at the pipe connection shall be less than 5 mm
under a 45 kg pulling force.
(7)
Geotextile filter sheaths for raking drains shall be formed of
non-woven geotextile filter robust enough to prevent tearing and shall have
the following physical properties or materials having equivalent functions
or performance as approved by the Engineer:
(a)
Material : non-metallic
(b)
Minimum tensile strength: 17 kN/m
(c)
Apparent opening size: 140 m
(d)
Coefficient of permeability
under 2 kN/m2 : 5 x 10-3 m/s
(e)
Flow rate at 100 mm head

under 2 kN/m2 : 195 L/m2s
(8)
Tying wires for jointing pipes and stitching filter sheath shall be
non-metallic wires of minimum breaking load 400 N or equivalent as
Relief drains
7.199
Relief drains shall be drain mats with multi-layer porous fabric wrapped
in filter fabric and covered with an impermeable fabric or products having
equivalent functions or performance as approved by the Engineer. PVC
flanges for connecting relief drains to outlet pipes shall be directed by the
Engineer.
Fill material for

trench drains
7.200
(1)
Fill material to be used with geotextile filter in trench drains shall
be clean crushed rock. Type A and Type B fill material shall have the
particle size distributions stated in Table 7.2.
(2)
Fill material passing a 425m BS test sieve shall be non-plastic.
(3)
The D15 particle size of Type A fill material for use with perforated
pipes shall be at least 15% larger than twice the maximum dimension of
the perforations, where D15 is the equivalent sieve size in millimetres,
interpolated from the particle size distribution curve, through which 15%
of the fill material would pass.
Table 7.2:
Particle size distribution of fill material for trench drains
Type of fill
material

BS test sieve
63 mm
37.5 mm
20 mm
10 mm
3.35mm
600 m
63 m
Type A
100
45-100
25-80
8-25
0-5
Type B
100
85-100
0-20
0-5
7.67
2006 Edition
Caisson liners
7.201
Caisson liners shall be concrete tapered rings at least 100 mm thick and not
exceeding 1 m deep. The liners shall be constructed with well-compacted
concrete of Grade 20/20 or greater.
Prefabricated band
drains
7.202
(1)
Prefabricated band drains shall consist of a core and a filter. The
drains may be manufactured as a single unit or the filter may be wrapped
around the core, and overlapped and sealed to contain the core. The
drains shall be made from chemically treated paper, polyethylene,
polyester, polyolefine or other synthetic material or combination of such
materials.
(2)
Prefabricated band drains shall be provided with an outer casing or
mandrel of rhomboidal or rectangular cross section for use during
installation. The drains shall also be provided with an anchor to ensure
embedment of the drain during extraction of the mandrel.
(3)
The strength of the materials in prefabricated band drains shall be
such that the drains will withstand all forces resulting from handling and
installation.
(4)
The filter jacket for prefabricated band drains shall be a type which:
(a)
Has been previously proved effective under similar soil and

pressure conditions,
(b)
Is in all cases able to prevent excessive migration of soil

particles into the core, and
(c)
Has a permeability not less than that of the surrounding soil.
(5)
Prefabricated band drains shall be able to conform to soil
deformation without buckling or crimping of the core.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
granular filters
7.203
(1)
construction for granular filters shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Whether granular filter material is to be supplied ready mixed

or is to be mixed on the Site,
(b)
Source of supply, including name of supplier of ready mixed

material,
(c)
Quantity of each constituent if the material is to be mixed on

the Site,
(d)
Construction Plant and methods of mixing for material mixed

on the Site,
(e)
Method of storage and location of storage areas on the Site,
(f)
Methods of deposition and compaction of material, and
7.68
2006 Edition
(g)
Results of three tests for particle size distribution of the fill

material against which the granular filter is to be placed.
(h) Details of filter design including calculations and grading

envelopes.
(2)
least 14 days before deposition of granular filter material starts.
Particulars of
geotextile filter
7.204
(1)
construction for geotextile filter shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers name and source of supply,
(b)
Details of geotextile filter including manufacturer's literature,
(c)
A certificate for the geotextile filter showing the

manufacturer's name, the date and place of manufacture and
showing that the geotextile filter complies with the
requirements stated in the Contract, and including results of
tests stated in the Contract,
(d)
Calculations showing that the geotextile filter complies with

the filtration characteristics stated in the Contract,
(e)
Details of previous uses of the geotextile filter.
(f)
Details of quantities to be supplied in each delivery,
(g)
Method of storage,
(h)
Methods of cutting and jointing geotextile filter,
(i)
Method of repairing small batches, and
(j)
Methods of laying and holding in position.
(2)
Engineer for approval at least 28 days before the first delivery of the
geotextile filter to the Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each batch
of geotextile filter delivered to the Site.
Particulars of trench
drains
7.205
(1)
construction for trench drains shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Method of excavation of trench and installation of geotextile

filter,
(b)
Details of granular fill material as stated in Clause 7.200, and
(c)
Details of geotextile filter as stated in Clause 7.204.
(2)
least 14 days before installation of trench drains starts.
7.69
2006 Edition
Particulars of raking
drains
7.206
(1)
construction for raking drains shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Method of connecting adjacent sections of pipes,
(b)
Proportions of sealant mix, and
(c)
Details of geotextile filter sheath.
(2)
least 14 days before installation of raking drains starts.
Particulars of relief
drains
7.207
(1)
construction for relief drains shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of relief drains and outlets, and
(b)
Method of fixing relief drains to the slope face.
(2)
least 14 days before fixing of relief drains starts.
Particulars of caisson
drains
7.208
(1)
construction for caisson drains shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Methods of excavation and installation and removal of caisson

liners,
(b)
Method of compaction of fill material,
(c)
Details of granular filter material as stated in Clause 7.203,

and
(d)
Details of geotextile filter as stated in Clause 7.204.
(2)
least 14 days before construction of caisson drains starts.
Particulars of
prefabricated band
drains
7.209
(1)
construction for prefabricated band drains shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Details of type of drain, including manufacturer's literature,
(b)
A certificate showing the manufacturer's name, the date and

place of manufacture and showing that the drains comply with
the requirements stated in the Contract,
(c)
Details of previous installations by the Contractor using

similar drains,
(d)
Method of installation, and
(e)
Details of installation mandrel, drain anchor, method of

penetration and method of recording depth of installation.
7.70
2006 Edition
(2)
least 28 days before installation of prefabricated band drains starts.
Particulars of filter
pipes
7.210
(1)
construction for filter pipes shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of type of pipes, including manufacturer's literature,
(b)

place of manufacture and showing that the pipes comply with
the requirements stated in the Contract,
(c)
Details of previous installations by the Contractor using

similar pipes, and
(d)
Method of installation.
(2)
least 28 days before installation of the filter pipes starts.
Particulars of
groundwater control,
drawdown and
monitoring
7.211
(1)
construction for groundwater control, drawdown and monitoring shall be
(a)
Construction Plant and materials for dewatering,
(b)
Timing and sequence of dewatering operations,
(c)
Details of silt traps,
(d)
Methods of monitoring flow rates and volumes of silt,

including monitoring intervals, and
(e)
Methods and locations for discharging groundwater.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for information at
least 14 days before the relevant work starts.
7.212
Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval of the source and type of each material at the same
time as particulars of the material are submitted:
(a)
Granular filter material,
(b)
Geotextile filter and two pieces of geotextile filter joined in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for each
type of joint, and
(c)
Relief drains.
7.71
2006 Edition
HANDLING,
MATERIALS
of granular filter
material
7.213
DELIVERY
AND
STORAGE
OF
(1)
Granular filter material shall not be handled or stored in a manner
which will result in mixing of the different types and sizes or in
segregation, contamination, deterioration or erosion of the material.
(2)
Stockpiles of granular filter material shall be placed on
well-drained, prepared areas and shall be separated by dividing walls of
sufficient height to keep the different materials separate.
Delivery and storage

of geotextile filter
7.214
(1)
Geotextile filter shall be delivered in secure wrappings to ensure
that the geotextile filter is dry and protected from damage, contamination
and exposure to conditions that may adversely affect it.
(2)
Geotextile filter shall be stored on a level surface and shall be kept
in a secure and dry condition, which will not result in damage to the fabric
or in contamination of the fabric.
Storage of filter pipes
7.215
Coils of plastic tubing for filter pipes shall be stored flat.

of prefabricated band
drains
7.216
(1)
Prefabricated band drains shall be supplied in rolls, securely packed
in lightproof wrappings.
(2)
Prefabricated band drains shall be stored in a clean, dry
environment.
GRANULAR FILTERS
Mixing granular filter
material
7.217
Granular filter material shall be thoroughly mixed by the method approved

by the Engineer. Material that has been stockpiled shall be remixed
before deposition.
Deposition and
compaction of
granular filter
material
7.218
(1)
Granular filter material shall be deposited and compacted as stated
in Section 6.
(2)
Granular filter material shall be deposited in a manner which will
not result in segregation or contamination of the material.
(3)
Granular filter material shall be deposited in such a manner that a
continuous free draining zone is formed. The surface of each layer shall
be cleaned and scarified before the next layer is deposited unless otherwise
GEOTEXTILE FILTER
Damage to geotextile
filter
7.219
(1)
The total period for which geotextile filter is exposed to daylight or
other sources of ultra-violet radiation during handling, delivery, storage
and installation shall not exceed 7 days.
7.72
2006 Edition
(2)
Geotextile filter that has been damaged or exposed to daylight or
other sources of ultra-violet radiation for longer than the period stated in
Clause 7.219(1) shall not be used in the permanent work unless permitted
by the Engineer.
(3)
Repairs to geotextile filter that has been torn or damaged during
installation shall be carried out using a patch of the same material
extending at least 300 mm beyond the edge of the damaged area. Repairs
shall not be carried out on geotextile filter that has been damaged during
storage or storage before installation.
Laying geotextile filter
7.220
(1)
Geotextile filter shall be installed in such a manner that the
individual yarns, webs or layers of the fabric retain their intended
orientation and relative positions with respect to each another.
(2)
Geotextile filter shall be installed, cut and jointed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(3)
Laps in sheets of fabric reinforcement that are not stated in the
Contract to be jointed shall be at least 300 mm.
Protection of geotextile
filter
7.221
Construction plant and other vehicles shall not operate on installed

geotextile filter unless in the opinion of the Engineer it is adequately
protected by a cover of fill material or other means agreed by the Engineer.
Records of geotextile
filter
7.222
Records of installation of geotextile filter shall be kept by the Contractor

on the Site and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer each day.
Records shall contain the following details:
(a)
Identification of structures and sections of work where

geotextile filter is installed,
(b)
Type of geotextile filter, including identification of batch,
(c)
Date of first exposure of geotextile filter to ultra-violet

radiation before installation,
(d)
Type of joint, amount of overlap, method of holding in place

and any repairs to geotextile filter carried out during
installation,
(e)
Date of installation of geotextile filter, and
(f)
Date of final covering of geotextile filter.
RAKING DRAINS
Installation of raking
drains
7.223
(1)
The length of raking drains assembled before installation shall not
exceed 12.5 m. Connections between adjacent pipes shall be secured in
such a manner that the cumulative longitudinal extension of a 12.5 m
assembled length of pipe does not exceed 5 mm when pulled by hand.
(2)
Pipes for Type 2 and Type 3 raking drains are to be wrapped in
geotextile filter sheath in the following manner prior to installation in
order to ensure that the overlap and stitching shall be at the
7.73
2006 Edition
non-perforated invert of the pipe. The pipe shall be placed onto and
along the centre of a strip of geotextile filter with the non-perforated
invert at the top. The strip of geotextile filter shall be of sufficient
width to allow an overlap of at least 50 mm, and shall be drawn around
the pipe and stitched together tightly with non-metallic wires. The
stitching shall be tied off onto the pipe and the fabric at every 300 mm to
prevent dislocation during installation. The filter sheath shall be
marked to ensure that the non-perforated invert is correctly positioned
during installation.
(3)
During delivery and installation of raking drains, care must be taken
to ensure that the pipe and geotextile filter sheath are not damaged. The
method of installing the raking drains shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval prior to installation.
(4)
Before installation of drain pipes, the drillholes shall be checked
for cleanliness. Whenever any obstruction is encountered inside a
drillhole during pipe insertion, the pipe shall be withdrawn and the
obstruction shall be cleared before re-insertion.
No jacking or
hammering of pipes shall be carried out during the whole process of pipe
insertion.
Drilling for raking
drains
7.224
(1)
Drilling lubricants other than clean air or fresh water shall not be
used for drilling holes for raking drains. Casings shall be used to prevent
collapse of the hole and to permit unobstructed insertion of the pipes and
geotextile filter sheath.
(2)
The drillhole entry point shall be positioned within a tolerance of
75 mm. Deviation in alignment shall not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from
straight shall not exceed 20 mm in any 3 m length of drillhole. A positive
gradient shall be maintained throughout the complete length of the hole.
The inclination of holes shall be measured by a method agreed by the
Engineer.
(3)
Drilling and sampling for undisturbed soil samples and rock cores
instructed by the Engineer to be recovered from drillholes shall be as
stated in Clauses 7.43 to 7.67.
(4)
Drillholes shall be temporarily plugged or otherwise protected to
prevent entry of deleterious material after drilling.
Records of drillholes
for raking drains
7.225
Records of drillholes for raking drains shall be kept by the Contractor on

the Site and a drillhole log for each drillhole shall be submitted to the
Engineer before installation of the raking drain starts. The borehole log
shall contain the following details:
(a)
Drain reference number,
(b)
Location, inclination, bearings, diameter and length of hole,
(c)
Details of drilling progress,
(d)
Details of water seepage related to drilling progress, and
(e)
Details of samples taken.
7.74
2006 Edition
TRENCH DRAINS
Excavation for trench
drains
7.226
The width of trench drains shall be at least 450 mm. The width of trench
drains with filter pipes not exceeding 150 mm diameter shall be at least
four times the nominal diameter of the pipe. The width of trench drains
for pipes exceeding 150 mm diameter shall be at least the same as the
external diameter of the pipe plus 450 mm.
Geotextile filter
surround for trench
drains
7.227
Geotextile filter surround for trench drains shall be installed as stated in

Clause 7.220.
Bed for trench drains
7.228
(1)
Concrete bed for filter pipes in trench drains shall be at least 75 mm
thick and shall be Grade 20/20 concrete.
(2)
Granular bed for filter pipes for trench drains shall have a thickness
at least the same as the diameter of the pipe or 150 mm, whichever is
greater.
Deposition and
compaction of fill
material for trench
drains
7.229
(1)
The material for granular bed for trench drains shall be deposited in
the trench in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick and for the complete width
of the trench. Each layer shall be compacted with six passes of a plate
vibrator or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
Fill material around filter pipes in trench drains shall be deposited
and compacted as stated in Section 6. The permission of the Engineer
shall be obtained before fill material is deposited around filter pipes.
RELIEF DRAINS
Trials for relief drains
7.230
A trial length of relief drains of at least 2 m shall be constructed.
Fixing relief drains
7.231
Relief drains shall be fixed in position before surface protection or remedial

measures are applied. Fixing shall be carried out in a manner that will not
affect the serviceability of the relief drains or outlets. Water collected in
relief drains shall be discharged to outlets agreed by the Engineer.
CAISSON DRAINS
Construction of
caisson drains
7.232
(1)
Excavation for caisson drains shall be carried out by manual
methods in stages not exceeding 1.0 m depth unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer. Dewatering shall be carried out for excavation below the
groundwater level so that work may be carried out, as near as may be
practicable in the circumstances, in dry conditions. Dewatering shall be
carried out as stated in Clauses 7.236 and 7.237.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the caisson drain shaft
shall be supported at all times during construction using concrete liners.
Voids between liners and excavated faces shall be filled with no fines
concrete. Caisson liners for each 1.0 m stage shall be installed on the
same day as that stage is excavated.
7.75
2006 Edition
(3)
Softened and loose material shall be removed from the base of the
caisson drain immediately before granular filter material is deposited in the
caisson drain.
(4)
Part or all of the concrete liner adjacent to the granular filter layer
shall be removed before granular filter material or fill material is deposited.
Debris from the concrete liner shall be removed from the caisson drain.
(5)
Granular filter material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding
500 mm and shall be compacted by methods approved by the Engineer.
Discharge of water
from caisson drains
7.233
Water collected in caisson drains shall be discharged to the outlets stated in

the Contract.
Records of caisson
drains
7.234
(1)
Records of caisson drains shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site
and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 14 days after
completion of construction of caisson drains. The records shall contain
the following details:
(a)
Record of work carried out each day, and
(b)
Drawings showing the exact locations of caisson drains and the

final depths relative to PD.
(2)
Detailed face logs of caisson drains shall be kept by the Contractor
on the Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all
times. The logs shall contain the following information and the format
shall be as shown in Figure 10 of `Geoguide 2: Guide to Site
Investigation', Hong Kong Government 1987.
(a) Details of depths and rate of groundwater seepage,
(b) Details of water levels, including dates and details of
fluctuation,
(c) Four colour prints and one negative each of photographs or
composite photographs taken during excavation.
Each
excavation stage shall be photographed using a reference board
with maximum dimensions of 300 mm (width) by 450 mm
(length). The photographs shall cover all the excavated face
before the placing of caisson liners. Where more than one
photograph is required to cover the full excavated depth or
length of a face, the overlap between adjacent photographs
shall be between 10% and 20%.
Each photograph shall
identify the face of the excavation and shall contain a natural
scale and a colour comparison chart placed alongside the
excavated face. The minimum size of colour prints shall be
125 mm by 175 mm.
PREFABRICATED BAND DRAINS

Installation of
prefabricated band
drains
7.235
(1)
The installed location of prefabricated band drains shall be within
300 mm of the specified location in plan on the ground surface and the
drain shall be within 2% of the installed length to the vertical.
7.76
2006 Edition
(2)
Each prefabricated band drain shall be installed in one continuous
length without joints.
(3)
The depth of penetration of prefabricated band drains shall be as
stated in the Contract and modified as instructed by the Engineer during
installation based on the resistance of the soil to penetration. The
Engineer shall be notified immediately of any sudden change in the
penetration resistance to the mandrel.
GROUNDWATER CONTROL AND DRAWDOWN

Drawdown of
groundwater table
7.236
The groundwater table shall not be drawn down to more than 2 m below the
earthworks final surface to specification in Section 6 for excavation.
Dewatering
7.237
(1)
Dewatering shall be carried out in such a manner that no loss of
fines from the ground occurs.
(2)
Silt traps shall be provided and shall be regularly maintained. All
dewatering pumps shall discharge into silt traps.
(3)
Pumped groundwater shall not be discharged onto roads, footpaths,
kerb channels or adjacent land. All arrangements shall be made with and
the necessary approvals shall be obtained from the relevant authorities for
discharging water to drainage systems, watercourses or the sea.
Dewatering shall not start until the approved arrangements for disposal of
the water have been implemented. Water entering the Site shall not be
discharged into the same silt traps as are used for dewatering.
(4)
The total capacity of pumps available on the Site for dewatering
shall be at least equal to twice the rate of flow measured through the silt
traps at any time when the groundwater table is maintained at maximum
drawdown.
(5)
Half of the total pump capacity shall be equipped with a secondary
motive power source in addition to the primary motive power. The
secondary motive power source shall commence operation automatically in
the event of failure of the primary motive power source or an effective
alarm system shall be set up which will warn of failure of the primary
motive power source. The maximum allowable delay between failure of
the primary motive power source and full operation of the secondary
motive power source shall not exceed 15 minutes.
(6)
A full-time attendant shall be available on the Site at all times to
execute the changeover if manual operation of equipment is required to
bring the secondary motive power into operation.
(7)
The operation of the changeover of motive power equipment shall
be demonstrated before the relevant work starts unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.
Groundwater recharge
7.238
(1)
If groundwater recharge is to be carried out to maintain the specified
groundwater levels at any location, the groundwater recharge system shall
have the means to regulate and measure the rate of recharge and to provide
an adequate continuous supply of water for recharge. Only clean water
shall be used.
7.77
2006 Edition
(2)
The capacity of pumps and the power sources which are to be used
for groundwater recharge shall be as stated in Clause 7.237(4) except that
the rate of flow shall refer to the maximum rate of groundwater recharge
required.
(3)
The groundwater table at any location shall not be raised above the
background groundwater table measured before the relevant work starts.
Monitoring of
groundwater control
and drawdown
7.239
(1)
Monitoring of groundwater levels shall be carried out at locations
stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer at all times when
groundwater control and drawdown is carried out. Arrangements for
installing instruments and taking measurements both inside and outside the
Site shall be made by the Contractor.
(2)
The survey marks for monitoring shall be located in position and
level to the Hong Kong standard survey grid and to PD to within 10 mm in
every direction.
(3)
Monitoring stations and monitoring shall be as stated in Clauses
7.248 to 7.265.
(4)
Groundwater levels shall be measured to an accuracy of 20 mm.
Settlements shall be measured to an accuracy of 3 mm.
(5)
The Engineer shall be notified immediately if any incremental
settlement reading exceeds 5 mm or if the accumulated settlement exceeds
the maximum allowable settlement stated in the Contract.
Records of settlement,
groundwater control
and drawdown
7.240
Records of monitoring of settlement, groundwater control and drawdown

shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a copy shall be submitted to
the Engineer within 24 hours of taking readings.
TESTING: GRANULAR FILTER MATERIAL

Batch: granular filter
material
7.241
A batch of granular filter material is any quantity of granular filter material

of the same type and grading delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples: granular
filter material
7.242
(1)
One sample of granular filter material shall be provided from each
3
500 m or part thereof of the material delivered to the Site.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of granular
material shall be provided from each 500 m3 or part thereof of granular
filter material that has been deposited and compacted.
(3)
The size of each sample taken as stated in Clause 7.242(1) shall be
10 kg. The method of sampling shall be in accordance with BS 812: Part
102.
(4)
Samples taken as stated in Clause 7.242(2), shall consist of material
excavated from the compacted layer to form a flat bottomed, steep sided
hole of approximately 0.13 m2 to the complete depth of the compacted
layer. A template shall be used to fix the edges of the hole if necessary.
The sides and bottom of the hole shall be at least 50 mm from other types
of fill material.
7.78
2006 Edition
Testing: granular filter
material
7.243
(1)
Each sample of granular filter material shall be tested to determine
the particle size distribution.
(2)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with the wet sieving
method stated in Geospec 3, Test Method 8.2
Non-compliance:
granular filter
material
7.244
(1)
If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a sample of
granular filter material taken as stated in Clause 7.242(1) does not comply
with the specified requirements for particle size distribution, additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for
particle size distribution shall be carried out.
(2)
requirements for particle size distribution if the result of any additional test
for particle size distribution does not comply with the specified
requirements for particle size distribution.
(3)
If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a sample of
granular filter material taken as stated in Clause 7.242(2) does not comply
with the specified requirements for particle size distribution, additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for
particle size distribution shall be carried out.
(4)
requirements for particle size distribution if the result of any additional test
for particle size distribution does not comply with the specified
requirements for particle size distribution.
TESTING: FILL MATERIAL FOR TRENCH DRAINS

Batch: fill material for
trench drains
7.245
A batch of fill material for trench drains is any quantity of fill material for
trench drains of the same type delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples:
fill
material for trench
drains
7.246
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of fill
material for trench drains shall be provided from each batch of fill material
for trench drains delivered to the Site.
(2)
The size of each sample and the method of sampling shall be in
Testing:
fill
material for trench
drains
7.247
(1)
Each sample of fill material for trench drains shall be tested to
determine the particle size distribution. Fill material passing a 425 m BS
test sieve shall also be tested to determine the plasticity index.
(2)
The method of testing to determine the particle size distribution

shall be in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 8.2. The method of
testing to determine the plasticity index shall be in accordance with
Geospec 3, Test Method 6.1.
7.79
2006 Edition
PART 6: GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Datum station
7.248
Datum station is a mark for which horizontal or vertical values, or both,

have been fixed, and which is used as a datum for monitoring or control
surveys.
Geotechnical
instrumentation
7.249
Geotechnical instrumentation is the installation and monitoring of

instruments in the ground or structures to provide information on soil and
rock parameters, and to monitor specific variations in the condition of the
ground or structures for the purposes of geotechnical design, construction
control and performance monitoring.
Monitoring mark
7.250
Monitoring mark is a mark, fixed or installed, on a structure to be

monitored.
Reference point
7.251
Reference point is a mark placed close to another important survey mark to

aid recovery or replacement.
Survey station
7.252
Survey station is a mark on a stone, concrete, metal or wooden block, pipe,

peg or other item defining a surveyed position.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
geotechnical
instrumentation
7.253
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed
instrumentation shall be submitted to the Engineer:
geotechnical
(a)
Details of instruments and any alternative instruments proposed

by the Contractor,
(b)
Manufacturers specifications,
(c)
Test and calibration certificates,
(d)
Method of installation,
(e)
Method of acceptance testing,
(f)
Details of ancillary measuring equipment,
(g)
Schedule for installing instrumentation in relation to other

work,
(h)
Documents showing that the instruments are capable of

measuring within the ranges and accuracies stated in the
Contract,
(i)
Name and experience of persons responsible for installation,

testing and monitoring of instruments,
7.80
2006 Edition
(j)
Details of standpipe piezometer tips, including manufacturer's

specification, and
(k)
Details of the form of records.
(2)
least 28 days before installation of instrumentation starts.
GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Instruments for
geotechnical
instrumentation
7.254
INSTRUMENTATION
(1)
Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation and their accessories
shall be provided complete with all appropriate tubing, connections,
monitoring equipment, read-out units and any other tools necessary for the
installation calibration, setting to work and maintenance of the instruments.
(2)
Instruments shall be manufactured by companies with proven
experience and only instruments which are well proven and have been in
successful use shall be used, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Installed instruments shall become the property of the Employer.
Detachable tubing, connections, monitoring equipment and read-out units
shall become the property of the Contractor upon the expiry of the
Maintenance Period.
(4)
Instruments shall be handled, stored, installed and used in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and in such a manner that the
performance of the instruments will not be impaired.
(5)
Instruments shall be protected from damage and measures shall be
taken to ensure that the instruments suffer the minimum practicable amount
of disturbance.
(6)
Instruments shall be calibrated by a laboratory approved by the
Engineer. Instruments shall be calibrated at intervals recommended by the
manufacturer and at other intervals instructed by the Engineer. Calibration
certificates shall be provided to the Engineer within 24 hours of calibration.
(7)
Installation, testing and monitoring of the instruments shall be carried
out under the supervision of a suitably qualified technician. Particulars of
the technician, including qualifications and experience, shall be submitted to
the Engineer at least 7 days before commencement of work relating to
geotechnical instrumentation.
Location and
arrangement of
instruments
7.255
(1)
The locations and arrangement of instruments for geotechnical
instrumentation shall be as stated in the Contract or as agreed with the
Engineer before installation.
(2)
The positions and alignments of instruments shall be recorded after
installation and surveys shall be carried out at times and frequencies agreed
by the Engineer to detect any displacement of the instruments.
(3)
At least two reference points shall be established for each survey
station or monitoring mark.
7.81
2006 Edition
(4)
The survey station that has the least chance of being disturbed shall
be selected as datum station. The datum station shall be stainless steel and
shall be protected from damage. At least three reference points shall be
established for each datum station.
(5)
The survey network shall be related to the territorial control points
provided by the Engineer.
Installation of
instruments
7.256
(1)
The Engineer shall be informed 24 hours, or such shorter period
agreed by the Engineer, before the installation of each instrument for
geotechnical instrumentation starts.
(2)
Instruments shall be installed, fixed and protected in a manner which
will ensure that the instruments will function satisfactorily. Tests shall be
carried out after installation to demonstrate that the instruments have been
correctly installed and are functioning correctly. Instruments that are not
correctly installed or are not functioning correctly shall be reinstalled or
replaced as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
All installed instruments, tubes and wires shall be clearly marked
with a unique and conspicuous identification number.
Tubes and cables for

instruments
7.257
(1)
Tubes and cables attached to instruments for geotechnical
instrumentation for remote reading shall be impervious to air and water, and
shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to withstand the internal and
external pressures. Tubes and cables shall be protected from mechanical
damage and from the harmful effects of direct sunlight, heat and ultra violet
radiation at all times.
(2)
Tubes and cables shall be free of defects and shall be marked with
identification colours and numbers at 5 m intervals. The tubes and cables
shall be wound onto reels in such a manner that kinks are not formed and
strain is not induced. Open ends of tubes and cables shall be blocked with
stop ends at all times.
(3)
Tubes and cables shall be buried at least 0.5 m below ground level.
(4)
Tubes and cables shall be laid with sufficient slack, loops and bends
to allow for settlement and other ground movements. The routing of tubes
and cables shall be as agreed by the Engineer and shall be in straight lines
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The radius of bends shall be
at least 300 mm. Each tube or cable shall be laid from the measuring
instrument to the terminal duct in one continuous length without joints.
Maintenance of
instruments
7.258
(1)
Instruments for geotechnical instrumentation shall be maintained in
good working order until the expiry of Maintenance Period. Instruments,
survey marks and stations shall be protected by suitable barricades, notices,
signs, marker-buoys or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Construction shall be carried out in a manner that will avoid damage to the
instruments.
(2)
The Engineer shall be informed immediately of any instruments
found damaged or instruments found not to be in working order.
Replacements shall be installed for read-out units that are faulty or under
repair.
7.82
2006 Edition
Records of
geotechnical
instrumentation
7.259
(1)
Records of activities relating to installation of geotechnical
instrumentation shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and a copy shall
be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of installation of the
instrument is complete.
(2)
A drawing showing the locations and identification of installed
instruments shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer within 24 hours of installation of the instrument is complete.
(3)
A drawing showing the locations and details of survey stations,
monitoring marks and reference points shall be prepared by the Contractor
and submitted to the Engineer not more than 3 days after the survey network
has been established.
MONITORING AND RECORDING

Recording readings
7.260
(1)
Instrument readings and processed data for geotechnical
instrumentation shall be recorded by the Contractor on agreed record sheets,
and shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of recording. The
form of record sheets shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer, readings shall be taken in the presence of the
Engineer.
(2)
Initial readings shall be taken immediately after the instruments have
been installed and after the effects of installation have subsided. The initial
readings shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall form the basis of
comparison of subsequent readings. The instruments and the initial
readings shall be replaced if the initial readings are not repeatable.
(3)
The frequencies for reading instruments shall be as agreed with the
Engineer. The Engineer shall be informed immediately of sudden or
significant changes in the readings.
(4)
All installed instruments shall be left in correctly functioning
condition after final readings have been taken or at the end of the
Maintenance Period. Keys for locks shall be tagged to identify the
instrument number and shall be handed over to the Engineer.
SETTLEMENT PLATES
Installation of
settlement plates
7.261
(1)
Settlement plates for geotechnical instrumentation shall be securely
founded on level ground free of obstructions and shall be immediately
surveyed for level and position and plotted on a plan.
(2)
Settlement plates shall be protected from damage and shall be kept
in position by a 600 mm thick layer of granular fill material or bags of
sand which shall be placed by manual methods and shall extend 600 mm
beyond the edges of the plate. The initial survey of levels and positions
shall be taken immediately after the fill material or bags of sand have been
placed.
7.83
2006 Edition
(3)
The metal rod fixed to the centre of the plate shall be in an upright
position, and protected by a tubular sleeve. The sleeve and the metal rod
shall be extended as fill material is placed such that at any time the sleeve
and rod are at least 500 mm above the level of the surrounding fill material
or high water mark, and the metal rod is within 2% of the embedded
length to the vertical.
(4)
The level of the top of the metal rod shall be recorded immediately
before and immediately after each extension piece is added.
Marker-buoys shall be fixed to the tops of tubular sleeves installed in
water, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
TILTMETER SYSTEM
Installation of tiltmeter
system
7.262
(1)
Tilt-plates for geotechnical instrumentation shall be orientated to
correspond with the specified direction of measurement and fixed in place
on the rock or structure. The installed direction shall be recorded to an
accuracy of 3.
(2)
A protective cap or cover shall be fitted to protect the tilt-plates
from damage.
(3)
Tilt-plates and the tiltmeter shall be cleaned and inspected for
damage before readings are taken. The tiltmeter shall be accurately
located on the tilt-plate and a reading taken. The tiltmeter shall then be
removed and the contact surface recleaned. The procedure shall be
repeated until consistent readings are obtained. The tiltmeter shall then
be rotated through 180 and the procedures repeated.
(4)
The accuracy of the tiltmeter and its readout system shall be
checked both before and after the readings taken each day. Instrument
errors shall be investigated and immediately corrected. A record of
calibrations and adjustments shall be submitted to the Engineer together
with the monitoring data.
TELLTALES
Installation of telltales
7.263
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer telltales for geotechnical

instrumentation shall be as shown in Figure 10.5 of `The Geotechnical
Manual for Slopes', Hong Kong Government, 1984. Telltales shall be
rigidly fixed across cracks to enable any movement across the cracks to be
determined. Telltales shall be labelled and marked with the date of
installation.
STANDPIPE PIEZOMETERS
Standpipe piezometers
7.264
Standpipe piezometer tips for geotechnical instrumentation shall be porous

ceramic or plastic material at least 200 mm long and with a bore of at least
19 mm. The permeability shall be at least 10-4 m/s. The piezometer tip
shall be connected to rigid PVC standpipes with a bore of at least 19 mm
7.84
2006 Edition
and with a wall thickness of at least 3 mm. The standpipes shall be jointed
together and to the porous tips in such a manner that the joints remain
leak-proof under the anticipated head of water.
Installation of
standpipe piezometers
7.265
(1)
Standpipe piezometers for geotechnical instrumentation shall be
installed in drillholes at the depths instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
The sand filter surrounding the piezometer tip shall be between 1000
mm and 1500 mm long and shall consist of sand between the sizes of 200
m and 1210 m. Measurements shall be made to determine the actual
location of the sand filter column.
(3)
A seal shall be formed above the sand filter by placing 500 mm of
bentonite pellets of between 10 mm and 15 mm in size. The pellets shall
be placed in the hole and tamped with a suitably shaped tamper to form a
homogeneous plug to the hole.
(4)
If the depth of the completed hole is greater than the depth at which
the piezometer tip and sand filter are to be placed, the bottom of the
drillhole shall be grouted with grout consisting of cement and bentonite in
the proportions 1:1 by mass together with sufficient water to achieve the
required workability. The drillhole above the plug shall be grouted with the
same type of material.
(5)
The water level in the piezometer shall be measured after the
standpipe piezometer has been installed and the standpipe shall be topped up
with clean water. The rate of drop of water level or pressure head shall be
recorded at times of 0, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, 30 minutes or until the water
has returned to its initial level.
(6)
The water level shall be measured by an electrical type water level
probe agreed by the Engineer. The water shall be salted if necessary for
response to the probe.
(7)
Measurements of the depth of piezometer tip and sand filter and the
readings taken as stated in Clause 7.265(6) shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval within 24 hours of completion of installation of the
piezometer standpipe.
7.85
2006 Edition
PART 7: SLOPE AND RETAINING WALL RECORD

SURVEY
GENERAL
Scope
7.266
A survey of all slopes and retaining walls formed, modified or partially

modified under the Contract shall be conducted and completed upon their
completion or at any other time as appropriate during the construction
period. Such survey shall be completed upon the substantial completion of
the Works as certified by the Engineer.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of slope
and retaining wall
record survey
7.267
(1) The following particulars of the slope and retaining wall record survey
shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
All necessary details of the subject slopes and retaining walls as

required by the Engineer, including details of the extent of new
fill body of a fill slope as appropriate, recorded on a plan of
1:1000 scale showing the locations with graphical boundaries
appropriately highlighted and referenced to the HK1980 Grid,
and
(b)
A soft copy of the plan as stated in Clause 7.267(1)(a) prepared

in a format as specified in the Contract.
(2) The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 28
days, or such other time stated in the Contract, after completion of the slope
and retaining wall record survey as agreed by the Engineer.
7.86
2006 Edition
PART 8: PAINTING TO CONCRETE / SPRAYED

CONCRETE SURFACES
MATERIALS
7.268
Paint for concrete/
sprayed concrete surfaces
Paint for concrete/sprayed concrete surfaces shall be water-based paint for

external use. The components of paint shall not be toxic or hazardous to
health.
SUBMISSION
Particulars of paint
7.269
Details of paint products (e.g. specification and colour samples etc.) and
method statement shall be submitted for the Engineers approval prior to
painting. The colour of paint shall be Antique to BS 5252F: 2004
colour code 10B25 or other colour as directed by the Engineer.
PAINTING TO CONCRETE
CONCRETE SURFACES
7.270
Painting to concrete/
sprayed concrete surfaces
SPRAYED
(1)
The surface of concrete/sprayed concrete shall be prepared prior to
applying the paint. The surface to be painted shall be clean, free of
contaminants such as oils, grease, release agents, mortar splashes etc. All
debris and loose materials shall be removed from the surface. Painting
shall not be carried out in direct strong sunlight, hot windy conditions or in
an environment with excessive dust.
(2)
Paint shall be stored in accordance with Section 24 and shall be
mixed in accordance with the manufacturers instruction prior to
application. Two coats of paint shall be applied to the surface. Each coat of
paint shall be applied using an airless spray at 12 m2/litre or equivalent to
obtain a uniform finish or as recommended by the manufacturer. Sufficient
time gap shall be allowed between the applications of first and second
coating as recommended by the manufacturer. Each coating shall be
protected from rain for the first 24 hours after application.
7.87
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 7.1
DYNAMIC PROBE TEST
Scope
7.1.1
This method covers the determination of the penetration resistance of soil

using the dynamic probe.
Apparatus
7.1.2
Procedure
7.1.3
7.1.4
(a)
Dynamic Probe as shown in Figure 36 of `Geoguide 2: Guide to Site

Investigation,' Hong Kong Government 1987. The anvils shall be
rigidly fixed to the guide rod; the lower anvil shall also be rigidly
fixed to the extension rods. The mass of the lower anvil shall be 1.5
kg to 1.8 kg. The combined mass of the anvils and guide rod shall
not exceed 5.0 kg.
(b)
Extension rods with a length of 1000 mm 10 mm. The rods shall

be attached to bear against each other by means of external couplers.

(a)
The lower end of the probe shall be rested against the ground at the
test location, with the first extension rod and guide rod in a vertical
position.
(b)
The hammer shall be raised to bear against the upper anvil, and shall
be allowed to fall freely. It shall not be connected to objects which
may influence its acceleration and deceleration, and shall be
stationary when released in the upper position. The fall shall be 300
mm 5 mm.
(c)
The hammer shall be used to drive the probe into the ground, with a
rate of driving between 20 and 60 blows per minute.
(d)
Additional extension rods shall be added as necessary. The rods shall

be rotated clockwise one full turn each time a rod is added to ensure
that screw joints are tight.
(e)
The blow count for every 100 mm of penetration shall be recorded,

or at refusal the penetration distance for 50 blows of the hammer.
Interruptions exceeding 5 minutes shall be recorded.
(f)
If any obstruction to the probe is encountered which cannot be

penetrated over 100 mm by 100 blows of the driving hammer, then
that probe shall be considered to have reached refusal and the test
shall be terminated.

(a)
Blow count for every 100 mm penetration or at refusal the

penetration distance for 50 blows of the hammer.
(b)
Interruptions exceeding 5 minutes.
(c)
Dynamic probe record (Figure 37 of Geoguide 2).
(d)
That the test was carried out in accordance with this Specification.
7.88
2006 Edition
7.89
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 8
PILING WORKS
8.1
2006 Edition
8.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 8
PILING WORKS
GENERAL
8.01
with the Sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this Section. In
accordance with Clauses 1.11 and 1.12 of Section 1, the Contractor shall
employ on the Site in connection with execution of the piling works a
Construction Engineer and a Construction Supervisor who shall be full
time on site to supervise the piling works.
Earthworks
8.02
Reinforcement
8.03
Steel reinforcement shall comply with Section 15.
Concrete
8.04
Materials for grout
8.05
Materials for grout for piling works shall comply with Section 16.
Grouting
8.06
Grouting for piling works shall comply with Section 17.
Prestressing
8.07
Prestressing shall comply with Section 17.
Steelwork
8.08
Steelwork shall comply with Section 18.
Marine works
8.09
Marine works shall comply with Section 21.
Code of practice for

piling works
8.10
Piling works shall comply with the BS 8004, except as stated in this
Section.
Safety of piling works
8.11
Reference shall be made to the following documents regarding matters

relating to the safety of piling works:
Code of Practice for Foundations
: BS 8004
Code of Practice for Safety

Precautions in the Construction of
Large Diameter Boreholes for Piling
and Other Purposes
: BS 5573
Section 7 of `Guidance Notes on Hand-Dug Caissons'

Hong Kong Institution of Engineers,1981
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Hand-dug caisson
8.12
A hand-dug caisson is a pile shaft which is excavated manually and which

is unlined, or lined with a ring wall following each incremental advance of
the excavation, or partly unlined and partly lined.
8.3
2006 Edition
Barrette and
Diaphragm Walls
8.13
(1) A barrette is a pile that is excavated using grabs and chisels through a
thixotropic suspension of bentonite or other agent which supports the sides
of the shaft as excavation proceeds, and which is concreted in one
continuous operation.
(2) A diaphragm wall is a continuous wall consisting of a series of
abutting reinforced concrete panels constructed in a trench temporarily
supported by a thixotropic suspension of bentonite or other agent. It
may be used as a temporary wall for supporting deep excavation, or used
as the permanent wall for a basement structure, and may be used as a
foundation system for supporting vertical loads.
Amd 1/2010
Large-diameter bored
piles and socketted
steel H-piles
8.14
(1)
A large-diameter bored pile is a bored pile, the diameter of which
is larger than 750 mm and determined by the Contract Drawings and/or
proposed by the Contractor to the Engineers approval.
Amd 1/2010
(2)
Socketted steel H-piles are piles formed by inserting steel H-piles
in pre-bored holes sunk into Grade III or better rock, and subsequently
filling the holes with cement grout.
Minipile
8.15
A minipile is a pile with a diameter of less than 250 mm in which the

load-bearing element consists of a steel tube or one or more steel
reinforcement bars.
Founding rock
8.16
"Founding rock" includes "founding rock or stratum" if the pile does not
reach rock level, and "concrete/rock interface" shall be construed
accordingly.
MATERIALS
Steel piles
8.17
(1)
Steel bearing piles and steel sheet piles shall comply with BS 5950:
Part 2.
(2)
Steel sheet piles shall be of a proprietary section approved by the
Engineer.
Pile shoes
8.18
(1)
Cast iron pile shoes for precast concrete piles shall be manufactured
from chill hardened iron as used for making grey iron castings complying
with BS EN 1561, Grade EN-GJL-150. The chilled iron point of the shoe
shall be free of major blow-holes and other surface defects.
Amd 4/2010
(2)
Steel pile shoes for precast concrete piles shall be manufactured
from steel complying with BS 4360, Grade 43A.
(3)
Cast steel pile shoes for precast concrete piles shall be manufactured
from steel complying with BS EN 10293, Grade A.
Amd 4/2010
(4)
Straps and fastenings for cast pile shoes for precast concrete piles
shall be manufactured from steel complying with BS 4360, Grade 43A and
shall be cast into the point of the shoe to form an integral part of the shoe.
(5)
Pile shoes for driven cast-in-place piles shall be manufactured from
durable materials approved by the Engineer and capable of withstanding
driving stresses without damage. The shoes shall be designed to provide a
watertight joint with permanent casings.
8.4
2006 Edition
(6)
Cast steel pile shoes for steel bearing piles shall be manufactured
from steel complying with BS EN 10293, Grade A.
Amd 4/2010
(7)
Welded fabricated pile shoes for steel bearing piles shall be
manufactured from steel complying with BS 4360, Grade 43A.
Epoxy based paint for epoxy coatings to steel piles shall be a proprietary
Epoxy paint
8.19
Bituminous coating
material
8.20
Bituminous coating material for steel piles shall be hot-applied filled or

unfilled bituminous material complying with BS 4147.
Grout for piling works
8.21
(1)
Grout for piling works shall consist of Portand cement (PC) and
water. Sand, PFA and admixtures may be used with the approval of the
Engineer.
(2)
The minimum cementitious content of grout shall be 600 kg/m3,
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
Grout used to fill core holes shall have a minimum crushing strength
of not less than the specified grade strength of the concrete surrounding the
core hole.
(4)
Grout used in minipiles shall have a minimum crushing strength of
30 MPa at 28 days.
(5)
The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 2% in the first 3
hours and shall not exceed 4% in total. The water shall be reabsorbed by
the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
(6)
Free expansion of grout shall not exceed 10% at the ambient
temperature.
(7)
The chloride ion content of admixtures for concrete containing
embedded metal or for concrete made with SRPC shall not exceed 2% by
mass of the admixture or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content,
whichever is less.
(8)
The maximum total chloride content of grout, expressed as a
percentage relationship between the chloride ion and the cementitious
content by mass in the grout, shall not exceed 0.1%.
Reinforcement
connectors
8.22
Reinforcement connectors for minipiles shall be capable of transmitting the

total pile load in tension or compression as appropriate.
SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEEL PILES

Surface treatment of
steel piles
8.23
(1)
Surface preparation and application of protective coatings other than
bituminous coatings to steel piles shall be carried out in a fully enclosed
well-ventilated workshop.
(2)
The method of application of protective coatings to steel piles, the
ambient temperature and humidity at the time of application and the time
interval between the application of successive coats shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. The complete coating shall be
applied in and around clutches.
8.5
2006 Edition
Surface preparation of
steel piles
8.24
The surfaces of steel piles to which protective coatings will be applied shall
be prepared by blast cleaning to second quality of surface finish in
accordance with BS 4232 or Sa 2 in accordance with SIS 05 59 00.
Epoxy coatings to steel

piles
8.25
(1)
Epoxy coatings to steel piles shall consist of three coats of epoxybased paint, each coat having a minimum dry film thickness of 75 m.
The first coat shall be applied within two hours of blast cleaning.
(2)
The finished surface of epoxy coatings shall be smooth with a dense
and uniform texture and shall be free of sharp protuberances and pinholes.
The thickness and continuity of completed epoxy coatings shall be
measured using a magnetic thickness gauge or by other methods agreed by
the Engineer.
(3)
Damaged areas of epoxy coatings shall be repaired by cleaning the
damaged areas to bare metal, feathering back the adjacent areas with coarse
grade sandpaper and re-applying the coating.
Bituminous coatings
to steel piles
8.26
(1)
Bituminous coating material, or primer if the bituminous coating
consists of a built-up system, to steel piles shall be applied within two hours of
blast cleaning. The thickness of bituminous coatings shall be at least 300 m.
(2)
Damaged areas of bituminous coatings shall be over-coated with the
same bituminous coating material to restore the specified thickness.
Surface treatment of
extended steel piles
8.27
The splice areas of steel piles, which are extended in-situ, shall be prepared
by blast cleaning and the protective coating shall be applied to the area.
Steel piles for marine works shall be spliced and the surface treatment
applied to the splice areas before the piles are driven unless otherwise
Removal of protective
coatings to steel piles
8.28
Protective coatings shall be removed from the heads of steel piles which
will be encased in concrete by blast cleaning, flame cleaning or by other
methods agreed by the Engineer. The coatings shall be removed to a level
of 75 mm above the underside of the concrete into which the pile will be
encased.
8.6
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of piling
works
8.29
(1)
construction for piling works shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of construction plant,
(b)
Methods and sequence of installation of piles, including

methods of avoiding damage to adjacent piles, structures and
utilities and measures to be taken to deal with hard material
and obstructions,
(c)
Calculations of driving stresses,
(d)
Methods of jointing and lengthening piles,
(e)
Methods of
treatment,
(f)
Anticipated ground vibration, ground movement and

groundwater drawdown and methods of instrumentation and
monitoring,
Methods and sequence of excavation, including methods of
supporting excavations and of cleaning the excavation,
(g)
controlling
groundwater,
or
groundwater
(h)
Methods of concreting,
(i)
Details of protective coatings to steel piles, including

manufacturers' literature,
(j)
Details of preliminary piles, and
(k)
Methods of testing, including details of the specialist firm for

non-destructive testing of welds and the programme for
integrity testing.
(2)
before the relevant preliminary piles are constructed. If preliminary piles
are not required, the particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least
21 days before the relevant piling works start.
Particulars of
construction using
bentonite slurry
8.30
(1)
construction using a slurry containing bentonite or other agent shall be
(a)
A certificate for bentonite showing the type, the manufacturer's

name, the date and place of manufacture and including details
of the apparent viscosity range in Pa.s and the gel strength
range in N/m2 for solids in water,
(b)
Characteristics of the bentonite slurry in a freshly mixed

condition and in the excavation immediately before concreting,
(c)
Methods of quality control, sampling, testing, mixing, storing,

8.7
2006 Edition
recirculating, removing silt and sand, preventing spillages and
disposal from the Site,
(d)
Head of bentonite slurry, including stability calculations,
(e)
Details of guide walls,
(f)
Methods of placing concrete by tremie, and
(g)
Sequence of construction.
(2)
before the relevant excavation starts.
Particulars of
hand-dug caissons
8.31
Particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for

hand-dug caissons, including details of linings, shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 21 days before the relevant excavation starts.
Particulars of
minipiles
8.32
(1)
construction for minipiles shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of reinforcement or pipe section, including spacers and

couplings,
(b)
Details of grout mix as stated in Clause 17.13, and
(c)
Sequence and timing of grouting, including details of

secondary pressure grouting.
(2)
before trial mixes for grout are made.

of piles
8.33
(1)
The identification number, grade of steel and length of pile shall be
marked on steel piles. The identification number, date of casting and
length of pile shall be marked on precast concrete piles.
(2)
Piles shall be stored horizontally off the ground on level supports
and in a manner, which will not result in damage or deformation to the
piles, or in contamination of the piles. Coated piles shall be handled and
stored in a manner, which will not result in damage to the coatings.
Bituminous- coated piles shall not be stacked.
(3)

of bentonite
8.34
Different types and sizes of piles shall be stored separately.
Bentonite shall be handled and stored in a manner, which will not result in
spillages on the Site.
GENERAL PILING WORKS REQUIREMENTS

8.8
2006 Edition
Commencement of
piling works
8.35
Piling works, including groundwater control and ground treatment for

piling works, shall not commence until the relevant proposed materials and
methods of construction, including construction and testing of preliminary
piles, have been approved.
Prevention of damage
due to piling works
8.36
(1)
The position of existing utilities shall be determined and
underground utilities adjacent to the piles shall be exposed or otherwise
accurately located before piling works start.
(2)
All necessary measures shall be taken to minimise the settlement of
the ground and adjacent structures and utilities and to prevent the formation
of cavities in the ground resulting from piling works.
(3)
The vibrations due to piling works at structures, utilities and
previously installed piles measured in terms of peak particle velocity shall
not exceed 25 mm/s.
(4)
The vibrations due to piling works at structures, utilities and
previously installed piles measured in terms of vibration amplitude shall
not exceed 0.2 mm.
Monitoring of noise,
vibration, ground
movement and
groundwater level
8.37
(1)
Measurements of noise level, vibration, ground movement and
groundwater level shall be taken at locations and time intervals stated in the
Contract or instructed by the Engineer when piling works are being carried
out. Records of the measurements shall be kept and a copy of the records
supplied to the Engineer. Arrangements for installing instruments and
taking measurements both inside and outside the Site shall be made by the
Contractor.
(2)
Measurements of noise level and vibration shall be made with
instruments of a type agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Sufficient numbers of piezometers and survey points shall be
installed to allow the changing groundwater levels and the effects on
structures, utilities and previously installed piles to be measured.
Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals when groundwater control
is carried out and until such time as the groundwater has resumed its natural
regime.
(4)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer immediately of any
unanticipated change in measurements.
(5)
If the specified limits, or limits agreed by the Engineer, on vibration,
groundwater movement or groundwater level are exceeded, the work
causing the limits to be exceeded shall be stopped and particulars of
proposed changes to the methods of construction shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
Ground investigation
for piling works
8.38
(1)
Before piling works start, boreholes of minimum NX size shall be
sunk and piezometers shall be installed at locations stated in the Contract or
instructed by the Engineer to determine the soil characteristics and the
groundwater regime and to determine the founding level of
non-displacement cast-in-situ piles.
(2)
Soil samples and rock samples stated in the Contract or instructed by
the Engineer shall be taken from pile excavations for visual inspection and
testing. The method of sampling and testing shall be as stated in Section 7.
8.9
2006 Edition
Ground investigation
for piles founded on
rock
8.39
All ground investigation for piles founded on rock, including pre-drilling

and proof-drilling as well as any core-drilling on the constructed piles,
shall be carried out by an independent Specialist Contractor for Public
Works registered under the Work Category of "Ground Investigation
Field Work", who is required to make a declaration that it is not a holding
company, a subsidiary company, an associated company or a related party
of the Contractor or any of his sub-contractors responsible for the piles
for which the ground investigation is carried out, and that it has no
financial interests in the piling works to be tested.
Amd 1/2007
Pre-drilling for piles

founded on rock
8.40
(1)
For piles founded on rock, sufficient pre-drilling should be carried
out before the installation works, such that the quality of the founding
rock can be identified and the appropriate founding levels can be
determined. The pre-drilling should be sunk to at least 5m below the
tentative founding rock levels of the piles.
(2)
Pre-drilling should be carried out for each of the large-diameter
bored piles, barrettes and the like. For minipiles, socketted steel H-piles
and similar small diameter-bored piles, founding on rock, the number of
pre-drill boreholes required should be such that the pile tip of every such
pile should be within 5 metres from a pre-drill hole, or at a larger distance
from it as decided by the Engineer.
(3)
For a load-bearing diaphragm wall, predrill holes shall be sunk at 4
m centres along the diaphragm wall to establish founding level or one
predrill hole per panel, whichever spacing is larger, but not greater than
10 m in any circumstance. For non-load bearing diaphragm wall, at
least one predrill hole shall be sunk per 10m in spacing.
Amd 1/2010
Founding levels
8.41
(1)
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the material at the
proposed founding level and shall inform the Engineer immediately the
founding level is reached.
(2)
If instructed by the Engineer the founding level shall be proved by
drilling to a depth of 4.5 m or three times the pile diameter, whichever is
greater, below the founding level and obtaining samples of NX size.
PRELIMINARY PILES
Preliminary piles
8.42
(1)
Preliminary piles shall be constructed using the materials and
methods of construction proposed for the working piles and which have
been submitted to the Engineer. The location and details of preliminary
piles shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the relevant piling
works shall not commence until the construction, testing and records of the
preliminary piles stated in the contract or instructed by the Engineer have
been approved.
(3)
Preliminary piles shall be left in position, cut off, incorporated in
the permanent work or withdrawn and disposed of as stated in the Contract.
Preliminary piles intended to be incorporated in the permanent work and
which do not comply with the specified requirements shall be removed and
disposed of or dealt with as instructed by the Engineer.
8.10
2006 Edition
DRIVEN PILES
Supports for driven
piles
8.43
(1)
Driven piles shall be supported and restrained by means of leaders,
trestles, temporary supports or other guide arrangements in such a manner
that:
(a)
The piles are maintained in position and alignment,
(b)
The piles are not loosened in the ground, and
(c)
Damage resulting from oscillation, vibration or movement of

free-standing piles does not occur.
The supports and restraints shall be maintained at all times during driving
and until the piles are incorporated into the structure.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, driven piles for marine
works shall be driven from fixed stagings. The stagings shall be rigid and
strong enough to ensure that the piling works can be carried out efficiently
and accurately.
Use of diesel hammer
8.44
The use of diesel hammer for percussive piling is prohibited.
Followers
8.45
Followers or long dollies shall not be used unless permitted by the

Engineer. If permitted, the set shall be revised by the Contractor and
agreed by the Engineer, to allow for the reduction in effectiveness of the
hammer blows.
Marking of piles
8.46
Piles, including temporary and permanent casings, shall be marked at 1 m

intervals before pitching.
Driving piles
8.47
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer each pile, other than
sheet piles, shall be driven without interruption until the required depth or
set has been achieved. If a minimum depth of penetration is stated in the
Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for
achieving this requirement and it shall be his responsibility to ensure that
the minimum penetration and set are achieved without causing damage to
the pile.
(2)
The sequence and method of driving piles shall be such as to
minimise the detrimental effects of heave and lateral displacement of the
ground and to cause the least possible displacement to previously installed
piles. Piles, including casings, shall not be driven within a centre to centre
distance of 3 m or five times the diameter of the pile or casing, whichever is
less, from an unfilled excavation or from an uncased concrete pile which
has been cast for less than 48 hours.
(3)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay of any
sudden change in driving characteristics.
Driving concrete piles
8.48
(1)
Concrete piles shall not be driven until the concrete has attained the
8.11
2006 Edition
specified grade strength.
(2)
The driving stresses in precast reinforced concrete piles and
prestressed concrete piles shall not exceed one half of the specified grade
strength of the concrete. Calculations of the driving stresses shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
Displaced piles
8.49
Piles that have been displaced as a result of driving adjacent piles shall be
corrected. Particulars of the method of correction and measures to be
taken to avoid displacement in subsequent driving shall be submitted to the
Re-drive checks
8.50
No re-drive checks shall be carried out within 24 hours of completion of

first driving.
Lengthening driven
piles
8.51
The strength of piles at joints shall not be less than the strength at any
normal section of the pile. Lengthened piles shall not be driven until the
joint has developed the designed strength. Pile joints shall be tested as
stated in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
8.12
2006 Edition
Measurement of set of
driven piles
8.52
(1)
Set shall be measured for each driven pile at times agreed by the
Engineer and in the presence of the Engineer. The final set shall be
measured as either:
(a)
Penetration per 10 blows, or
(b)
The number of blows required to produce 25 mm penetration.
(2)
If driving is interrupted for more than 30 minutes, except as
otherwise agreed by the Engineer, set shall not be measured after driving
restarts until at least 20 blows of the same driving energy as at final set
have been struck.
(3)
(4)
When final set is measured:

(a)
The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition without

damage or distortion,
(b)
The dolly and packing shall be in sound condition,
(c)
The hammer blow shall be in line with the axis of the pile and
the impact surfaces shall be flat and at right angles to the axes
of the pile and hammer, and
(d)
The hammer shall be in good condition and operating

correctly.
The temporary compression of each driven pile shall be measured.
(5)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 1 hour before final
set and temporary compression are to be measured.
CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES

Excavation for
cast-in-situ piles
8.53
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 8.54, excavation for cast-in-situ concrete
piles shall be carried out by mechanical methods. Blasting and
compressed air shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
Large-diameter bored piles shall be formed by boring, chiseling or
grabbing and filled with concrete. Piles with enlarged bases shall not be
used unless specified otherwise. Where so permitted, the enlarged base
shall only be formed by under-reaming with a reverse circulation drill.
The relevant technique shall have been approved by the Engineer.
Amd 1/2007
(2)
The stability of excavations for cast-in-situ concrete piles shall be
maintained where necessary by:
(a)
Temporary casings,
(b)
Permanent casings, or
(c)
A thixotropic slurry containing bentonite or other agent.
(3)
The bottom of casings shall be kept sufficiently deep to prevent the
flow of soil into the casing.
8.13
2006 Edition
HAND-DUG CAISSONS
Excavation for
hand-dug caissons
8.54
(1)
The Contractor shall adopt a method of construction that will only
cause minimum settlement or disturbance of any kind to adjacent
structures, pavements, public or private services. The Contractor shall
establish an approved monitoring system and take regular readings and
prepare and submit reports to the Engineer in the format and quantity as
requested. The Contractor shall modify the method of construction if
the effects of ground movement are detected in any such structures,
pavements and services.
Amd 1/2007
(2) The minimum clear working space inside a caisson (i.e. excluding
the lining) shall not be less than 1.8m diameter. Caissons with an
enlarged base shall not be used unless otherwise specified.
(3)
Excavation for hand-dug caissons shall be carried out using manual
methods or power tools. Blasting shall not be used unless permitted by
the Engineer. If blasting is permitted:
(a)
The position of blast holes and the size of charges shall be such
that shattering of rock beyond the caisson is minimised,
(b)
The rock face shall not be shattered within the toe-in or

bell-out zone at the bottom of the caisson, and
(c)
The caisson opening shall be covered to prevent the projection

of fragments of material.
(4)
The stability of excavations for hand-dug caissons shall be
maintained where necessary by linings.
(5)
In-situ concrete tapered rings used as permanent liners shall be at
least 100 mm thick and shall not exceed 1 m deep. The rings shall be
constructed with well-compacted concrete of Grade 20/20 or greater.
(6)
Shaft linings shall be placed as soon as practicable and not more
than 24 hours after each increment of excavation is complete.
(7)
Voids between the lining and face of the excavation shall be filled
with concrete of the same grade as the lining or with other materials agreed
by the Engineer.
(8) Any unstable layers of subsoil encountered shall be stabilized by
grouting or similar methods. No further excavation will be permitted
until the stabilization works are completed.
Sealing and scaling of
hand-dug caissons
8.55
(1)
Leakage of groundwater through liners or into unlined shafts of
hand-dug caissons shall be stopped by a method agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
Loose rock on the faces of unlined shafts shall be scaled off and
removed before concreting.
8.14
2006 Edition
BARRETTES
Excavation for
barrettes
8.56
(1)
Excavation for barrettes shall be carried out by mechanical methods.
Blasting shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(2)
The stability of excavations for barrettes shall be maintained by a
thixotropic slurry containing bentonite or other agent.
(3)
The height of guide walls for barrettes shall be such that the head of
slurry is sufficient to ensure the stability of excavations and that excessive
movements of the adjacent ground will not occur. The position, alignment and
level of guide walls shall be checked at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
Diaphragm wall panels and barrettes shall not be excavated within
a distance of 6m or equivalent to 3 times the smallest dimension of the
panel or pile section (max. 8.4 m), from other deep foundation works
which have been cast within 12 hrs and/or which contain workable or
partially set concrete, unless they are separated by other deep concrete
foundations completed for over 14 days or when their concrete has
achieved 70% of the design strength, whichever is earlier.
Amd 1/2010
(4)
MINIPILES
Excavation for
minipiles
8.57
(1)
The stability of excavations for minipiles shall be maintained where
necessary by temporary casings or by other methods approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Temporary casings shall be used if excavation is carried out by wash
boring methods or when water or air is used as a flushing medium.
(3)
The pressure of the water or air that is used as a flushing medium
shall be regulated frequently to ensure that it does not induce significant
disturbance to the surrounding geological strata, or cause hydraulic
fracture of the ground.
(4)
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract or instructed by the
Engineer, mini-piles are to be socketed into Grade III rock or better with
minimum total core recovery of not less than 90%. Minimum length of
rock socket for the piles is shown on the Drawings or determined on Site
by the Engineer.
Grouting trials for

minipiles
8.58
Grouting trials shall be carried out to demonstrate accurate control of

water/cement ratio, consistency of mixing, satisfactory workability and
achievement of strength requirements. The trial shall be carried out on
one minipile which is representative of those which will be used in the
permanent work and at a location agreed by the Engineer.
CONSTRUCTION USING BENTONITE SLURRY

Excavation using
bentonite slurry
8.59
(1)
Excavations for piles using bentonite slurry shall be filled with the
slurry from the time that excavation commences until concreting is
8.15
2006 Edition
complete. The slurry shall be maintained at a level of at least 1 m above
the level of the external groundwater and such that the slurry pressure
exceeds the pressure exerted by the soil and ground water.
(2) Subject to the Engineers approval and the availability of the
necessary equipment, the Contractor may use polymer slurry as an
alternative to bentonite slurry. The handling and disposal of polymer
slurry shall follow the suppliers recommendation and be subject to the
Engineers agreement.
(3)
If there is a loss of bentonite slurry from the excavation, which is
sufficient to result in a lack of stability, and if instructed by the Engineer,
the excavation shall be immediately filled with material agreed by the
Engineer. The cause of the loss of slurry shall be investigated and
excavation shall not recommence until remedial measures have been
Mixing
slurry
of
bentonite
8.60
(1)
Bentonite shall be thoroughly mixed with water in a colloidal mixer.
The water shall be taken from the public supply of potable water and shall
be at a temperature of at least 5C. The temperature of the bentonite
slurry shall be at least 5C when supplied to the excavation.
(2) If the groundwater is excessively saline or chemically contaminated,
the bentonite shall be prehydrated or the bentonite slurry shall be modified
such that the slurry is suitable for the support of the excavation.
Protection of bentonite
slurry material
8.61
All solid additives shall be stored in a separate waterproof store with a

raised floor or in a waterproof silo, which shall not allow the material to
become contaminated.
Disposal of bentonite
slurry
8.62
Bentonite slurry that will not be reused shall be disposed of from the Site
directly or mixed with sufficient decomposed rock or similar material
before disposal to approved Public Fills as soon as practicable, in
accordance with the requirements under the Construction Waste Disposal
Charging Scheme and other relevant documents issued by the Civil
Engineering and Development Department or Environmental Protection
Department.
Amd 1/2010
FIXING REINFORCEMENT FOR PILES

for piles
8.63
Prefabricated reinforcement cages for piles shall be marked and fitted with
spacers to ensure that the cage is correctly orientated and positioned within
the pile. The reinforcement cage shall be lowered into position only in the
daytime after the Engineers Representative has verified both the length of
the reinforcement cage and the depth of the hole and after the base has been
cleaned.
Temporary protection
on pile head
8.64
Reinforcement protruding above a concreted pile shaft shall be protected

against corrosion with cement paste that shall be removed before
subsequent construction works commence. If the protection period is
longer than a few weeks, weak concrete should be used instead of cement
paste.
8.16
2006 Edition
PLACING CONCRETE IN PILES

Cleaning and drying
excavations for piles
8.65
(1)
The bases of excavations for piles shall be cleaned by air-lifting or
by other methods agreed by the Engineer before concrete is placed. If
excavation is carried out under water, cleaning shall continue until the
water is clear and free of particles of soil. Measures shall be taken to
prevent the accumulation of silt and other material at the base of the
excavation. During the process of base-cleaning, the Contractor shall
maintain a sufficient positive water head inside the borehole in order to
prevent ingress of water from the outside.
Amd 3/2009
(2)
If the rate of ingress of water does not exceed 0.3 L/s, the base of
excavations for piles shall be dried immediately before concrete is placed.
Placing concrete in
piles
8.66
(1)
Each pile shall be concreted as soon as practicable after the
permission of the Engineer has been obtained. If a tremie pipe is used, it
must be watertight and of sufficient strength.
Before concreting
commences, the Contractor shall submit a method statement of placing
tremie concrete to the Engineer for approval. This statement should at
least contain the proposals of the immersed depth of the tremie pipe below
the upper surface of rising concrete, procedure of safely raising the tremie
pipe as concreting proceeds, means of carrying out accurate measurement
of the level of the rising concrete surface, etc. This method statement
should also include a contingency plan of necessary measures that shall be
taken to cater for any incident that the tremie pipe might become blocked or
removed from the concrete.
(2)
The concrete placed by tremie shall have a minimum designed
slump value of 175 mm. The Contractor shall maintain efficient and
effective communication with the concrete suppliers for ensuring sufficient
workability and continuous supply of concrete throughout the process of
concrete placing.
Amd 3/2009
(3)
If excavations for piles are supported by bentonite slurry or if the rate
of ingress of water exceeds 0.3 L/s, the following shall be complied with:
(a)
Concrete shall be placed by tremie unless otherwise permitted

by the Engineer,
(b)
The minimum cementitious content of the concrete shall be

375 kg/m3,
(c)
The level of the top of the concrete in piles shall be at least 750
mm above the specified cut-off level,
(d)
If the top of the guide wall for barrettes is at the specified

cut-off level, concrete shall continue to be placed until the top
of the pile is free of contamination, and
(e)
After the concrete has hardened, excess concrete shall be

removed to the specified cut-off level.
(4)
Operations that in the opinion of the Engineer are likely to disturb or
affect the concrete or placing of the concrete shall not be carried out unless
8.17
2006 Edition
Removal of temporary
casings to piles
8.67
(1)
A sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within
temporary casings that are being withdrawn to ensure that the pressure from
external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is not reduced in section
or contaminated.
(2)
Temporary casings which are in contact with concrete and which are
not withdrawn before the initial set of the concrete has taken place shall be
left in place.
Empty bores above

piles
8.68
Empty bores and shafts which remain above the pile after concrete has been
placed shall be temporarily protected or filled with material agreed by the
Engineer as soon as practicable.
INSPECTION OF PILING WORKS

Inspection of
excavations for piles
8.69
Inspection of installed
piles
8.70
The Contractor shall allow the Engineers Representative (ER) to inspect

excavations for piles before placing concrete in the pile and at other times
required by the Engineer. The ER shall decide on the most suitable
method to be used for inspecting excavations (and the bases) and dipping
the depth of the drilled hole personally and the Contractor shall provide all
the necessary facilities and equipment to enable the ER to carry out the
inspection/dipping in a safe manner. After the base of excavation has
been cleaned as required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall inform the
Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before
placing concrete in piles.
(1)
If instructed by the Engineer, installed piles shall be exposed for
inspection or testing. Excavations for exposing piles shall be of a depth
agreed by the Engineer, and the face of the excavation shall be at least 750
mm from the face of the pile. The excavation shall be maintained in a
stable condition and kept free of water.
(2)
The surface of the pile shall be washed clean of all silt, mud or other
adhering materials to permit inspection.
(3)
After inspection, excavations for exposing piles shall be filled using
special fill material that shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction
of at least 95% above the groundwater table.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: steel
bearing piles
8.71
Dimensional tolerances of steel bearing pile sections shall comply with the
relevant BS stated in Clause 18.04. Fabrication tolerances for steel
bearing piles and related steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 2.
Tolerances: precast
concrete piles
8.72
The manufacturing tolerances for precast concrete piles shall comply with
(a)
The external cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 0 mm

and +6 mm of the specified dimensions.
(b)
The wall thickness of hollow spun concrete piles shall be

8.18
2006 Edition
within 0 mm and +25 mm of the specified thickness.
(c)
There shall be no irregularity exceeding 6 mm in a 3 m length

along the face of the pile measured using a 3 m straight edge.
(d)

along the internal face of hollow spun concrete piles measured
using a 3 m straight edge.
(e)
The centroid of any cross-section of

the pile shall not be more than 12 mm from the straight line
connecting the centroids of the end faces of the pile. For the
purpose of determining the centroid, the centroid of any
cross-section of a hollow pile shall be determined by assuming
that the pile has a solid section.
Tolerances: hand-dug
caissons
8.73
The centre of each section of the shaft shall lie within 50 mm of the
centreline of the whole shaft.
Tolerances: pile
installations
8.74
(1)
Piles, including hand-dug caissons and mini-piles, shall be installed
to within the tolerances stated in Table 8.1.
(2)
Piles that do not comply with the specified tolerances shall not be
forcibly corrected.
Table 8.1: Tolerances of installed piles

Description
Tolerance
Deviation from specified position in plan,

measured at cut-off level
Deviation from vertical
Land piles
Marine piles
75 mm
150 mm
15 mm for minipiles
1 in 75
1 in 25
1 in 100 for minipiles

Amd 1/2008
Deviation of raking piles from specified

batter
Deviation from specified cut-off level
1 in 25
25 mm
The diameter of cast in-situ piles shall be at least 97% of the specified diameter.
RECORDS OF PILING WORKS

Records of piles
delivered/constructed
in situ
8.75
Records of prefabricated piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site

and submitted to the Engineer at the time the piles are delivered to the Site.
The records shall include test certificates, analyses and mill sheets for steel
piles and proprietary piles. Records of cast-in-situ piles shall be signed by
8.19
2006 Edition
the Engineer after he has carried out the inspection/verification personally.
Records of pile driving
8.76
Records of pile driving shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site and
submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after the driving or installation of
each pile has been completed. The records shall be kept on standard
forms as shown in Appendices 8.2 to 8.5 and shall be available for
inspection by the Engineer.
Records of bentonite
slurry
8.77
Records of tests on bentonite slurry shall be kept by the Contractor on the

Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer at times agreed by the
Engineer. The records shall be kept on standard forms as shown in
Appendix 8.6 and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
Records of load tests

on piles
8.78
Records of load tests on piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the

Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 48 hours
after the test has been completed. The records shall be kept on
standard forms as shown in Appendix 8.7 and shall be available to
the Engineer for inspection. The records shall include graphs
showing load and settlement versus time, plotted in the format
shown in BS 8004, Figure 15(a).
Records of integrity
tests on piles
8.79
Records of integrity tests on piles shall be kept by the Contractor on the

Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 3 days
after the test has been completed. The records shall be available to the
Engineer for inspection. The report shall contain the following details:
(a)
Details stated in Clause 1.42,
(b)
Pile reference numbers,
(c)
Measured pile length,
(d)
Defects such as cracks, fractures or discontinuities, and
(e)
Pile stiffness.
Record drawings
8.80
Record drawings of installed piles shall be prepared by the Contractor and

two copies shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of completing
the piles, including cutting and trimming, in each pile group or building
block. The drawings shall include the as-constructed co-ordinates of the
centre of each pile at cut-off level, the final depth and cut-off level of each
pile and other information required by the Engineer.
Record of piling works
8.81
Within 14 days of completing the piles in each pile group or building

block for minipiles, socketted steel H-piles and small-diameter bored
piles, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a piling record plan
showing the following:
(a)
The top levels of the rock sockets;
(b)
The bottom levels of the rock sockets;
(c)
The lengths of the rock sockets; and
(d) The contours of the rock-head inferred from drill hole logs.
8.20
2006 Edition
TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON PILES

Testing: load tests on
piles
8.82
(1)
The number of piles to be tested by load testing shall be as stated in
the Contract, or as instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
The piles shall be tested to determine the settlement of the pile under
load. Testing shall be carried out in accordance with a procedure agreed
by the Engineer. The method of testing shall be as stated in Appendix 8.1.
(3)
Piles shall not be tested until the concrete or grout has attained
sufficient strength to withstand the tests. The tests shall be carried out
within 28 days of the Engineer's instruction to carry out the test unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
load tests on piles
8.83
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, on completion of testing in

accordance with Clause 8.82 the results of load tests on piles shall comply
(a)
The settlement at any load shall be less than twice the

settlement at 90% of that load (Brinch Hansen's criteria),
(b)
Under working load the gross pile head settlement shall not
exceed 20 mm for buildings and 10 mm for other structures,
and
(c)
The preliminary pile shall have a factor of safety of at least 2.
Non-compliance: load
tests on piles
8.84
If the result of any load test on piles does not comply with the specified
requirements for settlement, the Contractor shall submit remedial proposals
to the Engineer for approval.
Proof drilling
8.85
(1)
Proof drilling shall be carried out on every large-diameter bored
pile to check the condition at the concrete/rock interface. A base coring
tube of at least 150 mm diameter shall be left at about 1000 mm above the
founding level of the pile. The core-drilling shall be carried out to 1000
mm below the concrete/rock interface.
(2)
Proof drilling shall be carried out to verify the adequacy of the
socketted length of minipiles and socketted steel H-piles at locations as
instructed by the Engineer. The number of proof drilling shall be at least 2
or 1% of the number of piles rounded up to the next higher whole number,
whichever is the greater. The depths of the proof drill holes shall be at least
5 metres below the founding levels of the adjoining piles.
TESTING: CONCRETE CORES FROM PILES

Samples:
concrete
cores from piles
8.86
(1)
The frequency of coring shall be 10% for barrettes and 5% for
diaphragm wall panels, with minimum of 2 numbers or as instructed by
the Engineer. The positions from which the cores are taken shall be as
Amd 1/2010
(2)
Concrete cores shall be 100 mm diameter.
(3)
The method of taking concrete cores shall be in accordance with CS1.

8.21
2006 Edition
(4)
Holes formed by taking concrete cores from piles shall be reinstated
using an approved concrete mix or an approved grout mix.
(5)
Prestressed precast concrete piles from which concrete cores have
been taken shall be abandoned.
Testing: concrete cores
from piles
8.87
(1) Each concrete core from a pile shall be inspected for evidence of
segregation of the constituents and for the presence of voids. Specimens
selected from each core shall be tested to determine the compressive
strength.
(2)
The method of preparing, inspecting and testing concrete cores shall
be as stated in Clause 16.64(2).
concrete cores from
piles
8.88
The compliance criteria for concrete cores from piles shall be as stated in
Clause 16.65.
Non-compliance:
concrete cores from
piles
8.89
(1)
If the result of any test on a concrete core from a pile does not
comply with Clause 16.65 additional cores shall be taken from the same
pile and additional tests shall be carried out.
(2)
Additional concrete cores shall be 100 mm diameter for concrete of
20 mm nominal maximum aggregate size and 150 mm diameter for
concrete of 40 mm nominal maximum aggregate size. The number of
additional cores shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
If the result of any additional test does not comply with the
compliance criteria for concrete cores the Contractor shall submit remedial
proposals to the Engineer for approval. The number of additional piles
and additional tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
TESTING: NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS ON WELDS IN

PILES
Testing:
non-destructive tests
on welds in piles
8.90
(1)
The number and type of non-destructive tests on welds in piles shall
be as stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
Radiographic tests shall comply with BS 2600: Part 1 and ultrasonic
tests shall comply with BS 3923: Part 2.
Non-compliance:
non-destructive tests
on welds in piles
8.91
If the result of any test on a weld in a pile does not comply with the
specified requirements, the complete weld shall be cut out, the joint shall be
re-welded and the weld shall be tested.
TESTING: INTEGRITY TESTS

Testing: integrity
testing on piles and
non-destructive
integrity testing
8.92
(1)
The number and type of integrity tests to be carried out on piles shall
(2)
Integrity testing shall be carried out in sufficient time before the
relevant piling works start to permit the tests to be carried out.
8.22
2006 Edition
(3)
The results of integrity tests shall be used to enable the Engineer to
select piles for further testing.
(4) Non-destructive integrity tests, if required, shall be carried out by
an independent Testing Firm as agreed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall provide attendance and other preparatory works as required. The
Contractor shall provide the Testing Firm with a copy of the ground
investigation report, a Site plan showing bore hole locations and pile
layout and a list of the piles to be tested with the date of concreting, total
length, length of casing (if any), diameter and volume of concrete used
plus any other relevant information required for the testing of the pile.
Non-compliance:
integrity tests on piles
8.93
If the result of any integrity test on a pile does not comply with the
specified requirements, additional tests shall be carried out. The number
of additional tests shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
Sonic tests on bored

cast-in-situ piles
8.94
(1)
Before concreting, the Contractor shall install 4 nos. (which may be
reduced to 3 nos. if the pile shaft is too congested to accommodate 4 nos.)
watertight steel tubes of thickness not less than 2.5 mm and internal
diameter not less than 42 mm and without internal projections over the full
depth of each of the bored cast-in-situ piles.
Amd 1/2010
(2)
Sonic tests shall be carried out for all bored cast-in-situ piles unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. An independent specialist-testing
consultant appointed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer shall
conduct the tests to verify the homogeneity and integrity of the hardened
concrete. The Contractor shall submit the proposed procedures for sonic
tests to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before concreting.
(3)
The equipment for sonic testing shall consist of a signal transmitter
probe and a signal receiver probe, which may be lowered into the tubes
installed in the piles either in tandem or singly. The results of the sonic
testing shall be displaced on a recording oscilloscope at the top of the pile.
(4)
The signal emitted by the transducer shall be in the spectrum of
100Hz to 60kHz and of variable emission pulse rate between 1 and 20
cycles per second to suit the testing requirements.
(5)
The recording oscilloscope shall be of the storage type with signal
modulation representation of the received signal on a horizontal tracing:
bright spots correspond to peaks and signal blanks to troughs.
(6)
For one-tube installation, a single log shall be taken with probes set
1m apart in the same tube. For two or more tubes, measurements shall be
taken between adjacent tubes plus one diagonal where applicable.
(7)
The Contractor shall ensure that the probe matches the tube diameter
to minimize concrete-tube-probe signal alternation or misleading results
will arise.
(8)
Results shall be in the form of time delay versus pile depth. The
results shall be recorded on the oscilloscope screen and photographed. The
testing consultant shall submit the test reports and photographic traces
directly to the Engineer within 48 hours of making the tests. The submitted
materials shall become the property of the Employer.
8.23
2006 Edition
(9)
Voids formed by the steel tubes shall be pressure-grouted in
accordance with the Contract at such times as agreed with the Engineer.
(10) 3 sonic pipes are required if each diaphragm wall or barrette of
dimension is less than 3 m long and a minimum of 6 sonic pipes is required
if each diaphragm wall or barrette of dimension of more than or around 5.6
m. Sonic logging test shall be carried out for all barrettes and loading
panels of diaphragm wall. The frequency of testing shall be minimum
10% for non-loading panels.
Amd 1/2010
TESTING: BENTONITE SLURRY

Samples:
bentonite slurry
8.95
(1)
Samples of bentonite slurry shall be provided for testing at a
frequency agreed by the Engineer. Samples for testing to determine the
density of the slurry shall be provided each day. A sample of bentonite
slurry taken from the base of the excavation shall be tested to determine the
density of the slurry before placing of concrete.
(2)
The method of sampling and the sampling apparatus shall be as
Testing:
bentonite slurry
8.96
(1)
Each sample of bentonite slurry shall be tested to determine the
properties as stated in Tables 8.2A, 8.2B, 8.2C and 8.2D.
Amd 1/2010
(2)
The method of testing shall be as stated in Table 8.2.
(3)
The measuring device for testing density shall be readable and
accurate to 0.005 g/mL.
(4)
Samples to be tested for viscosity using the Fann viscometer shall be
screened before testing using a 300 m BS test sieve.
bentonite slurry
8.97
(1)
The results of tests on bentonite slurry shall be as stated in Table 8.2.
(2)
Tests to determine the shear strength and pH value shall be
discontinued if the results of tests indicate that a consistent working pattern
has been established, taking account of the mixing process, blending of
freshly mixed and previously used slurry and processes used to remove
impurities from previously used slurry. If there is a subsequent change in
the established working pattern, the tests to determine shear strength and
pH value shall be reintroduced unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Non-compliance:
bentonite slurry
8.98
If the results of tests for density, viscosity, filter cake, sand content or fluid
loss do not comply with the specified requirements, or if the results of tests
for shear strength or pH value do not indicate a consistent working pattern,
the bentonite slurry shall be deemed unsuitable for the work and concrete
shall not be placed in the slurry. The slurry shall be replaced or its
composition adjusted before concrete is placed.
Amd 1/2010
8.24
2006 Edition
Table 8.2(A) Fresh Bentonite
Property
Density
Fluid loss
Test Results
1.015 g/mL
25 mL
Viscosity
pH value
35 s
8.5-10.5
Filter cake
1 mm
Method of Testing
Mud density balance
Refer to API Recommended
Practice: RP13B-1
Marsh cone method
pH indicator paper strips or
electrical pH meter
Practice: RP13B-1
Table 8.2(B) Bentonite during excavation

Property
Density
Fluid loss
Test Results
1.08-1.15 g/mL
45 mL
pH value
8-11
Filter cake
5 mm
Method of Testing
Mud density balance
Practice: RP13B-1
electrical pH meter
Practice: RP13B-1
Table 8.2(C)Bentonite prior to concreting

Property
Density
Test Results
1.15 g/mL
Method of Testing
Mud density balance
Fluid loss
40 mL
Viscosity
pH value
40 s
8-11
Filter cake
5 mm
Sand content
3%

Practice: RP13B-1
Marsh cone method
electrical pH meter
Practice: RP13B-1
Practice: RP13B-1
Table 8.2(D) Bentonite prior to re-use

Property
Density
Fluid loss
Test Results
1.3 g/mL
50 mL
Viscosity
pH value
50 s
7.5-11.5
Filter cake
5 mm
Method of Testing
Mud density balance
Practice: RP13B-1
Marsh cone method
electrical pH meter
Practice: RP13B-1
(Note1: API = The American Petroleum Institute)
Amd 1/2010
8.25
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.1
DETERMINATION OF THE SETTLEMENT OF
PILES BY LOAD TEST
Scope
8.1.1
This method covers the determination of the settlement of piles by means

of a load test.
Equipment
8.1.2

(a)
Kentledge, anchor piles or other anchorages supported or installed at

suitable locations to provide adequate reactions against jacking.
(b)
A load-measuring device which shall consist of a load column,

pressure cell, or other appropriate system, calibrated before and after
each series of tests, or whenever adjustments are made to the device,
or at time intervals recommended by the manufacturer of the
equipment.
(c)
Four deflectometers accurate to 0.025 mm.
(d)
Precision levelling equipment accurate to 0.25 mm.

(e)
Procedure:
before testing
8.1.3
A reference frame for supporting deflectometers and providing a

datum for deflectometer measurements.
(f)
Working platforms.
(g)
Screens and protection from exposure to conditions which may

affect the test.
(h)
Hydraulic loading equipment.
The procedure before testing shall be as follows:

(a)
The kentledge, anchor piles or other anchorages shall be installed.

The centre of each anchor pile shall be at least 2 m or three times the
pile diameter, whichever is greater, from the centre of the pile to be
tested and from the centre of any adjacent pile.
(b)
If required, the pile to be tested shall be extended from cut-off level

to ground level. The strength of piles at joints shall not be less than
any normal section of the pile.
(c)
A temporary square pile cap designed by the Contractor shall be

constructed.
(d)
Working platforms, screens and protection shall be installed.
(e)
The reference frame shall be set up on supports which are at least 2

m or three times the pile diameter, whichever is greater, from the test
pile and anchor pile. The four deflectometers shall be mounted on
the reference frame to measure the deflection of the four corners of
the temporary pile cap.
8.26
2006 Edition
Procedure: load test
Table 8.1.1:
8.1.4
The procedure for the load test shall be as follows:

(a)
Preliminary piles shall be tested to not less than twice the working
load of the pile or other loads stated in the Contract. Working piles
shall be tested to not less than 1.8 times working load. Reductions
for group or boundary effects shall not be made in determining the
test loads.
(b)
Test loads shall be applied and removed in three stages as stated in

Table 8.1.1.
(c)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the test loads shall be

applied in increments, and removed in decrements, of 25% of the
working load. Increments of load shall not be applied until the rate
of settlement of the pile is less than 0.1 mm in 20 minutes.
(d)
The full test loads for Stage I shall be applied in increments and
shall then be maintained for at least 24 hours after the rate of
settlement has reduced to less than 0.1 mm per hour. The test loads
shall be removed in decrements and the recovery of the pile
determined before loading is resumed.
(e)
The procedure stated in Clause 8.1.4(d) shall be repeated for Stage II

loading.
(f)
The procedure stated in Clause 8.1.4(d) shall be repeated for Stage

III loading unless the Engineer instructs the loading to be maintained
for a longer period.
(g)
The settlement of the pile shall be measured at hourly intervals or

other intervals agreed by the Engineer. The settlement of the pile
under each increment and decrement of loading shall be measured.
The exact times at which increments are applied and decrements are
removed shall be recorded. Settlements shall be measured and times
shall be recorded in the presence of the Engineer.
(h)
The level of the reference beam shall be checked at regular intervals

agreed by the Engineer during the test.
Test loading stages

Stage
Test load
25% of max. test load
II
III
8.27
2006 Edition
Procedure:
after testing
8.1.5
After testing, equipment shall be removed, temporary pile caps shall be

demolished and pile extensions shall be removed to cut-off level. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, anchor piles shall be withdrawn.
8.1.6

(a)
The loads applied to the nearest 0.05 t.
(b)
The settlement of the pile to the nearest 0.05 mm at hourly intervals

and under each increment and decrement of loading.
(c)
The exact times at which increments were applied and decrements

removed.
(d)
The levels of the reference beam, to the nearest 0.05 mm.
8.28
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.2
PILE DRIVING RECORD
(Precast concrete, prefabricated steel and driven cast-in-place piles)
Contract No.
Title
Contract No.
Pile data
Reference No.
Location
Type
Size
Rake
For precast concrete and steel piles; Preformed length

For precast concrete piles; Date of casting
Drive system data
Hammer: type
mass
kg drop (at set)
Helmet, dolly & anvil: type
mm rated energy
mass
Packing: type
Condition
thickness
kJ
kg
mm
Levels
Commencing ground/sea bed* level (PD/CD)*
Depth of overburden/height of working platform above sea bed level
Reference working level/platform level*
Date
&
Time
Drop
(m)
Depth
penetrated
(m)
No. of
blows
+
Cumulative
No. of blows
+ per 0.25 m for top 3.0 m of pile

++ for cast in place piles
(*delete as appropriate)
8.29
Length of individual
segments, location of
splices and tests carried
out
Remarks (State details of

obstruction, delays,
interruptions and location
of concrete samples)++
2006 Edition
PILE DRIVING RECORD

(Precast concrete, prefabricated steel and driven cast-in-place piles)
(on graph paper graduated in millimetres to be pasted in space
below)
Temporary compression record
Final penetration depth
mm
Top of pile level
Temporary compression
mm
Cut off level
Final set
or
mm/last 10 blows
Pile head level
blows/25 mm
Final toe level
Deviation from plumb or rake 1 in
Deviation at cut-off level x-x
mm
y-y
mm
For driven cast-in place piles:

Length of temporary
casing
Length of permanent
casing
Concrete grade
Length of cage
reinf.
Date of concreting
m3
Theoretical volume of concrete required

m3
Actual volume of concrete placed
Reported by
Verified by
Contractors Representative
Date
*IOW / Engineer / Architect
Date
8.30
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.3
PILE DRIVING RECORD
(Bored cast-in-place piles)
Contract No.
Title
Contractor
Pile data
Reference No.
Type
Location
Diameter
mm Design Length
mm Rake 1 in
Bore hole record

Commencing ground/sea bed* level (P.D./C.D.)*
Depth of overburden/height of working platform above sea bed level
Casing/drilling fluid* type

Reference working level/platform level*
Date
&
Time
Depth
penetrated
Details of strata
penetrated/ground water
level
Deviation from plumb or rake 1 in
Details of soil testing,

proving of bedrock and
under-ream
Remarks (State details

of obstruction, delays
interruptions, and
location of concrete
samples)

y-y
Length of temporary casing
m Length of permanent casing
8.31
2006 Edition
PILE DRIVING RECORD

(Bored cast-in-place piles)
Bore hole condition before concreting
Bottom Visible/invisible* Measured depth of bore
Depth of water/drilling fluid*
Damage and debris observations

Concrete record
Concreting in dry/by tremie*
Water inflow rate
Concrete grade
Slump
Actual concreted level
Cut off level
Overall
Lt
=
La
Length of cage reinforcement
Date
&
Time
litres/second
Delivery note
No./ Truck
load No.
Quantity
(m3)
Theoretical
length filled
Lt (m)
Actual
Length
Placed
La (m)
Lt
%
La
Cumulative
length placed
(m)
Remarks (Interruptions
in placing, cause of
excessive
Lt
% , Location of
La
concrete samples, Ref.

No. of cubes taken,
etc.)
Reported by
Verified by
Date
Note:

Date
The Engineer shall be informed of any deviation greater than 10% from the expected (theoretical)
level of concrete placed.
8.32
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.4
PILE RECORD
(Piles cast in-hand-dug Caissons)
Contract No.
Title
Contractor
Pile data
Reference No.
Location
Caisson Type
Diameter
mm Design Length
mm
Excavation Data
Commencing ground level (PD)
Date
Depth
reached
(m)
Depth of overburden
Details of Strata
penetrated/surrounding ground
water level
Deviation from plumb 1 in

proving of bedrock,
and under-ream

obstructions, interruptions
and delays)
mm
y-y
mm
Bedrock level*
Water level*
Base level of shaft
Diameter of bell-out*
mm
Depth of bell-out
mm
Length of toe-in*
mm
* If none write N/A
8.33
2006 Edition
PILE DRIVING RECORD

(Piles cast in hand-dug caissons)
Concrete record
Concreting in dry/by tremie*
Water inflow rate
Concrete grade
Slump
Cut off level
Overall
Lt
=
La
Date
&
Time
litres/second
Delivery note
No./ Truck
load No.
Quantity
(m3)
Theoretical
length filled
Lt (m)
Actual
Length
Placed
La (m)
Lt
%
La
Cumulative
length placed
(m)
excessive
Lt
% , Location of
La

No. of cubes taken, etc.)
Reported by
Verified by
Date
Note:

Date
8.34
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.5
PILE RECORDS
(Barrettes)
Contract No.
Title
Contractor
Pile data
Reference No.
Location
Size of barrette
Shape
Design Length
Excavation Data
Commencing ground level (PD)
Depth of overburden
Guide wall levels: top
bottom
Date
Depth
reached
(m)
Details of Strata
penetrated/surrounding
ground water level
Deviation from plumb 1 in

proving of bedrock,
and under-ream

obstructions, interruptions
and delays)
mm
y-y
mm
Base level of excavation

Depth of base from top of guide wall
m
8.35
2006 Edition
PILE RECORD
(Barrettes)
Concrete record
Concrete grade
Slump

Lt
Overall
La
=
Cut off level

%
Date
&
Time
Delivery note
No./ Truck
load No.
Quantity
(m3)
Theoretical
length filled
Lt (m)
Actual
Length
Placed
La (m)
Lt
% Cumulative
length placed
La
(m)
excessive
Lt
% , Location of
La

No. of cubes taken, etc.)
Reported by
Verified by
Date
Note:

Date
8.36
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.6
BENTONITE SLURRY RECORD
Contract No.
Title
Contractor
Sample data
Ref. No. of pile
Location
Source of test sample:
(a)
(b)
(c)
freshly mixed slurry*

as supplied to excavation*
from bottom of excavation before placing concrete
Date & time of sampling
Test Method and

Apparatus Used
Test Result
Density (g/mL)
Viscosity (seconds)
pH
Sand Content (%)
Fluid Loss (mL)
Temperature (C)
Filter Cake (mm)
Amd 1/2010
Remarks:-
Reported by
Verified by
Date

Date
8.37
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 8.7
(Test result)
Contract No.
Title
Contractor
Pile data
Reference No.
Location
Type
Size
Pile dia/diagonal width (D)
Cross pile length (Lp)
Sectional area (A)
Youngs modulus (E)
Testing data
Design working load (P)

Test load (Q) = 2 (P)
Pressure gauge No.
Calibration Certificate ref.
Dial gauge number
Date
Serial number
Calibration certificate ref.
Date of calibration
Level of fixed point on load reaction system: before testing
after testing
ground settlement =
Date
&
Time
Load
(kN)
Pressure
Gauge
Reading
Dial Gauge Readings

Dial 1
Dial 2
Dial 3
8.38
Dial 4
Cumulative
Settlement
Average
(mm)
Remarks
2006 Edition
4000
5000
Load in kN
6000
--
--
3000
--
2000
--
--
1000
--
(Testing result)
Settlement
in
mm
--
10
--
15
--
20
--
25
--
30
--
35
--
40
--
Maximum settlement at working load:
(Allowable = 20 mm for buildings and 10 mm for all other

structures.)
Actual =
Settlement at maximum test load (S1):
(Allowable = S1 less than twice settlement at 90% of maximum

test load (2S2).)
Actual S1 =
2S2 =
Reported by
Verified by

8.39
2006 Edition
Date
Date
8.40
2006 Edition
9.1
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 9
CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND
9.2
2006 Edition
9.3
2006 Edition
SECTION 9
CARRIAGEWAYS: SUB-BASE MATERIAL
AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Nominal maximum
aggregate size
9.01
Nominal maximum aggregate size is the smallest BS sieve size for which
the upper limit of the percentage of the aggregate by mass passing is 100%.
MATERIALS
Sub-base material
using virgin material
9.02
Sub-base material shall be crushed rock and shall have the properties stated
in Table 9.1. Sub-base material passing the 425 m BS test sieve, when
tested in accordance with Clause 9.46(4) shall be non-plastic.
Recycled sub-base
material in lieu of
virgin material
9.03
(1)
Recycled sub-base material shall be crushed rock, crushed concrete or
clean crushed inert demolition material and may contain up to 12.5 % by
mass of natural sand which passes the 5mm BS test sieve. The material
shall lie within the grading limits of Table 9.1, and not be gap graded.
(2)
The material shall have a 10 % fines value of 50 KN or more when
tested in accordance with Clause 9.47(3).
(3)
The material passing the 425m BS test sieve shall be non-plastic
when tested in accordance with Clause 9.47(4).
(4)
The aggregate shall be considered suitable if it has a soundness value
greater than 65.
(5)
The material shall have a water-soluble sulphate content of less than
1.9g of sulphate (expressed as SO3) per litre, if used within 500mm of
cement-bound material, concrete pavements, concrete structures or concrete
products.
(6)
The material shall have a minimum laboratory California Bearing
Ratio (CBR) value of 30% or such other higher value as specified by the
Engineer.
(7)
The material shall not contain quantities of contaminants in excess
of the percentages given in Table 9.2 unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
(8) Notwithstanding the above sub-clauses, the Contractor may propose
for the Engineers approval the use of virgin aggregates in lieu of recycled
aggregates in the sub-base material when there is a shortage of supply of
recycled aggregates.
9.4
2006 Edition
Table 9.1: Properties of sub-base material

Properties
BS test sieve
75
37.5
20
10
5
600
75
Percentage by
mass passing
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
m
m
85
60
40
25
8
0
Ten percent fines value
100
-
100
85
70
45
22
10
> 50 kN
Table 9.2 : Allowable contamination of recycled sub-base material

Type of contamination
Sub-base type
Maximum sulphate
content
By mass
Maximum
metals content
By mass
Maximum foreign
material content e.g.
glass, soft material
etc.
By mass
Maximum organic
material content(by
mass)
1%
1%
1%
0.5%
Recycled sub-base
Aggregates for
bituminous materials
9.04
(1)
Coarse aggregate for bituminous materials shall be crushed rock all
retained on a 5 mm BS test sieve and shall have the properties stated in
Table 9.3.
(2)
Fine aggregate for bituminous materials shall be crushed rock, river
sand or a mixture of crushed rock and river sand all passing 5 mm BS test
sieve. The water absorption of fine aggregate shall not exceed 2.0%.
(3)
For the purpose of mix design, the combined grading of aggregates
for bituminous materials shall be such that the particle size distribution lies
within the limits stated in Table 9.4 for the relevant bituminous material.
Table 9.3: Properties of coarse aggregate for bituminous materials

Nominal maximum aggregate size (mm)
Properties
Flakiness index
37.5
28
20
10
25.0%
26.0%
27.0%
30.0%
> 100 kN
Water absorption
9.5
2.0%
2006 Edition
Table 9.4: Design limits for particle size distribution and bitumen content for bituminous materials
Type of bituminous material
Properties
Roadbase
(recipe mix)
Nominal maximum aggregate

size (mm)
37.5
Base course
37.5
BS test
sieve
50
Particle
size
distribution
Bitumen content
as percentage
of total mass
including binder
mm
28
Wearing course
20
Friction
course
10
10

100
100
37.5 mm
90 - 100
91 - 100
100
28
mm
70 - 94
70 - 94
91 - 100
100
20
mm
62 - 84
62 - 84
85 - 95
91 - 100
14
mm
55 - 76
72 - 87
78 - 90
100
10
mm
49 - 67
49 - 67
55 - 75
68 - 84
87 - 100
85 - 100
mm
37 - 55
37 - 55
35 - 53
54 - 72
62 - 80
20 - 40
2.36 mm
27 - 43
27 - 43
25 - 40
42 - 58
42 - 58
5 - 15
1.18 mm
20 - 35
15 - 30
34 - 48
34 - 48
100
600
13 - 28
13 - 28
12 - 24
24 - 38
24 - 38
300
7 - 21
7 - 21
8 - 18
16 - 28
16 - 28
150
4 - 14
5 - 12
8 - 18
8 - 18
75
2-8
2-8
3-6
4-8
4-8
2-6
min.
3.0
4.0
4.5
5.0
6.0
4.5
max.
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
7.0
5.5
Filler for bituminous

materials
9.05
(1)
Filler for bituminous materials shall be crushed rock filler, PC,
PFAC, PFA or hydrated lime. Filler shall be free-flowing and dry before
addition to the bituminous mixture.
(2)
Filler for bituminous friction course material shall contain hydrated
lime. The amount of hydrated lime, expressed as a percentage by mass of
the total aggregates, shall be at least 1.5%.
(3)
PC and PFAC shall comply with BS EN 197-1.
(4)
PFA shall comply with BS 3892: Part 1 except that the criterion for
maximum water requirement shall not apply.
(5)
Crushed rock filler and hydrated lime shall comply with ASTM D 242.
9.6
2006 Edition
Bitumen
9.06
Bitumen for bituminous materials shall comply with ASTM D 946, Grade
60-70 and shall have a softening point exceeding 44C and less than
55C. The wax content of the bitumen shall comply with
requirements for Grade A specified in JTG F40-2004. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, blending or mixing of bitumen shall
be carried out at a refinery approved by the Engineer.
Amd 2/2007
Bituminous emulsion
9.07
Bituminous emulsion shall be anionic bituminous emulsion complying

with BS 434: Part 1, Table 1, Class A1-40 or cationic bituminous
emulsion complying with BS 434: Part 1, Table 2, Class K1-40.
Bituminous priming
material
9.08
Bituminous priming material shall be medium curing-grade cutback

bitumen complying with ASTM D 2027, Table 1, Class MC-30.
DESIGN
OF
SUB-BASE
Design procedure for
sub-base material and
9.09
MATERIAL
AND
(1)
Sub-base material and bituminous roadbase materials shall be
recipe mixes. Laboratory design mixes other than those for sub-base
material and bituminous roadbase materials shall be made and tested as
part of the design procedure at a laboratory approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, mix designs and
associated tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 7 days, or such
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out the mix designs.
(3)
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may use
bituminous roadbase material incorporating reclaimed asphalt pavement
(RAP) for carriageway works. The specific requirements are as follows: (a) Roadbase incorporating RAP shall be designed, manufactured,
laid and tested in accordance with the requirements for roadbase
using non-recycled materials or otherwise specified by the
Engineer.
(b) The RAP shall comply with the following:
(i)
RAP shall be obtained from milling or excavation of existing

bituminous pavements, and return loads from site and offcuts
from bituminous layer joint preparation. Return loads can
include bituminous materials rejected from site. RAP shall be
crushed and screened as necessary such that the maximum
particle size is not greater than the nominal maximum
aggregate size of the bituminous roadbase materials being
produced and a reasonably well-graded and consistent
mixture can be produced.
(ii) RAP shall be free of foreign materials such as unbound

granular sub-base, broken concrete, or other contaminants.
(iii) RAP shall be stored in separate stockpiles before use. RAP
that has been stockpiled for some time shall be reprocessed,
9.7
2006 Edition
where necessary, to ensure that it is in a free-flowing state at

the time of use.
(iv) The maximum amount of RAP allowable in the bituminous
roadbase material shall be 15% by mass of the total mix.
Separate mix designs shall be required for roadbase materials
incorporating RAP.
Design of bituminous
materials
9.10
(1)
Bituminous materials shall consist of coarse and fine aggregates
complying with Clause 9.04, filler complying with Clause 9.05 and
bitumen complying with Clause 9.06. The different types of bituminous
materials shall have particle size distributions and bitumen contents within
the limits stated in Table 9.4.
(2)
Subject to the Engineers approval, the Contractor may use
bituminous wearing course and base course materials incorporating
reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) for carriageway works. The RAP
shall comply with the requirements specified in Clause 9.09(3). Wearing
course and base course materials incorporating RAP shall be designed,
manufactured, laid and tested in accordance with the requirements for
these materials using non-recycled materials or otherwise specified by the
Engineer.
Amd 1/2007
(3)
The properties of the different types of bituminous materials shall
be as stated in Table 9.5.
(4)
Bituminous materials of all aggregate sizes, other than bituminous
roadbase material, shall be designed in accordance with the Marshall
Method of Mix Design stated in The Asphalt Institute Handbook MS-2
Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and other Hot-mix Types,
Sixth Edition (1997) with modifications only if agreed by the Engineer.
The compaction standard shall be 75 blows per side. The maximum
amount of RAP allowable in the bituminous wearing course and base
course materials shall be 15% by mass of the total mix. Separate mix
designs shall be required for these materials incorporating RAP.
Amd 1/2007
(5)
Design procedures for bituminous friction course material shall
be as stated in Clause 9.10(4) except that the mixing and compaction
temperatures shall be consistent with bitumen viscosities of 900 100
centistokes and 2000 200 centistokes respectively.
9.8
2006 Edition
Table 9.5: Properties of designed bituminous materials

Base course
Properties
Wearing course
Friction course

37.5
28
20
10
10
Minimum Marshall stability (kN)
10.0
10.0
Maximum flow value (mm)
4.0
4.0
Minimum voids in mineral

aggregate as a percentage
12.5
13.0
14.0
5.0
3.0
16.0
25.0
of total bulk volume

Air voids in mix as a percentage of
total bulk volume
3.0
5.0
18.0
25.0
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of filler
and bitumen for
9.11
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed filler and bitumen for
bituminous materials shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
A certificate from the manufacturer for each type of filler

showing the manufacturer's name, the date and place of
manufacture and showing that the filler complies with the
requirements stated in the Contract and including results of
tests for particle size distribution, and
(b)
A certificate from the manufacturer for bitumen showing the

showing that the bitumen complies with the requirements
stated in the Contract, including a temperature-viscosity
relationship for the bitumen, and including results of tests for:
- Relative density
- Softening point
- Penetration
- Ductility
- Retained penetration after thin film oven test
- Solubility
- Viscosity
- Loss on heating
9.9
2006 Edition
Wax.
Amd 2/2007
(2)
Engineer at the time stated in Clause 9.12(3).
(3)
Further certificates showing that the materials comply with the
specification shall be submitted at intervals agreed by the Engineer.
Particulars of mixes
for sub-base material
and bituminous
materials
9.12
(1)
The following particulars of sub-base material and bituminous
roadbase materials shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Source and type of aggregates,
(b)
Grading details in tabular and graphical form, and
(c)
Details of each mixing plant proposed,
(2)
The following particulars of bituminous materials shall also be
(a)
Certified copies of work sheets for mix designs, which shall

include the relative density of the mixed aggregates,
(b)
Source of bitumen, and
(c)
If requested by the Engineer, past test records of the same mix

produced in the same plant.
(3)
before:
(a)
Trial areas are constructed, or
(b) The mix is placed in the permanent work if trial areas are not
required.
Particulars of recycled
sub-base material
9.13
(1)
The following particulars of recycled sub-base material if used in
lieu of virgin material shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
(b)
Particulars of supplier
of sub-base material
and bituminous
9.14
Details of the recycling plant, and test results for:

-
Soundness value
CBR value
Content of contaminant in percentage by mass
Water-soluble sulphate content
Organic material content, and
Grading details in tabular and graphical form
The name of the supplier and the location of each plant from which the
Contractor proposes to obtain sub-base material and bituminous materials
shall be submitted to the Engineer at the time stated in Clause 9.12(3).
9.10
2006 Edition
materials
9.11
2006 Edition
Particulars of methods
of laying and
compacting sub-bases
and bituminous
materials
9.15
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed methods of laying and
compacting sub-bases and bituminous materials shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Details of construction plant, and
(b)
Programme and rate of working.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at the time stated
in Clause 9.12(3).
Samples of sub-base
material, aggregate,
filler and bitumen
9.16
One sample of each type of sub-base material and one sample of each type
of aggregate, filler and bitumen for bituminous material shall be submitted
to the Engineer at the same time as particulars are submitted.
TRIALS
Trial areas
9.17
(1)
Trial areas of each type and layer of bituminous materials shall be
constructed to demonstrate that the proposed materials, mixes, methods of
production and methods of construction are capable of producing a
carriageway that complies with the specified requirements. Unless
otherwise stated in the Contract, the trial areas shall be constructed as part
of the permanent carriageway at locations agreed by the Engineer. The
width of each trial area shall be at least one lane of carriageway, and the
length shall be at least 60 m.
(2)
Trial areas shall be constructed using the materials, mixes, methods
of production and methods of construction submitted to the Engineer.
Materials shall be delivered in not less than two loads.
(3)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 48 hours, or such shorter
period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing trial areas.
(4)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before each layer
of material is placed in the trial area.
(5)
The Engineer shall be given sufficient time to determine whether the
specified requirements have been produced in the trial area before further
material of the same type is placed in the permanent carriageway.
(6)
Trial areas shall be protected from damage and shall be left in
position unless the Engineer instructs their removal. Trial areas which form
part of the permanent carriageway and which comply with the specified
requirements shall not be removed.
9.12
2006 Edition
Table 9.6: Sampling and testing bituminous materials

Type of material
Bituminous base course
and wearing course
material
Bituminous friction
course material
Samples: trial areas
Methods of
sampling
Methods of
testing

Bitumen content
Clause 9.55
Clause 9.55
Clause 9.56
Clause 9.56
Rice's specific gravity
Clause 9.55
Clause 9.56
Void content
Clause 9.62
Clause 9.63
Clause 9.59
Clause 9.60
Bitumen content
Clause 9.59
Clause 9.60
Texture depth and

permeability
Clause 9.66
Properties
9.18
(1)
One sample of bituminous materials, excluding bituminous roadbase
materials, shall be provided from each mix used in trial areas. The method
of sampling shall be as stated in Table 9.6.
(2)
Ten cores shall be cut from each layer of base course and wearing
course in trial areas. The method of taking cores shall be as stated in Clause
9.62.
Testing: trial areas
9.19
(1)
Each sample of bituminous material taken as stated in Clause 9.18,
shall be tested to determine the properties stated in Table 9.6. The method
of testing shall be as stated in Table 9.6.
(2)
If the layer is to form part of the permanent work, each layer of
bituminous material in trial areas, excluding bituminous roadbase material,
shall be tested as stated in Clause 9.40 to determine the level of the surface.
(3)
The layer which is to be the final layer of the carriageway in each
trial area shall be tested as stated in Clauses 9.42 and 9.43 to determine the
surface regularity, if the layer is to form part of the permanent work.
(4)
The layer of friction course in each trial area shall be tested as stated
in Clauses 9.66 to 9.68 to determine the texture depth and permeability.
(5)
Cores shall be tested as stated in Clauses 9.62 to 9.65 to determine
the compacted layer thickness and air void content.
trial areas
9.20
The properties of the materials, the levels of the surface, compaction,

surface regularity, texture depth and permeability of bituminous materials
laid in the trial areas shall comply with the specified requirements for the
permanent carriageway.
Non-compliance:
trial areas
9.21
(1)
If the result of any test on trial areas does not comply with the
specified requirements for trial areas, particulars of proposed changes to the
materials, mixes, methods of production or methods of construction shall
be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial areas shall be constructed until
the result of every test on trial areas complies with the specified
requirements for the trial areas.
9.13
2006 Edition
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, trial areas or parts of
trial areas, which do not comply with the specified requirements for the
trial area, shall be removed.
Approved mix for
other than bituminous
roadbase material
9.22
(1)
A mix for bituminous materials other than bituminous roadbase
material that complies with the specified requirements for designed mixes
and for trial areas shall become an approved mix.
(2)
The approved gradation envelope for bituminous materials other
than bituminous roadbase material shall be the gradation envelope found by
applying the tolerances stated in Table 9.7 to the particle size distribution of
the approved mix.
(3)
The approved bitumen content range for bituminous materials other
than bituminous roadbase material shall be the bitumen content range
formed by applying a tolerance of 0.5% to the bitumen content of the
approved mix.
Table 9.7: Tolerances for particle size distribution from approved mix
Tolerance of particle size distribution in percentage
by mass of total mix passing BS test sieve
BS test sieve

37.5
28
20
10
50
mm
37.5
mm
28
mm
20
mm
14
mm
10
mm
mm
2.36
mm
1.18
mm
600
300
150
75
Commencement of
placing bituminous
materials
9.23
Bituminous material shall not be placed in the permanent works until the
Engineer has approved the mix.
Changes in materials
and methods of
construction
9.24
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials and methods of production

used in producing the approved mixes and the methods of construction
used in trial areas shall not be changed.
9.14
2006 Edition
HANDLING, STORAGE
MATERIALS
Handling and
storage of sub-base
material and
9.25
(1)
AND
TRANSPORT
OF
Cement and PFA shall be stored as stated in Clause 16.33.
(2)
Material handling and storage areas shall be levelled and well
drained. Sub-base material and bituminous materials shall not be handled
or stored in a manner which will result in mixing of the different types and
sizes or in segregation or contamination of the materials. Measures to
protect the materials from the effects of weather shall be submitted to the
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, bituminous materials
shall not be stored in heated surge bins for more than 12 hours or in
transport vehicles for more than 3 hours.
(4)
Bituminous friction course material shall not be stored in surge bins
for more than 30 minutes.
Transport of sub-base
material and
9.26
(1)
Sub-base material and bituminous materials shall be protected by
covers while being transported and before laying. Covers for bituminous
materials shall be heavy canvas or a similar insulating material. The
covers shall completely cover the material and shall be securely fixed to
minimize loss of heat and to protect the materials from contamination by
dust or other deleterious material.
(2)
Sub-base material and bituminous materials shall be transported in
clean vehicles with smooth trays and sides.
(3)
The trays of vehicles transporting bituminous materials may be
lubricated with soap solution or light oil sprayed on the trays. Vehicles
transporting bituminous friction course material shall not be lubricated with
light oil.
MIXING OF SUB-BASE MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS
Mixing of sub-base
material and
9.27
Mixing of sub-base material and mixing of bituminous materials shall be

carried out before delivery to the Site at mixing plants approved by the
Engineer. The plants shall be designed and operated to produce uniform
mixes that comply with the specified requirements.
Mixing plant for

9.28
(1)
The mixing plant for bituminous materials shall have at least four
separate cold-feed bins for preliminary cold batching of the coarse and fine
aggregates, and a rotary drum dryer, which will continuously agitate the
aggregates during the heating and drying processes. After passing through
the dryer, the aggregates shall be screened into at least four hot storage bins
before mixing.
(2)
Bitumen heating and storage tanks shall be fitted with circulating
pumps to ensure an even temperature throughout the tanks.
9.15
2006 Edition
(3)
The mixing plant shall be provided with sampling devices to enable
samples of hot aggregates, filler and bitumen to be taken before mixing.
(4)
Insulated surge bins, if fitted to the mixing plant, shall be designed
and operated to prevent segregation occurring in the mix. Heating devices
fitted to surge bins shall be capable of maintaining the temperature of the
mix to within the specified limits.
(5)
Measuring and weighing equipment shall be maintained in a clean,
serviceable condition. The equipment shall be set to zero daily and
calibrated before mixes for the permanent work are produced, and at
regular intervals not exceeding 6 months.
(6)
Alternative methods of mixing bituminous materials may be used
with the approval of the Engineer.
Mixing bituminous
materials
9.29
(1)
Aggregates and filler for bituminous materials shall be measured to
an accuracy of 3.0% by mass. The aggregate moisture content after
drying shall not exceed 0.4% by mass.
(2) Mixing of bituminous materials shall continue after the addition of
all constituents for such period as is necessary to ensure that the aggregates
and filler are uniformly coated with bitumen.
(3)
Bituminous materials shall comply with the
requirements as stated in Table 9.8 during and after mixing.
temperature
Table 9.8: Temperature requirements for bituminous materials

Roadbase, base course

and wearing course
Friction
course
Aggregate temperature at mixing (C)
Min.
Max.
130
175
115
135
Binder temperature at mixing (C)
Min.
Max.
135
165
115
165
Bituminous mixture temperature

after mixing (C)
Min.
Max.
130
165
115
135

at laying (C)
Min.
Max.
110
135

at start of compaction (C)
Min.
85
PRELIMINARY WORK
Installation of utilities
9.30
(1)
Pipes, cables, manholes, chambers, gullies and other utilities below
carriageways shall be completed and fill material shall be deposited and
compacted in trenches before the carriageway is constructed. Openings
to manholes, chambers and gullies shall be protected with temporary
covers or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
9.16
2006 Edition
(2)
Covers, frames and other hardware which will prevent continuous
laying of bituminous materials for roadbase and base course shall not be
fixed in position until such work is complete.
(3)
After the penultimate layer of bituminous material has been laid
and compacted, the layers of asphalt shall be cut out, temporary covers
shall be removed and the permanent covers, frames and other hardware
shall be installed.
(4)
Finishing around covers, frames and other hardware shall be carried
out using bituminous material of the same type as that in the adjacent
surface unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The material shall be
compacted in layers not exceeding 50 mm thick using hand rammers or
mechanical equipment up to the underside of the wearing course or friction
course.
LAYING
AND
MATERIAL
Laying and
compaction of
sub-base material
9.31
COMPACTION
OF
SUB-BASE
(1)
Sub-base material shall be laid and compacted in a manner that will
not result in segregation of the material and at a moisture content that
allows the compaction stated in Clause 9.31(6) to be achieved. The
moisture content shall not be less than 2%.
(2)
Sub-base material shall be laid in layers in such a manner that the
compacted thickness of each layer will not exceed 225 mm. If the
specified final compacted thickness of the sub-base exceeds 225 mm, the
material shall be laid in two or more layers. The minimum thickness of
each layer shall be 100 mm and, if the layers are of unequal thickness, the
lowest layer shall be the thickest.
(3)
Each layer of sub-base material shall be evenly spread immediately
after placing in position and shall be compacted immediately after
spreading.
(4)
The minimum compaction plant to be used for compaction of
sub-base material shall be of the type as stated in Clause 9.36(1).
(5)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before the next
layer is placed on each layer of compacted sub-base material.
(6)
Sub-base material shall be compacted to obtain a relative
compaction of at least 95% maximum dry density throughout.
(7)
The surface of each layer of sub-base shall be maintained in a
compacted condition until the next layer of sub-base material or roadbase
material is laid. The surface shall not be disturbed by construction plant
or other vehicles, and shall be free of ridges, cracks, loose material,
pot-holes, ruts or other defects.
9.17
2006 Edition
Laying and
compaction of recycled
sub-base material in
lieu of virgin material
9.32
(1)
Recycled sub-base material shall be laid and compacted in a manner
which will not result in segregation of the material and at a moisture
content which allows the compaction stated in Clause 9.32(7) to be
achieved. The moisture content shall not be less than 2%.
(2)
The recycled sub-base shall consist of an upper layer of virgin
sub-base material overlying a layer of recycled sub-base material. The ratio
of the thickness of the recycled sub-base layer to that of the virgin sub-base
layer shall be approximately 6 to 4. During laying and compaction, the
thickness of each of these two layers shall take into account the layer
thickness requirements given in sub-clause (3) below.
(3)
Recycled sub-base material shall be laid in layers in such a manner
that the compacted thickness of each layer will not exceed 225 mm. If
the specified final compacted thickness of the sub-base exceeds 225 mm,
the material shall be laid in two or more layers. The minimum thickness
of each layer shall be 100 mm and, if the layers are of unequal thickness,
the lowest layer shall be the thickest.
(4)
Each layer of recycled sub-base material shall be evenly spread
immediately after placing in position and shall be compacted immediately
after spreading.
(5)
The minimum compaction plant to be used for compaction of
recycled sub-base material shall be as stated in Clause 9.36(1).
(6)
layer is placed on each layer of compacted recycled sub-base material.
(7)
Recycled sub-base material shall be compacted to obtain a relative
compaction of at least 95% maximum dry density throughout.
(8)
The surface of each layer of recycled sub-base shall be maintained in
a compacted condition until the next layer of sub-base material or roadbase
material is laid. The surface shall not be disturbed by construction plant
or other vehicles, and shall be free of ridges, cracks, loose material,
pot-holes, ruts or other defects.
LAYING AND COMPACTION OF BITUMINOUS

MATERIALS
Laying and
compaction of
9.33
(1)
Bituminous materials shall not be laid during periods of wet weather
or when ponding water is present on the underlying surface unless in the
opinion of the Engineer the works will not be adversely affected.
(2)
Bituminous wearing course material shall not be laid when the
ambient air temperature is below 8C and bituminous friction course
material shall not be laid when the ambient air temperature is below 10C.
Temperatures shall be measured in the shade near to the surface on which
laying is to be carried out.
(3)
Surfaces on which bituminous materials are laid shall be clean and
free of mud, grit and other deleterious material.
9.18
2006 Edition
(4)
If instructed by the Engineer, a tack coat of bituminous emulsion
shall be applied to surfaces on or against which bituminous materials will
be laid. The tack coat shall be evenly applied at a rate of between 0.4 L/m2
and 0.6 L/m2 using a spray machine complying with BS 434: Part 2
Bituminous materials shall not be laid until the tack coat has cured.
construction plant and other vehicles necessary shall only run on the tack
coat as necessary to lay the bituminous materials.
(5)
If approved by the Engineer, surfaces of existing carriageways may
be regulated before the overlying bituminous material is laid. Bituminous
regulating course material shall be a material approved by the Engineer
complying with the requirements for the 10 mm nominal maximum
aggregate size wearing course material as specified in Table 9.4. Regulating
course material shall be laid by paving machines unless laying by manual
methods is instructed by the Engineer.
(6)
Bituminous materials shall comply with the temperature
requirements as stated in Table 9.8 during laying and compaction.
Laying bituminous
materials by paving
machine
9.34
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, bituminous materials
shall be placed and spread using a self-propelled paving machine with a
screw auger and attached screed capable of spreading and laying the
material to the full width required. The paving machine shall be capable of
giving initial compaction to the material and finishing it to a level suitable
for subsequent compaction.
(2)
Paving machines may be fitted with cut-off shoes or extensions to
limit or extend the width of the screed. Screed extensions shall not be
used unless the screw auger is extended in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The surface texture produced by
paving machines shall be free of segregation and pushing or dragging
marks.
(3)
Bituminous materials laid by paving machines shall be placed
directly from the vehicles transporting the material into the hopper of the
paving machine. Delivery of materials to the paving machine and laying
of the materials shall be at a uniform rate appropriate to the capacity of the
paving machine and compaction plant.
(4)
If any delay in laying operations occurs, the paving machine shall
be removed, the uncompacted cold material shall be removed and a
transverse joint shall be formed as stated in Clause 9.37.
(5)
Paving machines working in echelon shall be as close as
practicable. The machines shall be not more than 30 m apart unless a
longitudinal joint is formed as stated in Clause 9.37.
(6)
Manual placing of materials on freshly laid surfaces shall only be
used for the purpose of locally correcting levels as paving operations
proceed, before compaction by rolling is commenced.
Laying bituminous
materials by manual
methods
9.35
Bituminous materials shall be laid by manual methods only if in the

opinion of the Engineer the use of a paving machine is impracticable. If
approved by the Engineer, bituminous materials may be laid by manual
methods:
(a)
In courses of irregular shape and varying thickness,

9.19
2006 Edition
Compaction of
and sub-base material
9.36
(b)
In confined locations,
(c)
Adjacent to expansion joints, covers, frames and other

hardware, and
(d)
In reinstatements to trenches.
(1)
The minimum compaction plant to be used to compact bituminous
roadbase, base course, regulating course, wearing course and sub-base
material shall be:
(a)
A smooth three-wheeled steel-wheeled roller with a mass of

between 6 t and 12 t, or a vibratory tandem steel-wheeled
roller with an effective mass of between 6 t and 12 t, and
A smooth pneumatic-tyre roller with a mass of between 12 t
and 25 t, and with not less than seven overlapping wheels
which have tyres that are capable of having pressures varying
between 300 MPa and 800 MPa, and
Suitable mechanical rammers and hand-tools, or
(b)
Other types of rollers, vibrating plates and rammers approved

by the Engineer, or other similar plant approved by the
Engineer, necessary to produce the required degree of
compaction.
(2)
Bituminous roadbase, base course, regulating course and wearing
course materials shall be initially rolled using a steel-wheeled roller
operated in a longitudinal direction along the carriageway with the driving
wheels nearest the paving machine.
(3)
All roller marks shall be removed from the surface of bituminous
roadbase, base course and wearing course materials using either a
smooth-wheeled dead-weight roller or a smooth-wheeled vibratory roller in
non-vibrating mode.
(4)
Bituminous friction course material shall be compacted using rollers
as stated in Clause 9.36(1)(a) without the application of vibration. Rollers
shall not have an excessive film of water over the front and rear wheels.
Bituminous friction course material shall be compacted until all roller
marks are removed and compaction is complete.
(5)
Rollers shall not be parked on newly laid or compacted bituminous
materials.
(6)
Bituminous materials immediately adjacent to kerbs, covers, frames
and other hardware where rollers cannot operate effectively shall be
compacted using hand-operated mechanical compaction plant.
Joints in bituminous
materials
9.37
(1)
The screed of the paving machine shall overlap previously laid strips
of bituminous material by at least 50 mm and shall be sufficiently high that
compaction will produce a smooth dense flush joint. Bituminous
materials overlapping the previously laid strip shall be pushed back to the
edge of the previously laid strip and the excess material shall be removed.
9.20
2006 Edition
(2) Longitudinal joints in friction course or wearing course shall be

formed coincident with the specified position of the lane-markings unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(3) A prepared joint shall be formed between hot bituminous material
and cold material or existing bituminous material which is at a temperature
below the minimum specified laying temperature.
(4) The distance between prepared longitudinal joints in different layers
shall be at least 150 mm and the distance between prepared transverse
joints in different layers shall be at least 500 mm.
(5) Prepared joints in base course and wearing course shall be formed by
cutting back the face of the cold material or existing bituminous material
for a minimum distance of twice the depth of the layer or 100 mm,
whichever is greater. A vertical face shall be cut for the full depth of the
layer. All loosened materials shall be removed and the face shall be
coated with bituminous emulsion. The bituminous emulsion shall not be
applied beyond the edges of the joint. The hot bituminous materials shall
be laid and compacted against the coated face with a joint formed as stated
in this clause.
(6)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer friction course joints
shall not be coated with bituminous emulsion.
PROTECTION OF SURFACES OF SUB-BASE

MATERIAL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
Protection of surfaces
of sub-base material
and bituminous
materials
9.38
(1)
The surface of each layer of sub-base material and bituminous
materials shall be kept clean and free of deleterious material. If instructed
by the Engineer, bituminous priming coat shall be applied to the final
surface of the sub-base layer at a rate of between 0.9 L/m2 and 1.1 L/m2.
(2)
Layers of carriageways under construction shall not be used by
construction plant or vehicles other than those which in the opinion of the
Engineer are essential to construct the work.
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, bituminous courses
shall not be used by construction plant or other vehicles until 6 hours after
the material has been laid and compacted.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
alignment of
carriageway
9.39
The line of the edges of carriageways shall be within 25 mm of the specified

line, except at the edges of structures where it shall be within 6 mm.
9.21
2006 Edition
Tolerances: level of
carriageway
9.40
(1)
The levels of the surface of each layer of sub-base, roadbase, base
course, wearing course and friction course shall be determined on a grid at
10 m centres in the longitudinal direction and at 2 m centres in the
transverse direction.
(2)
The level of the surface of each layer of sub-base, roadbase, base
course, wearing course and friction course shall be within the tolerances
(3)
The difference in level of the surface of wearing course and friction
course across joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
(4)
The combination of permitted tolerances in levels shall not result
in a reduction in the thickness of the pavement, excluding the sub-base, of
more than 15 mm from the specified thickness nor a reduction in the
thickness of the bituminous wearing course or friction course of more
than 5 mm from the specified thickness.
Table 9.9: Tolerances in level

Type of surface
Permitted tolerance in level (mm)
Sub-base
+ 10
- 20
Roadbase course
+8
- 15
Base course
6
Wearing course
Friction course
Tolerances:
covers, frames and
other hardware
9.41
The level of covers, frames and other hardware shall be not lower than, and
shall not be more than 5 mm higher than the surface of the carriageway.
The level of gully gratings shall not be higher than, and shall not be more
than 5 mm lower than, the surface of the carriageway.

Testing:
surface regularity
9.42
The surface regularity of the final layer of the pavement shall be

determined as stated in Clause 10.55.
surface regularity
9.43
The results of tests for surface regularity shall comply with Clause 10.56.
TESTING: SUB-BASE MATERIAL

Batch:
sub-base material
9.44
A batch of sub-base material is a quantity not exceeding 250 m 3 of

sub-base material of the same type and same mix produced at the same
mixing plant, and delivered to the Site at any one time.
9.22
2006 Edition
Samples:
sub-base material
9.45
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of each
type of sub-base material shall be provided from each batch of sub-base
material delivered to the Site.
(2)
The size of each sample shall be at least 50 kg. The method of
sampling shall be in accordance with BS 812: Part 102.
Testing:
sub-base material
9.46
(1)
Each sample of sub-base material shall be tested to determine the
particle size distribution, ten percent fines value, maximum dry density,
optimum moisture content and plasticity index of the portion passing a
425m BS test sieve.
(2)
The method of testing for particle size distribution shall be in
accordance with BS 812: Part 103.1.
(3)
The method of testing for ten percent fines value shall be in
accordance with BS 812: Part 111, except that the sample shall be soaked
in water at room temperature for 24 hours and shall not be oven-dried
before testing.
(4)
The method of testing for plasticity index shall be in accordance
with Geospec 3, Test Method 6.1, except that sample preparation shall be
by wet sieving the material over a 425 m BS test sieve.
(5)
The method for testing for maximum dry density and optimum
moisture content shall be in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method
10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8, and Appendix 6.4 of this
Specification, whichever as instructed by the Engineer.
Testing:
Recycled sub-base
material in lieu of
virgin material
9.47
(1)
Each sample of recycled sub-base material shall be tested to
determine the particle size distribution, 10 % fines value, maximum dry
density, optimum moisture content, plasticity index of the portion passing a
425m BS test sieve, CBR value, soundness value, water-soluble sulphate
content and percentage of contaminants as defined in Table 9.2.
(2)
The method of testing for particle size distribution shall be in
accordance with BS 812:Part 103.1.
(3)
The method of testing for 10 % fines value shall be in accordance
with BS 812:Part 111, except that the sample shall be soaked in water at
room temperature for 24 hours and shall not be oven-dried before testing.
(4) The method of testing for plasticity index shall be in

accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 6.1, except that sample
preparation shall be by wet sieving the material over a 425 m BS
test sieve.
(5)
The method for testing for maximum dry density and optimum
moisture content shall be in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 10.1,
10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8, and Appendix 6.4 of this
Specification, whichever as instructed by the Engineer.
(6)
121.
Soundness value shall be determined in accordance with BS 812:Part
9.23
2006 Edition
(7)
Water-soluble sulphate content shall be determined in accordance
with BS 1377: Part 3.
(8)
The maximum organic material content shall be determined in
accordance with BS1377: Part3.
(9)
The maximum metals and foreign material content shall be
determined in accordance with the following procedure:
By means of the sampling procedure detailed in BS812: Part101, a sample
shall be obtained of the aggregate containing at least 500 particles. The
particles shall then be sorted manually into the following separate fractions:
(i)
Concrete and dense or normal weight aggregates.
(ii)
Brick, mortar, lightweight block and lightweight aggregate.
(iii) Asphalt, bitumen, tar and mixtures of these materials with

aggregate.
(iv) Wood.
(v)
Glass.
(vi) Metal.
(vii) Other foreign material such as clay lumps and plastics
Because of the adherence of dust, it may be necessary to wash or break
some particles to make a positive identification. The resulting fractions shall
be weighed and expressed as a percentage of the total weight of material.
Notes:
(a)
Lightweight block material - This should be noted as a separate
category if more than 1% by volume (approx. 5 pieces in 500).
(b)
Ultra-lightweight material (e.g. insulation) - This should be noted if
more than 1% by volume (5 pieces in 500).
(10) CBR value shall be determined in accordance with BS1377:Part 4
with surcharge discs. The material shall be tested at the density and moisture
content likely to develop in equilibrium pavement conditions, which shall be
taken as being the density relating to a uniform air voids content of 5% and
the optimum moisture content determined in compliance with BS 5835:Part
1:1980.
TESTING: RELATIVE COMPACTION OF SUB-BASE

Testing:
relative compaction of
sub-base
9.48
(1)
Each area of sub-base which contains sub-base material of the same
type and same mix produced at the same mixing plant and which is laid and
compacted in a single layer in one day shall be tested to determine the
relative compaction. Tests shall be carried out after the sub-base material
has been laid and compacted in the final position.
9.24
2006 Edition
(2)
Two tests shall be carried out on each area of 1000 m2 or part
thereof laid and compacted each day.
(3)
Tests shall be carried out at positions, which in the opinion of the
Engineer are representative of the area of compacted sub-base as a whole.
(4)
The method of testing for relative compaction shall be as stated in
Clause 6.81(4).
sub-base
9.49
The results of tests for relative compaction of sub-base shall comply with
the requirements stated in Clause 9.31(6).
Non-compliance:
sub-base
9.50
If the result of any test for relative compaction of sub-base does not comply
with the specified requirements for relative compaction of sub-base, the
area shall be re-compacted and two additional tests for relative compaction
of sub-base shall be carried out on the area.
TESTING: AGGREGATES, FILLER AND BITUMEN

FOR BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
Batch:
aggregates, filler and
bitumen for
9.51
A batch of aggregates, filler or bitumen for bituminous materials is any

quantity of aggregates, filler or bitumen for bituminous materials of the
same type, manufactured or produced in the same place and covered by the
same certificates delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples:
bitumen for
9.52
(1)
One sample of each type of aggregate, filler and bitumen for
bituminous materials shall be provided from each batch.
(2)
The size of each sample and the method of sampling shall be as
Table 9.10: Size of samples and method of sampling for aggregates, filler and bitumen
Material
Minimum size
of sample
Method of sampling
BS 812: Part 102
Aggregate, nominal maximum

aggregate size exceeding 28 mm
50 kg

aggregate size 5 mm to 28 mm
25 kg

aggregate size less than 5 mm
10 kg
Filler
5 kg
ASTM D 242
Bitumen
2 litres
ASTM D 140
9.25
2006 Edition
Testing:
bitumen for
9.53
Each sample of aggregate, filler and bitumen for bituminous materials shall
be tested to determine the properties stated in Table 9.11. The method of
testing shall be as stated in Table 9.11.
Table 9.11: Testing aggregates, filler and bitumen for bituminous materials
Material
Coarse aggregate
Fine aggregate
Filler
Bitumen
Property
Method of testing
Relative density
Water absorption
BS 812: Part 2
BS 812: Part 111
BS 812: Part 103.1
Flakiness index
BS 812: Part 105
Relative density
Water absorption
BS 812: Part 2
Relative density
BS EN 196-6
BS 812: Part 103.1
Relative density
ASTM D 3289
Softening point
BS 2000
Penetration
ASTM D 5
Ductility
ASTM D 113
Retained penetration
after thin film oven test
ASTM D 1754
Solubility
ASTM D 2042
Viscosity
ASTM D 2171 or
BS 2000
Loss on heating
BS 2000
9.26
2006 Edition
TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS OTHER THAN

BITUMINOUS FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL
Batch:
bituminous
materials other than
bituminous friction
course material
9.54
A batch of bituminous materials other than bituminous friction coarse

material is a quantity not exceeding the limits stated in Table 9.12 of
bituminous materials of the same type and same mix produced at the same
mixing plant in one day.
Table 9.12: Maximum size of batch for bituminous materials other than bituminous friction course material
Material
Samples:
friction course
material
9.55
Maximum batch size
Wearing course
100t
Base course
150t
Road base
200t
(1)
One sample of bituminous materials other than bituminous friction
course material shall be provided from each batch unless otherwise
required by the Engineer.
(2)
The size of each sample shall be as stated in Table 9.13.
(3)
Samples shall be taken at the mixing plant or at the location where
the bituminous material will be laid as instructed by the Engineer.
Samples taken at the mixing plant shall be taken from the delivery vehicle
immediately after loading from the plant or from the surge bin. Samples
taken at the location where the bituminous materials will be laid shall be
taken from the delivery vehicle.
(4)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer the method of sampling
shall be in accordance with ASTM D 979.
Table 9.13: Size of samples for bituminous materials other than bituminous friction course material
Material
Minimum size of sample

(in kg)
Wearing course
(10mm nominal maximum aggregate size)
10
Wearing course
(20mm nominal maximum aggregate size)
16
Base course
24
Roadbase
24
9.27
2006 Edition
Testing:
friction course
material
9.56
(1)
Each sample of bituminous materials taken as stated in Clause
9.55(1) shall be tested to determine the particle size distribution, bitumen
content and Rice's specific gravity.
(2)

Particle size distribution :
ASTM C 136 with modifications

and ASTM C 117, Method B
Bitumen content
ASTM D6307 or
ASTM D 2172, Method A
Rice's specific gravity
ASTM D 2041,
Weighing-in-water method
Bulk specific gravity
ASTM D 2726
(3)
For particle size distribution tests in accordance with ASTM C 136,
the modifications are:
(a) Sieves to BS 410 instead of sieves to ASTM E 11 shall be used.
(b) Each sample of bituminous materials taken as stated in Clause
9.55 shall be reduced to a test specimen of suitable size as
follows:
Nominal Maximum Aggregate
Size (mm)
37.5
28.0
20.0
10.0
Minimum Sample Size (kg)

2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
(4)
The residual pressure manometer specified in ASTM D 2041 may be
replaced by a vacuum gauge.
friction course
material
9.57
(1) The results of tests on bituminous materials other than bituminous

roadbase and friction course materials shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a) The particle size distribution shall be such that not more than
two points on the particle size distribution curve are outside the
approved gradation envelopes determined as stated in Clause
9.22(2). Notwithstanding the above distribution, the percentage
passing the 75 m BS test sieve shall not exceed the approved
design value by more than 3%.
(b) The bitumen content shall be within the approved bitumen
content range determined as stated in Clause 9.22(3).
(2)
The results of tests on bituminous roadbase material shall comply
(a) The particle size distribution shall be such that not more than
two points on the particle size distribution curve are outside the
design limit as stated in Table 9.4. Notwithstanding the above
9.28
2006 Edition
distribution, the percentage passing the 75 m BS test sieve

shall not exceed 8 % as specified in Table 9.4.
(b) The bitumen content shall be within the allowable bitumen
content range as specified in Table 9.4.
TESTING:
MATERIAL
BITUMINOUS
FRICTION
COURSE
Batch:
bituminous friction
course material
9.58
A batch of bituminous friction course material is a quantity not exceeding

100 t of bituminous friction course material of the same mix produced at
the same mixing plant in one day.
Samples:
bituminous friction
course material
9.59
(1)
One sample of bituminous friction course material shall be provided
from each batch of bituminous friction course material.
(2)
The size of each sample shall be at least 15 kg.
(3)
Samples shall be taken at the mixing plant from the delivery vehicle
immediately after loading from the plant or from the surge bin.
(4)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer the method of sampling
shall be in accordance with ASTM D 979.
Testing:
bituminous friction
course material
9.60
(1)
Each sample of bituminous friction course material shall be tested to
determine the particle size distribution and bitumen content.
(2)

Particle size distribution :
ASTM C 136 with modifications

and ASTM C 117, Method B
Bitumen content
ASTM D 2172, Method A
(3)
For particle size distribution tests in accordance with ASTM C 136,
the modifications are:
(a) Sieves to BS 410 instead of sieves to ASTM E 11 shall be used.
(b) Each sample of bituminous materials taken as stated in Clause
9.59 shall be reduced to a test specimen of suitable size as
follows:
Nominal Maximum Aggregate
Size (mm)
37.5
28.0
20.0
10.0
9.29
Minimum Sample Size (kg)

2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
2006 Edition
bituminous friction
cours material
9.61
The results of tests on bituminous friction course material shall comply

(a)
The particle size distribution shall be within the approved

gradation envelopes as determined in Clause 9.22(2).
(b)
The bitumen content shall be within the approved bitumen

content range as determined in Clause 9.22(3).
TESTING: BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CORES

Samples:
bituminous material
cores
9.62
(1)
Each area of roadbase, base course and wearing course which
contains bituminous material of the same type and same mix produced at
the same mixing plant and which is laid and compacted in a single layer in
one day shall be tested to determine the compacted layer thickness.
(2)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer each area of bituminous
material to be tested shall be divided into approximately equal sub-areas as
stated in Table 9.14. One core shall be taken at random from each
sub-area.
(3)
Cores shall not be taken from within 300 mm of covers, frames and
other hardware, or construction joints in the bituminous material.
(4)
Cores shall be taken by a mechanically operated coring machine.
(5)
Cores shall be 150 mm diameter for bituminous material with a
designed layer thickness of 40 mm or greater and shall be 100 mm diameter
for bituminous material with a designed layer thickness of less than 40 mm.
(6)
Cores shall be taken as soon as practicable but not later than 48
hours after completion of the paving operation.
(7)
If agreed by the Engineer, the sampling rate for roadbase may be
applied to wearing course and base course.
(8)
Holes formed by taking cores shall be filled with compatible
bituminous material as soon as practicable after the core has been taken.
Table 9.14: Rate of sampling for bituminous material cores
No. of sub-areas/cores
Area of bituminous material

laid and compacted in one day
Roadbase
Wearing course
and Base course
10
5 000 - 10 000 m2
10
15
> 10 000 m2
20
20
< 5 000 m2
9.30
2006 Edition
Testing:
bituminous material
cores
9.63
(1)
Each bituminous material core shall be measured to determine the
compacted layer thickness of the bituminous material and tested to
determine the air void content.
(2)
The method of testing for air void content shall be in accordance
with ASTM D 3203.
bituminous material
cores
Non-compliance:
bituminous material
cores
9.64
9.65
The results of tests on bituminous material cores shall comply with the
(a)
The average air void content of the cores taken from an area of
bituminous base course or wearing course material shall be not
less than 3.0% and not greater than 6.0%.
(b)
The air void content of each core taken from an area of

bituminous base course or wearing course material shall be not
less than 2.5% and not greater than 7.5%.
(c)
The air void content of each core taken from an area of

bituminous roadbase material shall be not less than 3.0% and
not greater than 9.0%.
(d)
The compacted layer thickness as measured from each core

shall comply with the thickness requirements stated in Clause
9.40(4) and shall be compatible with the level tolerances stated
in Table 9.9.
(1)
If the result of any test for air void content of cores does not comply
with the specified requirements for air void content, the following
procedure shall apply:
(a)
Four additional cores shall be taken from each sub-area for

which the original core did not comply with the specified
requirements for air void content. The cores shall be taken at
locations evenly spaced throughout the sub-area such that in
the opinion of the Engineer they are representative of the
sub-area as a whole.
(b)
Each additional core shall be tested to determine the air void

content and the test results of the additional cores from the
same sub-area shall be averaged.
(c)
The average air void content of the sub-area thus obtained shall
replace the original air void content of the respective sub-area.
The new average air void content of the area of bituminous
material tested shall then be calculated for compliance
checking.
(2)
If the air void content of any of the four additional cores determined
as stated in Clause 9.63(2) is less than 2.5% or greater than 7.5% for
bituminous base course material and bituminous wearing course material,
or less than 3.0% or greater than 9.0% for bituminous roadbase material,
the sub-area from which the cores were taken shall be considered as not
complying with the specified requirements.
9.31
2006 Edition
(3)
The area of bituminous material tested shall be considered as not
complying with the specified requirements for average air void content if
the average air void content of the cores taken from the area does not
comply with the specified requirements for average air void content.
(4)
If the result of any test for compacted layer thickness of cores is not
compatible with the requirements of Table 9.9 or Clause 9.40(4), four
additional cores shall be taken from the same sub-area and the average
compacted layer thickness determined. The cores shall be taken at locations
evenly spaced throughout the sub-area such that in the opinion of the
Engineer they are representative of the sub-area as a whole.
(5)
If the average compacted layer thickness determined as stated in
Clause 9.65(4) is not in accordance with the permitted compacted layer
thickness stated in Clause 9.64(d), the sub-area from which the cores were
taken shall be considered as not complying with the specified requirements.
TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH AND PERMEABILITY

Testing:
texture depth and
permeability
9.66
(1)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer each area of friction course
to be tested shall be divided into approximately equal sub-areas as stated in
Table 9.15. Tests for texture depth and permeability shall be carried out
on each sub-area at positions, which in the opinion of the Engineer are
representative of the sub-area of friction course as a whole. No
measurement shall be taken within 300 mm of the longitudinal edge of the
carriageway.
(2)
If agreed by the Engineer the number of tests for texture depth and
permeability may be reduced to the minimum stated in Table 9.15.
(3)
Tests shall be carried out before the area of friction course is used by
construction plant or other vehicles.
(4)
Testing to determine the texture depth will be carried out by the
Engineer. The method of testing shall be by the sand patch test in
accordance with Appendix 10.1.
(5)
Testing to determine the permeability will be carried out by the
Engineer. The method of testing shall be in accordance with Appendix
9.1.
texture depth
9.67
The results of tests for texture depth on an area of friction course shall
comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The average texture depth shall not be less than 1.5 mm.
(b) Not more than one of the tests for texture depth shall give a
result of less than 1.2 mm.
9.32
2006 Edition
permeability
9.68
The time for 150 mL of water to drain into the friction course in the
permeability test stated in Clause 9.66(5) shall not exceed 30 seconds.
Table 9.15: Rate of testing for texture depth and permeability

Area of bituminous
material laid and
compacted in one day
No. of sub-areas/tests
Normal
Minimum
< 5 000 m2
10
5 000 - 10 000 m2
15
10
> 10 000 m2
20
20
9.33
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 9.1
DETERMINATION OF THE PERMEABILITY OF
FRICTION COURSE MATERIAL
Scope
9.1.1
This method covers the determination of the permeability of friction

course material by measuring the time taken for 150 mL of water to drain
into the material.
Apparatus
9.1.2
Procedure
9.1.3
9.1.4
(a)
A non-porous ring with an internal diameter of 150 mm 2 mm,

and a minimum height of 20 mm.
(b)
Suitable sealant for sealing one end of the ring onto the friction
course surface.
(c)
A measuring cylinder for measuring 150 mL of water to an

accuracy of 1 mL.
(d)
Two containers, each suitable for containing and pouring 150 mL of

water.
(e)
A stopwatch.

(a)
Carefully inspect the specified test location and record any

unusual features.
(b)
Place one end of the ring on the friction course at the location to
be tested, and seal the interface with sealant to prevent any
leakage of water.
(c)
Prepare two volumes of water of 150 mL each using the

measuring cylinder and the two containers.
(d)
Pour one 150 mL measure of water into the ring quickly and
steadily without spillage.
(e)
As soon as all of the water has drained into the friction course,
pour the second 150 mL of water into the ring quickly and steadily
without spillage, and at the same time start the stopwatch.
(f)
Record the time taken for the second 150 mL of water to drain
into the friction course surface.

(a)
The test location.
(b)
The time taken for the second 150 mL of water to drain into the
friction course surface, to the nearest one second.
(c)
9.34
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 10
10.1
2006 Edition
10.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 10
GENERAL
10.01
Formwork and finishes
10.02
Formwork and finishes to concrete for concrete carriageways shall comply

with Section 14.
Reinforcement
10.03
Steel reinforcement for concrete carriageways shall comply with Section

15.
Concrete
10.04
Concrete for concrete carriageways shall comply with Section 16.
Curing compound
10.05
Curing compound for concrete carriageways shall comply with Section 16.
Earthworks
10.06
Earthworks for concrete carriageways shall comply with Section 6.
MATERIALS
Reinforcement
10.07
(1)
Fabric reinforcement shall be steel fabric complying with BS 4483.
The fabric shall be manufactured from steel wire which complies with BS
4482 and which has a type 2 bond classification.
(2)
Dowel bars, tie bars, cradles and tie bars for cradles shall be Grade
250 plain round steel bars complying with CS 2. Dowel bars and tie bars
shall be straight. Both ends of dowel bars and one end of tie bars shall be
sawn square with all burrs removed.
Cement mortar for

cradles
10.08
Cement mortar for supporting cradles shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3

parts of fine aggregate together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for the required work. Fine
aggregates shall be sand or crushed rock to BS 1200 and shall pass a 5 mm
BS test sieve.
Fine aggregate
10.09
Fine aggregate for concrete shall be natural river-deposited sand

consisting of at least 95% by mass of quartz grains or clean, hard and
durable crushed rock in accordance with Section 16.
10.10

Joint filler
10.11
Joint filler shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall
be a firm, compressible, single thickness, non-rotting filler.
Joint sealant
10.12
(1)
Joint sealant shall be of a grade suited to the climatic conditions of
Hong Kong and shall perform effectively over a temperature range of 0C
to 60C.
10.3
2006 Edition
(2)
Joint sealant shall be a cold poured two-part polymer-based sealant
complying with BS 5212, Type N.
(3)
Primers and caulking material for use with joint sealant shall be of a
proprietary types recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer and
Bond breaker tape
10.13
Bond breaker tape shall be of a proprietary type recommended by the joint

sealant manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The tape shall be a
polyethylene film with adhesive applied on one side and shall be the full
width of the groove.
Groove forming strip
10.14
(1)
Groove forming strip shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. The strip shall be a firm compressible strip of either ethylene
vinyl acetate foam with a density of at least 90 kg/m3 or synthetic rubber.
The strip shall be 25 mm deep and 5 mm thick and shall be sufficiently
rigid to remain in position during concreting without deforming or
stretching.
(2)
Adhesive for groove forming strip shall be of a proprietary type
recommended by the groove forming strip manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
Sleeves for dowel bars

and tie bars
10.15
Sleeves for dowel bars and tie bars shall be uPVC and shall have a nominal
wall thickness not exceeding 1.5 mm. The sleeves shall fit tightly to the
bars.
Epoxy resin grout
10.16
Epoxy resin grout shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
CONCRETE
Concrete mix
10.17
Concrete for concrete carriageways shall comply with the following

requirements:
(a)
Concrete shall be Grade 40/20 and shall be a designed mix.
(b)
The concrete mix shall contain either PFAC or a minimum of

265 kg of PC plus a minimum of 85 kg of PFA per m3 of
compacted concrete.
(c)
The percentage by mass of fine aggregate to total aggregate

shall be at least 30%.
(d) The workability in terms of designed slump value shall not

exceed 30 mm.
Cementitious content
of concrete
10.18
The minimum cementitious content of concrete for concrete carriageways

shall be 350 kg/m3.
10.4
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
materials for joints
10.19
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for joints in
concrete carriageways shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for joint filler

manufacture and showing that the joint filler complies with the
tests for:
- Disintegration and shrinkage
- Recovery value and reduction in mass
- Extrusion,
(b)
Manufacturers literature for joint sealant, including details of

the method and time required for mixing the different
components, and a certificate showing the manufacturer's
sealant complies with the requirements stated in the Contract
and including results of tests for:
- Application life
- Tack-free time
- Resistance to flow
- Recovery
- Adhesion and cohesion in tension and compression
- Resistance to heat ageing,
(c) Manufacturers literature and a certificate for groove-forming

strip showing the manufacturer's name, the date and place of
manufacture and showing that the groove forming strip
complies with the requirements stated in the Contract and
including results of tests for density, and
(d) Particulars of primers and caulking material for joint sealant,
adhesive for groove forming strip, bond breaker tape and
sleeves for dowel bars and tie bars.
(2)
Engineer at least 14 days before the first delivery of the material to the Site.
Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of the material delivered to
the Site.
Particulars of methods
of construction
10.20
Particulars of proposed methods of construction for concrete carriageways

shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before the trial length is
constructed.
10.5
2006 Edition
10.21

Engineer at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted:
(a) Polyethylene sheeting,
(b) Joint filler,
(c) Bond-breaker tape,
(d) Groove-forming strip, and
(e) Sleeves for dowel bars, including compressible filler, and for tie
bars.
TRIALS
trial-mix concrete
10.22
The results of the tests on trial-mix concrete for concrete carriageways shall
-
Trial length
10.23
Each of the six slump values shall not exceed 40 mm, and the average
of the six slump values shall not exceed 35 mm.
(1)
A trial length of concrete carriageway shall be constructed to
demonstrate that the proposed materials, mix design, methods of
production and methods of construction will produce a concrete
carriageway which complies with the specified requirements.
(2)
The trial length shall be constructed using the materials, mix design,
methods of production and methods of construction submitted to the
Engineer.
(3)
If it is not stated in the Contract that the trial length is to be
constructed in a location separate from the permanent carriageway, the trial
length shall be the first 30 m of the permanent carriageway, or such other
length agreed by the Engineer. The trial length shall be constructed over a
width of two bays and shall include at least one expansion joint, one
contraction joint and the longitudinal joint between the bays.
(4)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 48 hours, or within
a shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing the trial length.
(5)
The trial length shall be completed in sufficient time before the
permanent carriageway is constructed to allow the Engineer a period of at
least 7 days to determine if the specified requirements have been complied
with in the trial length.
(6)
The trial length shall be protected from damage and shall be left in
position unless the Engineer instructs its removal. A trial length which
forms part of the permanent carriageway and which complies with the
specified requirements shall not be removed.
10.6
2006 Edition
Testing: trial length
10.24
(1)
The trial length shall be tested to determine the accuracy of the
alignment and level, the surface regularity and the texture depth. The
method of testing the surface regularity shall be as stated in Clause 10.55.
The method of testing the texture depth shall be as stated in Clause 10.57.
(2)
Concrete cores shall be cut from the trial length to determine the
thickness of the slab, the positions of the reinforcement and joint
components, the amount of segregation of the constituents and the presence
of voids. The method of taking, preparing, inspecting and testing concrete
cores shall be as stated in Clauses 10.62 and 10.63.
trial length
Non-compliance: trial
length
10.25
10.26
The results of tests on trial lengths shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The alignment, levels and thickness of the carriageway shall

comply with Clauses 10.53 and 10.54.
(b)
The surface regularity shall comply with Clause 10.56.
(c)
The texture depth shall comply with Clause 10.58.
(d)
The positions of the reinforcement and joint components shall

comply with Clauses 10.49, 10.50, 10.51 and 10.53.
(e)
The amount of segregation of the constituents and the presence

of voids shall comply with Clause 10.64.
(1)
If the result of any test on the trial length does not comply with the
specified requirements for the trial length, particulars of proposed changes
to the materials, mix design, methods of production or methods of
construction shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial lengths shall
be constructed until the result of every test on the trial length complies with
the specified requirements for the trial length. Further trial mixes shall be
made unless in the opinion of the Engineer non-compliance of the trial
length was not due to the concrete mix.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, trial lengths, or parts of
trial lengths, which do not comply with the specified requirements for the
trial length shall be removed.
Commencement of
concreting
10.27
(1)
Concrete shall not be placed in the permanent carriageway other
than in a trial length until the result of every test on the trial length complies
with the specified requirements for the trial length.
(2)
Concrete may be placed in the permanent carriageway before the
results of tests for compressive strength of the trial mix are available
provided that the result of every other test on the trial mix and trial length
complies with the specified requirements for trial mix concrete and for the
trial length.
and methods of
construction
10.28
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials, mix design, methods of

production and methods of construction used to produce a trial length
which complies with the specified requirements shall not be changed.
10.7
2006 Edition
Storage of materials
for joints and
polyethylene sheeting
10.29
(1)
Joint sealant, primer for joint sealant and adhesive for groove
forming strip shall be stored in sealed containers marked to identify the
contents and protected from exposure to conditions that may adversely
affect the material. The materials shall be stored in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations and shall not be used after the
recommended shelf life has been exceeded.
(2)
Polyethylene sheeting, joint filler, bond breaker tape, groove
forming strip and sleeves for dowel bars and tie bars shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations in a dry,
weatherproof store with a raised floor. Joint filler shall be stored in sealed
plastic bags and shall not be exposed to moisture or air.
PRELIMINARY WORK
Installation of utilities
10.30
(1)
Pipes, cables, manholes, chambers, gullies and other utilities below
concrete carriageways shall be completed and fill material shall be
deposited and compacted in trenches before the carriageway is constructed.
Openings to manholes, chambers and gullies shall be protected by
temporary covers or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
Box-outs shall be formed in concrete carriageways for covers,
frames and other hardware. The covers, frames and other hardware shall
be fixed in position after the main slab has been concreted and before the
infill slab is concreted.
Preparation of
formation and
sub-base
10.31
Construction of concrete carriageways shall start as soon as practicable

after the formation or sub-base has been completed. The formation shall
be protected as stated in Clause 6.52 and the sub-base shall be protected as
stated in Clause 9.35 until construction of the carriageway starts.
Laying polyethylene
sheeting
10.32
Polyethylene sheeting below concrete carriageways shall be laid flat

without creases. Laps shall be at least 300 mm and there shall be no gaps
at the edges of bays.
FORMWORK
Formwork
10.33
(1)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, formwork for concrete
carriageways shall be steel. The finish to concrete surfaces for transverse
and longitudinal joints shall be Class F3. The finish to concrete surfaces
for other edges of the carriageway shall be Class F2.
(2)
Concrete shall not be placed against excavated surfaces or against
kerbs unless permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
Formwork shall not be loosened or removed until at least 7 hours
after concreting has been completed.
10.8
2006 Edition
FORMING JOINTS
Forming joints
10.34
(1)
Materials for joints in concrete carriageways shall be used in
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations or as otherwise stated
in the Contract.
(2)
Dowel bars, tie bars and their sleeves shall be securely fixed in
position through holes in the formwork before concreting. The bars shall
be parallel to the top surface of the slab and to each other. Bars at
transverse joints shall be parallel to the adjacent longitudinal joint or to the
longitudinal axis of the carriageway if there is no longitudinal joint or to
other lines instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
Joint filler shall be cut to size before fixing and shall be securely
fixed in position to the existing concrete surface before concreting. There
shall be no gaps between the joint filler and the formation. Holes in joint
filler for dowel bars shall be cut to form a sliding fit to the sleeved bar.
(4)
Transverse joints
10.35
Joints shall be formed perpendicular to the top surface of the slab.
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, transverse joints in
concrete carriageways shall be straight and perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the carriageway.
(2)
Transverse expansion joints and transverse contraction joints shall
be formed only at the specified positions. The joints shall be continued
across longitudinal joints and shall be in line and of the same type on both
sides of the longitudinal joint. The joints shall be continued through
kerbs, edgings and quadrants and their foundation and backing. The joint
dimensions and materials shall be the same as the transverse joints with the
omission of dowel bars. The location of additional contraction joints in
accordance with Clause 11.54(3) shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
The joint filler and groove for joint sealant at transverse expansion
joints shall provide complete separation of adjacent slabs.
Longitudinal joints
10.36
Longitudinal joints in concrete carriageways shall be formed only at the

specified positions.
Isolation joints
10.37
Isolation joints shall be formed in concrete carriageways at manholes and

chambers.
Forming grooves
10.38
(1)
Grooves in concrete carriageways for joint sealant shall be straight,
shall have parallel sides and shall be perpendicular to the top surface of the
slab. The bottom of the groove shall be flat and shall be parallel to the top
surface of the slab.
(2)
Grooves at transverse expansion joints and at isolation joints at
manholes and chambers shall be formed by sawing the groove to the
specified width and depth not less than 7 days after concreting. The
grooves shall be located over the joint filler such that the upper surface of
the joint filler is entirely contained in the groove.
(3)
Grooves at transverse contraction joints shall be formed using one of
the following methods:
10.9
2006 Edition
Method 1:
An initial groove shall be sawn as soon as practicable

after concreting without causing spalling of the edges.
The width of the initial groove shall be less than the
specified width of the final groove and the depth of the
initial groove shall be between 1/4 and 1/3 of the
thickness of the slab. The final groove shall be sawn
to the specified width and depth not less than 7 days
after concreting. The center-lines of the initial and
final grooves shall coincide.
Method 2:
The final groove shall be sawn to the specified width

and depth as soon as practicable after concreting
without causing spalling of the edges.
(4)
Grooves at transverse construction joints shall be formed by fixing
groove-forming strip with adhesive to the concrete already placed before
concreting the adjacent slab.
Protection of grooves
10.39
Before permanent sealing, grooves in concrete carriageways for joint

sealant shall be protected from contamination by a temporary sealing strip
or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Sealing joints
10.40
(1)
The permanent sealing of joints in concrete carriageways shall be
carried out at least 7 days after concreting unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
(2)
Immediately before permanent sealing, groove forming strips,
temporary seals, dirt and loose material shall be removed from the groove
and the sides of the groove shall be cleaned and roughened by water jetting,
sand blasting or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Caulking material shall be firmly packed in the bottom of the groove
if the joint sealant is not required to extend to the bottom of the groove.
(4)
Bond breaker tape shall be fixed continuously and evenly along the
bottom of the groove for the full width and length of the groove.
(5)
Primer for the joint sealant shall be applied to the sides of the groove
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(6)
Joint sealant shall be applied between the minimum and maximum
drying times of the primer recommended by the manufacturer. The
components of the sealant shall be thoroughly mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations using a power operated paddle mixer for
sufficient time to produce a homogeneous mass without entrapped air.
The sealant shall be dispensed into the groove as soon as practicable after
mixing and within the time recommended by the manufacturer.
(7)
The groove shall be clean and dry at the time of applying the primer
and joint sealant.
(8)
Excess joint sealant shall be removed by using a purpose made
finishing tool such that the finished surface of the sealant is between 4 mm
and 6 mm below the surface of the slab.
10.10
2006 Edition

Placing and
compacting concrete
10.41
(1)
Concrete shall be placed continuously between the joints in concrete
carriageways unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(2)
Concrete in unreinforced slabs shall be placed and compacted to the
full thickness of the slab in one operation.
(3)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete in reinforced
slabs shall be placed and compacted to the specified level of the fabric
reinforcement. The fabric reinforcement shall be placed in position and
concrete shall be placed and compacted to the remaining thickness of the
slab. The time between compaction of the first layer and placing of the
remaining layer shall not exceed 30 minutes unless in the opinion of the
Engineer the concrete already placed is sufficiently workable and the
permission of the Engineer has been obtained. If permission is not obtained,
a construction joint shall be formed as stated in Clause 16.45. Concrete
shall not be placed against the concrete already placed for at least 24 hours
(4)
Concrete in infill slabs at covers, frames and other hardware shall be
placed and compacted after the covers, frames and hardware have been
fixed in position and shall not be placed at the same time as the concrete in
the main slab.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints
10.42
(1)
Construction joints shall be formed in concrete carriageways only
where approved by the Engineer or in cases of emergency if concreting is
interrupted by adverse weather, plant breakdown or similar circumstances.
Construction joints shall not be formed within 2.5 m of an existing or
planned expansion or contraction joint.
(2)
Transverse construction joints shall be formed by either:

(a)
Using formwork and cast-in tie bars, or
(b)
Breaking back from an unformed edge and fixing the tie bars
and sleeves with epoxy resin grout in drilled holes.
SURFACE FINISH
Surface regulation
10.43
(1)
Unless combined double beam compactor-levellers are being used,
then after compaction, the concrete in concrete carriageways shall be struck
off to slightly above the levels of the formwork and the surface shall be
regulated by a regulating machine or a vibrating beam.
(2)
Regulating machines shall be purpose made and shall span the full
width of the slab either transversely or obliquely. The machine shall be
equipped with at least two oscillating-type transverse screeds and shall be
supported on a carriage.
10.11
2006 Edition
(3)
Vibrating beams shall have a steel or aluminium surface and shall be
mounted on a separate carriage. The beam shall be driven by a motor to
provide a vibration frequency of at least 3500 cycles per minute.
(4)
After regulation by the regulating machine or vibrating beam, the
surface of the carriageway shall be regulated by at least two passes of a
scraping straight edge with a blade length of at least 1.8 m. Scraping
straight edges that operate in conjunction with regulating machines shall
pass across the surface at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the
carriageway. If the surface is torn by the straight edge, the surface shall be
regulated again by the regulating machine or vibrating beam and by the
scraping straight-edge.
(5)
Wooden floats may be used to tamp and regulate small areas of the
carriageway as agreed by the Engineer. Steel floats or trowels shall not be
used.
Surface texturing
10.44
(1)
After the surface of the concrete carriageway has been regulated and
before the curing compound is applied, the surface, other than the surface of
channels and edges of slabs that do not require to be textured, shall be
textured by brushing with a wire broom.
(2)
The wire broom shall be at least 450 mm wide and shall have two
rows of tufts. The rows shall be 20 mm apart and the tufts in each row
shall be at 10 mm centres and in line with the centre of the gaps between
the tufts in the other row. The tufts shall contain an average of 14 wires,
each of 32 gauge and initially 100 mm long. The broom shall be replaced
if any tuft wears down to a length of 90 mm.
(3)
The surface texture shall be produced by brushing evenly across the
slab in one direction at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the
carriageway. Brushing shall be carried out after the moisture film has
disappeared from the concrete surface and before the initial set is complete.
CURING CONCRETE
Curing concrete
10.45
The surface and edges of concrete carriageways shall be protected by one of

the methods stated in Clause 16.46 except that covering with hessian,
sacking, canvas or other absorbent material as stated in Method 2 shall not
be used. If Method 1 is used, the curing compound shall be applied to the
surface immediately after the surface has been textured and shall be applied
to the edges immediately after the formwork has been removed.
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY

Protection of concrete
carriageway
10.46
(1)
Immediately after the curing system has been applied, the concrete
carriageway shall be fenced off from pedestrian traffic and covered with
protective sheeting for at least 24 hours. The sheeting shall be lapped
and securely held in position in such a manner that the surface of the
carriageway will not be damaged.
10.12
2006 Edition
(2)
Loads from materials not forming part of the permanent work or
from construction plant or other vehicles shall not be applied to the
concrete carriageway until at least 7 days after concreting has been
completed and until all grooves at joints have been temporarily or
permanently sealed or protected.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: sub-base
10.47
The level of the sub-base below concrete carriageways shall not be more
than 10 mm higher, and shall not be more than 20 mm lower, than the
specified level.
Tolerances: formwork
10.48
(1)
The line of formwork for concrete carriageways shall be within 10
mm of the specified line of the concrete carriageway.
(2)
The level of the top of the formwork shall be within 3 mm of the
specified level of the concrete carriageway.
(3)
Abrupt irregularities in the line of the formwork and in the level of
the top of formwork shall not exceed 3 mm.
Tolerances:
reinforcement
10.49
The cover to fabric reinforcement in concrete carriageways shall be within

10 mm of the specified cover.
Tolerances: dowel bars

and tie bars
10.50
(1)
Dowel bars at joints in concrete carriageways shall be within
20 mm of the mid-depth of the slab.
(2)
Dowel bars shall be parallel to within 3 mm in half the length of
the bar to:
(a) The longitudinal joint, or the longitudinal axis of the

concrete carriageway if there is no longitudinal joint,
(b)
The top surface of the slab, and
(c)
Adjacent dowel bars.
Tolerances: grooves
10.51
Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer of the joint sealant

the depth of grooves for joint sealant in concrete carriageways shall be
within 3 mm of the specified depth.
Tolerances: covers,
frames and other
hardware
10.52
The level of covers, frames and other hardware shall not be higher than,
and shall not be more than 3 mm lower than, the surface of the adjacent
carriageway.
Tolerances: alignment
of concrete
carriageway
10.53
(1)
The best-fit straight line of straight joints and of straight edges of
concrete carriageways shall be within 25 mm of the specified line. The
line of straight joints and of straight edges of concrete carriageways shall
be within 10 mm of the best-fit straight line.
(2)
The best fit curved line of curved joints and of curved edges of
concrete carriageways shall be as agreed by the Engineer and shall be
within 25 mm of the specified line. The line of curved joints and of
curved edges of concrete carriageways shall be within 10 mm of the
best-fit curved line.
10.13
2006 Edition
(3)
Joints in concrete carriageways shall be continuous across
intersections of joints to within 5 mm of the best fit straight lines or best
fit curved lines of each joint.
Tolerances: level of
concrete carriageway
10.54
(1)
The levels of the surface of concrete carriageways shall be
determined 200 mm from the edges of each bay at 10 m centres in the
longitudinal direction and at 2 m centres in the transverse direction.
(2)
The level of the surface of concrete carriageways shall be within 6
mm of the specified level. In low lying and flat areas the Contractor
shall pay special attention to level control to ensure that falls on the
surface of the carriageway are in the specified direction.
(3)
The difference in level of the surface of concrete carriageways
across joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
(4)
The thickness of concrete carriageway slabs shall not be less than
the specified thickness minus 10 mm.

Testing:
surface regularity
10.55
(1)
The surface regularity of concrete carriageways shall be
determined by measuring the number of irregularities in the surface. An
irregularity means that the gap between the surface of the carriageway,
and a 3 m straight-edge placed on the surface of the carriageway, exceeds
the specified amount. Irregularities shall be measured in millimetres
perpendicular to the straight edge.
(2)
The longitudinal surface regularity of carriageways with a total
length of 75 m or more may be measured using a rolling straight-edge of
the type designed by the UK Transport and Road Research Laboratory.
The longitudinal surface regularity of carriageways with a total length of
less than 75 m and the transverse surface regularity of carriageways shall
be measured using a 3 m straight edge.
(3)
The longitudinal surface regularity shall be measured along lines
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway and approximately 1 m
from the nearside edge of each carriageway lane. The transverse surface
regularity shall be measured along lines at right angles to the longitudinal
axis of the carriageway at 10 m intervals along the length of the
carriageway.
(4)
Testing to determine the surface regularity will be carried out by
the Engineer.
10.14
2006 Edition
surface regularity
10.56
The results of tests for surface regularity of carriageways shall comply

(a)
The size and number of irregularities in the longitudinal

direction shall not exceed the size and permitted number of
irregularities stated in Table 10.1.
(b)

in the transverse direction for Category A roads and there
shall be no irregularity exceeding 7 mm in a 3 m length in the
transverse direction for Category B roads.
Table 10.1: Permitted irregularities in the longitudinal direction

Total length of
carriageway
< 75 m
75 m - 300 m
> 300 m
Size of
irregularity
Permitted number of
irregularities
(Category A road)
Permitted number of
irregularities
(Category B road)
(9 x total length)/75
(18 x total length)/75
>
4 mm
>
7 mm
>
4 mm
9 in any 75 m length
>
7 mm
>
4 mm
>
7 mm
2
Category A roads are roads with a legal speed limit greater than 70 kilometre per hour. All other roads are
Category B roads.
Irregularities greater than 7 mm shall also be counted as greater than 4 mm.
No irregularity greater than 10 mm shall be permitted.
TESTING: TEXTURE DEPTH

Testing: texture depth
10.57
(1)
The texture depth of concrete carriageways shall be determined by
the sand patch test. Tests shall be carried out at least 2 days after the
surface texturing has been carried out and before the area is used by
construction plant or other vehicles.
(2)
Each carriageway lane shall be divided into sections of equal length
not exceeding 150 m. Tests shall be carried out at ten locations on each
Section at approximately equal spacings as instructed by the Engineer. No
measurement shall be taken within 300 mm of the longitudinal edges of the
sections.
10.15
2006 Edition
(3)
Testing to determine the texture depth will be carried out by the
Engineer. The method of testing shall be in accordance with Appendix
10.1.
texture depth
10.58
The results of tests for texture depth for each Section of concrete
carriageway lane shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The average texture depth shall not be less than 0.70 mm, and
(b)
Not more than one out of the ten measured texture depths shall
be less than 0.6 mm.
TESTING: CONCRETE
Testing: workability
and compressive
strength of concrete
10.59
Testing to determine the workability and compressive strength of concrete

in concrete carriageways shall be as stated in Clauses 16.52 to 16.62 except
as stated in Clauses 10.60 and 10.61.
workability of concrete
10.60
The average slump value of the two specimens taken from one sample of
concrete shall not exceed the approved slump value by more than 10 mm.
Samples: compressive
10.61
One sample of concrete shall be provided from each 25 m3 or 25 batches

of concrete or from the amount of concrete produced each day, whichever
is less.
TESTING:
LENGTHS
Samples:
concrete cores from
trial lengths
10.62
CONCRETE
CORES
FROM
TRIAL
(1)
Two concrete cores shall be provided from each bay, and one core
shall be provided from each joint, of concrete carriageway in the trial
length. The positions from which the cores are taken shall be as instructed
by the Engineer.
(2)
Concrete cores shall be 150 mm diameter unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer and shall be the full depth of the slab. Cores
shall be taken as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the core
to be taken.
(3)
The method of taking concrete cores shall be in accordance with
CS1.
(4)
Holes formed by taking concrete cores from trial lengths that form
part of the permanent carriageway shall be reinstated using the approved
concrete mix. Joints shall be repaired as instructed by the Engineer.

from trial lengths
10.63
(1)
Each concrete core from trial lengths in concrete carriageways shall
be inspected to determine the thickness of the slab and the positions of the
reinforcement and joint components. Each core shall be inspected for
evidence of segregation of the constituents and for the presence of voids.
(2)
The method of preparing and inspecting concrete cores shall be in
accordance with CS1.
10.16
2006 Edition
concrete cores from
trial lengths
10.64
The concrete core shall be considered as non-compliant if it exhibits

honeycombing which means interconnected voids arising from, for
example, inadequate compaction or lack of mortar.

Batch: joint filler, joint
sealant
10.65
A batch of joint filler or joint sealant shall comply with Clause 16.89.
Samples: joint filler,

joint sealant
10.66
Samples of joint filler or joint sealant shall comply with Clause 16.90.
Testing: joint filler,

joint sealant
10.67
Testing of joint filler and joint sealant for joints in concrete carriageways
shall be as stated in Clauses 16.91 and 16.92 except as stated in Clause
10.68.
Testing: joint sealant
10.68
Each sample of joint sealant shall be tested to determine the application

life, tack-free time, resistance to flow, recovery, adhesion and cohesion in
tension and compression and resistance to heat ageing. The method of
testing shall be in accordance with BS 5212.
10.17
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 10.1
DETERMINATION OF THE TEXTURE DEPTH OF
CARRIAGEWAYS
Scope
10.1.1
This method covers the determination of the texture depth of carriageways

by the sand patch test.
Materials
10.1.2
The following material is required:

Dry natural sand, with a rounded particle shape, which has been washed
and then screened such that it meets the grading stated in Table 10.1.1.
Table 10.1.1: Grading of sand

BS test
sieve
Apparatus
Procedure
10.1.3
10.1.4
Percentage by
mass passing
600 m
100
300 m
95 - 100
150 m
0-6

(a)
A soft brush.
(b)
A robust measuring cylinder having an internal diameter of 20 2

mm and a flat top surface such that its internal volume is 25 0.1
mL.
(c)
A flat wooden disc of 65 2 mm diameter with a 1.5 mm minimum

thickness hard rubber disc attached to one face and a handle fixed
to the other face.
(d)
A steel rule calibrated to 1 mm.
(e)
A suitable windshield.
(f)
A funnel with an outlet tube at least 100 mm long with a bore of

between 4 mm and 6 mm, and capable of accepting a volume of at
least 200 mL.
(g)
A steel straight edge for screeding off the measuring cylinder.
(h)
A steel-wire brush.

(a) The test location shall be at least 300 mm square. It shall be vigorously
brushed ten times in two directions at right angles using the steel wire
brush, and then dried and swept clean with the soft brush.
10.18
2006 Edition
Calculation
10.1.5
(b)
Sand shall be poured into the measuring cylinder to fill it to

overflowing, and any excess sand shall be screeded off using the
straight edge. All sand on the outside of the cylinder shall be
removed, taking care not to drop any sand onto the test location.
Alternatively, this step in the procedure may be carried out in a
laboratory, and the sand transferred to a suitable container ready for
pouring.
(c)
The measured volume of sand shall be poured onto the centre of the
test location through the funnel to form a heap. The windshield
shall be used to protect the test location if required.
(d)
The sand shall be spread outwards with a circular motion over the
test location, using the rubber-faced disc with its face parallel to the
surface of the carriageway. This shall be continued until the patch
of sand is approximately circular and will spread outwards no more.
(e)
The size of the circular patch of sand shall be measured to the

nearest 1 mm along three diameters, which are aligned at
approximately 120 degrees to each other.
(f)
If the difference between the maximum and minimum of the three

measurements exceeds 20% of the average of the three
measurements, then all the measurements shall be discarded and the
test repeated at an adjacent location.
(g)
The test shall be repeated for all the ten test locations for each
Section of carriageway lane.
(1)
The texture depth (T) for each test shall be calculated from the
equation:
T = 31000 / D2 mm
where:
- D is the average of the three diameter measurements of the
sand patch calculated to the nearest 1 mm.
(2)
10.1.6
The average texture depth for the ten tests shall be calculated.

(a)
The test location.
(b)
The average diameter of the sand patch for each test to the nearest 1
mm.
(c)
The texture depth for each test to the nearest 0.1 mm.
(d)
The average texture depth to the nearest 0.1 mm.
(e)
10.19
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 11
11.1
2006 Edition
11.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 11
GENERAL
11.01
Earthworks
11.02
Sub-base material and

11.03
Sub-base material and bituminous materials shall comply with Section 9.
Joints in concrete
11.04
Joints in concrete shall comply with Section 10.
Formwork
11.05
Reinforcement
11.06
Concrete
11.07
Steelwork
11.08
MATERIALS
Cement mortar
11.09
Cement mortar shall consist of one part of cement to three parts of fine
aggregate by volume together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for the required work. Fine
aggregates shall be sand or crushed rock to BS 1200 and shall pass a 5 mm
BS test sieve.
11.10

11.3
2006 Edition
PART 2: CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

MATERIALS
Concrete mix
11.11
Concrete for concrete profile barriers shall be Grade 30/20.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of concrete
profile barriers
11.12
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed methods of construction
for concrete profile barriers shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Particulars of formwork as stated in Clause 14.21 for in-situ

construction using fixed forms,
(b)
Details of slip-form machine for in-situ construction between

sliding forms, and
(c)
Methods of manufacture, handling, transport, storage and

fixing in position of precast units.
(2)
least 14 days before construction of concrete profile barriers starts.
TRIALS
Trial length
11.13
(1)
A trial length of concrete profile barrier shall be constructed to
demonstrate that the proposed materials, mix design, methods of
production and methods of construction will produce a concrete profile
barrier which complies with the specified requirements. If it is not stated
in the Contract that the trial length is to be constructed in a location
separate from the permanent concrete profile barrier, the trial length shall
be the first 25 m of the permanent barrier.
(2)
The trial length shall be constructed in sufficient time before the
permanent barrier is constructed to allow the Engineer a period of at least 7
days to determine if the specified requirements have been produced in the
trial length.
(3)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24 hours, or such
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing the trial length.
(4)
The trial length shall be constructed using the materials, mix design,
Engineer.
(5)
The trial length shall be used as a means of comparison against
which the Engineer shall determine the compliance or otherwise of the
permanent concrete profile barrier. The trial length shall be protected
from damage and shall be left in position unless the Engineer instructs its
removal. A trial length which forms part of the permanent barrier and
which complies with the specified requirements shall not be removed.
11.4
2006 Edition
Testing: trial length
11.14
(1)
The trial length shall be tested to determine the accuracy of the
alignment and level and the finish of the concrete surface.
(2)
Concrete cores shall be cut from the trial length to determine the
amount of segregation of the constituents and the presence of voids. The
method of taking, preparing, inspecting and testing concrete cores shall be
as stated in Clause 11.26.
trial length
length
11.15
11.16
The results of tests on trial lengths shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The alignment and levels of the barrier shall comply with

Clause 11.25.
(b)
The finish of concrete surfaces shall comply with Clause

14.44.
(c)
The amount of segregation of the constituents and the presence

of voids shall comply with Clause 10.64 for concrete
carriageways.
(1)
If the result of any test on the trial length does not comply with the
specified requirements for the trial length, particulars of proposed changes
to the materials, mix design, methods of production or methods of
construction shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial lengths shall
be constructed until the result of every test on the trial length complies with
the specified requirements for the trial length. Further trial mixes shall be
made unless in the opinion of the Engineer non-compliance of the trial
length was not due to the concrete mix.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, trial lengths, or parts of
trial lengths, which do not comply with the specified requirements for the
trial length shall be removed.
Commencement of
concreting
11.17
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 11.17(2) concrete shall not be placed in
the permanent barriers until the result of every test on the trial length
complies with the specified requirements for the trial length.
(2)
Concrete may be placed in the permanent barriers before the results
of tests for compressive strength of the trial mix are available provided that
the result of every other test on the trial mix and trial length complies with
the specified requirements for trial mix concrete and for the trial length.
and methods of
construction
11.18
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials mix design, methods of

production and methods of construction used to produce a trial length that
complies with the specified requirements shall not be changed. Further
trial lengths shall be constructed to demonstrate any proposed changes

Formwork
11.19
(1)
Formwork for concrete profile barriers shall be steel unless
11.5
2006 Edition
(2)
Formwork shall not be loosened or removed until at least 7 hours
after concreting has been completed.
Finishes to concrete
11.20
(1)
The finish to unformed concrete surfaces of concrete profile barriers
shall be Class U5.
(2)
The finish to concrete surfaces for transverse joints shall be Class F3
and the finish to exposed concrete surfaces shall be Class F5.
JOINTS IN CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

Joints in concrete
profile barriers
11.21
(1)
Joints shall be formed in concrete profile barriers at locations which
coincide with expansion or construction joints in the adjoining structure or
carriageway or at intervals not exceeding 12 m, whichever is less.
(2)
Joints in concrete profile barriers shall comply with Section 16.
CONSTRUCTION
BARRIERS
OF
CONCRETE
PROFILE
Construction by
slip-form machine
11.22
Construction of concrete profile barriers by slip-form machine between

sliding forms shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5931. Slip-form
machines shall comply with BS 5931, Appendix A.
Construction using
precast units
11.23
Precast concrete profile barriers shall be laid on a cement mortar regulating

layer of between 10 mm and 40 mm thick.
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS

Protection of concrete
profile barriers
11.24
Immediately after the formwork has been removed or the curing compound
has been applied, concrete profile barriers shall be protected by
polyethylene sheeting for at least 24 hours from exposure to conditions that
may affect the concrete. The sheeting shall be lapped and securely held in
position in such a manner that the surface of the concrete will not be
damaged.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
concrete profile
barriers
11.25
Concrete profile barriers shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
The horizontal dimensions of cross-sections shall be within 5

mm of the specified dimensions.
(b)
The vertical dimensions of cross-sections shall be within 10

mm of the specified dimensions.
(c)
The horizontal alignment along the centreline shall be within

10 mm of the specified centreline.
11.6
2006 Edition
(d)
The level of the formation shall be within 10 mm of the

specified level.
(e)
The level of the top of the barriers shall be within 10 mm of

the specified level.
(f)
The barriers shall form a smooth alignment.
TESTING:
LENGTHS
Testing: concrete
cores from trial
lengths
11.26
CONCRETE
CORES
FROM
TRIAL
(1)
Two concrete cores shall be provided from each trial length of
concrete profile barriers. The positions from which the cores are taken
shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
Samples, testing and compliance criteria for concrete cores from
trial lengths shall be as stated in Clauses 10.62 (2) to (4), 10.63 and 10.64
for concrete carriageways.
11.7
2006 Edition
PART 3: PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

GENERAL
Design of pedestrian
guard-railing
11.27
Pedestrian guard-railing which is proposed by the Contractor as an

alternative to that stated in the Contract or which is erected as Temporary
Works shall be designed in accordance with BS 3049, Table 1, Class C.
MATERIALS
Steel
Stainless steel
11.28
11.29
Steel for pedestrian guard-railing shall comply with the following:

Hot finished seamless
tubes
: BS 6323: Part 3
Steel tubes and tubulars

suitable for screwing
to BS 21 pipe threads
: BS 1387
Hot rolled sections
: BS 4: Part 1
Hot rolled structural

steel sections
- equal and unequal
angles
: BS 4848: Part 4
Weldable structural
steels
: BS 4360.
Stainless steel for pedestrian guard-railing shall be Grade 1.4401 and shall
comply with the following:
Technical delivery conditions
for sheet/plate and strip of
corrosion resisting steels
for general purposes
: BS EN 10088-2
Stainless steel tubes

suitable for threading
in accordance with
BS 21
: BS 6362.
11.8
Amd 3/2010
2006 Edition
Aluminium
11.30
(1)
Aluminium for pedestrian guard-railing shall be H 30 TF and shall
comply with the following:
Wrought aluminium and
aluminium alloys for
general engineering
purposes
- plate, sheet and
strip
- drawn tube
- bars, extruded round
tubes and sections
: BS 1470
: BS 1471
: BS 1474.
(2)
Aluminium shall be anodised to Grade AA 25 in accordance with BS
1615.
Bolts, nuts, screws,
washers and rivets
11.31
(1)
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets for pedestrian guard-railing
shall comply with the following:
ISO metric black
hexagon bolts,
screws and nuts
: BS 4190
ISO metric black cup

and countersunk head
bolts and screws with
hexagon nuts
: BS 4933
Metal washers for

general engineering
purposes
: BS 4320
Rivets for general

: BS 4620

general engineering
purposes
- rivet, bolt and
screw stock
: BS 1473.
(2)
four threads.
(3)
Rag, indented and expansion bolts and resin bonded bolts shall be of
proprietary types approved by the Engineer and shall be capable of
withstanding the design loading.
(4)
Galvanized bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used with
galvanized pedestrian guard-railing.
Aluminium materials shall be
insulated from ferrous materials by a non-conductive insulator at least 2
mm thick of a type approved by the Engineer.
11.9
2006 Edition
Mesh infill
11.32
Mesh infill for pedestrian guard-railing shall comply with BS 4483. The
mesh infill shall be free of surface defects, surface irregularities and mesh
misalignment.
FABRICATION OF PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

11.33
(1)
Steel components forming pedestrian guard-railing shall be hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461..
(2)
Galvanizing to steel shall be applied after welding, drilling and
cutting are complete.
Welding steel
11.34
(1)
Welding for fabrication of pedestrian guard-railing shall be fillet
welds. Welded surfaces shall be clean and flush before application of the
protective coating.
(2)
Steel shall not be welded after galvanizing unless permitted by the
Engineer. If permitted, the welded areas shall be free of scale and slag and
shall be treated with an alternative zinc-coating system approved by the
Engineer.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
pedestrian
guard-railing
11.35
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed pedestrian guard-railing
(a)
A certificate from the manufacturer showing the

showing that the materials comply with the requirements stated
in the Contract, and
(b)
Details of alternative designs proposed by the Contractor,

including drawings, showing the proposals and that the
pedestrian guard-railing has been designed in accordance with
Clause 11.27.
(2)
before fabrication of the pedestrian guard-railing starts.
11.36

time as particulars of the pedestrian guard-railing are submitted:
(a)
Each type of pedestrian guard-railing,
(b)
Mesh infill, and
(c)
Each type of bolt, nut, and washer.
11.10
2006 Edition
Storage of pedestrian
guard-railing
11.37
Pedestrian guard-railing shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and

maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner which
will not result in damage or deformation to the guard-railing or in
contamination of the guard-railing. Pedestrian guard-railing shall be
protected from damage and damaged guard-railing shall not be used in the
permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer. Measures to protect
the materials from the effects of weather shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
INSTALLATION OF PEDESTRIAN GUARD-RAILING

Installation of
pedestrian
guard-railing
11.38
(1)
Pedestrian guard-railing shall be installed to a smooth alignment to
within 10 mm of the specified position and height.
(2)
Pedestrian guard-railing which is to be installed to a radius of less
than 45 m shall be curved in the workshop and shall not be made up of a
series of straight lengths.
(3)
Pedestrian guard-railing shall be fixed to concrete using rag,
indented, expansion or resin bonded bolts and shall be bolted to metalwork.
Bolts for fixing to concrete shall be fitted into pockets filled with cement
mortar or resin grout.
11.11
2006 Edition
PART 4: UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS

MATERIALS
Beams
11.39
(1)
Beams for untensioned beam barriers shall be formed from steel
plates complying with BS 1449-1.1, type BHR, and BS EN 10149-3, Grade
S315NC.
Amd 3/2010
(2)
The beams shall be capable of withstanding a tensile force of at least
300 kN and shall not deflect by more than 40 mm when loaded centrally
with a point load of 1 t over a simply supported span of 3 m.
(3)
Beams shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
The base metal thickness shall be within 0.2 mm of the

specified thickness.
(b)
The strip width shall be within + 2.5 mm and - 0 mm of the

specified width.
(c)
The camber of the strip length shall be within 8 mm of the

specified camber.
(d)
The beam shall be straight to within 1.5 mm in a 1.5 m length.
(e)
Angles at bends shall be within 2 of the specified angle.
(4)
Bolt slots in beams for connection to posts shall be prepared in the
workshop by cold saw-cutting. The spacing of the slots shall be such that
posts will be spaced at either 4 m or 2 m.
Posts
11.40
(5)
Beams shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
(6)
Welds for end beam sections shall be full-penetration butt welds.
(1)
Posts for untensioned beam barriers shall be formed from Grade
43A steel complying with BS 4360.
(2)
Posts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO
1461:1999.
(3)
Posts fabricated from hollow sections shall be sealed by welding
mild steel sealing plates over the open ends. The plates shall be at least 3
mm thick.
(4)
Cleats and struts
11.41
Posts shall be within the tolerances stated in BS 4.
(1)
Cleats and struts for untensioned beam barriers shall be fabricated
from angle sections complying with BS 4 and shall be weldable structural
steel complying with BS 4360, Grade 43A.
(2)
Cleats and struts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS
EN ISO 1461:1999.
(3)
The dimensional tolerances of steel angles for cleats and struts shall
11.12
2006 Edition
Bolts and nuts
11.42
comply with BS 4.
(1)
Bolts for untensioned beam barriers shall be M 16 size and strength
Grade 4.6 complying with BS 4190. Bolts for beam splicing, bolts for
connecting beams to posts and bolts for connecting beams to cleats shall be
round or button-headed with oval shoulders. Other bolts shall be ISO
metric black hexagon type.
(2)
Nuts for untensioned beam barriers shall be strength Grade 4 or 5
(3)
Bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS
EN ISO 1461:1999.
(4)
Nuts shall be tapped 0.4 mm oversize to accommodate the
galvanized coating.
(5)
four threads.
(6)
Rag, indented and expansion bolts and resin bonded bolts shall be of
a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be capable of
withstanding the design loading.
Washers
11.43
(1)
Washers for untensioned beam barriers shall be black mild steel and
shall comply with BS 4320, Form E, F or G. Washers shall be
manufactured from steel complying with BS 1449-1.1and BS EN 10149-3,
Grade S315NC.
Amd 3/2010
(2)
Plain washers shall be 2 mm thick and shall be of dimensions
suitable for use with M 16 bolts and nuts.
(3)
Plain washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS EN
ISO 1461:1999.
(4)
Shaped washers shall have a thickness of at least 5 mm and shall be
cast iron complying with BS 3468. The washers shall be shaped to fit the
curvature of circular hollow sections used as posts.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
untensioned beam
barriers
11.44
(1)
construction for untensioned beam barriers shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
A certificate from the manufacturer for beams in the format

stated in BS 4360 showing the manufacturer's name, the date
and place of manufacture and showing that the beams comply
with the requirements stated in the Contract and including
carbon equivalent values, and
(b)
Details of method of installation.
(2)
Engineer for approval of the source and type of materials at least 14 days
11.13
2006 Edition
before installation of the beams starts. Certificates shall be submitted for

each batch of beams delivered to the Site.
11.45

time as particulars of the material are submitted:
(a)
Beams,
(b)
Posts, cleats and struts, and
(c)
Bolts, nuts and washers.
Storage of beams and
posts
11.46
Beams and posts for untensioned beam barriers shall be stored off a
levelled, well drained and maintained hard-standing ground on level
supports and in a manner that will not result in damage or deformation to
the beams and posts or in contamination of the beams and posts. Beams
and posts shall be protected from damage and damaged beams and posts
shall not be used in the permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer.
Measures to protect the materials from the effects of weather shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
CONSTRUCTION
BARRIERS
Installation of
untensioned beam
barriers
11.47
OF
UNTENSIONED
BEAM
(1)
Untensioned beam barriers shall be ready for assembly when
delivered to Site. Beams and posts shall be free of blisters, flux, uncoated
spots and other defects.
(2)
Untensioned beam barriers shall be installed to a smooth alignment
to within 10 mm of the specified position and height. Transition sections
shall provide a smooth and uniform transition.
(3)
Beams which are to be installed to a radius of less than 45 m shall be
curved in the workshop.
(4)
Untensioned beam barriers shall be fixed to concrete using rag,
indented, expansion or resin bonded bolts and shall be bolted to metalwork.
Bolts for fixing to concrete shall be fitted into pockets filled with cement
mortar or resin grout.
Compacted earth
footings
11.48
(1)
Sub-base material shall be deposited and compacted in the bottom
250 mm of pits for foundations of untensioned beam barriers with
compacted earth footings. Fine fill material shall be deposited and
compacted to the remainder of the pit. The sub-base material and fill
material shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 95%
throughout.
(2)
Posts for untensioned beam barriers shall be securely fixed in
position during deposition and compaction of fill material.
11.14
2006 Edition
Concrete footings
11.49
(1)
Concrete for concrete footings shall be Grade 20/20.
(2)
The top surface of concrete footings shall be finished level with the
adjoining ground. The finish to the concrete surface shall be Class U5.
(3)
Posts shall be surrounded with polyethylene sheeting before
concrete is placed and shall be securely fixed in position during concreting.
Anchor blocks
11.50
(1)
Concrete for anchor blocks shall be Grade 20/20.
(2)
The finish to concrete surfaces of anchor blocks shall be Class F5
for formed finishes and Class U5 for unformed finishes.
11.15
2006 Edition
PART 5: KERBS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS

MATERIALS
Concrete kerbs,
edgings and quadrants
11.51
(1)
Concrete for kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be Grade 30/20.
Concrete for foundations and backings to kerbs, edgings and quadrants
shall be Grade 20/20.
(2)
Precast concrete kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall comply with BS
7263: Part 1 except that the requirement for testing of water absorption
shall not be applied. The nominal length of kerbs shall be 1 m and the
nominal length of edgings shall be 750 mm.
Granite kerbs, edgings

and quadrants
11.52
(1)
Granite kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be worked straight or
circular. Corners shall be square and the top front and back edges shall be
parallel. The length of granite kerbs and edgings shall be at least 600 mm.
(2)
The ends of the kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be chisel-dressed
square to form a close butt-joint with adjacent kerbs. Kerbs shall be
chisel-dressed to a depth of at least 140 mm on the front face, at least 75
mm on the back face and for the full width of the top face.
CONSTRUCTION
QUADRANTS
Construction of
precast concrete and
granite kerbs, edgings
and quadrants
11.53
KERBS,
EDGINGS
AND
(1)
Precast concrete and granite kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be
laid and bedded on a regulating layer of cement mortar. The thickness of
the layer shall be at least 10 mm and shall not exceed 40 mm.
(2)
Except as stated in this clause, joints between each kerb, edging and
quadrant shall not exceed 10 mm in width and shall be filled and flush
pointed with cement mortar. Joints in kerbs, edgings and quadrants at
expansion joints on bridge decks shall be as stated in the Contract.
Transverse expansion and contraction joints in kerbs, edgings and
quadrants laid on or adjacent to concrete carriageways shall be in
(3)
Construction of in-situ
kerbs, edgings and
quadrants
OF
11.54
Radius kerbs shall be used for curves less than 10 m external radius.
(1)
In-situ concrete kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be constructed in
accordance with BS 5931 and shall be laid by an automatic extrusion
machine of a type approved by the Engineer.
(2)
In-situ concrete kerbs, quadrants and edgings shall have regular
sides, edges, arrises and chamfers. The finish to the concrete surface shall
be Class U5. Kerbs, edges and quadrants shall not be finished or dressed
with cement mortar.
(3)
Contraction joints shall be formed at intervals not greater than
approximately 4 m. Transverse expansion and contraction joints in kerbs,
edgings and quadrants which are laid on or adjacent to concrete
carriageways shall be in accordance with Clause 10.35(2). Joints shall be
flush pointed with cement mortar.
11.16
2006 Edition
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
kerbs, edgings and
quadrants
11.55
(1)
The line of kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be within 3 mm of the
specified line.
(2)
The level of the top of kerbs, edgings and quadrants shall be within
3 mm of the specified level.
11.17
2006 Edition
PART 6: FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND PAVED

AREAS
MATERIALS
Concrete for footways,
cycletracks and paved
areas
11.56
Concrete for footways, cycletracks and paved areas shall be Grade 30/20.
CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS

AND PAVED AREAS
In-situ concrete
footways, cycletracks
and paved areas
11.57
In-situ concrete for footways, cycle tracks and paved areas shall be laid in
areas not exceeding 20 m2. The finish to the concrete surface shall be
Class U4.
Flexible surfacing to
footways, cycletracks
and paved areas
11.58
(1) Bituminous materials for footways, cycletracks and paved areas

shall be laid and compacted with steel-wheeled and pneumatic-tyred
rollers. Compaction shall start before the temperature of the newly laid
material falls below 1000C and shall continue until all roller marks have
been removed. For locations where rollers cannot operate effectively,
the bituminous material can be compacted by hand-operated mechanical
compaction plant approved by the Engineer.
(2) Cores shall be taken in accordance with Clause 9.62 for the
checking of air void content and compacted layer thickness of the
bituminous material for works with area of not less than 200m2. For
works with area smaller than 200m2 but greater than 50m2, at least 2 cores
shall be taken from each layer of bituminous material laid. For works
with area less than 50m2, no coring is required unless otherwise instructed
by the Engineer.
(3)
The cores taken in accordance with Clause 11.58(2) shall be tested
to determine the air void content. The average air void content of the
cores shall be not less than 3% nor greater than 9%. If the test result does
not comply with the specified requirement, 2 additional cores shall be taken
at locations agreed by the Engineer and the average air void content
determined from these 2 cores shall replace the original value for
compliance checking. Notwithstanding this, no cores shall have an air
void content of less than 2.5% nor greater than 10%.
(4)
Each core taken from the final surfacing layer shall also be measured
to determine the compacted layer thickness that shall not deviate by more
than 5mm from the specified thickness. If the measured thickness does
not comply with the requirement, 2 additional cores shall be taken at
locations agreed by the Engineer and the average thickness determined
from these 2 cores shall replace the original measured value for compliance
checking.
(5)
If no bulk sample is taken for determination of the Rices specific
gravity, the corresponding value obtained from the mix design shall be
used in determining the air void content of the core unless other value is
11.18
2006 Edition
suggested by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer.

(6)
If either the air void content or the compacted thickness of the core
is outside the specified limits, the sub-area from which the cores were
taken shall be considered as not complying with the requirements
specified in this clause.
PROTECTION OF FOOTWAYS, CYCLETRACKS AND

PAVED AREAS
Protection of footways,
cycletracks and paved
areas
11.59
Footways, cycletracks and paved areas shall not be used by construction

plant or vehicles other than those, which in the opinion of the Engineer are
essential to construct the subsequent work.
11.19
2006 Edition
PART 7: PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS FOR PAVING

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Unit
11.60
(1) Unit is a term used to describe a precast concrete paving slab, block
or sett unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
(2) Depending on their quality, units are classified as either Grade A or
Grade B as follows:
-
Grade A units shall comply with all the clauses of this PS.
Grade B units shall comply with all the clauses of this PS except those
stipulated for Grade A units only.
MATERIALS
Units
11.61
(1) The dimensions of units shall be within 3 mm of the specified

dimensions unless otherwise stated. Chamfers shall not exceed 5 mm in
width and depth or shall be round unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
(2) Units may incorporate integral spacer nibs to aid the laying but these
spacer nibs shall not be included in the size of the units.
(3) Units shall come in wide ranges of colours to facilitate pavement
design by the Engineer. The colours of units shall be consistent over the
area to be paved, stable and fade resistant under any outdoor climate
situations.
(4)
Units shall not exhibit defects such as cracking or flaking.
(5) Units shall be free of any surface sealant unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer.
Precast concrete
paving slabs
11.62
(1) Paving slabs shall be square or rectangular of metric size 200 mm x

300 mm or 300 mm x 300 mm unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
(2) Paving slabs shall be 60 mm thick for footpaths. Paving slabs of other
thickness may be used if approved by the Engineer.
Precast concrete
paving blocks
11.63
(1) Paving blocks shall be as shown in relevant Highways Department

Standard Drawings, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
200 x 200 x 60 mm paving units shall be considered as paving blocks.
(2) Paving blocks shall be 60 mm thick for footpaths and 80 mm thick for
carriageways and vehicular accesses. Paving blocks of other thickness may
be used if approved by the Engineer.
Precast concrete
paving setts
11.64
(1) Paving setts shall be square of metric size 100 mm x 100 mm unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer.
(2) Paving setts shall be 60 mm thick for footpaths and 80 mm thick for
carriageways and vehicular accesses. Paving setts of other thickness may be
11.20
2006 Edition
used if approved by the Engineer.

Concrete
11.65
(1) Concrete for units in footways and cycle tracks shall be Grade 30.
Concrete for units in carriageways or areas to which vehicles will have
access shall be Grade 45.
(2) The nominal maximum aggregate size for concrete in precast units
shall be 10 mm.
Additional
requirements for
Grade A units
11.66
(1) Grade A units shall have an abrasion resistance of not more than 23
mm to BS 6717.
(2) Colour Pigments for Grade A units shall comply with BS 1014. They
shall be UV-stable and shall be iron oxides, chrome oxide, titanium oxide
or cobalt aluminium oxide unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Sand
11.67
(1) Sand for bedding units shall have the particle size distribution stated
in Table 11.1. The sand shall have a moisture content exceeding 4% and
not exceeding 8% at the time of laying.
(2) Sand for filling joints between precast units shall have the particle
size distribution stated in Table 11.2. The sand shall have a moisture
content of less than 0.5% at the time of filling joints.
Table 11.1: Particle size distribution of sand for bedding units
BS test
sieve size
10 mm

100
5 mm
85 - 100
2.36 mm
65 - 100
1.18 mm
40 - 98
600 m
25 - 72
300 m
10 - 35
150 m
0 - 15
75 m
0 - 10
Table 11.2: Particle size distribution of sand for filling joints between units
BS test
sieve size
2.36 mm

100
1.18 mm
90 - 100
600 m
60 - 90
300 m
30 - 60
150 m
15 - 30
75 m
5 - 10
11.21
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of paving
units
11.68
(1) The Contractor shall submit the following particulars of the proposed
materials and methods of construction for the paving units to the Engineer:
(a)
Name and address of manufacturer,
(b)
A certificate from the manufacturer showing the source and

the particle size distribution of the aggregates,
(c)
A certificate from the manufacturer showing the

manufacturers name, the date and place of manufacture,
and results of tests for:
(d)
compressive strength of concrete cubes at 28 day,
bending strength of paving slabs to BS 7263-1; and
compressive strength of paving blocks and setts to

Appendix 11.1.
Drawings showing the layout of the units within the paved

area.
(2) The particulars as required under Clause 11.68 (1) shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval of the source, type and layout of the units at
least 14 days before laying of units starts.
Particulars of units additional
requirements for
Grade A units
11.69
(1) The following particulars of the proposed materials for Grade A units
(a)
A certificate from the manufacturer showing the results of

tests for:
-
Dimensional deviations of paving slabs to BS 7263-1: ;
Dimensional deviations of paving blocks and setts to

BS6717;
Slip/skid resistance value of paving slabs to BS EN

1344;
Slip/skid resistance value of paving blocks to BS EN

1344, or unpolished slip/skid resistance value of paving
blocks to BS 6717;
Slip/skid resistance value of paving setts to BS EN

1342;
24-hour cold water absorption value of paving slabs,

blocks and setts to AS/NZS 4456.14; and
Abrasion resistance of paving slabs, blocks and setts to

BS 6717.
11.22
2006 Edition
11.70
Samples of each type of units shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval of the source and type of each unit at the same time as particulars
of the units are submitted.
Samples of materials additional

requirements for
Grade A units
11.71
(1) Samples of each type of Grade A units showing the actual size, colour,
variation in colour, finish/texture as specified, and general characteristics of
the appearance shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at the time as
particulars of the units are submitted.
(2) Samples submitted to the Engineer shall be subject to a visual
inspection by the Engineer and shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
When examined in accordance with BS 6717, there shall

not be significant visible differences in colour and texture
between any samples;
(b)
When examined in accordance with BS 6717, the samples

shall not exhibit defects such as cracking, flaking or
dislodging of aggregates;
(c)
Fine materials shall not be easily dislodged from the

surfaces of any samples during gentle manual handling; and
(d)
The edges of all samples shall be sharp and straight

without any defect.

of units
11.72
Units shall be handled and stored on pallets to avoid damage to corners

and chamfer edges. Pallets shall be stored on a levelled, well drained and
maintained hard-standing ground and in a manner which will not result in
damage or contamination to the units. The units shall be protected from
damage and damaged units shall not be used unless permitted by the
Engineer.
Storage of sand
11.73
Sand for filling joints between units shall be stored off ground in
waterproof bags and shall be kept under cover on a levelled, well drained
and maintained hard-standing ground on level supports until use.
LAYING UNITS
Laying units
11.74
(1) Units shall not be laid until the layout of the units within the paved
area has been approved by the Engineer.
(2) Kerbs and edgings shall be completed before the units are laid.
The compressive strength of the concrete used for in-situ concrete kerbs
and edgings shall be at least 20 MPa before units are laid.
(3) Measures shall be taken to prevent water draining across or through
the area during laying, bedding and compaction of the units.
11.23
2006 Edition
(4) Laying of units shall start as soon as practicable after the formation
has been completed. The formation shall be protected as stated in Clause
6.55 until laying starts.
(5) Paving blocks for carriageways and paved areas to which vehicles
will have access shall be laid in a herringbone pattern unless otherwise
(6) Units shall be cut to size where required using mechanical cutting
devices. The cut edge shall be true to line and free of chips and cracks.
(7) The units shall be laid to any design or pattern specified by the
Engineer. The design or pattern may involve a single colour or a
combination of different colours.
Laying sand
11.75
(1) A layer of sand shall be laid and shall be screeded and tamped to a
uniform depth over the complete width of the area to be paved. The
quantity and thickness of sand shall be appropriate to the methods of
preparation of the sand layer, and shall be sufficient to give the required
nominal thickness of the sand layer after compaction of the sand and units.
(2) The sand layer shall not be disturbed by additional compaction,
footmarks or other damage after the layer has been screeded and tamped to
the required level and before the units are laid.
Bedding paving slabs
11.76
(1) Paving slabs shall be laid on the prepared sand layer immediately
after screeding and tamping in such a manner that the sand is not
disturbed.
(2) Paving slabs shall be adjusted to form uniform joints between 2 mm
and 3 mm wide and shall be bedded into the final position using a wooden
mallet or a plate vibrator fitted with a rubber base-pad.
(3) Paving slabs shall not be bedded within 1 m of an unrestrained edge
of the screeded sand layer.
(4) Final levelling of the paving slabs shall be carried out as soon as
practicable after bedding and before changes in the moisture content of the
prepared sand layer occur.
(5)
Bedding paving blocks

and setts
11.77
Damaged paving slabs shall be immediately removed and replaced.
(1) Paving blocks and setts shall be laid on the prepared sand layer
immediately after screeding and tamping in such a manner that the sand is
not disturbed. Paving blocks and setts shall be individually laid on the
prepared sand layer by manual methods or in clusters by mechanical
methods.
(2) Paving blocks and setts shall be laid in such a manner that the blocks
and setts are not in direct contact with each other and that uniform joints of
between 2 mm and 3 mm wide are formed. Paving blocks and setts shall be
bedded flush by at least two passes of a heavy-duty plate compactor fitted
with a rubber base-pad.
(3) Final levelling of the paving blocks and setts shall be carried out as
soon as practicable after bedding and before changes in the moisture content
of the prepared sand layer occur.
11.24
2006 Edition
(4) Paving blocks and setts shall not be bedded within 1 m of an

unrestrained edge of the screeded sand layer.
(5) Damaged paving blocks and setts shall be immediately removed and
replaced.
Filling joints and
compaction of units
11.78
(1) After the units have been bedded, sand for filling joints shall be
spread over the surface of the units and brushed into the joints in such a
manner that all joints are completely filled.
(2) Joints shall be filled as soon as practicable after bedding and on the
day the units are laid and bedded.
(3) After
compacted
Additional
compacted
passes.
all joints are completely filled with sand, units shall be fully
by using a plate compactor fitted with a rubber base-pad.
sand shall be added to refill the joints as required and
into the joints by using the plate compactor with two or more
(4) Carriageways and paved areas with regular heavy traffic shall be
compacted by at least ten evenly-spaced passes of a pneumatic tyred roller
having a gross weight of between 10 t and 12 t, or by a plate compactor
which shall have the following capacity:
-
Minimum plate area of 0.25 m2;
Minimum effective force per unit area of plate of 75 kN/ m2;
Frequency of 65 100 Hz; and
Minimum mass of 200 kg.
Other suitable compacting equipment to the approval of the Engineer can

be used. Sand shall be added as required and brushed and compacted into
the joints.
(5) Units shall not be compacted closer than 1 m behind the laying edge of
the units other than on completion of the paved area against a kerb or
edging.
Mortar and concrete 11.79

seal
(6)
Excess sand shall be removed after completion of compaction.
(7)
Damaged units shall be immediately removed and replaced.
Pigmented mortar or concrete shall be placed to full depth of the units to

fill up the gaps between units and adjacent kerbs, edgings, quadrants,
covers, frames and other hardware. The work shall only be carried out
upon the approval by the Engineer. Unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer, colour of pigmented mortar or concrete shall match the colour
of the adjacent units.
REINSTATEMENT OF UNITS
Reinstatement of units
11.80
(1) If excavation is to be carried out in areas paved with units, the units
shall be extracted by manual methods for a distance of at least 300 mm
beyond the limit of the excavation.
11.25
2006 Edition
(2) Unbroken units shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all sand and
deleterious material. The units shall be stacked on pallets for re-use.
(3) Units to be re-used shall be re-laid in accordance with Clauses 11.74
to 11.79.
TOLERANCES
Levels
11.81
The level of paved areas constructed using units shall be within 3 mm of the
specified level. The difference in level of adjacent units shall not exceed 2
mm.
TESTING
Batching
11.82
(1) A batch of units shall be any quantity of paving slabs, blocks, or setts
of the same type, size, and finish, of the same concrete grade, manufactured
in the same place, covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site
at any one time. Paving slabs, blocks, or setts of different colours can be
grouped together to form their respective batches provided that they are
manufactured with the same type of materials and production methods.
(2) Sampling shall be carried out at random. The sample shall comprise
units that are distributed throughout the batch.
Testing requirements
for units
11.83
(1) Paving slabs shall be tested for bending strength as stated in Clause
11.84.
(2) Paving blocks shall be tested for compressive strength as stated in
Clause 11.85.
(3) Paving setts need not be tested for bending strength, compressive
strength or slip/skid resistance unless otherwise required by the Engineer.
Bending strength test

of paving slabs
11.84
(1) One sample of units in a batch shall be provided from every 1000 m2
of units or part thereof. A batch with units for area(s) less than 1000 m2 may
be added to the untested previous or following batch(es) as the case may be
for testing purposes. The number of specimens in each sample shall be 8.
(2) Each sample of paving slabs shall be tested to determine the bending
strength to BS 7263-1.
(3) The mean bending strength of a sample of paving slabs shall not be
less than 3.7 MPa with bending strength of individual paving slabs not less
than 3.0 MPa.
Compressive strength
test of paving blocks
11.85
For paving blocks of size 200x200x60mm, specimens of size
200x100x60mm shall be cut from these blocks in accordance with Clause
11.74 (6) to form samples.
11.26
2006 Edition
(2) Each sample of paving blocks shall be tested to determine the

characteristic compressive strength at 28 days.
(3)
The method of testing shall be as stated in Appendix 11.1.
(4)
The characteristic compressive strength of a sample of paving
blocks shall be:
Additional testing for

Grade
A
units:
dimensional deviation
of paving slabs, blocks
and setts
11.86
(a)
30 MPa for paving blocks in footways and cycle tracks, and
(b)
45 MPa for paving blocks in carriageways and paved areas

to which vehicles will have access.
The sample can be used for other tests.
(2) The overall dimensions and thickness of each sample of paving slabs
shall be measured in accordance with BS 7263-1.
(3) The overall dimensions and thickness of each sample of paving blocks
and setts shall be measured in accordance with BS 6717.
(4) The tolerances for the dimensions of each individual units shall be
within 2 mm for length and width, and 3 mm for thickness.

Grade A units: slip/
skid resistance of
paving
slabs and
blocks
11.87
The sample can be used for other tests.
(2) Each sample of paving slabs shall be tested to determine the slip/ skid
resistance to BS EN 1344.
(3) Each sample of paving blocks shall be tested to determine the slip/skid
resistance to BS EN 1344.
(4) The mean slip/skid resistance of a sample shall not be less than 45
Skid Resistance Value for units in footways and cycle tracks.
(5) Notwithstanding sub-clause (4) above, if considered appropriate by the
Engineer for application on steep roads, pavements with steep pedestrian
crossings or exceptional high cross fall, or other difficult site conditions, the
required slip/skid resistance of the units in footways and cycle tracks may
be increased up to 60 Skid Resistance Value.

Grade A units: water
absorption value of
paving
slabs and
blocks
11.88
(1)
One sample of units in a batch shall be provided from every 1000
m2 of units or part thereof. A batch with units for area(s) less than 1000 m2
may be added to the untested previous or following batch (es) as the case
may be for testing purposes. The number of specimens in each sample
shall be 10. The sample can be used for other tests.
(2) Each sample of paving slabs and blocks shall be tested to determine
the 24-hour cold water absorption value to AS/NZS 4456.14.
11.27
2006 Edition
(3) The sample shall have a characteristic water absorption value not more
than 6% by 24-hour cold immersion method to AS/NZS 4456.14.
(4) The characteristic water absorption value (Wc) shall be calculated
from the following equation:
Wc = Wm + 1.65 Xs %
where:
- Wm is the average water absorption rate of the sample
-
Xs is the unbiased standard deviation as stated in AS/NZS

4456.2.
11.28
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 11.1
DETERMINATION OF CHARACTERISTIC
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF PAVING BLOCKS
Scope
11.1.1
This method covers the determination of the characteristic compressive

strength at 28 days of paving blocks by means of a load test.
Apparatus
11.1.2
Procedure
11.1.3
(a)
A compression test machine complying with CS1. Bearing faces

of the platens on the test machine shall be at least as large as the
paving blocks and shall have a flatness tolerance of 0.05 mm.
(b)
If a test machine with platens smaller than the paving blocks is

used, auxiliary plates of adequate size shall be placed centrally
between the platens and the paving block to be tested. The
flatness tolerance of the bearing faces of the auxiliary platens
measured in accordance with CS1 shall not be more than 0.05
mm and the thickness of the plates shall be at least 25 mm.
(c)
Two pieces of packing, each with a thickness of between 5 mm

and 6 mm and dimensions exceeding the paving block by
between 15 mm and 25 mm. The packing shall be plywood,
chipboard or medium density hardboard.

(a)
The paving block shall be capped on the running surface and

underside with a suitable capping material in accordance with
Clause 15.5.2 of CS1 and immersed in water for at least 24 hours
before compression.
(b)
The paving block shall be placed symmetrically on the lower

platen of the test machine, between the two pieces of packing
with the running surface facing upwards.
(c)
Load shall be applied without shock and shall be steadily

increased at a constant rate within a stress range of between 150
kPa/s and 700 kPa/s.
(d)
The load at which the paving block fractures shall be recorded as

the breaking load.
(e)
The test shall be repeated for the other seven paving blocks.
11.29
2006 Edition
Calculation
11.1.4
(1) The compressive strength (C) of each paving block shall be

calculated from the equation:
C=
2.5
L
1.5 +
H
MPa
where:
-
W is the breaking load (N)
A is the nominal gross plan area based on the manufacturing

dimensions of the paving blocks or the area of the tested
portion if the block size is reduced for testing (mm2)
L is the lesser of the two plan dimensions (mm)
H is the thickness of the block (mm)
(2) The unbiased standard deviation (s) shall be calculated from the
following equation:
s=
n(Cm) 2
n 1
MPa
where:
n is the number of paving blocks
C2 is the sum of the square of the compressive strengths of

the n number of paving blocks (MPa)
Cm is the average of the compressive strengths of the n

number of paving blocks
(3) The characteristic strength (Cc) of the batch shall be calculated from
the following equation:
Cc = Cm - 1.65s
MPa
where:
11.1.5
Cm is the average of the compressive strengths of the n

number of paving blocks as stated in Clause 11.1.4(2)
s is the unbiased standard deviation as stated in Clause

11.1.4(2)

(a)
Source, name of manufacturer and type of paving blocks.
(b)
Identification marks of paving blocks.
(c)
Date of manufacture of paving blocks.

11.30
2006 Edition
(d)
Nominal gross plan area of each block to the nearest 100 mm2.
(e)
Nominal height of each block to the nearest mm.
(f)
Breaking load of each block to the nearest kN.
(g)
Compressive strength of each block to the nearest MPa.
(h)
Average of the n number of compressive strengths to the nearest

MPa.
(i)
Unbiased standard deviation to the nearest MPa.
(j)
Characteristic compressive strength to the nearest MPa.
(k)
That the test method used was in accordance with this

Specification.
11.31
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 12
12.1
2006 Edition
12.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 12
TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND
ROAD STUDS
PART 1: TRAFFIC SIGNS
GENERAL
12.01
Temporary traffic
arrangements and
control
12.02
Temporary traffic arrangements and control shall comply with Section 1.
Steelwork
12.03
Traffic signs
12.04
(1)
Traffic signs shall comply with the Road Traffic Ordinance, Cap 374
and its subsidiary legislation. Traffic signs for road tunnels shall comply
with the Road Tunnels (Government) Ordinance, Cap 368 and its
subsidiary legislation.
(2)
The design of traffic signs, including letters, characters, numbers,
symbols and borders, shall be in accordance with conditions and
restrictions imposed by the Commissioner for Transport.
(3)
Traffic signs shall comply with BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001 except

that the requirements for marking signs shall not apply.
(4)
Traffic signs shall be externally illuminated, internally illuminated,
retroreflective, non-retroreflective or a combination of these types as stated
in the Contract.
MATERIALS
Steel
12.05
Steel for traffic signs shall comply with the following:

Hot finished seamless
tubes
: BS 6323: Part 3
Hot rolled sections
: BS 4: Part 1
Hot rolled structural

steel sections
- equal and unequal angles
: BS 4848: Part 4
Weldable structural steels
: BS 4360
12.3
2006 Edition
Stainless steel
Aluminium alloy
12.06
12.07
Stainless steel for traffic signs shall be Grade 1.4401 and shall comply with
the following:
: BS EN 10088-2
Stainless steel tubes

suitable for threading in
accordance with BS 21
: BS 6362
Amd 3/2010
(1)
Aluminium alloy for traffic signs shall be EN AW-6082 in the T6,
T651 or T62 tempers and shall comply with the following table:
general engineering
purpose
- Plate, sheet and strip
- Drawn tube
- Bars, extruded round

tubes and sections
Standards
BS EN 485: Part 1: 1994, BS EN 485: Part

2: 2004, BS EN 485 Part 3: 2003 and BS
EN 485: Part 4: 1994
BS EN 754: Part 1: 1997, BS EN 754:
Part 2: 1997, BS EN 754: Part 3: 1996, BS
EN 754: Part 4:1996, BS EN 754: Part 5:
1996, BS EN 754: Part 6: 1996, BS EN
754: Part 7: 1998 and BS EN 754: Part 8:
1998
BS EN 755: Part 1: 1997, BS EN 755: Part
2: 1997, BS EN 755: Part 3: 1996, BS EN
755: Part 4: 1996, BS EN 755: Part 5:
1996, BS EN 755: Part 6:1996, BS EN 755:
Part 7: 1998, BS EN 755: Part 8: 1998 and
BS EN 755: Part 9: 2001
(2)
Aluminium alloy shall be anodized to Grade AA 25 in accordance
with BS EN 12373: Part 1: 2001.
(3)
Aluminium alloy sheet shall be free of twisting, warping and
buckling and the surfaces shall be free of blemishes and other defects.
washers and rivets
12.08
(1)
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets for traffic signs shall comply
with the following:
: BS 4190

countersunk head bolts
and screws with hexagon
nuts
: BS 4933

: BS 4320
Rivets for general

12.4
2006 Edition
: BS 4620

general engineering
purposes
- rivet, bolt and screw
stock
: BS 1473
Mechanical properties
of corrosion-resistant
stainless-steel fasteners.
Bolts, screws and studs
: BS EN ISO 3506-1
Mechanical properties of
corrosion-resistant stainless
steel fasteners. Nuts
: BS EN ISO 3506-2
Amd 3/2010
(2)
The length of bolts shall be such that after assembly the threaded
portion of each bolt projects through the nut by at least one thread and by
not more than four threads.
(3)
Rag and indented bolts shall comply with BS 1494: Part 2.
Expansion bolts and resin bonded bolts shall be of a proprietary type
approved by the Engineer and shall be capable of withstanding the design
working load.
(4)
Galvanised bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used with
traffic signs secured to galvanised pedestrian guard-railing. Aluminium
materials shall be insulated from ferrous materials by a non-conductive
insulator at least 2 mm thick of a type approved by the Engineer.
Materials for faces of
traffic signs
12.09
(1)
Retroreflective sheeting shall be Class Ref 1 or Class Ref 2 material

complying with BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001, Tables 8 and 9 or Type IX
material complying with ASTM D4956-05.
(2) Non-retroreflective sheeting shall comply with BS EN 12899: Part

1: 2001.
(3)
Plastic sheeting shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer.
(4)
All materials and finishes shall be mutually compatible.
FABRICATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

Posts for traffic signs
12.10
(1)
Posts for beacons at zebra crossings shall be painted with alternate
black and white stripes. Other posts shall be painted grey in accordance
with BS 5252F, Code 18B19 or shall be galvanized in accordance with BS
EN ISO 1461:1999.
(2)
Galvanized areas affected by cutting and drilling shall be treated

12.5
2006 Edition
using a method approved by the Engineer.

(3)
Posts other than posts supporting an external luminaire shall not
protrude above the top of signs. The length of posts supporting external
luminaries protruding above the top of signs shall be as short as practicable.
Backing plates for
traffic signs
12.11
(1)
Backing plates for traffic signs shall be fabricated from 3 mm
aluminium sheet. Backing plates for traffic signs not exceeding 1200 mm
high x 2400 mm wide shall be fabricated from a single sheet. If more than
one sheet is used, the number of sheets shall be kept to a minimum. The
separate sheets shall be rectangular and shall be approximately the same
size.
(2)
Holes in backing plates shall be drilled before the plate is painted
and before retroreflective or non-retroreflective sheeting is applied.
Spill screens for traffic

signs
12.12
(1)
Top and bottom light spill screens shall be fabricated from the same
material as the backing plate. The spill screens shall extend for the
complete width of the backing plate and the corners shall be cut to the same
radius as the corners of the backing plate.
(2)
Spill screens shall be considered as part of the backing plate and
stiffeners and mountings shall be designed to accommodate the combined
size.
Faces for traffic signs
12.13
(1)
Faces for traffic signs shall be formed using retroreflective or
non-retroreflective plastic sheeting. Unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer, a single piece of sheeting shall be used. If more than one sheet
is used, the number of sheets shall be kept to a minimum. Sheeting shall
be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(2)
Materials for faces of traffic signs, including the background, letters,
characters, numerals, symbols and borders, shall be matched for colour in
accordance with the sheeting manufacturer's recommendations at the time
of fabrication to provide a uniform appearance by day and by night.
(3)
Letters, characters, numerals, symbols and borders shall be clear cut
and sharp-edged and shall have no cracks.
(4)
Sheeting material, including letters, characters, numerals, symbols
and borders shall be fully fixed using adhesive. There shall be no air
bubbles, creases, cracks or other blemishes.
(5)
The back of traffic sign shall be marked with the manufacturers
name and manufacturing date in month/year as shown in the following
manner:
- Manufacturers name
- Month/year
The marking shall either be printed on non-retroreflective self-adhesive
material in accordance with BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001 or stamped by a
punch without damaging the front face of traffic sign or other method
approved by the Engineer. The letter size shall not be smaller than 12 mm
(h) x 8 mm (w).
(6)
For each colour of externally illuminated and transilluminated signs,
the uniformity of luminance, determined by the ratio of the lowest to the
12.6
2006 Edition
highest level measured at any part of the sign, shall be as shown in the
following and in accordance with BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001, Table 12.
Lacquer coatings
12.14
Painting to faces for

traffic signs
12.15
Illuminated face area

Uniformity of luminance
1.5 m2
U2
> 1.5 m2
U1
Lacquer coatings to faces for traffic signs shall be uniform and continuous
and shall be applied at the time of manufacture of the face.
(1)
Faces of traffic signs to which a painted or stoved finish is to be
applied shall be thoroughly cleaned and pre-treated before painting and
stoving.
(2)
Pre-treatment shall be by anodising or by using an etching primer or
by a process approved by the Engineer.
(3)
At least one undercoat and at least one finishing coat of paint shall
be applied and stoved to a thickness of between 0.0315 mm and 0.0375
mm of enamel over a minimum thickness of 0.025 mm of primer. If light
colours are to be applied over dark colours, at least two coats of the light
colour shall be applied. The final surface shall have a uniform thickness
and an egg-shell flat finish and shall be smooth and free of defects.
(4)
The colour of the finished coating shall be uniform. The colours,

including white, shall comply with the chromaticity and luminance factors
of BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001, Tables 3 and 5 and, for comparative
purposes, shall comply with the following gloss paint colours in accordance
with BS 381C: 1996:
-
Red
: No. 537 signal red,
Orange
: No. 557 light orange
Yellow
: No. 355 lemon yellow,
Blue
: No. 109 middle blue
Green
: No. 225 light brunswick green
(5)
Parts of faces coloured black shall be non-retroreflective and shall
have a luminance factor not exceeding 0.03 as specified in accordance with
BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001.
(6)
The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of all paint applied
on surfaces of traffic signs shall comply with the VOC limits stipulated in
the Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation.
Amd 1/2007
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of traffic
signs
12.16
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed traffic signs shall be
(a)
Name of manufacturer, and

12.7
2006 Edition
(b)
Details of materials and finishes to be used in the manufacture

of the signs.
(2)
before fabrication of traffic signs starts.
Storage of traffic signs
12.17
(1)
Traffic signs shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof store. Traffic
signs that are stored together shall be separated by slip-sheets.
(2)
Traffic signs shall be stored in a manner that will not result in
damage or deformation to the signs.
CONSTRUCTION AND ASSEMBLY OF TRAFFIC SIGNS

Construction and
assembly of traffic
signs
12.18
(1)
Fittings for traffic signs shall be non-corrodible material approved
by the Engineer.
(2)
Joints for framework and stiffeners that are not an integral part of the
backing plate shall be welded or joined using brackets, nuts, bolts and
washers.
(3)
Materials for rivets and other fixings for joining backing plates to
framework and stiffeners shall be compatible with the materials to be
joined. The spacing of rivets and other fixings shall be uniform. The
spacing shall not exceed 150 mm around the outside edge of sheets and
shall not exceed 300 mm on cross braces.
(4)
An additional washer of neoprene, nylon or other material approved
by the Engineer shall be used to protect the faces of traffic signs from metal
nuts, bolts, washers and screws.
(5)
Backing plates shall be connected to posts by a method approved by
the Engineer. Banding systems shall be stainless steel. Drilling of holes
in ferrous components shall be completed before finishes are applied.
(6)
A lacquer coating shall be applied to the edges of holes drilled in
plates with plastic sheeting immediately before rivets and bolts are inserted.
The surfaces of rivets and bolts on the faces of traffic signs shall be covered
with a material coloured to match the part of the face with which it is in
contact.
(7)
Fixings for traffic signs erected on road lighting columns shall be
compatible with the column cross-section. Columns shall not be drilled.
(8)
When backing plates are stiffened with additional reinforcing
members, these members shall be fixed to the backing plates in compliance
with Class P2 in Table 1 of BS EN 12899: Part 1: 2001.
(9)
Protection to sign edges shall be Class E1 in compliance with BS
EN 12899: Part 1: 2001, Table 2.
12.8
2006 Edition
Covering of traffic
signs
12.19
(1)
Traffic signs which are to be blanked out shall be covered by the
following methods:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Plate signs shall be covered using a 1.5 mm thick sheet that

is compatible with the material in the sign.
Plate signs that are to be blanked out for a period not
exceeding one year may alternatively be covered using a
self-adhesive plastic film.
Other signs shall be covered using a loose cover sheet of
material approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Cover sheets shall be fixed using 5 mm diameter stainless steel
bolts, washers and nuts or non-ferrous rivets at spacings not exceeding 600
mm. Bolts shall pass through 5 mm x 12 mm diameter plastic distance
pieces between the face of the sign and the cover plate. Holes that remain
on the finished face of the sign shall be filled using blocked rivets. The
face of the rivets shall be coloured by a method approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Self-adhesive plastic film shall be compatible with the material in
the face of the sign and shall be fixed and removed in accordance with the
(4)
Loose covers shall be securely fastened to the back of the sign.
Tape or other adhesive material shall not be applied to the faces of signs.
(5)
Coverings to traffic signs shall be sufficiently opaque to prevent
reflection from the covered sign and shall not be removed until the
Engineer so instructs.
(6)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the faces of traffic signs
which have been erected and which do not relate either wholly or in part to
the traffic situation which applies at that time shall be blanked out as stated
in this Clause.
TESTING: TRAFFIC SIGNS

Testing:
12.20
(1)
The number of traffic signs to be tested shall be as stated in the
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
The number and type of tests to be carried out on the traffic signs
shall be as stated in the Contract as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
Testing shall be carried out in such a manner that the traffic sign will
not be damaged.
(4)
Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor at a laboratory
12.21
The compliance criteria for testing traffic signs shall be in accordance with
BS 873: Part 1: 1983.
12.9
2006 Edition
PART 2: ROAD MARKINGS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Road Markings
12.22
Road markings are white or yellow continuous or intermittent lines, letters,

characters, figures, arrows or symbols marked on the carriageway to guide
road users and pedestrians.
MATERIALS
Hot-applied
thermoplastic material
12.23
(1)
Hot-applied thermoplastic material shall comply with BS EN 1871:
2000. In particular,
(a) The luminance factor when tested in accordance with Annex E
of BS EN 1871: 2000 shall be Class LF4 for white material
and Class LF2 for yellow material.
(b) The softening point when tested in accordance with Annex F of
BS EN 1871: 2000 shall be Class SP2.
(2)
Solid glass beads shall be included in the supplied mixture of hot
applied thermoplastic material.
(3)
Thermoplastic material shall be of a solvent-free marking
substance supplied in block, granular or powder forms, which can be
heated to a molten state and then applied with an appropriate hand or
mechanical applicator, and form a cohesive film by cooling.
(4) Thermoplastic material shall belong to either of the following
types:
- Type A-Standard hot applied thermoplastic material.
- Type B-Alkyd resin hot applied thermoplastic material.
Cold-applied
preformed material
12.24
(1)
Cold-applied preformed material for road markings shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer
(2)
Solid glass beads shall be applied to cold-applied preformed
material at the place of manufacture.
Cold plastic road

marking
12.25
Cold plastics road marking material shall comply with BS EN 1871: 2000.
In particular, when applied at the manufacturers stated thickness and tested
in accordance with Annex A of BS EN 1871: 2000, the luminance factor
shall be Class LF4 for white material and Class LF2 for yellow material.
Paint for road

markings
12.26
Road-marking paint material, including water-based road-marking paint,

shall comply with BS EN 1871: 2000. In particular,
(a) The luminance factor when tested in accordance with annex A
of BS EN 1871: 2000 shall be Class LF6 for white material
and Class LF2 for yellow material.
12.10
2006 Edition
Solid glass beads
12.27
(b)
The difference in luminance factor after UV ageing shall be

Class UV1.
(c)
The difference in luminance factor after bleed resistance test

shall be Class BR1.
(1)
Drop-on glass beads shall comply with BS EN 1423: 1998. In
particular, the refractive index of the glass beads shall conform to Class A
when determined in accordance with Annex A of BS EN 1423: 1998.
(2)
Premix glass beads shall comply with BS EN 1423: 1998. In
particular, the refractive index of the glass beads shall conform to Class A
when determined in accordance with Annex A of BS EN 1423: 1998.
Functional life of the

material
12.28
The functional life of the road-marking material as defined in BS EN

1436: 1998 shall be not less than 1 year after laying is carried out.
SUBMISSIONS
Test certificate and
routine testing
12.29
(1)
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the test
certificate prepared and signed by a local or overseas independent
laboratory to the Engineer before commencing the Works in order to certify
that the samples taken from the materials to be used in the Contract comply
with BS EN 1871: 2000.
(2)
The Contractor shall supply all samples of materials for testing. He
shall render such assistance as may from time to time be required by the
Engineer in taking and packing them in bags, which are to be provided by
the Contractor, and dispatching them to Public Works Central Laboratory
for testing.

of thermoplastic
material
12.30
Each container for keeping thermoplastic road marking material shall be

clearly and indelibly marked with the following information:
(a) The name, trade mark or other means of identification of the
manufacturer;
(b) Batch number;
(c) Date of manufacture;
(d) The number and date of the Standard, i.e. BS EN 1871: 2000;
(e) Whether reflectorized;
(f) Color (white, yellow, or black);
(g) Chemical description and type of resin;
(h) Maximum application temperature and maximum safe heating
12.11
2006 Edition
temperature;
(i) Relative density;
(j) If applicable, the class of its contents
(k) If applicable, a warning about the use of lead pigment.
Storage of road
marking paint
material
12.31
Road-marking paint material shall be discarded after expiry of the shelf life.
Storage of preformed
material
12.32
Cold-applied preformed material shall be stored in accordance with the

LAYING ROAD MARKINGS

Preparation of
surfaces
12.33
(1)
Road markings shall not be laid over loose detritus, mud or similar
extraneous matter. Oil and grease shall be removed from the surface of
carriageways on which road markings will be laid.
(2)
Curing compound shall be removed from the surface of new
concrete carriageways on which road markings will be laid, by wire
brushing or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Existing road markings that are to be replaced by a different type of
material shall be removed by high pressure water jetting, shot blasting,
rotary grinding or by other methods agreed by the Engineer. The existing
markings shall not be masked using black paint or similar methods.
(4)
Existing road markings that are to be renewed using a similar type of
material shall be roughened by a method agreed by the Engineer until the
thickness of the existing material is reduced by approximately 50%.
(5)
A tack coat shall be applied to the surface of concrete carriageways
before hot thermoplastic material is laid. The tack coat shall be
compatible with the road marking material and shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(6)
Rotary grinding machines shall not be used to remove or roughen
existing road markings within 100 mm of longitudinal or transverse joints
on concrete carriageways.
Laying hot-applied
thermoplastic material
12.34
(1)
Hot-applied thermoplastic material shall be prepared and laid in
accordance with BS 3262: Part 3, Clauses 4 and 5. The material shall not
be laid when the surface of the carriageway is wet, or the air ambient
temperature in the shade is less than 10C.
(2)
Hot-applied thermoplastic material shall be laid by machine or by
screeding methods. The machine or apparatus shall be capable of
producing a marking to a uniform thickness and width. The marking
shall have clean edges and shall be free of streaks and blisters.
12.12
2006 Edition
(3)
The thickness of road markings, not including surface applied solid
glass beads, shall comply with the following:
(a)
Screed markings
: 4 mm
(b)
Sprayed lines other

than yellow edge lines
: 1.5 mm
Sprayed yellow edge

lines
: 0.8 mm
(c)
The thickness shall be measured in accordance with BS 3262: Part 3,

Appendix B.
Laying cold-applied
preformed material
12.35
(1)
Cold-applied preformed material shall be laid in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The material shall not be laid when the
surface of the carriageway is wet.
(2)
Use of road- marking

paint
12.36
The thickness of road markings shall be at least 1.5 mm
(1)
Road-marking paint may only be used on roads or areas where the
use of other road marking materials, such as thermoplastic, will affect the
functional performance of the road markings and the use shall be subject
to written approval of the Engineer.
(2)
Road-marking paint shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
(3)
Road-marking paint shall not be used for temporary road markings
and shall not be used to temporarily cover up existing road markings.
Road marking
performance for road
users
Temporary road
markings
12.37
12.38
Performance of the road marking during its functional life shall comply
with BS EN 1436:1998. In particular,
(a)
The minimum luminance coefficient under diffuse

illumination measured in accordance with Annex A of BS EN
1436: 1998 shall be Class Q2 and Q3 on asphaltic surface and
concrete surface respectively for white markings, and shall be
Class Q1 for yellow markings.
(b)
The minimum coefficient of retroreflected luminance for dry

road markings measured in accordance with Annex B of BS
EN 1436: 1998 shall be Class R2 and R1 for permanent white
and yellow markings respectively, and shall be Class R3 for
temporary markings.
(c)
The minimum luminance factor for dry road markings

measured in accordance with Annex C of BS EN 1436: 1998
shall be Class B3 for white markings and B2 for yellow
markings.
(1)
Cold-applied preformed material shall be used for temporary road
markings. Where existing road markings have to be masked temporarily to
facilitate roadwork, the proprietary black tape approved by the Engineer
shall be used.
12.13
2006 Edition
(2)
Temporary road markings shall be disposed of by the Contractor
after removal. All traces of tape shall be removed from the surface of
the carriageway and existing permanent road markings shall be made
good such that in the opinion of the Engineer it is safe to allow traffic to
use the road.
Skid resistance level
12.39
The minimum skid resistance of the road marking measured in

accordance with Annex D of BS EN 1436: 1998 shall be Class S1.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances
12.40
The lengths, thicknesses and widths of road markings shall comply with
(a)
The thickness of screed markings shall be within 1 mm of the

specified thickness.
(b)
The length and width of screed markings and sprayed lines

shall be within +10%, -5% of the specified dimension.
REMOVING ROAD MARKINGS

Shot-Blasting
Machine
12.41
Where existing road marking is directed by the Engineer to be removed by

steel shot-blasting, the removal of road marking materials shall be carried
out by a shot-blasting machine approved by the Engineer. The machine
shall be self-propelled, and shall have a minimum cleaning path of 350
mm.
12.14
2006 Edition
PART 3: ROAD STUDS

MATERIALS
Road studs
12.42
(1)
Road studs shall comply with the Road Traffic Ordinance, Cap 374
and its subsidiary legislation.
(2)
Road studs shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Permanent reflecting road studs to be used as lane line markers on
dual carriageway trunk roads and primary distributor roads shall be of a
type to which traffic cylinders of a type approved by the Engineer can be
attached. The method of attachment shall be such that the traffic cylinder
can be easily detached from the road stud.
(4)
Temporary reflecting road studs to be used as markers for temporary
traffic routes shall be yellow.
Bitumen grout
12.43
(1)
Bitumen grout for road studs shall consist of bitumen and filler.
The bitumen content shall be 25% to 30% of the total mass.
(2)
Bitumen shall be tropical grade filled bitumen, oxidised Grade R
85/25.
(3)
Filler shall be hydrated lime. The percentage by mass of hydrated
lime passing a 75 m BS test sieve shall be at least 85%.
(4)
The properties of bitumen grout for road studs shall comply with the
(a)
The penetration at 25C shall be 124.
(b)
The softening point shall be 105C 5C.
(c)
The specific gravity shall not exceed 1.80.
INSTALLATION OF ROAD STUDS

Installation of road
studs
12.44
(1)
Road studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(2)
Depressible road studs shall be installed using bitumen grout.
(3)
Road studs shall not be installed on concrete carriageways until the
concrete has reached the specified grade strength.
(4)
Surfaces to which bonded road studs are to be fixed shall be clean
and all dust, grease and other deleterious material shall be removed
immediately before the studs are installed.
12.15
General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 2006 Edition

Volume 2 of 2
This electronic file is for reference only. When the
content of this electronic file is inconsistent with the
hard copy of the GS, 2006 Edition and the Amendments
issued, the hard copy of the GS, 2006 Edition and the
Amendments shall prevail.
(This Version is Continuously Updated to include Amendments issued)

This Electronic File has incorporated the following Amendments:-
Rev
First Issue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Issue Date
March 2007
9 July 2007
27 December 2007
12 June 2008
20 March 2009
26 August 2009
26 November 2009
2 February 2010
9 March 2010
15 April 2010
19 April 2010
Amendment Incorporated
GENERAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WORKS
VOLUME 2
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
The publication General Specification for Civil Engineering Works, 2006 Edition is available
from :
Publications Sales Unit
Information Services Department
Room 402, 4/F Floor, Murray Building
Garden Road, Central
Hong Kong
and
can be ordered both locally and overseas through the following channels:
Visit the online Government Bookstore at www.bookstore.gov.hk
Download the order form from the Information Services Department website at www.isd.gov.hk
and submit the order direct online or by fax to the Information Services Department
By e-mail at puborder@isd.gov.hk
2006 Edition
FOREWORD
The General Specification for Civil Engineering Works lays down the quality of materials, the
standards of workmanship, the testing methods and the acceptance criteria for civil engineering
works undertaken for the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region. Where
necessary, this General Specification should be supplemented by a particular specification.
The 2006 Edition of the General Specification comprises considerable greening of the Eighth
Reprint of the 1992 Edition (October 2002) according to the current green practices of the
construction industry. The text relating to "green measures" is printed in green colour in this
Edition with a view to making it easier for reader's reference. It was produced over a 15-month
period from March 2005 under the guidance of a Steering Committee comprising members from the
main Government departments involved in civil engineering works. The greening of each section
was undertaken by a works department with the appropriate expertise. The Standards Unit of Civil
Engineering and Development Department (CEDD) was responsible for the overall co-ordination of
comments received from departmental circulation, editing and production of the document.
Amd 1/2007
Sustainability is the prime objective of the 2006 Edition. Two new sections, viz.
Environmental Protection (Section 25) and Preservation and Protection of Trees (Section 26) have
been created. The original Section 22 for Railways Works has been deleted, as construction of
railways is no more the responsibility of works departments. The 2006 Edition comprises 26
sections and is posted on the CEDD Homepage on the Internet.
The General Specification will be updated continuously. The electronic files of the
sections affected by any amendment issued will be kept up-to-date on the CEDD Homepage.
.
September 2006
2006 Edition
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR

CONTENTS
VOLUME 1
SECTION
GENERAL
SITE CLEARANCE
FENCING
DRAINAGE WORKS
EARTHWORKS
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS
PILING WORKS
CARRIAGEWAYS:
MATERIALS
SUB-BASE
MATERIAL
AND
10
11
12
BITUMINOUS
VOLUME 2
SECTION
13
14
15
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
16
17
PRESTRESSING
18
STEELWORK
19
20
BRIDGEWORKS
21
MARINE WORKS
22
23
24
BUILDING WORKS
25
26
2006 Edition
CONTENT OF VOLUME 2
SECTION 13
WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL
INSTALLATIONS
Page
No.
GENERAL
13.01
13.02
13.03
13.04
General requirements ............................................................................................................. 13.3

Earthworks ............................................................................................................................. 13.3
Materials for grout .................................................................................................................. 13.3
Galvanization ............................................................................................................................. 13.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
13.05
Concealed electrical conduit system ...................................................................................... 13.3
MATERIALS
13.06
13.07
13.08
13.09
13.10
Electrical conduits and fittings ..............................................................................................

Cable ducts and fittings ..........................................................................................................
Paint for conduit and duct systems ........................................................................................
Fire barriers ............................................................................................................................
Cement grout for electrical and mechanical installations .....................................................
13.3
13.3
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.11
Storage of materials for conduit and cable duct systems ...................................................... 13.4
HOLES AND RECESSES FOR ELECTRICAL

AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
13.12
Holes and recesses for electrical and mechanical installations ............................................. 13.5
FIRE BARRIERS
13.13
Fire barriers ............................................................................................................................ 13.5
CONCEALED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SYSTEMS

13.14
13.15
13.16
13.17
13.18
Construction of conduit systems ............................................................................................

Installation of conduit systems ..............................................................................................
Terminations of conduit systems ...........................................................................................
Protection of conduit systems ................................................................................................
Cleaning of conduit systems ..................................................................................................
13.5
13.6
13.6
13.7
13.7
2006 Edition
Page
No.
CABLE DUCT SYSTEMS

13.19
13.20
13.21
Installation of cable duct systems .......................................................................................... 13.7

Protection of cable duct systems ............................................................................................ 13.8
Cleaning of cable duct systems .............................................................................................. 13.8
ELECTRICAL EARTHING SYSTEMS

13.22
Electrical earthing systems .................................................................................................... 13.8
GROUTING FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

INSTALLATIONS
13.23
Grouting for electrical and mechanical installations ............................................................. 13.8
COMPLETION AND PROTECTION OF WORK FOR

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
13.24
13.25
Completion of work for electrical and mechanical installations .......................................... 13.9

Protection of work for electrical and mechanical installations ........................................... 13.10
TOLERANCES
13.26
13.27
Tolerances: floors of switchgear rooms ............................................................................... 13.10

Tolerances: lamp standards .................................................................................................. 13.10
INSPECTION OF WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
13.28
Inspection of work for electrical and mechanical installations ........................................... 13.10
TESTING: EARTHING CONTINUITY

13.29
13.30
Testing: earthing continuity ................................................................................................. 13.11

Compliance criteria: earthing continuity ............................................................................. 13.11
TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON BEAMS AND

JOISTS
13.31
13.32
Testing: load tests on beams and joists ................................................................................ 13.11

Compliance criteria: load tests on beams and joists ............................................................ 13.11
2006 Edition
SECTION 14
Page
No.
GENERAL
14.01
14.02
14.03
General requirements ............................................................................................................. 14.3

Concrete carriageways ........................................................................................................... 14.3
Cover spacers ......................................................................................................................... 14.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
14.04
14.05
14.06
14.07
14.08
14.09
14.10
14.11
14.12
14.13
14.13A
Class ......................................................................................................................................... 14.3

Falsework ............................................................................................................................... 14.3
Formed finish ........................................................................................................................... 14.3
Formwork ............................................................................................................................... 14.3
Permanent formwork ............................................................................................................. 14.3
Profiled formwork .................................................................................................................. 14.3
Sealed plywood ...................................................................................................................... 14.3
Spatterdash ............................................................................................................................. 14.3
Treated finish .......................................................................................................................... 14.3
Unformed finish ....................................................................................................................... 14.3
Wood preservative. 14.3
MATERIALS
14.14
14.15
14.16
14.17
14.18
14.19
14.20
Formwork ...............................................................................................................................
Formwork class of finish .........................................................................................................
Release agents ........................................................................................................................
Formwork ties ........................................................................................................................
Cement mortar for concrete surfaces .....................................................................................
Surface retarders .....................................................................................................................
Abrasives ................................................................................................................................
14.4
14.4
14.4
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
SUBMISSIONS
14.21
Particulars of formwork and finishes to concrete and samples of

materials ................................................................................................................................. 14.9
TRIAL PANELS
14.22
14.23
14.24
14.25
Trial panels ........................................................................................................................... 14.10

Non-compliance: trial panels ............................................................................................... 14.11
Commencement of formwork and concreting ..................................................................... 14.11
Changes in materials and methods of construction ............................................................... 14.11
14.26
14.27
Storage of formwork ............................................................................................................ 14.11

Storage of release agents and surface retarders ................................................................... 14.11
2006 Edition
Page
No.
DESIGN
AND
CONSTRUCTION
FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
14.28
14.29
14.30
14.31
14.32
OF
Design and construction of falsework and formwork .........................................................

Construction of formwork ...................................................................................................
Construction of formwork for Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes ........................................
Construction of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes .....................................................
Built-in components .............................................................................................................
14.12
14.12
14.13
14.13
14.13
APPLICATION OF RELEASE AGENTS

14.33
Application of release agents ............................................................................................... 14.13
INSPECTION OF FORMWORK AND

REINFORCEMENT
14.34
Inspection of formwork and reinforcement ......................................................................... 14.14
REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

14.35
14.36
Times for removal of falsework and formwork .................................................................. 14.14

Removal of falsework and formwork .................................................................................. 14.15
UNFORMED FINISHES
14.37
Unformed finishes ................................................................................................................ 14.15
TREATED FINISHES
14.38
14.39
14.40
14.41
14.42
Treated finishes ....................................................................................................................

Class T1 finish ......................................................................................................................
Class T2 and T3 finishes ......................................................................................................
Class T4 finish ......................................................................................................................
Class T5 and T6 finishes ......................................................................................................
14.16
14.16
14.16
14.16
14.17
COMPLIANCE OF FINISHES
14.43
14.44
Inspection of finishes ........................................................................................................... 14.17

Compliance of finishes ........................................................................................................ 14.17
WORK ON CONCRETE SURFACES

14.45
14.46
14.47
Remedial and repair work on concrete surfaces .................................................................. 14.17

Filling blowholes and formwork tie holes ........................................................................... 14.17
Spatterdash ........................................................................................................................... 14.18
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PROTECTION OF FINISHES
14.48
Protection of finishes ........................................................................................................... 14.18
CURVED FORMWORK
14.49
Curved formwork ................................................................................................................. 14.19
SECTION 15
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
15.01
15.02
Reinforcement connector ....................................................................................................... 15.3

Bar reinforcement .................................................................................................................. 15.3
MATERIALS
15.03
15.04
15.05
15.06
15.07
15.08
15.09
15.10
15.11
Bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement ......................................................................... 15.3

Stainless steel reinforcement...................................................................................................... 15.3
Epoxy coatings to reinforcement ........................................................................................... 15.3
Galvanizing to reinforcement ................................................................................................ 15.3
Reinforcement connectors ..................................................................................................... 15.3
Cover spacers ......................................................................................................................... 15.4
Chairs, supports and spacers .................................................................................................. 15.4
Tying wire ............................................................................................................................... 15.4
Tying devices and clips .......................................................................................................... 15.4
SUBMISSIONS
15.12
15.13
15.14
15.15
15.16
15.17
Particulars of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement ...................................................

Particulars of epoxy coatings to reinforcement .....................................................................
Particulars of galvanized coatings to reinforcement .............................................................
Particulars of reinforcement connectors ................................................................................
Bending schedules ..................................................................................................................
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6

15.18
15.19
Handling of reinforcement ..................................................................................................... 15.6

Storage of reinforcement ........................................................................................................ 15.7
CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT

15.20
Cutting and bending reinforcement ....................................................................................... 15.7
2006 Edition
Page
No.
SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT

15.21
15.22
Surface condition of reinforcement ....................................................................................... 15.7

Repairs to epoxy coatings and galvanized coatings .............................................................. 15.8
FIXING REINFORCEMENT
15.23
15.24
15.25
15.26
15.27
Fixing reinforcement ..............................................................................................................

Fixing reinforcement connectors ...........................................................................................
Welding of reinforcement ......................................................................................................
Exposed reinforcement ..........................................................................................................
Access over reinforcement .....................................................................................................
15.8
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
TOLERANCES
15.28
Tolerances: reinforcement ...................................................................................................... 15.9
INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
15.29
Inspection of reinforcement ................................................................................................... 15.9
TESTING: REINFORCEMENT
15.30
15.31
15.32
15.33
15.34
15.35
15.36
15.37
15.38
15.39
15.40
Batch: reinforcement .............................................................................................................. 15.9

Samples: reinforcement ....................................................................................................... 15.10
Testing: reinforcement ......................................................................................................... 15.11
Testing: epoxy coating 15.12
Compliance criteria: epoxy coating to reinforcement ......................................................... 15.12
Compliance criteria: reinforcement connectors for tension joints ...................................... 15.13
Non-compliance: characteristic strength ............................................................................. 15.14
Non-compliance: elongation, tensile strength, bending, rebending,
unit mass, weld shear strength ............................................................................................. 15.14
Non-compliance: thickness, adhesion and continuity of epoxy coatings ........................... 15.15
Non-compliance: weight and uniformity of galvanized coatings ....................................... 15.15
Non-compliance: permanent elongation of reinforcement connectors .............................. 15.15
10
2006 Edition
SECTION 16
PART 1: CONCRETE WORKS
Page
No.
GENERAL
16.01
16.02
Sprayed concrete .................................................................................................................... 16.3

Designation of concrete mixes ............................................................................................... 16.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
16.03
16.04
16.05
Mix constituents Amd 2/2008 ...................................................................................................... 16.3

Grade ....................................................................................................................................... 16.3
Grade strength ........................................................................................................................ 16.3
MATERIALS
16.06
16.07
16.08
16.09
16.10
16.11
Cement .................................................................................................................................... 16.3

Pulverized Fly Ash (PFA) ...................................................................................................... 16.4
Aggregates .............................................................................................................................. 16.4
Water ......................................................................................................................................... 16.4
Admixtures ............................................................................................................................. 16.4
Curing compound ................................................................................................................... 16.5
CONCRETE
16.12
16.13
16.14
16.15
16.16
Concrete mix ........................................................................................................................

Chloride content of concrete ................................................................................................
Cementitious content of designed mix concrete .................................................................
Standard mix concrete ..........................................................................................................
No-fines concrete .................................................................................................................
16.5
16.6
16.6
16.7
16.8
SUBMISSIONS
16.17
16.18
16.19
16.20
16.21
16.22
Particulars of materials for concrete ....................................................................................

Particulars of concrete mix ..................................................................................................
Particulars of ready-mixed concrete supplier ......................................................................
Particulars of batching and mixing plant .............................................................................
Particulars of precast concrete units ....................................................................................
Particulars of construction joints .........................................................................................
11
16.8
16.10
16.10
16.10
16.11
16.11
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TRIALS
16.23
16.24
16.25
16.26
16.27
16.28
16.29
16.30
16.31
16.32
Trial mix concrete ................................................................................................................

Plant Trials ............................................................................................................................
Laboratory Mix Trials ..........................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: Plant Trials .........................................................................................
Compliance criteria: Laboratory Mix Trials ........................................................................
Trial lengths and trial panels ................................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial mix concrete ....................................................................................
Approved concrete mix ........................................................................................................
Commencement of concreting .............................................................................................
Changes in materials and methods of construction .............................................................
16.11
16.12
16.12
16.13
16.13
16.14
16.14
16.14
16.14
16.14

16.33
16.34
16.35
16.36
Storage of cement and PFA ..................................................................................................

Handling and storage of aggregates .....................................................................................
Storage of admixtures and curing compounds ....................................................................
Handling and storage of precast concrete units ...................................................................
16.14
16.14
16.15
16.15
BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE

16.37
16.38
Batching concrete ................................................................................................................. 16.15

Mixing concrete ................................................................................................................... 16.16
TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE
16.39
Transportation of concrete ................................................................................................... 16.16
RECORDS OF CONCRETE
16.40
Records of concrete .............................................................................................................. 16.16

16.41
16.42
16.43
16.44
Placing concrete ...................................................................................................................

Placing concrete by pumping ...............................................................................................
Placing concrete by tremie ...................................................................................................
Compacting concrete ...........................................................................................................
16.17
16.18
16.18
16.19
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
16.45
CURING CONCRETE
16.46
Curing concrete .................................................................................................................... 16.20
12
2006 Edition
Page
No.
INSTALLATION
UNITS
16.47
OF
PRECAST
CONCRETE
Installation of precast concrete units ................................................................................... 16.21
LOADING OF CONCRETE
16.48
Loading of concrete ............................................................................................................. 16.21
TESTING: CEMENT, PFA, AGGREGATE,

ADMIXTURE, CURING COMPOUND
16.49
16.50
16.51
Batch: cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture, curing compound .......................................... 16.22

Samples: cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture, curing compound ...................................... 16.22
Testing: cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture, curing compound,
recycled water ........................................................................................................................ 16.22
TESTING: CONCRETE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

16.52
16.53
Batch: concrete ..................................................................................................................... 16.24

Reduction of testing frequency ............................................................................................ 16.24
TESTING: CONCRETE - WORKABILITY

16.54
16.55
16.56
16.57
Samples: workability of concrete ........................................................................................

Testing: workability of concrete ..........................................................................................
Compliance criteria: workability of concrete ......................................................................
Non-compliance: workability of concrete ...........................................................................
16.25
16.25
16.25
16.25
TESTING: CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

16.58
16.59
16.60
16.61
16.62
Samples: compressive strength of concrete .........................................................................

Testing: compressive strength of concrete ..........................................................................
Non-compliance: compressive strength of standard mix concrete.......................................
Compliance criteria: compressive strength of designed mix concrete ...............................
Non-compliance: compressive strength of designed mix concrete ....................................
16.26
16.26
16.27
16.27
16.28
TESTING: HARDENED CONCRETE

16.63
16.64
16.65
16.66
Samples: hardened concrete and concrete cores .................................................................

Testing: concrete cores .........................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: concrete cores ....................................................................................
Analysis of hardened concrete .............................................................................................
16.29
16.29
16.29
16.29
TESTING: PRECAST UNITS

16.67
16.68
16.69
16.70
Batch: precast units ..............................................................................................................

Samples: precast units ..........................................................................................................
Testing: precast units ............................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: precast units .......................................................................................
13
16.30
16.30
16.30
16.30
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 2: JOINTS IN CONCRETE

GENERAL
16.71
16.72
16.73
General requirements ........................................................................................................... 16.31

Joints in concrete carriageways ........................................................................................... 16.31
MATERIALS
16.74
16.75
16.76
16.77
16.78
16.79
16.80
Materials for joints in water retaining structures and watertight structures .........................
Joint filler .............................................................................................................................
Bitumen emulsion ................................................................................................................
Joint sealant ..........................................................................................................................
Bond breaker tape ................................................................................................................
Bearing strip for sliding joints .............................................................................................
Waterstops ............................................................................................................................
16.31
16.31
16.31
16.31
16.32
16.32
16.32
SUBMISSIONS
16.81
16.82
Particulars of materials for joints ......................................................................................... 16.33

16.83
Storage of materials for joints .............................................................................................. 16.35
FORMING JOINTS
16.84
16.85
16.86
16.87
Forming joints ......................................................................................................................

Forming grooves ..................................................................................................................
Protection of grooves ...........................................................................................................
Sealing joints ........................................................................................................................
16.35
16.35
16.35
16.36
TOLERANCES
16.88
Tolerances: joints ................................................................................................................. 16.36

16.89
16.90
16.91
16.92
Batch: joint filler, joint sealant, waterstops .........................................................................

Samples: joint filler, joint sealant, waterstops .....................................................................
Testing: joint filler, joint sealant, waterstops .......................................................................
Compliance criteria: joint filler ............................................................................................
14
16.37
16.37
16.37
16.38
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 16.1
DETERMINATION OF THE EFFICIENCY INDEX OF
CURING COMPOUNDS
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
16.1.4
16.1.5
16.1.6
16.1.7
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Materials ...............................................................................................................................
Apparatus .............................................................................................................................
Procedure: preparation of specimens ...................................................................................
Procedure: determination of efficiency index .....................................................................
Calculation ...........................................................................................................................
16.39
16.39
16.39
16.40
16.41
16.42
16.43
APPENDIX 16.2
DETERMINATION
OF
THE
DEFLECTION,
RECOVERY AND RESISTANCE TO CRACKING OF
PRECAST UNITS
16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.2.4
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Equipment ............................................................................................................................
Procedure ..............................................................................................................................
16.44
16.44
16.44
16.44
APPENDIX 16.3
DETERMINATION OF THE RECOVERY VALUE,
REDUCTION IN MASS AND THE EXTRUSION OF
JOINT FILLER
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
16.3.5
16.3.6
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Apparatus .............................................................................................................................
Procedure: compression and recovery test ..........................................................................
Procedure: extrusion test ......................................................................................................
Calculation ...........................................................................................................................
15
16.46
16.46
16.46
16.47
16.47
16.47
2006 Edition
SECTION 17
PRESTRESSING
Page
No.
GENERAL
17.01
Materials for grout .................................................................................................................. 17.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
17.02
17.03
17.04
17.05
Duct ........................................................................................................................................... 17.3

Prestressing components.......................................................................................................... 17.3
Prestressing tendon ................................................................................................................ 17.3
Sheath ..................................................................................................................................... 17.3
MATERIALS
17.06
17.07
17.08
17.09
17.10
Prestressing tendons ...............................................................................................................

Prestressing components ........................................................................................................
Sheaths ....................................................................................................................................
Grout vents and taps ...............................................................................................................
Grout for prestressing systems ...............................................................................................
17.3
17.4
17.4
17.4
17.4
SUBMISSIONS
17.11
17.12
17.13
17.14
Particulars of prestressing systems ........................................................................................

Particulars of prestressing tendons ........................................................................................
Particulars of grout mix and grouting procedure ..................................................................
17.4
17.5
17.5
17.6
TRIALS
17.15
17.16
17.17
17.18
17.19
17.20
17.21
17.22
17.23
17.24
17.25
Trial mixes for grout ..............................................................................................................

Samples: trial mixes for grout ................................................................................................
Testing: trial mixes for grout ..................................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial mixes for grout ..................................................................................
Grouting trials ........................................................................................................................
Testing: grouting trials ...........................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: grouting trials .......................................................................................
Non-compliance: grouting trials ............................................................................................
Approved grout mix ...............................................................................................................
Commencement of grouting ..................................................................................................
17.6
17.6
17.6
17.6
17.7
17.7
17.7
17.7
17.7
17.7
17.8

17.26
17.27
17.28
Handling of prestressing tendons .......................................................................................... 17.8

Handling of prestressing components ................................................................................... 17.8
Storage of materials for prestressing systems ....................................................................... 17.8
16
2006 Edition
Page
No.
SURFACE CONDITION OF MATERIALS

FOR PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS
17.29
Surface condition of materials for prestressing systems ....................................................... 17.8
INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.30
17.31
17.32
17.33
17.34
17.35
17.36
17.37
Installation of prestressing systems .......................................................................................

Installation of prestressing tendons .......................................................................................
Cutting prestressing tendons ..................................................................................................
Joints in prestressing tendons ................................................................................................
Use of prestressing components ............................................................................................
Installation of sheaths .............................................................................................................
Joints in sheaths ......................................................................................................................
Installation of grout vents and taps ........................................................................................
17.9
17.9
17.9
17.9
17.9
17.9
17.9
17.9
TENSIONING OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS

17.38
17.39
17.40
17.41
17.42
Tensioning of prestressing tendons ......................................................................................

Pretensioning ........................................................................................................................
Post-tensioning .....................................................................................................................
Protection of external prestressing tendons and anchorages ...............................................
Records of tensioning operations .........................................................................................
17.10
17.10
17.11
17.12
17.12
INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.43
Inspection of prestressing systems ...................................................................................... 17.12
GROUTING OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

17.44
17.45
17.46
17.47
Grouting equipment .............................................................................................................

Grouting effectiveness .........................................................................................................
Grout injection .....................................................................................................................
Records of grouting operations ............................................................................................
17.12
17.13
17.13
17.14
TOLERANCES
17.48
Tolerances: sheaths ............................................................................................................... 17.14
TESTING: PRESTRESSED UNITS

17.49
Testing: prestressed units ..................................................................................................... 17.14
17
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: PRESTRESSING TENDONS

17.50
17.51
17.52
17.53
17.54
Batch: prestressing tendons .................................................................................................

Samples: prestressing tendons .............................................................................................
Testing: prestressing tendons ...............................................................................................
Compliance criteria: characteristic breaking load, characteristic 0.1% proof load..............
Non-compliance: elongation, diameter, cross-sectional area, unit mass,
modulus of elasticity, ductility .............................................................................................
17.14
17.14
17.15
17.15
17.16
TESTING: DUCT FRICTION

17.55
17.56
17.57
Testing: duct friction ............................................................................................................ 17.16

Compliance criteria: duct friction ........................................................................................ 17.16
Records of duct friction tests ............................................................................................... 17.16
TESTING: GROUT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

17.58
Batch: grout for prestressing systems .................................................................................. 17.17
TESTING: GROUT BLEEDING AND FREE

EXPANSION
17.59
17.60
17.61
Samples: bleeding and free expansion of grout .................................................................. 17.17

Testing: bleeding and free expansion of grout .................................................................... 17.17
Non-compliance: bleeding and free expansion of grout ..................................................... 17.17
TESTING: GROUT CRUSHING STRENGTH

17.62
17.63
17.64
Samples: crushing strength of grout .................................................................................... 17.17

Testing: crushing strength of grout ...................................................................................... 17.17
Non-compliance: crushing strength of grout ....................................................................... 17.18
SECTION 18
STEELWORK
GENERAL
18.01
18.02
18.03
Steelwork............................................................................................................................ 18.3
Protection of steelwork ...................................................................................................... 18.3
Amendments to BS 5400: Part 6 ........................................................................................ 18.3
MATERIALS
18.04
18.05
18.06
18.07
Structural steel....................................................................................................................
Rivet steel...........................................................................................................................
Steel for shear connectors ..................................................................................................
Bolts, screws, nuts and washers .........................................................................................
18
18.4
18.4
18.4
18.5
2006 Edition
Page
No.
18.08
18.09
18.10
18.11
18.12
18.13
18.14
18.15
18.16
Welding consumables......................................................................................................... 18.5

Rolled steel pins ................................................................................................................... 18.5
Steel castings and cast steel pins ........................................................................................ 18.6
Steel forgings and forged steel pins ................................................................................... 18.6
Stainless steel ..................................................................................................................... 18.6
Cast iron ............................................................................................................................. 18.6
Grout for column bases ...................................................................................................... 18.6
Lubricant for nut threads of HSFG bolts............................................................................ 18.7
Paint for steelwork ............................................................................................................. 18.7
SUBMISSIONS
18.17
18.18
18.19
18.20
18.21
18.22
18.23
18.24
18.25
18.26
18.27
18.28
Particulars of steel .............................................................................................................. 18.7

Particulars of workshop drawings ...................................................................................... 18.8
Particulars of delivery of steelwork ................................................................................... 18.8
Particulars of method of erecting steelwork....................................................................... 18.8
Welder certificates.............................................................................................................. 18.9
Particulars of welding procedures ...................................................................................... 18.9
Particulars of stud welding, flame cutting and shearing procedures ................................ 18.10
Particulars of vent holes for galvanizing.......................................................................... 18.10
Particulars of method of non-destructive testing.............................................................. 18.10
Particulars of inspecting authority and testing consultant................................................ 18.10
Particulars of paint ........................................................................................................... 18.10
Samples of materials ........................................................................................................ 18.11
TRIALS
18.29
18.30
18.31
18.32
18.33
18.34
18.35
18.36
18.37
18.38
18.39
Procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing ...................................................

Inspection of procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing .............................
Results of procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing ..................................
Approved procedures for welding, flame cutting and shearing .......................................
Commencement of welding, flame cutting and shearing ....................................................
Changes in procedures for welding, flame cutting and shearing..........................................
Records of procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing .................................
Painting trials ........................................................................................................................
Results of painting trials ......................................................................................................
Commencement of painting .................................................................................................
Changes in materials and methods of application for painting.............................................
18.11
18.12
18.12
18.12
18.12
18.12
18.12
18.12
18.13
18.13
18.13
HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS

18.40
18.41
18.42
Handling and transport of steelwork ................................................................................... 18.13

Storage of steelwork ............................................................................................................. 18.13
Storage of paint .................................................................................................................... 18.14
FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
18.43
18.44
18.45
18.46
Fabrication of steelwork ......................................................................................................

Reinstatement on zinc coating with post-galvanising welding ...........................................
Welding, heating and cutting ...............................................................................................
Length of bolts .....................................................................................................................
19
18.14
18.14
18.15
18.15
2006 Edition
Page
No.
18.47
18.48
18.49
18.50
18.51
18.52
18.53
Length of threads ..................................................................................................................

Use of nuts ............................................................................................................................
Use of washers .....................................................................................................................
Tightening of bolts ...............................................................................................................
Tightening of HSFG bolts ....................................................................................................
Defects in steelwork .............................................................................................................
Approval of fabricated steelwork ........................................................................................
18.15
18.15
18.16
18.16
18.16
18.17
18.17
PREPARATION OF STEELWORK SURFACES

18.54
18.55
18.56
18.57
18.58
18.59
18.60
18.61
Cleaning of steelwork and coated surfaces .........................................................................

Preparation of steelwork surfaces ........................................................................................
Blast cleaning of steelwork ..................................................................................................
Acid-pickling of steelwork ..................................................................................................
Mechanical cleaning of steelwork .......................................................................................
Flame cleaning of steelwork ................................................................................................
Cleaning of bolts, nuts and washers ....................................................................................
Approval of surface preparation ..........................................................................................
18.17
18.18
18.18
18.19
18.19
18.19
18.19
18.19
METAL COATINGS TO STEELWORK

18.62
Metal coatings to steelwork ................................................................................................. 18.20
PAINTING STEELWORK
18.63
18.64
18.65
18.66
18.67
18.68
18.69
18.70
Painting systems for steelwork ............................................................................................

Application of paint to steelwork ........................................................................................
Working conditions for painting ..........................................................................................
Priming and overcoating time limits ...................................................................................
Stripe coats to steelwork ......................................................................................................
Paint coats to steelwork .......................................................................................................
Etch primers and blast primers ............................................................................................
Repairs to damaged areas of paint .......................................................................................
18.20
18.21
18.22
18.22
18.23
18.23
18.23
18.23
PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK

18.71
18.72
18.73
18.74
18.75
18.76
Protection of HSFG bolted joints ........................................................................................

Protection of other shop-bolted joints .................................................................................
Protection of other site-bolted joints ....................................................................................
Protection of welded joints ..................................................................................................
Joints made after coating the parent material ......................................................................
Sealing of joints in steelwork ...............................................................................................
18.23
18.24
18.24
18.24
18.24
18.24
PROTECTION OF SPECIAL SURFACES OF STEELWORK

18.77
18.78
18.79
Protection of hollow steel sections ...................................................................................... 18.25

Protection of bearing surfaces for bridge bearings .............................................................. 18.25
Protection of uncoated steelwork surfaces .......................................................................... 18.25
20
2006 Edition
Page
No.
ERECTION OF STEELWORK
18.80
18.81
18.82
18.83
18.84
Temporary supports and fastenings to steelwork ................................................................

Alignment of steelwork ........................................................................................................
Foundation bolts for steelwork ............................................................................................
Supporting devices for steelwork ........................................................................................
Bedding and grouting of column bases ...............................................................................
18.25
18.25
18.26
18.26
18.26
TOLERANCES
18.85
18.86
18.87
Tolerances: fabrication of steelwork ................................................................................... 18.26

Tolerances: foundation bolts ................................................................................................ 18.26
Tolerances: erection of steelwork ........................................................................................ 18.26
TESTING CONSULTANT
18.88
Testing consultant ................................................................................................................ 18.27
TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT MANUFACTURERS

WORKS
18.89
Testing: tests on steelwork at manufacturers works .......................................................... 18.27
TESTING: STEELWORK
18.90
18.91
18.92
18.93
18.94
18.95
18.96
18.97
18.98
18.99
18.100
Batch: steelwork ...................................................................................................................

Samples: steelwork ..............................................................................................................
Testing: steelwork ................................................................................................................
Reports of tests on steelwork ...............................................................................................
Non-compliance: steelwork .................................................................................................
Samples: steel .......................................................................................................................
Testing: steel ........................................................................................................................
Testing: welds ......................................................................................................................
Testing: stud shear connectors and rivets ............................................................................
Testing: fabrication tolerances .............................................................................................
Testing: repairs .....................................................................................................................
18.27
18.28
18.28
18.28
18.28
18.28
18.29
18.29
18.30
18.30
18.30
SECTION 19
GENERAL
19.01
19.02
19.03
19.04
General requirements .......................................................................................................

Fencing .............................................................................................................................
Pedestrian guardrailing .....................................................................................................
Materials for grout ............................................................................................................
21
19.3
19.3
19.3
19.3
2006 Edition
Page
No.
19.05
19.06
Steelwork .......................................................................................................................... 19.3

Vehicular parapets ............................................................................................................ 19.3
MATERIALS
19.07
19.08
19.09
19.10
19.11
Steel ..................................................................................................................................
Stainless steel ...................................................................................................................
Aluminium .......................................................................................................................
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets ............................................................................
Cement mortar ..................................................................................................................
19.3
19.3
19.4
19.4
19.5
DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR
19.12
Design by Contractor ....................................................................................................... 19.5
FABRICATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS,

STAIRS AND FLOORING
19.13
19.14
19.15
19.16
19.17
19.18
19.19
19.20
19.21
Fabrication of steelwork ...................................................................................................

Galvanizing to steel ..........................................................................................................
Welding steel ....................................................................................................................
Fabrication of handrailing ................................................................................................
Fabrication of ladders .......................................................................................................
Fabrication of stairs ..........................................................................................................
Fabrication of flooring .....................................................................................................
Fabrication of toe plates ...................................................................................................
Fabrication of safety chains .............................................................................................
19.5
19.5
19.5
19.6
19.6
19.6
19.6
19.6
19.6
SUBMISSIONS
19.22
19.23
Particulars of handrailing, stairs, ladders and flooring ..................................................... 19.7

Samples of materials ........................................................................................................ 19.7
19.24
Storage of handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring .......................................................... 19.8
INSTALLATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS,

STAIRS, AND FLOORING
19.25
19.26
Installation of handrailing, ladders and stairs ................................................................... 19.8

Installation of flooring ...................................................................................................... 19.8
TOLERANCES
19.27
Tolerances: handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring ........................................................ 19.8
22
2006 Edition
SECTION 20
BRIDGEWORKS
Page
No.
PART 1: WATERPROOFING
MATERIALS
20.01
20.02
20.03
Prefabricated sheeting ...................................................................................................... 20.3

Bentonite panels ............................................................................................................... 20.3
Bituminous paint .............................................................................................................. 20.4
SUBMISSIONS
20.04
20.05
Particulars of waterproofing systems ............................................................................... 20.4

Samples of materials for waterproofing systems ............................................................... 20.4

20.06
20.07
Delivery of bentonite panels ............................................................................................ 20.5

Storage of materials for waterproofing systems................................................................. 20.5
INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

20.08
20.09
20.10
20.11
Installation of waterproofing systems ..............................................................................

Installation of prefabricated sheeting ...............................................................................
Installation of bentonite panels ........................................................................................
Bituminous paint waterproofing systems .........................................................................
20.5
20.5
20.6
20.6
PART 2: BRIDGE BEARINGS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
20.12
20.13
Schedule of bridge bearings ............................................................................................. 20.7

Type of Bridge bearing ..................................................................................................... 20.7
MATERIALS
20.14
20.15
20.16
Holding-down bolts for bridge bearings .......................................................................... 20.7

Cement mortar, grout and adhesive for bridge bearings .................................................. 20.7
Dowel bars for bridge bearings ........................................................................................ 20.7
DESIGN OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

20.17
20.18
20.19
Design of bridge bearings ................................................................................................ 20.7

Design of sliding bearings ................................................................................................ 20.8
Design of elastomeric bearings ........................................................................................ 20.8
23
2006 Edition
Page
No.
20.20
20.21
20.22
20.23
Design of guides for bridge bearings ...............................................................................

Design of fixings for bridge bearings ...............................................................................
Protective coatings to bridge bearings .............................................................................
Marking of bridge bearings ..............................................................................................
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8
SUBMISSIONS
20.24
Particulars of bridge bearings ........................................................................................... 20.9
20.25
Storage of bridge bearings .............................................................................................. 20.10
INSTALLATION OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

20.26
Installation of bridge bearings ........................................................................................ 20.10
TOLERANCES
20.27
Tolerances: bridge bearings ............................................................................................ 20.11
TESTING: BRIDGE BEARINGS - GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS
20.28
20.29
Batch: bridge bearings .................................................................................................... 20.11

Testing: bridge bearings ................................................................................................. 20.11
TESTING: FRICTION TEST FOR BRIDGE BEARINGS

20.30
20.31
20.32
Samples: friction test for bridge bearings .................................................................. 20.11

Testing: friction test for bridge bearings ........................................................................ 20.11
Compliance criteria: friction test for bridge bearings .................................................... 20.12
TESTING: BRIDGE BEARINGS OTHER THAN

LASTOMERIC BEARINGS
20.33
20.34
20.35
Samples: bridge bearings other than elastomeric bearings ............................................ 20.12

Testing: bridge bearings other than elastomeric bearings .............................................. 20.12
Compliance criteria: bridge bearings other than elastomeric bearings .......................... 20.12
TESTING: ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS

20.36
20.37
20.38
Samples: elastomeric bearings ....................................................................................... 20.12

Testing: elastomeric bearings ......................................................................................... 20.13
Compliance criteria: elastomeric bearings ..................................................................... 20.13
24
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 3: VEHICULAR PARAPETS

MATERIALS
20.39
20.40
20.41
Vehicular parapets .......................................................................................................... 20.14

Holding down bolts for vehicular parapets .................................................................... 20.14
Grout for holding down bolts ......................................................................................... 20.14
SUBMISSIONS
20.42
Samples of materials for vehicular parapets .................................................................. 20.14
20.43
Storage of vehicular parapets ......................................................................................... 20.15
INSTALLATION OF VEHICULAR PARAPETS

20.44
Installation of vehicular parapets ................................................................................... 20.15
TOLERANCES
20.45
20.46
20.47
20.48
20.49
20.50
20.51
20.52
Tolerances: vehicular parapets ....................................................................................... 20.15

Batch : vehicular parapets .............................................................................................. 20.15
Samples : vehicular parapets for testing........................................................................... 20.15
Testing : vehicular parapets.............................................................................................. . 20.15
Testing : parapets materials .............................................................................................. 20.16
Testing : fasteners............................................................................................................. 20.16
Testing : welded components of vehicular parapets......................................................... 20.16
Testing : metal vehicular parapet posts ............................................................................ 20.17
PART 4: MOVEMENT JOINTS

GENERAL
20.53
Movement joints formed in place .................................................................................. 20.18
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
20.54
20.55
20.56
Fabricated movement joint............................................................................................... 20.18

Movement joint .............................................................................................................. 20.18
Movement joint formed in place .................................................................................... 20.18
MATERIALS
20.57
20.58
Joint filler ....................................................................................................................... 20.18

Joint sealant .................................................................................................................... 20.18
25
2006 Edition
Page
No.
20.59
20.60
20.61
20.62
Compression seals ..........................................................................................................

PVC capping strip ..........................................................................................................
Holding-down bolts for movement joints ......................................................................
Grout for movement joints .............................................................................................
20.18
20.18
20.18
20.18
DESIGN OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

20.63
20.64
Design of fabricated movement joints ........................................................................... 20.19

Design of fixings for fabricated movement joints .......................................................... 20.19
SUBMISSIONS
20.65
Particulars of movement joints ....................................................................................... 20.20
20.66
Storage of fabricated movement joints ........................................................................... 20.20
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

20.67
20.68
20.69
Installation of fabricated movement joints ..................................................................... 20.20

Road surface adjoining fabricated movement joints ...................................................... 20.21
Protection of fabricated movement joints ...................................................................... 20.21
CONSTRUCTION OF MOVEMENT JOINTS

FORMED IN PLACE
20.70
20.71
20.72
Forming movement joints .............................................................................................. 20.21

Forming grooves ............................................................................................................ 20.21
Sealing grooves .............................................................................................................. 20.21
TOLERANCES
20.73
Tolerances: fabricated movement joints ......................................................................... 20.21
APPENDIX 20.1
FRICTION TEST FOR BRIDGE BEARINGS
20.1.1
20.1.2
20.1.3
20.1.4
20.1.5
Scope ..............................................................................................................................
Equipment ......................................................................................................................
Procedure .......................................................................................................................
Calculation .....................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ........................................................................................................
26
20.22
20.22
20.22
20.22
20.22
2006 Edition
SECTION 21
MARINE WORKS
Page
No.
GENERAL
21.01
21.02
21.03
21.04
21.05
21.06
21.07
21.08
General requirements .....................................................................................................

Pipes and fittings ............................................................................................................
Fill material ....................................................................................................................
Public filling area ...........................................................................................................
Formwork .......................................................................................................................
Steel reinforcement ........................................................................................................
Concrete .........................................................................................................................
Joints in concrete ............................................................................................................
21.3
21.3
21.3
21.3
21.3
21.3
21.3
21.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
21.09
21.10
21.11
Reclamation ...................................................................................................................
Marine structures ............................................................................................................
Final surface of any work.................................................................................................
21.3
21.3
21.3
MATERIALS
21.12
21.13
21.14
21.15
21.16
21.17
21.18
21.19
21.20
21.21
21.22
21.23
21.24
Fill material for marine works ........................................................................................

Rock armour ...................................................................................................................
Rock for underlayer ........................................................................................................
Facing stones ..................................................................................................................
Bermstones .....................................................................................................................
Levelling stones .............................................................................................................
Joint filler for slip joints .................................................................................................
Iron and steel fittings for marine structures .....................................................................
Timber for fendering systems .........................................................................................
Rubber for fenders ..........................................................................................................
Plastic fenders ................................................................................................................
Paint for marine works .....................................................................................................
Precast concrete pipes and fittings for submarine outfalls ...............................................
21.3
21.5
21.6
21.6
21.6
21.6
21.6
21.6
21.7
21.8
21.8
21.9
21.9
SUBMISSIONS
21.25
21.26
21.27
21.28
21.29
21.30
21.31
21.32
21.33
21.34
21.35
Particulars of marine works ...........................................................................................

Particulars of dredging ...................................................................................................
Particulars of deposition of fill material .........................................................................
Particulars of lifting seawall blocks, copings and wave deflectors ................................
Particulars of rock armour and rock for underlayer .........................................................
Particulars of slip joints ..................................................................................................
Particulars of timber for fendering systems ...................................................................
Particulars of rubber fenders ..........................................................................................
Particulars of plastic fenders ..........................................................................................
Particulars of submarine outfalls ....................................................................................
Particulars of demolition of marine structures ...............................................................
27
21.10
21.10
21.10
21.11
21.11
21.11
21.11
21.11
21.12
21.12
21.12
2006 Edition
Page
No.

21.36
21.37
21.38
21.39
21.40
21.41
Storage of fill material and dredged material .................................................................

Handling and storage of fill material ..............................................................................
Handling and storage of precast concrete seawall blocks, copings and
wave deflectors .............................................................................................................
Handling and storage of timber fenders .........................................................................
Handling and storage of rubber fenders and fittings ......................................................
Handling and storage of plastic fenders .........................................................................
21.13
21.13
21.13
21.13
21.13
21.13
GENERAL MARINE WORKS REQUIREMENTS

21.42
21.43
21.44
21.45
21.46
21.47
21.48
21.49
21.50
21.51
21.52
Notification of marine works .........................................................................................

Marking of marine works ...............................................................................................
Marine traffic and waterfront operations ........................................................................
Temporary tide gauges ...................................................................................................
Work boats .....................................................................................................................
Silt curtains ......................................................................................................................
Removal of floating debris .............................................................................................
Refuse containment booms and floating refuse for use of inert construction and
demolition material in reclamation ..................................................................................
Surveys for marine works ..............................................................................................
Fill material allowed to become unsuitable or to deteriorate .........................................
Concreting in locations affected by tides .......................................................................
21.14
21.14
21.14
21.14
21.14
21.14
21.15
21.15
21.16
21.16
21.16
DREDGING
21.53
21.54
Commencement of dredging .......................................................................................... 21.17

Dredging ......................................................................................................................... 21.17
DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL BELOW +2.5 mPD

21.55
21.56
21.57
21.58
Commencement of deposition of fill material ................................................................

Deposition of fill material ..............................................................................................
Deposition of fill material in dredged trenches ..............................................................
Deposition of rock fill material adjacent to structures and utilities ...............................
21.17
21.17
21.17
21.18
DEPOSITION OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR

UNDERLAYER
21.59
Deposition of rock armour and rock for underlayer ....................................................... 21.18
LEVELLING AND COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

21.60
Levelling of rock fill material in underwater foundations ............................................. 21.18
28
2006 Edition
Page
No.
CONSTRUCTION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

21.61
21.62
21.63
21.64
21.65
21.66
21.67
21.68
21.69
21.70
21.71
Construction of seawall blocks, copings and wave deflectors .......................................

Setting of seawall blocks ................................................................................................
Facing stones to seawalls and revetments ......................................................................
Slip joints in seawalls .....................................................................................................
Filling of channels in seawall blocks .............................................................................
Concrete copings to seawalls .........................................................................................
Bermstones for marine structures ...................................................................................
Bagged concrete .............................................................................................................
Cutting and jointing timber for fendering systems .........................................................
Painting to timber fendering systems .............................................................................
Installation of rubber fenders .........................................................................................
21.18
21.19
21.19
21.19
21.19
21.19
21.19
21.19
21.20
21.20
21.20
TRIALS FOR SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

21.72
21.73
21.74
Trials for submarine outfalls .......................................................................................... 21.20

Results of trials for submarine outfalls .......................................................................... 21.21
Commencement of pipelaying for submarine outfalls ................................................... 21.21
CONSTRUCTION OF SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

21.75
21.76
21.77
21.78
Laying of submarine outfall pipes ..................................................................................

Marker blocks for submarine outfalls ............................................................................
Diffuser pipes for submarine outfalls .............................................................................
Diffuser caps for submarine outfalls ..............................................................................
21.21
21.21
21.21
21.21
DEMOLITION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

21.79
Demolition of marine structures ..................................................................................... 21.22
TOLERANCES
21.80
21.81
21.82
21.83
21.84
21.85
21.86
Tolerances: dredging ......................................................................................................

Tolerances: deposition of fill material ............................................................................
Tolerances: precast concrete seawall blocks and copings ..............................................
Tolerances: timber fendering systems ............................................................................
Tolerances: rubber fenders .............................................................................................
Tolerances: plastic fenders .............................................................................................
Tolerances: submarine outfalls .......................................................................................
21.22
21.22
21.22
21.22
21.23
21.23
21.23
TESTING: DREDGED MATERIAL

21.87
21.88
Samples: dredged material ............................................................................................. 21.23

Testing: dredged material ............................................................................................... 21.24
29
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION,

PLASTICITY INDEX AND COEFFICIENT OF
UNIFORMITY OF FILL MATERIAL FOR MARINE
WORKS
21.89
21.90
21.91
21.92
Batch: fill material for marine works .............................................................................

Samples: fill material for marine works .........................................................................
Testing: fill material for marine works ...........................................................................
Non-compliance: fill material for marine works ............................................................
21.24
21.24
21.24
21.24
TESTING: RELATIVE DENSITY, WATER

ABSORPTION, AGGREGATE IMPACT VALUE,
TEN PERCENT FINES VALUE, AGGREGATE
ABRASION VALUE, SOUNDNESS, RESISTANCE
TO FRACTURE AND WEIGHT OF ROCK
ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR UNDERLAYER
21.93
21.94
21.95
21.96
21.97
21.98
21.99
21.100
21.101
Batch: rock armour .........................................................................................................

Samples: rock for rock armour .......................................................................................
Testing: rock for rock armour .........................................................................................
Samples: rock armour ....................................................................................................
Testing: rock armour ......................................................................................................
Non-compliance: rock for rock armour ..........................................................................
Non-compliance: dropping test ......................................................................................
Non-compliance: weighing test ......................................................................................
Testing: rock for underlayer ...........................................................................................
21.25
21.25
21.25
21.25
21.26
21.26
21.26
21.26
21.26
TESTING: TIMBER FOR FENDERING SYSTEMS

21.102
21.103
21.104
21.105
21.106
Batch: timber for fendering systems ..............................................................................

Samples: timber for fendering systems ..........................................................................
Testing: timber for fendering systems ............................................................................
Compliance criteria: Janka indentation test, test for shear stress parallel to
grain at maximum load .................................................................................................
Non-compliance: timber for fendering systems .............................................................
21.27
21.27
21.27
21.27
21.27
TESTING: RUBBER FENDERS

21.107
21.108
21.109
21.110
21.111
Batch: rubber fenders .....................................................................................................

Samples: rubber fenders .................................................................................................
Testing: rubber fenders ...................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: rubber fenders ...............................................................................
Non-compliance: rubber fenders ....................................................................................
30
21.28
21.28
21.28
21.28
21.28
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING: PLASTIC FENDERS

21.112
21.113
21.114
21.115
Batch: plastic fenders .....................................................................................................

Samples: plastic fenders .................................................................................................
Testing: plastic fenders ...................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: plastic fenders ...............................................................................
21.28
21.28
21.29
21.29
TESTING: SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

21.116
21.117
21.118
Testing: submarine outfalls ............................................................................................ 21.29

Compliance criteria: submarine outfalls ........................................................................ 21.29
Non-compliance: submarine outfalls ............................................................................. 21.29
APPENDIX 21.1
21.1.1
21.1.2
21.1.3
21.1.4
Scope ..............................................................................................................................
Equipment ......................................................................................................................
Procedure .......................................................................................................................
Reporting of results ........................................................................................................
21.30
21.30
21.30
21.30
SECTION 22
GENERAL
22.01
22.02
22.03
22.04
22.05
General requirements .......................................................................................................

Drainage works ................................................................................................................
Earthworks .......................................................................................................................
Formwork .........................................................................................................................
Concrete ...........................................................................................................................
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
22.06
22.07
22.08
22.09
22.10
22.11
22.12
Fitting ...............................................................................................................................
Flexible joint ....................................................................................................................
Mechanical joint ...............................................................................................................
Nominal size ....................................................................................................................
Push-in joint .....................................................................................................................
Special fitting ...................................................................................................................
Thin walled pipe ...............................................................................................................
31
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
22.3
2006 Edition
Page
No.
MATERIALS
22.13
22.14
22.15
22.16
22.17
22.18
22.19
22.20
22.21
22.22
22.23
22.24
22.25
22.26
22.27
Materials for water supply pipeworks ..............................................................................

Steel pipes and fittings .....................................................................................................
DI pipes and fittings .........................................................................................................
uPVC pipes and fittings ...................................................................................................
GI pipes and fittings .........................................................................................................
Flanges .............................................................................................................................
Bolts and nuts ...................................................................................................................
Elastomeric joint rings .....................................................................................................
Anticorrosion tape ............................................................................................................
Bituminous coatings .........................................................................................................
Whitewash ........................................................................................................................
Zinc-based paint ...............................................................................................................
Joint filler and compressible padding ...............................................................................
Polyethylene sheeting .......................................................................................................
Extension keys .................................................................................................................
22.3
22.4
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.6
22.6
22.6
22.6
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
22.8
MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT

LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER
22.28
22.29
Materials provided by the Employer ................................................................................ 22.9

Equipment loaned by the Employer ................................................................................. 22.9
INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURE
22.30
Inspection of manufacture and testing ............................................................................. 22.9
SUBMISSIONS
22.31
22.32
22.33
22.34
Particulars of independent inspection authority .............................................................

Particulars of pipes, joints and fittings ...........................................................................
Particulars of welding ....................................................................................................
Particulars of pressure tests ............................................................................................
22.10
22.10
22.10
22.11
TRIALS
22.35
22.36
22.37
Welding trials ................................................................................................................. 22.11

Pipe jointing trials .......................................................................................................... 22.12
Trial for drilling and tapping .......................................................................................... 22.12
32
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF

MATERIALS
22.38
22.39
22.40
22.41
22.42
22.43
Transport, handling and storage of pipes, joints and fittings ..............................................

Handling of pipes and fittings ..............................................................................................
Storage of pipes ....................................................................................................................
Transport of thin walled pipes .............................................................................................
Handling and storage of thin walled pipes ..........................................................................
Storage of valves ..................................................................................................................
22.12
22.13
22.13
22.13
22.13
22.14
ACCESS TO PIPELINES
22.44
Access to pipelines ............................................................................................................... 22.14
SETTING OUT OF PIPELINES

22.45
Setting out of pipelines ........................................................................................................ 22.14

22.46
22.47
22.48
22.49
22.50
Laying pipes .........................................................................................................................

Laying steel pipes .................................................................................................................
Laying pipes with flexible joints .........................................................................................
Installation of valves ............................................................................................................
Bedding pipes .......................................................................................................................
22.15
22.15
22.15
22.16
22.16
CUTTING AND DRILLING PIPES

22.51
22.52
Cutting pipes ........................................................................................................................ 22.16

Drilling pipes ........................................................................................................................ 22.16
JOINTING PIPES
22.53
22.54
22.55
22.56
22.57
22.58
22.59
22.60
22.61
22.62
Jointing pipes ........................................................................................................................

DI pipes with push-in joints .................................................................................................
DI pipes with mechanical joints ..........................................................................................
Welding joints in steel pipes ................................................................................................
Steel pipes with spigot and socket joints .............................................................................
Steel pipes with welded steel collar joints ...........................................................................
Steel pipes with couplings and flange adapters ...................................................................
uPVC pipes with push-in joints ...........................................................................................
uPVC pipes with solvent welded joints ...............................................................................
GI pipe joints ........................................................................................................................
33
22.17
22.17
22.17
22.18
22.18
22.19
22.19
22.19
22.19
22.19
2006 Edition
Page
No.
MAKING FLANGED JOINTS

22.63
Making flanged joints .......................................................................................................... 22.19
PROTECTION TO STEEL FLANGED JOINTS, SLIP-ON

TYPE COUPLINGS AND FLANGE ADAPTERS
22.64
Protection to steel flanged joints, slip-on type couplings and flange adapters ................... 22.20
REPAIRS TO JOINTS, COATINGS AND LININGS

22.65
22.66
22.67
22.68
Repairs to joints, coatings and linings .................................................................................

Repairs to DI pipes with bitumen coatings .........................................................................
Internal repairs to DI pipes with cement mortar lining .......................................................
Repairs to GI pipes ...............................................................................................................
22.25
22.25
22.25
22.25

22.69
Thrust and anchor blocks ..................................................................................................... 22.25

22.70
Concrete bed, haunch and surround .................................................................................... 22.26
TOLERANCES
22.71
Tolerances : pipelines ........................................................................................................... 22.26
SWABBING
22.72
Swabbing of pipelines ........................................................................................................... 22.26
CLEANING
PIPELINES
22.73
AND
STERILISATION
OF
Cleaning and sterilisation of pipelines ................................................................................. 22.27
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATERMAINS

22.74
Connection to existing watermains ...................................................................................... 22.28
34
2006 Edition
Page
No.
IDENTIFICATION TAPES FOR WATERMAINS

22.75
Identification tapes for watermains ..................................................................................... 22.28
DETECTABLE
WARNING
TAPE
NON-METALLIC WATERMAINS
22.76
FOR
Detectable warning tape for non-metallic watermains ....................................................... 22.29
WORK ON ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND

DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTES
22.77
Work on asbestos cement pipes and disposal of asbestos wastes ....................................... 22.30
TESTING : JOINTS IN STEEL PIPES

22.78
22.79
22.80
Testing: joints in steel pipes ................................................................................................. 22.30

Compliance criteria: joints in steel pipes ............................................................................. 22.30
Non-compliance: joints in steel pipes .................................................................................. 22.30
TESTING: PRESSURE
SUPPLY PIPEWORKS
22.81
22.82
22.83
PIPELINES
FOR
WATER
Testing: pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks ..................................................... 22.30

Compliance criteria: pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks................................... 22.31
Non-compliance: pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks ...................................... 22.31
TESTING: WATER STERILISATION

22.84
Testing: water sterilisation ................................................................................................... 22.31
APPENDIX 22.1
PRESSURE TESTS ON PIPELINES
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
22.1.4
22.1.5
Scope ....................................................................................................................................
Equipment ..........................................................................................................................
Procedure ..............................................................................................................................
Calculation ...........................................................................................................................
35
22.33
22.33
22.33
22.34
22.34
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 22.2
PROTECTION TO STEEL PIPES, FITTINGS AND
SPECIALS USING EPOXY SYSTEM - OTHER
REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
22.2.1
General requirements ........................................................................................................... 22.35
GENERAL PROTECTION COATING REQUIREMENTS

22.2.2
22.2.3
22.2.4
22.2.5
22.2.6
22.2.7
General ...................................................................................................................................
Planning and documentation..................................................................................................
Ambient conditions................................................................................................................
Coating materials ...................................................................................................................
Steel materials ........................................................................................................................
Pre-qualification of coating, personnel and procedures........................................................
22.36
22.36
22.36
22.36
22.36
22.36
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS

22.2.8
Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 22.37
SURFACE PREPARATION OF THE SUBSTRATE

22.2.9
22.2.10
22.2.11
Pre-blasting preparation ....................................................................................................... 22.37

Blast cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 22.37
Final surface condition ......................................................................................................... 22.38
PAINT APPLICATION
22.2.12
22.2.13
22.2.14
22.2.15
General .................................................................................................................................
Application equipment .........................................................................................................
Application ...........................................................................................................................
Repair ...................................................................................................................................
22.38
22.38
22.39
22.39
QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL, SUPPLIER

AND PRODUCT
22.2.16
22.2.17
22.2.18
22.2.19
Operators ..............................................................................................................................
Supplier ................................................................................................................................
Coating materials .................................................................................................................
Paint working specification (PWS) .....................................................................................
36
22.39
22.39
22.39
22.40
2006 Edition
Page
No.
COATING SYSTEM
22.2.20
Coating system requirements ............................................................................................... 22.40
INSPECTION AND TESTING

22.2.21
Testing and inspection ......................................................................................................... 22.41
SECTION 23
GENERAL
23.01
23.02
23.03
23.04
23.05
23.06
23.07

Earthworks .............................................................................................................................
Formwork ...............................................................................................................................
Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................
Concrete ..................................................................................................................................
Joints in concrete ....................................................................................................................
Drainage systems ...................................................................................................................
23.3
23.3
23.3
23.3
23.3
23.3
23.3
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
23.08
Water retaining structure ........................................................................................................ 23.3
MATERIALS
23.09
Sliding layers .......................................................................................................................... 23.3
MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT

LOANED BY THE EMPLOYER
23.10
23.11
Materials provided by the Employer ..................................................................................... 23.3

Equipment loaned by the Employer ...................................................................................... 23.4
SUBMISSIONS
23.12
23.13
23.14
Particulars of sliding layers .................................................................................................... 23.4

Particulars of materials and methods of construction for
water retaining structures ..................................................................................................... 23.4
Samples of sliding layers ....................................................................................................... 23.4
37
2006 Edition
Page
No.
23.15
Storage of sliding layers ......................................................................................................... 23.5
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
23.16
Drainage systems ................................................................................................................... 23.5
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER RETAINING

STRUCTURES
23.17
23.18
23.19
23.20
23.21
Laying sliding layers ..............................................................................................................

Floor slabs of water retaining structures ...............................................................................
Walls of water retaining structures ........................................................................................
Roof slabs of water retaining structures ................................................................................
Built-in pipes in water retaining structures ...........................................................................
PROTECTION
STRUCTURES
23.22
OF
WATER
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.6
RETAINING
Protection of water retaining structures ................................................................................. 23.6

23.23
Deposition of fill material ...................................................................................................... 23.6
CLEANING AND STERILISATION OF WATER

RETAINING STRUCTURES
23.24
23.25
Cleaning and sterilisation of water retaining structures ........................................................ 23.6

Treatment and disposal of effluent ........................................................................................ 23.7
TESTING: DRAINAGE SYSTEMS FOR WATER

23.26
23.27
23.28
Testing: drainage systems for water retaining structures ...................................................... 23.8

Compliance criteria: drainage systems for water retaining structures .................................. 23.8
Non-compliance: drainage systems for water retaining structures ......................................... 23.8
TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF ROOFS

23.29
23.30
23.31
Testing: watertightness of roofs ............................................................................................. 23.8

Compliance criteria: watertightness of roofs ......................................................................... 23.8
Non-compliance: watertightness of roofs .............................................................................. 23.8
38
2006 Edition
Page
No.
TESTING:
STRUCTURES
23.32
23.33
23.34
WATERTIGHTNESS
OF
Testing: watertightness of structures ..................................................................................... 23.9

Compliance criteria: watertightness of structures ................................................................. 23.9
Non-compliance: watertightness of structures .................................................................... 23.10
TESTING: WATER STERILITY

23.35
23.36
23.37
Samples: water sterilisation ................................................................................................. 23.10

Testing: water sterilisation ................................................................................................... 23.10
Compliance criteria: water sterilisation ............................................................................... 23.10
APPENDIX 23.1
TREATMENT OF SLUDGE WITH MOBILE
CENTRIFUGE
AND
MICROFILTRATION
PLANT
23.1.1
23.1.2
Plant ...................................................................................................................................... 23.11

Procedures ............................................................................................................................ 23.11
APPENDIX 23.2
SPECIFICATION
OF
TREATMENT PLANT
23.2.1
THE
MOBILE
Plant ...................................................................................................................................... 23.12
APPENDIX 23.3
SAMPLE RECORD
PRODUCED
FOR
SLUDGE
CAKE
APPENDIX 23.4
SAMPLING
RECORD
FOR
FILTRATE
PRODUCED BY THE MICROFILTRATION
PLANT OR FINAL EFFLUENT PRODUCED BY
THE MOBILE TREATMENT PLANT
39
2006 Edition
SECTION 24
BUILDING WORKS
Page
No.
PART 1: ASPHALT ROOFING

MATERIALS
24.01
24.02
24.03
24.04
24.05
24.06
24.07
24.08
Mastic asphalt .........................................................................................................................

Isolating membrane ................................................................................................................
Bitumen dressing compound .................................................................................................
Bituminous paint ....................................................................................................................
Sand ........................................................................................................................................
Stone chippings ......................................................................................................................
Reflective paint ......................................................................................................................
Metal lathing ..........................................................................................................................
24.3
24.3
24.3
24.3
24.3
24.3
24.3
24.3
SUBMISSIONS
24.09
24.10
Particulars of asphalt roofing ................................................................................................. 24.3

24.11
Storage of isolating membrane, bitumen dressing compound, bituminous paint,

sand, stone chippings, reflective paint and metal lathing ...................................................... 24.4
ASPHALT ROOFING WORK

24.12
24.13
24.14
24.15
24.16
24.17
24.18
24.19
24.20
Heating asphalt .......................................................................................................................

Laying mastic asphalt ............................................................................................................
Laying isolating membrane ...................................................................................................
Forming angles .......................................................................................................................
Forming skirtings ...................................................................................................................
Dressing to rainwater outlets .................................................................................................
Dressing to pipes through roofs .............................................................................................
Finishing roof surfaces ...........................................................................................................
Solar protection ......................................................................................................................
24.4
24.4
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
TESTING: ASPHALT ROOFING

24.21
24.22
24.23
24.24
Batch: mastic asphalt .............................................................................................................

Samples: mastic asphalt .........................................................................................................
Testing: mastic asphalt ...........................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: mastic asphalt .......................................................................................
40
24.5
24.6
24.6
24.6
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 2: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

MATERIALS
24.25
24.26
24.27
24.28
Timber for carpentry and joinery ...........................................................................................

Nails, screws and plugs ..........................................................................................................
Wood preservative ..................................................................................................................
Adhesive .................................................................................................................................
24.7
24.7
24.8
24.8
SUBMISSIONS
24.29
24.30
Particulars of timber................................................................................................................. 24.8

24.31
Storage of timber .................................................................................................................... 24.9
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORK

24.32
24.33
24.34
24.35
24.36
24.37
24.38
Treatment to timber ................................................................................................................

Finish to timber ......................................................................................................................
Framed timber ........................................................................................................................
Running bonded joints ...........................................................................................................
Building-in timber ..................................................................................................................
Nailing ....................................................................................................................................
Fixing screws .........................................................................................................................
24.9
24.9
24.9
24.9
24.9
24.9
24.9
TESTING: TIMBER
24.39
24.40
24.41
Batch: timber ........................................................................................................................ 24.10

Samples: timber .................................................................................................................... 24.10
Testing: timber ...................................................................................................................... 24.10
PART 3: GLAZING
MATERIALS
24.42
24.43
24.44
Glass ..................................................................................................................................... 24.11

Putty ...................................................................................................................................... 24.11
Bituminous paint .................................................................................................................. 24.11
SUBMISSIONS
24.45
41
2006 Edition
Page
No.
24.46
Storage of glass and putty .................................................................................................... 24.11
GLAZING WORK
24.47
Glazing work ........................................................................................................................ 24.12
PART 4 : PLUMBING
GENERAL
24.48
24.49
Licensed plumber ................................................................................................................. 24.14

Taps, valves and fittings ....................................................................................................... 24.14
MATERIALS
24.50
24.51
24.52
24.53
24.54
24.55
Pipework for plumbing ........................................................................................................

Cisterns, tanks and cylinders ...............................................................................................
Draw-off taps and stop valves .............................................................................................
Float operated valves ...........................................................................................................
Sanitary appliances ..............................................................................................................
Pipe brackets and fixings .....................................................................................................
24.14
24.14
24.14
24.15
24.15
24.16
SUBMISSIONS
24.56
24.57
Particulars of plumbing work .............................................................................................. 24.16

24.58
24.59
Storage of pipes, gutters and fittings ................................................................................... 24.17

Storage of sanitary appliances ............................................................................................. 24.17
PLUMBING WORK
24.60
Plumbing work ..................................................................................................................... 24.17
TESTING: PLUMBING - FOUL DRAINS

24.61
24.62
Testing: plumbing - foul drains ............................................................................................ 24.18

Compliance criteria: plumbing - foul drains ....................................................................... 24.18
TESTING: PLUMBING - WATER PIPES

24.63
24.64
Testing: plumbing - water pipes ........................................................................................... 24.18

Compliance criteria: plumbing - water pipes ...................................................................... 24.18
42
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 5: PLASTERWORK AND OTHER FINISHES

MATERIALS
24.65
24.66
24.67
24.68
24.69
24.70
24.71
24.72
24.73
24.74
24.75
24.76
24.77
24.78
24.79
24.80
24.81
24.82
24.83
24.84
24.85
Cement, water and sand .......................................................................................................

Premixed plaster.....................................................................................................................
Gypsum plaster .....................................................................................................................
Lime ......................................................................................................................................
Stone chippings ....................................................................................................................
Metal lathing ........................................................................................................................
Aggregates for lightweight screeds .....................................................................................
Vapour barrier .......................................................................................................................
Aggregates for terrazzo ........................................................................................................
Aggregates for granolithic concrete ....................................................................................
Tiles ......................................................................................................................................
Floor tiles ..............................................................................................................................
Non-homogenous floor tiles ................................................................................................
Ceramic wall tiles .................................................................................................................
Mosaic tiles ..........................................................................................................................
Homogenous coved tile skirting ..........................................................................................
Homogenous wall tiles .........................................................................................................
External facing tiles .............................................................................................................
Concrete roof tiles ................................................................................................................
Tile adhesive and tile grout ..................................................................................................
Bitumen ................................................................................................................................
24.19
24.20
24.20
24.20
24.20
24.20
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.21
24.22
24.22
24.22
24.22
24.22
24.23
SUBMISSIONS
24.86
24.87
24.88
Particulars of plasterwork and other finishes ...................................................................... 24.23

Particulars of tile adhesive and tile grout ............................................................................ 24.24

24.89
24.90
24.91
Delivery and storage of cement, gypsum plaster and lime ................................................. 24.25
Storage of tile adhesive ........................................................................................................ 24.25
Storage of premixed mortar ................................................................................................. 24.25
ON SITE DELIVERY CHECK

24.92
General ................................................................................................................................... 24.25
TRIAL PANELS
24.93
24.94
24.95
24.96
24.97
Trial panels ...........................................................................................................................

Trial panels for tile adhesive ................................................................................................
Non-compliance: trial-panels ...............................................................................................
Commencement of plasterwork and other finishes .............................................................
Changes in materials ............................................................................................................
43
24.26
24.27
24.28
24.28
24.28
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PLASTERING AND RENDERING

24.98
24.99
24.100
24.101
24.102
24.103
24.104
24.105
24.106
24.107
24.108
24.109
24.110
Applying spatterdash to new concrete .................................................................................

Joint inspection to spatterdash .............................................................................................
Background preparation for plastering and rendering ..........................................................
Preparation of hardened concrete to receive cementitious renders .....................................
Preparation of hardened concrete to receive gypsum renders ............................................
Dubbing out ..........................................................................................................................
Fixing steel lathing ...............................................................................................................
Mixing plaster and render ....................................................................................................
Premixed plaster.....................................................................................................................
Cement render ......................................................................................................................
Gypsum plaster .....................................................................................................................
Lime plaster ..........................................................................................................................
Shanghai plaster ...................................................................................................................
SCREEDS, TERRAZZO
CONCRETE
24.111
24.112
24.113
24.114
24.115
AND
24.28
24.29
24.29
24.29
24.29
24.30
24.30
24.30
24.30
24.31
24.31
24.32
24.32
GRANOLITHIC
Preparation for screeds, terrazzo and granolithic concrete .................................................

Mixing screeds, terrazzo and granolithic concrete ..............................................................
Screeds ..................................................................................................................................
Terrazzo ................................................................................................................................
Granolithic concrete
24.32
24.33
24.33
24.34
24.34
TILING
24.116
24.117
24.118
Floor tiles .............................................................................................................................. 24.35

Wall tiles ............................................................................................................................... 24.36
Roof tiles .............................................................................................................................. 24.37
PROTECTION OF PLASTERWORK AND OTHER

FINISHES
24.119
Protection of plasterwork and other finishes ....................................................................... 24.37
TOLERANCES
24.120
Tolerances: plasterwork and other finishes ......................................................................... 24.37
TESTING
24.121
24.122
24.123
24.124
24.125
24.126
24.127
Non-slip homogenous floor tiles .........................................................................................

Glazed ceramic wall tiles .....................................................................................................
Unglazed vitreous mosaic wall tiles ....................................................................................
Glass mosaic wall tiles .........................................................................................................
Homogenous coved tile skirting ..........................................................................................
Homogenous wall tiles .........................................................................................................
External facing tiles .............................................................................................................
44
24.38
24.40
24.43
24.44
24.46
24.47
24.49
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 6: PAINTING
MATERIALS
24.128
24.129
24.130
24.131
24.132
24.133
24.134
24.135
24.136
24.137
24.138
24.139
24.140
24.141
24.142
24.143
24.144
24.145
24.146
24.147
Paint and associated materials .............................................................................................

Aluminium primer ...............................................................................................................
Zinc chromate primer ...........................................................................................................
Lead primer ..........................................................................................................................
Calcium plumbate primer ....................................................................................................
Bitumastic paint ...................................................................................................................
Bituminous paint ..................................................................................................................
Knotting ................................................................................................................................
Stopping ................................................................................................................................
Rust inhibitor ........................................................................................................................
Sealers ..................................................................................................................................
Wood preservative ................................................................................................................
Polyurethane paint ................................................................................................................
Epoxy paint ..........................................................................................................................
Textured paint .......................................................................................................................
Plastic emulsion paint ..........................................................................................................
Cement paint ........................................................................................................................
Gloss paint ............................................................................................................................
Volatile organic compound content .......................................................................................
Selection of colours for paintwork ......................................................................................
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.51
24.52
24.52
24.52
24.52
24.52
24.52

24.148
Storage of paint and associated materials ............................................................................ 24.52
ON-SITE DELIVERY CHECK

24.149
Emulsion paint, synthetic paint and multi-layer acrylic paint .............................................. 24.53
PAINTWORK
24.150
24.151
24.152
24.153
Preparation of surfaces for painting .....................................................................................

Type and number of coats for painting system ....................................................................
Application of paint and associated materials .....................................................................
Health and safety....................................................................................................................
24.53
24.53
24.54
24.54
TESTING
24.154
24.155
24.156
Emulsion paint ..................................................................................................................... 24.56

Synthetic paint ...................................................................................................................... 24.57
Multi-layer acrylic paint ...................................................................................................... 24.58
45
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 7: BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

MATERIALS
24.157
24.158
24.159
24.160
24.161
24.162
24.163
Clay bricks ............................................................................................................................

Concrete bricks and blocks ..................................................................................................
Concrete hollow blocks ........................................................................................................
Brickwork reinforcement .....................................................................................................
Damp proof course ...............................................................................................................
Wall ties ................................................................................................................................
Mortar for brickwork and blockwork
24.60
24.60
24.60
24.60
24.60
24.60
24.61
SUBMISSIONS
24.164
24.165
Particulars of brickwork and blockwork ............................................................................. 24.61

TRIAL PANELS
24.166
24.167
24.168
24.169
Trial panels ...........................................................................................................................

Non-compliance: brickwork and blockwork .......................................................................
Commencement of brickwork and blockwork ....................................................................
Changes in materials ............................................................................................................
24.61
24.62
24.62
24.62

24.170
Handling and storage of bricks and blocks ......................................................................... 24.62
LAYING BRICKS AND BLOCKS

24.171
24.172
24.173
24.174
24.175
Type of mortar ......................................................................................................................

Bond and gauge of brickwork and blockwork ....................................................................
Laying damp proof courses ..................................................................................................
Fixing wall ties .....................................................................................................................
Finishing of joints in brickwork and blockwork .................................................................
24.63
24.63
24.63
24.63
24.64
TOLERANCES
24.176
Tolerances: brickwork and blockwork ................................................................................ 24.64
TESTING: BRICKS AND BLOCKS

24.177
24.178
24.179
24.180
Batch: bricks and blocks ......................................................................................................

Samples: bricks and blocks ..................................................................................................
Testing: bricks and blocks ....................................................................................................
Compliance criteria: bricks and blocks ...............................................................................
46
24.64
24.64
24.64
24.65
2006 Edition
Page
No.
PART 8: METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS

MATERIALS
24.181
Materials for metal windows and doors .............................................................................. 24.66
DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF METAL WINDOWS

AND DOORS
24.182
24.183
24.184
24.185
24.186
Steel windows and doors .....................................................................................................

Fittings and furniture to steel windows and doors ..............................................................
Aluminium windows and doors ...........................................................................................
Fittings and furniture to aluminium windows and doors ....................................................
Roller shutters and doors .....................................................................................................
24.66
24.67
24.68
24.69
24.70
SUBMISSIONS
24.187
24.188
24.189
Particulars of metal windows and doors .............................................................................. 24.71

Instruction manuals .............................................................................................................. 24.71

24.190
Handling and storage of metal windows and doors ............................................................ 24.71
FIXING METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS

24.191
Fixing metal windows and doors ......................................................................................... 24.72
PART 9: MASONRY
MATERIALS
24.192
24.193
24.194
24.195
Stone .....................................................................................................................................
Mortar ...................................................................................................................................
Wall ties ................................................................................................................................
Damp proof course ...............................................................................................................
24.73
24.73
24.73
24.73
SUBMISSIONS
24.196
TRIAL PANELS
24.197
Trial panels ........................................................................................................................... 24.73
47
2006 Edition
Page
No.

24.198
Handling and storage of stone ............................................................................................. 24.73
RUBBLE STONE WALLING

24.199
24.200
24.201
Preparation of stone for rubble stone walling ..................................................................... 24.73

Laying and jointing rubble stone walling ............................................................................ 24.74
Pointing rubble stone walling .............................................................................................. 24.74
ASHLAR STONE WALLING

24.202
24.203
24.204
Preparation of stone for ashlar stone walling ...................................................................... 24.75

Laying and jointing ashlar stone walling ............................................................................. 24.75
Pointing ashlar stone walling ............................................................................................... 24.75
PROTECTION OF MASONRY
24.205
Protection of masonry .......................................................................................................... 24.75
WALL TIES FOR MASONRY

24.206
Wall ties for masonry ........................................................................................................... 24.75
TOLERANCES
24.207
Tolerances: masonry ............................................................................................................ 24.75
SECTION 25
GENERAL
25.01
General requirements ................................................................................................................ 25.3
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

25.02
25.03
25.04
25.05
25.06
25.07
25.08
25.09
Water pollution control - general requirements .......................................................................

Marine plant and equipment .....................................................................................................
Avoidance of pollution during dredging, transporting and dumping of marine mud ............
Protection of water quality at water intakes and storage .........................................................
Discharge into sewers, drains and water bodies .......................................................................
Waste water from construction activities .................................................................................
Surface runoff ............................................................................................................................
Protection of natural streams/rivers ..........................................................................................
48
25.3
25.4
25.4
25.6
25.7
25.7
25.8
25.9
2006 Edition
Page
No.
NOISE CONTROL
25.10
25.11
25.12
25.13
Noise control - general requirements .......................................................................................

Allowable noise limits ..............................................................................................................
Noise mitigation measures .......................................................................................................
Construction Noise Permits .....................................................................................................
25.10
25.11
25.12
25.12
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

25.14
25.15
25.16
25.17
25.18
25.19
Air pollution control - general requirements ...........................................................................

Dust suppression .......................................................................................................................
Smoke and exhaust control ......................................................................................................
Prior consent for pollutant emitting equipment ......................................................................
Odour mitigation ......................................................................................................................
Hoardings adjoining public areas ............................................................................................
25.12
25.13
25.15
25.15
25.15
25.15
WASTE MANAGEMENT
25.20
25.21
25.22
25.23
25.24
25.25
25.26
25.27
25.28
Waste management - general requirements ............................................................................

Measures to reduce/minimise generation of C&D materials .................................................
Reduced use of timber in temporary works ............................................................................
Works involving demolition ....................................................................................................
Sorting of C&D materials ........................................................................................................
Trip ticket system .....................................................................................................................
Avoidance of nuisance .............................................................................................................
Handling and disposal of waste ...............................................................................................
Chemical waste control ............................................................................................................
25.15
25.16
25.16
25.16
25.16
25.18
25.23
25.24
25.24
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND AUDIT

25.29
25.30
25.31
25.32
25.33
25.34
Environmental monitoring and audit general requirements ................................................

Environmental Team ................................................................................................................
Vetting of Contractors proposals by the Environmental Team ............................................
Environmental monitoring .......................................................................................................
Environmental site audit inspections .......................................................................................
Environmental complaints .......................................................................................................
25.24
25.25
25.25
25.26
25.26
25.27
APPENDIX 25.1
SAMPLE PROFORMA FOR MONTHLY RECORDING DELIVERY
AND CONSUMPTION OF
ULTRA LOW SULPHUR DIESEL ON SITE ............................................................... 25.28
APPENDIX 25.2
SAMPLE OF WASTE FLOW TABLE ............................................................................. 25.29
APPENDIX 25.3
SAMPLE OF DISPOSAL DELIVERY FORM ............................................................. 25.30
49
2006 Edition
Page
No.
APPENDIX 25.4
SAMPLE OF DAILY RECORD SUMMARY ............................................................... 25.31
SECTION 26
GENERAL
26.01
26.02
Definitions regarding trees ........................................................................................................ 26.3

General requirements ................................................................................................................ 26.3
SURVEY AND IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING TREES

26.03
26.04
Tree Survey ................................................................................................................................ 26.4

Labelling of Trees ...................................................................................................................... 26.5
REMOVAL OF EXISTING TREES

26.05
26.06
26.07
26.08
26.09
26.10
26.11
26.12
26.13
26.14
26.15
Felling of existing trees ............................................................................................................. 26.6

Transplanting of existing trees .................................................................................................. 26.6
Unplanned tree removal ............................................................................................................ 26.7
General precautionary measures to preserved trees ................................................................. 26.7
Protection of preserved trees from physical damage and soil compaction ............................. 26.10
Protection of preserved trees from changes in ground levels .................................................. 26.11
Protection of preserved trees from excavation including trenching ........................................ 26.12
Protection of preserved trees from drilling ............................................................................... 26.14
Protection of preserved trees from instability .......................................................................... 26.15
Pruning of preserved trees ......................................................................................................... 26.16
Control of pest and disease for preserved trees ........................................................................ 26.16
REPAIR OF DAMAGE
26.16
Repair of damage to preserved trees and other affected plants ............................................... 26.16
50
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 13
13.1
2006 Edition
13.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 13
WORK
FOR
ELECTRICAL
AND
GENERAL
13.01
The works and materials specified in Clauses 13.02 and 13.03 shall
comply with the sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this Section.
Earthworks
13.02
Materials for grout
13.03
Galvanization
13.04
Galvanization in this Section shall be hot dip galvanization to BS EN ISO

1461: 1999.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Concealed electrical
conduit system
13.05
Concealed electrical conduit system is an electrical conduit system,

including all bends, couplers, bushes, saddles, boxes, covers, plugs, draw
wires and other conduit fittings, which is cast into concrete or fixed in
chases in brickwork with a minimum cover of 20 mm or which is laid
directly in the ground.
MATERIALS
Electrical conduits and
fittings
13.06
(1)
Electrical conduits and fittings shall comply with BS 4568: Parts 1
and 2 and shall have Class 4 heavy protection inside and outside.
Conduits shall be heavy gauge with screw-end construction in steel and
shall have an external diameter of at least 20 mm. Conduits shall be
longitudinally welded.
(2)
Metal boxes for enclosing electrical accessories shall comply with
BS 4662 and shall have heavy protection inside and outside. The boxes
shall be of preferred sizes and shall be 35 mm or 47 mm deep as
appropriate. Circular ceiling boxes of deep pattern shall comply with BS
4568: Part 2 and shall have Class 4 heavy protection inside and outside.
The boxes shall be at least 60 mm deep internally.
(3)
Circular boxes, dome covers and hook covers shall be cast iron.
Bushes and plugs shall be brass.
Cable ducts and fittings
13.07
(1)
uPVC cable ducts for installation above ground or for casting into
concrete shall be Class 0 uPVC pipes complying with BS 3506. Cable
ducts for installation below ground shall be Class B uPVC pipes
(2)
Joints and fittings for use with uPVC cable ducts shall comply with
13.3
2006 Edition
BS 4346: Part 1 and BS 4346: Part 2. Solvent cement for uPVC pipes
and fittings shall comply with BS 4346: Part 3.
(3)
Steel cable ducts shall be steel tubes complying with BS 1387,
medium series, screwed and socketted tubes and shall have screwed
sockets suitable for screwing to BS 21, Table 2 pipe threads. The tubes,
sockets, clamps and saddles for ducts shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
Paint for conduit and
duct systems
13.08
(1)
Bituminous paint for steel conduits and steel cable ducts shall
comply with BS 3416, type 1.
(2)
Anti-rust paint for concealed electrical conduit systems shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
(3)
Zinc chromate primer for cable duct systems shall comply with BS
4652.
(4)
Galvanizing paint for cable duct systems shall be of a proprietary
Fire barriers
13.09
Internal fire barriers shall be a type offering adequate fire resistance for the
application. The material shall be approved by the Engineer in
compliance with Fire Services Departments requirements and shall be
resistant to fire, smoke, gas and water.
Cement grout for

electrical and
mechanical
installations
13.10
The different types of cement grout for electrical and mechanical

installations shall consist of Portland cement, sand and PFA in the
proportions by mass stated in Table 13.1 together with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely
filling the voids. The mix shall contain a non-shrink admixture of a
Table 13.1: Mix proportions of cement grout

Mix proportions by mass
Type
Cement
Sand
PFA
G1
G2
G3
10
G4
Storage of materials for
conduit and cable duct
systems
13.11
Materials for concealed electrical conduit systems and for cable duct
systems shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations in a dry and weatherproof store.
13.4
2006 Edition
HOLES AND RECESSES FOR ELECTRICAL AND

Holes and recesses for
electrical and
mechanical
installations
13.12
(1)
Holes and recesses shall be left in structures for electrical and
mechanical installations. If instructed by the Engineer, holes and recesses
shall be cut in structures for electrical and mechanical installations.
(2)
Holes and recesses in internal floors, stairways and platforms shall
be protected with temporary covers or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer until the electrical and mechanical installation starts. Holes and
recesses in roofs, external walls and external floors shall be sealed with
watertight temporary covers until the electrical and mechanical installation
starts.
(3)
Holes in structures shall be filled and made good after electrical and
mechanical installations are complete. Holes left in structural elements
designated as fire barriers shall be sealed to at least the same degree of fire
resistance as the structural element.
FIRE BARRIERS
Fire barriers
13.13
Internal fire barriers shall be constructed in service channels, service shafts

and service ducts for electrical and mechanical installations at the
following locations:
(a)
At points of intersection with structural elements designated

as fire barriers,
(b)
At 5 m centres in vertical and inclined shafts, and at

intersections with floor slabs, and
(c)
At termination points and open ends.
CONCEALED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SYSTEMS

Construction of
conduit systems
13.14
(1)
Concealed electrical conduit systems that are shown
diagrammatically in the Contract shall be constructed as stated in Clause
13.14(2) to (7).
(2)
Concealed electrical conduit systems shall be mechanically and
electrically continuous and shall be effectively earthed.
(3)
Principal conduit runs shall be either vertical or horizontal. Tee
pieces and elbows, including those with provision for inspection, shall not
be used unless approved by the Engineer.
(4)
Joints shall be made using coupler units into which the ends of the
conduits shall be inserted and tightened. Running couplings shall not be
used unless permitted by the Engineer. If permitted, the couplings shall be
made by screwing each of the conduits half way into the coupler with a
hexagonal lock nut against each end of the coupler.
13.5
2006 Edition
(5)
Adaptable boxes shall be provided at:

(a)
Every second bend,
(b)
After a bend and a straight run of 10 m or less, and
(c)
Every 15 m in straight runs.
(6)
Adaptable boxes for conduits installed in floor screeds shall have
the lids set flush with the adjacent floor. The boxes shall be covered with
the same material as the remainder of the floor and shall remain accessible
at all times.
(7)
The clearance between conduits entering adaptable boxes and
between adjacent or parallel conduits shall be at least the nominal
maximum coarse aggregate size of the concrete plus 5 mm.
Installation of conduit
systems
13.15
(1)
Concealed electrical conduit systems shall be arranged and installed
in accordance with best trade practice and in such a manner that all cables
can be drawn with ease and without damage.
(2)
Bends in concealed electrical conduit systems shall be formed by
using proprietary bending equipment of a type agreed by the Engineer.
Connections and other work shall be carried out using purpose made
equipment.
(3)
Conduits shall not be bent by more than 900 and the internal radius
at bends shall be at least 2.5 times the external diameter of the conduit.
Conduits shall not be flattened at bends.
(4)
Burrs and sharp edges shall be removed from the ends of conduits
before installation.
(5)
Concealed electrical conduit systems that are to be cast into
concrete shall be fastened to the reinforcement with tying wire of the same
type used for the reinforcement. The conduit systems shall not be
positioned between the reinforcement and the outside face of the concrete
(6)
Conduit boxes shall be of a compatible size and shall have a single
extension ring of the required depth if the plaster finish exceeds 13 mm
thick. Multiple extension rings shall not be used.
Terminations of
conduit systems
13.16
Screw fitting couplers shall be provided at each end of conduits which

terminate in distribution boards, busbar chambers, motor starters, cable
ducts, boxes or similar termination points. The item at which the
conduit terminates shall be drilled with an unthreaded clearance hole to
receive a brass male bush. The bush shall be screwed into the coupler
from the inside of the item in such a manner that the surface of the item
is gripped between the coupler and the bush. The threads shall be at
least half the length of the coupler.
13.6
2006 Edition
Protection of conduit
systems
13.17
(1)
Concealed electrical conduit systems shall have special
arrangements designed by the Contractor to permit movement of conduits
to take place on each side of movement joints in structures. A separate
circuit protective conductor shall be installed to maintain effective
electrical continuity across the joint. The protective conductor shall have
a cross-sectional area rated to suit the largest live conductor to be drawn
into the conduit.
(2)
Steel conduit systems laid in contact with or adjacent to other metal
work shall have efficient and permanent metallic connection made
between the conduit and the metal work.
(3)
Underground steel conduits and conduits in contact with soil shall
be painted with two coats of bituminous paint before installation.
(4)
Exposed threads and damage to protective coatings of conduit
systems shall be painted with two coats of anti-rust paint.
(5)
Conduits shall be laid in such a manner that accumulation of
condensed moisture in the conduit system is prevented. Measures shall
be taken to prevent water from entering the system.
(6)
Water, moisture and deleterious material shall be prevented from
entering permanent and temporary terminations in concealed electrical
conduit systems, including conduit boxes, by using conduit-stopping plugs
of a type approved by the Engineer. Paper or rags shall not be used.
Cleaning of conduit
systems
13.18
After installation, concealed electrical conduit systems shall be swabbed

out with draw-in tapes and absorbent cloth of a type agreed by the
Engineer. All obstructions shall be removed and draw wires shall be
installed. After cleaning, exposed conduit ends shall be sealed as stated
in Clause 13.17(6).
CABLE DUCT SYSTEMS

Installation of cable
duct system
13.19
(1)
Changes in direction in cable duct systems shall be constructed in
such a manner that the cables in the duct will have radii of curvature of at
least 800 mm. Ducts entering draw-in pits shall be on the same
horizontal plane as the draw-in pit.
(2)
uPVC cable ducts shall be jointed in accordance with the
(3)
Steel cable ducts shall be jointed using screwed hot dip galvanized
sockets and spun yarn or by an equivalent method approved by the
Engineer such that the jointed pipes abut. The threads shall be painted
with two coats of bituminous paint. Internal rags and burrs shall be
removed to provide a smooth bore through joints in the cable duct system.
(4)
Surface mounted cable ducts shall be secured by hot dip galvanized
steel clamps or saddles at spacings not exceeding 3 m.
13.7
2006 Edition
Protection of cable duct

systems
13.20
(1)
After jointing, exposed bare metal in cable duct systems shall be
cleaned and painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats
of galvanizing paint.
(2)
Surface-mounted hot dip galvanized steel cable ducts shall be
cleaned and painted after fittings and jointing have been completed.
Cleaning of cable duct

systems
13.21
After jointing, cable duct systems shall be cleaned internally by scrubbing

with a cylindrical brush of a type agreed by the Engineer. The ends of
ducts, including ends of ducts in draw-in pits and spare ducts, shall be
fitted with tapered hardwood plugs to prevent water, moisture and
deleterious material from entering the system and a 6 mm diameter nylon
draw line shall be installed. The plugs shall be centrally drilled for the
draw line and the draw line shall be secured by a knot tied on the outer
face of the plug to leave at least 1500 mm of surplus line at each plug.
ELECTRICAL EARTHING SYSTEMS

Electrical earthing
systems
13.22
(1)
Pits and trenches for electrical earthing systems shall be excavated
at positions and at the times instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
After the electrical earthing systems have been installed fill material
shall be deposited and compacted in the pits and trenches to a depth of 300
mm above the electrical earthing system. Fill material shall be sand or
fine fill material which has been selected from the excavated material, and
which is free of stones retained on a 20 mm BS test sieve. Fill material
shall be compacted by handrammers in a manner approved by the
Engineer.
GROUTING FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

INSTALLATIONS
Grouting for electrical
and mechanical
installations
13.23
(1)
Grouting to structural steelwork, machine bases, crane rails,
electrical and mechanical equipment and other electrical and mechanical
installations shall comply with the requirements stated in Clauses 13.23(2)
to (8).
(2)
Grouting shall be carried out at the times instructed by the Engineer
and shall be completed within 7 days of the instruction unless otherwise
(3)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before items or
equipment are grouted. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer within
3 days, or a shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before grouting starts
and shall allow the Engineer sufficient time to inspect the work that is to
be grouted.
(4)
Concrete surfaces shall be scabbled to remove laitance and loose
material and to expose the aggregate before the item or equipment is
installed in position.
13.8
2006 Edition
(5)
The voids to be grouted shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted
immediately before grouting. Excess water shall be removed by using a
compressed air jet or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(6)
Grout shall be mixed and placed by methods agreed by the
Engineer.
(7)
If grouting is to be carried out in two operations, holding down
bolts shall be grouted into preformed pockets and sufficient time shall be
allowed for the grout to cure and for the bolts to be tensioned before the
remaining voids are grouted.
(8)
Exposed grout surfaces shall have a uniform, dense and smooth
surface free of trowel marks and which is produced by steel trowelling the
surface under firm pressure. The exposed surfaces shall be cured by
either:
(a)
Using a liquid curing compound applied to the surface by a

low-pressure spray until a continuous visible covering is
achieved, or
(b) Covering the surface with hessian or sacking. The hessian or

sacking shall be lapped and securely held in position and shall
be kept damp for at least 4 days.
COMPLETION AND PROTECTION OF WORK FOR

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
Completion of work for
electrical and
mechanical
installations
13.24
(1)
Work shall be completed to the conditions stated in Clauses
13.24(2) to (8) before structures are made available to others for electrical
and mechanical installations.
(2)
The structure shall be clean, dry and free of dust. Work that in the
opinion of the Engineer will produce large quantities of dust shall be
complete.
(3)
Holes and recesses, concealed electrical conduit systems and cable
duct systems required for the installation shall be complete. Concrete
surfaces on which items and equipment are to be installed shall be
scabbled.
(4)
Plinths, trenches, louvres, openings and similar work shall be
complete and shall have hardened sufficiently to allow the installation to
proceed.
(5)
Floors and slabs shall be complete to the specified finishes except
that floor tiles shall not be laid until after the installation is complete.
(6)
Plant rooms shall be complete, including fixtures and fittings, to a
secure and weatherproof condition. Two sets of door keys for the plant
room shall be provided for the Engineer.
(7)
Paintwork and similar finishes in plant rooms shall be complete to
undercoat level. Final coats shall not be applied until after the installation
is complete.
13.9
2006 Edition
(8)
Temporary power supplies and connections required for the
installation shall be complete. The supply shall be metered and shall be a
346V, 3-phase supply of 20A maximum rating. Temporary power
supplies shall be provided for the periods stated in the Contract.
Protection of work for
electrical and
mechanical
installations
13.25
(1)
Structures in which electrical and mechanical installations are being
carried out shall be maintained in a clean, dry condition, free of dust,
during the installation.
(2)
The dust level in plant rooms shall be kept to a minimum by using
industrial dust extractors of a type agreed by the Engineer during and after
the installation. Temporary screens shall be installed to separate
dust-affected areas from the installations or temporary covers shall be
installed around the installation.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
floors of switchgear
rooms
Tolerances:
lamp standards
13.26
13.27
The tolerance in floor levels for switchgear rooms shall be as follows:

(a)
2 mm in 1000 mm for high voltage switchgear rooms,
(b)
4 mm in 1000 mm for medium voltage switchgear rooms.
Lamp standards shall be within 0.1 degrees of the vertical.
INSPECTION OF WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND

Inspection of work for
electrical and
mechanical
installations
13.28
(1)
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the following
work for electrical and mechanical installations:
(a)
Completed concealed electrical conduit systems, cable duct

systems, electrical earthing systems and items and equipment
which are to be grouted or covered up,
(b)
Items and equipment which are to be tested, and
(c)
Structures that are to be made available for electrical and

mechanical installations.
(2)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer three days, or such shorter
period agreed by the Engineer, before work is covered up, tested or made
available.
13.10
2006 Edition
TESTING: EARTHING CONTINUITY

Testing:
earthing continuity
13.29
(1)
Concealed electrical conduit systems shall be tested to determine
the earthing continuity. The system shall be tested:
(a)
Before the system is cast in concrete or covered up,
(b)
After the system is cast in concrete or covered up, and
(c)
After electrical wiring that is installed by the Contractor is

complete.
(2)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer the method of testing
shall be in accordance with Appendix 15 to the IEE Wiring Regulations,
15th Edition, 1981 issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
earthing continuity
13.30
The results of tests for earthing continuity shall comply with the IEE
Wiring Regulations, 15th Edition, 1981 issued by the Institution of
Electrical Engineers.
TESTING: LOAD TESTS ON BEAMS AND JOISTS

Testing: load tests on
beams and joists
13.31
(1)
Load tests shall be carried out on lifting beams, rolled steel joists
and lifting hooks that are installed by the Contractor.
(2)
Testing shall be carried out by an independent testing consultant
approved by the Engineer and by using methods approved by the Engineer.
(3)
A certificate showing the results of the load tests and signed by the
testing agent shall be submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of the test.
load tests on beams and
joists
13.32
The results of tests on lifting beams, rolled steel joists and lifting hooks
shall comply with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Lifting
Appliances and Lifting Gear) Regulations, 1978 issued by the Labour
Department.
13.11
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 14
14.1
2006 Edition
14.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 14
FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO
CONCRETE
GENERAL
14.01
Hardwood is strictly prohibited for use in the falsework.
Amd 2/2009
Concrete carriageways
14.02
Surface finish to concrete carriageways shall comply with Section 10.
Cover spacers
14.03
Cover spacers for steel reinforcement shall comply with Section 15.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Class
14.04
Class is a term used to identify the different types and standards of formed,
unformed and treated finishes.
Falsework
14.05
Falsework is a temporary structure used to support formwork and a

permanent structure until the permanent structure is self-supporting.
Formed finish
14.06
Formed finish is the finish of the concrete surface produced by the use of
formwork.
Formwork
14.07
Formwork is the mould against which concrete is cast and which gives the
shape and finish to the concrete surface.
Permanent formwork
14.08
Permanent formwork is formwork designed to remain in position as part of

the permanent work.
Profiled formwork
14.09
Profiled formwork is formwork designed to produce a ribbed or patterned

finish on the concrete surface.
Sealed plywood
14.10
Sealed plywood is plywood that has been sealed with a factory-applied

film of phenolic resin or plastic material.
Spatterdash
14.11
Spatterdash is a mixture of cement, coarse sand, granite fines and water,

used as a rendering on concrete surfaces.
Treated finish
14.12
Treated finish is the finish of the concrete surface produced by a treatment

applied to a formed or unformed finish.
Unformed finish
14.13
Unformed finish is the finish of the concrete surface produced without

formwork and by working the concrete surface before the concrete has
hardened.
Wood preservative
14.13A Wood preservative in permanent timber formwork shall comply with

Clause 24.27.
Amd 2/2009
14.3
2006 Edition
MATERIALS
Formwork
14.14
(1)
Formwork shall be timber, metal, plastic or other material, which
will produce the specified finish. Tropical hardwood is strictly prohibited
for use in the formwork. Materials used as formers for profiled formwork,
chamfers, splays, rebates and other features shall be such that they produce
the same finish as the main formwork.
(2)
Plywood for formwork shall have a close, uniform grain and the
edges shall be sealed with barrier paint, polyurethane varnish or other
impermeable material. Plywood sheathing to formwork shall not be
subjected to more than nine uses, irrespective of the use of one or both
faces of such sheathing.
(3)
The faces of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall have a
uniform texture and a matt, not a shiny or polished, surface. The edges of
the formwork shall be straight and square.
Formwork Class of
finish
14.15
(1)
The characteristics of each class of finish shall be as stated in Tables
14.1, 14.2 and 14.3.
(2)
Formwork of the type stated in Table 14.1 will normally produce a
concrete surface that complies with the characteristics of finish stated in
Table 14.1 but other types of formwork may be used to produce the
specified finish.
(3)
The Class of formed and unformed finish required for different
concrete surfaces shall be as stated in Table 14.4 unless otherwise stated in
the Contract. The higher Class of finish shall start at least 150 mm below
the finished ground level for concrete surfaces that are partly buried.
Release agents
14.16
(1)
Release agents shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. Release agents containing mineral oils shall not be used.
Barrier paint, polyurethane varnish, wax or other materials shall not be
used instead of a release agent.
(2)
Release agents shall be of a type that will not stain or colour the
concrete and which will not affect the bond between the concrete and
subsequent coverings. Release agents other than those that incorporate a
surface retarder to produce a Class T1 finish shall be of a type that will not
affect the hardening of the concrete.
(3)
Release agents used on formwork for water retaining structures for
potable and fresh water shall be non-toxic and shall not impart a taste to
the water.
(4)
Release agents used on steel formwork shall contain a
rust-inhibiting agent.
(5)
Release agents used on formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall
be a chemical release agent.
(6)
On areas of formwork which in the opinion of the Engineer are
likely to be affected by pedestrian traffic, rain or dust, release agents for
Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be of a type which evaporates to leave a dry
film on the formwork, unless protection from such effects is provided.
14.4
2006 Edition
Table 14.1: Formed finishes
Class
of
finish
Type of
formwork
normally
used
Characteristics of finish
Formwork
pattern
Abrupt
irregularities
permitted
Gradual
irregularities
permitted
Specific
requirements
F1
Sawn
timber
Not
required
< 10 mm
< 15 mm in 2 m
No specific
requirements
F2
Plywood
Pattern of
formwork
joints and
tie holes
as stated
in Clause
14.30(1)
and (2)
<
5 mm
< 10 mm in 2 m
Even surface
No grout runs
<
3 mm
<
Even surface
No grout runs
F3
F4
F5
Sealed
plywood
5 mm in 2 m
Uniform, dense
and smooth
surface
No grout runs
No grain pattern
No crazing
No major
blemishes
<
2 mm
14.5
<
3 mm in 2 m
Uniform, dense
and smooth
surface
No grout runs
No grain pattern
No crazing
No blemishes
No staining or
discolouration
2006 Edition
Table 14.2: Unformed finishes
Class
of
finish
Method of
producing
finish
U1
Levelling the
surface of the
compacted concrete
with a screed board
Screed marks
< 5 mm
< 10 mm in 2 m
No specific
requirements
U2
Forming a Class U1
finish and
tamping the
surface
Tamp marks
< 10 mm
Not applicable
Ridged surface
U3
Forming a Class U1
finish and wood
floating or
power floating
the surface
Float marks
< 3 mm
< 10 mm in 2 m
Uniform, dense and

smooth surface
U4
Forming a Class U3
finish and
brushing the
surface with a
stiff brush
Brush marks
< 3 mm
< 10 mm in 2 m
Rough texture
U5
Forming a Class U3
finish and
steel trowelling
the surface
under firm
pressure or
power floating
the surface
Nil
< 5 mm in 2 m
Abrupt
irregularities
permitted
Gradual
irregularities
permitted
14.6
Specific
requirements
Uniform, dense and

smooth surface,
free of trowel
marks
No staining or
discolouration
2006 Edition
Table 14.3: Treated finishes
Class
of
finish
Type of
finish
Method of
producing
finish
T1
Exposed
aggregate
Washing and
brushing the
concrete
surface
Cement matrix removed and coarse

aggregate exposed to a depth not
exceeding one-third of the nominal
maximum coarse aggregate size
T2
Point tooled
Point tooling the

concrete
surface
T3
Bush
hammered
Bush hammering
the concrete
surface
Cement matrix and aggregate surface

removed sufficiently to expose the
aggregate with a minimum
penetration into the matrix between
aggregates
T4
Broken rib
Hammering or
chiselling the
edges and faces
of the concrete
surface
Fragments of concrete ribs removed
T5
Light blasting

aggregate exposed to a minimum depth
T6
Heavy blasting
Blasting the
concrete surface
by abrasives and
compressed air or
by water jetting
14.7

aggregate exposed to a depth not
exceeding one-third of the nominal
maximum coarse aggregate size
2006 Edition
Table 14.4: Class of finish
Class of finish
Description of surface
Formed
Unformed
F2
F2
F4
U2
U3
U5
F3
U3
U4
Construction joints (for Class T1 finish)
F2
U3
Movement joints
F3
U3
Benching, screeds
F3
U5
Blinding, foundations, pile caps
F1
U1
Surfaces to be covered
screeded
rendered, plastered
tiled
painted
Surfaces for treated finishes

Surfaces for pedestrian traffic
Piers, blocks, pipe surrounds
- below FGL
- above FGL
F1
F2
U1
U3
Manholes, chambers
- external below FGL

- external above FGL
- internal
F1
F2
F2
U1
U3
U3
Culverts, channels

- internal
F1
F2
F4
U1
U3
U5
Water retaining structures

- internal
F2
F4
F4
U3
U5
U5
Buildings

- internal
F1
F2
F4
U1
U3
U5
Bridges, retaining walls, walls
- below FGL
- above FGL, not exposed to
direct public view
- above FGL, exposed to
direct public view
- internal, not exposed to
direct public view
F1
U1
F4
U5
F5
U5
F2
U1
14.8
2006 Edition
Formwork ties
14.17
(1)
Formwork ties and components shall be of a type such that any
removable part can be removed without damaging the concrete. Any part
left in the concrete shall be at least 40 mm or the specified nominal cover
to the reinforcement, whichever is greater, from the concrete surface.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, formwork ties and
components used with profiled formwork shall be of a type such that holes
left by the ties and components are small enough to be located completely
within the recesses in the concrete surface.
(3)
Formwork ties for use in water-retaining structures and waterproof
structures shall incorporate a diaphragm welded to the mid point of the
tie, designed to prevent water from passing along the tie. Ties shall be
degreased before being placed and shall not touch or foul the
reinforcement.
Amd 2/2009
Cement mortar for

concrete surfaces
14.18
(1)
Cement mortar for filling blowholes shall consist of cement and fine
aggregate together with the minimum amount of water necessary to
achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the blowholes.
(2)
Cement mortar for filling holes left by formwork ties and
components shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of fine aggregate
together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a
consistency suitable for compacting the mortar into the holes. The mix
shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
(3)
Cement mortar for filling blowholes and holes left by formwork ties
and components in concrete surfaces with Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be
the same colour as the hardened concrete. Light-coloured sand or white
cement may be used for this purpose.
(4)
Materials for cement mortar shall comply with Section 16.
Surface retarders
14.19
Surface retarders shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer

and shall be of a type that will not stain or colour the concrete.
Abrasives
14.20
Abrasives for blasting shall be grit or other materials approved by the

Engineer and shall not contain any iron, clay or other materials which will
stain or colour the concrete.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
formwork and finishes
to concrete and
samples of materials
14.21
(1)
Particulars and samples of the proposed materials and methods of
construction for Class F4, F5, U5 and T finishes shall be submitted to the
Engineer as marked 'x' in Table 14.5. The same particulars shall be
submitted for other Classes of finish if required by the Engineer. Where
the sheathing is timber plywood, details of the method of identifying and
recording the number of uses to which the sheathing will be subjected to,
including the labour and equipment that are provided for carrying out
marking and recording, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(2)
The particulars and samples for formed finishes shall be submitted
at least 14 days before the relevant formwork, including formwork for trial
panels, is fabricated. The particulars and samples for unformed and
14.9
2006 Edition
treated finishes shall be submitted at least 14 days before the relevant

element, including trial panels, is concreted.
(3)
In addition to drawings and calculations showing the geometry
and member size and spacing of each item of formwork or falsework, the
Contractor shall submit drawings showing his standard formwork and
falsework details which shall include:
(a)
Details of joints and seals between shutter facing boards,

shutter face and concrete at construction joints and adjacent
shutters at butt joints and corners to effectively prevent loss
of grout and maintain accurate alignment.
(b)
Details of shutter facing material.
(c)
Details of fixing plant on pieces onto the shutter face.
(d)
Details of fixing and maintaining the alignment of waterstops.

Amd 2/2009
Table 14.5: Particulars to be submitted
Particulars to be submitted
Formwork drawings
Formed
finishes
: Panel construction
Layout and pattern of
panels, joints and
formwork ties
Method statement
Unformed
finishes
Treated
finishes
Samples
: Formwork
Formwork ties
Cover spacers
X
X
X
X
X
Brand name and

manufacturer's
literature
: Release agent
Curing compound
Surface retarder
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
Programme
: Removing formwork
Applying treated finishes
X
-
Details
: Sources of formwork,
formwork ties and cover
spacers
Curing
Filling blowholes
Filling formwork tie holes
Protecting finishes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
14.10
2006 Edition
TRIAL PANELS
Trial panels
14.22
(1)
A trial panel shall be constructed for each Class F4, F5, U5 and
T finish to demonstrate that the proposed materials, mix design, methods of
production and methods of construction, including curing and removal of
formwork, will produce the specified finish.
(2)
Trial panels for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be constructed before
the relevant formwork for the permanent work is erected, and trial panels
for Class U5 and T finishes shall be constructed before the relevant
permanent work is concreted. The trial panels shall be constructed at
least 4 weeks before the relevant permanent work is carried out.
(3)
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing trial panels.
(4)
Trial panels shall be constructed using the materials, mix design,
methods of production and methods of construction, including curing and
removal of formwork, submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(5)
Trial panels shall be horizontal, vertical or inclined as appropriate
and shall be constructed at locations agreed by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise stated in the Contract each trial panel shall be not less than 2 m
by 2 m by 300 mm thick, and shall contain reinforcement representative of
the most congested reinforcement that will be used in the permanent
works. Trial panels shall incorporate formwork ties and components,
horizontal joints, vertical joints, chamfers, splays, rebates and other
features representative of those which will be used in the permanent work.
(6)
Trial panels shall be protected from damage and shall be left in
position until the Engineer instructs the Contractor to remove them.
panels
14.23
If in the opinion of the Engineer the specified finish has not been produced
in the trial panel, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, mix
design, methods of production or methods of construction shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Further trial panels shall be
constructed until the specified finish is produced in the trial panel.
Further trial mixes shall be made unless in the opinion of the Engineer
non-compliance of the trial panel was not due to the concrete mix.
Commencement of
formwork and
concreting
14.24
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall not be erected and elements
with Class U5 and T finishes shall not be concreted until in the opinion of
the Engineer the specified finish has been produced in the trial panel.
and methods of
construction
14.25

production or methods of construction, including curing and removal of
formwork, used to produce the specified finish in trial panels shall not be
changed. The Engineer may order new trial panels to be constructed if
he considers that the changes in materials and/or methods of construction
proposed by the Contractor may affect the finished appearance.
14.11
2006 Edition
Storage of formwork
14.26
(1)
Formwork shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and
maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner, which
will not result in damage or deformation to the formwork, or in
contamination of the formwork. Measures to protect the formwork
against drying and wetting caused by weather shall be submitted to the
(2)
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be covered and
protected from exposure to conditions that may affect the formwork.
Storage of release
agents and surface
retarders
14.27
Release agents and surface retarders shall be stored in sealed containers

marked to identify the contents and protected from exposure to conditions
that may affect the material. The materials shall be stored in accordance
with the manufacturers' recommendations and shall not be used after the
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF FALSEWORK AND

FORMWORK
Design and
construction of
falsework and
formwork
14.28
(1)
Falsework and formwork shall be designed and constructed to
maintain the position and shape of the formwork so that the hardened
concrete surface complies with the characteristics of finish stated in Table
14.1 and with any more stringent tolerances stated in the Contract.
Allowance shall be made for cambers.
(2)
Falsework and formwork shall be capable of being dismantled and
removed without shock, disturbance, damage or loading to the concrete
and in such a manner that the specified requirements for removing or
leaving in position side formwork, soffit formwork and props will be
achieved without disturbing other formwork or props.
(3)
Formwork shall be used to form the top surface of concrete inclined
at a slope exceeding 15o to the horizontal unless it can be demonstrated that
the specified finish will be produced without the use of formwork.
Formwork to top surfaces shall be anchored to prevent flotation.
(4)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all proposed
falsework and formwork and submit the design calculations and drawings
to the Engineer at least 14 days before the relevant element is erected.
Construction of
formwork
14.29
(1)
Formwork shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects. The
faces and edges of formwork shall be clean and formwork faces shall be
free of projecting nails.
(2)
Formwork that has been previously used shall be repaired and the
edges resealed before it is erected. Formwork that in the opinion of the
Engineer has deteriorated to an extent such that it will not produce the
specified finish shall not be used for that Class or a higher Class of finish.
(3)
Formwork shall be firmly supported and individual panels shall be

14.12
2006 Edition
rigid. Joints between formwork panels, stop ends and adjoining concrete
shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss. Gaps shall be sealed with
gaskets, filler, sealant or tape before the application of release agents.
(4)
Formwork shall be cut in such a manner that reinforcement and
built-in components passing through the formwork are maintained in
position. The joints shall be tight and shall not permit grout loss.
(5)
Formers for profiled formwork, chamfers, splays, rebates and other
features shall be rigidly and evenly fixed to the formwork along the
complete length and shall not permit grout loss.
(6)
Formwork ties and components shall be fixed in such a manner that
they do not touch reinforcement or built-in components. Formwork ties
and components shall fit tightly against formwork faces and shall not
permit grout loss.
(7)
If required for cleaning or inspection, temporary openings shall be
provided in the formwork. Temporary openings shall not be cut in any
formwork without the approval of the Engineer.
Amd 2/2009
Construction of
formwork for Class F2,
F3, F4 and F5 finishes
14.30
(1)
Formwork panels for Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be the
same size and shall form a regular pattern approved by the Engineer. The
lines of joints between panels shall be straight and continuous, horizontal
and vertical, or inclined to suit the pattern of profiled formwork, and shall
be coincident with construction joints and other joints and with recesses in
the concrete surface. The number of make-up pieces shall be kept to a
minimum.
(2)
Holes left by formwork ties and components in concrete surfaces
with Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be in line horizontally and
vertically and shall form a regular pattern approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, holes in profiled formwork
shall be located in such a manner that the holes are completely within
recesses in the concrete surface.
(3)
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract or permitted by the
Engineer, chamfers shall be provided for all external angles of 90 or less
in concrete surfaces with Class F2, F3, F4 and F5 finishes.
(4)
Formwork for curved concrete surfaces with Class F2, F3, F4 and
F5 finishes shall not be made up of a series of flats unless permitted by the
Engineer.
Construction of
formwork for Class F4
and F5 finishes
14.31
(1)
Each type of formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be
obtained from one source and different types of formwork shall not be
mixed unless permitted by the Engineer. Damaged formwork shall not be
used unless permitted by the Engineer. Parts of steel formwork that will
be in contact with concrete shall be free of rust.
(2)
For concrete surfaces with Class F4 and F5 finishes, joints between
formwork panels shall be sealed with foamed rubber strips. The foamed
rubber strips shall be sufficiently compressible to form a grout-tight joint.
The width of the resulting gap between the panels shall not be greater than
1 mm and the sealing strips shall not protrude proud of the surface of the
formwork panels. Alternatively, subject to the approval of the Engineer,
joints between formwork panels may be sealed with an approved filler
14.13
2006 Edition
provided that the butting edges of the panels are smooth and the resulting
gap between the panels is not wider than 1 mm. Joints between
formwork panels shall not be sealed by tape fixed to the formwork faces.
(3)
Formwork for Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be protected from
spillages, rust marks and stains.
Built-in components
14.32
Built-in components, void formers and box-outs shall be fixed in position

before and during concreting. Unless permitted by the Engineer, void
formers and box-outs shall not be used instead of built-in components.
Polystyrene shall not be used for void formers and box-outs unless
Amd 2/2009
APPLICATION OF RELEASE AGENTS

Application of release
agents
14.33
(1)
A release agent shall be used on all formwork other than permanent
formwork and formwork on which a surface retarder is used to produce a
Class T1 finish. The release agent shall be applied by the method and at
the rate of application recommended by the manufacturer or as
demonstrated to be satisfactory by use in the trial panel.
(2)
Formwork faces shall be cleaned before release agents are applied.
Concrete, reinforcement and built-in components shall not be contaminated
by release agents.
(3)
Each type of release agent used on formwork for Class F4 and F5
finishes shall be obtained from one manufacturer and different types of
release agent shall not be used on formwork for the same element.
(4)
Release agents shall be applied to formwork for Class F4 and F5
finishes after the formwork has been erected and before the reinforcement
is fixed or, if this is not practicable, immediately before the formwork is
erected. The release agent covering shall be complete and uniform.
INSPECTION OF FORMWORK AND

REINFORCEMENT
Inspection of formwork
and reinforcement
14.34
(1)
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the completed
formwork and reinforcement, including trial panels, before carrying out
any work, including fixing reinforcement adjacent to formwork and
erecting formwork adjacent to reinforcement, which will make access to
the formwork faces or reinforcement difficult. The Contractor shall
inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the
Engineer, before carrying out such work.
(2)
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect formwork for
Class F4 and F5 finishes before it is erected and shall inform the Engineer
24 hours, or such shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before erecting the
formwork.
14.14
2006 Edition
REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK

Times for removal of
falsework and
formwork
14.35
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 14.35(3), falsework and formwork shall
not be loosened or removed before the minimum times stated in Table 14.6
have elapsed. The times stated are for a minimum ambient temperature
of 15C, for elements without superimposed loads and for concrete
containing PC, PFAC or both PC and PFA not exceeding the PC
replacement level as specified in Clause 16.14. If other conditions apply,
particulars of proposed changes to the minimum times shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
(2)
For the purpose of determining the minimum times for loosening or
removing falsework and formwork, copings at the top of columns in water
retaining structures shall be classified as slabs and roof slabs in water
retaining structures shall be classified as beams.
(3)
Falsework and formwork supporting concrete in flexure may be
loosened or removed when the strength of the concrete in that element is
10 MPa or twice the stress to which it will be subjected, whichever is
greater, provided that deflection which in the opinion of the Engineer is
unacceptable will not result and that superimposed loads will not be
applied. The strength of the concrete shall be determined from tests on
test cubes which have been made with concrete from the same pour and
which have been cured by the same method and under similar conditions
as the concrete in the element.
Table 14.6: Minimum times for loosening or removing falsework and formwork
Type of falsework or
Class F1, F2, F3 and F4 finishes

Concrete
without PFA
Concrete
with PFA
Class F5 finish
Concrete with
or without PFA
Vertical (non-profiled)
(profiled)
12 hours
7 days
15 hours
7 days
48 hours
7 days
Inclined to top surfaces
12 hours
15 hours
48 hours
Soffits of slabs
(props left in)
4 days
4 days
10 days
Soffits of beams
(props left in)
7 days
7 days
14 days
Props to slabs
10 days
10 days
10 days
Props to beams
14 days
14 days
14 days
Props to cantilevers
28 days
28 days
28 days
Amd 2/2009
14.15
2006 Edition
Removal of falsework
and formwork
14.36
(1)
Formwork shall be removed without hammering or levering to the
concrete and in such a manner that there is no shock, disturbance, damage
or loading to the concrete. Side formwork shall be removed without
disturbing soffit formwork and soffit formwork shall be removed without
disturbing props except as provided for in Clause 14.36(2).
(2)
Individual props may be removed to allow the removal of soffit
formwork provided that the formwork has been designed accordingly and
that each prop is replaced as soon as the formwork has been removed.
(3)
Falsework and formwork for Class F5 finishes shall be loosened
and removed in a continuous operation and in accordance with a consistent
programme agreed by the Engineer. All formwork shall be loosened
before individual panels are removed and all formwork shall be removed
within the programmed period. Individual panels or make-up pieces shall
not be left in position.
(4)
After removal, formwork which is intended for re-use shall be
cleaned, repaired and stored as stated in Clause 14.26.
UNFORMED FINISHES
Unformed finishes
14.37
(1)
Unformed finishes shall be produced by the methods stated in Table
14.2.
(2)
Brushing to produce a Class U4 finish shall be carried out in straight
lines in a direction agreed by the Engineer. Brushing shall be carried out
when the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the float marks to be
removed and for the ridges to be formed without displacing the aggregate.
(3)
Floating and trowelling shall not be carried out until the concrete
has hardened sufficiently to allow the specified finish to be produced with
the minimum amount of floating and trowelling such that excess laitance is
not produced.
TREATED FINISHES
Treated finishes
14.38
(1)
Treated finishes shall be produced by constructing a concrete
surface with a Class F3 or U3 finish as appropriate and applying the
treatment to the surface by the methods stated in Table 14.3.
(2)
The treatment shall be applied in a continuous operation in
accordance with a consistent programme agreed by the Engineer. Tying
wire and cover spacers for reinforcement and cast-in component shall be
positioned to avoid being exposed by the applied treatment.
Class T1 finish
14.39
(1)
Washing and brushing to produce a Class T1 finish shall not be
carried out until the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the cement
matrix to be removed without disturbing the coarse aggregate. After
washing and brushing have been completed and the concrete surface has
hardened, the surface shall be cleaned.
(2)
The cement matrix shall not be removed or the aggregate exposed
by mechanical methods unless permitted by the Engineer.
14.16
2006 Edition
(3)
Class T1 finishes may be produced by using a surface retarder
applied to the formwork or to the concrete surface. The surface retarder
shall be applied by the method and at the rate of application recommended
by the manufacturer, or as demonstrated to be satisfactory by use on the
trial panel.
(4)
Plywood to which a surface retarder is to be applied shall be sealed
with barrier paint, polyurethane varnish or other impermeable material
agreed by the Engineer. The formwork shall be removed in small
sections and the coarse aggregate exposed by washing and brushing the
concrete surface.
(5)
Unless permitted by the Engineer, formwork to which a surface
retarder has been applied shall not be re-used unless a surface retarder is to
be used again on the formwork. Formwork to which a surface retarder
has been applied and which is to be re-used shall be cleaned before the
retarder is applied.
Class T2 and T3
finishes
14.40
Point tooling to produce Class T2 finishes and bush hammering to produce

Class T3 finishes shall be carried out evenly in small areas and not in
distinct lines. Tooling and hammering shall not start until at least 7 days
after concreting.
Class T4 finish
14.41
Hammering or chiselling to produce a Class T4 finish shall be applied from

only one direction, and only either hammering or chiselling shall be
applied, on any one face. Hammering and chiselling shall not start until
at least 14 days after concreting.
Class T5 and T6
finishes
14.42
Blasting to produce Class T5 and T6 finishes shall not be carried out until
the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the cement matrix to be removed
without disturbing the coarse aggregate. Adjacent surfaces shall be
protected from blasting and dust shall be controlled by screens and by
water-spraying.
COMPLIANCE OF FINISHES
Inspection of finishes
14.43
(1)
Before any subsequent work is carried out on a concrete surface, the
surface shall be inspected by the Engineer to determine if the specified
finish has been produced. Formed finishes shall be inspected as soon as
the formwork has been removed.
(2)
Blowholes or holes left by formwork ties and components shall not
be filled and spatterdash or other coverings shall not be applied before the
inspection. Any such filling or covering carried out before the inspection
may be rejected.
Compliance of finishes
14.44
(1)
Concrete surfaces shall have the characteristics stated in Tables 14.1
and 14.2 for the different Classes of formed and unformed finish before
any subsequent work is carried out on the concrete surface and shall have
the characteristics stated in Table 14.3 for the different Classes of treated
finish.
14.17
2006 Edition
(2)
The Engineer shall determine if the specified finish has been
produced and may use the trial panels as a means of comparison.
(3)
Abrupt irregularities shall be measured by direct measurement.
Gradual irregularities shall be measured using a 2 m long straight edge on
surfaces intended to be flat and by a method agreed by the Engineer on
other surfaces.
WORK ON CONCRETE SURFACES

Remedial and repair
work on concrete
surfaces
14.45
Remedial or repair work shall not be carried out on concrete surfaces

unless permitted by the Engineer. Any such work carried out without
permission may be rejected.
Filling blowholes and

formwork tie holes
14.46
(1)
Blowholes exceeding 3 mm in size in water retaining structures and
watertight structures, and blowholes exceeding 10 mm in size in other
structures shall be filled with cement mortar. The size of blowholes shall
be the maximum dimension measured across the hole on the concrete
surface. If the number and size of blowholes in concrete surfaces with
Class F3, F4 and F5 finishes is in the opinion of the Engineer greater than
in the trial panel the blowholes shall be filled, unless in the opinion of the
Engineer filling is not required.
(2)
Holes left by formwork ties and components shall be cleaned and
filled by ramming cement mortar into the holes in layers. Holes in
concrete surfaces with a Class F5 finish shall be filled to a level slightly
below the concrete surface. The holes shall not be overfilled and rubbed
down.
(3)
Filling of blowholes and holes left by formwork ties and
components shall be carried out as soon as practicable after the Engineer
has inspected the finish and with the minimum interruption to curing.
Spatterdash
14.47
(1)
Spatterdash shall consist of cement and coarse sand or granite
fines in the proportions 1:2 by volume mixed with the minimum amount
of water necessary to achieve the consistency of a thick slurry.
Spatterdash shall be thrown with a hand trowel onto the surface to a
thickness not exceeding 6 mm and shall cover at least 60% of the area,
which is to be plastered or rendered. Spatterdash shall be wetted one hour
after application and shall be allowed to cure and harden before under
coats are applied.
(2)
Spatterdash shall be applied as soon as practicable after the
Engineer has inspected the finish and after the concrete surface has been
cleaned and wetted.
PROTECTION OF FINISHES
Protection of finishes
14.48
(1)
Materials, construction plant or other vehicles shall not use or be
placed on or against concrete surfaces unless permitted by the Engineer.
14.18
2006 Edition
(2)
Concrete surfaces with Class F4, F5, U5 and T finishes shall be
protected from running water, spillages, rust-marks and stains by covering
the surface with polyethylene sheeting or timber or by other methods
Protection from rust-marks caused by
reinforcement bars shall be by polyethylene sleeves tied to the bars or by
coating the bars with cement slurry. The bars shall not be coated with oil or
grease.
(3)
Concrete surfaces with Class F4, F5, U5 and T finishes shall be
protected from damage by securing timber battens to the surface, by
erecting barriers or fences or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(4)
Concrete surfaces with a Class F5 finish shall be protected from
exposure to extreme variations in weather conditions for at least 14 days
after the formwork has been removed.
CURVED FORMWORK
Curved formwork
14.49
Where curved or domed concrete surfaces are specified, the formwork

shall be curved or domed accordingly. The alternative of replacing a
curved or domed concrete surface with a series of small connecting
planar surfaces will not be permitted unless:
(a)
The concrete surface will be covered by tiles,
(b)
The Contractor has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the

Engineer that the irregularities on the concrete surfaces due
to such alternative will not affect the final smoothness of the
tiled surface, and
(c)
The Engineers approval is given.

Amd 2/2009
14.19
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 15
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
15.1
2006 Edition
15.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 15
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Reinforcement
connector
15.01
Reinforcement connector is a coupler or sleeve designed to transmit the

force between two bars in tension or compression.
Bar reinforcement
15.02
Bar reinforcement is hot rolled steel bar reinforcement.
MATERIALS
Bar reinforcement and
fabric reinforcement
15.03
Except as stated in Clause 15.04 below, bar reinforcement and fabric

reinforcement shall comply with the following:
Hot rolled steel bars
: CS 2
Cold reduced steel wire
: BS 4482
Steel fabric
: BS 4483.
Stainless steel
reinforcement
15.04
Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement and use in concrete shall be
ribbed bar to BS 6744:2001. The steel designation numbers are in
accordance with the BS EN 10088-1: 2005 standards.
Epoxy coatings to
reinforcement
15.05
(1)
Epoxy coatings to reinforcement and patching material for epoxy
coatings shall comply with BS ISO 14654:1999 except as stated in Clauses
15.05(2), 15.22, 15.32, 15.34 and 15.38. The coatings shall be applied by
the electrostatic spray method in accordance with BS ISO 14654:1999 at a
factory approved by the Engineer.
(2)
The film thickness of the coating after curing shall be at least 0.15
mm and shall not exceed 0.28 mm over the complete periphery including
deformations and ribs. The bond classification of coated bars determined
in bond performance tests shall not be less than that of uncoated bars.
Hot dip galvanizing to

reinforcement
15.06
(1)
Hot dip galvanizing to reinforcement shall comply with BS EN ISO
1461:1999. The galvanization shall be applied after cutting and bending
of the reinforcement.
(2)
Metallic zinc-rich priming paint for repairs to hot dip galvanized
reinforcement shall comply with BS 4652.
Reinforcement
connectors
15.07
(1)
Reinforcement connectors shall be of a proprietary type approved
by the Engineer.
(2)
Reinforcement connectors for tension joints shall be a cold swaged
or threaded type. The connectors shall be capable of developing the full
tensile strength of the parent bar and shall comprise high tensile steel studs
and seamless steel tubes fitted with protective plastic caps.
15.3
2006 Edition
(3)
Reinforcement connectors for compression joints shall be of a
wedge locking or bolted sleeve type.
Cover spacers
15.08
(1)
Cover spacers for reinforcement shall be concrete blocks or of a
proprietary plastic or concrete type. Proprietary plastic and concrete
cover spacers shall be of a type approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Cover spacers for Class F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be of a
proprietary plastic or concrete type. Cover spacers for epoxy-coated
reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement shall be of a proprietary
plastic type.
(3)
Cover spacers shall be as small as practicable consistent with their
purpose and shall be designed to maintain the specified cover to
reinforcement. Cover spacers shall be capable of supporting the weight
of reinforcement and construction loads without breaking, deforming or
overturning.
(4)
The strength and durability of concrete blocks and proprietary
concrete cover spacers shall not be less than that of the surrounding
concrete.
(5)
Cover spacers for Class F3, F4 and F5 finishes shall be of a colour
similar to that of the surrounding concrete and shall not cause indentations
in the formwork.
Chairs, supports and

spacers
15.09
Chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers for reinforcement
shall be steel. The steel shall be coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other
dielectric material for epoxy-coated reinforcement and shall be hot dip
galvanized for galvanized reinforcement.
Tying wire
15.10
Tying wire for reinforcement adjacent to and above Class F4 and F5

finishes shall be 1.2 mm diameter stainless steel wire. Tying wire for
epoxy-coated reinforcement shall be 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel
wire coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other dielectric material. Tying
wire for galvanized reinforcement shall be 1.6 mm diameter galvanized
soft annealed steel wire. Tying wire for other reinforcement shall be 1.6
mm diameter soft annealed steel wire.
Tying devices and clips
15.11
Tying devices and clips for reinforcement shall be of a proprietary steel

Tying devices and clips for
reinforcement adjacent to and above Class F4 and F5 finishes shall be
stainless steel. Tying devices and clips for epoxy-coated reinforcement
shall be coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other dielectric material.
Tying devices and clips for galvanized reinforcement shall be galvanized.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of bar
reinforcement and
15.12
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed bar reinforcement and
fabric reinforcement shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
For Class 1 bar reinforcement, a certificate from the quality

assured stockist in accordance with CS 2 Cl. 4.1.3 and a copy
of the manufacturer's third party certificate.
15.4
2006 Edition
(b)
For Class 2 bar reinforcement, a certificate from the quality

assured stockist in accordance with CS 2 Cl. 4.1.4 and a copy
of the manufacturer's third party certificate.
(c)
For Class 3 bar reinforcement, a certificate from the supplier

in accordance with CS 2 Cl. 4.2.
(d)
Upon delivery of bar reinforcement the contractor shall

submit a test report containing the details specified in CS 2
Cl. 3.3.3 and Cl. 3.3.5.
(e)
For fabric reinforcement, a certificate from the manufacturer

manufacture and showing that the reinforcement complies
details of:
-
Bond classification
Cast analysis
Carbon equivalent value
Results of tensile, bend and rebend tests, including the

effective cross-sectional area for tensile tests
Results of bond performance tests
Results of weld tests
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for information
for each batch of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement delivered to
the Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the reinforcement starts.
Particulars of epoxy
coatings to
reinforcement
15.13
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed epoxy coatings to
reinforcement shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name and location of the coating factory,
(b)
Mill sheets of the steel reinforcement,
(c)
Date and place of the coating application, and
(d)
Original Certificate(s) of the coating materials in compliance

with BS ISO 14656: 1999, including:
-
Corrosion resistance
Chemical resistance
Catholic disbonding of coating
Adhesion of coating
Abrasion resistance
Impact strength
Hardness
The above tests shall be carried out once every 5 years or

when there are changes in the composition of the coating
materials whichever is the earlier.
15.5
2006 Edition
(2)
The particulars, including certificates and test results in Clause
15.13(1), shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the first
delivery of epoxy-coated reinforcement to the Site. Certificates shall be
submitted for each batch of epoxy-coated reinforcement delivered to the
Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the reinforcement starts.
Particulars of
galvanized coatings to
reinforcement
15.14
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed galvanized coatings to
reinforcement shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name and location of the coating factory, and
(b)
Original certificate from the manufacturer showing the date

and place of application of the coating and showing that the
galvanized coatings comply with the requirements stated in the
Contract and including results of tests carried out by methods
as recommended in BS EN ISO 1461:1999 for thickness of
coating.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for each batch of
galvanized reinforcement delivered to the Site and at least 14 days before
fixing of the reinforcement starts.
Particulars of
reinforcement
connectors
15.15
Particulars of the proposed materials and methods of installation for

reinforcement connectors, including the manufacturer's literature, shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days before fixing of reinforcement
connectors starts.
Bending schedules
15.16
Bending schedules complying with BS 4466, Clause 4 shall be prepared

by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer before bending of
reinforcement starts.
15.17

(a)
Bar and fabric reinforcement,
(b)
Epoxy-coated bar and fabric reinforcement,
(c)
Galvanized bar and fabric reinforcement,
(d)
Reinforcement connectors
compression joints,
(e)
Cover spacers, and
(f)
Tying wire, tying devices and clips.
for
tension
joints
and

Handling of
reinforcement
15.18
(1)
Reinforcement shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock
loading or dropping from a height.
(2)
Nylon, rope or padded slings shall be used for lifting epoxy-coated
reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement. Bundles shall be lifted with
a strongback or with multiple supports to prevent abrasion.
15.6
2006 Edition
Storage of
reinforcement
15.19
(1)
Reinforcement shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and
maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner, which
will not result in damage or deformation to the reinforcement, or in
contamination of the reinforcement.
Measures to protect the
reinforcement from wetting and rusting caused by weather shall be
proposed for the Engineers approval. Fabric reinforcement shall be
stored horizontally.
(2)
Different types and sizes of reinforcement shall be stored separately.
(3)
Reinforcement shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete
surfaces that form part of the permanent work.
(4)
Epoxy-coated reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement shall be
stored on wooden or padded cribbing.
CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT

Cutting and bending
reinforcement
15.20
(1)
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS 4466 to
the specified shapes and dimensions and shall be bent at temperatures of at
least 5C and not exceeding 100C.
(2)
Epoxy-coated reinforcement shall be bent cold. Bar cutting and
bar bending equipment for epoxy-coated reinforcement shall have padded
supports and contact areas shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels.
(3)
Grade 460/425 reinforcement shall not be rebent or straightened
after bending. Grade 250 reinforcement which projects from the
hardened concrete may be bent aside and rebent provided that the internal
radius of the bend is at least twice the diameter of the bar and that bending
is not carried out by levering against the concrete or by other methods
which in the opinion of the Engineer are likely to damage the concrete.
(4)
The ends of bars to be used with reinforcement connectors for
compression joints shall be sawn square with all burrs removed.
SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT

Surface condition of
reinforcement
15.21
(1)
Reinforcement shall be clean at the time of fixing and shall be free
of loose mill scale, loose rust or any substance that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, is likely to reduce the bond or affect the reinforcement or
concrete chemically. The reinforcement shall be maintained in this
condition until concrete is placed around it.
(2)
If the surface condition of the reinforcement deteriorates such that it
does not comply with the requirements stated in Clause 15.21(1), the
reinforcement shall be cleaned or dealt with by other methods agreed by
the Engineer.
15.7
2006 Edition
15.22
Repairs to epoxy
coatings and galvanized
coatings
(1)
If the coating to epoxy-coated reinforcement is delaminated or split
at any point or if the coating to epoxy-coated reinforcement or galvanized
reinforcement is damaged,
(a)
at any point by an amount exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50

mm in length, or
(b)
at more than three points in a 1 m length by amounts each

even not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length,
that part of the reinforcement shall not be used in the permanent works.
If the coating to epoxy-coated reinforcement or galvanized reinforcement
is damaged at more than six points in the cut and bent length of a bar by
amounts each even not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length, that
length of bar shall not be used in the permanent work.
(2)
All damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in
length and cut ends of epoxy-coated reinforcement shall be repaired using
patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3)
Damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length
and cut ends of galvanized reinforcement shall be repaired by applying two
coats of metallic zinc-rich priming paint. Sufficient paint shall be applied
to provide a zinc coating of at least the same thickness as the galvanized
coating. The Contractor shall refer to Section 6.3 of BS EN ISO
1461:1999 and also Annex C.5 for advice on repair of damaged areas.
(4)
Repairs to epoxy coatings and galvanized coatings shall be carried
out within 8 hours of cutting or damage. Traces of rust shall be removed
from the surface of the reinforcement before the repair is carried out.
FIXING REINFORCEMENT
15.23
(1)
Bar reinforcement, fabric reinforcement and reinforcement
connectors for tension joints from each batch shall not be fixed until
testing of the batch has been completed.
(2)
Reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position and secured against
displacement.
(3)
A sufficient number of intersecting and lapping bars shall be tied
using tying wire, tying devices or clips to prevent movement of the
reinforcement. The ends of tying wire, tying devices and clips shall not
encroach into the cover to reinforcement.
(4)
Laps and joints in reinforcement shall be made only at the specified
positions and by the specified method.
(5)
Sufficient numbers of cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers
other than cover spacers shall be provided to maintain the reinforcement in
the correct location and to maintain the specified cover at all positions.
Cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall
be placed at a maximum spacing of 1.5 m. Chairs, supports and spacers
15.8
2006 Edition
other than cover spacers shall be positioned adjacent to or above cover

spacers and shall have at least the same cover as that specified for the
reinforcement.
(6)
Prefabricated reinforcement cages shall be adequately supported
and braced before lifting.
(7)
Reinforcement which is free-standing shall be secured in position
and braced to prevent movement due to wind and other loads.
(8)
For treated finishes, all reinforcement shall be positioned in such a
way that the specified minimum concrete cover can be achieved after the
applied treatment.
connectors
15.24
Welding of reinforcement 15.25
Reinforcement connectors shall be fixed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and using equipment recommended by
the manufacturer.
Reinforcement shall not be welded unless approved by the Engineer.
Exposed reinforcement
15.26
Reinforcement that is to be left exposed shall be protected by coating with

cement slurry or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Access over
reinforcement
15.27
Reinforcement shall not be contaminated or displaced as a result of access

over the reinforcement. Access shall be obtained by using planks and
ladders or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
reinforcement
15.28
(1)
Tolerances on cutting and bending reinforcement shall comply with
BS 4466, Table 2.
(2)
The cover to the outermost layer of reinforcement shall not be less
than the minimum cover shown on the Drawings plus a tolerance of 5 mm
for fixing precision.
INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT
Inspection of
reinforcement
15.29

reinforcement before carrying out any work, including erecting formwork
adjacent to reinforcement, which will make access to the reinforcement
difficult. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such
shorter period agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out such work.
TESTING: REINFORCEMENT
Batch: reinforcement
15.30
(1)
For the purpose of testing, the steel bar reinforcement arriving on
site is to be subdivided into batches. Each batch shall consist of
reinforcement of the same steel grade, the same nominal diameter, same
cast number, batch number or lot number.
15.9
2006 Edition
(2)
A batch of fabric reinforcement or reinforcement connectors for
tension joints is any quantity of fabric reinforcement or reinforcement
connectors for tension joints of the same type, size and grade,
manufactured by the same mill, covered by the same mill and testing
certificates and delivered to the Site at any one time. In addition, for
epoxy-coated reinforcement and galvanized reinforcement, the coatings
shall have been applied at the same coating factory and shall be covered by
the same original test certificates with original signatures and official
authorization chop.
Samples: reinforcement 15.31
(1)
Samples of bar reinforcement, fabric reinforcement and
reinforcement connectors for tension joints, except for epoxy-coated
reinforcement, shall be provided from each batch of the material
delivered to the Site and at least 14 days before fixing of the
reinforcement starts. The number of samples to be provided from each
batch shall be as stated in Table 5.1. For epoxy-coated reinforcement,
samples shall be provided at least 20 working days before fixing of the
reinforcement starts.
(2)
The number of specimens in each sample shall be as follows:

: In accordance with CS 2
Table 9
(a)
Bar reinforcement (without

epoxy coating or galvanized
coating)
(b)
Epoxy-coated bar reinforcement : 2 additional specimen to

those specified in CS 2
and galvanized bar
Table
9
for
bar
reinforcement
reinforcement
(c)
Fabric reinforcement (without

epoxy coating or galvanized
coating)
:3
(d)
Epoxy-coated fabric
reinforcement and galvanized
:4
(e)
for tension joints
:3
(3)
Each specimen of bar reinforcement shall be 1 m long. Each
specimen of fabric reinforcement shall be 1.2 m long by 1.2 m wide and
shall contain at least three wires in each direction. Each specimen of
reinforcement connectors shall consist of one reinforcement connector
joined to two lengths of bar each 500 mm long. The bars shall be of the
same type, size and grade as the bars to which the reinforcement connector
will be fixed in the permanent work.
(4)
Each specimen of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall
be taken from different bars or sheets in the batch. The ends of
specimens shall be cut square before delivery to the laboratory.
15.10
2006 Edition
(5)
For epoxy-coated bar reinforcement, two additional specimens
shall be selected by the Engineer from each batch of reinforcement for
epoxy coating tests on thickness, adhesion and continuity in addition to
the requirements of tensile tests, bend tests and rebend tests. Each
specimen shall be a 2 m length piece cut at least 1 m from the ends of a
12 m length bar. Specimens shall be selected from different bundles of
the reinforcement batch.
Table 15.1: Rate of sampling of reinforcement
Description
Size of batch
No. of samples
per batch
Bar reinforcement
All sizes
Fabric reinforcement
0 - 50 tonnes
exceeding 50 tonnes
for tension joints
Testing: reinforcement
15.32
1 for each 50 tonnes

or part thereof
less than 100 No.
100 - 500 No.
exceeding 500 No.
(1)
Each sample of bar reinforcement and fabric reinforcement shall be
tested to determine the yield stress, elongation, tensile strength, bending
and rebending properties and unit mass. Each sample of fabric
reinforcement shall also be tested to determine the weld shear strength.
Each sample of epoxy-coated reinforcement shall also be tested to
determine the thickness, adhesion and continuity of the coating. Each
sample of galvanized reinforcement shall also be tested to determine the
thickness of coating.
(2)
Each sample of reinforcement connectors for tension joints shall be
tested to determine the tensile strength and the permanent elongation in
accordance with Clause 15.35.
(3)
The number of tests on each sample shall be as stated in Table 15.2.
(4)

Hot rolled steel bars
: CS 2
Cold reduced steel wire
: BS 4482
Steel fabric
: BS 4483
Hot dip galvanized coating
: BS EN ISO 1461:1999
15.11
2006 Edition
(5)
Thickness, adhesion and continuity tests on epoxy coatings shall
be performed on each additional test specimen as selected in accordance
with Clause 15.31(5). The thickness test shall be in accordance with
Method No. 6 of BS 3900: Part C5. For thickness test, 15 pairs of
readings shall be taken along two opposite sides of each specimen. The
adhesion and continuity tests shall be in accordance with BS ISO
14656:1999. Bend tests for adhesion shall be performed at a uniform
rate within 15 seconds.
(6)
Tests shall be carried out on specimens having a temperature of
between 5C and 30C.
Testing: epoxy coating 15.33
(1)
The thickness test shall be in accordance with Method No. 6 of BS
3900: Part C5: 1992. For bars of 12 mm diameter or below, only
instruments which operate on magnetic flux principle Method 6A(a), can
be used. For bars of 16 mm diameter or above, instruments which
operate on either magnetic flux principle or magnetic pull-off principle,
Method 6A(b), can be used. All measuring instruments shall be
calibrated to an accuracy of 5%.
(2)
For thickness test, five recorded measurements shall be obtained
approximately evenly spaced along each side of the test specimen (a total
of ten recorded measurements per bar). A single recorded thickness
measurement is the average of three individual reading obtained in
between the ribs of three consecutive deformations.
(3)
The adhesion and continuity tests shall be in accordance with BS
ISO 14654:1999.
epoxy coating to
reinforcement
15.34
The results of tests for thickness, adhesion and continuity of epoxy

coatings to reinforcement shall comply with the following requirements:
(i) Coating thickness
At least 90% of all the recorded thickness measurements of
coating shall be within the range of 0.18 mm to 0.30 mm.
Thickness measurements below 0.13 mm shall be s considered
cause for rejection.
(ii) Coating adhesion:
The adhesion test shall comply with BS ISO 14654:1999 and
BS ISO 14656:1999. The surface of the bent test piece shall
not exhibit cracking or ductile tearing when viewed under
well-lit conditions using normal or corrected vision. There
shall be no de-bonding of the coating from the surface of the
bar and the coating shall not contain more than 5 Holidays
per meter of bar.
15.12
2006 Edition
(iii) Coating continuity

The continuity test shall comply with BS ISO 14654:1999
and BS ISO 14656:1999. The continuity of the coating shall
contain not more than 5 Holidays per linear metre of bar
length, when tested in accordance with BS ISO 14654:1999
and shall be free of holes, voids, cracks and damaged areas
discernible to a person with normal or corrected vision.
Holiday is defined as a discontinuity in a coating that is not
discernible to a person with normal or corrected vision and
detected by a discharge from a Holiday detector.
reinforcement
connectors for tension
joints
15.35
The results of tensile tests on specimens of reinforcement connectors for

tension joints shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) The tensile strength shall not be less than the specified
requirements for the parent bar.
(b) When a test is made of a representative gauge length assembly
comprising reinforcement of the size, grade and profile to be
used and a reinforcement connector for tension joints of the
precise type to be used, the permanent elongation after loading
to 0.6 times of the specified characteristic strength and
unloading shall not exceed 0.1 mm. The gauge length shall
span over the reinforcement connector.
Table 15.2: Number of tests on each sample of reinforcement

Type and number of tests
Description
Bar
reinforcement
Tensile
Bend
Rebend
Unit
Mass
No. of tensile, bend and rebend tests in

accordance with CS2 Table 9 and one
unit mass test accompanied with each
tensile test
Thickness
and
Uniformity
of
Galvanized
Coating
Pitch,
Dimension
Weld
Shear
Stress
Thickness,
Adhesion
and
Continuity
Steel fabric
- fabric sheet
- longitudinal
wire
- transverse
wire
Epoxy coating
Galvanized
coating
Reinforcement
connectors for
tension joints
15.13
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
characteristic strength
15.36
(1)
A batch of bar reinforcement shall be considered as not complying
with the specified requirements for characteristic strength if the tensile
tests results cannot meet the requirements stated in CS 2 Cl. 5.1.2(a).
(2)
A batch of fabric reinforcement shall be considered as not
complying with the specified requirements for characteristic strength if the
yield stress in any tensile test carried out on any sample taken from the
batch is less than 93% of the specified characteristic strength.
(3)
If the yield stress of fabric reinforcement in any tensile test is less
than the specified characteristic strength but equal to or greater than 93%
of the specified characteristic strength, additional samples shall be
provided from the same batch and additional tests for yield stress shall be
carried out. The number of additional samples shall be as stated in Table
15.1. The number of fabric reinforcement specimens in each additional
sample shall be seven. The number of tests on the longitudinal wires and
on the transverse wires of each additional sample of fabric reinforcement
shall be seven. The batch shall be considered as not complying with the
specified requirements for characteristic strength if the yield stress in any
additional test is less than 93% of the specified characteristic strength.
Non-compliance:
elongation, tensile
strength, bending,
rebending, unit mass,
weld shear strength
15.37
(1)
If the result of any test for elongation, tensile strength, bending,
rebending, unit mass or weld shear strength of bar reinforcement, fabric
reinforcement or reinforcement connectors for tension joints does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property, additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for the
property shall be carried out. The number of additional samples shall be
as stated in Table 15.1.
(2)
The number of specimens in each additional sample shall be as
follows:
(3)
(a)
Bar reinforcement
(test to determine the
elongation, tensile
strength or mass)
: 2 additional test specimens

for each test failed
(b)
Bar reinforcement
(test to determine the
bending or rebending
properties)
: 2 additional test specimens

for each test failed
(c)
:6
(d)
for tension joints
:6
The number of tests on each additional sample shall be as follows:

(a)
Tensile test
-
Bar reinforcement
: 1 for each specimen
Reinforcement
connectors for
tension joints
:6
15.14
2006 Edition
- longitudinal wires
- transverse wires
:6
:6
(b)
Bend test
:2
(c)
rebind test
:2
(d)
Unit mass
: 1 for each specimen
(e)
Weld shear strength
: 2.
(4)
15.38
Non-compliance:
thickness, adhesion and
continuity of epoxy
coatings
In testing the two specimens selected in accordance with Clause

15.31(5), if one test specimen fails to meet the coating thickness, coating
adhesion or coating continuity requirements, retests of specimens of the
same batch are permitted, and two further specimens from the same
batch shall be subjected to the test or tests in which the original specimen
failed. If both additional specimens pass the retest, the batch from
which they were taken shall be deemed to comply with the specification.
If either or both of them fail in the retests, the batch shall be deemed not
to comply with the specification, and this batch shall be rejected and
removed from Site.
15.39
(1)
If the result of any test for thickness of galvanized coatings to
reinforcement does not comply with the specified requirements for the
property, additional samples shall be provided from the same batch and
additional tests for the property shall be carried out. The number of
additional samples shall be as stated in Table 15.1.
Non-compliance:
thickness and
uniformity of
galvanized coatings
(2)
The number of specimens in each additional sample shall be as
follows:
(i)
Galvanized bar reinforcement
(ii)
Galvanized fabric reinforcement
(iii) Galvanized reinforcement

connectors for tension joints
(3)
The number of tests on each additional sample shall be four.
(4)
Non-compliance:
permanent elongation
of reinforcement
connectors
15.40
(1)
If the result of any test for permanent elongation of reinforcement
connectors for tension joints does not comply with the specified
requirements as stated in Clause 15.35(b), additional samples shall be
provided from the same batch and additional tests for permanent
elongation as stated in Clause 15.35(b) shall be carried out. The number
of additional samples shall be as stated in Table 15.1.
15.15
2006 Edition
(2)
The number of specimens in each additional sample shall be six.
(3)
The number of tests on each additional sample shall be six.
(4)
requirements for permanent elongation if the result of any additional test
does not comply with the specified requirements as stated in Clause
15.35(b).
15.16
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 16
16.1
2006 Edition
16.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 16
GENERAL
Sprayed concrete
16.01
Sprayed concrete shall comply with Section 7 except as stated in this

Section.
Designation of
concrete mixes
16.02
(1)
Designed mix concrete shall be designated by the grade strength in
MPa followed by the nominal maximum aggregate size in mm and the
suffix D.
(2)
Standard mix concrete shall be designated by the grade strength in
MPa followed by the nominal maximum aggregate size in mm and the
suffix S.
(3)
Designed mix concrete or standard mix concrete of the same grade
strength but with different constituents, workability or other properties shall
be designated as such by the addition of a suitable description. If the
grade of concrete is designated by one number only, the number shall be the
grade strength in MPa.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Mix constituents
16.03
(1)
Cementitious content is the mass of cement per cubic metre of
compacted concrete or, if cement and PFA are used as separate constituents,
the combined mass of cement and PFA per cubic metre of compacted
concrete.
(2)
Water content is the total mass of the free water contained in the
aggregates plus the mass of the added mixing water plus the mass of water
contained in any admixtures or additives used.
(3)
Water/cement ratio is the ratio of the water content divided by the
cementitious content.
Amd 2/2008
Grade
16.04
Grade is a term used to identify the different concrete mixes in terms of

grade strength or in terms of grade strength and nominal maximum
aggregate size.
Grade strength
16.05
Grade strength is the compressive strength of concrete stated in the

Contract. For designed mix concrete, compliance with the grade strength
shall be ascertained in accordance with Clause 16.61.
MATERIALS
16.3
2006 Edition
Cement
16.06
(1)
Cement shall comply with the following:

Portland cement (PC)
: BS EN 197-1
(Type CEM I) Strength Class
of cement used in structural
concrete to be 52.5N, unless
otherwise approved by the
Engineer
Sulphate resisting Portland

Cement (SRPC)
Portland fly ash (PFAC)
cement
: BS 4027
: BS EN 197-1
(Types CEM II/A-V and CEM
II/B-V) Strength Class of
cement used in structural
concrete to be 42.5N or higher,
unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
(2)
The limiting values applicable to acceptance inspection of cement at
delivery shall be those given in Table NC.1 of National annex NC of BS
EN 197-1
Pulverized Fly Ash
(PFA)
Aggregates
16.07
16.08
PFA shall comply with BS 3892: Part 1 with the following modifications:
(a)
Use Portland cement BS EN 197-1: CEM I (52.5N) to

determine water requirement, strength factor at 28 days,
soundness and initial setting time.
(b)
The criteria for water requirement and strength factor at 28

days shall not apply, but the values of water requirement
and strength factor at 28 days shall be reported on
certificates as required in Clause 16.17(1)(b).
(c)
PFA of total lime content over 10% but not over 20% and
with soundness value not more than 10 mm is acceptable
as high-lime PFA. When high-lime PFA is used, it
shall be reported in certificates as required in Clause
16.17(1)(c).
Amd 1/2007
(1)
Aggregates shall be obtained from a source approved by the
Engineer. Aggregates from marine source shall not be used. All-in
aggregates shall not be used.
(2)
Fine aggregate shall be clean, hard and durable crushed rock,

complying with BS 882, except that the NOTE in Table 4 of BS 882 shall
not apply. Natural sand shall not be used unless with the prior
agreement of the Engineer.
(3)
Coarse aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable crushed rock
complying with BS 882 and free of shell. The ten percent fines values
shall be at least 100 kN. The water absorption shall not exceed 0.8%.
The flakiness index shall not exceed 30%. The elongation index shall not
16.4
2006 Edition
exceed 35%. The Los Angeles Value shall not exceed 30% loss. The
magnesium sulphate soundness weighted average loss shall not exceed
6%. Recycled aggregates may be used subject to the prior agreement of
the Engineer.
(4)
Aggregates shall be inert to alkali-silica reaction (ASR) unless a
control framework installed to guard against occurrence of ASR in
concrete structures.
Amd 2/2008
Water
16.09
(1)
Water for concrete and for curing concrete shall be clean fresh water
taken from the public supply.
(2) Non-saline water from other sources may be used subject to the
Engineers approval, provided that it can be demonstrated that the water is
neutral in PH value, free from suspended solids and liquid contaminants
non-miscible with water and that when tested according to the procedures
given in BS 3148, it had no significant effect on the setting time or strength
of concrete.
Amd 2/2008
(3)
Wash water from concrete mixer washout operations (recycled
water) may be used for mixing concrete of grade strength not exceeding
35MPa provided that:
Admixtures
16.10
(1)
(a)
The density of the recycled water shall not exceed 1030 kg/m3.
(b)
The limits for the time of setting (h:min), expressed as

deviation from those for control mix, shall comply with Table
16.8. The control mix shall be of the same mix design but
clean fresh water shall be used.
(c)
The chemical limits of the recycled water shall not exceed

those specified in Table 16.8.
Admixtures shall comply with the following:

Pigments for Portland
cement and Portland
cement products
: BS 1014
Accelerating admixtures,
retarding admixtures and
water-reducing admixtures
: BS 5075: Part 1
Superplasticising
admixtures
: BS 5075: Part 3.
(2)
The chloride ion content of admixtures for concrete containing
embedded metal or for concrete made with SRPC shall not exceed 2% by
mass of the admixture or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content,
whichever is less.
Curing compound
16.11
(1)
Curing compound shall be a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer and shall have an efficiency index of at least 85%. Resin-based
curing compound shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer.
16.5
2006 Edition
Amd 2/2008
(2)
Curing compound shall contain a fugitive dye. Curing compounds
containing organic solvents shall not be used. The curing compound
shall become stable and achieve the specified resistance to evaporation of
water from the concrete surface within 60 minutes after application.
Curing compound shall not react chemically with the concrete to be cured
and shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within one week after application.
Curing compound shall degrade completely within three weeks after
application and the concrete surface s treated shall not impair the bonding
of applied finishes.
(3)
Curing compound for use on concrete surfaces against which
potable or fresh water will be stored or conveyed shall be non-toxic and
shall not impart a taste to the water.
CONCRETE
Concrete mix
16.12
(1)
Concrete shall be a designed mix unless the Engineer permits the use
of a standard mix. Designed mixes shall be designed by the Contractor.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the minimum designed
slump value for designed mix concrete for reinforced elements, after the
addition of superplasticiser if used, shall be 75 mm. Should the
Contractor wish to use designed mix concrete with a designed slump value
less than 75 mm in reinforced elements, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to demonstrate that such concrete can be satisfactorily placed
and compacted in trial sections simulating the appropriate sections of the
Works.
Amd 2/2008
(3)
Cement, PFA, aggregates, water and admixtures for concrete shall
comply with Clauses 16.06 to 16.10.
Amd 2/2008
(4)
SRPC shall only be used if stated in the Contract. PFA shall not be
used with SRPC.
(5)
PFA shall not be used in addition to PFAC.
(6)
Chloride content of
concrete
16.13
PFA shall be used in concrete of all pile caps and substructure

construction where the concrete member is thicker than 750 mm.
The maximum total chloride content of concrete, expressed as a percentage
relationship between the chloride ion and the cementitious content by mass
in the concrete mix, shall be as stated in Table 16.1. If the concrete is of
more than one of the types stated, then the lower value of maximum
chloride content shall apply.
Table 16.1: Maximum total chloride content of concrete
Type of concrete
Maximum total
chloride content (%)
16.6
2006 Edition
Cementitious content
of designed mix
concrete
Prestressed concrete.
Steam-cured structural
Concrete
0.1
Concrete with reinforcement

or other embedded metal
0.35
Concrete made with SRPC
0.2
16.14
(1)
The minimum cementitious content of designed mix concrete of
Grade 20 or above using 20 mm nominal maximum aggregate size shall be
as stated in Table 16.2. The minimum cementitious contents shall be
increased by 40 kg/m3 for 10 mm nominal maximum aggregate size and
decreased by 30 kg/m3 for 40 mm nominal maximum aggregate size.
(2)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the maximum
cementitious content of designed mix concrete for water retaining
structures and water tight structures shall be 400 kg/m 3 for concrete
containing PC and shall be 450 kg/m3 for concrete containing either PC
and PFA or PFAC. The minimum cementitious content of designed mix
concrete for water retaining structures shall be 325 kg/m3 and maximum
water/cement ratio shall be 0.5. Unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, the maximum cementitious content of designed mix concrete
other than for water retaining structures and water tight structures shall be
550 kg/m3.
Amd 2/2008
(3)
The cementitious content of designed mix concrete may be varied
during routine production at the discretion of the Contractor by an amount
not exceeding 20 kg/m3, provided that the total cementitious content is not
less than the specified minimum value and does not exceed the specified
maximum value.
(4)
When PFA is incorporated in the concrete as a separate material, its
proportion shall not exceed 35% of the total cementitious content for
normal concrete. If other conditions apply, particulars of proposed
changes to the proportion of PFA shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
(5) When PFA is used in construction of pile caps and substructures, the
PFA content shall constitute at least 25% of the cementitious content in the
concrete.
Table 16.2:
Minimum cementitious content of designed mix concrete of Grade 20 or greater with 20

mm nominal maximum aggregate size
Grade strength (MPa)
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Minimum cementitious
content (kg/m3)
270
290
310
330
350
375
400
16.7
2006 Edition
Standard mix concrete
16.15
Standard mix concrete shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
Cement shall be PC or PFAC.
(b)
The total mass of dry aggregate to be used with 100 kg of PC

or with 110 kg of PFAC shall be as stated in Table 16.3.
(c)
The percentage by mass of fine aggregate to total aggregate

shall be as stated in Table 16.4.
(d)
Admixtures other than water-reducing admixtures shall not be

used unless permitted by the Engineer.
Table 16.3: Mass of total aggregate for standard mix concrete

Grade
strength
(MPa)
Nominal maximum
aggregate size
(mm)
40
20
10
Range of measured
slump value (mm)
85-170
75-150
65-130
800
690
550
500
400
490
440
360
440
380
300
Amd 2/2008
10
20
25
30
Mass of total
aggregate (kg)
16.8
2006 Edition
Table 16.4: Percentage by mass of fine aggregate to total aggregate for standard mix concrete
Grade
strength
(MPa)
Grading
of fine
aggregate
(BS 882:
Table 5)
Nominal maximum
aggregate size
(mm)
40
20
10
10
C, M or F
30 - 45
35 - 50
20, 25
or 30
Percentage by mass
of fine aggregate
to total aggregate
(%)
30 - 40
35 - 45
45 - 55
25 - 35
30 - 40
40 - 50
25 - 30
25 - 35
35 - 45
No-fines concrete
16.16
No-fines concrete shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
Cement shall be PC or PFAC.
(b)
The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 20 mm. Not

more than 15% by mass shall be retained on a 20 mm BS test
sieve and not more than 10% by mass shall pass a 10 mm BS
test sieve.
(c)
The aggregate:cement ratio by mass shall be at least 10 and

shall not exceed 15.
(d)
The cementitious content shall be such that each particle of

aggregate is coated with cement paste but the compacted
concrete has an open texture that permits the flow of water
through the hardened concrete.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
materials for concrete
16.17
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed cement, PFA and
aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
A certificate not older than 6 months for each type of cement

manufacture and showing that the cement complies with the
requirements stated in the Contract and including results of tests
for:
- Composition
- Chemical requirement
- Compressive strength at 2, 7 and 28 days
- Initial setting time
- Soundness
16.9
2006 Edition
(b) A certificate not older than 6 months for PFA showing the
source of the PFA and showing that the PFA complies with the
requirements stated in the Contract and including results of tests
required in Clause 14.1 of BS 3892: Part 1.
(c) If high-lime PFA as stated in Clause 16.07 is used, the
certificates that accompany delivery of high-lime PFA shall
mention that the PFA is high-lime.
(d) A certificate not older than 6 months for each nominal
maximum aggregate size showing the source of the aggregate
and showing that the aggregate complies with the requirements
stated in the Contract and including results of tests for:
- Grading
- Silt content
- Chloride content
- Flakiness index of coarse aggregate.
- Ten percent fines value
- Water absorption
Amd 1/2007
- Elongation index of coarse aggregate

- Magnesium Soundness
-
Abrasion Value/Los Angeles Value

Amd 2/2008
(2)
The following particulars of the proposed admixtures shall be
(a)
Manufacturers literature,
(b)
Description of physical state, colour and composition,
(c)
Recommended storage conditions and shelf life,
(d)
Method of adding to the concrete mix,
(e)
Any known incompatibility with other admixtures or cement,
(f)
Recommended dosage,
(g)
Effects of under-dosage and over-dosage, and
(h)
A certificate not older than 6 months for each type of admixture

manufacture and showing that the admixture complies with the
tests for:
- Uniformity
- Chloride content.
(3)
The following particulars of the proposed curing compound shall be
16.10
2006 Edition
(a)
Manufacturers literature,
(b)
Description of physical state, colour and composition,
(c)
Recommended storage conditions and shelf life,
(d)
Method of application,
(e)
Recommended rate of application, and
(f)

place of manufacture and showing that the curing compound
including results of tests for efficiency index.
(4)
If recycled water is used for mixing concrete, results of the tests
specified in Clause 16.51 and Table 16.8 shall be submitted to the Engineer.
(5)
Engineer at least 14 days before the first delivery of the material to the Site,
and thereafter each time the source is changed.
Particulars of concrete
mix
16.18
(1)
The following particulars of each proposed designed concrete mix
(a)
Quantity of each constituent per batch and per cubic metre of

compacted concrete, with required tolerances on quantities of
aggregates to allow for minor variations in grading, silt content
etc. The maximum permitted variation in the quantity of fine
aggregate shall be 20 kg of fine aggregate per 100 kg of
cement.
(b)
Grading of coarse and fine aggregates,
(c)
Workability after the addition of superplasticisers, in terms of

designed slump value or designed flow value,
(d)
Method of placing concrete,
(e)
Method of controlling the temperature of the concrete, if

required,
(f)
Test or trial mix data for designed mix concrete of the same
grade and with similar constituents and properties, if available,
and
(g)
Test data for designed mix concrete of the same or other grade
produced in the plant or plants proposed to be used, if available.
(2)
least 7 days before trial mixes are made or, if trial mixes are not required, at
least 7 days before the mix is placed in the permanent work.
Particulars of
ready-mixed concrete
supplier
16.19
The name of the suppliers and the location of each plant, including a
back-up plant, from which the Contractor proposes to obtain ready-mixed
concrete shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before trial
mixes are made or, if trial mixes are not required, at least 14 days before the
ready-mixed concrete is placed in the permanent work.
16.11
2006 Edition
Particulars of
batching and mixing
plant
16.20
Particulars of the proposed batching and mixing plant to be used on the Site,
including a layout plan and the output of the plant, shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 7 days before the plant is delivered to the Site.
Particulars of precast
concrete units
16.21
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed precast concrete units shall
(a)
Details of precasting yards,
(b)

place of manufacture, the identification numbers of the precast
concrete units and including results of tests for:
- Compressive strength of concrete cubes at 28 days
- Routine tests, including loading tests, carried out at the
precasting yards,
(c)
Details of lifting points and methods of handling, and
(d)
Procedure for testing precast units.
(2)
The particulars, other than certificates, shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before the first delivery of the precast concrete
units to the Site. The certificates shall be submitted for each batch of
precast concrete units delivered to the Site.
Particulars of
construction joints
16.22
Particulars of the proposed positions and details of construction joints in

concrete which are not stated in the Contract shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval at least 14 days before the relevant elements are
concreted.
TRIALS
Trial mix concrete
16.23
(1)
Trial mixes are not required for designed mix concrete of Grade 20
and below, or for standard mix concrete.
(2)
If test data for designed mix concrete of the proposed grade and with
similar constituents and properties and produced in the plant or plants
proposed for being used are submitted in accordance with Clause 16.18,
and are acceptable to the Engineer, no trials for that designed mix will be
required.
(3)
If test data for designed mix concrete of the proposed grade and with
similar constituents and properties produced in plant other than that
proposed to be used are submitted in accordance with Clause 16.18, and are
acceptable to the Engineer, the Engineer may require Plant Trials to be
carried out in accordance with Clause 16.24.
(4)
If test data for designed mix concrete produced in the plant or plants
proposed to be used, but of a grade or with constituents and properties other
than those proposed, are submitted in accordance with Clause 16.18, and
are acceptable to the Engineer, the Engineer may require Laboratory Mix
Trials to be carried out in accordance with Clause 16.25.
16.12
2006 Edition
(5)
If no test data for designed mix concrete are submitted or if test data
submitted in accordance with Clause 16.18 do not in the opinion of the
Engineer demonstrate the suitability of the proposed plant and mix design,
the Engineer may require both Plant Trials and Laboratory Mix Trials in
accordance with Clauses 16.24 and 16.25 respectively.
(6)
Plant Trials and Laboratory Mix Trials shall be completed at least 35
days before the concrete mix is placed in the permanent work.
(7)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24 hours before
conducting Plant Trials or Laboratory Mix Trials.
Plant Trials
16.24
(1)
Plant Trials shall be made using the plant or plants proposed and the
mix designs and constituents submitted to the Engineer.
(2)
One batch of concrete of a proposed designed mix shall be made on
each of three days in each plant proposed to be used. The batch shall be at
least 60% of the mixer's nominal capacity. If the concrete is batched in a
central plant and mixed in a truck mixer, three different truck mixers shall
be used.
(3)
Three samples of concrete shall be provided from each batch at
approximately 1/6, 1/2 and 5/6 of the discharge from the mixer. Each
sample shall be of sufficient size to perform a slump test or a flow table test,
and make two test cubes. The method of sampling shall be as stated in CS1.
(4)
Each sample taken in accordance with Clause 16.24(3) shall be
tested to determine its slump value or its flow value in accordance with
CS1.
(5)
Two test cubes shall be made from each sample taken in accordance
with Clause 16.24(3) and stored, cured and tested to determine the
compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with CS1.
(6) The size of the test cube shall be 100 mm for concrete with the
maximum aggregate size not exceeding 20 mm and shall be 150 mm with
the maximum aggregate size exceeding 20 mm.
Laboratory Mix Trials
16.25
(1)
Laboratory Mix Trials shall be made in the Contractor's laboratory
using the mix designs and constituents submitted to the Engineer.
(2)
Laboratory Mix Trials shall be carried out in accordance with
Section 11 of CS1. Three separate batches shall be made, each of
sufficient size to provide samples for two slump tests or two flow table
tests, and to make six test cubes.
(3)
Two slump tests or two flow table tests in accordance with CS1 shall
be performed on separate specimens from each batch of Laboratory Trial
Mix concrete.
(4)
Six test cubes shall be made from each batch of Laboratory Trial
Mix concrete, stored, cured and tested for compressive strength at 28 days
in accordance with CS1.
16.13
2006 Edition

Compliance criteria
Plant Trials
Laboratory Mix Trials
16.26
16.27
The results of tests on concrete taken from Plant Trials in accordance with
Clause 16.24 shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The average of the nine measured slump values shall be within

+/- 20mm or +/- 25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed
slump value. The average of the nine measured flow values
shall be within +/- 50mm of the designed flow value.
(b)
The range of the three measured slump values for each batch
of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average of the three
measured slump values for that batch. For flow table tests,
the range of the three measured flow values for each batch of
concrete shall be within 70mm.
Amd 2/2008
(c)
The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test

cubes shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 12 MPa for
100 mm test cubes or 10 MPa for 150 mm test cubes. The
compressive strength of each individual test cube shall exceed
the Grade strength by at least 5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or
4 MPa for 150 mm test cubes.
(d)
The range of the compressive strength of the six test cubes

from each batch of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the
average compressive strength of the six test cubes from that
batch.
(1)
When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants submitted in
accordance with Clause 16.18 show that the plant standard deviation
exceeds 5.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 5 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, or
in the absence of acceptable data, the results of tests on Laboratory Mix
Trial concrete shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The average of the six measured slump values shall be within

+/- 20mm or +/- 25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed
slump value. The average of the six measured flow values
shall be within +/- 50mm of the designed flow value.
Amd 2/2008
(b)

100 mm test cubes or 12 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, and the
the Grade strength by at least 7 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 6
MPa for 150 mm test cubes.
(2)
When test data relating to the proposed plant or plants submitted in
accordance with Clause 16.18 show that the plant standard deviation does
not exceed 5.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 5 MPa for 150 mm test cubes
and the data are acceptable to the Engineer, the results of tests on
Laboratory Mix Trial concrete shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The average of the six measured slump values shall be within

16.14
2006 Edition
+/- 20 mm or +/- 25%, whichever is the greater, of the

designed slump value. The average of the six measured flow
values shall be within +/- 50mm of the designed flow value.
Amd 2/2008
(b)

100 mm test cubes or 8 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, and the
the Grade strength by at least 3 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 2
MPa for 150 mm test cubes.
Trial lengths
and trial panels
16.28
Trial lengths required in accordance with Clauses 10.23 to 10.26 and trial
panels required in accordance with Clauses 14.22 and 14.23 shall be
constructed for each concrete mix as appropriate.
Non-compliance:
trial mix concrete
16.29
(1)
If the result of any test for workability or compressive strength of
laboratory mix trial and plant trial concrete does not comply with the
specified requirements for the property, particulars of proposed changes to
the materials, mix design or methods of production shall be submitted to the
Engineer. Further laboratory mix trials or plant trials shall be made until
the result of every test complies with the specified requirements for
workability and compressive strength of laboratory mix trial and plant trial
concrete.
(2)
If trial lengths or trial panels are constructed using the
non-complying trial mix, further trial lengths or trial panels shall be
constructed unless in the opinion of the Engineer the changes to the
materials, mix design or methods of production will not affect the results of
the previous trial lengths or trial panels.
Approved concrete mix
16.30
(1)
A concrete mix that complies with the specified requirements for
laboratory mix trials, plant trials and for trial lengths or trial panels shall
become an approved concrete mix. The designed slump value or designed
flow value used to produce an approved concrete mix shall become the
approved slump value or approved flow value.
(2)
If laboratory mix trials or plant trials are not required, a concrete mix
submitted as stated in Clause 16.18 and which complies with the specified
requirements for trial lengths or trial panels shall become an approved
concrete mix. The designed slump value or designed flow value of the
concrete mix shall become the approved slump value or approved flow
value.
Commencement of
concreting
16.31
Concrete shall not be placed in the permanent work until the concrete mix
has been approved by the Engineer.
and methods of
construction
16.32

production or methods of construction used to produce an approved
concrete mix shall not be changed except that the variations of cement
content as stated in Clause 16.14(3), and variations in aggregate quantities
within the approved tolerances, will be allowed.

16.15
2006 Edition
Storage of cement and

PFA
16.33
(1)
Cement in bags shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof store sheltered
on the top and 3 sides with a raised floor. Each delivery shall be identified
and kept separate and shall be used in the order of delivery.
(2)
Bulk cement and PFA shall be kept dry. Cement and PFA of
different types and from different sources shall be stored in separate silos
clearly marked to identify the different contents of each.

of aggregates
16.34
(1)
Aggregates shall not be handled or stored in a manner that will result
in mixing of the different types and sizes or in segregation or contamination
of the aggregates.
(2)
Different types and sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate
hoppers or in separate stockpiles. The stockpiles shall have well drained
concrete floors and shall have dividing walls of sufficient height to keep the
different aggregates separate.
Storage of admixtures
and curing compounds
16.35
Admixtures and curing compounds shall be stored in sealed containers

marked to identify the contents and protected from exposure to conditions
that may affect the material. The materials shall be stored in accordance
with the manufacturers' recommendations and shall not be used after the

of precast concrete
units
16.36
(1)
The identification number, date of casting and lifting points shall be
marked on precast concrete units in a manner agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
Precast concrete units shall be lifted and supported only at the
designed lifting points and shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock
loading or dropping.
(3)
Precast concrete units shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and
maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner that will
not result in damage or deformation to the units or in contamination of the
units. Precast concrete units and the lifting points shall be protected from
damage/rusting and damaged units shall not be used in the permanent works

Batching concrete
16.37
(1)
Measuring and weighing equipment for batching concrete shall be
maintained in a clean, serviceable condition. The equipment shall be zeroed
daily and calibrated when the equipment is set up on the Site and at a
frequency of at least once per month. The accuracy of the measuring
equipment shall be within 3% of the quantity of cementitious materials, total
aggregates or water being measured and within 5% of the quantity of
admixtures being measured.
(2)
The quantities of cement, PFA and fine and coarse aggregate shall be
measured by mass except that cement supplied in bags may be measured by
using a whole number of bags in each batch. The mass of aggregates shall
be adjusted to allow for the free moisture content of the aggregates.
(3)
Separate weighing equipment shall be used for cementitious material
and aggregates.
(4)
The quantity of water shall be adjusted for the free moisture content
16.16
2006 Edition
of the aggregates and shall be measured by mass or volume.

(5)
Liquid admixtures shall be measured by mass or volume and
powdered admixtures shall be measured by mass.
Mixing concrete
16.38
(1)
The quantities of concrete mixed and the speed of operation of a
mixer shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(2)
A mixer shall not be loaded in excess of its rated capacity and shall
be emptied before being re-charged. A mixer that has been out of use for
more than 30 minutes shall be cleaned before fresh concrete is mixed in it.
Mixers shall be cleaned whenever there is a change in the type of cement
being used.
(3)
Mixing times or the number and rate of revolutions of mixer drums
shall not be less than those recommended by the manufacturer unless it is
demonstrated in the production of concrete that a shorter time or fewer or
slower revolutions are adequate. Constituents shall be thoroughly mixed
and admixtures shall be uniformly distributed throughout the concrete.
(4)
Water shall be added to truck mixed concrete at the batching plant
and shall not be added in transit. Water shall not be added at the Site
unless approved by the Engineer.
(5)
Water shall not be added to partially hardened concrete.
Transportation of
concrete
16.39
(1)
Concrete shall not be transported in a manner that will result in
contamination, segregation, loss of constituents or excessive evaporation.
(2)
Concrete batched off the Site shall be transported to the Site in
purpose-made agitators operating continuously or in truck mixers.
RECORDS OF CONCRETE
Records of concrete
16.40
(1)
Delivery notes shall be provided for each delivery of concrete to the
Site. The delivery notes shall be kept on the Site and shall be available for
inspection by the Engineer at all times. Delivery notes shall contain the
following details:
(a)
Serial number of delivery note,
(b)
Date,
(c)
Name and location of batching and mixing plant,
(d)
Registration number of delivery vehicle,
(e)
Name of purchaser,
(f)
Name and location of the Site,

16.17
2006 Edition
(g) Designation of concrete mix and approved slump value or

approved flow value,
(h)
Sources of constituents,
(i)
(j)
Quantity of concrete, and

Time of introduction of water to the concrete.
(2)
Records of concreting operations shall be kept by the Contractor on
the Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times.
(a) Date,
(b) Designation of concrete mix and approved slump value or
approved flow value,
(c)
Total quantity of each concrete mix produced that day,
(d)
Serial number of delivery note,
(e)
Arrival time of delivery vehicle,
(f)
Time of completion of discharge,
(g)
Quantity of water added at the Site,
(h)
Position where concrete is placed,
(i)
Results of flow table tests or slump tests,
(j)
Details of test cubes made, and
(k)
Temperature of concrete if a restriction on the temperature is


Placing concrete
16.41
(1)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before concrete is
placed in any part of the permanent work. If placing of concrete is not
started within 24 hours of permission having been given, permission shall
again be obtained from the Engineer. The Contractor shall inform the
Engineer before concreting starts and shall allow the Engineer sufficient
time to inspect the work that is to be concreted.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the temperature of fresh
concrete when placed in position shall not exceed 30 for mixes of grade
strength greater than 20 MPa. The Contractor shall submit for approval
details of the proposal to ensure that this temperature will not be exceeded.
Amd 2/2008
(3)
Concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position within
2 hours of the introduction of cement to the concrete mix.
16.18
2006 Edition
(4)
Concrete that in the opinion of the Engineer is no longer sufficiently
workable shall not be placed in the permanent work.
(5)
Concrete shall not be placed in water other than by tremie or in bags.
(6)
Concrete shall be placed as close as practicable to its final position
and shall not be moved into place by vibration. Trunking or chutes shall
be used to place concrete which will fall more than 2.7 m unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer. Trunking or chutes, where being used, shall
be clean and used in such a way to avoid segregation and loss of
constituents of the concrete mix.
(7)
Concrete shall be placed in such a manner that the formwork,
reinforcement or built-in components are not displaced.
(8)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete other than
concrete placed by tremie shall be placed in horizontal layers to a
compacted depth of not more than 450 mm if internal vibrators are used and
to a compacted depth of not more than 150 mm in other cases.
(9)
Concrete shall be placed continuously within the element to be
concreted. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete that has
been in position for more than 30 minutes unless in the opinion of the
Engineer the concrete already placed is sufficiently workable and the
permission of the Engineer has been obtained. If permission is not
obtained, a construction joint shall be formed as stated in Clause 16.45.
Concrete shall not be placed against the concrete already placed for at least
24 hours unless permitted by the Engineer.
Placing concrete by
pumping
Placing concrete by
tremie
16.42
16.43
(1)
Concrete pumps shall be operated and maintained in accordance with

the manufacturers recommendations. The pumps and pipelines
shall be maintained in a clean condition. Internal surfaces of
pipelines shall not be aluminium. Joints in pipelines shall be tightly
fixed and shall not permit grout loss.
(2)
Concrete pumps shall be positioned such that pipelines are as short

and straight as practicable and require as little repositioning as
practicable. Bends in pipelines shall be arranged in such a manner
that the concrete, formwork, reinforcement or built-in components
are not disturbed.
(3)
Pipelines shall be lubricated by passing cement grout or concrete

through the pipeline before the concrete is pumped. The initial
discharge of pumped concrete shall not be placed in the permanent
work.
(1)
Tremies used to place concrete shall be securely supported in

position and the joints shall be watertight. A temporary seal of a
type agreed by the Engineer shall be used to keep the water and the
concrete separate at the start of concreting. Concrete for tremie
placing shall be self-compacting, free flowing and cohesive.
(2)
After the concrete is flowing, the tremie shall be raised in a manner

agreed by the Engineer. The lower end of the tremie shall be kept
immersed in the concrete to a depth of at least 1 m. Water, mud and
other deleterious material shall be prevented from entering the tremie
16.19
2006 Edition
after concreting has started.
Compacting concrete
16.44
(3)
The Contractor should include in his method statement a

contingency plan of necessary measures that shall be taken to cater
for any incident that the tremie pipe might become blocked or
removed from the concrete.
Amd 3/2009
(4)
Concrete placed by tremie shall be placed above the specified level

by an amount that is sufficient to allow for the removal of
contaminated concrete. Contaminated concrete shall be removed.
(1)
Concrete shall be compacted to form a dense homogeneous mass.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete shall be
compacted by means of internal vibrators of suitable diameter. A sufficient
number of vibrators shall be maintained in serviceable condition on the Site
to ensure that spare equipment is available in the event of breakdown.
(3)
Vibrators shall be used in such a manner that vibration is applied
continuously and systematically during placing of the concrete until the
expulsion of air has practically ceased. Vibrators shall not be used in a
manner that will result in segregation. Internal vibrators shall be inserted
to the full depth of the concrete placed and shall be withdrawn slowly.
(4)
Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement, and
contact between internal vibrators and formwork, reinforcement or built-in
components shall be avoided as far as possible. Concrete shall be vibrated
in such a manner that the formwork, reinforcement or built-in components
will not be displaced.
(5)
Concrete that has been in position for more than 30 minutes shall not
be vibrated except as stated in Clause 16.41(8).
(6)
No-fines concrete shall be compacted using a minimum amount of
punning.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints
16.45
(1)
Construction joints in concrete shall be formed only at the specified
positions and by the specified method unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. The position and details of construction joints which are not
stated in the Contract shall be arranged in such a manner that the possibility
of the occurrence of shrinkage cracks is minimized.
(2)
Construction joints shall be normal to the axis or plane of the element
being constructed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
Waterstops shall be provided at construction joints in water retaining
structures and watertight structures.
(4)
Laitance and loose material shall be removed from the surface of
construction joints and the aggregate shall be exposed by a method agreed
by the Engineer. The work shall be carried out as soon as practicable after
the concrete has hardened sufficiently for the cement matrix to be removed
16.20
2006 Edition
without disturbing the coarse aggregate. The surface of the construction

joint shall be cleaned after the matrix has been removed.
(5)
The surface of the construction joint shall be clean and dry when
fresh concrete is placed against it.
16.21
2006 Edition
CURING CONCRETE
Curing concrete
16.46
(1)
Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather,
running water and drying out by one of the following methods:
Method 1
: A liquid curing compound shall be applied to the

concrete surface by a low-pressure spray until a
continuous visible covering is achieved. The
application rate shall be applied as recommended by
the manufacturer. For textured surfaces and fluted
surfaces, the application rate shall be adjusted to
ensure that full covering is achieved. Covering the
adjoining reinforcement or formwork shall be
avoided.
Method 2
: The concrete surface shall be covered with hessian,

sacking, canvas or other absorbent material agreed by
the Engineer or with a layer of fine aggregate at least
25 mm thick.
The hessian, sacking, canvas,
absorbent material or fine aggregate shall be kept
constantly wet.
Method 3
: The concrete surface shall be covered with

polyethylene sheeting. Concrete surfaces which have
become dry shall be thoroughly wetted before the
sheeting is placed.
Method 4
: Unformed concrete surfaces shall be covered with

polyethylene sheeting until the concrete has hardened
sufficiently for water curing to be carried out. Water
curing shall be carried out by spraying the concrete
surface continuously with cool water or by ponding
immediately after the sheeting is removed. If in the
opinion of the Engineer water curing is impracticable,
Method 2 shall be used instead of water curing.
(2)
Method 1 shall not be used on concrete surfaces against which
concrete will be placed or which will have a Class T1 finish or which will be
painted or tiled.
(3)
Method 1, 2, 3 or 4 shall be carried out on unformed concrete surfaces
immediately after the concrete has been compacted and finished. Method 1,
2 or 3 shall be carried out on formed concrete surfaces immediately after the
formwork has been removed.
(4)
(5)
Hessian, sacking, canvas, absorbent material and polyethylene
sheeting shall be lapped and securely held in position in such a manner that
the concrete surface will not be damaged.
(6)
Cold water shall not be applied to concrete surfaces or formwork
intermittently in large quantities.
16.22
2006 Edition
(7)
The different methods of protection shall be maintained for the
minimum periods stated in Table 16.5 after the concrete has been placed. The
minimum periods may be reduced by the number of days during which
formwork is left in position.
Table 16.5: Minimum periods of protection for concrete
Type of
structure
Minimum period of protection (days)
Method of
protection
Water retaining
structures and water
tight structures
Others
Concrete not
containing PFA or
PFAC
Concrete containing
PFA or PFAC
2, 3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

Installation of
precast concrete
units
16.47
(1)
Contact surfaces between in-situ concrete and precast concrete units
shall be prepared as stated in the Contract. Dimensional tolerances shall be
checked before the precast concrete units are lifted into position.
(2)
Temporary supports and connections shall be provided as soon as
practicable during installation of precast concrete units.
(3)
Final structural connections shall be completed as soon as practicable
after the precast concrete units have been installed.
(4)
Levelling devices that have no load bearing function in the finished
structure shall be slackened, released or removed after the precast concrete
units have been installed.
LOADING OF CONCRETE
Loading of concrete
16.48
(1)
Loads which will induce a compressive stress in the concrete
exceeding one-third of the compressive strength of the concrete at the time of
loading or exceeding one-third of the grade strength, whichever is less, shall
not be applied to concrete. Allowance shall be made for the weight of the
concrete in determining the loading. The strength of the concrete and the
stresses produced by the loads shall be assessed by a method agreed by the
Engineer.
(2)
Loads from materials not forming part of the permanent work or from
construction plant or other vehicles shall not be applied to no-fines concrete.
16.23
2006 Edition
TESTING: CEMENT, PFA, AGGREGATE, ADMIXTURE,

CURING COMPOUND, RECYCLED WATER
Batch: cement, PFA,
aggregate,
admixture, curing
compound
16.49
A batch of cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture or curing compound is any

quantity of cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture or curing compound of the
same type, manufactured or produced at the same time in the same place,
covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site, or stored at the
ready-mixed concrete plant, at any one time.
Samples: cement,
PFA, aggregate,
admixture, curing
compound
16.50
(1)
One sample of each type of cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture and
curing compound shall be provided at the same time as particulars of the
material are submitted to the Engineer.
(2)
The size of each sample and the method of sampling shall be as stated
in Table 16.6.
Testing: cement,
PFA, aggregate,
admixture, curing
compound,
recycled water
16.51
(1)
Each sample of cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture and curing
compound shall be tested to determine the properties stated in Table 16.7.
(2)
The method of testing shall be as stated in Table 16.7.
(3)
The maximum total chloride content of concrete shall be determined
on the basis of the results of tests for chloride content of each constituent.
(4)
The sampling and testing for acceptance inspection at delivery shall be
as stated in National annex NC of BS EN 197-1. The methods of taking and
preparing samples of cement shall be as stated in BS EN 196-7.
(5)
If recycled water is used for mixing concrete, tests shall be carried out
according to the methods and frequency stated in Table 16.8.
Table 16.6: Size of samples and method of sampling cement, PFA, aggregate,
admixture and curing compound
Material
Size of sample
Method of sampling
Cement
20 kg
BS EN 196-7
PFA
20 kg
BS EN 196-7
Amd 1/2007
Coarse aggregate
25 kg
BS 812: Part 102
Fine aggregate
10 kg
BS 812: Part 102
Admixture (powdered)
1 kg
BS 5075: Part 1
Admixture (liquid)
1L
BS 5075: Part 1
Curing compound
5L
BS 5075: Part 1
16.24
2006 Edition
Table 16.7: Methods of testing cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture and curing compound
Material
PC, SRPC,
PFAC
Property
Method of testing
Composition
BS EN 197-1
Chemical properties
BS EN 196-2
BS EN 196-21
Compressive strength at 2, 7 and
BS EN 196-1
28 days
PFA
Initial setting time
BS EN 196-3
Soundness
BS EN 196-3
Chemical composition
BS EN 196-2 and
BS EN 196-21
Physical tests
BS 3892: Part 1
Amd 1/2007
Coarse aggregate,
fine aggregate
Coarse aggregate
Grading
BS 812: Part 103
Silt content
BS 812: Part 1
Chloride content
BS 812: Part 117
Flakiness index
Ten percent fines
Water absorption
Elongation index
Magnesium Soundness
Abrasion Value/Los Angeles Value
BS 812: Part 105.1

BS 812: Part 111
BS 812: Part 2
BS 812: Part 105.2
BS 812: Part 121
ASTM C131/C535
Amd 2/2008
Admixture
Chloride content
BS 5075: Part 1
Curing compound
Efficiency index
Appendix 16.1
16.25
2006 Edition
Table 16.8: Recycled water testing for each batching plant

Description
Limits
Test frequency
Test method
Physical test
(a) Density test for recycled
water
(b) Initial setting time of
cement with recycled water
(time of set, deviation from
control, h:min)
1030 kg/m3
Note 1
BS EN 196-3:1995
From 1:00
earlier to 1:30
later
At least once per day

Once every 3 months for the first
year and thereafter at half-yearly
intervals
Chemical test for recycled water
For all tests:
(a) Chloride content (as C1):

- prestressed concrete
steam-cured structural
concrete
(i) Once per week for the first 2

months
500 ppm
APHA 4500-C1-B,
18th Edition (1992)
concrete with
reinforcement or other
embedded metal
1,000 ppm
APHA 4500-Cl-B,
18th Edition (1992)
(b) Sulphate content (as SO4)
3,000 ppm
APHA
4500-SO42-C, 18th
Edition (1992)
600 ppm
BS EN 1008:2002
(c) Acid-soluble alkali content
(ii)
Once per month for

the next 12 months thereafter
(iii)
In case of a weekly
or monthly test indicates that
the limits are exceeded, the
water shall immediately be
suspended for use in concrete
mixing until two sets of
consecutive test results taken
from the same source are
satisfactory. In such case, the
testing frequency shall be
maintained at or reverted back
to once per week until two sets
of consecutive test results are
satisfactory.
(iv) The testing frequency shall be

subject to review after the
12-month period for the
monthly test
Notes:
1. Test method to be proposed by the Contractor for the acceptance of the Engineer.
2. Laboratories accredited by HOKLAS for the relevant tests shall be used, if available, in which case
results shall be issued on HOKLAS endorsed test reports.
TESTING: CONCRETE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Batch: concrete
16.52
A batch of concrete is any quantity of concrete produced in one cycle of

operations of a batch mixer, or conveyed ready-mixed in a delivery vehicle,
or discharged during one minute from a continuous mixer.
Reduction of testing
frequency
16.53
The number of tests for workability or compressive strength of standard

mix concrete may be reduced if in the opinion of the Engineer the standard
of quality control is satisfactory.
16.26
2006 Edition
TESTING: CONCRETE - WORKABILITY

Samples: workability
of concrete
16.54
(1)
One sample of concrete shall be provided from each batch of

concrete to determine the workability of the concrete.
(2)

(3)
Testing: workability of
concrete
16.55
The first 0.3 cu. m. concrete discharged from the truck before taking
concrete sample for slump test can be used in the Works after the
measured slump value is accepted by the Engineer as in Clause
16.56.
Amd 2/2008
(1)
Each sample of concrete taken as stated in Clause 16.54 shall be
divided into two specimens. Each specimen shall be tested to determine
the workability of the concrete in accordance with CS1. Selection of the
testing method is given in the table below:
Normal Workability
(designed slump value
from 20 mm to 175 mm)
Slump Test
High Workability
(designed flow value from
340 mm to 600 mm)
Flow Table Test
(See Note below)
Amd 2/2008
Note: For concrete with a flow value greater than 600mm, the
Engineer shall specify the workability testing method.
(2)
The average of the two workability values shall be calculated and
referred to as the average measured slump value or average measured flow
value.
Amd 2/2008
16.56
(1)
The average measured slump value of the two specimens taken from
one sample of standard mix concrete shall be within the appropriate range
of measured slump value stated in Table 16.3.
(2)
The average measured slump value of the two specimens taken from
one sample of designed mix concrete shall be within +/- 25 mm or +/- 33%
of the designed slump value, whichever is the greater.
(3)
The average measured flow value of the two specimens taken from
one sample of designed mix concrete shall be within +/- 50mm of the
designed flow value.
Amd 2/2008
Non-compliance:
16.57
A batch of concrete shall be considered as not complying with the specified

requirements for workability if the result of any test for workability, carried
out on a sample taken from the batch, does not comply with the specified
requirements for workability. Concrete that failed to comply with the
specified requirements for workability shall not be placed in the
permanent works.
16.27
2006 Edition
TESTING: CONCRETE - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

Samples: compressive
16.58
(1)
For each concrete mix, one sample of concrete shall be provided
from each amount of concrete as stated in Table 16.9 or from the amount of
concrete produced each day, whichever is less.
(2)
If the Contractor requests, or if the Engineer instructs, that the
concrete be tested for compressive strength at ages other than 28 days,
additional samples shall be provided. The number of additional samples
shall be as stated in Clause 16.58(1).
(3)
accordance with CS1. If a superplasticising admixture is included in the
concrete mix, the samples shall be taken after the superplasticiser is added
and after the concrete is remixed.
Table 16.9: Rate of sampling of concrete

Type of structure
Amount of concrete
Masts
Cantilevers 3 m or more in length
Columns
Shear walls
Prestressed elements
Other critical elements
Solid rafts
Pile caps
Mass concrete
100 m3 or 100 batches, whichever is less
Other types
Testing: compressive
16.59
(1)
Two test cubes shall be made from each sample of concrete taken as
stated in Clause 16.58. Each pair of test cubes shall be tested to determine
the compressive strength at 28 days.
(2)
The method of making test cubes shall be in accordance with CS1.
(3)
The method of storing test cubes shall be in accordance with CS1.
Test cubes which are cured on the Site shall be delivered to the testing
laboratory at least 48 hours before the tests are due to be carried out.
(4)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with CS1.
(5)
For the purpose of assessing compliance of designed mix concrete as
stated in Clauses 16.61 and 16.62, the average of the two compressive
strengths of the pair of test cubes shall be calculated and referred to as the
test result.
16.28
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
compressive strength
of standard mix
concrete
16.60
If the result of any test for compressive strength at 28 days of standard mix
concrete is less than the grade strength, the Engineer may instruct that tests
as stated in Clauses 16.63 to 16.66 are carried out on concrete cores or on
samples taken from the hardened concrete.
of designed mix
concrete
16.61
(1) The results of tests for compressive strength at 28 days of designed

mix concrete shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) Each test result shall not be less than the grade strength by more
than the appropriate amount stated in Column A of Table 16.10,
and,
(b) The average of any four consecutive test results, or the average of
the first two or first three test results if less than four test results
are available, shall exceed the grade strength by at least the
appropriate amount stated in Column B of Table 16.10.
Table 16.10: Compliance criteria for compressive strength of designed mix concrete
Grade
strength
(MPa)
20 or greater
below 20
Column A
Compliance
criteria
Column B
Maximum amount by which each test Minimum amount by which the

result may be below the grade strength average of any four consecutive test
(MPa)
results shall be above the grade
strength (MPa)
100 mm cubes
150 mm cubes
100 mm cubes
150 mm cubes
C1
C2
C3
(2)
If there is a period exceeding 14 days between any two consecutive
test results in any group of four consecutive test results and if agreed by the
Engineer, the test results immediately before and immediately after the
period may be treated separately for the purpose of Clause 16.61(1)(b).
(3)
If the difference between the compressive strengths of two test cubes
made from one sample of designed mix concrete exceeds 15% of the test
result:
(a)
The higher of the compressive strengths of the two test cubes

shall be used to assess compliance as stated in Clause
16.61(1)(a), and
16.29
2006 Edition
(b)
The test result for that sample shall not be used to assess
compliance as stated in Clause 16.61(1)(b) and shall not be
used to calculate the standard deviation.
(4)
For designed mix concrete with grade strength of less than 20 MPa,
compliance criteria C3 shall apply.
(5)
For designed mix concrete with a grade strength of 20 MPa or
greater, until 40 test results are available either:
(a)
Compliance criteria C1 shall apply, or
(b)
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is sufficient evidence

that the standard of quality control using similar materials and
plant is such that the standard deviation for at least 40 test
results will not exceed 5.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 5
MPa for 150 mm test cubes, compliance criteria C2 shall
apply.
(6)
For designed mix concrete with a grade strength of 20 MPa or
greater, the standard deviation of test results shall be calculated after every
test result for each designed mix using the last 40 test results judged by the
same compliance criteria. The acceptance criteria shall depend on the
calculated standard deviation as follows:
(a) For 100 mm test cubes, if the standard deviation does not
exceed 5.5 MPa, compliance criteria C2 shall apply to
subsequent test results. If the standard deviation exceeds 5.5
MPa and does not exceed 8.5 MPa, compliance criteria C1 shall
apply to subsequent test results.
(b) For 150 mm test cubes, if the standard deviation does not
exceed 5 MPa, compliance criteria C2 shall apply to subsequent
test results. If the standard deviation exceeds 5 MPa and does
not exceed 8 MPa, compliance criteria C1 shall apply to
subsequent test results.
(c) If the standard deviation exceeds 8.5 MPa for 100 mm test
cubes or 8.0 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, no further concrete
shall be placed in the permanent works until an investigation of
the materials, mix design, methods of production, sampling and
testing has been carried out and measures have been taken
which in the opinion of the Engineer will result in restoring a
satisfactory standard of quality control.
(7)
If the compliance criteria are changed from C1 to C2 or from C2 to
C1, the new compliance criteria shall apply from the 35th day after making
the last pair of test cubes in the set of 40 on which the decision to change
was based. For the purpose of Clause 16.61(1)(b), test results immediately
before and immediately after the change shall be treated separately.
Non-compliance:
of designed mix
concrete
16.62
(1)
A batch of designed mix concrete shall be considered as not
complying with the specified requirements for compressive strength if the
test result for the pair of test cubes made from a sample taken from the
batch does not comply with the requirements stated in Clause 16.61(1)(a).
16.30
2006 Edition
(2)
The batches of designed mix concrete from which the first and last
samples in any group of four consecutive test results were taken and all
intervening batches shall be considered as not complying with the specified
requirements for compressive strength if the group of four consecutive test
results does not comply with the requirements stated in Clause 16.61(1)(b).
(3)
If designed mix concrete is considered as not complying with the
specified requirements for compressive strength, the Engineer may instruct
that tests as stated in Clauses 16.63 to 16.66 are carried out on concrete
cores or on samples taken from the hardened concrete.
TESTING: HARDENED CONCRETE

Samples: hardened
concrete and
concrete cores
16.63
(1)
The number of samples, including cores, of hardened concrete to be
provided for testing shall be as stated in the Contract or, if testing is to be
carried out as a result of the concrete not complying with the specified
requirements, shall be as instructed by the Engineer. In the latter case, all
the concrete being investigated shall be divided as instructed by the
Engineer into separate test locations. The number of samples taken from
each location shall be as instructed by the Engineer and the quality of
concrete at each location shall be assessed separately. The positions from
which the samples are taken shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
(2)
The size of samples and the method of sampling shall be in
16.64
(1)
Each concrete core shall be inspected for evidence of segregation of
the constituents and for the presence of voids. Specimens selected from
each core shall be tested to determine the compressive strength.
(2)
The method of preparing and inspecting concrete cores and of testing
the cores to determine the compressive strength shall be in accordance with
CS1. Concrete cores shall not be tested for compressive strength until the
concrete has reached an age of 28 days.
concrete cores
16.65
(1)
The concrete core shall be considered as non-compliant if it exhibits
honeycombing which means interconnected voids arising from, for
example, inadequate compaction or lack of mortar.
(2)
The results of tests for compressive strength of concrete cores shall
be interpreted in accordance with BS 6089. Adjustments to the measured
strength in respect of the age of the core when tested shall not be made
unless permitted by the Engineer. The estimated in-situ cube strength of
each core specimen shall be calculated in accordance with CS1. For any
set of cores representing a test location, the average estimated equivalent
cube strength shall be at least 85% of the specified grade strength, and each
individual estimated equivalent cube strength shall be at least 75% of the
specified grade strength.
Analysis of hardened
concrete
16.66
(1)
Each sample of hardened concrete shall be tested to determine the
properties or the composition of the concrete as stated in the Contract or, if
testing is to be carried out as a result of the concrete not complying with the
specified requirements, shall be tested as instructed by the Engineer.
16.31
2006 Edition
(2)
Tests on hardened concrete shall be carried out within 14 days of the
Engineer's instruction for the test.
(3)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with CS1.
TESTING: PRECAST UNITS

Batch: precast units
16.67
A batch of precast units is any quantity of precast units, including

prestressed units, of the same type and size, of the same concrete mix,
manufactured in the same place, covered by the same certificates and
delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples: precast units
16.68
The number of precast units to be provided for testing from each batch shall
Testing: precast units
16.69
(1)
Load tests shall be carried out to determine the deflection and
recovery of each precast unit, including prestressed units, provided for
testing and to determine the resistance to cracking of each prestressed unit
provided for testing.
(2)
Load tests shall be carried out in accordance with a procedure agreed
by the Engineer. The age at which the units are to be tested, the test load,
the points at which the loads are to be applied and the points at which the
unit is to be supported shall be as stated in the Contract.
(3)
The method of testing shall be as stated in Appendix 16.2.
(4)
Post-tensioned units shall not be tested until at least 7 days after the
ducts have been grouted.
precast units
16.70
The results of load tests on precast units shall comply with the requirements
16.32
2006 Edition
PART 2: JOINTS IN CONCRETE

GENERAL
16.71
Joints in concrete
carriageways
16.72
Joints in concrete carriageways shall comply with Section 10.
Construction joints
16.73
Construction joints in concrete shall comply with Section 16.
MATERIALS
Materials for joints in
water retaining
structures and water
tight structures
16.74
(1)
Materials for joints in water retaining structures and water tight
structures for sewage and effluent treatment shall be resistant to aerobic and
anaerobic microbiological attack and resistant to attack by petrol, diesel oil,
dilute acids and alkalis.
(2)
Materials for joints in water retaining structures for potable and fresh
water shall comply with the requirements of BS 6920.
Joint filler
16.75
Joint filler shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall
be a firm, compressible, single-thickness, non-rotting filler. Joint filler for
joints in water retaining structures and watertight structures shall be
non-absorbent.
Bitumen emulsion
16.76
Bitumen emulsion for joints in water retaining structures and watertight

structures shall comply with BS 3416. Bitumen emulsion for surfaces
against which potable or fresh water will be stored or conveyed shall
comply with BS 3416, type II.
Joint sealant
16.77
(1)
Joint sealant shall be a grade suited to the climatic conditions of
Hong Kong and shall perform effectively over a temperature range of 0C
to 60C. Joint sealant for exposed joints shall be grey.
(2)
Joint sealant other than cold-applied bitumen rubber sealant shall be:
(a)
A gun grade for horizontal joints 15 mm wide or less and for

vertical and inclined joints,
(b)
A pouring grade for horizontal joints wider than 15 mm.
(3)
Polysulphide-based sealant shall be a cold-applied two-part sealant
complying with BS 4254. Polysulphide-based sealant for expansion joints
in water retaining structures and watertight structures shall have a
transverse butt-joint movement range of at least 20%.
(4)
Polyurethane-based sealant shall be a cold-applied two-part sealant
complying with the performance requirements of BS 4254.
(5)
N1.
Hot-applied bitumen rubber sealant shall comply with BS 2499, type
16.33
2006 Edition
(6)
Cold-applied bitumen rubber sealant shall be of a proprietary type
(7)
Joint sealant for joints in water retaining structures and water tight
structures shall be as stated in Table 16.11.
(8)
Primers and caulking material for use with joint sealant shall be of a
proprietary type recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer and
(9)
Different types of joint sealant and primers that will be in contact
shall be compatible.
Table 16.11 : Joint sealant for water retaining structures and water tight structures
Structure for retaining/excluding
Sewage
Other than sewage
Type of joint
Type of joint sealant
All joints
Polyurethane-based
Expansion joints
Polysulphide-based or
polyurethane-based
Horizontal joints other than

expansion joints
Hot-applied bitumen rubber,

polysulphide-based or
polyurethane-based
Vertical and inclined joints

other than expansion joints
Polysulphide-based,
polyurethane-based or
cold-applied bitumen rubber
Bond breaker tape
16.78
Bond breaker tape shall be of a proprietary type recommended by the joint

sealant manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The tape shall be a
polyethylene film with adhesive applied on one side and shall be the full
width of the groove.
Bearing strip for

sliding joints
16.79
Bearing strip for sliding joints shall consist of two plastic strips of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer. The strips shall be resistant to
all weather conditions and to chemicals to which the structure will be
subjected without impairing the reaction, durability or function of the strips.
The strips shall be of a type that will not require maintenance after
installation. The strips shall be capable of withstanding a vertical load of
at least 300 kN/m2 and shall have a maximum coefficient of friction of 0.3
under a constant shearing force.
Waterstops
16.80
Waterstops, including intersections, reducers and junctions, shall be of a

proprietary type approved by the Engineer. Waterstops shall be natural or
synthetic rubber or extruded polyvinyl chloride and shall have the
properties stated in Table 16.12.
16.34
2006 Edition
Table 16.12: Properties of waterstops
Property
Rubber waterstops
PVC waterstops
Density
1100 kg/m3 ( 5%)
1300 kg/m3 ( 5%)
Hardness
60 - 70 IRHD
70 90 IRHD
Tensile strength
20 N/mm2
13 N/mm2
Elongation at
break point
450%
285%
Water absorption
5% by mass after
48 hours immersion
0.15% by mass after

24 hours immersion
Softness number
42 - 52
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
materials for joints
16.81
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for joints shall
(a)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for joint filler

manufacture and showing that the joint filler complies with the
tests for:
- Disintegration and shrinkage
- Recovery value and reduction in mass
- Extrusion,
(b)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for bitumen

emulsion showing the manufacturer's name, the date and place
of manufacture and showing that the bitumen emulsion
complies with the requirements stated in the Contract,
(c)
Manufacturers literature for joint sealant, including details of

the method and time required for mixing the different
components, and a certificate showing the manufacturer's
sealant complies with the requirements stated in the Contract
and including results of tests as appropriate for:
- Rheological properties
- Plastic deformation
- Adhesion and tensile modulus
- Application life
16.35
2006 Edition
- Adhesion in peel
- Loss of mass after heat ageing
- Staining
- Transverse butt joint movement range
- Extension
- Flow
- Penetration
- Degradation,
(d)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for bearing strip for

sliding joints showing the manufacturer's name, the date and
place of manufacture and showing that the strips comply with
the requirements stated in the Contract and including results of
tests for:
- Vertical load
- Coefficient of friction,
(e)
Manufacturers literature for waterstops, including details of

intersections, reducers and junctions, and a certificate showing
the manufacturer's name, the date and place of manufacture
and showing that the waterstops comply with the requirements
stated in the Contract and including results of tests for:
- Density
- Hardness
- Tensile strength
- Elongation at break point
- Water absorption
- Softness number of PVC waterstops, and
(f)
Particulars of primers and caulking material for joint sealant

and of bond breaker tape.
(2)
the Site.
16.82

(a)
Joint filler,
(b)
Bond breaker tape,
(c)
Bearing strip for sliding joints, and
(d)
Waterstops, including intersections, reducers and junctions.
16.36
2006 Edition
Storage of materials
for joints
16.83
(1)
Bitumen emulsion, joint sealant and primer for joint sealant shall be
stored in sealed containers marked to identify the contents and protected
from exposure to conditions which may affect the material. The materials
shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and
shall not be used after the recommended shelf life has been exceeded.
(2)
Joint filler, bond breaker tape and waterstops shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations in a dry weatherproof
store with a raised floor. Absorbent joint filler shall be stored in sealed
plastic bags and shall not be exposed to moisture or air.
(3)
Bearing strip for sliding joints supplied in rolls of 5 m length or less
shall be unrolled immediately after delivery and shall be stored flat at full
length on an even surface. Bearing strip supplied in rolls of more than 5 m
length may be left in the original packing. Bearing strip shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and shall be
protected from mechanical damage and creasing. The two layers of strip
shall be kept free from deleterious material.
FORMING JOINTS
Forming joints
16.84
(1)
Materials for joints shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations or as otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2)
fixed in position to the existing concrete surface before concreting. There
shall be no gaps between the joint filler and formation.
(3)
Waterstops shall be securely fixed in position to formwork in such a
manner that compaction of the concrete will not be affected. In-situ joints
in waterstops shall be made using methods and equipment recommended by
the manufacturer. Exposed waterstops shall be protected from exposure to
conditions that may affect the waterstop and shall be kept free from rust,
hydrocarbons and other deleterious material.
(4)
Joints shall be formed in straight lines perpendicular to the surface of
the concrete unless otherwise stated in Contract.
Forming grooves
16.85
(1)
Grooves for joint sealant shall be straight and shall be perpendicular
to the surface of the concrete. The bottom of the groove shall be flat and
shall be parallel to the surface of the concrete.
(2)
Grooves shall be formed by using timber or other approved formers
and shall not be formed by cutting back or raking out the joint filler. The
grooves shall be located over the joint filler such that the upper surface of
the joint filler is entirely contained in the groove.
Protection of grooves
16.86
Before permanent sealing, grooves for joint sealant shall be protected from
contamination by a temporary sealing strip or cover or by other methods
16.37
2006 Edition
Sealing joints
16.87
(1)
The permanent sealing of joints shall be carried out at least 7 days
after concreting unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(2)
Immediately before permanent sealing, timber formers, temporary
seals, dirt and loose material shall be removed from the groove and the
sides of the groove shall be cleaned and roughened by water jetting, sand
blasting or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Caulking material shall be firmly packed in the bottom of the groove
if the joint sealant is not required to extend to the bottom of the groove.
(4)
Bond breaker tape shall be fixed continuously and evenly along the
bottom of the groove for the full width and length of the groove.
(5)
Concrete surfaces within 75 mm of the edges of the joint shall be
masked with tape before the primer is applied and until the sealing of the
joint is complete.
(6)
Primer for the joint sealant shall be applied to the sides of the groove
in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
(7)
Joint sealant shall be applied between the minimum and maximum
drying times of the primer recommended by the manufacturer. The
components of the sealant shall be thoroughly mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations using a power operated paddle mixer for
sufficient time to produce a homogeneous mass without entrapped air.
The sealant shall be dispensed into the groove as soon as practicable after
mixing and within the time recommended by the manufacturer.
(8)
The groove shall be clean and dry at the time of applying the primer
and joint sealant.
(9)
Excess joint sealant shall be removed by using a purpose made
finishing tool such that the finished surface of the sealant is between 4 mm
and 6 mm below the face of the concrete.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: joints
16.88
(1)
The best-fit straight line of straight joints shall be within 25 mm of
the specified line. The line of straight joints shall be within 10 mm of the
best-fit straight line.
(2)
The best-fit curved line of curved joints shall be as agreed by the
Engineer and shall be within 25 mm of the specified line. The line of
curved joints shall be within 10 mm of the best-fit curved line.
(3)
Joints shall be continuous across intersections of joints to within 5
mm of the best fit straight lines or best fit curved lines of each joint.
(4)
The depth of grooves for joint sealant shall be within 3 mm of the
specified depth.
16.38
2006 Edition

Batch: joint filler, joint 16.89
sealant, waterstops
A batch of joint filler, joint sealant or waterstop is any quantity of joint

filler, joint sealant or waterstop of the same type, manufactured by the
same manufacturer, covered by the same certificates and delivered to the
Site at any one time.
16.90
(1)
One sample of each type of joint filler, joint sealant or waterstop
shall be provided at the same time as particulars of the material are
submitted to the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer,
one sample of each type of material shall be provided from each batch of
the material delivered to the Site. Unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer, one sample of mixed joint sealant shall be provided on each day
that joints are sealed.
Samples: joint filler,

joint sealant,
waterstops
(2)
The size of each sample of joint filler shall be sufficient to permit all
tests stated in Appendix 16.3 to be carried out.
(3)
Samples of unmixed joint sealant and primers for joint sealant shall
be taken from sealed containers delivered to the Site. Samples of mixed
joint sealant shall be taken immediately before the sealant is applied to the
joint. The method of sampling shall be as stated in BS 2499, Appendix A.
The size of each sample shall be as follows:
(4)
Testing: joint filler,
joint sealant,
waterstops
16.91
(a)
Unmixed joint sealant
: 1 kg
(b)
Mixed joint sealant
: 1.5 kg
(c)
Primer for joint sealant
: 1 L.
The size of each sample of waterstop shall be 1 m.
(1)
If required by the Engineer, samples of joint filler shall be tested to
determine the disintegration and shrinkage, the recovery value and
reduction in mass and the extrusion. The method of testing shall be in
(2)
If required by the Engineer, samples of joint sealant shall be tested to
determine the properties stated in Table 16.13. The method of testing shall
(3)
If required by the Engineer, samples of waterstop shall be tested to
determine the properties stated in Table 16.14. The method of testing shall
16.39
2006 Edition
Table 16.13: Testing joint sealant

Type of joint sealant
Properties to be tested
Method of testing
Polysulphide-based sealant
Polyurethane-based sealant
Rheological properties
Plastic deformation
Adhesion and tensile modulus
Application life
Adhesion in peel
Loss of mass after heat ageing
Staining
BS 4254
Hot-applied bitumen
rubber sealant
Extension
Flow
Penetration
Degradation
BS 2499
Table 16.14: Testing waterstops

Method of testing
Property
Rubber waterstops
PVC waterstops
Density
BS 903: Part A1
ISO 1183
Hardness
BS 903: Part A26
BS 2782: Part 3,
Method 365D
Tensile strength
BS 903: Part A2 and

BS 903: Part A5
BS 2782: Part 3,
Methods 320A to 320F
Elongation at
break point
BS 903: Part A2 and

BS 903: Part A5
BS 2782: Part 3,
Methods 320A to 320F
Water absorption
BS 903: Part A18
BS 2782: Part 4,
Methods 430A to 430D
Softness number
BS 2782: Part 3,
Method 365A
joint filler
16.92
The results of tests on joint filler shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
None of the three specimens in the weathering test shall show

any sign of disintegration or shrinkage.
(b)
Each of the four specimens in the compression and recovery

test shall have a recovery value of at least 70%, and the
reduction in mass of each of the two new specimens shall not
exceed 1%.
(c) The extrusion of the free edge of the specimen shall not exceed
6 mm as determined by the extrusion test.
16.40
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 16.1
DETERMINATION OF THE EFFICIENCY INDEX OF
CURING COMPOUNDS
Scope
16.1.1
This method covers the determination of the efficiency index of membrane

forming curing compounds for concrete.
Materials
16.1.2
The following materials are required:
Table 16.1.1:
BS test sieve
(a)
Portland cement complying with BS EN 197-1, specially selected for

testing admixtures and identified as CAA/BS 5075: Part 1
Reference Portland Cement. The cement shall be stored in an
airtight container.
(b)
Oven-dry natural sand with a rounded particle shape complying with

BS 882 and with the grading stated in Table 16.1.1.
(c)
Petroleum jelly, mineral oil or a propriety release agent.
Grading of sand
1.18 mm
100
600 m
90 - 100
300 m
12 - 40
150 m
0-6
Apparatus
16.1.3

(a)
(b)
Moulds constructed of corrosion resistant metal. The moulds

shall be watertight, tapered and constructed so as to prevent
distortion and shall have the following dimensions:
-
Internal size (top):
:150 mm (0mm to +5 mm)

x 300 mm (0mm to +5 mm)
Internal size (bottom)
: 145 mm (0mm to +5 mm)

x 295 mm (0mm to +5 mm)
Internal depth
: 50 mm 2 mm
Side and end slope
: 5% 1%
Top flange width
: at least 12 mm.
A balance readable and accurate to 0.1 g.
16.41
2006 Edition
Procedure:
preparation of
specimens
16.1.4
(c)
A cabinet complying with BS 2648 capable of storing specimens at

a temperature of 38C 1C and at a relative humidity of 35%
5%. The cabinet shall have three perforated or mesh shelves each
capable of supporting two specimens during test so as to ensure a
clear space of at least 40 mm on all sides of individual specimens.
The cabinet shall be equipped to circulate air over the specimens at
an approximate rate of 0.5 m/s.
(d)
Spray equipment, such as the Wagner model W320 electric spray

gun, designed to permit the curing compound to be aspirated and
applied evenly to the specimen.
(e)
An electrically driven mixer complying with Clause 8.3 of BS4551

and having a nominal capacity of 12 kg.
(f)
A vibrating table or a vibrating hammer with a 40 mm square foot

or a compacting bar made of non-absorbent material,
approximately 200 mm long and with a 40 mm square foot.
(g)
A metal screed, 148 mm long, of L-shaped Section 50 mm x 25

mm with the shorter side having a sharpened leading edge. The
screed shall be supported across the top of the mould by a 200 mm
long rigid member that can slide on the flanges of the mould while
holding the screed horizontal. The height of the screed shall be
adjustable to give a uniformly flat surface finish to the mortar 7
mm 1 mm below the top of the mould.
(h)
A metal tray with sides at least 3 mm high and an area equal to the
surface area of the specimen.
(i)
A hydrometer complying with BS 718.
(j)
A float, 250 mm x 140 mm 5 mm.
(k)
A medium soft 50 mm paint brush.
The procedure for preparation of the specimens shall be as follows:

(a)
Three pairs of specimens shall be prepared, each pair comprising one

test specimen and one control specimen.
(b)
Mixing shall be carried out in a room having a temperature of 27C

3C. The materials shall be brought to room temperature before
mixing. A mortar mix shall be prepared comprising one part by
mass of cement, three parts by mass of sand and 0.44 parts by mass
of water.
(c)
The sand and cement shall be placed in the mixer and mixed for 1
minute. The water shall be added and mixing continued for a
further 4 minutes.
(d)
The two moulds shall be cleaned, lightly coated with the petroleum
jelly, mineral oil or release agent and weighed to the nearest 0.1 g
(m1).
(e)
The specimens shall be prepared 20 minutes after completion of

mixing and shall be cast in pairs.
16.42
2006 Edition
Procedure:
determination of
efficiency index
16.1.5
(f)
A layer of mortar approximately 25 mm deep shall be placed in each

mould and tamped 50 times with the compacting bar. A second
layer of mortar, sufficient to overfill the moulds slightly, shall be
placed in each mould and tamped 50 times with the compacting bar.
Indentations formed by tamping shall be filled and the surface shall
be levelled by vigorous compaction by manual methods.
Alternatively, each layer shall be compacted by using the vibrating
table or vibrating hammer and levelled using the float.
(g)
A uniform surface, free from undulations and surface defects, shall

be produced using the minimum number of passes of the metal
screed working along the length of the mould in both directions.
The finished surface shall be 7 mm 1 mm below the top of the
mould.
(h)
The surface shall be brushed lightly with the paint-brush to give an

even texture.
(i)
The moulds and specimens shall each be weighed to the nearest 0.1
g (m2) immediately before the curing compound is applied.
The procedure for determination of the efficiency index shall be as follows:

(a)
A sample of the curing compound shall be taken by the method for

sampling admixtures in accordance with BS 5075: Part 1, Appendix A.
(b)
The sample shall be agitated thoroughly and the relative density

determined at room temperature with the hydrometer. The mass
required to give the coverage rate stated in Clause 16.1.5(c) shall be
calculated from the relative density. The mass of the curing
compound applied shall be within 0.5 g of that required to give the
specified coverage rate.
(c)
The curing compound shall be applied at the coverage rate

recommended by the manufacturer, or at a rate of 0.2 L/m2 0.01
L/m2 if no rate is recommended.
(d)
The curing compound shall be applied to the test specimen one hour
after the specimen has been prepared, using the spray equipment or
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
curing compound shall be shaken well before and during application.
The spray gun shall be held so that the nozzle is as near vertical as
possible and at a height that will result in uniform application and
minimum overspray. The specimen shall be coated uniformly by
applying several layers over the whole surface until the specified
coverage is reached, checked by repeated weighing. Over spray
shall be wiped from the exposed faces and edges of the mould. The
whole application procedure shall be completed in not more than 2
minutes.
(e)
The test specimen and the control specimen shall each be weighed to
the nearest gram (m3) and placed immediately on the lowest shelf of
the cabinet. After the second pair of specimens has been prepared
and weighed, the first pair shall be moved up one shelf and the
second pair placed on the lowest shelf. After the third pair of
specimens has been prepared and weighed, the first two pairs shall
be moved up one shelf and the third pair placed on the lowest shelf.
16.43
2006 Edition
Calculation
16.1.6
(f)
The total time for making the specimens, coating the test specimen
and placing the pair in the cabinet shall not exceed 2 hours.
(g)
The specimens shall be kept in the cabinet for 72 hours 15 minutes

after application of the curing compound. Each specimen shall be
weighed to the nearest 0.1 g at 24 hours 15 minutes and 48 hours
15 minutes. Each specimen shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g
(m4 and m5) at 72 hours 15 minutes.
(h)
The metal tray shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g (m6) and coated
with the same quantity 0.5 g of curing compound used on the test
specimen. The coated tray shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g (m
7 ) and placed in the cabinet for 72 hours 15 minutes after
application of the curing compound. The tray shall be removed
from the cabinet and weighed to the nearest 0.1 g (m8).
(1)
The proportion of solvent lost (V) by the curing compound during
the test period shall be calculated from the equation:
V =
( m7 - m8)
( m7 - m6)
where:
- m6 is the mass of the tray (g)
- m7 is the mass of the tray after coating (g)
- m8 is the mass of the tray after 72 hours in the cabinet (g)
(2)
The loss of water from the test specimen (Wt) and the loss of water
from the control specimen (W c ) shall be calculated for each pair of
specimens from the equation:
Wt =
( m3 - m4 ) - V( m3 - m2)
( m2 - m1 )
Wc =
( m2 - m5)
x 100%
( m2 - m1)
x 100%
where:
- m1 is the mass of the mould (g)
- m2 is the mass of the mould and test or control specimen as
appropriate (g)
- m3 is the mass of the mould and test specimen after coating
(g)
- m4 is the mass of the mould and test specimen after 72
hours in the cabinet (g)
16.44
2006 Edition
- m5 is the mass of the mould and control specimen after 72

hours in the cabinet (g)
(3)
The efficiently index (E') of the curing compound shall be calculated
for each test specimen from the equation:
E' =
( Wc - Wt )
Wc
x 100%
The efficiency index (E) of the curing compound shall be calculated as the
average of E' for the three test specimens.
16.1.7

(a)
Details of the sample of curing compound including identification,

source, size, date received and age at test.
(b)
The method of compacting the mortar.
(c)
The method of applying the curing compound and the type of spray
gun used.
(d)
The rate of application of the curing compound to the nearest 0.01

2
L/m .
(e)
The duration of the test.
(f)
The efficiency index of the curing compound to the nearest 0.1%.
(g)
16.45
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 16.2
DETERMINATION
OF
THE
DEFLECTION,
RECOVERY AND RESISTANCE TO CRACKING OF
PRECAST UNITS
Scope
16.2.1
This method covers the determination of the deflection and recovery of

precast units, including prestressed units, and the resistance to cracking of
prestressed units by means of a load test.
Equipment
16.2.2
Procedure
16.2.3
16.2.4
(a)
Rigid supports.
(b)
Test loads.
(c)

2% of the specified test load.
(d)
Equipment for measuring the deflection and recovery, readable and

accurate to 0.5 mm.

(a)
The precast unit shall be supported at the specified points of support.
(b)
The upward deflection at mid-span due to the prestressing force in a

prestressed unit and the deflection at mid-span due to the self-weight
of a non-prestressed unit shall be measured.
(c)
The specified test load shall be applied at the specified loading

points in not less than ten approximately equal increments.
(d)
The specified test load shall be maintained for 5 minutes and

removed in not less than five approximately equal decrements.
(e)
The deflection at mid-span shall be measured for each load

increment and each load decrement and 5 minutes after the loads
have been removed.
(f)
Steps (c) to (e) shall be repeated.
(g)
Load-deflection graphs shall be plotted.

(a)
Details of the precast unit, including place of manufacture.
(b)
The age of the concrete in the precast unit at the time of the test.
(c)
The loads applied to the nearest 2% of the specified test load.

(d)
(e)
The deflections measured to the nearest 0.5 mm.
The load-deflection graphs.
16.46
2006 Edition
(f)
(g)
Details of any cracks.

16.47
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 16.3
DETERMINATION OF THE RECOVERY VALUE AND
REDUCTION IN MASS, AND THE EXTRUSION OF
JOINT FILLER
Scope
Apparatus
Procedure:
compression and
recovery test
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
This method covers the determination of the recovery value and reduction
in mass of joint filler by the compression and recovery test, and the
extrusion of joint filler by the extrusion test.
(a)
Equipment for measuring the plan dimensions of the joint filler,

accurate to 0.5 mm.
(b)
Equipment for measuring the thickness of the joint filler, accurate to

0.1 mm.
(c)
A balance, accurate to 0.1% of the specimen mass.
(d)
A compression test machine complying with BS 1610 with auxiliary

platens 100 mm x 100 mm and a minimum thickness of 13 mm.
(e)
An extrusion mould open on one side only and rigidly fixed to a

base plate. The mould shall be 100 mm x 100 mm (+0.5 mm, -0
mm) internally and shall be of sufficient depth to test the specimen.
The mould shall be provided with a close fitting pressure plate that
shall fit without binding and with a horizontal measuring dial gauge
or device readable and accurate to 0.1 mm.
The procedure for determination of the recovery value and reduction in

mass by the compression and recovery test shall be as follows:
(a)
Four specimens from the sample shall be prepared, each 100 mm x

100 mm ( 2.5 mm).
(b)
The thickness (t1) of the four specimens shall be measured to the

nearest 0.1 mm, and two specimens shall be weighed to within 0.1%
of their mass (m1).
(c)
Each specimen shall be subjected to three applications of load in the

compression test machine at 24-hour intervals. During each
application of load the specimen shall be compressed to 50% of its
original thickness at a rate of strain of 1.3 mm per minute. The
load required to achieve the compression shall be at least 0.07 N/mm
2 and shall not exceed 10 N/mm2. The load shall be released
immediately the specified amount of compression is reached.
(d)
After the third application of load, a recovery period of 30 minutes

shall be allowed and the thickness (t2) of each specimen shall be
measured to the nearest 0.1 mm.
(e)
The two previously weighed specimens shall be re-weighed to

within 0.1% of their mass (m2).
16.48
2006 Edition
Procedure: extrusion
test
Calculation
16.3.4
16.3.5
The procedure for determination of the extrusion by the extrusion test shall
be as follows:
(a)
One 100 mm x 100 mm ( 0.5 mm) specimen shall be prepared.
(b)
The thickness of the specimen shall be measured to the nearest 0.1

mm.
(c)
The specimen shall be placed in the extrusion mould and subjected

to one application of load as stated in Clause 16.3.3(c). The
extrusion at the open side of the mould shall be measured to the
nearest 0.1 mm with the gauge or device when the specimen is
compressed to 50% of the original thickness and before the load is
released.
(1)
The recovery value (R) of each specimen shall be calculated from
the equation:
R = t2/t1 x 100 %
where:
- t1 is the original thickness of the specimen (mm)
- t2 is the thickness of the specimen after the third application
of load (mm)
(2)
The reduction in mass (M) of each specimen shall be calculated
from the equation:
M = (m1 - m2)/m1 x 100 %
where:
- m1 is the original mass of the specimen (g)
- m2 is the mass of the specimen after the third application of
load (g)
16.3.6

(a)
Type and source of filler.
(b)
The recovery values to the nearest 0.5%.
(c)
The reductions in mass to the nearest 0.1%.
(d)
The extrusion to the nearest 0.1 mm.
(e)
That the test methods used were in accordance with this

Specification.
16.49
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 17
PRESTRESSING
17.1
2006 Edition
17.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 17
PRESTRESSING
GENERAL
Materials for grout
17.01
Materials for grout for prestressing systems shall comply with Section 16
except as stated in this Section.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Duct
17.02
Duct is a void formed in the concrete to accommodate a prestressing

tendon.
Prestressing
components
17.03
Prestressing components are the components used in a prestressing system,

including anchorages, grips, tendon deflectors, couplers, wedges, swages,
nuts and other devices used to grip the prestressing tendon.
Prestressing tendon
17.04
Prestressing tendon is:

(a)
An individual steel wire, wire strand or alloy steel bar in a

duct, or
(b)
An individual steel wire, wire strand or alloy steel bar not in a

duct, or
(c)
A group of steel wires or wire strands in a duct
used in a prestressing system.

Sheath
17.05
Sheath is a tube or lining which is used to form a duct and which is left in
place.
17.3
2006 Edition
MATERIALS
Prestressing tendons
17.06
(1)
Prestressing tendons shall comply with the following:

High tensile steel wire and
strand for the prestressing
of concrete
: BS 5896
Hot rolled and processed high

tensile alloy steel bars for
the prestressing of concrete
: BS 4486.
(2)
Steel wire and wire strand shall be in coils of sufficiently large
diameter to ensure that the steel wire and wire strand will pay off straight.
(3)
Alloy steel bars shall be straight.
(4)
Grease for unbonded strand shall contain a corrosion inhibitor.

Amd 1/2010
Prestressing
components
17.07
(1)
Prestressing components shall be of a proprietary type approved by
the Engineer.
(2)
Prestressing anchorages shall comply with BS 4447 and shall allow
a minimum of 25 mm cover to cropped ends of prestressing tendons.
Sheath and Deviator

Pipes
17.08
(1)
Sheaths shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and
shall be steel or other material approved by the Engineer. Sheaths shall
be rigid and strong enough to retain their shape during fixing and
concreting and to withstand forces from the prestressing tendons without
damage.
(2)
The design of ducts shall allow for grout to be injected from either
end. There shall be no sudden changes in the diameter of the duct.
(3) For the sheath made of steel, the sheath shall be hot-dip galvanized
to BS EN ISO 1461 for corrosion protection purpose.
(4)
For the sheath made of material other than steel, the sheath shall
be non-metallic type.
(5)
Sheaths for external prestressing shall be continuous between
anchorages and shall be airtight and watertight under the working
conditions.
(6)
Results of tests on duct friction during tendon stressing shall be
supplied to the Engineer. It shall be demonstrated that at least 2 mm
thickness of sheath will remain on completion of the stressing operation.
(7)
If the deviator pipes for external prestressing sheaths is made of
steel, the deviator pipes shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
Additional protection in the form of Paint System E to Clause 18.63
shall be applied to all surfaces of the deviator pipes.
Amd 1/2010
Grout vents and taps
17.09
Taps for grout vents in ducts shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
17.4
2006 Edition
Engineer and shall allow closure of the vents without loss of pressure in
the duct. Vents to be used as grout entry points shall be threaded or fitted
with screw connectors or other similar devices for connection to grout
pumps. All vents and vent connections shall have an internal diameter
no less than 25 mm and shall be clearly identified by labeling. Amd
1/2010
Grout for prestressing

systems
17.10
(1)
Grout for prestressing systems shall consist of ordinary Portland
cement and water. Sand, PFA and admixtures shall not be used unless
(2)
Grout shall have a minimum crushing strength of 25 MPa at 7 days.
(3)
The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 2% in the first 3
hours and shall not exceed 4% in total. The water shall be reabsorbed by
the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
(4)
Free expansion of grout shall not exceed 10% at the ambient
temperature.
(5)
The maximum total chloride content of grout, expressed as a
percentage relationship between the chloride ion and the cementitious
content by mass in the grout, shall not exceed 0.1%.
(6)
The maximum water/cement ratio of the grout shall be 0.40.
(7)
Where admixture is permitted by the Engineer, grout shall be
non-shrink mix and comply with the following requirements:
(a) The free expansion of the grout shall be within a range from
0% to +5%.
(b) Admixtures shall not contain chlorides, thiocyanides, nitrates,
formats, sulphates or other ingredients which may cause the
grout to promote corrosion of the prestressing steel by rusting,
pitting or stress corrosion.
(c) The admixtures shall not segregate and shall be uniform in
colour.
(d) Admixtures shall comply with BS EN 934 Part 2 or Part 4 but
full account shall be taken of their effects on the finished
product.
(e) The dosage shall be within the range recommended by the
supplier and shall not exceed 5% of the weight of the cement.
Amd 1/2010
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
17.11
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed prestressing systems shall

17.5
2006 Edition
prestressing systems

(a)
Details of the prestressing system, including prestressing

tendons, prestressing components, sheaths and tensioning
apparatus,
(b)
Sequence of prestressing and ends of prestressing tendons

from which prestress will be applied if not stated in the
Contract,
(c)
Calculated values of:

- Each type of loss of prestress
- Prestressing tendon forces
- Extensions of prestressing tendons and details of the
method of measuring the extensions,
(d)
A certificate showing that the tensioning apparatus has been

tested and calibrated by an agent approved by the Engineer
within a period of two years before the apparatus is to be used,
(e)
Any alterations to the reinforcement or additional

reinforcement required to allow for primary bursting effects,
(f)
Details of corrosion protection required for the prestressing

system, including type of grease for unbonded strand and the
type of corrosion inhibitor to be adopted, and
Amd 1/2010
(g) Details of the format of tensioning schedules and of reports of

tensioning operations, grouting operations and testing of duct
friction.
(2)
Calculations for loss of prestress due to creep shall be based on the
information stated in the Contract.
(3)
least 8 weeks before the approval is required.
17.6
2006 Edition
Particulars of
prestressing tendons
17.12
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed prestressing tendons shall
-
A certificate from the manufacturer showing the manufacturer's

prestressing tendons comply with the requirements stated in the
Contract and including details of:
Cast analysis
Diameter, cross-sectional area and unit mass
Results of tests for mechanical properties, including the
characteristic breaking load, characteristic 0.1% proof load,
elongation at maximum load, relaxation and modulus of
elasticity,
Results of tests for ductility of prestressing wires.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for each batch of
prestressing tendons delivered to the Site and at least 28 days before
installation of the prestressing tendons starts.
Particulars of grout
mix and grouting
procedure
17.13
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed grout mix and grouting
procedure for prestressing systems shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Water: cement ratio by mass,
(b)
Details of mixing and grouting equipment,
(c)
Method of quality control during grout injection, and
(d) Details of grouting trials.

(2)
before trial mixes for grout are made.
17.14
Samples of the following proposed items shall be submitted to the

Engineer at the same time as particulars of the prestressing systems are
submitted:
(a)
Prestressing tendons,
(b)
Prestressing components,
(c)
Sheaths, and
(d)
Grout vents and taps.
17.7
2006 Edition
TRIALS
Trial mixes for grout
17.15
(1)
A trial mix for grout for prestressing systems shall be made to
demonstrate that the proposed materials, grout mix and methods of
production will produce grout which complies with the specified
requirements.
(2)
The trial mixes shall be completed at least 35 days before the
grout mix is used in the permanent works.
Amd 1/2010
(3)
shorter period as may be agreed by the Engineer, before making trial mixes.
(4)
Trial mixes shall be made using the materials, grout mix and
methods of production submitted to the Engineer.
Samples: trial mixes

for grout
17.16
(1)
One sample of grout shall be provided from the trial mix to
determine the amount of bleeding and free expansion of the grout. The
method of sampling shall be as stated in Clause 17.59(2).
(2)
One sample of grout shall be provided from the trial mix to
determine the crushing strength of the grout. The method of sampling
shall be as stated in Clause 17.62(2).
Testing: trial mixes for

grout
17.17
(1)
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 17.16(1) shall be
tested to determine the amount of bleeding and free expansion. The
method of testing shall be as stated in Clause 17.60(2).
(2)
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 17.16(2) shall be
tested to determine the crushing strength. The method of testing shall be
mixes for grout
17.18
(1)
If the result of any test for amount of bleeding, free expansion or
crushing strength of trial mixes for grout does not comply with the
specified requirements for the property, particulars of proposed changes to
the materials, grout mix or methods of production shall be submitted to the
Engineer. Further trial mixes shall be made until the result of every test
complies with the specified requirements for the property.
(2)
If grouting trials are carried out using the non-complying trial mix,
further grouting trials shall be carried out unless in the opinion of the
Engineer the changes to the materials, grout mix or methods of production
will not affect the results of the previous grouting trials.
17.8
2006 Edition
Grouting trials
17.19
(1)
Grouting trials for grout for prestressing systems shall be carried
out to demonstrate that the proposed materials, grout mix, methods of
production and methods of construction will produce a grouted duct which
complies with the specified requirements. The number and details of
grouting trials shall be as stated in the Contract.
(2)
Grouting trials shall be completed at least 21 days before
installation of the prestressing components in the permanent works.
Amd 1/2010
(3)
period agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out grouting trials.
(4)
Grouting trials shall be carried out using the materials, grout mix,
Engineer.
(5)
The profile of ducts and the method of support for grouting trials
shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Vents shall be provided in ducts and
tendons shall be pulled tight.
(6)
Grouting trials that do not form part of the permanent work shall be
removed.
(7)
The grouting trial shall incorporate all relevant parts and
components as if these will be used in the actual prestressing system.
Amd 1/2010
Testing: grouting trials
17.20
Three sections selected by the Engineer shall be cut from the grouted duct
and inspected not less than 2 hours after the grout used in the grouting trial
has achieved its final set. Each of the three cut sections shall be 300 mm
long in length. The external sheath from the cut sections shall be
removed for inspection.
Amd 1/2010
grouting trials
17.21
The sections of grouted duct cut in grouting trials shall be completely

filled, and the prestressing tendon shall be completely surrounded with
grout.
Non-compliance:
grouting trials
17.22
If the result of any test on sections of grouted duct cut in grouting trials
does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, or if in the
opinion of the Engineer any aspect of the grouting procedure as
demonstrated by the grouting trial is unsatisfactory, particulars of proposed
changes to the materials, grout mix, methods of production or methods of
construction shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further grouting trials
shall be carried out until the result of every test on sections of grouted duct
complies with the specified requirements for the test and until in the
opinion of the Engineer every aspect of the grouting procedure is
satisfactory. Further trial mixes for grout shall be made unless in the
opinion of the Engineer non-compliance of the grouting trial was not due
to the grout mix.
Approved grout mix
17.23
A grout mix that complies with the specified requirements for trial mixes
for grout and for grouting trials shall become an approved grout mix.
Commencement of
grouting
17.24
Grouting shall not proceed until the grout mix has been approved by the
Engineer.
17.9
2006 Edition
and methods of
construction
17.25
The materials, grout mix, methods of production or methods of

construction used to produce an approved grout mix shall not be changed,

Handling of
17.26
Prestressing tendons shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock

loading or dropping from a height.
Handling of
prestressing
components
17.27
Prestressing components shall be handled in accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendations.

17.28
(1)
Each prestressing tendon shall be tagged with a number to identify
the coil or bundle number of the prestressing tendon used.
(2)
Prestressing tendons and sheaths shall be stored in a dry and
weatherproof store and in a manner that will not result in damage or
deformation to the materials or in contamination of the materials.
(3)
Different types and sizes of prestressing tendons, prestressing
components and sheaths shall be stored separately.
(4)
Prestressing tendons, prestressing components and sheaths shall not
be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces that form part of the
permanent work.
(5)
Prestressing tendons, prestressing components and sheaths shall be
protected from exposure to conditions that may affect the material.
SURFACE CONDITION OF
PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS
Surface condition of
materials for
17.29
MATERIALS
FOR
(1)
clean at the time of installation and shall be free of loose mill scale, loose
rust, pitting, grease or any substance which in the opinion of the Engineer
is likely to reduce the bond or affect the prestressing tendons, prestressing
components, sheaths, concrete or grout chemically. The prestressing
tendons, prestressing components and sheaths shall be maintained in this
condition until concrete or grout is placed around them.
(2)
If the surface condition of the prestressing tendons, prestressing
components or sheaths deteriorates such that it does not comply with the
requirements stated in Clause 17.29(1), the prestressing tendons,
prestressing components or sheaths shall be cleaned or dealt with by other
17.10
2006 Edition
INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

Installation of
17.30
(1)
Prestressing operations shall be carried out in such a manner that
persons and property are not endangered by any sudden release of the
energy stored in a stressed prestressing tendon.
(2)
accurately located and maintained in the correct position during all
operations. Supports shall be placed at a maximum spacing of 600 mm.
Installation of
17.31
(1)
Prestressing tendons from each batch shall not be installed until
testing of the batch has been completed.
(2)
Steel wires, wire strands and alloy steel bars that will be tensioned
in one operation shall be taken from the same batch.
(3)
Individual steel wires and wire strands in the same duct shall not be
twisted together. Strands that have become unravelled shall not be used.
(4)
Unless permitted by the Engineer, alloy steel bars that have become
bent shall not be straightened. Small adjustments for straightness may be
made provided that the straightening is carried out at the ambient
temperature by non-mechanical methods and provided that no force is
applied on the threaded portion. Bars that have become bent in the
threaded portion shall not be used.
(5)
Prestressing tendons which have been damaged mechanically or by
work-hardening or heating shall not be used. After manufacture,
prestressing tendons shall not be welded and heat treatment,
work-hardening, galvanizing and other metallic coatings shall not be
applied.
Cutting prestressing
tendons
17.32
Prestressing tendons shall be cut using either a high-speed abrasive cutting

wheel or a friction saw or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
Flame cutting shall not be used.
Joints in prestressing
tendons
17.33
Joints in prestressing tendons shall be made using couplers fixed in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Use of prestressing
components
17.34
Prestressing components shall be used in accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendations.
Installation of sheaths
17.35
At the time of tensioning, sheaths shall be free of dents or other

irregularities that may affect tensioning.
Joints in sheaths
17.36
Joints in sheaths shall be securely taped to prevent penetration of the duct

by concrete or grout. Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be staggered by at
least 300 mm. Use of joints shall be kept to a minimum where
practicable. Joints shall be formed using sleeve connectors and
adequately sealed against ingress of any material.
Amd 1/2010
Installation of grout
vents and taps
17.37
(1)
Grout vents and taps shall be provided at the following positions:

(a) All crests of the prestressing tendon profile and 400 mm on
each side of each crest,
Amd 1/2010
17.11
2006 Edition
(b)
All low points of the prestressing tendon profile,
(c)
All anchorages, and
(d)
Intervals not exceeding 15 m.
(e)
Beyond each intermediate crest in the direction of grout flow

at the point where the duct is one half diameter lower than the
crest (but not further than 1 m), and elsewhere as required by
the Engineer.
(2)
Vents shall not be placed at positions where they will be blocked by
the prestressing tendons after tensioning.
(3) Vents at high points shall extend to a minimum of 500 mm above
the highest point on the duct profile.
TENSIONING OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS

Tensioning of
17.38
(1)
Apparatus for tensioning of prestressing tendons shall be of a type
such that a controlled total force is imposed gradually and such that
excessive secondary stresses are not induced in the prestressing tendons
and prestressing components or in the structure or element to which
prestress is being applied.
(2)
Prestressing tendons shall be securely attached to jacks and
tensioning apparatus.
(3)
Steel wires or wire strands that are tensioned simultaneously shall
be approximately the same length between anchorage points.
(4)
The force in the prestressing tendons during tensioning shall be
measured by direct reading load cells or obtained indirectly from pressure
gauges fitted in the hydraulic system. Load measuring devices shall be
accurate to within 2%.
(5)
The extension of prestressing tendons and any movement of
prestressing tendons in the gripping devices shall be measured during
tensioning. The elongation of prestressing tendons shall be measured to
an accuracy of 2% or 2 mm, whichever is the more accurate.
(6)
Tensioning apparatus and load measuring devices shall be calibrated
before tensioning starts and at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
The calibration certificate shall be obtained from an approved testing
laboratory once every 6 months.
Amd 1/2010
(7)
The force in the prestressing tendons shall not be transferred to the
concrete until the concrete has reached the specified transfer strength.
(8)
The capacity of pressure gauges, when used together with the load
cell as a load indicator, shall be sufficient in capacity such that the
working pressure lies within the central half of the range of the gauge.
Amd 1/2010
17.12
2006 Edition
(9)
The time for transfer will be determined by the successful testing
of a batch of minimum 3 test cubes. If the initial batch of any
individual cube tested indicates that the concrete has not attained the
required strength, a further batch of cubes shall be tested at a later date.
This process shall be repeated until a batch of cubes successfully passes
the strength test.
Amd 1/2010
Pretensioning
17.39
(1)
The stress in prestressing tendons shall be fully maintained during
the period between pretensioning and transfer of stress. Transfer of stress
shall take place gradually to minimise shock or damage to the transmission
length and shall be carried out in conjunction with the release of any
hold-down and hold-up forces in tendon deflectors.
(2)
In the long-line method of pretensioning, locator plates shall be
distributed throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the steel wires or
wire strands are maintained in the correct positions during concreting.
Units that are made in line shall be free to slide in the direction of their
length to permit transfer of the prestressing force to the concrete along the
whole line.
(3)
Moulds used in the individual mould system of pretensioning shall
be sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the prestressing force
without excessive distortion.
(4)
Tendon deflectors in contact with pretensioned prestressing tendons
of single steel wire or wire strand shall have a radius of at least five times
the prestressing tendon diameter for steel wire and at least ten times the
prestressing tendon diameter for wire strand. The total angle of
deflection shall not exceed 15o. If a system is used such that friction
develops between prestressing tendons and tendon deflectors, the friction
force shall be determined by a test procedure agreed by the Engineer and
any necessary allowance shall be made.
(5)
The tendons shall be covered with sleeves of PVC or other
approved material where these materials are specified as debonded from
the concrete. Tape ends of the sleeves to the tendon shall prevent the
ingress of grout.
(6)
When the temperature of the pretensioning steel is below 10oC at
the time of tensioning, steel elongation computations shall allow for the
increase in temperature of the steel between the time of tensioning and
the time when the concrete takes its initial set.
(7)
The tendons shall be trimmed to flush with the face of the concrete
and apply the specified protection to their ends.
(8)
The precast prestressed members shall be indelibly marked to
show the specific information related to its manufacturer.
Amd
1/2010
Post-tensioning
17.40
(1)
A tensioning schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval at least 48 hours before each post-tensioning operation starts.
The schedule shall include the proposed sequence of tensioning the
prestressing tendons, the required prestressing loads and the calculated
extensions of the prestressing tendons.
(2)
Spacers used with post-tensioned steel wire or wire strand, which
are not tensioned simultaneously, shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that
17.13
2006 Edition
they will not be displaced during successive tensioning operations.

(3)
If both ends of the prestressing tendon are free to move, a
demonstration shall be carried out before post-tensioning starts to show
that all prestressing tendons are free to move in the ducts.
(4)
Post-tensioning shall be carried out in such a manner that the stress
in the prestressing tendons increases at a gradual and steady rate. The
sequence of tensioning prestressing tendons and the ends of prestressing
tendons from which prestress will be applied shall be as stated in the
Contract or as approved by the Engineer.
(5)
For each element of a structure being stressed, post-tensioning of
the prestressing tendons shall be carried out until the required prestress to
that element has been reached. Tensioning of each prestressing tendon
shall be carried out continuously until the required tendon loads or
extensions have been reached. If tensioning is stopped for more than 2
days, particulars of any proposals for remedial or other work shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and tensioning shall not
recommence until the approved work has been carried out.
(6)
Measurement of extensions shall not commence until any slack in
the prestressing tendon has been taken up. If the design permits, the
draw-in of prestressing tendons at the non-jacking end shall also be
measured. The tensioning shall be applied in increments of load and the
extensions shall be measured at each increment. The average measured
extension of the prestressing tendons shall be within 5% of the calculated
extension and the measured extension of individual prestressing tendons
shall be within 10% of the calculated extension.
(7)
If the tendon deflector in contact with a post-tensioned prestressing
tendon has a radius of less than 50 times the diameter of the prestressing
tendon or if the total angle of deflection exceeds 15, the loss of strength of
the prestressing tendon shall be determined by a test procedure agreed by
the Engineer and any necessary allowance shall be made.
(8)
Post-tensioned prestressing tendons shall be cut at a distance from
the anchorage of at least one diameter or 10 mm, whichever is greater.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the tendons shall not be cut
until at least 1 day after stressing, if the tendon is to be cut before grouting,
or alternatively, at least 3 days after grouting.
Protection of external
and anchorages
17.41
External prestressing tendons and anchorages shall be protected in their

permanent positions from mechanical damage or corrosion until the
permanent protection is applied.
17.14
2006 Edition
Records of tensioning
operations
17.42
Records of tensioning operations shall be kept by the Contractor on the

Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of
each tensioning operation. The report shall contain the following details:
(a)
Location of tensioning operations,
(b)
Coil, heat and bundle numbers of strand used,
(c)
Date and time of starting and completing tensioning

operations,
(d)
Weather conditions,
(e)
Technical personnel supervising or carrying out tensioning

operations,
(f)
Prestressing tendon reference numbers,
(g)
Tensioning apparatus identification,
(h)
Measured extensions,
(i)
Pressure gauge or load cell readings, and
(j)
Amount of draw-in.
INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

Inspection of
17.43

prestressing system before carrying out any work, including concreting
and grouting, which will make access to the prestressing system difficult.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter period
agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out such work.
GROUTING OF PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS

Grouting equipment
17.44
(1)
Grout for prestressing systems shall be mixed by a machine capable
of producing a homogeneous colloidal grout and of keeping the grout in
slow continuous agitation after mixing and until the grouting operation
starts.
(2)
Grouting equipment shall be capable of continuous operation with
little variation of pressure and shall include a system of recirculating the
grout when grouting is not in progress.
(3)
Grout pumps shall be fitted with a safety valve to prevent the
build-up of excessive pressure. The connection of the pump to the duct
shall be by a screw connector or other positive method. Baffles to the
pump shall be fitted with 1.18 mm sieve strainers. Suction circuits shall
be airtight.
(4)
Grouting equipment shall be thoroughly washed through with clean
water after every series of grouting operations and at the end of use each
day.
(5)
Grout pumps shall be fitted with a safety valve to prevent pressure
from rising above 2 MPa at any point within the grouting system
17.15
2006 Edition
including the sheaths.
Amd 1/2010
Grouting effectiveness
17.45
Grouting of prestressing tendons shall be effective such that the duct is

completely filled, and the prestressing tendon is completely surrounded,
with grout.
Grout injection
17.46
(1)
prestressing tendons are grouted. If grouting is not started within 24
hours of permission having been given, permission shall again be obtained
from the Engineer.
(2)
Grouting of prestressing tendons shall be carried out as soon as
practicable, and not more than 5 days, after tensioning of the prestressing
tendons.
(3)
A check shall be made to ensure that the ducts, vents, inlets and
outlets are capable of accepting injection of grout. This shall be done by
blowing through the system with dry, oil-free air and testing each vent in
turn.
(4)
All ducts shall be kept free of standing water at all times and shall
be thoroughly clean and dry before grouting.
(5)
All anchorages shall be sealed by caps and fitted with grouting
connections and vents. Sealing of anchorages shall be protected against
damage at all times.
(6)
Grout shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing unless a retarder is
incorporated in the grout. If a retarder is used, the time shall be
determined by a test procedure agreed by the Engineer.
(7)
The grout pressure applied shall be as low as practicable and shall
not exceed 1 MPa. Grout shall be injected from one end and at the
lower end of ducts. Grout injection shall be continuous and steady and
shall be at a rate that will avoid grout segregation and trapping air in the
duct. Grout shall be allowed to flow from each of the grout vents until
its consistency is equivalent to that of the grout injected. After the last
grout vent has been closed, the pressure shall be maintained at 0.5 MPa
for 5 minutes. The injection vent shall then be closed under pressure.
(8)
If there is any blockage or breakdown or if the grout injection is
interrupted, the duct shall immediately be thoroughly washed with clean
water and blown dry with oil-free compressed air. Re-grouting shall
start as soon as practicable.
(9)
Grouted ducts shall not be subject to shock or vibration within
24 hours of grouting.
(10)
The level of grout in grout vents shall be inspected and made
good as agreed by the Engineer. Making good shall not be carried out
until at least 2 days after grouting.
17.16
2006 Edition
Records of grouting
operations
17.47
Records of grouting operations for prestressing systems shall be kept by

the Contractor on the Site and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer
within 3 days of each grouting operation. The report shall contain the
following details:
(a)
Location of grouting operations,
(b)
Date and time of starting and completing grouting operations,
(c)
Weather conditions,
(d)
Technical personnel supervising or carrying out grouting

operations,
(e)
(f)
Grout mix, including any admixtures,
(g)
Grout injection pressure,
(h)
Volume of grout used, and
(i)
Details of any interruptions and topping up.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: sheaths
17.48
The line of sheaths shall be within 5 mm of the specified line.
TESTING: PRESTRESSED UNITS

Testing: prestressed
units
17.49
Testing of prestressed units shall comply with Section 16.
TESTING: PRESTRESSING TENDONS

Batch:
17.50
A batch of prestressing tendons is any quantity of prestressing tendons of

the same type, size and grade, manufactured by the same manufacturer,
covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples:
17.51
(1)
Samples of prestressing tendons shall be provided from each batch
of prestressing tendons delivered to the Site and at least 28 days before
installation of the prestressing tendons starts. The number of samples to
be provided from each batch shall be as stated in Table 17.1.
(2)
The number of specimens in each sample shall be 15.
(3)
Each specimen shall be 1.5 metres long and straight.
(4)
Each specimen shall be taken from different coils or bars in the
batch. The ends of specimens shall be cut square without unravelling of
wires before delivery to the laboratory.
17.17
2006 Edition
Table 17.1: Rate of sampling prestressing tendons
Description
Size of batch
Steel wire
0 - 50 tonnes
Exceeding 50 tonnes

or part thereof
0 - 100 tonnes
Exceeding 100 tonnes

or part thereof
Wire strand and

alloy steel bar
Testing: prestressing
17.52
tendons
No. of samples per batch
(1)
Each specimen of prestressing tendons shall be tested to determine
the characteristic breaking load, characteristic 0.1% proof load, elongation
at maximum load, diameter, cross-sectional area, unit mass and modulus of
elasticity. Each specimen of prestressing wire shall also be tested to
determine the ductility.
(2)
Except that tests shall be carried out on specimens having a
temperature of between 5C and 30C, the method of testing shall be in
accordance with the following:
characteristic breaking
load, characteristic
0.1% proof load
17.53
High tensile steel wire

and strand for the
prestressing of concrete
: BS 5896
Hot rolled and hot rolled

and processed high tensile
alloy steel bars for the
prestressing of concrete
: BS 4486.
(1)
The standard deviations of the results of tests for characteristic
breaking load and characteristic 0.1% proof load, expressed as equivalent
stress values, of prestressing tendons shall not exceed the following:
(a)
Tensile strength
: 55 MPa
(b)
0.1% proof stress
: 60 MPa.
(2)
The statistical interpretation of the test results shall be in accordance
with BS 2846: Part 3, Table 3 and BS 2846: Part 4, Table E, both for a
one-sided tolerance interval of 0.95 and for a confidence level of 0.95.
Non-compliance:
elongation, diameter,
cross-sectional area,
unit mass, modulus of
elasticity, ductility
17.54
(1)
If the result of any test for elongation at maximum load, diameter,
cross-sectional area, unit mass, modulus of elasticity or ductility of
prestressing tendons does not comply with the specified requirements for
the property, one additional sample shall be provided from the same batch
and additional tests for the property shall be carried out.
(2)
The number of specimens in the additional sample shall be 15.
(3)
17.18
2006 Edition
TESTING: DUCT FRICTION

Testing: duct friction
17.55
(1)
The number and details of tests to determine the duct friction in
prestressing systems shall be as stated in the Contract. The method of
testing shall be as stated in Clause 17.55(2) to (4).
(2)
Prestressing tendons shall be tensioned from one end and the tendon
force shall be measured at both the jacking and non-jacking ends.
(3)
The tendon force at the non-jacking end shall be measured by a
load-measuring device of a type approved by the Engineer.
A
direct-reading load cell or a dummy jack is considered to be suitable as a
load-measuring device. The load-measuring device shall be sufficiently
rigid to ensure that the movement of the prestressing tendon at the
non-jacking end under the specified tendon force is not excessive. The
deflection of the load-measuring device shall be measured to an accuracy
of 0.5 mm. A load-measuring device with a deflection exceeding 10 mm
under the maximum load shall not be used.
(4)
The prestressing tendon shall be tensioned to the specified tendon
force in equal increments and the tendon extensions at the jacking end and
the tendon force and tendon movement at the non-jacking end shall be
measured to within 5 mm. The number of load increments shall be suited
to the tensioning operation but shall be at least five.
duct friction
17.56
The force at the non-jacking end of the prestressing tendon determined in

the duct friction test shall be within +10% and -5% of the calculated value.
Records of duct friction

tests
17.57
Reports of duct friction tests shall be submitted to the Engineer within 3

days of each test. The report shall contain the following details:
(a)
Details stated in Clause 1.42(1),
(b)
(c)
Graph showing tendon forces at jacking end against tendon

forces at non-jacking end, and
(d)
Comparison between the calculated tendon forces at the

non-jacking end and the measured values.

Batch: grout for
17.58
A batch of grout for prestressing systems is any quantity of grout produced

in one cycle of operations of a mixer.
17.19
2006 Edition
TESTING: GROUT - BLEEDING AND FREE

EXPANSION
Samples: bleeding and
free expansion of grout
17.59
(1)
For each grout mix one sample of grout shall be provided from each
25 batches of grout, or from the amount of grout produced in a day,
whichever is the lesser, to determine the amount of bleeding and free
expansion of the grout.
(2)
Samples shall be provided and testing commenced within 1 hour
after the grout has been mixed. Samples shall be protected from rain
before the tests for amount of bleeding and free expansion are carried out.
Testing: bleeding and

free expansion of grout
17.60
(1)
Each sample of grout taken as stated in Clause 17.59 shall be
divided into three specimens. Each specimen shall be tested to determine
the amount of bleeding and free expansion.
(2)
A portion of each specimen shall be placed in a covered cylinder
with a diameter of 10010 mm, to a depth of 1005 mm and the amount of
bleeding and free expansion measured by a scale fixed to the outside of the
cylinder.
Non-compliance:
bleeding and free
expansion of grout
17.61
If the result of any test for amount of bleeding or free expansion of grout
for prestressing systems does not comply with the specified requirements
for the property, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout
mix or methods of production shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further
trial mixes shall be made and further grouting trials shall be carried out

Samples:
grout
17.62
(1)
For each grout mix one sample of grout shall be provided from each
25 batches of grout, or from the amount of grout produced in a day,
whichever is the lesser, to determine the crushing strength of the grout.
(2)
Samples shall be provided not more than 1 hour after the grout has
been mixed and shall be protected from rain before test cubes are made.
Testing:
grout
17.63
(1)
Two 100 mm test cubes shall be made from each sample of grout
taken as stated in Clause 17.62. Each pair of test cubes shall be tested to
determine the crushing strength at 7 days.
(2)
The method of making, curing and testing the test cubes, and the
calculation of the test results, shall be as stated in Clause 16.59(2), (3), (4)
and (5), except that compaction of the grout is not required.
Non-compliance:
grout
17.64
If the result of any test for crushing strength of grout for prestressing
systems does not comply with the specified requirements for crushing
strength, particulars of proposed changes to the materials, grout mix or
methods of production shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial
mixes shall be made and further grouting trials shall be carried out unless
17.20
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 18
STEELWORK
18.1
2006 Edition
18.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 18
STEELWORK
GENERAL
Steelwork
18.01
(1)
Steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 2 unless it is stated in
the Contract that the steelwork shall comply with BS 5400: Part 6.
(2)
Allowances shall be made for the deformation due to permanent
loads and the process and sequence of fabrication, erection and construction
such that steelwork is completed to within the specified tolerances.
(3)
The compatibility of the dimensions and setting-out data of
steelwork shall be verified by the Contractor before the materials for
steelwork are ordered.
Protection of steelwork
18.02
Protection of steelwork against corrosion shall comply with BS 5493.
Amendments to
BS 5400: Part 6
18.03
The following amendments shall apply to BS 5400: Part 6:

(a)
Contents page:
Delete 6.3.1 General.
(b)
Page 2, Clause 3.1.4.1, lines 5, 8 and 14:

Delete C of DD21 and insert L1 of BS 5996.
(c)
Page 2, Clause 3.1.4.1, line 10 and Clause 3.1.4.2, line 3:

Delete DD21 and insert BS 5996.
(d)
Page 3, Clause 4.2.1, line 2:

Delete 4.4.2 and insert 4.2.2.
(e)
Page 3, Clause 4.3.3(e), line 1:

Delete line 1 of text and insert the hardness of the edge is
reduced to less than 350 HV 30 of BS 427 by a suitable
heat treatment.
(f)
Page 4, Clause 4.7.1, paragraph 2, line 4:

Delete 23 of BS 5135 and insert 20 of BS 5135.
(g)
Page 5, Clause 4.14:

Delete and insert:
The Contractor shall determine the dead load camber of
beams required to comply with Clause 18.01(2) of the GS.
The camber of plate girders shall be formed by either of
the two following alternatives, whichever is stated in the
Contract :
18.3
2006 Edition
Type A cambering
camber introduced by
welding the flanges pressed
against a web plate cut to a
smooth cambered profile,
or
Type B cambering
camber introduced by
connecting straight sections
of girder with a change of
slope at their junctions.
Type A camber shall be used if the alternative to be used is

not stated in the Contract.
With Type B cambering the junctions shall not be
positioned at bolted connections.
(h)
Page 6, Clause 5.2.2, line 2:

Delete DD21 and insert BS 5996.
(i)
Page 7, Clause 5.5.2, paragraph 3, line 3:

Delete grider and insert girder.
(j)
Page 9, Clause 6.3.1:

Delete Clause 6.3.1.
(k)
Page 15, Table 5, column 3,

Member component 4:
Delete G=0 and insert G=D.
MATERIALS
Structural steel
18.04
(1)
Structural steel shall comply with BS 4360, including Clause B7 at
Appendix B, and with BS 5950: Part 2, Section 2.1 or BS 5400: Part 6,
Section 3.1 as appropriate.
(2)
Hot rolled sections complying with BS 4: Part 1, BS 4848: Part 2,
BS 4848: Part 4 or BS 4848: Part 5 shall not be replaced with sections
complying with other standards unless approved by the Engineer. If
approved, the sections shall have equivalent properties to, and the
dimensional tolerances shall comply with, the relevant British Standard.
Rivet steel
18.05
Steel rivet bars for the manufacture of steel rivets shall comply with BS
5400: Part 6, Appendix A.
Steel for shear

connectors
18.06
Steel for headed-stud-type shear connectors shall have a yield stress of at

least 385 N/mm2 and a tensile strength of at least 495 N/mm2. Steel for
other types of shear connectors shall comply with BS 4360.
18.4
2006 Edition
Bolts, screws, nuts and

washers
18.07
(1)
Bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with the British Standards and
strength grades stated in Table 18.1 unless other strength grades or British
Standards are stated in the Contract.
(2)
Washers for high strength friction grip bolts and nuts shall comply
with the following:
High strength friction grip
bolts and associated nuts
and washers for structural
engineering:
- General grade
: BS 4395: Part 1
- Higher-grade bolts and

nuts and general-grade
washers
: BS 4395: Part 2
- Higher-grade bolts (waisted

shank), nuts and generalgrade washers
: BS 4395: Part 3
Plain washers for other bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with BS 4320.
Tapered washers for other bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with BS
3410.
Welding consumables
18.08
(1)
Welding consumables used in metal-arc welding of grades of steel
complying with BS 4360 shall comply with BS 5135. Welding
consumables used in the fusion welding of steel castings shall comply with
BS 4570. Welding consumables used in metal-arc welding of austenitic
stainless steels shall comply with BS 4677.
(2)
Welding consumables and the procedures used shall be such that the
mechanical properties of the deposited weld metal shall not be less than
the respective minimum values of the parent metal being welded.
(3)
Welding consumables used with grades of steel other than those
complying with BS 4360 shall be such that the performance requirements
stated in BS 5400: Part 6, Table 1 or BS 5950: Part 2, Table 1 as
appropriate are achieved.
Rolled steel pins
18.09
Rolled steel pins, including those made from slabs, shall comply with BS
970: Part 1 or BS 4360, Grades 43, 50 or 55.
18.5
2006 Edition
Table 18.1: British Standards and strength grades for bolts, screws and nuts
Type of bolts,
screws and nuts
British
Standard
Strength
grade of bolt
Strength
grade of nut
High strength friction

grip (HSFG) bolts and nuts
BS 4395:
Part 1
General
grade
as specified in
BS 4395: Part 1
Precision bolts,
screws and nuts
BS 3692
4.6
4.0
Cup head and countersunk

head bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4933
4.6
4.0
Black bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4190
4.6
4.0
Other types of bolts,

screws and nuts
BS 4190
4.6
4.0
Hexagon socket screws
BS 4168:
Part 1
12.9
12.0
Steel castings and cast

steel pins
18.10
Steel forgings and

forged steel pins
18.11
Steel forgings and forged steel pins shall comply with BS 29.
Stainless steel
18.12
(1)
Wrought stainless steel shall comply with BS EN 10084, BS EN
10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN 10250-4 and PD 970, Grade
1.4401.
Carbon manganese steel castings shall comply with BS EN 10293.

Amd 4/2010
(2)
Flat rolled stainless steel shall comply with BS EN 10029, BS EN
10048, BS EN 10051 + A1, BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445, Grade
1.4401 in the softened condition.
(3)
Stainless steel tubes shall comply with BS EN 10296-1 and BS EN
10296-2.
(4)
Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall comply with BS EN ISO 35061&2, steel Grade A4 and property class 80. Stainless steel washers shall
comply with BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051 + A1, BS EN
10095 and BS EN ISO 9445, Grade 1.4401 in the softened condition.
The dimensions and tolerances of bolts and nuts shall comply with BS
3692. The dimensions and tolerances of tapered washers shall comply
with BS 3410 and the dimensions and tolerances of flat washers shall
comply with BS 4320, Form C.
Amd 3/2010
Cast iron
Grout for column
18.13
18.14
(1)
Grey cast iron shall comply with BS 1452, Grade 10.
(2)
Malleable cast iron shall comply with BS 6681.
(3)
Spheroidal or nodular cast iron shall comply with BS 2789.
(1)
Grout for bedding steel bases and for filling bolt pockets and pocket
18.6
2006 Edition
bases shall be based on OPC and shall have the same grade strength as the
surrounding foundation concrete. The grout shall contain a non-metallic
expanding admixture and shall have a total chloride content of not more
than 0.1% by mass of cement.
(2)
Grout for bedding steel bases and for filling bolt pockets shall be of
a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be suitable for
filling the space by pouring under a suitable head. The proportions of the
grout shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
bases
(3)
A dry packed mortar may be used for bedding steel bases that
exceed 75 mm thick. The mortar shall consist of 1 part by weight of
cement to 2 parts by weight of fine aggregate together with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for thorough
ramming against supports such that the space is completely filled.
(4)
Grout for filling pocket bases shall be a mix approved by the
Engineer with a nominal maximum aggregate size of 10 mm.
Lubricant for nut
threads of HSFG bolts
18.15
Lubricant for lubricating nut threads of high strengthen friction grip

(HSFG) bolts shall be of a wax-based type approved by the Engineer.
Machine oil and other free-flowing lubricants shall not be used.
Paint for steelwork
18.16
(1)
Paint for steelwork shall comply with BS 5493, Section 2, Table 4.
Organic zinc-rich paint shall comply with BS 4652. Lead-based paint
shall not be used for finishing coats.
(2)
Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers of not more than 5 litres
capacity. Each container shall be marked on the side to show the
following:
(a)
The name of the manufacturer,
(b)
The paint manufacturers reference number,
(c)
Intended purposes, type of pigment and binder,
(d)
Batch number, date of manufacture, expiry date and pot life,

and
(e)
Colour, gloss, drying times and flash point.
(3) The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of all paint applied
on surfaces of steelwork shall comply with the VOC limits stipulated in
the Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation.
Amd 1/2007
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of steel
18.17
(1)
The manufacturers certificates for steel shall be submitted to the
Engineer in accordance with BS 4360, Clause 12 and Appendix B 6.
18.7
2006 Edition
(2)
The certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer not more than 2
days after the steel has been delivered to the place of fabrication.
Particulars of
workshop drawings
18.18
(1)
Two sets of drawings of the steelwork shall be submitted to the
Engineer. The drawings shall show details of the following:
(a)
Steelwork and welds, including any stud welds, marked with

the relevant welding procedures,
(b)
Joints or non-standard welds proposed by the Contractor,
(c)
Locations and method of removal of any temporary welded

attachments proposed by the Contractor,
(d)
Edges of steelwork complying with BS 5400: Part 6 to be

formed by flame cutting or shearing procedures complying
with BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 4.3.3(a), (d) or (e) with the edges
marked with the procedures to be used, and
(e)
Parts of steelwork complying with BS 5400: Part 6 to be

worked by hot processes complying with BS 5400: Part 6,
Clause 4.8, 4.9 or 4.10 with the parts marked with the
processes to be used.
(2)
The drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 6 weeks before fabrication of the steelwork starts. Drawings shall
not be approved until all procedures and details shown on the drawing
have been approved by the Engineer.
(3)
A print and a diazo film of the approved drawings shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before fabrication of the
steelwork starts.
Particulars of delivery
of steelwork
18.19
(1)
The following particulars of steelwork fabricated off the Site shall
(a)
Expected and actual arrival dates,
(b)
Name of carrier,
(c)
Duplicate copies of bill of lading and packing list for

steelwork transported by sea, and
(d)
Duplicate copies of delivery note and a list showing the

marking and weight of each component for steelwork
transported by land.
(2)
The particulars of expected arrival date and name of carrier shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the due date. Other
particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer within 3 days after delivery
of the steelwork to the Site.
Particulars of method
of erecting steelwork
18.20
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed method of erecting
steelwork shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Sequence and method of erection of steelwork,

18.8
2006 Edition
(b)
Method of lifting and handling the components,
(c)
Method of preventing damage to protective coatings on

steelwork during handling,
(d)
Procedure for aligning, levelling and plumbing steelwork,

including temporary supports and method of making beddings
for column bases, and
(e)
Sequence of casting concrete bonded to the steelwork.
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 6 weeks
before erection of the steelwork starts.
Welder certificates
18.21
(1)
Certificates endorsed by an inspecting authority approved by the
Engineer shall be submitted to the Engineer to show that each welder has
been approved in accordance with BS 4570, BS EN 287: Part 1 or BS
4872: Part 1 as appropriate. The extent of approval of the welder shall be
appropriate to the categories of welds that he will carry out.
(2)
The welder certificates shall be submitted at least 4 weeks before
fabrication of the steelwork starts.
Particulars of welding
procedures
18.22
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed welding procedures shall
(a)
Welding procedures in accordance with BS 5135, Clause 20

for each type and size of weld other than welds stated in Table
18.2,
(b)
Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority approved

by the Engineer to show that the welding procedure has
complied with the procedure trial requirements stated in the
Contract in previous tests, or that the welding procedure for
steel castings complies with the exemption criteria stated in
BS 4570, Clause 20.1.1, and
(c)
Records of approval tests as stated in Clause 18.35(1) if

procedure trials are required under Clause 18.29(1).
(2)
The welding procedures for permanent welds shall be submitted to
the Engineer at the same time as welder certificates are submitted. The
welding procedures for temporary welds shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the same time as welder certificates are submitted.
Table 18.2: Welds for which submission of welding procedures is not required
Weld
Type
Weld
Size
Fillet weld
Leg length not exceeding 4 mm
Butt weld
Thickness of the parts or, if the parts are

of different thicknesses, the thickness of the
18.9
2006 Edition
thinner part to be joined not exceeding 4 mm
Particulars of stud
welding, flame cutting
and shearing
procedures
18.23
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed stud welding, flame
cutting and shearing procedures for steelwork complying with BS 5400:
Part 6 shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Procedures for stud welding, flame cutting and shearing

processes complying with BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 4.3.3(a),
(d) or (c),
(b)
Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority approved

by the Engineer to show that the stud welding, flame cutting
or shearing procedure has complied with the procedure trial
requirements stated in the Contract in previous tests, and
(c)
Report of procedure trials as stated in Clause 18.35(2) if

procedure trials are required under Clause 18.29(1).
(2)
before fabrication of the steelwork starts.
Particulars of vent
holes for galvanizing
18.24
Particulars of the method of plugging vent holes required for hot-dip

galvanizing hollow or box sections shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 3 weeks before fabrication of the steelwork starts.
Particulars of method
of non-destructive
testing
18.25
Particulars of the proposed method for carrying out non-destructive testing

on welds shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 4 weeks before the
tests start.
Particulars of
inspection authority
and testing consultant
18.26
(1)
The name of the proposed inspecting authority endorsing welder
certificates and records of approval tests for welding procedures shall be
submitted to the Engineer. The name shall be submitted at least 3 weeks
before approval tests start or, if approval tests are not required, at the same
time as the welder certificates are submitted.
(2)
The name of the proposed testing consultant stated in Clause 18.88
shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 3 weeks before the testing
consultant commences work.
Particulars of paint
18.27
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed paints and associated
products shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name of manufacturer,
(b)
Duplicate copies of the manufacturers data sheets including

temperature, humidity and other conditions at the workshop or
on the Site under which the paint is to be applied, and
(c)
Manufacturers product specifications, product range and

technical information,
(2)
before the painting starts.
18.10
2006 Edition
18.28
(1)
A sample of blast cleaned steel plate shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval at least 14 days before blast cleaning starts. The
sample shall be 150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm and shall be enclosed in a
sealed, colourless, transparent wrapping. The grade of steel and the
method of blasting shall be representative of those that will be used in the
permanent work.
(2)
Two samples of painted tin plates for each painting system shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before painting starts. Each
plate shall be 150 mm x 75 mm x 1 mm and shall have smooth edges and
10 mm corner radii. The plates shall be brush cleaned and painted on one
face with the painting system in such a manner that each coat is stepped
back from the underlying coat in equal strips. The degree of gloss of the
finishing coat shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
(3)
Samples of each type of nut, bolt, washer, stud and rivet shall be
provided within 3 days after the material is delivered to the Site.
TRIALS
Procedure trials for
and shearing
18.29
(1)
If in the opinion of the Engineer the proposed welding procedure
submitted as stated in Clause 18.22 or the proposed stud welding, flame
cutting or shearing procedure for steelwork complying with BS 5400: Part
6 submitted as stated in Clause 18.23 has not complied with the procedure
trial requirements for the procedure stated in the Contract in previous
tests, a procedure trial shall be carried out as stated in Clause 18.29(2) to
(8).
(2)
Procedure trials for welding for structural steel shall comply with
BS 5400: Part 6, Clauses 4.7.3, 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2.
(3)
Procedure trials for welding for steel castings shall comply with BS
5400: Part 6, Clauses 4.7.3 and 5.4.2.
(4)
Procedure trials for welding of studs shall comply with BS 5400:
Part 6, Clauses 4.7.4 and 5.4.4.
(5)
Procedure trials for flame cutting and shearing shall comply with
BS 5400: Part 6, Clauses 4.7.3 and 5.4.3.
(6)
Welds for grade A steels complying with BS 4360 are not required
to comply with the requirements for Charpy V-notch impact tests. The
temperature of -20C stated in BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 5.4.1.2(a)(3) shall
be amended to 0C.
(7)
If in a welding procedure one or more of the parts to be welded is
coated with a prefabrication primer or metal coating before welding, the
same primer or coating shall be applied to the sample before the procedure
trial for the welding procedure is carried out.
18.11
2006 Edition
(8)
The thickness of the sample of material to be used in procedure
trials for flame cutting shall be:
(a)
20 mm for material not exceeding 20 mm thick,
(b)
40 mm for material exceeding 20 mm and not exceeding 40

mm thick, and
(c)
T mm for material exceeding (T-10) mm and not exceeding

T mm thick, where T is any multiple of 10 from 50 up.
Inspection of procedure
trials for welding,
flame cutting and
shearing
18.30
Procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing shall be carried
out in the presence of an inspecting authority approved by the Engineer.
Results of procedure
trials for welding,
flame cutting and
shearing
18.31
If a procedure trial for welding, flame cutting or shearing does not comply
with the specified requirements for the procedure trial, the cause of failure
shall be established by the Contractor and particulars of proposed changes
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further procedure trials shall be
carried out to establish the amended procedure unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer.
Approved procedures
for welding, flame
cutting and shearing
18.32
(1)
A welding, flame cutting or shearing procedure that complies with
the specified requirements for the procedure trial shall become an
approved procedure.
(2)
If a procedure trial is not required, the procedure for welding, flame
cutting or shearing submitted as stated in Clauses 18.22 and 18.23 shall
become an approved procedure.
Commencement of
and shearing
18.33
Welding, flame cutting or shearing shall not commence until the procedure
has been approved by the Engineer.
Changes in procedures
for welding, flame
cutting and shearing
18.34
Unless permitted by the Engineer, approved procedures for welding, flame

cutting or shearing shall not be changed. Further procedure trials shall be
carried out to demonstrate proposed changes to the procedure unless
Records of procedure
trials for welding,
flame cutting and
shearing
18.35
(1)
A record of the approval test for welding procedures shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 3 weeks before fabrication
of the steelwork starts. The record shall be in the form stated in BS 4870:
Part 1, Appendix B or BS 4570, Appendix A as appropriate and shall be
endorsed by the inspecting authority approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Reports of procedure trials for stud welding, flame cutting and
shearing shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 3 weeks before
fabrication of the steelwork starts.
Painting trials
18.36
(1)
A painting trial shall be carried out for each painting system that
will be applied to areas exceeding 100 m 2 to demonstrate that the
proposed materials and methods of application will produce a painted
surface that complies with the specified requirements.
(2)
Painting trials shall be carried out at the place where painting to the
permanent work will be carried out and using the employees and
18.12
2006 Edition
equipment which will be used to carry out painting to the permanent work.
(3)
Painting trials shall be carried out on blast cleaned steel.
Results of painting
trials
18.37
If the painted surface produced in a painting trial does not comply with the
specified requirements for the paintwork, the cause of failure shall be
established by the Contractor and particulars of proposed changes shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Proposed changes to the paint formulation,
other than an adjustment in the amount of thinners, shall be carried out at
the paint manufacturers works before the final painting trial and before
the first batch of paint is delivered.
Commencement of
painting
18.38
Painting shall not commence until the painted surface produced in painting
trials complies with the specified requirements for paintwork.
and methods of
application for painting
18.39
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials and methods of application

used in a painting trial that complies with the specified requirements shall
not be changed.
HANDLING, STORAGE
MATERIALS
Handling and transport
of steelwork
18.40
AND
TRANSPORT
OF
(1)
Steelwork shall not be subject to rough handling, shock loading or
dropping from a height.
(2)
During handling and transport of coated steelwork, the steelwork
shall be separated from wires and lashings by rubber padding in such a
manner that the coatings are not damaged or discoloured. Free ends shall
be stiffened, measures shall be taken to prevent permanent distortion and
machined surfaces and faying surfaces shall be protected.
(3)
Steelwork shall not be lifted from the painting bed until the last
applied coating is sufficiently dry or cured for handling.
(4)
Rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, screws and small plates and articles
shall be packed in containers marked to identify the contents.
Storage of steelwork
18.41
(1)
Steelwork shall be stored off the ground on level supports in well
drained areas in a manner which will not result in damage or deformation
to the steelwork or coatings or in contamination of the steelwork or
coatings. Packings shall be placed between steelwork that is stacked.
(2)
Covered places in which steelwork is stacked shall be ventilated.
(3)
Different types and sizes of steelwork shall be stored separately.
(4)
Steelwork shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces
that form part of the permanent work.
(5)
Steelwork shall be protected from exposure to conditions that may
affect the steelwork or coatings.
(6)
Wet paint films, steelwork surfaces that are to be primed or
overcoated and joint surfaces that are to be assembled shall be protected
18.13
2006 Edition
from exposure to conditions which may affect the film or surface.

Undercoats which contain anatase titanium dioxide shall be protected from
exposure to direct sunlight.
(7)
Except as stated in Clause 18.41(8) and (9), steelwork shall be
stored in an enclosed workshop and protected from conditions which may
affect the steelwork after the steelwork has been cleaned as stated in
Clause 18.54 until the following times:
(a)
When the second undercoat to painted steelwork has hard

dried,
(b)
When the coating process to hot dip galvanized, electroplated

or metal sprayed steelwork has been completed,
(c)
When the sealer to metal sprayed and sealed steelwork has

been completely absorbed, and
(d)
When the first undercoat to metal sprayed and painted

steelwork has hard dried.
(8)
Primed steelwork surfaces may be exposed outside the enclosed
workshop for a period not exceeding two weeks.
(9)
Micaceous iron oxide undercoats to steelwork may be exposed
outside the enclosed workshop for the minimum period necessary to move
the steelwork from one part of the workshop to the other. The undercoat
surfaces shall be covered when the steelwork is being moved.
Storage of paint
18.42
Paint and associated materials shall be stored in sealed containers marked

as stated in Clause 18.16(2) and protected from exposure to conditions that
may affect the material. The materials shall be stored in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations and shall not be used after the
recommended expiry date has been exceeded. The materials shall be
stored in a locked store.
FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
Fabrication of
steelwork
18.43
Fabrication of steelwork shall comply with BS 5400: Part 6, Clauses 4.1 to

4.16 or BS 5950: Part 2, Sections 3 and 4 as appropriate except as stated in
Clauses 18.45 to 18.53.
Reinstatement on zinc
coating with
post-galvanising
welding
18.44
(1) Where post-galvanising welding is necessary, the zinc coating shall be

ground off the mating surfaces directly before welding. Immediately
after welding, the surface of the weld area shall be prepared by removal of
slag with the chipping hammer followed by vigorous wire brushing. The
zinc coating shall then be restored by either:
(a) Application of the two coats of an organic zinc rich paint (zinc
content at least 95%) to an overall dry film thickness greater
than 100 m. (ref. BS EN ISO 12944), or
(b) Pre-heating to 315oC and application of proprietary metallic
repair stick or powder to a thickness greater than 100 m.
18.14
2006 Edition
(2) If re-coating does not take place within 4 hours of welding, the weld
areas shall be vacuum-grit blasted to BS EN ISO 8501 first quality and
hot-zinc spray coated. Work shall be in accordance with BS EN
22063(1994) and to a minimum coating thickness of 100 m.
(3) After reinstatement of the zinc coating, a complete paint system as
specified in Clause 18.62 shall be applied to the repaired area in such a
manner that the new paint overlaps the existing coats by at least 50 mm all
around the affected part.
Welding, heating and
cutting
18.45
(1)
Welding shall be carried out by welders who possess a valid
welding certificate for the appropriate category of welding. A welder
shall cease to carry out welding if any of the circumstances stated in BS
4570, Clause 21.1 or BS 4872: Part 1, Clause 6 as appropriate occurs, or
the requirements stated in BS EN 287: Part 1, Clause 10.1 are not satisfied.
(2)
Pre-setting, pre-bending, skip welding, back-step techniques and
other measures shall be taken as necessary to counteract shrinkage or
distortion due to welding, gouging, thermal cutting or heat treatment.
(3)
Butt welds shall be complete penetration butt welds made between
fusion faces.
(4)
Butt welds in each component part shall be completed before the
final assembly of built-up assemblies.
(5)
Welding of austenitic stainless steel shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 4677.
(6)
Temporary welded attachments shall not be used unless permitted
by the Engineer. Temporary welded attachments, when permitted, shall
be removed by cutting with a flame torch 3 mm above the surface of the
steel member when not required any longer. The excess metal
protruding above the parent plate surface shall be removed by grinding
and finished flush.
(7)
Welding, heating or thermal cutting processes which give off toxic
or irritant gases shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer. If
permitted, precautions, including the provision of exhaust ventilation,
breathing apparatus and display of warning signs, shall be taken to enable
the work to be carried out in safe conditions. Welding, heating or thermal
cutting shall not be carried out within 2 m of lead-based, cadmium or
carbonaceous coatings.
Length of bolts
18.46
The length of HSFG bolts shall comply with BS 4604: Part 1 or BS 4604:
Part 2 as appropriate. The length of bolts complying with BS 3692, BS
4190 and BS 4933 shall be such that the end of the bolt will project above
the nut by at least one thread, but by not more than one nominal bolt
diameter, after tightening.
Length of threads
18.47
The length of threads on bolts shall be determined in accordance with BS

3692, BS 4190, BS 4395: Part 1, BS 4395: Part 2, BS 4395: Part 3 or BS
4933 as appropriate. If additional locknuts or other nuts are specified, the
thread length shall be increased by one nominal bolt diameter for each
additional nut.
Use of nuts
18.48
Nuts shall not be used with bolts or screws that comply with a different
18.15
2006 Edition
standard.
18.16
2006 Edition
Use of washer
18.49
Washers for HSFG bolts shall be provided in accordance with BS 4604:

Part 1 or BS 4604: Part 2 as appropriate. Washers shall be provided for
bolts complying with BS 3692, BS 4190 and BS 4933 under the nut or bolt
head, whichever is rotated during tightening, if the parts to be connected
are to be coated with protective coatings before assembly. Washers shall
be provided under the nuts and heads of bolts in oversized and slotted
holes.
Tightening of bolts
18.50
Bolts shall be tightened in such a manner that the contact surfaces of

permanent bolted joints are drawn into close contact.
Tightening of HSFG
bolts
18.51
(1)
The degree of preliminary tightening of bolts and nuts complying
with BS 4395: Part 1, which is tightened by the part turn method, shall be
torque controlled. The tightening equipment for preliminary tightening
shall be calibrated with a bolt load meter. The value of bedding torque
for the preliminary tightening shall be within 10% of the values stated in
Table 18.3.
(2)
Bolts and nuts at each joint with bolts or washers with load
indicating devices shall be initially tightened to bring the faying surfaces
into close contact over the full area. The range of the average gap after
initial tightening shall be as agreed by the Engineer. The bolts and nuts
shall be re-tightened if necessary to close the average gap back to the
agreed range. After all bolts and nuts at the joint have been initially
tightened, the bolts and nuts shall be finally tightened to attain the shank
tension stated in BS 4604: Part 1 or BS 4604: Part 2 as appropriate. The
range of average gap corresponding to the required shank tension shall be
established for each batch as defined in BS 4395: Part 1, BS 4395: Part 2
or BS 4395: Part 3 as appropriate by testing at least three bolt, nut and
washer assemblies in a bolt load meter and shall be as agreed by the
Engineer. The average gap after final tightening shall be within the
established range.
(3)
The threads of nuts for HSFG bolts that are to be tightened by the
part turn method or the load indicating method shall not be lubricated
unless approved by the Engineer. If the use of lubricant is approved in
the part turn method, the bedding torque shall be established by a bolt load
meter and shall be as agreed by the Engineer. The lubricant shall be
applied at the place of manufacture and shall only be applied to the nut
threads. The bearing surfaces of the nuts and the faying surfaces shall not
be contaminated with the lubricant.
(4)
The bolt load meter for measuring bolt shank tension in the part
turn, torque control or load indicating methods of tightening shall be
calibrated by a laboratory approved by the Engineer before tightening of
bolts and nuts starts and at regular intervals agreed by the Engineer.
During re-calibration, a replacement calibrated bolt load meter shall be
provided on the Site. Calibration results shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least one week before the bolt load meter is used.
18.17
2006 Edition
Table 18.3: Bedding torque for HSFG bolts

Nominal diameter of bolt
(mm)
Bedding torque
(N.m)
16
80
20
160
22
210
24
270
27
340
30
460
Defects in steelwork
18.52
Defective components for steelwork shall not be used in the permanent

work unless repair of the defects is permitted by the Engineer If
permitted, defective components shall be repaired by methods agreed by
the Engineer.
Approval of fabricated
steelwork
18.53
Fabricated steelwork shall not be:

(a)
Covered with protective coatings, concrete or other materials,
(b)
Erected, or
(c)
Despatched from the place of fabrication if fabricated off the

Site
until the steelwork, including any repaired areas, complies with the
specified test and inspection requirements and has been approved by the
Engineer.
PREPARATION OF STEELWORK SURFACES

Cleaning of steelwork
and coated surfaces
18.54
(1)
Soil, concrete and other adherent matter shall be removed
immediately from steelwork or coated surfaces and the surfaces shall be
made good by methods agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
Dust, soot, grit, detritus, metallic or other loose particles shall be
removed by vacuuming after steelwork surfaces have been blast cleaned or
before coated surfaces are washed or steam cleaned.
(3)
Oil and grease shall be removed by emulsion cleaners, by steam
cleaning or by high pressure water jets before removing rust and mill scale
or overcoating. Oil and grease shall not be removed with turpentine or
other solvents. If steam cleaning is used, steam cleaning shall be carried
out after the greasy deposits have been removed by scraping and a
detergent shall be added to the feed water of the steam generator.
18.18
2006 Edition
(4)
Salts, chemicals, corrosion or paint degradation products, including
rust-spotting on blast cleaned surfaces and zinc salts on zinc coatings or
zinc-rich paints, shall be removed by washing with detergent solution
before coating steelwork surfaces or overcoating.
(5)
The final shop coats on external surfaces shall be thoroughly
washed with a detergent solution at the Site before being overcoated.
(6)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer finished coated
surfaces shall be cleaned as stated in Clause 18.54(2) to (4) not more than
14 days before handover of the steelwork.
(7)
Cleaning agents to be used shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
Surfaces that have been cleaned using cleaning agents shall be rinsed with
fresh water to remove all traces of the cleaning agent.
(8)
Cleaning tools shall be of a type that will not result in damage to the
surfaces being cleaned. Wire brushes and brooms shall not be used for
cleaning coated surfaces.
Preparation of
steelwork surfaces
18.55
(1)
Bare metal surfaces of steelwork which are to be painted or metal
coated shall be treated before rust and mill scale are removed in
accordance with the following requirements:
(a)
Burrs, arrises and serrations shall be smoothed by grinding or

filing.
(b)
Weld spatter, weld slag and raised metal laminations shall be

removed by grinding or chipping and the surface shall be
made good.
(2)
Rust and mill scale shall be removed from steelwork which is to be
metal coated in factories by a pickling process which is compatible with
the metal coating process.
(3)
metal sprayed by blast cleaning carried out in accordance with BS 2569:
Part 1, Clause 3.
(4)
painted by blast cleaning as stated in Clause 18.56 unless the use of
acid-pickling, mechanical cleaning or flame cleaning as stated in Clauses
18.57 to 18.59 has been approved by the Engineer.
(5)
Excess acid or other chemicals used in the pickling process shall be
removed from steelwork that has been prepared by pickling before the
application of the metal coating. Pickling shall not be carried out for
longer than is necessary to remove the rust and mill scale.
Blast cleaning of
steelwork
18.56
(1)
Blast cleaning of steelwork shall be carried out to second quality of
surface finish in accordance with Sa2 in Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00
using chilled iron abrasive.
(2)
Chilled iron grit shall be graded in accordance with BS 2451. The
maximum size of grit shall be G17 for use in automatic-impeller-type
equipment and shall be G12 for manual or compressed air equipment.
The difference in level between a peak and the adjacent trough of the
blasted surface profile shall not exceed 0.1 mm.
18.19
2006 Edition
(3)
Non-metallic abrasives with a maximum particle size not exceeding
1 mm shall not be used other than with portable equipment.
(4)
Abrasives shall not contain materials that may contaminate the steel
surfaces. Sand containing salt or excessive amounts of silt shall not be
used. Contaminants shall be removed from recovered abrasives before
re-use.
(5)
Blast cleaning shall be carried out in a fully enclosed space
separated from the place of painting. The enclosed space shall be fitted
with dust extractors and filters to prevent the dispersal of dust outside the
enclosed space.
Acid-pickling of
steelwork
18.57
Acid-picking of steelwork shall be carried out by the Footner process in

accordance with BS 5493, Clause 14.3.2. The first priming coat of paint
shall be applied as soon as the steel has dried and is still warm.
Mechanical cleaning
of steelwork
18.58
Mechanical cleaning of steelwork shall be carried out using carborundum

grinding discs or other power-driven tools followed by steel wire brushing
and dusting to remove all loosened material which is not firmly bonded to
the metal surface. Excessive burnishing of the metal through prolonged
application of rotary wire brushes shall not be carried out. Visible peaks
and ridges shall be removed. Pneumatic chipping hammers shall not be
used.
Flame cleaning of
steelwork
18.59
(1)
Flame cleaning of steelwork shall not be carried out at the following
locations:
(a)
Within 2 m of HSFG bolts, cold worked high tensile steel and

surfaces already coated with paint or cadmium, lead-based or
carbonaceous materials, and
(b)
On sections thinner than 0.5 mm.
(2)
Flame cleaning shall be carried out without distorting the steelwork
and without adversely affecting the properties of the steel. The
temperature of the steel surface being flame cleaned shall not exceed
200C.
(3)
Loose materials shall be removed from the flame-cleaned surface
by wire brushing followed by blowing dry air or vacuuming. The
priming coat shall be applied when the surface temperature of the steel is
between 35C and 40C. Surfaces with temperatures of less than 35C
shall be reheated.
Cleaning of bolts, nuts
and washers
18.60
Bolts, nuts and washers for steelwork shall be kept free of dirt and
deleterious material. Oil and grease on bolts, nuts and washers, other
than approved lubricants for nuts of HSFG bolts, shall be removed before
assembling and coating the exposed parts of assembled bolts, nuts and
washers.
Approval of surface
preparation
18.61
Surfaces shall not be coated until the cleaning and preparation of the
surfaces have been approved by the Engineer.
18.20
2006 Edition
Metal coatings to
steelwork
18.62
(1)
Metal coatings to steelwork shall be as stated in Clause 18.62(2) to (9).
(2)
Galvanized coatings shall be applied by hot-dip galvanizing in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461:1999. The coating thickness shall
comply with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(3)
Sherardized zinc coatings shall comply with BS 4921, Table 1,
Class 1.
(4)
Sprayed zinc and aluminium coatings shall comply with BS 2569:
Part 1. The nominal coating thickness shall be 100 m. The sprayed
metal shall be pre-treated with product CP1 and sealed with product CP3C
in accordance with BS 5493.
(5)
Electroplated zinc and cadmium coatings on threaded components
with a diameter not exceeding 36 mm shall comply with BS 3382: Parts 1
and 2. The coating thickness shall be at least 5 m.
(6)
Metal coatings that will be overcoated with paint shall not be
passivated.
(7)
Allowance for the thickness of the metal coating shall be made in
the sizes of the threads of metal coated threaded components. Nuts shall
not be tapped oversize by more than 0.4 mm. Metal-coated HSFG bolts
and nuts shall not be tapped oversize unless approved by the Engineer.
(8)
Damaged areas of metal coatings shall be rubbed down to remove
excessive roughness, cleaned and made good with a compatible coating of
a type approved by the Engineer.
(9)
Metal coatings required on part of a component shall be completed
before the rest of the component is painted.
PAINTING STEELWORKPAINTING STEELWORK

Painting systems for
steelwork
18.63
(1)
The painting system to be used for steelwork shall be one or more
of the following systems as stated in the Contract, where DFT is the dry
film thickness:
System A:
System B:
- primer
- undercoat
- finish
1 coat of alkyd resin paint,
- minimum
total DFT
250 m
- primer
- undercoat
1 coat of epoxy resin with aluminium

mastic paint,
1 coat of epoxy resin paint,
- finish
18.21
1 coat of high build zinc phosphate

paint,
2 coats of oil based with micaceous
iron oxide phenolic paint,
2006 Edition
System C:
System D:
System E:
- minimum
total DFT
280 m
- primer
1 coat of inorganic zinc silicate paint,

DFT 75 m,
- undercoat
2 coats of high build micaceous iron

oxide epoxy paint,
- finish
1 coat of high build amine adduct

cure epoxy paint,
- minimum
total DFT
320 m
- primer
1 coat of two pack wash primer, DFT

5 m,
- undercoat
- finish
1 coat of epoxy resin paint or 2 coats

of polyurethane paint,
- minimum
total DFT
180 m
- Inhibitor
Rustoleum or other rust inhibitor

paint approved by the Engineer,
- primer
zinc phosphate or,

for hot-dip galvanized or GI surface,
T wash as specified in BS 5493,
Section 2, Clause 11.3.2,
- undercoat
2 coats of micaceous iron oxide

paint,
- finish
1 coat of oil based paint or 1 coat of

micaceous iron oxide paint,
- DFT of
each coat
as
recommended
manufacturer
by
the
(2)
The different types of paints within each painting system shall be
compatible with each other and shall be manufactured by the same
manufacturer. Successive coats in a painting system, including stripe
coats, shall be in contrasting colours to aid identification.
Application of paint to
steelwork
18.64
(1)
Surfaces that are to be painted shall be dry immediately before paint
is applied.
(2)
Paint shall be taken from the paint store ready for application.
Thinning, if necessary, shall be carried out in the paint store in the
presence of the Engineer and using the type of thinner in the ratio stated in
the manufacturers data sheets.
(3)
Paint shall be applied by brush, by air pressure spray or by airless
spray. Sealer and primers shall be applied by continuous spraying.
18.22
2006 Edition
(4)
Each coat in the paintwork system shall be sufficiently dry or cured
before the next coat is applied. The time between the applications of
successive coats shall be within the limits recommended by the
manufacturer and the limits stated in Clause 18.66.
(5)
Paints having a pot life specified by the manufacturer, including
two pack paints and moisture cured paints, shall be discarded on expiry of
the pot life or at the end of each working day, whichever comes first.
Other paints in opened containers shall be kept in sealed containers with
not more than 10% ullage in store after each days work and shall not be
thinned or mixed with fresh paint when re-issued for another days work.
Working conditions for
painting
18.65
(1)
Paint shall not be applied to steelwork under the following
conditions:
(a)
When the ambient temperature falls below 4C or the relative

humidity rises above 90%,
(b)
For outdoor work, during periods of inclement weather

including fog, frost, mist and rain or when condensation has
occurred or is likely to occur on the metal,
(c)
When the surface temperature of the metal to be painted is

less than 3C above the dew point of the ambient air, and
(d)
When the amount of dust in the air or on the surface to be

painted is in the opinion of the Engineer excessive.
(2)
Two pack paints of the epoxide-resin type shall not be applied and
cured when the temperature is below that recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
Priming and
overcoating time limits
18.66
(1)
Blast cleaned steel shall be primed or metal coated within 4 hours
after blast cleaning.
(2)
Primed steel surfaces shall be overcoated within 8 weeks after
priming.
(3)
Second undercoats shall be applied within 72 hours after
application of the first undercoat.
(4)
Sealer or etch primer to sprayed metal shall be applied within 4
hours after spraying. The etch primed surfaces shall be overcoated within
72 hours after priming.
(5)
Etch primer to galvanized steelwork shall be applied within 14 days
after delivery of the steelwork to the Site. The etch primed surfaces shall
be overcoated within 48 hours after priming.
(6)
Overcoats to two pack paints of the epoxide- or polyurethane-type
shall be applied within 48 hours after application of the two-pack paint.
If it is not possible to overcoat within 48 hours, the two pack paint shall
be abraded to produce a roughened surface and shall be given a flash coat
of primer of a type approved by the Engineer. The primer shall be
allowed to dry for at least 4 hours before application of the next coat of
the system.
18.23
2006 Edition
Stripe coats to
steelwork
18.67
Immediately after the first undercoat of the painting system to steelwork

has dried, a stripe coat of undercoat paint shall be applied by brush to
edges, corners, crevices, exposed parts of bolts, nuts, rivets and welds.
Another stripe coat of finishing paint shall be applied in the same manner
after the last undercoat has dried.
Paint coats to steelwork
18.68
(1)
The dry film thickness of the paint coats to steelwork shall be
measured using a magnetic dry film thickness gauge or other apparatus
approved by the Engineer. The total dry film thickness shall be measured
at spacings of approximately 1.0 m. If the measured dry film thickness is
less than 75% of the specified nominal dry film thicknesses or if more than
10% of the measured dry film thickness are less than 95% of the specified
nominal dry film thickness, repair work shall be carried out as stated in
Clause 18.70.
(2)
Wet film thickness gauges shall not be used as a means of
determining whether the dry film thickness of the painting system
complies with the specification.
(3)
Each coat of paint shall be free of embedded foreign matter,
mechanical damage and surface defects, including bittiness, blistering,
brush marks, bubbling, cissing, cracking, cratering, dry spray, floating,
pinholing, rivelling, runs, sagging, spotting and spray mottle as stated in
BS 2015. The finished paintwork system shall have an even and uniform
appearance.
(4)
Each coat of paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without
blistering, chipping, flaking or peeling.
Etch primers and blast

primers
18.69
Etch primers and blast primers shall not be applied on phosphated steel
and shall not be overcoated with zinc-rich primers.
Repairs to damaged
areas of paint
18.70
(1)
Areas of paint to steelwork that have been damaged shall be
cleaned to bare metal or to the metal coating. The edges of the
undamaged paint shall be bevelled.
(2)
The full specified painting system shall be restored in such a
manner that each new paint coat overlaps the existing paint by at least 50
mm all round the affected part.
PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK

Protection of HSFG
bolted joints
18.71
(1)
The faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints in steelwork that is metal
sprayed overall and sealed or metal sprayed and painted overall shall be
coated with the sprayed metal. The sealer on the parent material shall
extend for a distance of between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of
the faying surfaces. Free surfaces and edges of the joint material shall be
coated with the same sealer.
(2)
The joint material and the faying surfaces on the parent material of
steelwork which is metal sprayed only at joints and painted overall shall
be metal sprayed. The sprayed metal on the parent material shall extend
for a distance of between 10 mm and 20 mm outside the perimeter of the
faying surfaces. The primer on the parent material shall extend for a
distance of between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of the faying
18.24
2006 Edition
surfaces. Sprayed metal on the free surfaces and edges of the joint
material shall be coated with a sealer which is compatible with the
painting system.
(3)
The primer on the parent material of steelwork which is painted
overall and uncoated at faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints shall extend
for a distance of between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of the
faying surfaces.
Protection of other
shop-bolted joints
18.72
Blast primer for painted steelwork or sprayed metal plus sealer for metal
sprayed steelwork shall be applied to the joint and parent material of
shop-bolted joints other than HSFG bolted joints. Joints for painted
steelwork shall be assembled after the first undercoat of the painting
system has been applied to the contact surfaces and while the undercoat is
still wet.
Protection of other
site-bolted joints
18.73
Surfaces of the parent and joint material of site-bolted joints other than
HSFG bolted joints shall be coated with the same protective system as the
parent material.
Protection of welded
joints
18.74
Welds and steelwork surfaces that have been affected by welding shall be
coated with the same protective system as the parent material.
Joints made after

coating the parent
material
18.75
(1)
Hot-dip galvanizing and electroplating to steelwork shall not be
carried out until all welds for the steelwork that is to be galvanized or
electroplated have been completed.
(2)
Except as stated in Clause 18.75(4), sprayed metal on the parent
material shall be kept at least 15 mm, but not more than 300 mm, clear of
areas that are to be welded. The restricted area shall be masked during
metal spraying.
(3)
Except as stated in Clause 18.75(4), successive coats of paint on the
parent material shall be stepped back at 30 mm intervals commencing at
100 mm from welded joints and at 10 mm from the perimeter of HSFG
bolted joints.
(4)
If the parent metal in the approved welding procedure is coated
with the pre-fabrication primer or sprayed metal such coatings are
permitted to cover the area to be welded.
After welding the
pre-fabrication primer or sprayed metal adjacent to the weld shall be made
good.
(5)
The parent material, joint material, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and
washers, welds and weld affected areas shall be cleaned, prepared and
brought up to the same protective system as the adjoining surfaces not
more than 14 days after the joints have been made.
Sealing of joints in
steelwork
18.76
(1)
The different parts of joints in steelwork shall be dry immediately
before the joints are assembled.
(2)
Gaps around the perimeter of bolted joints and load indicator gaps
of HSFG bolts in steelwork painted overall shall be sealed by brush
application of the same painting system as the parent material. Gaps shall
be plugged if necessary with soft solder wire without flux core as a
backing before sealing with paint.
18.25
2006 Edition
PROTECTION
STEELWORK
OF
SPECIAL
SURFACES
OF
Protection of hollow
steel sections
18.77
The ends of hollow steel sections shall be sealed by welding mild-steel

plates over the open ends. The plates shall be at least 5 mm thick.
Immediately before hollow steel sections are sealed, bags of anhydrous
silica gel shall be inserted in each void at the rate of 0.25 kg/m3 of void.
Protection of bearing
surfaces for bridge
bearings
18.78
Dirt, oil, grease, rust and mill scale shall be removed from the metal
bearing surfaces for bridge bearings. The surfaces shall be masked with
tape or other methods agreed by the Engineer and shall not be primed or
painted until the bonding agent has been applied.
Protection of uncoated
steelwork surfaces
18.79
The coated surfaces of steelwork coated over part of the surface shall be
protected from rust that may form on the uncoated surfaces. Temporary
coatings that may affect the bond between concrete and uncoated surfaces
against which the concrete is to be placed shall be removed and the
uncoated surfaces shall be cleaned before the concrete is placed. The full
coating system shall extend 25 mm, or 75 mm for steel piles, into areas
against which concrete is to be placed.
ERECTION OF STEELWORK
Temporary supports
and fastenings to
steelwork
18.80
(1)
Steelwork shall be secured in position by temporary supports and
fastenings until sufficient permanent connections are complete to
withstand the loadings liable to be encountered during erection. The
temporary supports and fastenings shall be capable of withstanding
loadings that may be encountered during erection and shall not damage the
steelwork or the protective coatings.
(2)
Riveted and bolted connections shall be aligned using drifts
complying with BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 4.12 and shall be temporarily
fastened using service bolts.
Alignment of steelwork
18.81
(1)
Steelwork shall be erected in such a manner that the alignment and
levels of the steelwork comply with the tolerances stated in Clause 18.87.
Allowance shall be made for the effects of temperature on the steelwork.
(2)
Measures shall be taken to ensure that the steelwork will remain
stable before temporary supports and fastenings are slackened or removed
for lining, levelling, plumbing or other purposes. The temporary supports
and fastenings shall be re-tightened or replaced as soon as the adjustments
are complete and at the end of each continuous period of working.
(3)
Permanent connections shall be made as soon as a sufficient portion
of the steelwork has been lined, levelled and plumbed. Temporary
supports and fastenings shall be replaced by permanent connections
progressively and in such a manner that the parts connected are securely
restrained in the aligned position at all times.
(4)
Permanent connections for each portion of steelwork shall be
completed not more than 14 days after the portion has been erected.
18.26
2006 Edition
Foundation bolts for

steelwork
18.82
(1)
Foundation bolts for steelwork shall be held firmly in the set
position during fixing. Measures shall be taken to ensure that the full
movement tolerances are achieved and the bolts are not displaced during
concreting. Bolts and nuts, including the threads, shall be protected
against damage, corrosion and contamination.
(2)
Bolt pockets shall be kept dry and clean. Tubes that are cast in
concrete for grouting bolt pockets shall be securely fixed and sealed to
prevent ingress of grout during concreting.
(3)
Bolts in bolt pockets shall be installed in such a manner that the bolt
can be moved inside the pocket as designed without hindrance.
Supporting devices for

steelwork
18.83
The material, size, position and cover of packs, shims and other supporting
devices for steelwork which are to be embedded shall be as approved by
the Engineer.
Bedding and grouting

of column bases
18.84
(1)
Column bases for each portion of steelwork shall not be bedded or
grouted until the portion has been lined, levelled, plumbed and
permanently connected. Spaces below the steel shall be dry, clean and
free of rust immediately before bedding or grouting.
(2)
Proprietary types of grout shall be used in accordance with the
(3)
Temporary timber wedges holding steel columns in position shall
not project into pocket bases by more than one-third of the embedded
length of the steel column. The pocket shall be initially concreted up to
the underside of the wedges and the steel column shall be left undisturbed
until 48 hours after concreting. The wedges shall then be removed and
the remainder of the pocket shall be concreted.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances
fabrication of
steelwork
18.85
Fabrication tolerances for steelwork shall comply with BS 5400: Part 6,

Clause 4.2 or BS 5950: Part 2, sub-section 7.2 as appropriate.
Tolerances:
foundation bolts
18.86
The position of cast-in foundation bolts at the top of base plates shall be
within 3 mm of the specified position. The position of foundation bolts
in bolt pockets at the top of base plates shall be within 5 mm of the
specified position. The line of bolts shall not be tilted from the specified
line by more than 1 in 40.
Tolerances:
erection of steelwork
18.87
(1)
Steelwork shall be erected to within the tolerances stated in Clause
18.87(2) to (9) after lining, levelling, plumbing and making the permanent
connections.
(2)
The position in plan of vertical components at the base shall be
within 10 mm of the specified position.
(3)
The level of the top of base plates and the level of the lower end of
vertical or raking components in a pocket base shall be within 10 mm of
the specified level.
18.27
2006 Edition
(4)
The thickness of bedding shall be within one-third of the nominal
thickness or 10 mm, whichever is less, of the specified nominal thickness.
(5)
The line of vertical or raking components other than in portal
frames shall be within 1 in 600 and within 10 mm of the specified line in
every direction.
(6)
The line of vertical or raking components in portal frames shall be
within 1 in 600 and within 10 mm of the specified line normal to the plane
of the frame.
(7)
The position and level of components connected with other
components shall be within 5 mm of the specified position and level
relative to the other components at the point of connection.
(8)
The position of components supported on a bearing shall be within
5 mm of the specified position relative to the bearing along both principal
axes of the bearing.
(9)
The difference in level between adjacent sloping or horizontal
components connected by a deck slab shall be within 10 mm of the
specified difference in level.
TESTING CONSULTANT
Testing consultant
18.88
Tests that are stated in the Contract to be carried out by an approved testing
consultant shall be carried out by a testing consultant employed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT

MANUFACTURERS WORKS
Testing: tests on
steelwork at
manufacturers works
18.89
(1)
Tests shall be carried out on structural steel in accordance with BS
5400: Part 6, Clauses 5.2.1, 5.2.2 and 5.3.
(2)
Tests shall be carried out on bolts, nuts and washers in accordance
with BS 3692, BS 4190, BS 4395: Part 1, BS 4395: Part 2, BS 4395: Part
3 or BS 4933 as appropriate. The tests shall be carried out on full size
bolts. The rates of sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS
4395: Part 1.
(3)
The tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the
manufacturers works on samples selected by the manufacturer.
TESTING: STEELWORK
Batch:
steelwork
18.90
(1)
A batch of steelwork is the amount of steelwork stated in the
Contract and which is completed or delivered to the Site at any one time.
18.28
2006 Edition
(2)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a list of the parts
included in each batch at least 7 days before testing starts.
Samples:
steelwork
18.91
(1)
Samples to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer if testing is to
be carried out in Hong Kong and shall be selected by the approved testing
consultant if testing is not to be carried out in Hong Kong.
(2)
Samples shall be selected from positions that in the opinion of the
Engineer or approved testing consultant are representative of the batch as a
whole.
(3)
The Engineer shall inform the Contractor of the samples selected
for testing at least 3 days before testing starts.
Testing:
steelwork
18.92
(1)
The relevant tests stated in Clauses 18.96 to 18.100 shall be carried
out on each batch of steelwork.
(2)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 7 days before tests
in Hong Kong are carried out.
Reports of tests on
steelwork
18.93
(1)
Records of tests on steelwork carried out by the Contractor or the
approved testing consultant shall be kept by the Contractor and a report
shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before approval of the
batch of steelwork tested is required. The report shall contain the
following details:
(a)
Procedure tested and exact test location in the steelwork,
(b)
Results of tests compared to the required values, with any

non-complying results highlighted,
(c)
Any tearing, cracking or other defects, and
(d)
Conclusion as to the overall acceptability of the parts of

steelwork examined by the approved testing consultant.
(2)
Reports shall be certified by the Contractors authorised representative
or by the approved testing consultant who carried out the tests.
Non-compliance:
steelwork
18.94
(1)
If the result of any test on steelwork stated in Clauses 18.96 to
18.100 does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the
test shall be carried out on additional samples from the batch. The
number of additional tests shall be twice the number of original tests.
(2)
requirements for the test if the result of any additional test does not comply
with the specified requirements for the test.
(3)
If the result of every additional test complies with the specified
requirements for the test, only those parts the samples from which have
failed in the original tests shall be considered as not complying with the
specified requirements of the test.
Samples: steel
18.95
Samples of steel shall be provided from each batch of steel within 3 days
after delivery of the batch to the fabricators works or to the Site. The
rate of sampling and the position and direction of the samples shall be in
accordance with BS 4360.
18.29
2006 Edition
Testing: steel
18.96
(1)
The tensile test and the impact test shall be carried out on each
sample of steel. The method of testing shall be in accordance with BS 4360.
(2)
Quality grading of structural steel shall be carried out on steel that
has not been tested for quality grades by the manufacturer. Quality
grading shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5400: Part 6, Clause
3.1.4 or BS 5950: Part 2, Clause 2.1.6 as appropriate.
(3)
Testing and quality grading shall be carried out by the approved
testing consultant.
Testing: welds
18.97
(1)
Examination and testing of welds shall be carried out after
post-weld heat treatment and before the application of corrosion protective
coatings. De-burring, dressing, grinding, machining and peening shall be
carried out after the visual inspection for cracks, surface pores and joint
fit-up and before other inspections and tests are carried out.
(2)
Destructive testing of welds for steelwork complying with BS
5400: Part 6 shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5400: Part 6,
Clauses 5.5.1.1, 5.5.1.2 and 5.5.1.3.
(3)
Welds for structural steel and steel castings shall be visually
inspected in accordance with BS 5289. No-destructive testing shall be
carried out on a proportion of welds after visual inspection. The
compliance criteria and the proportion of welds to be tested are denoted by
quality categories as stated in BS 5135, Table 18 for butt welds and in BS
5135, Table 19 for fillet welds. The quality categories of welds shall be
as stated in Table 18.4.
(4)
No-destructive testing of butt welds shall be carried out by
ultrasonic examination in accordance with BS 3923: Part 1 or BS 3923:
Part 2 or by radiographic examination in accordance with BS 2600: Part 1,
BS 2600: Part 2 or BS 2910. No-destructive testing of fillet welds shall
be carried out by either the liquid penetrant method in accordance with BS
6443 or the magnetic particle flaw detection method in accordance with
BS 6072. The particular standard or part of standard to be used shall be
appropriate for the joint geometry, material and production requirements
and shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Welds shall be dressed to
facilitate ultrasonic examinations.
(5)
If the parent metal adjacent to a length of weld subject to
non-destructive testing has been tested for laminations in accordance with
BS 5996, the same areas on the parent metal shall be tested by ultrasonic
examination in accordance with BS 3923: Part 1 or BS 3923: Part 2 as
appropriate when no-destructive testing is carried out on that length of
weld.
(6)
Welds for steelwork that has been fabricated and tested by
no-destructive testing at the fabricators works shall be visually inspected
for cracks when the steelwork is delivered to the Site. 5% of the welds
other than welds stated in Table 18.2 shall be examined for cracks by the
magnetic particle flaw detection method in accordance with BS 6072.
(7)
Testing shall be carried out by the approved testing consultant
except as stated in Clause 18.97(8).
(8)
Inspection of welds will be carried out by the Engineer for welds
18.30
2006 Edition
Table 18.4: Quality categories of welds

Steelwork
Complying with
BS 5400: Part 6
Type of welds
Steelwork
Complying with
BS 5950: Part 2
Butt
Welds
Fillet
Welds
Butt
welds
Fillet
welds
Welds stated in the Contract

for 100% non-destructive testing
Welds stated in Table 18.2
Other welds
Testing: stud shear

connectors and rivets
18.98
(1)
Tests shall be carried out on 5% of welded stud shear connectors in
accordance with BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 5.5.4.
(2)
Tests shall be carried out on 5% of driven rivets in accordance with
BS 5400: Part 6, Clause 5.8.
(3)
Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer.
Testing:
fabrication tolerance
18.99
(1)
Rolled and built-up sections of steelwork complying with BS 5400:
Part 6 shall be tested to determine compliance with fabrication tolerances
in accordance with BS 5400: Part 6, Clauses 5.6.1 to 5.6.6.
(2)
Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer.
Testing: repairs
18.100
Defects that have been repaired and adjoining areas that in the opinion of
the Engineer may have been affected by the repair shall be retested as
18.31
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 19
19.1
2006 Edition
19.2
2006 Edition
19.3
2006 Edition
SECTION 19
HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND
FLOORING
GENERAL
19.01
with the sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this Section. Hot dip
galvanization shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
Fencing
19.02
Fencing shall comply with Section 4.
Pedestrian
19.03
Pedestrian guardrailing shall comply with Section 11.
Materials for grout
19.04
Steelwork
19.05
Steelwork, including protective treatment, shall comply with Section 18.
Vehicular parapets
19.06
Vehicular parapets shall comply with Section 20.
guardrailing
MATERIALS
Steel
19.07
Steel for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall comply with the
following:
Steel tubes and tubulars suitable
for screwing to BS 21 pipe
threads
: BS 1387
Hot rolled sections
: BS 4: Part 1
Hot rolled structural steel

sections
: BS 4848: Part 4
Stainless steel
19.08
Hollow sections
: BS 4848: Part 2
Weldable structural steels
: BS 4360.
Stainless steel for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be Grade
1.4301 complying with BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051 + A1,
BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445. Stainless steel tubes shall be
longitudinally welded tubes complying with BS EN 10296-2. Tubes for
handrails shall be polished.
Amd 3/2010
19.4
2006 Edition
Aluminium
19.09
(1)
Aluminium for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be of
type H 30 TF and shall comply with the following:
aluminium alloys for general
Plate, sheet and strip
Drawn tube
Bars, extruded round
BS 1470
BS 1471
BS 1474
tubes and sections

(2)
Aluminium shall be anodised to Grade AA 25 in accordance with
BS 1615.

washers and rivets
19.10
(1)
Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall comply with the
following:
: BS 4190

countersunk headbolts and
screws with hexagon nuts
: BS 4933

: BS 4320
Rivets for general

: BS 4620

general engineering
purposes
- rivet, bolt and screw stock
: BS 1473
Stainless steel fasteners
: BS EN ISO 3506-1&2
Amd 3/2010
(2)
four threads.
(3)
Rag, indented bolts, expansion bolts and resin bonded bolts shall be
of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be capable of
withstanding the design working load.
(4)
Hot dip galvanized bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be
used with hot dip galvanized handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring.
Aluminium bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used with
aluminium handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring. Stainless steel bolts,
nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used with other types of
handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring. Bolts, nuts, screws and washers
shall be insulated from aluminium by non-metallic washers and sleeves.
19.5
2006 Edition
Cement mortar
19.11
(1)
Mortar for grouting fixing bolts shall consist of 1 part of Portland
cement to 3 parts of sand together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the bolt
holes. The mix shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
(2)
Resin grout shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer
and shall contain a non-shrink admixture.
(3)
Mortar for building in curbs for metal flooring shall consist of 1 part
of cement to 3 parts of sand together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for the work. The mix shall
contain a non-shrink admixture.
DESIGNED BY CONTRACTOR
Designed by Contractor
19.12
Handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring which are to be designed by the

Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Handrailing shall be capable of withstanding a horizontal

loading of 740 N/m. The deflection of handrailing shall not
exceed 1 in 200 at mid-span.
(b)
Stairs shall be designed for a live loading of 5 kPa.
(c)
Flooring shall be designed for a live loading of 5 kPa. The

deflection of flooring shall not exceed 1/200 of the span.
FABRICATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS

AND FLOORING
Fabrication of
steelwork
19.13
Steelwork for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be fabricated in

accordance with BS 5950: Part 2.
19.14
(1)
All steel that is to be galvanized shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
(2)
Galvanizing to steel shall be applied after welding, drilling and
cutting are complete.
Welding steel
19.15
(1) Welds to steel for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be
full depth fillet welds. The welded surface shall be clean and flush before
application of the protective coating.
(2)
Steel shall not be welded after hot dip galvanizing unless permitted
by the Engineer and if permitted, the welded areas shall be free from scale
and slag and shall be treated with appropriate coating system approved by
the Engineer, which is compatible with the protective system of the parent
material.
19.6
2006 Edition
Fabrication of
handrailing
19.16
Handrailing shall be discontinued at movement joints in structures. The

spacing between standards shall be regular and shall not exceed 1.6 m.
Curved handrailing shall not be made up of a series of straights.
Fabrication of ladders
19.17
(1)
Ladders shall comply with BS 4211
(2)
Steel ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized.
(3)
Aluminium ladders shall be Grade 6082 aluminium.
(4)
Rungs, extended stringers, safety cages and brackets shall be welded
to the stringers of ladders.
(5)
Rungs on aluminium ladders shall have longitudinal grooves and
pressed aluminium alloy caps shall be fixed to open ends.
Fabrication of stairs
19.18
Stairs shall comply with BS 5395: Part 1.
Fabrication of flooring
19.19
(1)
The shape of each panel of flooring shall be such that the panel can
be easily removed. The mass of each panel shall not exceed 40 kg.
Where intermediate supports are provided to support flooring they shall be
capable of being removed to provide the specified clear opening.
(2)
Curbs shall be provided in concrete surfaces for flooring.
(3)
Cut-outs in flooring shall be neatly shaped and shall be provided
with toe plates. Cut-outs in open mesh flooring shall be trimmed with
edge bars welded to the bearing bars. The clearance between the edge of
cut-outs and the component passing through the cut-out shall not exceed 30
mm.
(4)
The bearing bars in open mesh flooring shall be welded to the
nosing bars. The transverse bars shall be rivetted or welded to the bearing
bars. Panels of open mesh flooring shall be secured with adjustable fixing
clips.
(5)
Chequer plate flooring shall have a non-slip pattern of a type
approved by the Engineer and shall be provided with lifting holes. The
flooring shall be secured to curbs by countersunk screws.
Fabrication of toe
plates
19.20
Toe plates shall be fixed to handrail standards by brackets and shall be

bolted or welded to stairs and flooring.
Fabrication of safety
chains
19.21
(1)
Safety chains shall comply with BS 4942 and shall be capable of
withstanding a breaking force of 30 kN and a proof force of 15 kN.
(2)
Steel safety chains shall be 8 mm nominal size, Grade M4
non-calibrated chain Type 1 and shall be hot-dip galvanized.
(3) The links of stainless steel safety chains shall be welded and shall
have an internal length exceeding 45 mm and an internal width of between
12 mm and 18 mm. Fins caused by welding shall be removed.
(4)
Hot dip galvanized hooks on chains shall be fitted with a sprung
securing device.
19.7
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
handrailing, stairs,
ladders and flooring
19.22
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed handrailing, ladders, stairs
and flooring shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of manufacturer's name and place of manufacture,
(b)
An original certificate bearing the chop of the manufacturer

showing that the materials comply with the requirements
(c)
Drawings showing layout and details of handrailing, including

positions of the different types of standards,
(d)
Drawings showing details of ladders, stairs, toe plates and

safety chains,
(e)
Drawing showing layout and details of flooring, including

positions and sizes of panels and supports,
(f)
Details of methods of fixing and of rag, indented, expansion

and resin bonded bolts, including manufacturer's literature, and
(g)
Design details in accordance with Clause 19.12.
(2)
before fabrication starts.
19.23
(1) The following samples of the proposed handrailing, ladders, stairs and
flooring shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the
relevant work starts:
(2)
(a)
Handrails,
(b)
Standards,
(c)
Ladders, including rungs,
(d)
Toe plates,
(e)
Flooring and curbs,
(f)
Safety chains, and
(g)
Rag, indented, expansion and resin bonded bolts.
The details of samples shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
19.8
2006 Edition
Storage of
handrailing, ladders,
stairs and flooring
19.24
Handrailing and flooring shall be stored on level supports in a dry

weatherproof store and in a manner that will not result in damage or
deformation to the materials or in contamination of the materials.
Handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be protected from damage
and damaged handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall not be used in
the permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer.
INSTALLATION OF HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS,

AND FLOORING
Installion of
handrailing, ladders
and stairs
19.25
(1)
Handrailing shall be installed to a smooth alignment to the
Engineers satisfaction.
(2)
Handrail standards, flanges, ladders and stairs shall be bolted to
metalwork and shall be fixed to concrete using rag, indented, expansion or
resin bonded bolts. The bolts shall be fitted into pockets left in the
concrete and the pockets shall be filled with cement mortar or resin grout.
Installation of flooring
19.26
(1)
Flooring and curbs shall be flush with the adjoining surfaces.
(2)
Curbs shall be fitted into rebates left in the concrete and the rebates
shall be filled with cement mortar.
(3)
Flooring shall be closely butted and the gap between panels and
curbs, adjacent panels and other surfaces shall not exceed 10 mm.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
handrailing, ladders,
stairs and flooring
19.27
Handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The position and height of handrailing shall be within 10 mm

of the specified position and height.
(b)
The level of the top rung of ladders and the top tread of stairs
shall be within 75 mm of the specified level.
(c)
The level of flooring and curbs shall be within 3 mm of the

specified level.
19.9
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 20
BRIDGEWORKS
20.1
2006 Edition
20.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 20
BRIDGEWORKS
PART 1: WATERPROOFING
MATERIALS
Prefabricated sheeting
20.01
(1)
Prefabricated sheeting for waterproofing shall be of a proprietary
(2)
Prefabricated sheeting shall not rot or support the growth of mildew
and shall be compatible with the materials with which it is in contact.
Prefabricated sheeting that will be exposed to sunlight after installation
shall be of a type that is unaffected by ultraviolet light.
(3)
Prefabricated sheeting shall have a tensile strength, pliability and
puncture resistance such that the sheeting will withstand the stresses
induced during handling and laying without damage. The elongation
properties of prefabricated sheeting shall be such that the sheeting can
accommodate the creep, shrinkage and thermal movements of concrete
without distress.
(4)
Prefabricated bituminous sheeting shall be of a self-adhesive,
self-sealing type and shall have a thickness of at least 1.2 mm.
(5)
Prefabricated rubberised base sheeting shall be of a type which is
unaffected by fuels, oils or grease.
(6)
Primers and mastic for prefabricated sheeting shall be of a
proprietary type recommended by the sheeting manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer.
Bentonite panels
20.02
(1)
Bentonite panels shall consist of bentonite filler enclosed in
self-degradable boards. The panels shall have a permeability of less than
1 x 10-7 mm/sec under simulated test conditions similar to those of the
as-built conditions. The performance of bentonite panels shall not be
affected by contaminants present in the groundwater.
(2)
Bentonite panels for slabs less than 200 mm thick or with soil cover
of less than 450 mm shall be special panels with specific provision for
swelling to prevent lifting of the slab.
(3)
Bentonite joint seal and bentonite granules shall be of a proprietary
type recommended by the bentonite panel manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
(4)
Polyethylene sheeting for use with bentonite panels shall be of a
heavy-duty type.
20.3
2006 Edition
Bituminous paint
20.03
Bituminous paint for waterproofing shall be cut-back bitumen complying

with BS 3690: Part 1. The bitumen shall have a viscosity grade as
determined by a standard tar viscometer within the range 25-50 seconds
with a coverage of 0.5 L/m2. Primers for bituminous paint shall be of a
proprietary type recommended by the bituminous paint manufacturer and
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
waterproofing systems
20.04
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed waterproofing systems
(a)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for prefabricated

sheeting showing the manufacturers name, the date and place
of manufacture and showing that the prefabricated sheeting
including results of tests for:
-
Tensile strength
Pliability
Puncture resistance
Elongation,
(b)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for bentonite panels

showing the manufacturers name, the date and place of
manufacture and showing that the bentonite panels comply
results of tests for permeability,
(c)
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for bituminous paint

showing the manufacturers name, the date and place of
manufacture and showing that the bituminous paint complies
results of tests for viscosity,
(d)
Particulars of primers and mastic for prefabricated sheeting,

bentonite joint seal and bentonite granules and primers for
bituminous paint, and
(e)
Methods of laying prefabricated sheeting and bentonite panels.
(2)
the Site.
for waterproofing
systems
20.05
Samples of the following proposed materials for waterproofing systems

shall be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as particulars of the
material are submitted:
(a)
Prefabricated sheeting, and
(b)
Bentonite panels.
20.4
2006 Edition

Delivery of bentonite
panels
20.06
Bentonite panels shall be delivered in original unbroken packages bearing

the manufacturers label.

20.07
(1)
Prefabricated sheeting and bentonite panels shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations in a dry
weatherproof store with a raised floor.
(2)
Bituminous paint shall be stored in sealed containers marked to
identify the contents and protected from exposure to conditions that may
affect the bituminous paint. The bituminous paint shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and shall not be
used after the recommended shelf life has been exceeded.
INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS

Installation of
20.08
(1)
Surfaces on which waterproofing systems will be laid shall be clean,
dry and free from voids, loose aggregate, sharp protrusions, projecting
tying wire, release agents and other substances which are likely to damage
or affect the waterproofing system.
(2)
Waterproofing systems shall be laid in accordance with the
(3)
Before waterproofing systems are laid on concrete surfaces, the
concrete surface shall have been cured for at least 7 days and shall be
cleaned with a broom and sealed with one coat of primer. Primed
surfaces shall not be covered until the solvent constituent has evaporated.
Water shall be allowed to evaporate from primers containing bituminous
emulsion before the surface is covered. Primed surfaces shall be
protected from contamination.
Installation of
prefabricated sheeting
20.09
(1)
Prefabricated sheeting shall be laid one sheet at a time from low
points and drains towards high points. The sheeting shall be firmly and
tightly brought into contact with the primer or underlying sheeting.
(2)
Laps shall be formed at joints between individual sheets of
prefabricated sheeting. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, end
laps shall be at least 150 mm and side laps shall be at least 100 mm.
Joints shall be arranged in such a manner that the number of layers of
sheeting at any joint does not exceed three.
(3)
The perimeter of prefabricated sheeting laid each day shall be sealed
with a trowelled bead of mastic.
(4)
A double layer of prefabricated sheeting shall be laid around pipes,
posts or other components, which pass through the sheeting, and the edges
shall be sealed with a trowelled bead of mastic.
20.5
2006 Edition
Installation of
bentonite panels
20.10
(1)
Bentonite panels shall not be laid in water or during wet weather.
(2)
Immediately before bentonite panels are laid on a surface, joints and
cracks in the surface shall be sealed with bentonite joint seal.
(3)
Polyethylene sheeting shall be laid below and above bentonite
panels to prevent prehydration. Laps of at least 100 mm shall be formed
at joints in the sheeting.
(4)
Laps shall be formed at the edges of bentonite panels or the edges
shall be closely butted together and the seam filled with loose bentonite
granules.
(5)
Bentonite panels shall not be fixed to the underlying surface unless
permitted by the Engineer. If permitted, the method of fixing shall be by
25 mm masonry washerhead nails or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer.
(6)
Bentonite panels shall be laid continuously around wall bases and
corners. Flat panels shall not be folded or bent if the panels will be
damaged or bentonite filler will be lost.
(7)
Bentonite that is exposed at the edges of bentonite panels cut to fit
around pipes, posts or other components which pass through the panel shall
be taped or sealed by other methods agreed by the Engineer to prevent loss
of the bentonite filler. The joint between panels and the pipe, post or
component shall be sealed with a continuous bentonite seal.
(8)
Exposed bentonite panels shall be protected from moisture by
polyethylene sheeting unless panels with a water repellent coating are used.
The sheeting shall be removed before fill material is deposited. As soon
as practicable after each course of panels has been laid, fill material shall
be deposited and compacted up to a level which is within 50 mm of the top
edge of the panel.
(9)
Damaged or expanded bentonite panels shall be replaced before
being covered by the permanent work.
Bituminous paint
20.11
Surfaces to which bituminous paint will be applied shall be treated with a

primer before the paint is applied if recommended by the paint
manufacturer. Bituminous paint shall be applied in two coats. The first
coat shall be allowed to dry before the second coat is applied.
20.6
2006 Edition
PART 2: BRIDGE BEARING

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Schedule of bearings
20.12
Schedule of bearings is the schedule of bearings stated in the Contract.
Type of bridge bearing
20.13
Type of bridge bearing is a term used to identify bridge bearings of exactly

the same design and same capacity for all bearing loads, movements and
rotations.
MATERIALS
Holding-down bolts for
bridge bearings
20.14
Holding-down bolts for bridge bearings shall be of a proprietary type of

stainless steel approved by the Engineer.
Cement mortar, grout

and adhesive for bridge
bearings
20.15
(1)
Cement mortar for bedding and construction of unreinforced plinths
for bridge bearings shall be a of proprietary non-shrink type approved by
the Engineer having a grade strength of at least 50 MPa.
(2)
Chemical-resin mortar for the construction of plinths for bridge
bearings shall be of a proprietary non-shrink type approved by the
Engineer having grade strength of at least 50 MPa.
(3)
Grout for grouting base plates and holding-down bolts shall be of a
proprietary non-shrink cementitious type approved by the Engineer having
grade strength of at least 50 MPa. The grout shall be flowable and shall
not bleed or segregate. The suitability of grout shall be demonstrated by
site trials to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Chemical-resin based grout
shall not be used.
(4)
Adhesives and chemical resin mortars for locating and bedding
elastomeric bridge bearings shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. They shall be compatible with the elastomer.
Dowel bars for bridge

bearings
20.16
Dowel bars for bridge bearings shall be stainless steel of Grade 1.4401, BS
EN 10084, BS EN 10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN 10250-4
and PD 970.
Amd 3/2010
DESIGN OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

Design of bridge
bearings
20.17
(1)
Bridge bearings shall be designed by the Contractor unless
otherwise stated in the Contract.
(2)
The design and manufacture of bridge bearings and the materials
used shall comply with BS 5400: Part 9, including the guidance notes,
except as stated in Clauses 20.18 and 20.19. Inspection and maintenance of
bridge bearings shall be easy to carry out and the bearings shall be easily
replaceable.
3)
The maximum bearing stress in concrete underlying or overlying a
bridge bearing under the design load at the ultimate limit state shall not
20.7
2006 Edition
exceed 40% of the specified grade strength of the concrete. Higher

bearing stresses may be adopted provided that in the opinion of the
Engineer sufficient steel reinforcement is provided to resist the resulting
bursting forces and that the bearing stresses are within the limits stated in
Clause 7.2.3.3 of BS 5400: Part 4.
(4)
The deflection of bridge bearings which have a specified zero
horizontal movement in a particular direction shall not exceed 1 mm in that
direction under the maximum horizontal loadings.
Design of sliding
bearings
20.18
(1)
Clause 4.3.4.2 of BS 5400: Part 9: Section 9.2 shall not apply to
sliding bearings.
(2)
Stainless steel sliding surfaces of sliding bearings which are
attached to backing plates by mechanical fasteners instead of continuous
welding along the edges shall be bonded to the backing over the full area
and supplemented with peripheral sealing if necessary. Mechanical fixing
with peripheral sealing only shall not be used.
Design of elastomeric
bearings
20.19
The requirements for use of elastomer in elastomeric bearings at subzero

temperatures stated in Clause 3.7.1 of BS 5400: Part 9: Section 9.2 shall
not apply.
Design of guides for

bridge bearings
20.20
The clearance between guides and complementary sliding surfaces of a

guided bearing shall not exceed 1 mm.
Design of fixings for

bridge bearings
20.21
(1)
Except for elastomeric bearings, bridge bearings, including bearings
that are not required to provide horizontal restraint, shall be fixed to the
superstructure and substructure with mechanical fixings or by other
methods approved by the Engineer. The friction between the bearing and
the superstructure or substructure may be used to resist the horizontal
forces provided that a factor of safety of at least 2 is applied to the proven
coefficient of friction and that the worst combination of vertical load and
horizontal load is considered.
(2)
The ultimate capacity of the mechanical fixings for bridge bearings
shall not be less than the worst combination of loading at ultimate limit
state stated in the schedule of bearings.
Protective coatings to
bridge bearings
20.22
Metal components of bridge bearings shall be protected against corrosion

by a protective coating complying with, and selected in accordance with,
BS 5493. For the purpose of selecting the coating system, the
environment shall be classified as exterior exposed-polluted coastal and
the typical time to first maintenance shall be very long (20 years or
more).
Marking of bridge
bearings
20.23
(1)
Bridge bearings shall be marked by the manufacturer either with the
type numbers stated in the schedule of bearings or with the manufacturers
own type or other numbers. A schedule shall be provided which relates
the manufacturers own type or other numbers to the type numbers stated
in the schedule of bearings.
(2)
The design movement directions and magnitudes and the axes of
bearing shall be marked on the upper faces of bridge bearings to facilitate
checking of the installation. Movement indicators shall be provided for
sliding and roller bearings to permit checking of movements of the
bearings before and after installation.
20.8
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of bridge
bearings
20.24
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed bridge bearings shall be
(a)
Details of type of bridge bearings, including materials, and the

name and address of the manufacturer,
(b)
Design calculations, including (i) calculations of bearing

stresses above and below the bearings, (ii) calculations for
bursting or other necessary additional or revised
reinforcement, and (iii) calculations to show that the bearings
comply with the requirements of BS5400: Part 9,
Amd 1/2010
(c)
Shop drawings and drawings of any additional or revised

reinforcement details,
(d)
A certificate for each type of bridge bearing showing the

showing that the bridge bearings comply with the
requirements stated in the Contract and including results of:
- Friction tests
- Load tests
- Tests on elastomers
- Quick production tests
- Stiffness tests,
(e)
Values of stiffness in compression and in shear of elastomeric

bearings,
(f)
Details of fixings to superstructures and substructures,
(g)
Details of protective coatings,
(h)
Methods of installation, and
(i)
Programme of manufacture, testing and delivery, including

name and address of testing laboratory.
(2)
before the Engineers approval of the bridge bearings is required.
Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of bridge bearings delivered
to the Site.
20.9
2006 Edition
Storage of bridge
bearings
20.25
Bridge bearings shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and maintained
hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner that will not result
in damage or deformation to the bearings or in contamination of the
bearings.
INSTALLATION OF BRIDGE BEARINGS

Installation of bridge
bearings
20.26
(1)
Bridge bearings shall be installed as recommended in BS 5400: Part
9 and as stated in Clauses 20.26(2) to (7).
(2)
Bridge bearings that have been pre-assembled shall not be
dismantled unless approved by the Engineer.
(3)
The levels of substructures stated in the Contract on which bridge
bearings will be installed shall be adjusted to suit the thickness of the
bearing so that the superstructure will be at the specified level after
completion.
(4)
Bridge bearings, other than elastomeric bridge bearings, shall be set
level on substructures using only a thin layer of cementitious mortar,
unless the Engineer permits the bearings to be set on plinths. If setting
on plinths is permitted, the plinths shall be constructed of cementitious
mortar or grout, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, and the
thickness of such plinths shall be at least 25 mm and shall not exceed 40
mm. If approved by the Engineer, the plinths may be constructed of
chemical resin mortar, having a thickness of at least 5 mm and not
exceeding 10 mm.
(5)
Elastomeric bearings shall be set directly on the substructure. A
thin layer of cementitious mortar may be used to level the surface if the
substructure is concrete. Elastomeric bearings shall not be set in position
by grouting between the substructure and the underside of the bearing.
(6)
The top surface of bridge bearings that will support precast concrete
or other prefabricated beams shall be covered with a thin layer of
cementitious mortar immediately before the beam is placed. The beam
shall be temporarily supported on folding wedges or by other methods
agreed by the Engineer until the mortar has achieved sufficient strength to
transmit the weight of the beam to the bearings. The temporary supports
shall then be removed.
(7)
Temporary locking devices for bridge bearings shall be removed
before post-tensioned superstructures are stressed. Temporary locking
devices for other types of superstructures shall be removed at times agreed
by the Engineer.
20.10
2006 Edition
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
bridge bearings
20.27
(1)
The centreline of bridge bearings shall be within 3 mm of the
specified position.
(2)
The level of bridge bearings shall be within 0.0001 times the
adjacent span or the lesser of the adjacent spans or within 5 mm of the
specified level, whichever is less.
(3)
The inclination of bridge bearings shall be within 1 in 200 of the
specified inclination.
(4)
The horizontal axis of bridge bearings shall be within 0.005 radian
of the specified alignment.
(5)
Departure from the common plane between twin or multiple bridge
bearings shall be within the tolerances stated in the Contract.
TESTING:
BRIDGE
REQUIREMENTS
BEARINGS
GENERAL
Batch: bridge
bearings
20.28
A batch of bridge bearings is any quantity of bridge bearings of the same

type fabricated by the same manufacturer and which for the purpose of
testing elastomeric bearings contains the same type of elastomer.
Testing: bridge
bearings
20.29
(1)
Bridge bearings shall be tested by the Contractor at a laboratory
(2)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the date and place of
testing at least 28 days before testing starts.
(3)
The specified procedures for testing bridge bearings shall not be
changed unless permitted by the Engineer.
(4)
The reports of tests on bridge bearings shall include load/deflection
graphs and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 28 days
before installation of the bridge bearings starts.
TESTING: FRICTION TEST FOR BRIDGE BEARINGS

Samples: friction test
for bridge bearings
20.30
One sample of bridge bearing shall be provided from each batch of sliding
bearings and from each batch of other types of bridge bearings which
contain sliding parts.
Testing: friction test for

bridge bearings
20.31
(1)
The friction test shall be carried out on each sample of bridge
bearing provided as stated in Clause 20.30 to determine the coefficient of
friction, flatness, bonding properties and resistance to mechanical damage.
(2)
The friction test shall be carried out at room temperature.

20.11
2006 Edition
friction test for bridge
bearings
20.32
The results of friction tests for bridge bearings shall comply with the
(a)
The coefficient of friction in any test position shall not exceed

0.04.
(b)
The flatness of the stainless steel shall be within the specified

limits after testing.
(c)
The bond to the backing plate shall be unaffected by the

friction test.
(d)
The PTFE shall be free from mechanical damage after testing.
TESTING: BRIDGE BEARINGS

ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
OTHER
THAN
Samples: bridge
bearings other than
elastomeric bearings
20.33
One sample of bridge bearing shall be provided from each batch of bridge
bearings other than elastomeric bearings.
Testing:
bridge
bearings other than
20.34
Vertical load tests and horizontal load tests shall be carried out on each
sample of bridge bearing provided as stated in Clause 20.33. The test
loads shall be the serviceability limit state loads. If stated in the Contract,
additional tests with test loads up to the ultimate limit state loads shall be
carried out. The method of testing shall be in accordance with Clause
7.2(b)(1) of the guidance notes to BS 5400: Section 9.2.
bridge bearings other
than elastomeric
bearings
20.35
The results of tests on bridge bearings other than elastomeric bearings shall
comply with the requirements stated in Clause 7.2(b)(1) of the guidance
notes to BS 5400: Section 9.2.
TESTING: ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS

Samples:
20.36
(1)
Except as stated in Clause 20.36(2), one sample of elastomeric
bearing shall be provided from each batch of elastomeric bearings for
testing by the Quick Production Test.
(2)
Samples shall not be provided for the Quick Production Test if in
the opinion of the Engineer there is sufficient evidence that tests have been
carried out within the previous 18 months on identical materials and that
the results of the tests comply with the specified requirements for the test.
(3)
Two samples of elastomeric bearings shall be provided from each
batch of ten or part thereof of elastomeric bearings to determine the
stiffness in compression and stiffness in shear.
20.12
2006 Edition
Testing:
20.37
(1)
Each sample of elastomeric bearing provided as stated in Clause
20.36(1) shall be tested to determine the physical and weathering properties
of the elastomer and the bond of the elastomer to metal. The method of
testing shall be the Quick Production Test in accordance with the
guidance notes to BS 5400: Section 9.2.
(2)
One sample of elastomeric bearing provided as stated in Clause
20.36(3) shall be tested to determine the stiffness in compression and the
other sample shall be tested to determine the stiffness in shear.
The method of testing to determine the stiffness in compression shall be in
accordance with Clause 7.2(b)(2) of the guidance notes to BS 5400:
Section 9.2. The method of testing to determine the stiffness in
compression shall be in accordance with BS 5400: Section 9.2, Appendix
A.
20.38
The results of tests on elastomeric bearings shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
There shall be no evidence of surface flaws in the bearings

during or after the test.
(b)
There shall be no irregularities in the deflected shape of

laminated bearings during or after the test.
(c)
The stiffness in compression shall be within 20% of the value

quoted by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
(d)
The stiffness in shear shall be within 20% of the value quoted

by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
20.13
2006 Edition
PART 3: VEHICULAR PARAPETS

MATERIALS
Vehicular parapets
20.39
(1)
Vehicular parapets shall be of the types stated in the Contract.
(2)
Steel for vehicular parapets, including welding, shall comply with
Section 18 except Clauses 18.90 to 18.92 and Clauses 18.94 to 18.100.
The requirements for testing of materials and welded components shall
follow Clauses 20.46 to 20.52.
(3)
Protective treatment to steel for vehicular parapets shall comply
with Section 18 and shall be- applied after welding, drilling and cutting are
complete.
(4)
Aluminium for vehicular parapets shall comply with the following
or equivalent approved by the Engineer:
general engineering
purposes
- plate, sheet and strip
: BS EN 485
- rivet, bolt and screw stock
: BS 1473
- bars, extruded round

tubes and sections
: BS EN 755.
(5)
Aluminium shall be anodised to Grade AA 25 in accordance with
BS EN 12373 Part 1 or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
(6)
Welding of aluminium for vehicular parapets shall comply with BS
EN 1011 Part 4 or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
(7)
Stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers for vehicular parapets shall be
Grade A4-80 and shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506 Part 1 and Part 2 or
Vehicular parapets
20.40
Holding-down bolts for vehicular parapets shall be of a proprietary type

Grout for
Holding-down
bolts
20.41
Grout for holding down bolts for vehicular parapets shall be polyester resin
based grout and shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
Epoxy resin based grout shall not be used.
SUBMISSIONS
Samples of
materials for
vehicular parapets
20.42
Samples of the proposed posts and rails for vehicular parapets shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before installation of the
parapets starts.
20.14
2006 Edition
Storage of
vehicular parapets
20.43
Vehicular parapets shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and

maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner that
will not result in damage or deformation to the parapets or in
contamination of the parapets.
INSTALLATION OF VEHICULAR PARAPETS

Installation of
vehicular parapets
20.44
(1)
Vehicular parapets shall be installed to a smooth alignment and with
the posts vertical.
(2)
Grouting shall be carried out by setting the vehicular parapets in
position and grouting the gap between the vehicular parapets and the
structure. Vehicular parapets shall be held in position until connections
and fixings are complete and until the fixings have gained sufficient
strength.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
Vehicular parapets
20.45
Vehicular parapets shall be within 10 mm of the specified position and

height.
Batch:
Vehicular parapets
20.46
(1)
A batch of vehicular parapets is the amount of parapet materials
stated in the Contract and which is completed or delivered to the Site at any
one time.
(2)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a list of the parts of
vehicular parapets included in each batch at least 7 days before testing
starts.
Samples:
Vehicular
parapets
for testing
20.47
Testing:
Vehicular
parapets
20.48
(1)
Samples shall be selected from positions, which in the opinion of
the Engineer are representative of the batch as a whole.
(2)
The Engineer shall inform the Contractor of the samples selected for
testing at least 3 days before testing starts.
(1)
The relevant tests stated in Clauses 20.49 to 20.52 shall be carried
out on each batch of vehicular parapets.
(2)
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 7 days before tests
are carried out.
20.15
2006 Edition
Testing: Parapets
20.49
Materials
(1)
The tensile test and Charpy impact test of materials for vehicular
parapets shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 10002 Part 1 and
BS EN 10045 Part 1 respectively or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
The frequency of tests and results of material tests shall conform to BS
6779 Part 1, Table 3 for steel parapets and Table 4 for aluminium parapets.
(2)
Quality grading of vehicular parapet material shall be carried out
which has not been tested for quality grades by the manufacturer. Quality
grading shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5400: Part 6 as
appropriate.
Testing:
Fasteners
20.50
(1)
The tensile test of stainless steel fasteners for vehicular parapets
shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN ISO 3506 Part 1 and Part 2
or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
Testing: Welded
components of
Vehicular parapets
20.51
(1)
Inspection and testing of welds for components of vehicular
parapets on each batch shall be carried out after cleaning and before
application of hot-dip galvanizing and other protective treatment.
De-burring, dressing, grinding, machining and peening shall be carried out
after the visual inspection for cracks, surface pores and joint fit-up and
before other inspections and tests are carried out.
(2)
All welds shall be visually inspected and 10 % of welds for
vehicular parapets shall be visually examined in accordance with the
techniques in BS EN 970 or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
Non-destructive testing shall be carried out on a proportion of welds after
visual inspection.
(3)
Non-destructive testing of welds for components of vehicular
parapets shall comply with the following: (a)
For the components of vehicular parapets which are butt

welded or fillet welded with nominal leg length greater
than 12mm, 10% of welds for each type of components
shall be examined by ultrasonic testing in accordance with
BS EN 1714 or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
(b)
10% of the welds other than sub-clause 20.51(3)(a) shall

be tested as follows:
-
Magnetic particle flaw detection to joints in steel

parapet in accordance with BS EN ISO 9934 Part 1 or
equivalent approved by the Engineer or
Liquid penetrant method to welds in aluminium

parapet in accordance with BS EN 571 Part 1 or
(4)
The compliance criteria for welds to be inspected, examined and
tested shall be in accordance with BS 6779 Part 1 Clauses 9.4.3.1.2 to
9.4.3.1.4. For the butt welds to be tested the individual pores shall also be
less than 2.5mm diameter and the localized pores shall be less then 3% by
the area. The width of defect of buried slag shall be less than 1.5mm.
Linear groups of inclusions are acceptable provided that adjacent groups
shall be separated by a distance of at least 4 times and 6 times the length of
longest defect for parent metal thickness less than 20mm and larger than
20mm respectively.
20.16
2006 Edition
(5)
If non-conformities are found as stated in sub-clause 20.51(4), the
test shall be carried out on additional samples from the batch. The
number of additional tests shall be twice the number of original tests.
(6)
The batch shall be considered as not complying with the
compliance criteria for the test if the result of any additional test does not
comply with the compliance criteria for the test.
(7)
If the whole batch is not in compliance, the Contractor may propose
to carry out 100% testing on the batch at his own costs.
(8)
If the result of every additional test complies with the compliance
criteria for the test, only those parts the samples from which have failed in
the original tests shall be considered as not complying with the compliance
criteria for the test.
(9)
Welds for vehicular parapets that have been fabricated and tested by
non-destructive testing at the fabricators works shall be visually inspected
for cracks when the vehicular parapets are delivered to the Site. If
welding quality of the vehicular parapets is in doubt, 5% of the welds shall
be tested by magnetic particle flaw detection in accordance with BS EN
ISO 9934 Part 1 or equivalent approved by the Engineer. The surface
protection of vehicular parapets shall be made good to the satisfaction of
the Engineer after the tests.
(10) Visual examination and testing shall be carried out by a testing
consultant approved by the Engineer.
Testing:
Metal vehicular
parapet posts
20.52
(1)
Destructive static testing of metal vehicular parapet posts on each
batch shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures stated in
Annex E of BS 6779 Part 1. The frequency of destructive testing shall be
as follows:
No. of posts per batch
<150
1
(The Engineer may waive this testing
requirements if satisfactory tests within
3 months are provided)
150-300
> 300
(2)
No. of posts to be tested per batch
1
1 for each 300 posts or
remaining part thereof
The results of test on post shall comply with the following criteria:
(a)
The post shall sustain a moment of 1.05 times its theoretical

moment of resistance (product of nominal yield stress and
plastic modulus) at its critical section without failure.
(b) The material thickness, effective weld throat sizes and

external dimensions of the post shall be within the tolerances.
(3)
In the event that any of the acceptance criteria as stated in
sub-clause 20.52(2) are not met, further two posts shall be selected from
the same batch of posts and tested. If any further test fails to meet the
acceptance criteria, the whole batch shall be rejected.
20.17
2006 Edition
PART 4: MOVEMENT JOINTS

GENERAL
Movement joints
formed in place
20.53
Movement joints formed in place shall comply with Section 16 except as

stated in this Section.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Fabricated movement
join
20.54
Fabricated movement joint is a manufactured assembly, including nosings,

designed to carry traffic smoothly over a movement joint and to seal the
joint against the ingress of water and debris.
Movement joint
20.55
Movement joint is a permanent joint or hinge throat that allows expansion,

contraction or angular rotation to occur.
Movement joint formed

in place
20.56
Movement joint formed in place is a movement joint formed during

construction of a structure to permit adjacent structural elements to move
relative to each other without damage.
MATERIALS
Joint filler
20.57
Joint filler for movement joints formed in place shall be non-absorbent.
Joint sealant
20.58
(1)
Joint sealant for movement joints formed in place shall be a
polysulphide-based sealant. Polyurethane-based sealant shall not be used
(2)
Joint sealant shall be resistant to attack by petrol, diesel oil, dilute
acids and alkalis, synthetic and mineral oils, hydraulic fluids and paraffin.
The sealant shall have a transverse butt joint movement range for repeated
cyclic movement of at least 25% of the width of the joint.
Compression seals
20.59
Compression seals shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer

and shall be manufactured from natural rubber, neoprene or other synthetic
material. Compression seals shall have the dimensions specified by the
manufacturer for each joint width.
PVC capping strip
20.60
PVC capping strip shall be a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.

movement joints
20.61
Holding-down bolts for movement joints shall be a proprietary type

Grout for movement

joints
20.62
Grout for holding-down bolts for movement joints shall be based on

polyester resins and shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. Epoxy-resin based grout shall not be used.
20.18
2006 Edition
DESIGN OF FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

Design of fabricated
movement joints
20.63
(1)
Fabricated movement joints shall be a proprietary type approved by
the Engineer.
(2)
Fabricated movement joints shall be capable of withstanding the
following loads, either separately or in combination:
(a)
Vertically: two 112.5 kN wheel loads, 1 m apart, each spread

over a contact area giving an average pressure of 1 MPa and
applied in such a manner as to produce the worst possible
effect, and
(b)
Horizontally: a traction force of 75 kN/m run of the joint

applied perpendicular to the alignment of the joint, together
with any forces arising from strain of the joint.
Allowance for additional loading due to impact is not necessary.

(3)
Fabricated movement joints shall be capable of accommodating the
movements and rotations stated in the Contract without damaging the joint
and without loading the supporting structure with forces which arise from
strain of the joint exceeding 5 kN/m run of the joint.
(4)
Fabricated movement joints shall either be watertight or shall be
provided with a drainage layer or channel to collect water passing through
the joint and to divert the water away from the underlying structure.
(5)
Facilities shall be provided in fabricated movement joints for easy
clearance of grit or silt entering slots, grooves or channels forming or
associated with the joint.
(6)
Surfaces of fabricated movement joints, which will be exposed at
finished road level, shall be treated to provide a resistance to skidding not
less than that of the adjacent road surface.
(7)
Fabricated movement joints shall not impair the riding quality of the
road surface for vehicular traffic and the passage of vehicular traffic shall
not cause undue noise or vibration. The size of gaps, including gaps
sealed with flexible material, on the riding surface of the joint shall not
exceed 65 mm.
(8)
The passage of pedestrians and cyclists shall not be impeded or
endangered by fabricated movement joints.
Design of fixings for
fabricated movement
joints
20.64
(1)
The holding down and fixing arrangements for fabricated movement
joints shall be capable of withstanding the loads stated in Clause 20.63(2).
The diameter of bolts fixed as double row bolts on one side shall be at least
12 mm and the diameter of other holding down bolts and studs shall be at
least 16 mm.
(2)
Fixings for fabricated movement joints shall be compatible with the
reinforcement in the underlying concrete.
Any revisions to the
reinforcement required to suit the fixings shall be designed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
20.19
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
movement joints
20.65
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed movement joints shall be
(a)
Details of type of movement joint and the name and address of

the manufacturer,
(b)
Design calculations and drawings,
(c)
Details of fixings, including the size, length and spacing of

holding down bolts and any necessary revisions to the
reinforcement,
(d)
Details of materials for making good adjoining road surfaces

and nosings, including reinforcement, jointing and curing
details,
(e)
Programme of manufacture, testing and delivery, and
(f)
For fabricated movement joints, a written undertaking from

the supplier that he will install the proposed movement joint.
(2)
before construction of the movement joint starts.
Storage of fabricated
movement joints
20.66
Fabricated movement joints shall be stored off a levelled, well drained and
maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and in a manner that
will not result in damage or deformation to the movement joint or in
contamination of the movement joint.
INSTALLATION
JOINTS
Installation of
fabricated movement
joints
20.67
OF
FABRICATED
MOVEMENT
(1)
Fabricated movement joints shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. The installation shall be carried out by
the supplier of the movement joint.
(2)
The vertical faces of recesses in bridge decks for fabricated
movement joints shall be formed by saw-cutting. Holding-down bolts
shall be cast into the concrete for direct mounting of the joints unless the
Engineer permits the bolts to be grouted. If grouting is permitted, the
grouting shall be carried out by setting the movement joint in position and
grouting the gap between the movement joint and the structure. Rebates
and pockets for subsequent trimming to line and level or for holding-down
bolts shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer.
(3)
The bedding to fabricated movement joints shall be formed such
that there shall be no gaps between the joint and the bedding.
20.20
2006 Edition
(4)
Relative movement between components and supports of a
fabricated movement joint shall be prevented during installation of the joint
and during placing and hardening of concrete and mortar under the
components. Joint components shall be free to move longitudinally
relative to each other.
(5)
When one side of a fabricated movement joint is being set, the other
side shall be free from longitudinal restraint. Strongbacks or templates used
to locate the sides of a joint shall not be fixed to both sides at any one time.
Road surface adjoining
fabricated movement
joints
20.68
(1)
The gap between fabricated movement joints and the adjoining road
surface or nosing shall be made good after installation of the joint with
material that has properties as similar as practicable to those of the material
in the adjoining road surface.
(2)
Bituminous road surfaces shall be made good with a bituminous
mixture or elastomeric concrete. Concrete road surfaces shall be made
good with a cementitious matrix reinforced with metal or glass fibres or with
elastomeric or polymer concrete. Epoxy resin mortar shall not be used.
(3)
Elastomeric and polymer concrete shall be prepared, laid and cured
Protection of fabricated
movement joints
20.69
(1)
construction plant or other vehicles cross a fabricated movement joint or
the adjacent road surface.
(2)
Construction plant or other vehicles shall not cross the fabricated
movement joints or adjacent road surfaces until installation of the joint is
complete or unless permitted by the Engineer. If permitted by the Engineer,
ramps shall be provided to allow the vehicles to cross without applying loads
to the joint.
CONSTRUCTION OF MOVEMENT JOINTS FORMED

IN PLACE
Forming movement
joints
20.70
Gaps forming part of movement joints formed in place shall be filled with
joint filler fixed in position with adhesive. The edge of the joint filler
shall be covered with bond breaker tape or a PVC capping strip.
Forming grooves
20.71
Grooves for joint sealant and compression seals for movement joints
formed in place shall be formed by saw cutting.
Sealing grooves
20.72
Grooves for movement joints formed in place shall be sealed with joint
sealant or with a compression seal.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
fabricated movement
joints
20.73
The surface of fabricated movement joints shall be at least 1 mm, and not
more than 3 mm, below the surrounding road surface.
20.21
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 20.1
FRICTION TEST FOR BRIDGE BEARINGS
Scope
20.1.1
This method covers the determination of the coefficient of friction, flatness,

bonding properties and resistance to mechanical damage of bridge bearings
by means of a friction test.
Equipment
20.1.2
Procedure
20.1.3
(a)
Compression testing rig.
(b)
Test loads.
(c)

within 2% of the measured load.
(d)
Equipment for measuring movement, readable and accurate to 0.01

mm.
(e)
Lubricant of the same type as will be used in service.

(a)
The PTFE surface of the bearing shall be lubricated with the

lubricant.
(b)
Two sets of sliding surfaces shall be mounted back to back between

the platens of the compression testing rig with the stainless steel
sliding surfaces in the centre. A vertical load equal to the
permanent load stated in the schedule of bearings shall be applied
for 1 hour.
(c)
A horizontal load shall then be applied steadily and without shock to

the pair of stainless steel sliding surfaces and shall be increased at a
rate of 0.2% of the vertical load per minute until movement occurs
between the sliding surfaces. The maximum horizontal load
sufficient to cause movement of at least 25 mm between the
stainless steel and PTFE sliding surfaces at a rate not exceeding 50
mm/min shall be recorded.
(d)
The loads shall be removed.
(e)
The sliding surfaces shall be removed from the rig and inspected.
Calculation
20.1.4
The coefficient of friction shall be calculated from the equation:
20.1.5

(a)
Name of bearing manufacturer.
(b)
Details of bearing and sliding surfaces.
(c)
The vertical load applied.
(d)
The maximum horizontal force applied.

20.22
2006 Edition
(e)
The total movement and rate of movement at the maximum

horizontal force applied.
(f)
The coefficient of friction to two significant figures.
(g)
Details of any damage to the sliding surfaces.
(h)
20.23
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 21
MARINE WORKS
21.1
2006 Edition
21.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 21
MARINE WORKS
GENERAL
21.01
Pipes and fittings
21.02
Pipes and fittings, including gaskets, internal linings, external coatings and
anticorrosion tape, for submarine outfalls shall comply with Section 5.
Fill material
21.03
Fill material for marine works shall comply with Section 6.
Public filling area
21.04
Reclamation in form of public filling area shall comply with Section 6

except the requirements for compaction of public fill.
Formwork
21.05
Steel reinforcement
21.06
Concrete
21.07
Concrete shall comply with Appendix 21.2 entitled Specification for

Reinforced Concrete in Marine Environment to address the corrosion of
reinforced concrete for marine structures and also shall comply with
Section 16 in general.
Joints in concrete
21.08
Joints in concrete in seawalls shall comply with Section 16 and shall also
comply with Appendix 21.2 entitled Specification for Reinforced
Concrete in Marine Environment.
Amd 2/2010
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Reclamation
21.09
Reclamation is the formation of land over an area of foreshore, sea-bed,

tidal inlet or river, including the adjoining areas, by the deposition of fill
material to the limits stated in the Contract.
Marine structures
21.10
Marine structures are seawalls, revetments, breakwaters, jetties, quay walls,

dolphins, docks, slipways, beacons, lighthouses, landing steps for berthing
of vessels and other similar structures.
Final surface of any

work
21.11
Final surface of any work is the surface to which the work is to be finished.
MATERIALS
Fill material for
marine works
21.12
(1)
The different types of fill material for reclamation shall either be
Type 1, Type 2, rock or inert construction and demolition material or
recycled rock fill material as specified in the Contract. The fill material,
other than public fill as stated in Clause 6.59, shall have the particle size
distributions of an appropriate type of fill material within the ranges
stated in Table 6.1 and Table 21.1 unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
21.3
2006 Edition
Amd 4/2009
(2)
The different types of fill material for marine structures shall either
be Type 1, Type 2 or rock as specified in the Contract and shall have the
particle size distributions of appropriate type of fill material within the
ranges stated in Table 6.1 and Table 21.1 unless otherwise stated in the
Contract.
(3)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, inert construction and
demolition materials shall not be used as rockfill materials in marine
structures
(4)
Underwater fill material (Type 1) shall consist of natural material
extracted from the seabed or a riverbed.
(5)
Underwater fill material (Type 2) shall consist of material that has a
coefficient of uniformity exceeding 5 and a plasticity index not exceeding
12.
(6)
Rock fill material (Grade 75) shall consist of pieces of hard, durable
rock, which are free from cracks, veins, discolouration, and other evidence
of decomposition.
(7)
Rock fill material (Grade 700) shall consist of pieces of rock which
are free from cracks, veins and similar defects and of which in the opinion
of the Engineer not more than 30% by mass shall be discoloured or show
other evidence of decomposition.
(8) Recycled rock fill material (Grade 200) shall be recycled rock or
inert construction and demolition material which is hard and durable, and
free from cracks, veins, and other evidence of decomposition. Amd 4/2009
Table 21.1: Particle size distributions of fill material for marine works
Size
BS test sieve size
700 mm
200 mm
75 mm
20 mm
63 m
Underwater fill
material (Type 1)
100
0 30
Underwater fill
material (Type 2)
100
0 25
Rock fill material

(Grade 75)
100
0-5
Rock fill material

(Grade 700)
100
0 - 10
0-5
Recycled rock fill material

(Grade 700)
100
0 - 10
0-5
21.4
Amd 4/2009
2006 Edition
Rock armour
21.13
(1)
The different types of rock armour shall have the maximum and
minimum masses as stated in Table 21.2 or as specified in the Contract.
At least 50% in number of the individual pieces shall have a mass
exceeding the mean of the specified maximum and minimum masses.
(2)
Rock armour shall consist of rock having the properties stated in
Table 21.3 and shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
The maximum size of rock shall not be greater than twice the
minimum dimension.
(b)
Each piece of rock shall be free from cracks, veins and similar
defects.
(c)
In the opinion of the Engineer not more than 20% in number of

the individual pieces shall be discoloured or show other
evidence of decomposition.
Table 21.2: Mass of rock armour

Mass of individual piece of rock (kg)
Maximum
Minimum
Rock armour (Type 1)
1500
750
2000
1000
2500
1500
3000
2000
4000
2500
5000
3000
6500
4000
Table 21.3: Properties of rock for rock armour

Property
Value
Specific gravity
2.6
Water absorption
3%
Aggregate impact value (in dry condition)
30%
Ten percent fines value (in dry condition)
100 kN
Soundness
loss in mass after five cycles not exceeding

12% for sodium sulphate and 18% for
magnesium sulphate
15%
Aggregate abrasion value

21.5
2006 Edition
Rock for underlayer
21.14
Rock for underlayer of rock armour shall have the same properties as the
rock armour as stated in Clause 21.13 except that the weight and size of
the rock shall be in accordance with the requirements as specified in the
Contract.
Facing stones
21.15
(1)
Facing stones to seawalls and pitched slopes shall consist of pieces
of hard, durable fresh granite, free from cracks, veins, and similar defects.
Facing stones shall be uniform in size, shape and colour, roughly squared
and hammer dressed such that they will fit together without the use of
quarry spalls or surface pinning.
(2)
Facing stones for vertical concrete seawalls shall be at least 300
mm wide on the face, at least 300 mm from back to front and shall be of a
height which will allow the stones to be laid in 300 mm to 400 mm
courses.
Bermstones
21.16
(1)
Bermstones for seawalls and revetments shall consist of pieces of
sound fresh rock or concrete free from cracks and similar defects. Rock
shall also be free of veins.
(2)
Bermstones for vertical seawalls shall be at least 1000 kg in mass
and when placed in position shall be roughly rectangular on plan and
between 450 mm and 750 mm thick.
Levelling stones
21.17
Stones for levelling founding layers for marine structures shall be rock fill
material (Grade 75) as stated in Clause 21.12.
Joint filler for slip

joints
21.18
(1)
Joint filler for slip joints in seawalls shall consist of three plies of
Type 1B fine granule surfaced bitumen felt of 1.4 kg/m nominal mass in
accordance with BS EN 13707.
Amd 4/2010
(2)
Adhesive for use with joint filler shall be a proprietary type
recommended by the joint filler manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
Iron and steel fittings

for marine structures
21.19
Iron and steel fittings for marine structures shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
Cast iron for bollards, pumphouse screens and screen guides

shall be Grade EN-GJL-150 complying with BS EN 1561.
Amd 4/2010
(b)
Mild steel bolts and nuts shall comply with BS 3692.
(c)
Mild steel washers shall comply with BS 4320.
(d)
Mild steel chain shall be Grade 30 steel complying with BS

6405.
(e)
Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall comply with Grade A4 and
property class 80 of BS EN ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO
3506-2.
(f)
Stainless steel washers shall be Grade 1.4401 austenitic steel

complying with BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051
+ A1, BS EN 10088-2, BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445.
The dimensions and tolerances of stainless steel washers shall
21.6
2006 Edition
comply with BS 4320.

(g)
Stainless steel for chains, railings, cat ladders, pumphouse

screens and screen guides, mooring eyes and other marine
fittings shall be Grade 1.4401 austenitic steel complying with
the following:
Specification for
stainless and
heat-resisting steel
plate, sheet and strip
Timber for fendering

systems
21.20
: BS EN 10088-2
: BS EN 10029,
BS EN 10048,
BS EN 10051 + A1,
BS EN 10095,
BS EN ISO 9445
Amd 3/2010
(1)
Timber for fendering systems shall be Selangan Batu species, also
known as Yacal and Balau, or a similar species of hardwood visually stress
graded to the HS (Hardwood Structural) grade of BS 5756. The species
shall comply with the strength requirements for strength class SC8 or SC9
as stated in BS 5268: Part 2, shall be resistant to mechanical wearing and
marine borer attack, and shall comply with the requirements stated in
Table 21.4.
(2)
Kempas, Kapur and other hardwoods that are less resistant in a
marine environment shall be pressure treated with creosote in accordance
with BS 144 and BS 5589 or with copper, chrome and arsenic (CCA) salts
in accordance with BS 4072. The minimum net retention for pressure
creosoting shall be 130 kg/m3 and the minimum net dry salt retention for
treatment with CCA shall be 30 kg/m3.
Table 21.4: Properties of timber for fendering systems

Property
Minimum value
Oven dry density
655 kg/m3
Static bending at rupture
56 MPa
Modulus of elasticity
under bending
8700 MPa
Hardness (Janka indentation test)
3200 N
Compressive stress
parallel to grain at
maximum load
29 MPa
Shear stress parallel to

grain at maximum load
6.5 MPa
21.7
2006 Edition
Rubber for fenders
21.21
Rubber for fenders shall be natural or synthetic rubber resistant to ageing,

weathering and wearing and shall have the properties stated in Table 21.5.
The material shall be homogeneous and free from defective impurities,
pores or cracks.
Table 21.5: Properties of rubber for fenders

Property
Value
Test method and condition

Part No. of BS 903
3
Density
1100 kg/m to
3
1300 kg/m
Part A1
Hardness (International rubber

hardness degrees)
72
BS ISO 48
Method N
Tensile strength
16 N/mm
BS ISO 37
Elongation change
350%
BS ISO 37
After accelerated air ageing test:

Hardness (increase in IRHD)
Reduction in tensile strength
Reduction in elongation
8
20%
20%
BS ISO 188
Method A at
70C x 96 hours
Oil resistance (measured by

volume change percentage)
Industrial gasoline
Heavy oil
60%
20%
BS ISO 1817 at
23C x 22 hours Amd 4/2010
Compression set
30%
Part A6 Method A
at 70C x 22 hours
using Type 2 test
pieces
Ozone resistance
no crack visible
BS ISO 1431-1 at
40C x 100 hours
Tear resistance
60 kN/m
BS ISO 34-1
Method C at 23C
Amd 4/2010
Abrasion resistance (volume

loss at 3000 revolutions)
Plastic fenders
21.22
1500 mm
Part A9
Method C
(1)
Plastic fender shall be a composite material that is formed by
recycled plastic and reinforced by fibreglass bar. The recycled plastic
consists of a mixture of high-density polyethylene, low density
polyethylene, and polypropylene obtained from recycled plastic materials.
(2)
Plastic fender shall be black in colour or as instructed by the
Engineer.
21.8
2006 Edition
(3)
Each plastic fender shall be reinforced with fibreglass bar. The
proposed arrangement of fibreglass bar shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
(4)
For rectangular section of plastic fender, the corner shall be right
angle or rounded as instructed by the Engineer.
(5)
Recycled plastic shall comply with the requirements of Table 21.6.
Table 21.6 Physical properties of plastic fenders

Physical Property
Value
Standard
Hardness
Min. 40 (skin material)
ASTM D2240 (Shore D)
1. No obvious change in colour or uniformity.

Ultraviolet Resistance
Loading Test
Paint for marine works
2. Less than 10% change in Shore D durometer

hardness as before ultraviolet test.
The applied test load and allowable deflection at mid
span shall not exceed the values specified by the
Engineer.
21.23
ASTM D4329
(min. 500 hrs exposure)
Appendix 21.1
(1)
Priming coat for temporary tide gauges shall be lead based priming
paint complying with BS 2523. Undercoat and finishing coat for
temporary tide gauges shall be micaceous iron oxide paint complying with
BS EN ISO 10601.
Amd 4/2010
(2)
Primer for steel fittings for fendering systems shall be lead based
primer complying with BS 2523.
(3)
Bituminous paint for fendering systems shall comply with BS 3416.
(4)
Creosote for pressure treatment of timber shall be of Type 2 coal tar
creosote as stated in BS 144: Part 1.
Precast concrete pipes
and fittings for
submarine outfalls
21.24
(1)
Precast concrete pipes for submarine outfalls shall comply with BS
5911-1 and shall have gasket type flexible rebated joints with clamps and
bolts.
(2)
The clamps and bolts shall be cast steel complying with BS EN
10293 and shall be painted with two coats of coal tar epoxy of a type
approved by the Engineer to a dry film thickness of 300 m.
(3)
Gaskets for joints in precast concrete pipes shall be Type WC
(drainage) rubber gaskets complying with BS EN 681-1. The rubber
gaskets shall be moulded jointless in ring moulds and shall not contain any
reclaimed rubber.
Amd 4/2010
(4)
Epoxy resin for joints between precast concrete pipes shall be of a
(5)
Marker buoys shall be of a hard plastic type approved by the

Engineer.
21.9
2006 Edition
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of marine
works
21.25
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed marine works shall be
(a)
Any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Director of

Marine and other authorities, including copies of applications,
licences, permits and correspondence, and
(b)
Details of methods for controlling marine traffic,
(2)
before marine works start.
Particulars of dredging
21.26
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed methods of dredging shall
(a) Any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Director of
Environmental Protection and other authorities for disposal of
dredged material, including copies of applications, marine
dumping permits and correspondence,
(b) Type and capacity of dredgers,
(c)
Methods of anchorage and positioning of dredgers,
(d)
Sequence and rate of working,
(e)
Details of silt curtain for dredging as stated in Clause 21.54,

including manufacturers literature, and
(f)
Arrangements for the transportation and disposal of dredged

material.
(2)
before dredging starts.
Particulars of
deposition of fill
material
21.27
(1)
deposition of fill material shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of construction plant and transport,
(b)
Sources and properties as required in accordance with Clauses

21.12 and 21.13, of each type of fill material,
(c)
Details of silt curtain for filling as stated in Clause 21.56,

including manufacturers literature,
(d)
Details of refuse containment booms as stated in Clause 21.49,
(e)
Methods of deposition and compaction of fill material,
(f)
Methods of controlling moisture content of fill material, and
(g)
Sequence and rate of working.
21.10
2006 Edition
(2)
The following particulars shall also be submitted if the proposed
method involves deposition of fill material by hydraulic methods:
(a)
Layout plan showing the pumpline alignments and positions

of the discharge points,
(b)
Calculations of the rate and duration of discharge, and
(c)
Details of containment bunds and tailwater drainage systems.
(3)
before deposition of fill material starts.
Particulars of lifting
seawall blocks, copings
and wave deflectors
21.28
Particulars of the proposed methods and devices to be used for lifting

precast concrete seawall blocks, seawall copings and wave deflectors shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before lifting starts.
Particulars of rock
armour and rock for
underlayer
21.29
Particulars of the proposed methods and devices to be used for placing and
weighing rock armour and rock for underlayer of rock armour and the
testing certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days
before commencement of the deposition of rock armour and rock for
underlayer.
Particulars of slip
joints
21.30
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed joint filler to slip joints in
seawalls shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of joint filler, including manufacturers literature, and
(b)
Method of fixing and application of the materials.
(2)
before the first delivery of the material to the Site.
Particulars of timber
for fendering systems
21.31
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed timber for fendering
systems shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Species and grade of timber,
(b)
Name and address of timber supplier, and
(c)
Method of pressure treatment and amount of net retention.
(2)
before the first delivery of the timber to the Site.
(3)
Each batch of the timber delivered to the Site shall be accompanied
by a certificate issued by a forestry authority approved by the Engineer or a
bill of lading certifying the country of origin, method of pressure
treatment, and grade and species of the timber.
Particulars of rubber
fenders
21.32
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed rubber fenders shall be
(a) Manufacturers literature, including a list of physical properties
of the rubber for the fenders, and
(b)
A report on compression load tests and characteristic

load-deflection and energy-deflection curves.
21.11
2006 Edition
(2)
The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of
the source and type of rubber fenders at least 30 days before the first
delivery of the rubber fenders to the Site.
(3)
A certificate showing the manufacturers name, the date and place
of manufacture and showing that the rubber fenders, including the rubber
used in manufacturing the fenders, comply with the requirements stated in
the Contract, shall be submitted for each batch of rubber fenders delivered
to the Site.
Particulars of plastic
fenders
Particulars of
submarine outfalls
21.33
21.34
The following particulars of the proposed plastic fenders shall be

(a)
Manufacturers literature including a list of physical properties

of plastic fender in accordance with Table 21.6,
(b)
Composition of plastic materials and type of fibreglass bar,
(c)
Workshop drawing of the proposed plastic fender,
(d)
The Contractor shall provide the latest test certificates, not

more than 1 year, in accordance with Table 21.6, and
(e)
A certificate showing the manufacturers name, the date and

place of manufacture and complying with the requirements
(1)
construction for submarine outfalls shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Methods of lifting, laying, jointing and testing pipes,
(b)
Manufacturers literature, and
(c)
A certificate for pipes and pipe joints showing the

showing that the pipes comply with the requirements stated in
the Contract and including the results of load tests.
(2)
before the first delivery of the material to the Site. Certificates shall be
submitted for each batch of the material delivered to the Site.
Particulars of
demolition of marine
structures
21.35
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed methods of demolition of
marine structures shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Details of construction plant,
(b)
Method and sequence of demolition, and
(c)
Arrangement for on-site sorting of demolition debris.
(2)
before demolition starts.
21.12
2006 Edition

Storage of fill material
and dredged material
21.36
Fill material and dredged material shall not be stockpiled on the foreshore,
seabed or riverbed within the Site unless permitted by the Engineer.

of fill material
21.37
(1)
Fill material shall not be handled or stored in a manner that will
result in segregation, deterioration, erosion or instability of the material.
(2)
Different types of fill material shall be kept separate from each
other.

of precast concrete
seawall blocks, copings
and wave deflectors
21.38

of timber fenders
21.39
(1)
Precast concrete seawall blocks, copings and wave deflectors shall
be stored in such a manner that identification markings can be easily seen.
(2)
be stored on level supports and in a manner which will not result in
damage or deformation to the units or in contamination of the units. The
units shall be protected from damage and damaged units shall not be used
in the permanent work unless permitted by the Engineer.
(1)
Timber for fendering systems shall be stored off levelled,
well-drained and maintained hard-standing ground on level supports and
shall be protected from exposure to conditions which may cause reduction
in the moisture content in the material.
(2)
Timber which is treated with preservatives shall not be stored on or
adjacent to concrete surfaces that form part of the permanent work.
(3)
Safety precautions as recommended by the timber treatment
company shall be observed in the handling of treated timber. Treated
wood offcuts shall be buried in a suitable location, or burnt in an open area
and the ashes buried.
(4)
Safety precautions as recommended by the supplier of wood
preservatives shall be observed in the handling of the wood preservatives.

of rubber fenders and
fittings
21.40
(1)
Rubber fenders and fittings shall be left in their original packing
until required for placing. All rubber surfaces shall be protected against
damage.
(2)
Rubber fenders shall be handled with nylon slings of a size agreed
by the Engineer or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.

of plastic fenders
21.41
(1)
Plastic fender for fendering systems shall be stored off levelled,
well drained and maintained hard-standing ground on level supports.
(2)
Identification shall be marked on the surface of ends including the
following information:
(i)
Name of manufacturer and model number,
(ii) Place and date of manufacture, and

(iii) Unique serial number.
21.13
2006 Edition
GENERAL MARINE WORKS REQUIREMENTS

Notification of marine
works
21.42
Before commencing marine works, the Contractor shall provide the

Engineer with evidence that the Director of Marine has been notified of the
proposed works in accordance with Section 70 of the Shipping and Port
Control Regulations, Chapter 313.
Marking of marine
works
21.43
Marine works and any part of the Site in which marine works are carried
out shall be marked with flags, marker buoys and lights in accordance
with the International Association of Lighthouse Authorities Maritime
Buoyage System (current edition as adopted by Marine Department) for
Region A and in a manner agreed by the Engineer. Red flags shall be at
least 0.6 m square and marker buoys shall be of a type, size and colour
approved by the Engineer. Lights shall be either fixed red lights or
quick flashing yellow lights visible all round the horizon at a distance of
at least 2 km.
Marine traffic and

waterfront operations
21.44
(1)
Marine traffic and the operation of public and private concerns in
areas adjacent to the Site shall not be obstructed by the activities of the
Contractor.
(2)
The Contractor shall make all arrangements with and obtain the
necessary approvals from the Director of Marine and any other relevant
authority for temporary marine traffic arrangements and control.
Temporary tide gauges
21.45
(1)
Temporary tide gauges shall be mounted vertically and firmly on
rigid supports at locations agreed by the Engineer at all times during
execution of the marine works and shall be calibrated, levelled and fixed to
give tidal readings within an accuracy of 20 mm.
(2)
Temporary tide gauges shall be made of 50 mm thick hardwood or
other replacement material approved by the Engineer and shall be at least
250 mm by 3200 mm in size. The gauges shall be painted on the marked
faces with alternate 100 mm stripes in red and white and shall be marked
and numbered in black at 0.5 m intervals over the tidal range from 0.0 m
C.D. to +3.0 m C.D. The painting applied shall consist of one primary
coat, one undercoat and one finishing coat.
Work boats
21.46
(1)
Work boats shall be motorised boats equipped with a rain shelter
and capable of carrying at least six passengers.
(2)
Work boats shall be licensed under the Merchant Shipping
(Launches and Ferry Vessels) Regulations, Chapter 281 and shall be
manned and maintained in good seaworthy condition.
(3)
Work boats shall be kept available for use by the Engineer for
supervision, inspection and measurement during normal working hours
and at other times when the Contractor is working.
Silt curtains
21.47
(1)
The Contractor shall provide silt curtains during all kind of works
that may affect the water bodies adjacent to the Site as detailed on the
Drawings or as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
responsible for designing, agreeing with the Engineer, installing and
properly maintaining the silt curtains throughout the duration of the above
works. The Contractor shall, not later than 3 weeks before the
21.14
2006 Edition
commencement of the relevant works, submit details of silt curtains to be

used, including dimensions, exact locations and method of installation and
removal, to the Engineer for approval.
(2)
Silt curtains shall be formed by using tough, abrasion-resistant and
permeable membranes suitable for the purpose, supported on floating
booms in such a way as to ensure that the passage of turbid water to the
surrounding water shall be restricted. The permeable membranes shall be
of a type with properties approved by the Engineer.
(3)
The boom of the silt curtains shall be formed and installed in such a
way that tidal rise and fall are accommodated, and that the ingress of
turbid waters is limited. Removal and reinstallation of such curtains
during typhoon conditions shall be agreed with the Engineer and the
Director of Marine.
(4)
The Contractor shall carry out regular inspections to ensure that the
silt curtains are adequately moored and marked to avoid any danger to
marine traffic. The Contractor shall promptly repair any damage to the
silt curtains to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(5)
The Contractor shall be responsible for re-positioning of the silt
curtains to suit the construction programme.
Removal of floating
debris
21.48
Floating debris within the Site arising from any source shall be collected
and disposed of by the Contractor at regular intervals agreed by the
Engineer. Floating debris shall be prevented from dispersing outside the
Site.
Refuse containment
booms and floating
refuse for use of inert
construction and
demolition material in
reclamation
21.49
(1)
If inert construction and demolition material is used as fill material
in reclamation, refuse containment booms as detailed on the Drawings shall
be provided and installed before dumping of fill material into the sea
commences.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide sinker blocks and lit marker buoys as
agreed by the Engineer to ensure that the booms are visible above the water
line and are securely anchored. The lights on the marker buoys shall
comply with the following requirements unless otherwise stated in the
Contract:
(a)
In the type of quick flashing yellow lights visible all round the
horizon at a distance of at least 2 km, and
(b)
The maximum spacing between the lights shall be 30 m.
(3)
Details of the proposed lights on the marker buoys shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before installation starts.
(4)
The Contractor shall properly maintain and operate the booms to the
satisfaction of the Engineer throughout the progress of the reclamation and
shall replace the same when they are under repair or beyond repair.
(5)
The refuse containment booms shall revert to the Contractor upon
the completion of reclamation or at such earlier date as instructed by the
Engineer.
21.15
2006 Edition
(6)
The Contractor shall provide light mechanized marine craft with
crew and labour as agreed with the Engineer for collecting floating refuse
and preventing floating refuse within the Site from drifting into public
waters. Floating refuse collected shall be disposed off-site in accordance
with the requirements of Trip-ticket System as stated in Section 1.
(7)
The Contractor shall make due allowance in programming the
reclamation works for the provision, installation, operation and
maintenance of the refuse booms and the regular collection of the floating
refuse throughout the process of reclamation.
Surveys for marine
works
21.50
(1)
Surveys for dredging and deposition of fill material shall be carried
out using echo sounders of 200 kHz to 220 kHz frequency or by other
(2)
The initial survey for dredging shall be carried out within 30 days
before dredging starts.
(3)
The final survey for dredging shall be carried out within 30 days
after dredging has been completed.
(4)
The initial survey for deposition of fill material shall be taken as
being the same as the final survey for dredging, or the final survey for the
underlying layer of fill material as appropriate, except as stated in Clause
21.50(5).
(5)
If the final survey for dredging or the final survey for the
underlying layer of fill material was carried out more than 30 days before
deposition of the next layer of fill material starts, the initial survey for
deposition of fill material shall be carried out within 30 days before
deposition of the layer of fill material starts.
(6)
The final survey for deposition of fill material for the first layers,
intermediate layers, and final layers of underwater foundations shall be
carried out within 30 days after deposition of fill material has been
completed. The final survey for final layers other than those of
underwater foundations shall be carried out at least 30 days and not more
than 90 days after deposition of fill material has been completed.
Fill material allowed to

become unsuitable or
to deteriorate
21.51
(1)
Fill material which has been used or is required for use in the
permanent work and which is allowed to become unsuitable such that in
the opinion of the Engineer it no longer complies with the specified
requirements for that type of material shall be replaced or dealt with by
(2)
The material to be replaced shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
(3)
Disposal of the unsuitable fill material shall be in accordance with
the Contractors Waste Management Plan.
Concreting in locations
affected by tides
21.52
Concreting in locations affected by tides shall be carried out in dry

conditions unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. After concreting
is complete, the top of the concrete shall be covered with polyethylene
sheets fixed to the formwork.
21.16
2006 Edition
DREDGING
Commencement of
dredging
21.53
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before dredging starts in

any area.
Dredging
21.54
(1)
Dredging shall be carried out in such a manner and sequence that
semi-fluid or disturbed seabed or foundation material will not accumulate
in dredged areas.
(2)
Dredging shall be carried out with due care in the vicinity of
existing structures.
(3)
During dredging, samples shall be taken from the dredged materials
for inspection and determination of the sand content. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer if there is any sudden or significant change in the
properties of dredged material.
(4)
Dredged material shall be disposed of by the Contractor in the
dumping ground stated in the Contract.
(5)
Silt curtains shall be provided as stated in Clause 21.47 before
dredging commences so as to minimize water quality impact on
surrounding environment.
DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL BELOW +2.5 m PD

Commencement of
deposition of fill
material
21.55
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before deposition of fill

material starts in any area.
Deposition of fill
material
21.56
(1)
Fill material shall be deposited in a manner and sequence such that
minimum lateral displacement of the underlying material will be induced
and such that slopes are stable at all times.
(2)
The methods and construction plant used for deposition of fill
material shall be such that segregation of the material does not result. Fill
material shall not be deposited by end-tipping unless permitted by the
Engineer.
(3)
Fill material for blanketing layers and drainage layers shall be
deposited uniformly by a method agreed by the Engineer.
(4)
Silt curtains shall be provided as stated in Clause 21.47 before
filling activities commence so as to minimize water quality impact on
surrounding environment.
Deposition of fill
material in dredged
trenches
21.57
(1)
The first layer of fill material in dredged trenches for seawalls,
revetments and breakwaters shall be deposited as soon as practicable after
the dredged profile has been agreed by the Engineer. The dredged trench
shall be substantially free from silt and debris before deposition of fill
material starts.
21.17
2006 Edition
(2)
Subsequent layers of fill material shall be deposited as soon as
practicable after the profile of the underlying layer of fill material has been
Deposition of rock fill
21.58
(1)
Rock fill material deposited adjacent to or above structures, piles or
pedestals shall be hand packed or placed by a method approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Rock fill material deposited around utilities, including pipes for
submarine outfalls, shall be hand packed or placed by a method approved
by the Engineer and shall be brought up to the specified level equally on
both sides.
(3)
Rock fill material deposited directly on geotextile shall be deposited
in such a manner that the geotextile is not ruptured.
DEPOSITION OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR

UNDERLAYER
Deposition of rock
armour and rock for
underlayer
21.59
(1)
Each piece of rock armour shall be placed individually and shall not
be deposited by tipping, dumping or dropping.
(2)
Rock armour and rock for underlayer for breakwaters, revetments
and similar structures shall be deposited by working from the bottom to the
top of a section in such a manner and sequence that the individual rock
pieces interlock and do not segregate. The interstices shall be kept free
from small fragments of rock.
(3)
Rock armour and rock for underlayer deposited directly on
geotextile shall be deposited in such a manner that the geotextile is not
ruptured.
LEVELLING AND COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIAL

Levelling of rock fill
material in underwater
foundations
21.60
The top surface of rock fill material in foundations for structures or pipes
shall be thoroughly tamped with a concrete block weighing at least 10 t
dropped through a height of at least 300 mm or by other methods agreed
by the Engineer. The voids at the top of the foundation shall be filled
with rock fill material (Grade 75).
CONSTRUCTION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

Construction of seawall
blocks, copings and
wave deflectors
21.61
(1)
Formwork or moulds for precast concrete seawall blocks, copings
and wave deflectors shall not be loosened or removed in less than 12 hours
after completion of concreting.
(2)
be marked with the date of casting, identification reference and orientation
in the structure. The letters and figures used for marking shall be at least
75 mm high and shall be sufficiently durable to be legible until the unit is
placed in the final position.
21.18
2006 Edition
(3)
Key holes in precast concrete seawall blocks, copings and wave
deflectors shall be kept free from soil, aggregates, concrete and other
materials before and after the blocks are set in position.
Setting of seawall
blocks
21.62
(1)
Seawalls constructed with precast concrete seawall blocks shall be
constructed in layers between slip joints. The blocks shall be set in close
contact with each other. Packing pieces shall not be used unless
(2)
layer is placed on each completed layer of blocks.
Facing stones to
seawalls and
revetments
21.63
(1)
Facing stones to seawalls and revetments shall be built up one
course at a time. The stones shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned
with fresh water before placing and shall be set in 1:3 cement mortar. In
vertical concrete seawalls there shall be at least one header stone to each
square metre of facework. Header stones shall be staggered in alternate
courses.
(2)
Concrete backing behind facing stones shall be placed as soon as
each course of facing stones has been completed.
Slip joints in seawalls
21.64
(1)
Slip joints in seawalls shall be straight and vertical and shall be
perpendicular to the face of the seawall. The joints shall extend through
the seawall from the coping down to the foundation.
(2)
fixed in position to the existing surface with adhesive. Concrete to the
adjacent section of seawall shall be placed directly against the joint filler.
Filling of channels in
seawall blocks
21.65
The channels in precast concrete seawall blocks and backing to seawalls

shall be filled with rock pieces of sizes between 20 mm to 40 mm.
Concrete copings to
seawalls
21.66
Concrete copings to seawalls shall be constructed in lengths of at least 5 m

and not more than 10 m.
Bermstones for marine

structures
21.67
(1)
Bermstones shall be placed as soon as practicable after toe blocks
have been set in position or fill material has been deposited at the toe of
marine structures.
(2)
Bermstones shall be set in close contact with each other and with
the structure. The longitudinal axis of bermstones shall be perpendicular
to the alignment of the structure on plan.
Bagged concrete
21.68
(1)
Bagged concrete shall consist of hessian or canvas bags filled to
approximately 70% full with Grade 30/10 concrete.
(2)
The bags shall be filled and the open ends tied or sewn up
immediately before placing.
(3)
The bags shall be placed in brick bond fashion and flattened into
position. The open ends of the bags shall be directed away from the outside
surface and the spaces between bags and between layers of bags shall be
kept as small as practicable. Bags shall not be disturbed after placing.
21.19
2006 Edition
Cutting and jointing

timber for fendering
systems
21.69
(1)
The finished surfaces of timber for fendering systems shall be free
from irregularities. The timber shall not be cut by force splitting.
(2)
Timber which is to be pressure treated with preservatives shall be
machined to the specified dimensions, sizes and shapes before treatment.
(3)
Drilling of holes and cutting of notches and recesses in timber shall
be completed before painting and installation starts.
(4)
Pieces of timber shall not be jointed to form a member for the
fendering system unless otherwise stated in the Contract.
(5)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer pressure treated timber
shall not be cut or drilled for holes after the treatment process. If cutting
or drilling is permitted, surfaces exposed by cutting or drilling shall be
field-treated as stated in Clauses 21.69(6) and 21.69(7).
(6)
Exposed surfaces of timber treated with creosote shall be
field-treated by brushing, spraying or dipping with hot creosote.
(7)
Exposed surfaces of timber treated with CCA salts shall be
field-treated by brushing or dipping with either a 100 g/L solution of the
wood preservative or a solution suitable for after-fabrication treatment as
recommended in BS 4072.
Painting to timber
fendering systems
21.70
(1)
Timber members in fendering systems shall be painted with two
coats of bituminous paint before installation.
(2)
Steel fittings for fendering systems, other than the threaded portions
of bolts, nuts and other fittings, shall be painted with one coat of primer
and two coats of bituminous paint before installation. The minimum
thickness of each coat shall be 300 m.
(3)
Bolt heads, shanks and nuts on the outer face of timber fendering
systems shall be recessed into notches at a distance of 25 mm below the
surface of the fenders. The notches shall be filled flush with the surface
with a sealant composed of one part of bitumen and two parts of cement.
Installation of rubber
fenders
21.71
Timber or steel base templates shall be used to position anchor bolts for
rubber fenders.
TRIALS FOR SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

Trials for submarine
outfalls
21.72
(1)
A trial shall be carried out to demonstrate that the proposed
methods of lifting, laying and jointing pipes for submarine outfalls,
including jointing of riser pipes to the diffuser pipes, comply with the
specified requirements. The trial shall include a demonstration by a
method agreed by the Engineer that the joints between the riser pipes and
the diffuser pipes are sufficiently strong to withstand the forces which will
be applied during construction of the submarine outfall.
(2)
The trial shall be carried out at least 14 days before pipelaying
starts.
21.20
2006 Edition
Results of trials for

submarine outfalls
21.73
If in the opinion of the Engineer the proposed methods of lifting, laying

and jointing pipes as demonstrated by the submarine outfall trial do not
comply with the specified requirements, particulars of proposed changes
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trials shall be carried out until
in the opinion of the Engineer the methods are satisfactory.
Commencement of
pipe-laying for
submarine outfalls
21.74
Pipe-laying for submarine outfalls shall not start until in the opinion of the
Engineer, the methods of lifting, laying and jointing pipes as demonstrated
by the submarine outfall trial are satisfactory.
CONSTRUCTION OF SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

Laying of submarine
outfall pipes
21.75
(1)
Pipes for submarine outfalls shall be marked with fluorescent paint
such that the sequence of laying will be seen on underwater photographs.
The letters and numbers used for marking shall be at least 100 mm high
and shall be painted in orange on a white background.
(2)
Before submarine outfall pipes are laid, a guide rail of mild steel
channel or other material agreed by the Engineer, painted with fluorescent
paint, shall be laid on the levelling stones to provide a visible aid for laying
pipes.
(3)
During construction of submarine outfalls, the open ends of the
outfall pipes and riser pipes shall be temporarily capped by a method
agreed by the Engineer to prevent the entry of silt or fill material.
Marker blocks for

submarine outfalls
21.76
(1)
Concrete marker blocks for submarine outfalls shall be placed on
top of the fill material along the alignment of the pipeline as soon as
deposition of fill material has been completed.
(2)
Concrete marker blocks shall be marked with fluorescent paint.
The letters and numbers used for marking shall be at least 100 mm high
and shall be painted in orange on a white background.
(3)
Concrete marker blocks shall be linked by coloured nylon ropes of
at least 25 mm diameter.
Diffuser pipes for

submarine outfalls
21.77
Epoxy resin joints between riser pipes and diffuser pipes shall be made in
dry conditions.
Diffuser caps for

submarine outfalls
21.78
(1)
Diffuser caps shall be placed on top of the open ends of riser pipes
and precast end plates shall be placed on the open end of the outfall within
7 days after the pipeline has been tested.
(2)
Marker buoys shall be tied to the diffuser caps with 1 m long nylon
ropes of 6 mm diameter.
21.21
2006 Edition
DEMOLITION OF MARINE STRUCTURES

Demolition of marine
structures
21.79
(1)
Demolition shall be carried out by methods approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Demolition shall be carried out in such a manner and sequence that
will facilitate recovering as much reusable and recycled material as
possible.
(3)
The Contractor shall take measures to sort out and separate the
demolition debris on site to recover the reusable and/or recyclable material
before disposal.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: dredging
21.80
The final surface of dredging shall be within 300 mm of the specified

surface.
Tolerances: deposition
of fill material
21.81
(1)
The final surface of deposition and compaction of fill material,
measured perpendicular to the specified surface, shall comply with the
(a)
Top surfaces to receive levelling stones shall be not more than

75 mm above, and not more than 250 mm below, the specified
surface.
(b)
Top surfaces of levelling stones shall be within 25 mm of the

specified surface for foundations of structures and shall be
within 50 mm of the specified surface for submarine outfalls.
(c)
Other top surfaces shall be within 250 mm of the specified

surface.
(2)
There shall be no abrupt change in level of the finished surface of
reclamation and levelling stones.
Tolerances: precast
concrete seawall blocks
and copings
21.82
Precast concrete seawall blocks and copings shall be within 25 mm of the

specified position. The gaps between adjacent blocks and between
successive layers of blocks shall not exceed 20 mm.
Tolerances:
timber fendering
systems
21.83
(1)
The dimensions of members of timber fendering systems shall be
within 5 mm of the specified dimensions.
(2)
The levels and positions of timber fendering systems shall comply
(a)
The top level of blocks for landings and steps shall be within 5
mm of the specified level.
(b)
The top level of other members shall be within 10 mm of the

specified level.
21.22
2006 Edition
Tolerances:
rubber fenders
21.84
(c)
The horizontal position perpendicular to the berthing face of

the fendering system shall be within 10 mm of the specified
position.
(d)
The horizontal position parallel to the berthing face of the

fendering system shall be within 25 mm of the specified
position.
(1)
The dimensions of rubber fenders and bolt holes shall comply with
(a)
The bolt hole diameter shall be within 2 mm of the specified

diameter.
(b)
The bolt pitch shall be within 4 mm of the specified pitch.
(c)
The height, length and width of rubber fenders shall be within

+4% and -2% of the specified dimensions.
(d)
The thickness of fender sections shall be within +8% and -5%

of the specified thickness.
(2)
The positions of rubber fenders shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The centrelines shall be within 25 mm of the specified

positions on the face of the supporting structures.
(b)
The inclination shall not deviate by more than 1 in 50 from the

specified inclination.
Tolerances:
plastic fenders
21.85
The dimensions of plastic fender shall be within the allowable tolerance

specified by the manufacturer.
Tolerances: submarine
outfalls
21.86
(1)
The horizontal alignment of submarine pipelines shall be within
250 mm of the specified alignment.
(2)
The invert level of submarine outfalls shall be within 50 mm of the
specified level.
(3)
There shall be no abrupt change in alignment or level of the
submarine outfall.
TESTING: DREDGED MATERIAL

Samples: dredged
material
21.87
(1)
Areas being dredged shall be divided into a grid at 15 m intervals.
One sample of dredged material shall be provided from each point on the
grid at 2 m depth intervals. Additional samples shall be provided from
positions instructed by the Engineer if there appears to be any change in
the quality of the dredged material.
(2)
The mass of each sample shall be at least 1 kg. The method of
sampling shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
21.23
2006 Edition
Testing: dredged
material
21.88
Each sample of dredged material shall be tested as stated in the Contract.
TESTING:
PARTICLE
SIZE
DISTRIBUTION,
PLASTICITY INDEX AND COEFFICIENT OF
UNIFORMITY OF FILL MATERIAL FOR MARINE
WORKS
Batch: fill material for
marine works
21.89
A batch of fill material for marine works is any quantity of fill material for
marine works of the same type and which in the opinion of the Engineer
has similar properties throughout.
Samples: fill material

for marine works
21.90
(1)
Except for public fill as stated in Section 6, one sample of each type
of fill material for marine works shall be provided at the same time as
particulars of the material are submitted to the Engineer. Unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer, one sample of each type of fill material
for marine works shall be provided from each batch.
(2)
The size of samples and the method of sampling shall be as stated in
Clause 6.71.
(3)
When the material is delivered to the site, 1 sample shall be taken
from each 5,000 m3 or part thereof of each batch of each type of fill
material for marine works.
Testing: fill material

for marine works
21.91
(1)
Each sample of fill material shall be tested to determine the particle
size distribution, plasticity index and coefficient of uniformity.
(2)
Non-compliance: fill
material for marine
works
21.92

: Clause 6.72(3)
Plasticity index
Coefficient of uniformity
: Clause 6.72(4)
(1)
If the result of any test for particle size distribution, plasticity index
or coefficient of uniformity of fill material for marine works does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property, two additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for the
property shall be carried out.
(2)
comply with such requirements.
21.24
2006 Edition
TESTING:
RELATIVE
DENSITY,
WATER
ABSORPTION, AGGREGATE IMPACT VALUE, TEN
PERCENT FINES VALUE, AGGREGATE ABRASION
VALUE, SOUNDNESS, RESISTANCE TO FRACTURE
AND WEIGHT OF ROCK ARMOUR AND ROCK FOR
UNDERLAYER
Batch: rock armour
21.93
A batch of rock armour is any quantity of rock armour of the same

type and which in the opinion of the Engineer has similar
properties throughout.
Samples: rock for rock

armour
21.94
(1)
One sample of each proposed type of rock for rock armour shall be
provided at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted to the
Engineer.
(2)
If instructed by the Engineer, a representative sample of each type of
rock for rock armour, broken down into appropriate sizes, shall be provided
for testing under Clause 21.95.
Testing: rock for rock

armour
21.95
(1)
Each sample of rock for rock armour taken as stated in Clause
21.94(2) shall be tested to determine the specific gravity, water absorption,
aggregate impact value, ten percent fines value, aggregate abrasion value
and soundness.
(2)
Samples: rock armour
21.96

Relative density
: BS 812: Part 2
Water absorption
: BS 812: Part 2
Aggregate impact value
: BS 812: Part 112
: BS 812: Part 111
Aggregate abrasion value
: BS 812: Part 113
Soundness
: BS 6349: Part 1,
Appendix B
(1)
One sample piece of each type of rock armour shall be provided for
the dropping test from each 100 pieces or part thereof of that type delivered
to the Site.
(2)
One sample piece of each type of rock armour of the specified
minimum size and one piece of the specified maximum size shall be
provided near the deposition location for checking the sizes of material at
all times during the deposition of rock armour.
(3)
The sample pieces of the specified minimum and maximum sizes
shall be mounted on individual plinths at locations agreed by the Engineer.
The design and details of the plinths shall be prepared by the Contractor
and agreed by the Engineer.
21.25
2006 Edition
(4)
When the material is delivered to the site, 1 bulk sample of rock
armour consisting of not less than 50 pieces of randomly selected rock
armour shall be taken from each 5,000 m3 or part thereof each batch.
Testing: rock armour
21.97
(1)
Each sample piece of rock armour taken as stated in Clause
21.96(1) shall be tested by the dropping test to determine the resistance to
fracture.
(2)
The dropping test shall be carried out with the largest cross-section
of the specimen horizontal. The specimen shall be dropped from a
vertical height to the underside of the specimen of 1.5 m, onto a steel plate.
The steel plate shall be at least 20 mm thick and shall be firmly bedded on
a level concrete base.
(3)
Each piece of the rock armour taken from the bulk sample as stated
in Clause 21.96(4) shall be weighed individually to the accuracy of 2% of
the specified minimum weight.
Non-compliance: rock
for rock armour
21.98
(1)
If the result of any test for specific gravity, water absorption,
aggregate impact value, ten percent fines value, aggregate abrasion value
or soundness of rock for rock armour does not comply with the specified
requirements for the property, two additional samples shall be provided
from the same batch and additional tests for the property shall be carried
out.
(2)
The batch shall be considered as not complying with specified
Non-compliance:
dropping test
21.99
(1)
If a sample piece of rock armour fractures as a result of the dropping
test, nine additional sample pieces of rock armour from the same group of
100 pieces or part thereof shall be tested. If any one of these sample pieces
fracture as a result of the dropping test, every piece of rock armour in the
same group shall be tested. Only those pieces of rock armour passing the
dropping test shall be used.
(2)
Non-compliance:
weighing test
21.100
A specimen is deemed to fracture if:

(a)
Cracking occurs after dropping, or
(b)
The difference in masses of the original specimen and the

largest single piece after dropping exceeds 1% of the mass of
the original specimen.
(1)
If the bulk sample does not comply with the specification, 2
additional bulk samples shall be provided from the same batch and
additional weighing tests shall be carried out.
(2)
The batch shall be considered as not complying the specification if
the result of any additional test does not comply with such requirements.
Testing: rock for

underlayer
21.101
The sampling, testing and compliance criteria of rock for underlayer of

rock armour shall be the same as those of the rock armour as specified in
Clauses 21.93 to 21.100 except that no dropping test is required.
21.26
2006 Edition
TESTING: TIMBER FOR FENDERING SYSTEMS

Batch: timber for
fendering systems
21.102
A batch of timber for fendering systems is any quantity of timber for

fendering systems of the same grade and species and from the same source,
covered by the same test certificates and bills of lading.
Samples: timber for

fendering systems
21.103
One sample of timber for fendering systems shall be provided at the same
time as particulars of the material are submitted to the Engineer. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, six samples shall be provided from
each batch of timber for fendering systems delivered to the Site.
Testing: timber for

fendering systems
21.104
(1)
For fendering systems delivered to the site, the samples shall be
provided in pairs taken from three separate balks of timber. Each sample
shall be 1000 mm x 50 mm x 50 mm and shall be cut with the longest
dimension parallel to the grain and the two shorter dimensions tangential
and radial to the growth rings.
(2)
Each sample of timber for fendering systems shall be tested to
determine the oven dry density, static bending at rupture, modulus of
elasticity under bending, hardness, compressive stress parallel to grain at
maximum load and shear stress parallel to grain at maximum load.
(3)
The method of testing, including the Janka indentation test for
hardness, shall be in accordance with BS 373 except that the specimens
shall be tested at a moisture content of at least 25%.
Janka indentation test,
test for shear stress
parallel to grain at
maximum load
Non-compliance:
timber for
fendering systems
21.105
21.106
The results of Janka indentation tests and tests for maximum shear parallel
to grain of timber for fendering systems shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
Each of the results of Janka indentation tests on the end face,

radial face and tangential face shall comply with the
requirements stated in Table 21.4.
(b)
Each of the results of tests for shear parallel to grain on the

radial face and tangential face shall comply with the
requirements stated in Table 21.4.
(1)
If the result of any test for oven dry density, static bending at
rupture, modulus of elasticity under bending, hardness, compressive stress
parallel to grain at maximum load or shear stress parallel to grain at
maximum load, of timber for fendering systems does not comply with the
specified requirements for the property, three additional pairs of samples
shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests for the property
shall be carried out.
(2)
21.27
2006 Edition
TESTING: RUBBER FENDERS

Batch: rubber fenders
21.107
A batch of rubber fenders is any quantity of rubber fenders of the same

type and from the same source, covered by the same test certificates.
Samples: rubber
fenders
21.108
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample shall be provided

from each 50 rubber fenders or part thereof delivered to the Site.
Testing: rubber fenders
21.109
(1)
Each sample of rubber fenders shall be compression load tested
either at a laboratory approved by the Engineer or at the manufacturers
workshop in the presence of the representative of a Government body or
other organisation approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Each sample of rubber fenders shall be subjected to three complete
load cycles at a rate of 200 mm 20 mm per minute to 50% deflection.
The results of the test shall be shown on a load-deflection curve and on an
energy-deflection curve.
rubber fenders
Non-compliance:
rubber fenders
21.110
21.111
The result of compression load tests on rubber fenders shall comply with
(a)
The sample shall not show any visible sign of cracks or

permanent deformation in shape.
(b)
The height of each sample one minute after releasing the third
compression load shall be at least 95% of the original height.
(c)
The recovery in height shall be as stated in Clause 21.110(b)

for the repeated compression test.
(d)
For each loading cycle, the deflection as measured from the

load-deflection curve and the energy-deflection curve shall not
deviate by more than 10% from the deflection at the same load
on the characteristic curves provided by the manufacturer.
(1)
If the result of any compression load test on rubber fenders does not
comply with the specified requirements stated in Clause 21.110, two
additional samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional
tests for the property shall be carried out.
(2)
TESTING: PLASTIC FENDERS

Batch: plastic fenders
21.112
A batch of plastic fenders is any quantity of plastic fenders of the same

type and from the same source, covered by the same test certificates.
Samples: plastic
fenders
21.113
Test samples shall be selected by the Engineer at a sampling rate of 1

sample per batch of 50 plastic fenders.
21.28
2006 Edition
Testing: plastic fenders
21.114
(1)
Each sample of plastic fenders shall undergo the loading test in
(2)
After testing, the Contractor shall deliver the test samples to the
storage shed or other areas as instructed by the Engineer.
plastic fenders
21.115
(1)
The test result of loading test shall comply with the requirements of
Table 21.6.
(2)
If the test result of loading test does not comply with the
requirements of Table 21.6, 2 additional test samples from the same batch
shall be selected by the Engineer for additional loading test in accordance
with Appendix 21.1.
(3)
requirements if the result of any additional loading test fails to comply with
such requirements.
TESTING: SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

Testing: submarine
outfalls
21.116
(1)
Submarine outfalls shall be tested to determine if there is any
blockage or leakage.
(2)
Precast end plates and diffuser caps shall be removed before the
outfall is tested.
(3)
The outfall shall be cleaned by high velocity water jets or by other
electromechanical methods agreed by the Engineer. Riser pipes and
diffuser pipes shall be cleaned by high capacity grit suction pumps or by
other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(4)
The outfall shall be tested for blockages by pulling a mandrel
approved by the Engineer through the outfall between manholes and
between manholes and the end of the outfall. The mandrel shall be 750
mm long and 12 mm less in diameter than the nominal diameter of the
pipe.
(5)
Riser pipes and diffuser pipes shall be tested for blockages and
leakage by pumping dyed water through the outfall and inspecting the
discharge plume at each riser pipe. Precast end plates shall be replaced
before the test is carried out.
submarine outfalls
21.117
There shall be no blockage or leakage in submarine outfalls, including riser

pipes and diffuser pipes.
Non-compliance:
submarine outfalls
21.118
If the result of any test for blockage or leakage of submarine outfalls does
not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the blockage shall
be removed, or the leakage shall be repaired, by methods approved by the
Engineer, or the outfall or diffuser pipes shall be repaired or replaced by
methods approved by the Engineer. The submarine outfall shall be
re-tested for blockage or leakage.
21.29
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 21.1
LOADING TEST FOR PLASTIC FENDERS
Scope
21.1.1
This method covers the determination of the flexural properties of plastic

fenders.
Equipment
21.1.2
Procedure
21.1.3
21.1.4
(a)
Loading machine.
(b)
Equipment for measuring the loads applied shall be accurate to

within 2% of the maximum load to be measured.
(c)
Dial gauges for measuring deflection shall be accurate to 0.1

mm.
(d)
Supports shall be cylindrical rods with diameter not less than

25 mm and the length of cylindrical rods shall be longer than
the width of test sample by at least 100 mm.

(a)
Test sample shall be placed on the supports in accordance with

Figure 21.1.
(b)
Loading shall be applied to the test sample at increment of 10

kN until the specified loading is reached. Both readings of
the applied loading and dial gauges shall be recorded.
(c)
After loading, the test sample shall be inspected. Any defects

shall be recorded and reported in the test report.

(a)
The vertical load applied.
(b)
The vertical deflection during the loading test.
(c)
The load against deflection curve.
(d)
Record of defects after the loading test.
21.30
2006 Edition
Figure 21.1 Arrangement of loading test for plastic fenders:
Notes:
1)
Load is applied to the major axis of the test sample.
2)
Two dial gauges are provided at mid span of the test sample to measure the deflection during testing.
3)
The mean value of deflection is calculated based on the reading of the dial gauges.
21.31
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 21.2 Amd 2/2010

SPECIFICATION FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
IN MARINE ENVIRONMENT (TO BE READ IN
CONJUNCTION WITH SECTION 16 AND THE
AMENDMENTS)
MATERIALS
Mix constituents
21.2.1 Clause 16.03 Sub-clause (1) is replaced by (1) below: (1) Cementitious content is the combined mass of cement and
the dry mass of CSF and the mass of either PFA or GGBS per
cubic metre of compacted concrete. PFA, GGBS and CSF are
referred to as supplementary cementitious materials in this
Specification.
Cement
21.2.2 Clause 16.06 Sub-clause (1) is replaced by the following: (1) All cement and supplementary cementitious materials shall
comply with the following standards:Portland-blast furnace cement
BS 146
Low heat Portland-blast

furnace cement
BS 4246
Ground Granulated
Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS)
BS 6699
Condensed Silica Fume (CSF)
CSA-A23.5-M86
(Canadian Standard)
Clause 16.06 Sub-clause (3) is added below:(3) The Contractor shall nominate the source of any of the
materials mentioned in sub-clause (1) above proposed to be used
in each concrete mix.
Admixtures
21.2.3 Clause 16.10 Sub-clauses (1) and (2) are replaced by new
sub-clauses (1) to (4) below: (1) An admixture is defined as a constituent material of concrete
other than cementitious materials, aggregates and water. The
21.32
2006 Edition
admixtures shall comply and be used in accordance with the

suppliers recommendation. The admixtures shall comply with
the following:Pigments for Portland cement
and Portland cement products
BS 1014
Accelerating admixtures,
retarding admixtures and
water-reducing admixtures
BS 5075:Part 1
Superplasticising admixtures
BS 5075:Part 3
Where two or more admixtures are used in a concrete mix, the

compatibility shall be verified in writing by the supplier with the
following: BS 5075 Concrete Admixtures
(2) The use of admixtures shall only be permitted subject to
the Contractor carrying out prior testing on trial mixes in
accordance with this specification.
(3)
The use of any admixture containing chlorides is prohibited.
(4) The Contractor shall submit relevant test data which

demonstrates that the properties of concrete composed of the
admixture meets the requirements of this specification.
Curing compound
21.2.4 Clause 16.11 - Sub-clause (1) is replaced by the following:

(1) Curing compound and the material and methods of
applications shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer
prior to concrete placement. The use of curing compound shall
be limited to the following type: Wax Emulsion
The curing compound shall have an efficiency index of not less
than 85%. The minimum application rate shall be 0.2 litre/m2 or
the minimum stated on the certificate of compliance, whichever is
greater.
CONCRETE
Concrete mix
21.2.5 Clause 16.12 Sub-clause (3) is replaced by the following: (3) Admixtures for concrete shall comply with Clause 21.2.3.
All-in aggregates shall not be used.
New sub-clause (7) is added below: (7)
For reinforced concrete in marine environment:

(a) The water/cementitious ratio of the concrete mix shall not
21.33
2006 Edition
exceed 0.38.
(b) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the minimum
designed slump value for designed mix concrete for
reinforced elements, after the addition of superplasticiser
if used, shall be 75 mm.
(c) The acid soluble sulphate content of all concrete expressed
as SO3 shall be determined in accordance with Clause
21.10.3 of CS1 and shall not exceed 4% of total weight of
concrete.
Chloride content of
concrete
21.2.6 Clause 16.13 (2) is added below: (2) For reinforced concrete in marine environment, the acid
soluble chloride ion content of all concrete shall be determined in
accordance with Clause 21.10.2 of CS1, and shall not exceed
0.02% of total weight of concrete.
Cementitious content of
designed mix concrete
21.2.7 Clause 16.14 - Sub-clauses (1) and (2)

following: -
are replaced by the
(1) The minimum cementitious content of designed mix

concrete of Grade 20 or above using 20 mm nominal maximum
aggregate size shall be as stated in Table 16.2 in Section 16 of this
GS. The minimum cementitious contents shall be increased by
40 kg/m3 for 10 mm nominal maximum aggregate size and
decreased by 30 kg/m3 for 40 mm nominal maximum aggregate
size.
(2) The maximum cementitous content of designed mix

concrete for reinforced concrete in marine environment shall be
450 kg/m3 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The
maximum cementitious content of designed mix concrete (other
than for reinforced concrete in marine environment) in, water
retaining structures and water tight structures, shall be 550 kg/m3.
New sub-clauses (6) to (8) are added below: (6) For reinforced concrete in marine environment, CSF and
either PFA or GGBS shall be incorporated into the concrete as
separate materials complying with the following requirements:
(a) The proportion of CSF replacement shall be within the
5-10% range by mass of the cementitious content.
(b) The proportion of PFA replacement shall be within the
25-40% range by mass of the cementitious content for
normal applications, or if GGBS is used instead of PFA,
the proportion of GGBS replacement shall be within
60-75% range by mass of the cementitious content.
21.34
2006 Edition
(7) The Contractor shall nominate the source of any of the

materials of CSF and PFA or GGBS proposed for being used in
each concrete mix.
(8) Triple blending of cement, PFA and GGBS is not allowed
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of materials
for concrete
21.2.8 Clause 16.17 - The first sentence of Sub-clause (1) is deleted and
replaced by:
The following particulars of the proposed cement, PFA,
aggregate, GGBS and CSF shall be submitted to the Engineer:
Sub-clause (1) (d) is replaced by (d), (e) and (f) below: (d) A certificate not older than 6 months for each nominal
maximum aggregate size showing the source of the
aggregate and showing that the aggregate complies with
the requirements stated in the Contract and including
results of tests for:
-
grading
silt content
chloride content
flakiness index of coarse aggregate
ten percent fines value
water absorption
elongation index
Los Angeles abrasion value
sodium sulphate soundness
magnesium soundness
(e) A certificate not older than 6 months for GGBS showing

the source of the GGBS and showing that the GGBS
complies with the requirements stated in the Contract.
(f) A certificate not older than 6 months for CSF showing
the source of the CSF and showing that the CSF
complies with the requirements stated in the Contract.
Particulars of
ready-mixed concrete
supplier
21.2.9 Clause 16.19 is replaced by the following: The Contractor shall arrange for the Engineer or Engineers
Representative to inspect the suppliers plant or plants if required
before and/or during the period of supply. The name of the
supplier, the type of plant, and the location of each plant,
including a back-up plant, from which the Contractor proposes to
obtain ready-mixed concrete shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 14 days before trial mixes are made or if trial mixes are not
required, at least 14 days before the ready-mixed concrete is
placed in the permanent works.
21.35
2006 Edition
Particulars of precast
concrete units
21.2.10 Clause 16.21 New sub-clauses (3) to (6) are added below: (3) The following particulars of the precast concrete units shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least 21 days before the casting
work starts:
(a) Layout of the precasting yard,

(b) Methods and sequence of casting and placing the units,
(c) Methods of testing for checking continuity of steel
reinforcement before and after casting, and
(d) Methods and details of handling and storage of the

precasting units.
(4) Precast concrete units shall be stored on level supports and
in a manner which will not result in damage or deformation to the
units or in contamination of the units. The units shall be protected
from damage and any damaged units shall be replaced or repaired
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(5) Particulars of the proposed method and devices to be used
for lifting and setting of the precast concrete units shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days before the
lifting works starts.
(6) Contact surfaces between precast concrete units shall be
prepared as stated in the Contract. Dimensional tolerances shall
be checked in accordance with the new Clause 16.97 in paragraph
21.2.25 of this Specification. Discrepancies in dimensions of the
units shall be rectified by a method approved by the Engineer
before the units are lifted into position.

Storage of cement, PFA,
GGBS and CSF
21.2.11 Clause 16.33 New sub-clauses (3) and (4) are added below: (3) GGBS and CSF of different types and from different sources
shall be stored in separate containers clearly marked to identify
the different content of each.
(4) Cement and supplementary cementitious materials from
different sources shall not be used in the same pour and may only
be used in the same structure with the Engineers prior approval.

Batching concrete
21.2.12 Clause 16.37 Sub-clause (2) is replaced by the following:

(2) The quantities of cement, supplementary cementitious
materials and fine and coarse aggregate shall be measured by mass
except that cement supplied in bags may be measured by using a
whole number of bags in each batch. The mass of aggregates shall
21.36
2006 Edition
be adjusted to allow for the free moisture content of the

aggregates.
Mixing concrete
21.2.13 Clause 16.38 New sub-clause (6) is added below: (6) Remixing of partially hardened concrete with or without
additional cement, PFA, aggregate or water is prohibited.
Transportation of
Concrete
21.2.14 Clause 16.39 New Sub-clause (3) is added below: (3) Particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 14 days before placement of concrete regarding the method
of transporting concrete from the production plant to the Site and
the methods of handling concrete for placement on the Site.
RECORDS OF CONCRETE
Records of concrete
21.2.15 Clause 16.40 New sub-clause (1) (k) is added below: (k) time of introduction of cement and supplementary
cementitious materials to the mix.

Placing concrete
21.2.16 Clause 16.41 New sub-clauses (10) to (16) are added below: (10) All areas in which concrete is to be placed shall be clean and
free from standing water immediately before the placing of the
concrete, except for concrete placed under water.
(11) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, rock or earth
surfaces on which concrete, unless the concrete is placed by
tremie, is to be placed shall be prepared after site clearance in
accordance with the following requirements:(a) Topsoil, grass and other organic matter shall be removed.
(b) Soft spots, boulders loose/ shattered/ unsound rock
fragments and other materials which in the opinion of the
Engineer are unsuitable or unstable shall be removed.
(12) Concreting to structures below +2.5 m CD shall be carried
out in the dry at low tides using formwork with watertight joints
or an equivalent method accepted by the Engineer.
(13) On completion of concreting below +2.5 m CD, the top of
the concrete shall be adequately covered to prevent washout of
cement paste as the water level rises or falls.
(14) No concrete shall be placed in flowing water.
(15) The Contractor shall be responsible for setting and
21.37
2006 Edition
maintaining forms sufficiently within the tolerances, and shall

ensure that the work is completed within the specified tolerances.
Concrete work falling outside the tolerances shall be remedied or
replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor.
(16) The swellable waterstop shall be kept in dry conditions for
at least 48 hours prior to casting the pile connection holes.
Compacting Concrete
21.2.17 Clause 16.44 New sub-clauses (7) to (9) are added below: (7) Concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within
2.5 hours of the introduction of water to mixture and within 30
minutes of discharge from agitator, truck mixer and static mixer.
(8) An internal vibrator shall operate at not less than 10,000
cycles per minute.
(9) Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 4 hours
and 24 hours after compaction.
CURING CONCRETE
Curing concrete
21.2.18 Clause 16.46 Sub-clauses (1) and (2) are replaced by the
following and sub-clauses (3) and (7) are deleted: (1) After final set has taken place the concrete shall be cured for
at least 7 days. All exposed surfaces shall be protected from the
sun and wind immediately after the initial set has occurred and the
concrete shall be kept moist by light water spray or other suitable
means until curing methods are applied. Surfaces from which
formwork has been removed before 7 days shall be cured for the
remaining period.
(2)
The following curing methods are acceptable:

(a) Moist Curing
Concrete shall be covered by canvas, hessian or
polyethylene sheeting and kept continuously moist.
Where polyethylene sheeting is used, all edges of the
sheeting shall be securely fastened so that no air
circulation can occur. Concrete surfaces which have
become dry shall be thoroughly wetted before the
sheeting is placed. Alternatively, exposed surfaces can
be cured by flooding or continuous sprinkling.
Formwork left in position shall be kept continuously
wet.
(b) Curing Compounds
Curing compounds shall comply with Clause 16.11 and
methods of applications shall be submitted for the
approval of the Engineer prior to concrete placement.
The curing compound shall have an efficiency index of
not less than 85%. The minimum application rate shall
21.38
2006 Edition
be 0.2 litre/m2 or the minimum stated on the certificate

of compliance, whichever is greater.
TESTING:
CONCRETE
STRENGTH
Testing : compressive
COMPRESSIVE
21.2.19 Clause 16.59 Sub-clause (3) is replaced by the following: (3) Test cubes which are cured on the Site shall be delivered to
the testing laboratory as specified by the Engineer at least 36
hours before the tests are due to be carried out. The Contractor
shall provide an on-site covered curing tank of internal dimension
2200 x 1200 x 900 mm deep with lock for storage of test cubes.
The curing tank shall be made of galvanized steel coated with
epoxy/tar paint and fitted with bottom drain, water inlet, overflow
facilities and lifting lugs.
The curing tank shall be
thermostatically controlled within the range 27oC 3oC and be
completed with an impeller type circulation device of suitable
design to maintain a temperature gradient of better than 0.5oC.
The temperature control mechanism shall be equipped with both
heating and cooling system. All mechanisms shall be suitably
protected from damage. The tank base shall be fitted with mesh
racks, suitably treated to prevent corrosion, which allow water
circulation beneath the cubes. The rack shall be constructed in at
least 3 sections for ease of handling and removal.
21.39
2006 Edition
PART 2: JOINT IN CONCRETE

MATERIALS
Waterstops
21.2.20 Clause 16.80 is replaced by the following: Swellable waterstop shall be a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer and shall:
(a) be a water swellable hydrophilic waterstop and made
from a preformed elastomeric strip,
(b) be free from rubber, bentonite or other inclusions,
(c) have an unrestrained volumetric expansion of not less
than 170%,
(d) not deteriorate under prolonged wet/dry cycling,
(e) be able to withstand a hydrostatic head of 50 m.
(f) be in form of 10 mm x 20 mm rectangular section
elastomeric strips, and
(g) be in good serviceable conditions under a temperature
range of -30oC to +70oC.
The swellable waterstop shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturers instructions and shall be kept in dry conditions
for at least 48 hours prior to casting.
CONTROL OF ALKALI-SILICA REACTION IN

CONCRETE
Measures to prevent
alkali-silica reaction
(ASR) in concrete
21.2.21 New Clause 16.93 is added below: -
(1) Measures to prevent the occurrence of alkali-silica reaction

(ASR) in concrete structures shall be the control of reactive alkali
content of the concrete using the framework as depicted in
Sections H2.4 and H3.3 of Appendix H of GEO Report No. 167
entitled The 2004 Review on Prevention of Alkali Silica Reaction
in Concrete published by the Geotechnical Engineering Office of
Civil Engineering and Development Department. Alternative
measures may be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The
Engineer is not obliged to accept any alternative measures,
especially if a measure could limit the performance or use of the
structure, or necessitate follow-up actions such as monitoring.
(2) The reactive alkali content of concrete expressed as the
equivalent oxide (Na2O) content per cubic metre of concrete shall
be obtained in accordance with clauses 16.94 and 16.95 below.
21.40
2006 Edition
Equivalent sodium oxide 21.2.22 New Clause 16.94 is added below: (Na2O) content
(1) The equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content of the concrete
shall be calculated from the following expression:
Equivalent Na2O = A + B + C
Where A is the sum of the acid-soluble alkalis
(expressed as equivalent Na2O) of cement, admixtures and
water.
B is equal to 1/6 the total alkalis of PFA
(expressed as equivalent Na2O).
C is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (C1-) of the
aggregate.
(2) The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be
determined in accordance with BS EN 196-21:1992 and shall be
taken as the average of the latest 25 daily determinations of
equivalent sodium oxide plus twice the standard deviation of the
results.
(3) The acid-soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be
determined in accordance with BS1881: Part 124:1988.
(4) The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined
in accordance with BS EN 1008:2002.
(5) The total alkali content or the pulverised-fuel ash shall be
determined in accordance with BS EN 196-21:1992 and shall be
taken as the average of 25 weekly determinations plus twice the
standard deviation of the results.
(6) The equivalent sodium oxide content of the coarse and fine
aggregates shall be calculated from the quantity of chloride ion
present which shall be measured in accordance with BS 812-117:
1988.
Submission
21.2.23 New clause 16.95 is added below: (1) The following particulars of the proposed concrete mix shall
(a) HOKLAS endorsed test certificates not older than 6
months giving the results of tests required in above
Clauses 16.94(2) to (6).
(b) Calculation of the reactive alkali of the proposed mix.
(c) A system to control the active alkali content in the
concrete and evidence that the control system is covered
by the QSPSC certification of the concrete production
plant.
(2) Within five working days of any instance of the active alkali
content in the concrete supplied having been found to have
21.41
2006 Edition
exceeded, the calculation shall be submitted to the Engineer

together with supporting HOKLAS endorsed test certificates.
(3) The HOKLAS endorsed test certificates giving the results
of tests required in Clause 16.94(2) to (6) in this Specification
shall be submitted at quarterly intervals unless agreed otherwise
by the Engineer. The certificates shall be accompanied by any
necessary calculations to demonstrate that the mix continues to
comply with the limit on reactive alkali content.
MISCELLANEOUS
Blinding concrete
21.2.24 New clause 16.96 is added below: Blinding concrete shall be grade 10/20 and shall be cast in bays
with vertical joint properly formed.
Construction tolerances
21.2.25 New Sub-clause 16.97 is added below: (1) Unless otherwise specified, the dimensional tolerances for
concrete construction shall comply with BS 5606:1990.
Verification of tolerances shall be made by measurement made as
close as practicable to 28 days after casting the appropriate
element of structure for in situ construction or at the time of
incorporation into the Works in the case of precast units.
(2) Unless otherwise specified, the tolerances for insitu concrete
in the finished work shall be :
(a) Variation from plumb in any 3 m: 6 mm
Variation from plumb in any 12 m: 18 mm
(b) Variation of level or lateral position of any point from its
level or lateral position indicated or completed: 12 mm
(c) Variation in slab and wall thickness: +6 mm, -3 mm
(d) Variation of level or lateral position of any point, for
machinery installation, from its level or lateral position
indicated or completed: +5 mm, -12 mm
(3) Unless otherwise specified, the tolerances for precast
concrete construction in the completed work shall be:
(a) Length
Up to 2 m
2 m to 6 m
Over 6 m
6 mm
9 mm
12 mm
(b) Cross section width or height

Up to 2 m
4 mm
2 m to 6 m
6 mm
Over 6 m
8 mm
(c) Cross section thickness or depth
Up to 0.5 m
6 mm
21.42
2006 Edition
Above 0.5 m
8 mm
(d) Straightness or bow (deviation from intended line)

Up to 3 m
6 mm
3 m to 6 m
8 mm
(e) Length
Up to 1.2 m
1.2 m to 1.8 m
Over 1.8 m
6 mm
9 mm
12 mm
(f) Gap
The gaps between adjacent units shall not exceed 15
mm 5 mm.
(4) Discrepancies in dimensions of the concrete construction
works shall be rectified by methods approved by the Engineer. If
the said concrete construction works cannot be rectified to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the concrete construction works shall
be removed and reconstructed. Any additional expenses incurred
thereon shall be borne by the Contractor.
Use of displacers
21.2.26 New Sub-clause 16.98 is added below: Where their use is approved, displacers shall be clean and dry
and carefully placed into the concrete as pouring proceeds.
There shall be at least 225 mm between any two pieces, or
between the displacers and the face of the concrete. The mass of
displacers in any one pour of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the
total mass of that pour.
GROUT
Grout
21.2.27 New Sub-clause 16.99 is added below: Where directed by the Engineer, cement mortar or concrete used
for grouting in bolts, pipes, etc. shall be supplied with an
expandable compound additive to provide a non-shrink grout.
The additive shall in no case affect the durability performance,
and aesthetics of the structure. Such additive shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval and be applied in accordance with the
Marine Grout
21.2.28 New Sub-clause 16.100 is added below: (1) Marine grout shall be a proprietary non-shrink cementitious
grout for underwater application approved by the Engineer and shall
be a cement based product which is iron and chloride free.
(2) It shall be mixed with clean water at a water/powder ratio of
0.22 and not exhibit bleed or segregation. A volumetric expansion
of up to 4% (by means of a gaseous system) shall occur while the
grout is in a plastic state.
21.43
2006 Edition
(3) The grout shall contain admixtures to minimise wash-out in

underwater applications.
(4) The compressive strength of the grout must exceed 30
N/mm at 7 days and 50 N/mm at 28 days.
(5) The storage, handling, mixing and placement of the grout
must be in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
REINFORCED
CONCRETE
ENVIRONMENT
Reinforced Concrete in
Marine Environment
IN
MARINE
21.2.29 New Sub-clause 16.101 is added below: For avoidance of doubt, concrete of Grade 45/20 or above in a
marine works contract is regarded as Reinforced Concrete in
Marine Environment and the specification contained in this
Appendix shall apply.
21.44
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 22
22.1
2006 Edition
22.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 22
GENERAL
22.01
Drainage works
22.02
Drainage works shall comply with Section 5.
Earthworks
22.03
Formwork
22.04
Concrete
22.05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Fitting
22.06
Fitting is a component fitted to a pipe for jointing or connecting or for

changing the direction or bore of a pipe.
Flexible joint
22.07
Flexible joint is a connection between pipes and fittings that provides

angular deflection or axial movement or a combination of both in service
without impairing the efficiency of the connection.
Mechanical joint
22.08
Mechanical joint is a flexible joint in which an elastomeric joint ring is

located in the socket and the joint sealed by applying pressure to the joint
ring by means of a gland bolted to the socket.
Nominal size
22.09
Nominal size (DN) is a numerical designation of size, which is common to

all components in a pipework system. The nominal size is stated as a
convenient round number in millimetres and is related to, but not normally
the same as, the actual internal diameter of the pipeworks. dn
designates the nominal size of tees and tapers that are less than DN.
Push-in joint
22.10
Push-in joint is a flexible joint in which an elastomeric joint ring is located

in the socket and the joint is effected by entering the spigot through the
joint ring into the socket.
Special fitting
22.11
Special fitting is a fitting that is made from a manipulated or fabricated pipe.
Thi- walled pipe
22.12
Thin-walled pipe is a pipe, including pipes of DN 1200 or greater, which

has a ratio of nominal size to wall thickness, excluding linings and
coatings, exceeding 125.
MATERIALS
Materials for water
supply pipeworks
22.13
Materials for water supply pipeworks for potable water shall be non-toxic,
shall not promote microbial growth and shall not impart a taste, odour,
cloudiness or discolouration to the water after disinfection and washing out
of the pipelines as stated in Clause 22.73.
22.3
2006 Edition
Steel pipes and fittings
22.14
(1)
Steel pipes and fittings shall comply with the following:

Steel pipes, joints and specials for
water and sewage
: BS 534
Dimensions and masses per unit

length of welded and seamless
steel pipes and tubes for pressure
: BS 3600
purposes
Steel pipes and tubes for pressure
purposes:carbon
steel
with
specified
room
temperature
: BS 3601.
properties
(2)
Steel pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by the electricresistance welded and induction-welded process or by the submerged- arc
welded process. The tensile strength of the steel used shall be at least 410
N/mm2.
(3)
Steel pipes, fittings and specials (including all flanges and blank
flanges) shall be coated or lined internally and externally as stated in Table
22.1. Other requirements of using epoxy system shall be in accordance
with Appendix 22.2.
(4)
Gusseted steel bends and tees shall be fabricated in accordance with
BS 534, BS 2633 and BS 4515.
DI pipes and fittings
22.15
(1)
DI pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 4772. Pipes and
fittings other than collars, caps and blank flanges shall be lined internally
with cement mortar in accordance with BS 4772, Clause 3.2. Linings
shall be made with sulphate-resisting Portland cement complying with BS
4027.
(2)
Pipes shall be externally coated with metallic zinc in accordance
with BS 4772, Clause 3.1. Fittings shall be externally coated with zinc
rich paint in accordance with BS 4772, Clause 3.1.5(b). After zinc
coating pipes and fittings shall be externally coated with a finishing coat of
one of the following materials as stated in BS 4772, Clause 3.3:
(a)
Bitumen based hot applied coating material complying with

Clause 22.22 and BS 4147: Type I, Grade C, or
(b)
Bitumen based cold applied coating material complying with

Clause 22.22 and BS 3416: Type II.
22.4
2006 Edition
Table 22.1: Protection to steel pipes and fittings

Protection
Pipe External
Description
A Fusion Bonded Epoxy system, complying with latest revision of
ANSI/AWWA C213, manufactured under a quality system certified to
ISO 9001, and factory applied by an applicator approved by the
manufacturer, to a minimum dry film thickness of 400 microns.
OR
A chemically-cured Liquid Epoxy system, complying with the latest
revision of ANSI/AWWA C210 manufactured under a quality system
certified to ISO 9001, and factory applied by an applicator approved by
the manufacturer, to a minimum dry film thickness of 400 microns.
AND
For pipes to be installed outdoor under direct sunlight, a topcoat of
aliphatic polyurethane at 50 microns shall be applied for extra
protection.
Pipe Internal
A Fusion Bonded Epoxy system, complying with latest revision of

ANSI/AWWA C213, manufactured under a quality system certified to
ISO 9001, and factory applied by an applicator approved by the
manufacturer, to a minimum dry film thickness of 400 microns.
OR
A chemically-cured Liquid Epoxy system, complying with the latest
revision of ANSI/AWWA C210 manufactured under a quality system
certified to ISO 9001, and factory applied by an applicator approved by
the manufacturer, to a minimum dry film thickness of 750 microns.
uPVC pipes and

fittings
22.16
uPVC pipes and fittings shall be Class D and shall comply with following:
uPVC pipe for cold water
services
: BS 3505
Joints and fittings for use

with uPVC pressure pipes
-
injection moulded uPVC

fittings for solvent welding
for use with pressure pipes,
including potable water
supply
: BS 4346: Part 1
mechanical
joints
and
fittings principally of uPVC : BS 4346: Part 2
solvent cement
22.5
: BS 4346: Part 3
2006 Edition
GI pipes and fittings
22.17
GI pipes and fittings shall comply with the following:

Steel tubes and tubulars suitable
for screwing to BS 21 pipe
threads
: BS 1387, medium grade
Pipe threads for tubes and
fittings where pressure-tight
: BS 21
joints are made on the threads
Wrought steel pipe
(screwed BSP thread)
Flanges
22.18
fittings
: BS 1740: Part 1
(1)
Steel flanges shall comply with BS 4504: Section 3.1, and shall be
either steel plate for welding type or steel plate blank flange type. The
dimensions and drilling of flanges shall comply with BS 4504: Section 3.1,
Table 11, as appropriate regardless of the nominal pressure rating.
(2)
Steel ring flanges shall be machined in the bore to a diameter of 4
mm 1 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe to which the flange
is to be welded.
(3)
Steel puddle flanges shall be separated into 180 segments.
(4)
DI flanges shall be cast-on or welded-on standard flanges
Bolts and nuts
22.19
(1)
Bolts and nuts for flanged joints shall comply with BS 4504:
Section 3.1, Section 6.
(2)
Bolts and nuts shall be compatible with the type of joint and, unless
(3)
Bolts shall be sufficiently long and shall be suitably threaded for
jointing the relevant flanges.
Elastomeric joint rings
22.20
Elastomeric joint rings shall comply with BS EN 681-1, Type WA.

Elastomeric joint rings for DI pipes and fittings shall comply with BS
4772, Clause 2.3.4. The dimensions of rings for use with flanged joints
shall comply with BS 4865: Part 1. The rings shall be compatible with
the type of joint and, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shall be
obtained from the same manufacturer as the joint.
Amd 4/2010
Anticorrosion tape
22.21
(1)
Anticorrosion tape shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer. The tape shall either be a petrolatum tape with fabric
reinforcement or a bituminous tape with PVC backing. Petrolatum tape
shall be used for valves, flanged joints, slip-on type couplings and flange
adaptors of all sizes. Bituminous tape shall be used in buried or
non-exposed condition for welded joints of steel pipe, repair of steel pipe
sheathing and other applications as specified on the Drawings.
(2)
Anticorrosion tapes shall have a high resistance to cathodic
disbondment, acids and alkalis. Colour of bituminous tape shall be black.
Anticorrosion tapes shall have the minimum properties stated in Table
22.6
2006 Edition
22.2.
(3)
Primer and mastic filler for use with anticorrosion tape shall be
compatible with the tape and shall be of a type recommended by the
manufacturer of the tape and approved by the Engineer. Notwithstanding
Clause 22.28(1)(f), primer and mastic filler for use with anticorrosion tape
shall be supplied by the Contractor.
(4)
Bituminous tapes shall be stored in a cool dry place away from the
sun's rays. No dirt or grits shall be allowed to stick on the edge of the tape
before applying the tape for pipe protection.
(5)
The following particulars of the proposed anticorrosion tape for
water supply pipeworks shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers literature for anticorrosion tape, and
(b)
Certificate for anticorrosion tape showing the manufacturer's

and including results of tests in accordance with the Contract.
(6)
the Site.
Table 22.2: Properties of anticorrosion tape
Properties
Petrolatum tape
Bituminous tape
0.75
Total thickness (mm)
1.1
1.65
Mass (kg/m2)
1.4
2.0
10
Self
N/A
2.5
Steel
N/A
2.5
Self
0.5
N/A
Steel
0.5
N/A
15
30
260
Wrapping
-5 to +45
+5 to +50
In service
-5 to +45
-20 to +75
Thickness of PVC backing (mm)
Tensile strength (N/mm)

Adhesion strength
(180o peel) (N/mm)
Tacky adhesion
strength to JIS Z 1902
(N/mm)
Dielectric strength (2 layers) (kV)

Elongation (at break) (%)
Temperature range(0C)
22.7
2006 Edition
Bituminous coatings
22.22
(1)
Bituminous coatings shall comply with the following:

Bitumen-based
hot
applied
coating material for protecting
iron and steel including suitable
primers where required
Black bitumen coating solutions
for cold application
: BS 4147, Type I,
Grade C
: BS 3416, Type II.
(2)
Bituminous coatings used for repairing joints and coatings shall be
compatible with the adjacent coating.
(3)
Bituminous coatings shall be made from petroleum or asphaltic
bitumen.
Whitewash
22.23
Whitewash shall comply with AWWA C 203.
Zinc-based paint
22.24
(1)
Zinc-based paint shall be a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Primers for zinc-based paint shall comply with BS 4652.
(3)
Rust inhibitor shall be a chemical agent that is capable of converting
rust into iron phosphate.
Joint filler and
compressible padding
22.25
(1)
Joint filler for joints in concrete bed, haunch and surround shall be of
a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be a firm,
compressible, single thickness, non-rotting filler. The thickness of the
filler shall be as stated in Table 22.3.
(2)
Compressible padding between pipes and supports shall be bitumen
damp-proof sheeting complying with BS 743.
Table 22.3: Joint filler for concrete bed, haunch and surround
Nominal diameter of pipe
less than
Thickness of joint filler (mm)
450 mm
18
450 mm - 1200 mm
36
exceeding 1200 mm
54
22.26

Extension keys
22.27
Extension keys, clamps and its associated bolts, nuts and washers for
valves shall be Grade 1.4401 stainless steel complying with BS EN 10084,
BS EN 10085, BS EN 10087, BS EN 10095, BS EN 10250-4 and PD 970.
Amd 3/2010
22.8
2006 Edition
MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED

BY THE EMPLOYER
Materials provided by
the Employer
22.28
(1)
The following materials for water supply pipeworks included in
Contracts entered into with Water Supplies Department will be provided by
the Employer and shall be used in the permanent works:
(a)
Full, half and quarter length pipes with plain, flanged and
spigot and socket ends,
(b)
Ring flanges, puddle flanges, slip-on type couplings, flange

adapters, collars, expansion joints, detachable joints,
elastomeric joint rings, nuts and bolts,
(c)
Blank flanges and caps other than those required for pressure
tests,
(d)
Bends, tees and tapers,
(e)
Steel pipes for the fabrication of gusseted steel bends and tees,
(f)
Primer, bitumen based composition and woven glass cloth for

repairs to joints in steel pipes with bitumen coating provided by
the Employer other than materials for protection of steel
flanged joints, slip-on type couplings and flange adapters, and
(g)
Gate valves, air relief valves, butterfly valves and non-return

valves, including all winding gear, operating motors and control
equipment.
(2)
The materials shall be obtained from the locations and at the times
(3)
Water and sterilising chemicals for cleaning, sterilising and testing
pipelines as stated in Clauses 22.73 and 22.81 will be provided by the
Employer for one set of tests. The water and sterilising chemicals shall be
obtained from the locations stated in the Contract or from other locations
agreed by the Engineer and shall be mixed by the Contractor.
Equipment loaned by
the Employer
22.29
The continuous pressure recorder and purpose made charts for pressure tests
on pipelines for water supply pipeworks as stated in Appendix 22.1 will be
loaned by the Employer.
INSPECTION OF MANUFACTURE
Inspection of
manufacture and
testing
22.30
(1)
The manufacture and testing of pipes, joints, fitting and valves for
water supply pipeworks other than materials provided by the Employer shall
be inspected by an independent inspection authority approved by the
Engineer.
22.9
2006 Edition
(2)
The inspections shall be carried out at the manufacturers works or at
other locations stated in the Contract or instructed by the Engineer. The
facilities and equipment required for inspections shall be provided by the
Contractor.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
independent
inspection authority
22.31
Particulars of the proposed independent inspection authority for pipes,

joints, fittings and valves for water supply pipeworks, including name and
address, previous experience, and names of inspectors, shall be submitted
to the Engineer at least 28 days before manufacture of the materials starts.
Particulars of pipes,
joints and fittings
22.32
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed pipes, joints and fittings
for water supply pipeworks shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Manufacturers literature, including details of:

- Manufacturing process
- Pressure and temperature ratings
- Permissible values of straight draws and angular deflection
of flexible joints
- Recommendations for handling, storage, laying, jointing and
repair
- Drilling and tapping equipment for connections to pipes, (b)
A certificate for each material showing the manufacturers
and including results of tests required in accordance with the
relevant British Standard,
(b)
Three copies of drawings showing details of the pipes, joints

and fittings, including the materials used and the mass of each
item, and
(c)
A certificate of inspection of the manufacture and testing signed

by the approved independent inspection authority.
(2)
The particulars, including certificates other than certificates of
inspection, shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the
first delivery of the material to the Site. Certificates shall be submitted for
each batch of the material delivered to the Site.
Particulars of welding
22.33
(1)
construction for welding joints in steel pipes for water supply pipeworks
(a)
Details of welders, including names, copies of Hong Kong

Identity Cards and details of previous experience,
(b)
Details of format of records,
(c)
Details of welding procedures, including welding plant, method

of welding, materials, manufacturer and size of electrodes,
number of runs and current strength,
22.10
2006 Edition
(d)
Procedures for nitrogen gas tests on joints, and
(e)
Valid certificate of competency in accordance with BS 2633,

Clause 11 for each welder, issued by an authority approved by
the Engineer.
(2)
before welding starts.
Particulars of
pressure tests
22.34
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed procedures for pressure
tests on pipelines for water supply pipeworks shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Test equipment and method of setting up the equipment,
(b)
Calibration certificates for pressure gauges,
(c)
Procedure for carrying out the test, and
(d)
Programme for testing.
(2)
before the test starts.
TRIALS
Welding trials
22.35
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, trials shall be carried out
to demonstrate the competency of each proposed welder who will be
employed to weld joints in steel pipes for water supply pipeworks.
(2)
Trials shall be carried out at least 7 days before welding starts.
(3)
period agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out welding trials.
(4)
The trials shall be carried out using the welding procedures submitted
to the Engineer.
(5)
Trials shall be carried out under similar conditions as those that will
be encountered on the Site. Each trial shall consist of fillet welding two
steel plates using at least two electrodes to complete one run of weld. The
thickness of the steel plates shall be the same as the thickness of the steel
pipe that will be welded.
(6)
A 150 mm length of the plate that contains what in the opinion of the
Engineer is the worst welding shall be cut from the steel plates and broken
in a vice.
(7)
The Engineer shall determine the competency or otherwise of each
welder on the basis of the results of the welding trials.
Pipe jointing trials
22.36
(1)
Trials shall be carried out to demonstrate that the pipes, joints and
fittings for water supply pipeworks fit correctly.
22.11
2006 Edition
(2)
The trials shall be carried out at least 6 weeks, or such shorter period
agreed by the Engineer, before the materials are to be incorporated in the
permanent work.
(3)
period agreed by Engineer, before carrying out trials.
(4)
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of any pipes,
joints or fittings which do not fit correctly. Modifications shall be made to
pipes, joints and fittings that do not fit correctly or replacements shall be
provided as instructed by the Engineer.
Trials for drilling and
tapping
22.37
(1)
Trials shall be carried out to demonstrate that the proposed
equipment and methods of drilling and tapping pipes for water supply
pipeworks will produce connections that comply with the specified
requirements.
(2)
The trials shall be carried out at least 14 days before drilling and
tapping starts.
(3)
period agreed by the Engineer, before carrying out trials.
TRANSPORT,
MATERIALS
Transport, handling
and storage of pipes,
joints and fittings
22.38
HANDLING
AND
STORAGE
OF
(1)
Pipes, joints and fittings for water supply pipeworks shall be
transported, handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and in a manner, which will not result in damage or
deformation to the pipes, joints and fittings, or in contamination of the
pipes, joints and fittings.
(2)
Pipes, joints and fittings shall be protected from damage and
damaged pipes, joints and fittings shall not be used in the permanent work
unless permitted by the Engineer. Pipes, joints and fittings shall be
securely packed and supported to prevent movement when being
transported.
(3)
uPVC pipes, joints and fittings shall be protected from exposure to
conditions which may affect the material.
(4)
Bolts and nuts shall be packed in sealed metal containers.
(5)
Elastomeric joint rings shall be packed in bags and lubricant for
joints shall be stored in sealed containers marked to identify the contents.
The rings and lubricant shall be protected from exposure to conditions that
may affect the material.
(6)
Boxed or crated materials or those in sealed containers shall remain
in their original boxes, crates or containers.
Handling of pipes and
fittings
22.39
(1)
Pipes and fittings other than thin walled pipes shall be handled by
manual methods or by using lifting appliances or chains, wire rope or
canvas slings of a type recommended by the pipe manufacturer and agreed
by the Engineer. Hooks shall not be used.
22.12
2006 Edition
(2)
Slings shall be placed around the pipes and fittings and padding shall
be provided at points of contact between pipes and fittings and metal lifting
appliances or slings. Pipes and fittings shall not be handled by means of
metal slings passed through the pipes.
(3)
Pipes and fittings shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock
loading or dropping and shall not be rolled down ramps unless permitted by
the Engineer. If permitted, the ramps shall be padded.
Storage of pipes
22.40
(1)
Pipes other than thin walled pipes shall be stored horizontally at least
75 mm above the ground on wedged timber bearers. The bottom layers
and the outer pipes in each layer shall be securely wedged to prevent
sideways movement.
(2)
Socket and spigot pipes shall be stored with the sockets alternating
and in such a manner that loads are not applied to the sockets.
(3)
The height of stacks of pipes other than thin walled pipes shall not
exceed 2 m unless recommended by the manufacturer and permitted by the
Engineer.
(4)
Pipes shall not be strung out along the route of the pipeline unless
Transport of thin
walled pipes
22.41
When being transported, thin-walled pipes shall be supported on three

rubber-covered saddles shaped such that the pipes are supported over at
least one-quarter of the circumference. The pipes shall be securely fixed in
position at each saddle by straps tightened by turnbuckles. One saddle
shall be placed at the mid-point of the length of the pipe and the other two
saddles shall be placed at distances of one-fifth of the length of the pipe
from each end of the pipe.

of thin walled pipes
22.42
(1)
When being handled and stored, thin walled pipes shall be protected
from deformation by means of at least two screw jack cruciform struts with
rubber-padded ends shaped to fit the circumference of the pipes. The struts
shall be fitted inside the pipes. Any temporary struts fixed by the
manufacturer shall be left in position until the cruciform struts have been
fixed.
(2)
Thin-walled pipes shall be handled by using two reinforced canvas
slings at least 300 mm wide. The slings shall be suspended from a lifting
beam and shall be placed at a distance of one-fifth of the length of the pipe
from each end of the pipe.
(3)
Thin-walled pipes shall not be rolled.
(4)
Thin-walled pipes shall be stored on timber bearers padded with
hessian or straw to provide continuous support over at least one-third of the
circumference of the pipe. The pipes shall be securely fixed in position
with wedges placed at a distance of one-fifth of the length of the pipe from
each end of the pipe.
(5)
Storage of valves
22.43
Thin-walled pipes shall not be stacked on top of each other.
Valves, including power operated valves and associated electrical and

control equipment, shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations in a weatherproof store.
22.13
2006 Edition
ACCESS TO PIPELINES
Access to pipelines
22.44
(1)
Rubber wheeled trolleys shall be provided to obtain access inside
pipelines exceeding DN 500 for water supply pipework in order to joint
pipes, repair joints, coatings and linings and inspect the pipeline. Persons
entering pipelines shall wear clean soft-soled footwear.
(2)
Mechanical fans shall be provided to ensure that an adequate air
supply is available to those entering pipelines for inspection. Engine
driven fans shall be fitted with a flexible exhaust or other methods of
keeping exhaust fumes clear of the fresh air intake.
SETTING OUT OF PIPELINES

Setting out of
pipelines
22.45
(1)
Both horizontal and vertical alignment shown on the Drawings are
indicative only. The exact alignment shall be determined by the Engineer
on site in accordance with the procedure set out in this Clause.
(2)
Three weeks before commencing trench excavation of a section of
pipeline, the Contractor shall set out on site such section of pipeline based on
the indicative information given on the Drawings and shall proceed to
conduct the underground utilities survey. When this has been carried out,
the Contractor shall prepare his proposal of inspection pits excavation and
submit the same to the Engineer for agreement two weeks before
commencing trench excavation all in accordance with Clause 1.25(6). The
agreed inspection pits excavation shall be completed within one week to
provide the remaining one week as float time for the Engineer to inspect and,
if found necessary, adjust the indicative alignment to suit topography and
obstruction in accordance with sub-clause (3) of this Clause.
(3)
The Engineer may order excavation of inspection pits after initial
setting out or after the completion of the excavation of inspection pits
proposed by the Contractor at locations that may deviate from the proposed
indicative alignment to ascertain the final alignment. The inspection pits so
ordered shall be payable under the Bills of Quantities. The Contractor shall
exercise his best endeavour to complete such inspection pits excavation
before the scheduled commencement date for trench excavation.
(4)
The method of setting out shall be a centre line peg with suitable
offset at every change in horizontal alignment and a slight rail mounted on
two posts at 30m maximum or at every change in vertical alignment or any
other appropriate methods agreed by the Engineer.
(5)
Following the setting out and adjustments, if any, the existing ground
levels shall be recorded and agreed.
(6)
The chainages shown on the Drawings for mainlaying works are
nominal only and should only be used as a means of reference. The
measured distance between the chainages assigned to any two points will not
necessarily be that given by the difference in those chainages.
22.14
2006 Edition

Laying pipes
22.46
(1)
The Engineer shall be allowed to inspect trenches, bedding, pipes,
joints, fittings and valves before pipelaying for water supply pipeworks
starts. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer 24 hours, or such shorter
period agreed by the Engineer, before pipelaying starts in any part of the
permanent work.
(2)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before pipelaying
starts in any part of the permanent work.
(3)
pipelaying. Valves shall be inspected to ensure that they are in working
order and are capable of being fully opened and closed. Deleterious
material shall be removed and damage shall be repaired immediately before
and after pipelaying. Potable water shall be used for washing.
(4)
The inside of pipelines shall be kept clean and free from water, dirt,
stones, debris and deleterious material. Except when pipes are being
jointed, the open ends of pipelines shall be sealed with a wooden plug or
stopper or by other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(5)
Measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipes.
(6)
Pipelaying shall follow closely on excavation of the trench.
Lengths of trench, which in the opinion of the Engineer are excessive, shall
not be left open.
(7)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, pipelines with a gradient
steeper than 1 in 20 shall be laid in an uphill direction with sockets facing
uphill.
(8)
Pipes shall be laid in such a manner that water will not pond in
locations with zero and shallow gradients and such that the line and level of
pipes will comply with the specified tolerances.
Laying steel pipes
22.47
Steel pipes with welded joints for water supply pipeworks shall be spot
welded to the adjacent pipe to which they will be jointed immediately after
laying. Steel pipes manufactured with longitudinal or spiral welds shall be
aligned in such a manner that the welds are staggered from pipe to pipe by
at least 15 of arc.
Laying pipes with

flexible joints
22.48
The degree of the curve of pipes for water supply pipeworks with flexible
joints, which are to be laid to a curve, shall be equally distributed over all
joints within the curved section. The deflection at a completed joint shall
not exceed 3 or three-quarters of the maximum deflection recommended by
the manufacturer whichever is less.
Installation of valves
22.49
(1)
Operating gear and associated fittings shall be installed and fixed at
the same time as valves for water supply pipeworks are installed. After
installation, valves shall be cleaned inside and outside and left in a closed
position.
22.15
2006 Edition
(2)
Extension keys and clamps shall be fixed to valves in valve chambers
if the vertical distance between the top of the valve spindle and the finished
ground level exceeds 600 mm. The length of extension keys shall be such
that the top of the extension key is not more than 300 mm below the
finished ground level.
Bedding pipes
22.50
(1)
Surfaces on which pipes for water supply pipeworks will be laid shall
be cleaned and objects that may damage the pipes shall be removed before
pipes are laid.
(2)
The bottom of trenches on which pipes will be laid directly shall be
shaped to support the pipes uniformly along the length of the barrel.
Holes shall be dug to prevent pipes resting on the sockets and to allow the
pipes to be jointed.
CUTTING AND DRILLING PIPES

Cutting pipes
22.51
(1)
Pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be cut and the ends shall be
prepared in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Purpose-made equipment recommended by the manufacturer and agreed by
the Engineer shall be used for cutting the pipes.
(2)
Cut ends of pipes shall be square and even, without damage to the
pipe or coating. Cut ends, including cut ends of the piece not immediately
required, shall be trimmed and chamfered to suit the type of joint and in
such a manner that elastomeric joint rings will not be damaged by the cut
end.
(3)
Pipes requiring to be cut to form closing lengths shall not be cut until
adjacent pipes have been laid and jointed and the length to be cut can be
accurately measured.
(4)
The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before pipes
provided by the Employer are cut. Only those pipes, which in the opinion
of the Engineer are suitable for cutting on Site, shall be cut. All off-cuts
shall be used for the permanent work unless in the opinion of the Engineer
this is not practicable.
Drilling pipes
22.52
(1)
Pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be drilled for small diameter
connections using purpose made drilling and tapping equipment.
(2)
The threads of screw joints shall be painted before assembly with
two coats of bituminous paint and shall be wrapped with three turns of spun
yarn or other material approved by the Engineer.
22.16
2006 Edition
JOINTING PIPES
Jointing pipes
22.53
(1)
Pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be jointed in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations and using jointing equipment and
jointing materials recommended by the manufacturer and agreed by the
Engineer.
(2)
jointing. Deleterious material shall be removed and damage shall be
repaired immediately before and after jointing. Potable water shall be used
for washing. Surfaces that are to be jointed and jointing materials shall be
cleaned immediately before jointing.
(3)
All joints in pipelines shall be watertight.
(4)
The widths of gaps at joints shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and shall be achieved by marking the
outside of the pipe, by using metal feelers or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer. The position of elastomeric joint rings shall be checked by using
metal feelers after jointing.
(5)
Gaps at joints in pipes shall be protected after jointing by methods
agreed by the Engineer to prevent dirt, stones or other material entering the
joint.
(6)
Bolts holes in flanged joints and joints incorporating bolted
components shall be correctly orientated before the bolts are tightened.
The correct size of bolts and nuts shall be used. Bolt threads shall be
lubricated and bolts shall be tightened using the correct size of spanner.
Bolts shall be tightened in diametrically opposite pairs working around the
bolt circle until all bolts are tightened to the torque recommended by the
manufacturer.
(7)
Bolt holes in flanged joints shall be orientated symmetrically about
the vertical diameter with no bolt-holes on the vertical diameter.
Elastomeric joint rings shall be the correct size and shall not protrude into
the bore of the pipe. The rings may be temporarily fixed to the face of the
flange using a minimum amount of adhesive of a type recommended by the
manufacturer. Jointing compound or paste shall not be used.
DI pipes with push-in
joints
22.54
DI pipes with push-in joints for water supply pipeworks shall be jointed by
smearing the spigot end of the pipe with lubricant and placing the
elastomeric joint ring in position inside the groove of the socket end of the
laid pipe. The spigot end of the pipe shall be placed in the socket end of
the laid pipe and pushed home.
DI pipes with
mechanical joints
22.55
(1)
DI pipes with mechanical joints for water supply pipeworks shall be
jointed as stated in Clauses 22.55(2) to (4).
(2)
The elastomeric joint ring and the ends of the pipe shall be smeared
with lubricant over a distance recommended by the manufacturer.
(3)
The gland and the elastomeric joint ring shall be placed in position
on the spigot end of the pipe.
22.17
2006 Edition
(4)
The spigot end of the pipe shall be placed in the socket end of the
laid pipe before the bolts are tightened.
Welding joints in steel
pipes
22.56
(1)
Welding of joints in steel pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be
carried out by the metal-arc process in accordance with BS 2633 and BS
4515.
(2)
Butt welding shall not be used for jointing plain-ended pipes other
than for gusseted bends unless approved by the Engineer. If approved, the
ends of the pipes shall be prepared in accordance with BS 534 and BS 2633
and welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS 4515.
(3)
Records of welding operations shall be kept by the Contractor on the
Site and shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times.
(a)
Date,
(b)
Names of welders,
(c)
Location of welding operation, and
(d) Electrodes used in making each weld.

Steel pipes with spigot
and socket joints
22.57
(1)
Steel pipes with spigot and socket joints for water supply pipeworks
shall be jointed as stated in Clause 22.57(2) to (6).
(2)
Pipes not exceeding DN 700 shall be welded externally. Pipes
exceeding DN 700 shall be welded internally and shall then be welded
externally with a sealing weld.
(3)
Loose scale, slag, rust, paint and other deleterious material shall be
removed from parts of pipes to be welded by wire brushing or by other
methods agreed by the Engineer. The parts shall be kept clean and dry
before welding.
(4)
A double-run convex fillet weld shall be used for pipes not exceeding
DN 900 and a triple-run convex fillet weld shall be used for pipes exceeding
DN 900. The leg length of the fillet as deposited shall be at least the same
as the full thickness of the pipe wall. The actual throat depth shall not be
less than seven-tenths, and shall not exceed nine-tenths, of the minimum leg
length as deposited.
(5)
Deposition of the weld metal shall be carried out in such a manner
that all welds have adequate root fusion and are of good, clean metal, free
from cracks, gas holes, slag intrusion and other impurities. The surface of
the weld shall have an even contour with a regular finish and shall indicate
proper fusion with the parent metal. Slag shall be removed from each weld
by light hammering with a chipping hammer and by wire brushing.
(6)
Welds that contain cracks or other cavities or defects or in which the
weld metal overlaps on to the parent metal without proper fusion shall be
cut out and the joints shall be rewelded.
22.18
2006 Edition
Steel pipes with

welded steel collar
joints
22.58
Steel pipes with welded steel collar joints for water supply pipeworks shall
be jointed by leaving a gap not exceeding 75 mm between the ends of the
pipes to be jointed. A split steel collar shall be placed centrally around the
ends of the pipes. The collar shall be at least the same thickness as the
pipe wall and shall be approximately 300 mm long. The end of each pipe
shall be fillet welded to the collar as stated in Clause 22.57.
Steel pipes with

couplings and flange
adapters
22.59
(1)
Steel pipes with slip-on type couplings and flange adapters for water
supply pipeworks shall be jointed as stated in Clause 22.59(2) to (4).
(2)
Protective wrappings shall be removed from the ends of plain ended
pipes to be jointed and shall be replaced by:
(a)
Epoxy or plastics based coating of a proprietary type approved

by the Engineer.
(3)
The pipe shall be finished to an even, smooth surface free from
distortion to allow the components of the coupling or flange adapter to be
correctly positioned and jointed.
(4)
The coupling or flange adapter shall be placed in position on the
plain end before the bolts are tightened.
uPVC pipes with
push-in joints
22.60
uPVC pipes with push-in joints for water supply pipeworks shall be jointed
uPVC pipes with

solvent welded joints
22.61
uPVC pipes with solvent welded joints for water supply pipeworks shall be
jointed by applying solvent cement to the pipes to be jointed and pushing
the pipes home. Excess solvent shall not be applied and surplus solvent
shall be removed after jointing. Solvent welded pipes jointed outside the
trench shall not be placed in the trench until the solvent setting period
recommended by the manufacturer has elapsed.
GI pipe joints
22.62
GI pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be screw jointed using a threaded
coupler. The surface of the pipe and coupler shall be cleaned and the
threads shall be painted with two coats of bituminous paint. The pipe
thread shall be wrapped with three turns of spun yarn or other material
approved by the Engineer and the joint tightened using purpose made tools.
Coal tar compounds or lead-based paint shall not be used. Locking nuts to
branch connections shall be tightened. Branch connections shall not
protrude inside the pipe.
MAKING FLANGED JOINTS

Making flanged joints
22.63
(1)
Further to Clause 22.53(6), both pipes and/or fittings to be joined
together shall be independently supported and properly aligned. After
placing the gasket in position, the bolts shall be tightened in the sequence
as shown in Sketch No. 22.1 to avoid severe overstressing of the flange.
If it is necessary to dismantle the flanged joint, the bolts shall be slackened
in the reverse sequence to that used for tightening.
(2)
When flanges other than polyethylene flanges are tightened, the
bolts shall be tightened with a torque not exceeding the corresponding
value specified in Table 22.4(a), (b) or (c) as appropriate. If the joint is
22.19
2006 Edition
not sealed after applying the specified torque, then the bolts shall be
tightened with the torque increased by 10%. This procedure will be
repeated until the joint is sealed. A final tightening shall then be applied
with a further 10% increase in torque.
(3)
When polyethylene flanges are tightened, the bolt torque
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or in
the absence of such recommendations to the limits as shown in
Table 22.4 (d). Bolts shall be tightened by means of a torque
wrench.
PROTECTION TO STEEL FLANGED JOINTS, SLIP-ON

TYPE COUPLINGS AND FLANGE ADAPTERS
Protection to steel
flanged joints, slip-on
type couplings and
flange adapters
22.64
(1)
Steel flanged joints, slip-on type couplings and flange adapters in
steel pipes for water supply pipeworks shall be protected as stated in
Clauses 22.64(2) to (4). Protection shall be carried out after jointing is
complete.
(2)
The joint, including bolts and nuts, shall be cleaned to remove all
moisture, dirt, oil, grease and deleterious material. Bolts and nuts shall be
painted with two coats of bituminous paint and the joint shall be coated with
primer. Mastic filler shall be applied in such a manner that all depressions,
corners and voids between the bolts and nuts are filled and a smooth surface
is available on which to apply the anticorrosion tape.
(3)
At least two layers of anticorrosion tape shall be applied to all parts
of the joint and to the adjacent pipe for at least 200 mm beyond each end of
the joint. The tape shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and shall be wrapped spirally around the joint and pipe
with at least 55% overlap per spiral.
(4)
The tape shall be moulded manually after application to take up the
contours of the parts being protected.
22.20
2006 Edition
Table 22.4(a): Approximate bolt torques (PN 10 Flanged Joints)

Using rubber, cork, or paper millboard gaskets (3 mm thick only)
Nominal Size
DN
Approximate Bolt Torque

(Nm)
To seal at
10 bar
(mm)
To seal at
5 bar
80
55
55
55
100
55
60
65
150
90
90
95
200
95
105
110
250
90
95
105
300
95
105
115
350
90
100
110
400
125
135
150
450
120
130
145
500
125
135
155
600
160
180
220
700
160
185
235
800
200
240
325
900
200
240
330
1000
240
310
430
1100
240
315
440
1200
290
395
555
1400
335
470
670
1600
425
610
875
22.21
To seal at
16 bar
2006 Edition
Table 22.4(b): Approximate bolt torques (PN 16 Flanged Joints (DN 80 - 600))
Using rubber, cork, or paper millboard gaskets (3 mm thick only)
Nominal
size
DN
Approximate Bolt Torque (Nm)
(mm)
To seal at
5 bar
To seal at
10 bar
To seal at
16 bar
To seal at
20 bar
To seal at
25 bar
80
55
55
55
60
60
100
55
60
65
65
65
150
90
90
95
100
110
200
85
90
90
95
105
250
115
125
130
140
145
300
120
130
145
150
170
350
115
130
140
150
160
400
145
160
175
190
215
450
140
155
170
185
210
500
170
190
215
235
275
600
215
245
290
340
405
Table 22.4 (c): Approximate bolt torques (PN 16 Flanged Joints (DN 700 - 1600))
Using rubber, cork, or paper millboard gaskets (thickness up to and including 3 mm)
Nominal
size
DN
(mm)
To seal at
5 bar
To seal at
10 bar
To seal at
16 bar
To seal at
20 bar
To seal at
25 bar
700
235
280
370
430
510
800
290
375
505
590
695
900
290
380
515
610
720
1000
350
485
670
790
940
1100
350
490
680
805
965
1200
450
650
910
1090
1305
1400
475
730
1040
1245
1500
1600
600
945
1350
1630
1970
Approximate Bolt Torque (Nm)
22.22
2006 Edition
Table 22.4 (d): Typical bolt torques for polyethylene flanges

Nominal
PE Size
(mm)
Equivalent Size
of Metal Flange
(mm)
No. of
Bolts
Torque
Required
(Nm)
63
50
35
90
80
35
125
100
35
180
150
60
250
250
12
100
22.23
2006 Edition
Sketch No. 22.1
Bolt tightening sequence
Second First
Quadrant Quadrant
First Second
Quadrant Quadrant
For sizes having 12 bolts or more, it is recommended two jointers work simultaneously on diametrically opposite
bolts. Each jointer tightens the first nut in the first quadrant then the first nut in the second quadrant, returns to the
second nut in the first quadrant and so on.
22.24
2006 Edition
REPAIRS TO JOINTS, COATINGS AND LININGS

Repairs to joints,
coatings and linings
22.65
(1)
Joints and damage to coatings and linings of pipes, joints and
fittings for water supply pipeworks shall be repaired as stated in Clauses
22.65 to 22.68.
(2)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, repairs to joints,
coatings and linings shall be carried out using materials of the same type
and grade as in the pipe, joint or fitting.
(3)
External repairs shall be completed before internal repairs are
carried out.
(4)
Internal repairs and adjacent areas shall be washed with potable
water after the repair is complete.
Repairs to DI pipes
with bitumen coatings
22.66
Internal and external repairs to joints and coatings of DI pipes with

bitumen coatings shall be carried out using bituminous paint. The area to
be repaired shall be cleaned to bare metal and dried. The area to be
repaired shall be painted with bituminous paint to the same thickness as
the adjacent coating. The paint shall be finished to a smooth uniform
surface.
Internal repairs to DI
pipes with cement
mortar lining
22.67
(1)
Internal repairs to joints and linings of DI pipes with cement mortar
linings shall be carried out as stated in Clause 22.67(2) to (4).
(2)
The area to be repaired shall be cut back to leave clean, bright metal.
The area surrounding the area to be repaired shall be wetted.
(3)
The cement mortar shall be worked into the area to be repaired and
compacted to the same thickness as the adjacent lining. The cement
mortar shall be finished to a smooth uniform surface. The repaired area
shall be cured with curing compound as stated in Clause 16.11.
(4)
The inside of pipe sockets and the faces of flanges shall be kept free
from cement mortar.
Repairs to GI pipes
22.68
Internal and external repairs to joints and coatings of GI pipes shall be

carried out using zinc-based paint. The area to be repaired shall be
cleaned to bare metal and dried. The area to be repaired shall be painted
with a rust inhibitor, primer and two coats of zinc-based paint.

Thrust and anchor
blocks
22.69
(1)
The bearing face, and other faces stated in the Contract, of concrete
thrust and anchor blocks for water supply pipeworks shall be cast directly
against undisturbed ground. The faces of excavations shall be trimmed to
remove loose material before concreting. Excess excavation and working
space shall be filled with concrete of the same Grade as the block.
(2)
Internal pressure shall not be applied to the pipeline until thrust and
anchor blocks have developed the specified grade strength.
22.25
2006 Edition

Concrete bed, haunch
and surround
22.70
(1)
Concrete bed, haunch and surround to pipelines for water supply
pipeworks shall be constructed as stated in (2) to (5) of this Clause.
(2)
Pipes shall be supported at the required level by Grade 20 precast
concrete wedges, blocks or cradles or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer. One support shall be placed adjacent to each end of each pipe
and the spacing between supports shall not exceed 3 m. Compressible
sheeting shall be placed between the pipes and supports.
(3)
Flexible joints shall be formed in concrete bed, haunch and surround
at flexible joints in pipelines. Joint filler shall be placed next to the
flexible joint in the pipeline and shall extend for the complete thickness of
the bed, haunch and surround.
(4)
Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed on the trench bottom before
concreting.
(5)
Concrete shall be placed evenly over the complete width of the bed
and over the complete length of the pipe being concreted up to a level of 25
mm below the underside of the pipe. Concrete shall then be placed on
one side of the pipe only and worked under the pipe until the concrete
spreads under the pipe. Concrete shall then be placed equally on both
sides of the pipe to the specified level.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances : pipelines
22.71
The line and level of pipelines for water supply pipeworks shall be within
25 mm of the specified line and level.
SWABBING
Swabbing of pipelines
22.72
(1)
The decision as to whether swabbing should be carried out is
subject to the availability of water, which should be agreed with the
Distribution Engineer of Water Supplies Department. Swabbing shall
not normally be required for new pipes exceeding DN 600 that can be
inspected internally to ensure cleanliness.
(2)
Swabs shall be of a proprietary brand obtained from an approved
manufacturer and used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. They shall be of a compressible hard grade polyurethane
foam in cylindrical shape and shall have the following diameters:
DN of Pipe
Diameter of Swab
Up to 300 mm
Pipe DN + 25%
Above 300 mm
Pipe DN + 75 mm
22.26
2006 Edition
Swabs shall be suitable for clearing out new pipelines and removing dirt
and materials inadvertently left in the pipeline during construction. It is
recommended that swabs be fitted with a signaling device to enable the
swab to be located within the pipeline.
(3)
Water for swabbing shall be supplied free of charge by the
Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the conveyance of
water to the place where swabbing work is required and if necessary,
pressurize the water to a level sufficient for the swabbing work.
(4)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the swab shall be
inserted into a short plain-ended pipe at ground level adjacent to the
trench and the pipe shall then be fitted, by means of flange adaptors, into
position in the pipeline between two gate valves which shall then be
opened to allow the swab to pass through the pipeline.
(5)
The swab must be fully immersed in water during the entire
operation using water as the driving medium. Foam swabs must not be
air driven and the water must not drain away from the swab on downhill
sections. The velocity of the swab, which shall be controlled by the rate
of flow of water downstream of the swab, shall be kept within a range of
300 mm/sec to 1200 mm/sec.
(6)
All air valves and valves on tees/branches from the pipeline shall
be closed before swabbing work commences.
(7)
At least 14 days before the swabbing operation is to be carried
out, the Contractor shall submit the following information for the
approval of the Engineer:
(a)
Name and address of supplier of swab,
(b)
Place and name of manufacturer,
(c)
Type and grade of swab,
(d)
Manufacturer's recommended instructions for use,
(e)
Details of previous applications of the proposed type of

swab,
(f)
Programme and details of swabbing operation, and
(g)
Means of recovering swab from pipeline at the end of

the swabbing run.
CLEANING AND STERILISATION OF PIPELINES

Cleaning and
sterilisation of
pipelines
22.73
(1)
Fresh water and potable water pipelines for water supply pipeworks
shall be cleaned and flushed through with potable water. Cleaning and
flushing shall be carried out after:
(a) The complete pipeline, or parts of the pipelines permitted by
the Engineer, has been tested,
22.27
2006 Edition
(b)
Temporary Works required for testing have been removed,

and
(c)
Parts of the pipeline removed for testing have been

reconnected.
(2)
The pipeline shall be completely filled with water that has been
dosed with a homogeneous solution of sterilising chemicals such that the
final concentration of free chlorine in the water is at least 30 ppm. The
water shall be left in the pipeline for at least 24 hours.
(3)
After the 24-hour period, the pipeline shall be drained down and the
sterilising water shall be flushed out using potable water until the
concentration of the remaining chlorine is less than 1 ppm.
(4)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, pipelines shall be
cleaned and sterilised not more than 7 days before the pipeline is handed
over.
CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATERMAINS

Connection to existing
watermains
22.74
(1)
Where connections to existing watermains are specified in the
Contract, whether to be done by others or by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall excavate inspection pits to determine the locations and
levels of the existing watermains as directed by the Engineer. The
Engineer may adjust the lines and levels of the proposed watermains to
suit the lines and levels of the existing watermains.
(2)
Where connections to existing watermains are specified in the
Contract to be done by others, the Contractor shall lay and terminate the
proposed watermains approximately 2 m from the existing watermains or
as directed on Site by the Engineer.
IDENTIFICATION TAPES FOR WATERMAINS

Identification tapes for
watermains
22.75
(1)
Identification tapes for watermains shall be as shown on Drawing
No. WSD 1.31 of the standard drawing of Water Supplies Department.
(2)
A sample of the proposed identification tape of a minimum
length of 1 metre shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least
14 days before the relevant work starts.
(3)
During the backfilling of pipe trenches, the fill material shall be
properly levelled and compacted to prepare for the laying of the
identification tapes on a flat surface.
(4)
Identification tapes shall be laid continuously along all
watermains with the printed pattern facing upward. Wherever lapping is
required, a minimum overlapping length of 300 mm shall be provided at
each lap position. Identification tapes shall be temporarily secured in
position before further backfilling.
22.28
2006 Edition
(5)
Identification tapes shall terminate at the external faces of
chambers and pits.
DETECTABLE
WARNING
NON-METALLIC WATERMAINS
Detectable warning
tape for non-metallic
watermains
22.76
TAPE
FOR
(1)
Detectable warning tape for buried non-metallic water mains
shall be a polyethylene tape with a continuous aluminium foil inside as
shown on Drawing No. WSD 1.37.
(2)
At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall
submit a 1 m (minimum) long sample of proposed detectable warning
tape to the Engineer for approval.
(3)
Detectable warning tapes shall be laid continuously along all
new buried non-metallic water mains and be used in conjunction with the
identification tapes. Detectable warning tapes shall be placed directly
on top of the non-metallic water mains with the printed pattern facing
upward and fixed onto the pipe bodies using adhesive tapes at regular
intervals of 5 m (approx.). Identification tapes shall then be placed at
300 mm above the crown of the water mains during backfilling.
(4)
Wherever lapping is required, a minimum overlapping length of
300 mm shall be provided. At the lap, detectable warning tapes shall be
jointed together by either 2 no. stainless steel crimps or a stainless steel
clamp as shown on Drawing No. WSD 1.37. The stainless steel
crimps/clamp shall pierce through the plastic covering of the tapes to
make direct contact with the aluminium foils.
(5)
Any change in direction of the detectable warning tape to suit the
alignment of the water main shall be achieved by folding the tape and
stapling the laps with stainless steel crimp(s) as shown on Drawing No.
WSD 1.37. For tee connection of the water main, the tee joint of the
detectable warning tape shall be formed by joining two tapes together
perpendicularly using a stainless steel clamp as shown on Drawing No.
WSD 1.37.
(6)
Terminal connection points shall be provided at the internal face
of valve pits at regular spacing not exceeding 200 m or at locations as
indicated on the drawing. The detectable warning tape shall be brought
to the surface within such valve pit and mounted to the pit wall to form a
terminal connection point as shown on Drawing No. WSD 1.37 by means
of a stainless steel clamp and rawl bolts. Further, the tape shall be
folded to by-pass the valve in order to avoid interfering the normal
open-close operation of the valve.
(7)
The deposition and compaction of fill material to pipe trenches
shall be carried out in such a manner as to enable the detectable warning
tapes and identification tapes to be laid properly. During the backfilling
of pipe trenches, the fill material shall be properly deposited, leveled and
compacted to prepare for the laying of these tapes.
22.29
2006 Edition
WORK ON ASBESTOS CEMENT

DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTES
Work on asbestos
cement pipes and
disposal of asbestos
wastes
22.77
(1)
PIPES
AND
Two copies of the following publications shall be maintained on

Site at all times for reference, one copy of which shall be for the
sole use of the Engineer:
(a)
"Guide to the Factories and Industrial Undertakings

(Asbestos) Special Regulations 1986" issued by the
Labour Department, Hong Kong.
(b)
"Control of Asbestos at Work - Code of Practice" issued

by the Labour Department, Hong Kong.
(c)
"Code of Practice on the Handling, Transport and

Disposal of Asbestos Waste" issued by the Secretary for
Health & Welfare, Hong Kong.
(2)
Not less than 7 days before disposing of any unwanted Asbestos
Cement pipes or fittings, the Contractor shall confirm to the Engineer that
the Permit required by Waste Disposal Authority has been obtained.
TESTING: JOINTS IN STEEL PIPES

Testing: joints in steel
pipes
22.78
(1)
Spigot and socket joints in steel pipes exceeding DN 700 for water
supply pipeworks shall be tested after welding by the nitrogen gas test.
(2)
A tapped hole of approximately 6 mm diameter shall be made in the
socket end of each pipe to be tested and a non-return valve shall be fixed in
the hole. The nitrogen gas test shall be carried out by pumping nitrogen
to a pressure of 400 kPa into the annular space between the spigot and
socket. The pump shall be disconnected and the pressure shall be
recorded for 30 minutes.
joints in steel pipes
22.79
There shall be no drop in pressure in the joint during the 30 minute period
of the nitrogen gas test.
Non-compliance: joints
in steel pipes
22.80
If the result of any nitrogen gas test does not comply with the specified
requirement for the test, the weld at the joint shall be cut out and the joint
shall be rewelded and tested.
TESTING: PRESSURE
SUPPLY PIPEWORKS
Testing: pressure
pipelines for water
supply pipeworks
22.81
PIPELINES
FOR
WATER
(1)
Pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks shall be tested as
stated in Clause 22.81(2) to (6).
(2)
The pipeline shall be tested in sections as stated in the Contract
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. If testing in sections other
than those stated in the Contract is permitted, the section to be tested shall
22.30
2006 Edition
be as long as practicable provided that the specified test pressure will not
be exceeded. Final tests on complete pipelines that have been tested in
sections shall not be carried out unless stated in the Contract.
(3)
The test pressure shall be as stated in the Contract. If the test
pressure is not stated in the Contract, the test pressure shall be:
(a)
1.5 times the maximum working pressure if the maximum

working pressure does not exceed 1.5 MPa, or
(b)
1.3 times the maximum working pressure if the maximum

working pressure exceeds 1.5 MPa.
(4)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, pressure tests shall not
be carried out until the fill material has been deposited and compacted over
the complete length of the pipeline to be tested. If permitted, sufficient
fill material shall be deposited to restrain the pipeline in position during the
test.
(5)
Tests shall not be carried out simultaneously on pipelines in the
same trench.
(6)
(7)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the pipeline shall be
left charged with water at a head of at least 15 m after testing and until the
pipeline has been sterilised or handed over to the Employer.
water supply pipeworks
Non-compliance:
water supply pipeworks
22.82
22.83
The results of tests on pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks shall
(a)

pressure test shall not exceed the permitted leakage calculated
in accordance with Clause 22.1.4 in Appendix 22.1.
(b)
There shall be no discernable leakage of water from the

pipeline or from any joint during the pressure test.
If the result of any test on pressure pipelines for water supply pipeworks
does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the
Contractor shall investigate the reason. Remedial or replacement work
approved by the Engineer shall be carried out and the pipeline shall be
retested.
TESTING: WATER STERILISATION

Testing: water
sterilisation
22.84
(1)
After the pressure test on fresh water and potable water pipelines for
water supply pipelines has been completed, samples of the water in the
pipeline will be taken by the Engineer. The number of samples and
locations of sampling shall be as instructed by the Engineer. Testing shall
be carried out as stated in Clauses 23.36 and 23.37 for water sterilisation of
water retaining structures.
(2)
The colour, odour, appearance, turbidity, conductivity and pH
value of the water samples shall be of a quality comparable with that
drawn from the supply point and acceptable for potable water.
22.31
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 22.1
PRESSURE TESTS ON PIPELINES
Scope
22.1.1
This method covers the determination of the leakage of water from

pipelines for water supply pipeworks by means of a pressure test.
Equipment
22.1.2
Procedure
22.1.3
(a)
Blank flanges or caps.
(b)
Struts and wedges.
(c)
Temporary concrete blocks or other anchors.
(d)
Force pump and pump feed tank.
(e)
Pressure gauge, readable and accurate to 0.01 m head.
(f)
Continuous pressure recorder and purpose made charts.

(a)
Pipes and valves shall be checked for cleanliness and the operation
of valves shall be checked.
(b)
Blank flanges or caps shall be fixed to the ends of the pipeline, or

section of the pipeline, to be tested. Tests shall not be made
against valve gates.
(c)
The blank flanges and caps shall be secured with struts and wedges
against temporary concrete blocks or other anchors. The blocks
and anchors shall be completed and shall have hardened sufficiently
before testing starts.
(d)
Thrust and anchor blocks, pipe straps and other devices required to
prevent movement of pipes and fittings shall be completed before
testing starts.
(e)
The pipeline shall be filled with water and all air shall be removed.
(f)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the pipeline shall

remain filled for 3 days before testing starts to allow absorption to
take place and to achieve conditions that are as stable as practicable.
(g)
The pressure in the pipeline shall be increased slowly to the

specified test pressure by pumping water into the pipeline using a
force pump.
(h)
The pressure in the pipeline shall be maintained within +0% and

-5% of the specified test pressure for a test period of at least 2
hours.
22.32
2006 Edition
Calculation
22.1.4
(i)
At the beginning and end of the test period and at 30 minute

intervals during the test period, readings shall be taken from the
pressure gauge and the pressures (p) shall be recorded. The
pressure shall be adjusted to the specified test pressure each time a
reading is taken.
(j)
The pressure shall be adjusted to within the specified tolerances for

the test pressure at any time during the test period when the pressure
falls outside the specified tolerances.
(k)
The pressure shall be monitored during the test by means of a

continuous pressure recorder with purpose made charts.
(l)
The leakage of water from the pipeline shall be measured as the

amount of water required to maintain the specified test pressure in
the pipeline. The amount of water shall be determined from the
fall in level of water in the pump feed tank.
(1)
The average test pressure (P) shall be calculated as the average of
the pressures (p) recorded during the test.
(2)
The permitted leakage of water from the pipeline during the
pressure test shall be calculated from the equation:
Permitted leakage = 0.02 x d x l x
t
24
P
10
litre
where:
22.1.5
d is the nominal diameter of the pipe (mm)
l is the length of pipeline tested (km)
t is the test period (hr)
P is the average test pressure (m)

(a)
The internal diameter of the pipe to the nearest 1 mm.
(b)
The length of pipeline tested to the nearest 1 m.
(c)
The test period to the nearest 0.01 hr.
(d)
The pressures recorded during the test to the nearest 0.01 m.
(e)
The average test pressure to the nearest 0.01 m.
(f)
The leakage and permitted leakage of water to the nearest 0.1 litre.
(g)
Details of any discernable leakage of water from the pipeline during

the test.
(h)
Charts obtained from the continuous pressure recorder.
(i)
22.33
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 22.2
PROTECTION TO STEEL PIPES, FITTINGS AND
SPECIALS USING EPOXY SYSTEM OTHER
REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
22.2.1
(1)
Pipes, fittings and specials shall be protected both internally and
externally and shall be suitable for use in and transport through the
tropics.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide full documentation from the pipe
manufacturer and/or protection supplier detailing the guaranteed service
life of the proposed materials.
(3)
The Contractor shall provide certification pursuant to Clause
4.2.2 of AWWA C210-1997 where epoxy system is applied.
(4)
For pipes with outside diameter less than 1016 mm, internal
protection with sulphate resistant cement mortar lining in accordance
with the requirement of BS EN 10298:2005 will also be considered by
the Engineer.
(5)
Slip-on type couplings and flanges adaptors (including nuts and
bolts) shall be protected with Rilsan Nylon 11 or a fusion bonded epoxy,
coating (as in the Table 22.2) and shall not require bituminous paint.
(6)
Expansion joints shall be protected in accordance with
sub-clauses (1) and (2) of this Clause, except stainless steel slides
surfaces that require no coating.
(7)
All bolts and nuts shall be hot dip galvanized or be coated with
an epoxy- or plastic-based corrosion-protection coating.
(8)
For pipes, fittings and specials to be jointed together by welding,
internal and external protections shall be stopped back at the ends as
follows: (a)
(b)
Butt welded joints 75mm from the ends of pipes to be

welded
Sleeve welded joints for sleeve and spigot sleeve, length
plus 75mm
In all cases, priming shall extend to the ends of the pipes.

(9)
For pipes, fittings and specials not to be jointed by welding, the
external protection shall be stopped back a distance sufficient to permit
assembly of the joint and internal protection shall extend to the pipe end.
(10)
On-site completion or repair of protection lining shall be carried
out in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Except for epoxy or plastic based protection coatings, materials for
completing and repairing the external and internal protections on site
shall be approved by the Engineer. The manufacturer shall submit one set
of the maintenance guideline/manual on repair of epoxy coatings to the
Engineer.
22.34
2006 Edition
GENERAL PROTECTION COATING REQUIREMENTS

General
22.2.2
Selection of coating systems and application procedures shall be made

with due consideration to environmental conditions during fabrication,
installation and service of the installation. All coating application
procedures shall be carried out in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C210-97.
Planning and
documentation
22.2.3
(1)
All painting activities shall be fully incorporated into and
regarded as an integral part of the fabrication plan.
(2)
Procedures pertaining to overall management, painting facilities,
painting equipment, painting application, quality assurance, quality
checks, repair and maintenance etc. shall be established and documented
in detail and submitted for the approval of the Engineer before
commencement of the actual painting work.
Ambient conditions
22.2.4
(1)
No final blast cleaning or coating application shall be done if the
relative humidity is more than 85%, and if the steel temperature is less
than 3 C above dew point in the ambient. No coating shall be applied or
cured at ambient temperatures below 10 C.
(2)
The coating specification and/or product data sheets shall specify
the maximum and minimum application and curing temperatures and
other relevant requisites regarding application and curing conditions for
each product in any coating system.
Coating materials
22.2.5
The coating materials shall be suitable for the intended use and shall meet
(i)
In compliance with health, safety and environment protection

requirements
(ii)
Suitable for raw water, salt water, fresh water and treated effluent
(iii)
For fresh water main coating, the material shall be suitable for
drinking water uses
Steel materials
22.2.6
Steel used for fabrication, before abrasive blast cleaning, shall as a

minimum requirement be in accordance with Rust Grade B according to
BS EN ISO 8501-1:2001. Any primer applied by the steel manufacturer
shall be regarded as temporary corrosion protection and shall be removed
in appropriate manner before application of the coating systems herein.
Pre-qualification of
coating, personnel and
procedures
22.2.7
Pre-qualification requirements as described in Clauses 22.2.16 to 22.2.19

of this Appendix shall be fulfilled and documented. In the case of
equivalent product or alternative to the coating system specified in Clause
22.2.20 is to be proposed, prior written consent from the Engineer shall
be obtained before commencement of any work in accordance with this
specification.
22.35
2006 Edition
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL

CONCERNS
Requirements
22.2.8
The following information/documentation shall be properly filed and

made available for inspection upon demand.
(a)
Product Data Sheet of the coating material
(b)
Material Safety Data Sheet of the coating material.
(c)
Volatile Organic Compound content (g/l) of the coating material.
(d)
Special handling precautions, personal protection, disposal
instructions.
SURFACE PREPARATION OF THE SUBSTRATE

Pre-blasting
preparation
22.2.9
(1)
Sharp edges, blurs, welding seams shall be rounded or
smoothened by mechanical grinding before blast cleaning.
(2)
Hard surface lavers resulting from flame cutting shall be removed
by mechanical grinding bfore blast cleaning.
(3)
Welding slag shall be removed by mechanical chipping and/or
grinding. Blow-holes and welding imperfections shall be repaired by spot
welding or removed by mechanical grinding. All welds shall be
inspected and if necessary repaired before final blast cleaning of the area.
(4)
Any major surface defects, particularly surface laminations or
scabs detrimental to the protective coating system shall be removed by
suitable dressing. Where such defects have been revealed during blast
cleaning, and dressing has been performed, the dressed area shall be
re-blasted to the specified standard.
(5)
The surface of the substrate shall be free from any foreign matter
such as weld flux, residue, dirt, oil, grease, salt, etc. before blast cleaning.
(6)
Any oil and grease contamination shall be cleaned by use of a
new rag soaked with a suitable solvent.
Blast cleaning
22.2.10 (1)
Blasting abrasives shall be dry, clean and free from contaminants
that will be detrimental to the performance of the coating. It shall be in
compliance with requirements as specified in BS EN ISO 11124.
(2)
Size and shape of abrasive particles for blast cleaning shall be
such that the prepared surface profile (anchor pattern profile) is in
accordance with the requirements for the applicable coating system. The
surface profile will be graded in accordance with BS EN ISO 8503.
(3)
The cleanliness of the blast-cleaned surface shall be as referred to
for each coating system i.e. Sa 2.5 or Sa 3 in accordance with BS EN ISO
8501-1:2001.
22.36
2006 Edition
Final surface condition
22.2.11 (1)
The substrate surface, after abrasive blast cleaning and before
coating, shall be clean, dry, free from oil/grease and have the specified
roughness and cleanliness ready for the first coat to be applied.
(2)
Dust, residual blast abrasives etc. shall be removed from the
surface after blasting such that the surface cleanliness complies with
Rating 2 of BS EN ISO 8502-3:2000.
(3)
The maximum content of soluble impurities on the blasted surface
as sampled in accordance with BS EN ISO 8502-6:2000 shall not exceed
a conductivity corresponding to a NaCl content of 100 mg/M2.
Equivalent methods may be used.
PAINT APPLICATION
General
22.2.12 (1)
Product data sheet for each and every product used in a coating
system shall be filed and made available for reference.
(2)
The following information for each product used in the coating
system shall be clearly specified.
Application equipment
22.2.13 (1)
(i)
Surface treatment requirements
(ii)
Wet film thickness/dry firm thickness (max, min. and

specified).
(iii)
Maximum and minimum recoating intervals at 10C

gradient from 40C down to -5C.
(iv)
Information on type of thinner to be used, thinning ratios.
(v)
Mixing, handling and application requirements /

recommendations.
Roller shall not be used for paint application.
(2)
When paints are applied by brush, the brush used shall be of a
style and quality acceptable to the coating manufacturer. Brush
application shall be done so that a smooth coat in accordance with
specified thickness is obtained.
(3)
Airless spray equipment is recommended to achieve uniform
coating with good penetration. Coating supplier 's recommendation for
pressure settings, nozzle sizes and fan angles shall be followed.
Application
22.2.14 (1)
Before application of each coat, a stripe coat shall be applied by
brush to all welds, corners, behind angles, sharp edges of beams and
areas not fully reachable by spray, etc. in order to obtain the specified
film thickness in these areas.
(2)
Edges of existing coating shall be feathered before over-coating
and overlapping.
22.37
2006 Edition
(3)
Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface.
Skips, runs. sags and drips shall be avoided. Each coat shall be free from
pinholes, blisters and holidays.
(4)
Contamination of painted surface between coats shall be
avoided. Any contamination shall be removed as per ANSI/AWWA
C210 requirements.
Repair
22.2.15 All repairs of coating shall be conducted in accordance with the original
surface preparation requirements for the substrate and coating application
requirements. The Contractor shall submit a method statement for to
repair any damage caused to the epoxy coating for the approval of the
Engineer.
QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL, SUPPLIER AND

PRODUCT
Operators
22.2.16 (1)
Operators for blast cleaning, paint application etc. shall be
properly trained and approved by the Engineer with knowledge in areas
concerning operational technique, equipment use, product handling,
industrial safety, personal health and use of protection equipment, etc.
(2)
The personnel involved in carrying out quality inspection or
verification such as QC/QA staff shall be qualified in accordance with
industrial standard. A relevant qualification in this regard is acceptable
if the person has attained the status of Certified Painting Inspector by
FROSIO or NACE Painting Inspector - Level 3 or equivalent.
Supplier
22.2.17 (1)
The Supplier of coating material shall be evaluated and approved
by the Engineer.
(2)
The Supplier shall demonstrate that it has the resources
technically, financially to fulfill its commitments with supply to the
Contract. In this regard, Manufacturer's research and development
ability to support product advancement, production capacity, quality
assurance system, supply logistics, and on-site technical after-sale
support shall be evaluated.
Coating material
22.2.18 (1)
The coating material used for internal lining shall be tested and
pass the requirements of BS 6920. A certification issued by Water
Research Centre of the UK approving such coating for contact with
potable water suitable for human consumption or its equivalent shall be
provided.
(2)
Coatings used for both internal and external lining shall be
demonstrated suitable mechanical properties and anti-corrosion properties
for the long-term protection of the substrate. In this regard, the following
properties may be used as selection criteria:
(i)
Minimum adhesion strength in accordance with ASTM

D4541 shall be equal to 19 MPa or in accordance with
BS EN ISO 4624:2003 shall be equal to 12 MPa.
(ii)
Minimum impact test in accordance with ASTM D2794

shall be 0.136 kg-m.
22.38
2006 Edition
(iii)
Paint working
specification (PWS)
Minimum abrasion resistance in accordance with ASTM

D4060 (Taber Abraser Wheel CS-17) shall be
200mg/1000 rotations, load 1000 grams.
22.2.19 The Supplier of coating material shall provide a working specification

sheet giving a summary of the work procedures. This working
specification shall be properly filed and made available for reference
from time to time to ensure correct procedures are followed.
COATING SYSTEM
22.2.20 The coating system for carbon steel pipe shall be in accordance with coating
system as in Table 22.2.20(a), (b) and (c) as appropriate:
Coating system
requirements
Table 22.2.20(a):
System 1 for carbon steel pipe internal lining
SYSTEM 1.
For carbon steel
pipe internal lining
Coating Material and Surface

Protection Requirements :
Minimum Dry
Film
Thickness
(DFT)
(Microns)
Surface Preparation
Abrasive blast to Min. Sa2.5 (BS EN

ISO 8501) Roughness to medium
grade (BS EN ISO 8503) or 10Na
according to Rugotest No. 3
Primer Coat
Solvent free two-component, high

build polyamine cured epoxy
250
Intermediate Coat

250
Final Coat

250
Total Dry Film Thickness
750
22.39
2006 Edition
Table 22.2.20(b): System 2 for carbon steel pipe external lining pipe shielded from direct sunlight
(buried underground)
SYSTEM 2.
For carbon steel
Pipe external lining
pipe shielded from
direct sunlight
(buried
underground)
Coating Material and Surface

Minimum Dry
Film
Thickness
(DFT)
(Microns)
Surface Preparation

Primer Coat

200
Final Coat

200
400
NOTES:
1. For pipe to be installed outdoor under direct sunlight, a topcoat of aliphatic
polyurethane at 50 microns is required for extra protection.
Table 22.2.20(c):
System 3 for carbon steel pipe temporary protection after blasting (approx. 15 cm)
SYSTEM 3.
For carbon steel pipe
end temporary
protection after
blasting
(approx. 15cm)
Coating Material and Surface Minimum Dry

Film
Thickness
(DFT)
(Microns)
Surface Preparation

Blast Primer
2-component amine adduct cured

50
epoxy primer
50
INSPECTION AND TESTING

Testing and inspection
22.2.21 (1)
Testing and inspection shall be carried out in accordance with
Table 22.2.21 throughout the application process to ensure overall
specification is met.
(2)
All epoxy and plastic bond coating shall be tested in accordance
with BS 6920 and WIS 4-52-01.
22.40
2006 Edition
Table 22.2.21: Testing and inspection

Action to
take in case
of failure
No blasting
or coating
Test Type
Method
Frequency
Acceptance criteria
Environmental
Conditions
Ambient and steel

temperature.
Relative humidity
Dew point
Before start of
each shift +
twice per shift
evenly timed
(a) Relative
Humidity below
85%
(b) Steel surface
temp. 3C above
dew point
Visual
examination
Visual for sharp

edges.
Welding spatter
slivers rust grades
etc.
100% of all
surface
No defect.
Ref. Specified
requirement
Defects to be
repaired
Cleanliness
BS EN ISO
8501-1:2001
100% visual of
all surface
Min Sa2.5
Re-blasting
De-dust
condition
BS EN ISO
8502-3:2000
Spot check
Dust condition Max.

quantity and size
rating 2
Water soluble
salts on steel
surface
BS EN ISO
8502-6:2000
Spot check
Max. conductivity
Corresponding to 100
mg/ m2 NaCl
Re-cleaning
and retesting
until
acceptable
Re-cleaning
and retesting
until
acceptable
Surface profile
of the blast
cleaned surface
BS EN ISO 8503
Spot check
Profile grade
Medium
Re-blasting
Visual
Examination of
Coating defects
Visual to
determine:
1. Contamination
2. Solvent
retention
3. Pinholes
4. Sagging
5. Surface defects
SSPC-PA 2
Calibration on
smooth surface
100% of
surface for
each coat
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Repair of
defect
SSPC-PA2
SSPC-PA2 Apply
DS/R 454-80:20 rule
ASTM D 3359
Spot check
Above level 3
Film thickness
Adhesion
NOTES:
All readings should refer to coating system specification.
22.41
No contamination
No solvent trap
No pinholes
No sagging
Smooth and good
cosmetic
appearance
Repair
additional
coats or
re-coating as
appropriate
Coating to be
rejected
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 23
23.1
2006 Edition
23.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 23
GENERAL
23.01
Earthworks
23.02
Formwork
23.03
Reinforcement
23.04
Concrete
23.05
Joints in concrete
23.06
Joints in concrete shall comply with Section 16.
Drainage systems
23.07
Drainage systems shall comply with Section 5.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Water retaining
structure
23.08
Water retaining structure is a structure, or part of a structure, including

walls, floors, roofs, columns and footings, which is stated in the Contract to
be constructed for storing, conveying or excluding water, sewage or other
aqueous liquids.
MATERIALS
Sliding layers
23.09
Sliding layers below floor slabs of water retaining structures shall be of a

proprietary type of polyethylene sheeting approved by the Engineer.
MATERIALS PROVIDED AND EQUIPMENT LOANED

BY THE EMPLOYER
Materials provided by
the Employer
23.10
(1)
Water and sterilising chemicals for cleaning, sterilising and testing
water retaining structures as stated in Clauses 23.24 and 23.32 will be
provided by the Employer for one set of tests. The water and sterilising
chemicals shall be obtained from the locations stated in the Contract or
from other locations agreed by the Engineer and shall be mixed by the
Contractor.
(2)
Further to sub-clause (1) of this Clause, the Contractor shall be
responsible for providing the water and sterilizing chemicals for
re-testing when the water retaining structures tests do not comply with
the test requirements and compliance criteria specified in the Contract.
23.3
2006 Edition
Equipment loaned by
the Employer
23.11
The equipment for recording water levels in tests on water retaining

structures as stated in Clause 23.32(4) that is to be included in Contracts
entered into with the Water Supplies Department will be loaned by the
Employer.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of sliding
layers
23.12
Particulars of the source and type of proposed sliding layers for water
retaining structures shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least
14 days before the first delivery of the sliding layer to the Site.
Particulars of
materials and methods
of construction for
water retaining
structures
23.13
(1)
construction for water retaining structures shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Sequence and method of concreting bays in floor slabs, walls

and roof slabs and in columns and footings,
(b)
Details of alternative locations of construction joints if

required,
(c)
Details of type and size of waterstops at construction joints

and box-outs,
(d)
Sequence and method of testing roofs for watertightness, and
(e) Details of method of testing water retaining structures for

watertightness including:
- Arrangement of pumps and equipment
- Source of water
- Equipment for measuring fall in water level
- Device for dampening the oscillatory motion of the water
surface
- Filling rate
- Method of correction for evaporation and rainfall.
(2)
Samples of sliding
layers
23.14
Samples of the proposed sliding layers for water retaining structures shall
be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as particulars of the sliding
layer are submitted.
23.4
2006 Edition
Storage of sliding
layers
23.15
Sliding layers for water retaining structures shall be stored in accordance

with the manufacturers recommendations in a dry weatherproof store.
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
Drainage systems
23.16
Measures shall be taken to prevent concrete and deleterious material from

being deposited in drainage systems under floors and on roofs of water
retaining structures. After construction and before testing, the drainage
system shall be thoroughly cleaned by rodding and flushing to remove any
deleterious material that may impede the flow of water into or through the
drainage system. The lines and levels of drainage systems shall be within
20 mm of the specified horizontal alignment and within 10 mm of the
specified vertical alignment.
CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURES
OF
WATER
RETAINING
Laying sliding layers
23.17
Polyethylene sheeting in sliding layers below floor slabs of water retaining

structures shall be laid flat without creases. Laps shall be at least 225 mm
and there shall be no gaps at the edges of bays.
Floor slabs of water

retaining structures
23.18
If reinforcement is continuous across the joint between bays in the floor

slab of water retaining structures, the bays shall be concreted
contiguously, in sequence, with a minimum period of 48 hours between
completion of concreting one bay and commencement of concreting the
adjacent bay.
Walls of water
23.19
(1)
If reinforcement is continuous across the joint between bays in the
wall of water retaining structures, the bays shall be concreted contiguously,
in sequence, with a minimum period of 72 hours between the completion
of concreting the lift in one bay and commencement of concreting the
adjacent lift in the adjacent bay.
(2)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the first lift in each bay
in the walls of water retaining structures shall be concreted not more than 7
days after completion of concreting the adjacent base of the wall.
Individual lifts shall be concreted in one continuous operation without cold
joints, whether or not the full height of the wall is concreted in one lift. If
the full height of the wall is not placed in one lift, succeeding lifts shall be
concreted within 7 days of concreting of the adjacent lift unless otherwise
Roof slabs of water

23.20
If reinforcement is continuous across the joint between bays in the roof

slab of water retaining structures, the bays shall be concreted
contiguously, in sequence, with a minimum period of 48 hours between
completion of concreting one bay and commencement of concreting the
adjacent bay.
23.5
2006 Edition
Built-in pipes in water

23.21
Puddle flanges on built-in pipes in water retaining structures shall be

located centrally within the formwork. Waterstops shall be fixed around
the perimeter of box-outs to the built-in pipes.
PROTECTION OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

Protection of water
23.22
(1)
Immediately after the roof slab of water retaining structures has
been tested, the slab shall be protected with damp sacks or by other
methods agreed by the Engineer from exposure to conditions that may
affect the slab. The protection shall be continued until the roof drainage
system has been constructed or the fill material has been deposited and
compacted.
(2)
Materials shall not be stockpiled on roof slabs of water retaining
structures. Construction plant or other vehicles shall not stand or run on
floor slabs or roof slabs of water retaining structures unless permitted by
the Engineer.

Deposition of fill
material
23.23
(1)
Fill material shall not be deposited behind sections of walls of water
retaining structures until at least 7 days after completion of concreting to
the section of wall.
(2)
Fill material shall be spread out evenly and shall not be stockpiled
on roofs to water retaining structures. Weed killer or other chemicals shall
not be applied to fill material on the roofs of water retaining structures for
potable or fresh water.
(3)
Deposition of fill material on or adjacent to water retaining
structures shall be carried out after the watertightness test on the structure
has been completed, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
CLEANING AND STERILISATION

Cleaning and
sterilisation of water
23.24
OF
WATER
(1)
Immediately before water retaining structures are tested for
watertightness, all dust, debris, unused materials and equipment shall be
removed from the structure and the interior of the structure shall be washed
and brushed down with water.
(2)
Water for washing water retaining structures for potable or fresh
water shall be fresh, potable water incorporating a mixture of sterilising
chemicals added before the structure is washed at a concentration
instructed by the Engineer. The structure shall be maintained in a clean
condition after cleaning.
23.6
2006 Edition
Treatment and disposal

of effluent
23.25
(1)
Whereas the cleansing effluent is not fit for discharging into the
natural stream course or the storm water drainage system, it should be
discharged to the washout chamber or into the sewerage system subject to
the approval of the Engineer and the agreement of the Drainage Services
Department.
(2)
If the cleansing effluent requires de-chlorination, the outlet pipe of
the washout chamber should be blocked and the cleansing effluent shall be
pumped from the washout chamber to the de-chlorination plant for
de-chlorination before discharging to waste. The discharge of cleansing
effluent from the washout shall be stopped under the following situation
whichever first occurs as directed by the Engineer:-
The bottom deposits are visually discovered in the cleansing effluent

discharged into the washout chamber; or
Any part of the compartment floor is not submerged; or
At level as instructed by the Engineer.
(3)
The outlet pipe of the washout chamber shall then be kept blocked.
The remaining sludge inside the compartment shall then be discharged to
the washout. The sludge shall be pumped from the washout chamber to a
mobile centrifuge and microfiltration plant or equivalent mobile
treatment plant approved by the Engineer for treatment. Treatment of
sludge with the mobile centrifuge and microfiltration plant shall be as
detailed in Appendix 23.1. If equivalent mobile treatment plant is used,
the Contractor shall submit details of the plant, including but limited to,
method statement, detailed description of the types and capacity of
different components of the plant, the particulars and dosage of chemicals
used in the treatment process, layout, previous job records, etc. to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall also carry out trials to
demonstrate to the Engineer that the proposed mobile treatment plant shall
meet the specification in Appendix 23.2.
(4)
Sludge cake samples shall be taken in hourly intervals and the
samples shall be sent to the HOKLAS (Hong Kong Laboratory
Accreditation Scheme) accredited laboratory for testing their dry solid
content. The results shall be recorded in the form as shown in Appendix
23.3. The sampling record shall be submitted to the Engineer within two
weeks after cleaning works.
(5)
Subject to the approval of the Environmental Protection
Department, the sludge cake produced shall be disposed of at landfill site.
(6)
Samples of filtrate from the microfiltration plant or in case if
equivalent mobile treatment plant approved by the Engineer is used,
samples of the final effluent from the mobile treatment plant, shall be taken
at hourly intervals and the samples shall be tested for turbidity on site and
sent to the HOKLAS accredited laboratory for testing their suspended
solids content. If the turbidity of the filtrate or in case of equivalent
mobile treatment plant approved by the Engineer is used, the final effluent
from the mobile treatment plant, is higher than the limit specified by the
Engineer, the Contractor is required to stop the discharge and rectify the
situation before restart of operation. The testing results shall be recorded
in the log record as shown in Appendix 23.4. The sampling record shall
be submitted to the Engineer within two weeks after cleaning works.
23.7
2006 Edition
TESTING: DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

Testing: drainage
systems for water
drainage systems for
water retaining
structures
Non-compliance:
drainage systems for
water retaining
structures
23.26
23.27
23.28
FOR
WATER
Drainage systems under floors and on roofs of water retaining structures

shall be tested in accordance with the following requirements:
(a)
Water shall be poured at different locations agreed by the

Engineer along the drainage system and the flow of water
observed at junction pits, outfalls and other discharge points.
(b)
A mandrel shall be pulled through each completed section of

pipeline of 300 mm diameter or less. The mandrel shall be
750 mm long and 12 mm less in diameter than the nominal
diameter of the pipe.
The results of tests on drainage systems for water retaining structures shall
(a)
The water shall in the opinion of the Engineer be freely

discharged by the drainage system.
(b)
The bore, linearity and jointing of pipes shall comply with the
specified requirements.
If the result of any test on the drainage system for water retaining
structures does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the
approved by the Engineer shall be carried out and the drainage system
shall be retested.
TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF ROOFS

Testing: watertightness
of roofs
23.29
(1)
The roofs of water retaining structures shall be tested for
watertightness over the complete area of the roof, including perimeter
joints. Roofs shall not be tested in sections unless permitted by the
Engineer.
(2)
Water shall be allowed to be ponding on the roof for a period of 3
days and topped up to maintain a depth of at least 75 mm. The test shall
be carried out before fill material is deposited or drainage systems are
constructed on the roof.
watertightness of roofs
23.30
There shall be no leaks or damp patches visible on the soffits of roofs of

water retaining structures during or at the end of the test for
watertightness.
Non-compliance:
watertightness of roofs
23.31
If the result of any test for watertightness of the roof of a water retaining
structure does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the
approved by the Engineer shall be carried out and the roof shall be
retested.
23.8
2006 Edition
TESTING: WATERTIGHTNESS OF STRUCTURES

Testing: watertightness
of structures
23.32
(1)
Water retaining structures shall be tested for watertightness as stated
in Clause 23.32(2) to (7). Each compartment of structures, which
incorporate division walls, shall be tested separately with adjoining
compartments empty. The complete structure shall also be tested.
(2)
The structure shall be filled with water at an approximately uniform
rate not exceeding 2 m depth in 24 hours to the levels stated in Table 23.1.
The water used for testing water retaining structures for potable or fresh
water shall be fresh potable water. The permission of the Engineer shall
be obtained before filling starts. The structure or each compartment of the
structure being tested shall be kept full for 7 days before testing allow for
absorption.
(3)
After the period for absorption, the water shall be topped up to the
specified level and the test shall begin. During testing, the oscillatory
motion of the water surface shall be dampened. The test period shall be 7
days.
(4)
The equipment for recording water levels shall be installed in a
temporary enclosure of minimum dimensions 2 m x 2 m x 2.5 m high with
a lockable door. The enclosure shall be located over stilling wells,
manhole openings or other points of recording water levels. The
temporary enclosure shall be removed on completion of the test. The
equipment shall be calibrated before testing starts and at regular intervals
agreed by the Engineer and shall be readable and accurate to 0.5 mm.
(5)
The fall in water level in water retaining structures shall be
measured at hourly intervals between 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. each day. The
total fall shall be measured at the end of the test period.
(6)
Except as stated in Clause 23.32(7), structures shall be emptied after
completion of testing and maintained in a clean and dry condition. The
water shall be removed at an approximately uniform rate not exceeding 2
m depth in 24 hours. The permission of the Engineer shall be obtained
before emptying starts.
(7)
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the water used for the
final tests on water retaining structures for potable or fresh water shall be
retained in the structure and shall not be wasted or contaminated.
Compliance
criteria:
watertightness of
structures
23.33
The results of tests for watertightness of water retaining structures shall

(a)
The total fall in water level at the end of the test period, after
adjustment for evaporation and rainfall, shall not exceed 1/500
times the maximum specified depth of water in the test or 10
mm, whichever is less.
(b)
There shall be no leaks or damp patches visible on the surface

of the structure, including any division walls, during or at the
end of the test.
23.9
2006 Edition
Non-compliance:
watertightness of
structures
23.34
If the result of any test for watertightness of a water retaining structure

does not comply with the specified requirements for the test, the Contractor
shall investigate the reason. Remedial or replacement work approved by
the Engineer shall be carried out and the structure shall be retested.
Table 23.1: Tests on water retaining structures

Type of
structure
Water retaining
structures
other than for
sewage
Part of structure tested
Test water level
Structure with division wall

- each compartment of
structure
100 mm below top of

division wall

- complete structure
Top water level of

structure
Structure without division

wall
Water retaining
structures for
sewage

- each compartment of
structure
Top water level of

structure

- complete structure
Structure without division
wall
TESTING: WATER STERILITY

Samples: water
sterilisation
23.35
After the test for watertightness of a water retaining structure for potable or
fresh water has been completed, samples of the water in the structure shall
be taken by the Engineer. The number of samples and location of
sampling shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
Testing: water
sterilisation
23.36
Each sample of water shall be tested to determine the bacteriological

content. The colour, odour, appearance, turbidity, conductivity and pH
value of the water samples shall be of quality acceptable for potable
water.
water sterilisation
23.37
The results of tests for bacteriological content of the water and the
parameters stated in Clause 23.36 shall demonstrate that in the opinion of
the Engineer the structure has been adequately sterilised for potable or
fresh water.
23.10
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 23.1
TREATMENT
OF
SLUDGE
WITH
MOBILE
CENTRIFUGE AND MICROFILTRATION PLANT
Plant
23.1.1
The mobile centrifuge and microfiltration plant shall be capable of

producing a final effluent with suspended solid of not more than 5 mg/litre
and turbidity of not more than 2 Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU).
Procedures
23.1.2
(1)
The sludge shall first be pumped to a mobile centrifuge for
dewatering. The specifications of the mobile centrifuge shall be: -
Nominal capacity shall be not less than 8 cubic metres per hour.
Dry solid content of the sludge cake produced shall be more than
30% by weight.
The mobile centrifuge shall not be washed or cleaned on site.
A water meter or other measuring device should be installed at

the inlet pipe of the centrifuge to measure the amount of sludge
treated, in cubic metres.
(2)
The centrate shall be treated by a mobile microfiltration plant with

the following specifications: -
Nominal capacity shall not be less than 8 cubic metres per hour.
The filter shall be capable of treating the centrate generated by

the mobile centrifuge.
The filter media shall be backwashable using the filtrate (the

volume of water for backwash shall not be greater than 20% of
water filtrated).
All chemicals used for cleaning the filter shall be disposed of at

the Chemical Waste Treatment Facility as approved by the
Engineer.
The suspended solid content and turbidity of the filtrate shall

meet either Criteria A or Criteria B of the table below, as directed
by the Engineer.
Suspended
Solid Content
Turbidity
Criteria A
Criteria B
Not more than 10 mg/litre Not more than 5 mg/litre
Not more than 4 NTU
Not more than 2 NTU
A water-meter or other measuring device should be installed at

the outlet pipe for the wash water to measure the amount of
wash- water produced, in cubic metres.
A water-meter or other measuring device should be installed at

the outpipe for the filtrate to measure the amount of filtrate
produced, in cubic metres.
(3) The wash-water discharged from the mobile microfiltration plant

shall be returned to and treated by the centrifuge.
23.11
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 23.2
SPECIFICATION OF THE MOBILE TREATMENT
PLANT
Plant
23.2.1
The mobile treatment plant shall be capable of producing a final effluent

with suspended solid of not more than 5 mg/litre and turbidity of not more
than 2 NTU. Dry solid content of the sludge cake produced shall be more
than 30% by weight. In addition, the mobile treatment plant should meet
-
Nominal capacity shall not be less than 8 cubic metres per hour.
The plant shall not be washed or cleaned on site.
The plant shall be easily dismantled into small units for easy
transportation.
The design of the plant shall be compact, such that the area
occupied by the plant will be approximately the plan area of two
standard containers.
The suspended solid content and turbidity of the final effluent shall
meet either Criteria A or Criteria B of the table below, as directed by
the Engineer.
Criteria A
Criteria B
Suspended
Solid Content
Not more than 10 mg/litre Not more

mg/litre
Turbidity
Not more than 4 NTU
than
Not more than 2 NTU
(NTU: Nephelometric turbidity units)

-
A water-meter or other measuring device shall be installed at the inlet

and outlet of the mobile treatment plant to measure the amount of
influent and final effluent, in cubic metres.
If filtration is adopted, the filter media shall be backwashable using

the filtrate (the volume of water for backwash shall not be greater than
20% of water filtrated). All chemicals used for cleaning the filter
shall be disposed of at the Chemical Waste Treatment Facility as
approved by the Engineer. The wash water shall be returned to the
inlet of the mobile treatment plant for treatment.
23.12
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 23.3
SAMPLE
RECORD
PRODUCED
FOR
SLUDEGE
CAKE
Contract No.:
Name of installation:
Date:
Recorded by:
Sludge Cake
Time
Sample No.
23.13
Dry Solid Content (%)
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 23.4
SAMPLING RECORD FOR FILTRATE PRODUCED BY
THE MICROFILTRATION PLANT OR FINAL
EFFLUENT
PRODUCED
BY
THE
MOBILE
TREATMENT PLANT
Contract No.:
Name of installation:
Date:
Recorded by:
Filtrate/Final Effluent*
Time
Sample No.
Turbidity (NTU)
23.14
Suspended Solids Content (%)
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 24
BUILDING WORKS
24.1
2006 Edition
24.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 24
BUILDING WORKS
PART 1: ASPHALT ROOFING
MATERIALS
Mastic asphalt
24.01
Mastic asphalt for asphalt roofing shall comply with BS 6925, Type R988
or BS 6577, Type R1162.
Isolating membrane
24.02
Isolating membrane for asphalt roofing shall be black sheathing felt

complying with BS EN 13707, Class 4A(i) and shall weigh at least 17 kg
per 810 mm wide by 25 m long roll.
Amd 4/2010
Bitumen dressing
compound
24.03
Bitumen dressing compound for asphalt roofing shall be cut-back bitumen,

Grade 25 sec or other grade approved by the Engineer and shall comply
with the following:
Bitumens for road purposes
: BS 3690: Part 1
Bitumens for industrial

purposes
: BS 3690: Part 2.
Bituminous paint
24.04
Bituminous paint for asphalt roofing shall comply with BS 6949.
Sand
24.05
Sand for finishing the surface of asphalt roofing shall be fine, clean sand
and shall be graded such that 100% passes a 600 m BS test sieve and
100% is retained on a 300 m BS test sieve.
Stone chippings
24.06
Stone chippings for asphalt roofing shall be white stone (Baak Shek)
chippings and shall be graded such that 100% passes a 5 mm BS test sieve
and 100% is retained on a 2.36 mm BS test sieve.
Reflective paint
24.07
Reflective paint for asphalt roofing shall be of a proprietary type approved

by the Engineer and shall be a bituminous-based aluminium paint or a
paint compatible with bituminous surfaces.
Metal lathing
24.08
Metal lathing for asphalt roofing shall be zinc coated or stainless steel
expanded metal lathing complying with BS 1369: Part 1.
The
reinforcement shall be at least 10 mm short way of mesh and shall be at
least 0.46 mm thick.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of asphalt
roofing
24.09
(1)
construction for asphalt roofing shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name of specialist sub-contractor,
24.3
2006 Edition
(b) A certificate for each material for asphalt roofing showing the
showing that the materials comply with the requirements
stated in the Contract and including results of tests on mastic
asphalt for
- Hardness number, and
- Binder content and grading of mineral aggregate.
(2)
Engineer at least 14 days before asphalt roofing work starts.
Certificates for mastic asphalt shall be submitted for each batch of mastic
asphalt delivered to the Site.
24.10

Engineer at the same time as particulars of the material are provided:
(a)
Mastic asphalt,
(b)
Sand, and
(c)
Stone chippings.
Storage of isolating
membrane, bitumen
dressing compound,
bituminous paint, sand,
stone chippings,
reflective paint and
metal lathing
24.11
Isolating membrane, bitumen dressing compound, bituminous paint,

sand, stone chippings, reflective paint and metal lathing shall be stored in
a dry weatherproof store.
ASPHALT ROOFING WORK

Heating asphalt
24.12
(1)
Mastic asphalt for asphalt roofing shall be gradually heated in a
purpose made mixer to a temperature until it flows but not exceeding
230C. The asphalt shall be continuously agitated such that local
overheating is prevented during heating and until it has been discharged
for use.
(2)
The molten asphalt shall be transported in buckets that have been
coated with cement. Ashes or oil shall not be used for coating buckets
and other equipment.
Laying mastic asphalt
24.13
(1)
Asphalt work for asphalt roofing shall be carried out in accordance
with CP 144: Part 4.
(2)
Mastic asphalt shall be laid on a clean dry surface using wood or
metal gauges to ensure the correct thickness of each coat. Two coats of
equal thickness to a total thickness of at least 20 mm shall be laid on
horizontal roof surfaces and on slopes not exceeding 30. Two coats of
equal thickness to a total thickness of at least 13 mm shall be laid to
skirtings, upstands and drips and on slopes exceeding 30.
24.4
2006 Edition
(3)
Joints in successive coats shall be staggered by at least 150 mm.
(4)
If blows due to entrapment of moisture or air are formed during
laying, the affected parts shall be pierced and made good while the
surrounding asphalt is warm.
Laying isolating
membrane
24.14
Black sheathing felt for asphalt roofing shall be laid on a dry surface and
shall not be sealed to the structure on slopes less than 30 to the horizontal.
Laps of at least 75 mm shall be formed at joints.
Forming angles
24.15
(1)
Internal angles between horizontal and vertical surfaces on asphalt
roofing shall be formed with stout asphalt fillets. The fillets shall be at
least 50 mm on face and shall be continuous with the surfaces.
(2)
The specified total thickness of asphalt shall be maintained at
external angles between horizontal and vertical surfaces or between
sloping surfaces.
Forming skirtings
24.16
Skirtings shall be formed in asphalt roofing and shall be at least 150 mm

high above roof finishes. The top edge shall be splayed and tucked into a
groove at least 25 mm deep and 25 mm wide.
Dressing to rainwater
outlets
24.17
Asphalt roofing shall be neatly dressed into rainwater outlets and sealed.
Metal surfaces in contact with the asphalt roofing shall be cleaned and
primed with one coat of bituminous paint before the asphalt is laid.
Flashings to rainwater outlets shall be embedded in the first coat of the
asphalt and then the second coat shall be applied.
Dressing to pipes
through roofs
24.18
Asphalt roofing and isolating membrane shall be neatly dressed around

sleeves to pipes passing through roofs. The dressing shall be at least 150
mm high and shall have a stout asphalt angle fillet at the bottom. Metal
surfaces in contact with the asphalt roofing shall be cleaned and primed
with one coat of bituminous paint before the asphalt is laid.
Finishing roof surfaces
24.19
Immediately after asphalt laying to asphalt roofing is complete, the roof

surfaces shall be well rubbed with a clean wood float and fine clean sand.
Solar protection
24.20
(1)
Roof surfaces to which stone chippings are to be applied shall be
2
dressed with bitumen dressing compound applied at a rate of 3 kg/m .
The surfaces shall be dressed immediately with stone chippings lightly
2
rolled in at a rate of 15 kg/m . Loose chippings shall be removed.
(2)
Reflective paint to asphalt roofing shall be applied in two coats at
the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
TESTING: ASPHALT ROOFING

Batch:
mastic asphalt
24.21
A batch of mastic asphalt is any quantity of mastic asphalt of the same

type, manufactured at the same time in the same place and delivered to the
Site at any one time and which, for the purpose of testing laid mastic
asphalt, is laid on the same day.
24.5
2006 Edition
Samples: mastic asphalt
24.22
(1)
Samples of mastic asphalt shall be provided from each batch of
mastic asphalt delivered to the Site. The samples shall be provided at
least 14 days before asphalt roofing work starts.
(2)
Samples of mastic asphalt shall be provided from each batch of laid
mastic asphalt. Holes formed by taking samples of laid mastic asphalt
shall be reinstated using mastic asphalt.
(3)
The number and size of samples and the method of sampling shall
be in accordance with BS 5284.
Testing:
mastic asphalt
24.23
(1)
Each sample of mastic asphalt shall be tested to determine the
hardness number, binder content and grading of mineral aggregate.
(2)
mastic asphalt
24.24
The method of testing shall be in accordance with BS 5284.
The results of tests on mastic asphalt shall comply with BS 6925.
24.6
2006 Edition
PART 2: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

MATERIALS
Timber for carpentry
and joinery
24.25
(1)
Timber for carpentry and joinery shall be of mature growth and
shall be seasoned and free from large, loose or dead knots, wood wasp
holes, infestation, splits and other defects which will reduce the strength or
produce blemishes. The moisture content in timber at the time of
fabrication shall not exceed the following:
(a)
Internal timber for use in

air conditioned premises
: 12%
(b)
Other internal timber
: 16%
(c)
Timber with one face to

the exterior of the
building and one face to
the interior
: 18%
External timber
: 20%.
(d)
(2)
Hardwood shall be San Cheung (Kapore), white seraya, red seraya,
teak or other hardwood approved by the Engineer. The density of
hardwood other than teak shall be at least 720 kg/m3 at 15% moisture
content. The density of teak shall be at least 650 kg/m3 at 15% moisture
content.
(3)
Hardwood or teak shall only be used in special circumstances under
the direction of the Engineer.
(4)
Softwood shall be cedar, spruce or China fir.
(5)
Plywood shall comply with BS 6566: Parts 1 to 8. Grade 1 veneer
plywood shall be used for natural finishes and shall be hardwood faced as
stated in the Contract. Grade 2 veneer plywood shall be used for painted
finishes and shall be luan faced.
(6)
Timber either softwood or hardwood shall be obtained from a
sustainable forest or plantation. Hardwood of unknown species or from
unidentified sources are expressly prohibited.
(7)
Timber either softwood or hardwood shall be originating from a
sustainable resource or managed plantation as certified by the Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC) or other Approved Authority.
Nails, screws and
plugs
24.26
(1)
Nails for carpentry and joinery shall be steel nails with a bright
finish.
(2)
Screws shall be brass, stainless steel, alloy or other non-corroding
metal approved by the Engineer and shall have countersunk heads.
(3)
Plugs for fixing to hard materials shall be of a proprietary type
approved by the Engineer and shall be plastic, soft metal, fibre or similar
material.
24.7
2006 Edition
Wood preservative
24.27
(1)
Wood preservative for carpentry and joinery shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer. Wood preservative that will
be completely concealed or not decorated shall be an exterior grade and
colourless. Wood preservative that is likely to be exposed to or in contact
with painted finishes shall be coloured and suitable for over-painting.
(2)
Wood preservative shall be applied in a manner that is not
hazardous to health and adhered strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
Adhesive
24.28
(1)
Adhesive for timber for internal use shall be synthetic resin
adhesive classified as moisture resistant and moderately weather-resistant
in accordance with BS 1204: Part 1. Adhesive for timber for internal use
under very damp conditions or for external use shall be synthetic resin
adhesive classified as weather-proof and boil-proof in accordance with BS
1204: Part 1.
(2)
Adhesive for plywood for external use or in areas of high humidity
shall be phenol formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as weather-proof
and boil-proof in accordance with BS 1203. Adhesive for plywood for
other uses shall be resin adhesive classified as moisture resistant and
weather resistant in accordance with BS 1203.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of timber
24.29
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed timber for carpentry and
joinery shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
The species and country of origin;
(b) The name of the concessions or plantations from which these

timbers originate;
(c) Copies of the forest policies implemented by these concessions
or plantations which confirm that the management of the
timber resource is sustainable;
(d) Shipping documents that confirm that the suppliers in Hong
Kong has obtained the timber from the stated concessions or
plantations.
(e)
A certificate from the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or

other approved authority
(f)
A certificate for each type of timber showing the source of the

timber and showing that the timber complies with the
tests for
- Density, and
- Moisture content.
(2)
before the first delivery of the timber to the Site. The particulars shall be
submitted for each batch of the timber delivered to the Site.
24.8
2006 Edition
24.30

Engineer at the same time as particulars of the timber are submitted:
(a)
Hardwood, softwood and plywood, and
(b)
Nails, screws and plugs.
Storage of timber
24.31
Timber shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof and well ventilated store

with a raised floor.
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORK

Treatment to timber
24.32
(1)
Unexposed surfaces of timber doors and windows, including
backing, fillets, backs of door and window frames, shall be treated with
two coats of wood preservative before fixing or bedding in. Door and
window frames shall be knotted and shall receive at least one coat of
primer before being fixed in position.
(2)
Hidden faces of built-in timber shall be treated with two coats of
wood preservative before being assembled and fixed in position.
Finish to timber
24.33
Planed timber shall be used for all surfaces of carpentry and joinery.
Exposed surfaces shall have a fine glasspapered finish and arrises shall be
rounded to a radius of 1 mm.
Framed timber
24.34
(1)
Faces of framed joints of timber shall be square and shall be driven
together to give a close accurate fit.
(2)
Timber shall be prepared and framed up with dry joints and stored
until required for fixing in position. Before fixing, all joints shall be
opened up, put back together with white lead and wedged up. Sections
that have warped or developed shakes or other defects shall be replaced.
Running bonded joints
24.35
Running bonded joints in timber shall be cross-tongued using teak

tongues. Double tongues shall be used for work exceeding 40 mm thick.
Building-in timber
24.36
Timber sections shall be screwed or nailed to the backing that shall be

plugged. The location of concealed services shall be checked before
fixing timber sections to walls and other surfaces.
Nailing
24.37
Timber sections that are split when nailing shall be replaced. Nail heads
shall be punched below timber surfaces.
Fixing screws
24.38
(1)
Timber sections shall be screwed in drilled pilot holes.
(2)
Screws shall be inserted to their full depth with a screwdriver, and
hammers shall not be used.
24.9
2006 Edition
(3)
Screw heads shall be countersunk at least 5 mm below timber
surfaces. Colour and grain matched pellets cut from similar timber shall
be fixed in with adhesive and finished off flush with the surrounding
surface.
TESTING: TIMBER
Batch:
timber
24.39
A batch of timber is any quantity of timber of the same type and grade,
from the same source, covered by the same certificates and delivered to
the Site at any one time.
Samples
timber
24.40
(1)
1 sample of timber shall be provided from each batch of timber.
(2)
The size of each sample shall be 1000 mm x 50 mm x 50 mm.
Testing:
timber
24.41
(1)
Each sample of timber shall be tested to determine the moisture
content at the time of fabrication.
(2)
The moisture content at the time of fabrication shall be calculated
from the equation:
Moisture content = (mw - md)/md
where
- mw is the wet or supplied mass, and
- md is the dry mass.
(3)
The dry mass shall be determined by drying the sample in an oven
at a temperature of 103C 2C until the mass is constant and weighing
the sample.
24.10
2006 Edition
PART 3: GLAZING
MATERIALS
Glass
24.42
(1)
Glass shall comply with BS 952 and be of a proprietary type
approved by the Engineer. Glass shall be free from bubbles, smoke
wanes, air holes, scratches and other defects and shall be cut to the required
size with clean undamaged edges and surfaces which are not disfigured.
(2)
Clear float glass shall be used for glazing unless otherwise stated in
the Contract.
(3)
Sheet glass shall be clear sheet glass and shall be at least 3 mm
thick.
(4)
Reinforced glass shall be Georgian wired cast or hexagonal wired
cast glass of standard quality. The glass shall have a nominal thickness of
6 mm and shall have square wire mesh electrically welded at each
intersection.
(5)
Hollow pressed glass blocks shall have a pattern approved by the
Engineer and shall have radius corner blocks to match.
(6)
Glass blades for fixed and adjustable louvres shall have a nominal
thickness of 6 mm. The edges shall be parallel and shall be ground to
remove sharp arrises.
Putty
24.43
Putty for glazing to metal, hardwood and softwood shall be a proprietary

Bituminous paint
24.44
Bituminous paint for cut edges of wired glass shall comply with BS 6949.
SUBMISSIONS
24.45
Samples of each proposed type of glass shall be submitted to the Engineer

at least 14 days before glazing starts.
Storage of glass and
putty
24.46
(1)
Glass shall be stored vertically in a dry weatherproof store with a
raised floor. Glass shall be kept clean and dry and shall be protected from
exposure to condensation and moisture.
(2)
Putty shall be stored in sealed containers which shall be marked to
identify the contents and protected from exposure to conditions which may
adversely affect the putty all in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. The putty shall not be used after the recommended
shelf life has been exceeded.
24.11
2006 Edition
GLAZING WORK
Glazing work
24.47
(1)
Glazing work shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6262.
External glazing shall be weather-tight on completion.
(2)
Frames and beading shall be cleaned and primed before glazing as
stated in Part 6 of this section.
(3)
Directionally patterned or wired glass shall be set with the pattern or
wires parallel to the surround and aligned with adjacent panes. Cut edges
of wired glass shall be painted with one coat of bituminous paint.
(4)
Edge clearances shall be at least 3 mm and shall be equally spaced
around each pane.
(5)
Putty edge covers shall be as stated in Table 24.1.
(6)
Setting and location blocks shall be used for panes of glass
exceeding 0.2 m2. The blocks shall be located in accordance with BS
6262 and shall be at least 30 mm from the corners of the frame.
(7)
Back putty shall be finished flush with the frame on top edges and
sides, and at 45 on bottom edges. There shall be no metal-glass or
wood-glass contact, and no voids or spaces in the putty.
(8)
Glass shall be secured to wood surrounds by glazing sprigs at a
maximum spacing of 450 mm and shall be secured to metal surrounds by
spring clips. Glazing sprigs and spring clips shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the surround.
(9)
Back putty shall be of regular thickness and at least 2 mm thick.
Front putty shall be formed to a triangular fillet stopping 2 mm short of
sight lines. Opening lights shall be kept closed until the putty has
hardened.
(10)
Putty shall be primed and painted as soon as it has hardened.
(11) Timber beading shall be bedded in putty and secured with

countersunk brass screws and cups. Screws and cups shall be at a
maximum spacing of 200 mm and shall not be more than 75 mm from each
corner.
(12) Metal beading shall be supplied with the frames and shall be fixed
(13)
Gaps between glass and beading shall be sealed with putty.
24.12
2006 Edition
Table 24.1: Edge covers for glazing
2
Area of glass (m )
Edge cover (mm)
not exceeding 0.5
Exceeding 0.5 and not

exceeding 1.5
Exceeding 1.5 and not

exceeding 4.0
12
24.13
2006 Edition
PART 4: PLUMBING
GENERAL
Licensed plumber
24.48
Plumbing shall be carried out by a licensed plumber.
Taps, valves and fittings
24.49
Taps, valves and fittings shall be of a proprietary type approved by Water

Supplies Department. Red lead jointing materials shall not be used.
MATERIALS
Pipework for plumbing
24.50
(1)
Cast iron waste and ventilating pipes and fittings shall comply with
BS 416 and shall have Type A or Type B sockets without ears.
Holderbats shall be cast iron with 8 mm brass bolts and nuts or galvanized
mild steel, which shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 or otherwise
approved by the Engineer, with cadmium plated bolts.
(2)
Plastic rainwater pipes not exceeding 80 mm diameter, gutters and
fittings shall comply with BS 4576: Part 1. Internal pipework, external
pipes exceeding 80 mm diameter and fittings shall comply with BS 4514.
Plastic roof outlets shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer
and shall be provided with a sealing flange and screw fixed flat or domed
grating.
(3)
Plastic soil and ventilating pipes and fittings shall comply with BS
4514. Plastic waste pipes shall comply with BS 5255.
(4)
Plastic pipes for cold water shall be unplasticized PVC pipes
complying with BS 3505 and shall have a pressure rating of Class D, or
higher, as stated in the Contract. Fittings shall comply with BS 4346:
Part 1, BS 4346 Part 2 and BS 4346: Part 3.
(5)
Copper pipes shall comply with BS 2871: Part 1, Table X in half
hard condition. Fittings for copper pipes shall comply with BS 864: Part
2, Table 6 symbol reference 864.1, 864.2 or 864.4.
(6)
Adapters for pipework shall be of a proprietary type approved by
the Engineer.
(7)
Jointing compound for waste outlets shall be of a proprietary type
Cisterns, tanks and

cylinders
24.51
Cisterns and covers, tanks and cylinders shall be galvanized mild steel
complying with BS 417: Part 2, Grade A thickness or other materials
approved by the Engineer. Joints between sections of cistern covers shall
have weatherproof standing welt type laps.
Draw-off taps and stop

valve
24.52
(1)
Screw-down-type draw-off taps and stop valves not exceeding 50
mm shall comply with BS 1010: Part 2. Stop valves in flushing water
systems shall be diaphragm or ball-valves approved by the Engineer.
(2)
Copper alloy gate valves and check valves shall comply with BS
5154.
24.14
2006 Edition
(3)
Gate valves exceeding 50 mm diameter shall be double flanged cast
iron wedge gate valves complying with BS 5150. Gate valves for
flushing water systems shall have zinc free bronze trim and a rising stem.
Gate valves at incoming water mains shall comply with BS 5163.
Float operated valves
24.53
(1)
Float operated valves not exceeding 50 mm diameter for tanks shall
be bronze and shall comply with BS 1212: Part 1 or BS 1212: Part 2 and
shall have the pressure rating stated in the Contract. The bronze shall be
zinc free for flushing water systems. The float shall be plastic and
comply with BS 2456.
(2)
Float operated valves exceeding 50 mm diameter for tanks shall be
cast iron with gunmetal trim and shall have the pressure rating stated in the
Contract. For flushing water systems, the trim shall be zinc free bronze
and the float shall be epoxy-coated copper or other material approved by
the Engineer.
(3)
Float operated valves for cisterns shall be diaphragm-type plastic
bodied valves complying with BS 1212: Part 3. The valves shall have
rubber or plastic diaphragms and shall have the pressure rating stated in
the Contract. Metal parts of the valves shall be coated with two coats of
bituminous paint.
Sanitary appliances
24.54
(1)
Sanitary appliances shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer and shall be white and complete with all necessary fittings.
(2)
Wastes, chains, stays, taps and combination tap assemblies shall be
chromium plated brass.
(3)
Lavatory basins shall be vitreous china size 635 mm x 455 mm and
shall have a back skirting not exceeding 75 mm high or of other types
approved by the Engineer. Basins shall be supported on brackets to suit
the basin. The brackets shall be of a proprietary type approved by the
Engineer.
(4)
Sinks shall be at least 0.9 mm thick satin finish stainless steel Grade
18/8. Overflow and sound deadening pads shall be provided under the
sink and drainers.
(5)
WC pans shall be pedestal type vitreous china washdown with a
horizontal outlet. Flushing cisterns shall be provided with valveless
syphonic flushing apparatus, discharge pipes, float operated valves and
overflows. Flushing cisterns shall be:
(a)
low level plastic,
(b)
high level plastic,
(c)
low level vitreous china, or
(d)
close coupled vitreous china
as stated in the Contract. Seats and covers for WC pan shall be of a

WC pan connectors shall
be PVC.
24.15
2006 Edition
(6)
Urinals shall be of a vitreous china bowl type and shall be provided
with vitreous china flushing cistern, uPVC flush pipes and spreaders to suit
the number of appliances in the following range:
(a)
4.5 litres to serve a single bowl,
(b)
9 litres to serve two bowls, and
(c)
13.5 litres to serve three bowls.
(7)
Traps shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer and
shall be provided with a 75 mm deep seal.
Pipe brackets and
fixings
24.55
(1)
Pipe brackets for plumbing shall suit the type of pipe and the
surface to which they are to be fixed and shall be of a proprietary type
(2)
Pipe brackets shall include as appropriate:

(a)
Fanged ends for building into concrete, brickwork and similar

materials,
(b)
Plain round ends for fixing in drilled holes with adhesive,
(c)
Expanding bolts or stud anchors for fixing to concrete,

brickwork and similar materials,
(d)
Threaded ends for fixing to steelwork and timber, and
(e)
Holed face plates for screwing to timber or plugs.
(3)
Bolts for fixing pipe brackets shall be brass, cadmium plated steel
or other non-corrodible metal approved by the Engineer. Expanding bolts
and stud anchors shall be of a proprietary type approved by the Engineer.
(4)
Adhesive for fixing pipe brackets shall be of a proprietary type
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of plumbing
work
24.56
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed plumber and materials for
plumbing work shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Name and registration number of plumber, and
(b)
Manufacturers literature for pipework, cisterns, tanks and

cylinders, draw-off taps and valves, float operated valves,
sanitary appliances and pipe brackets.
(2)
The particulars of materials for plumbing shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 14 days before plumbing work starts
24.16
2006 Edition
24.57
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, samples of the following

proposed materials shall be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as
particulars of the material are submitted:
(a)
Pipe work,
(b)
Taps and valves, and
(c)
Pipe brackets.
Storage of pipes, gutters
and fittings
24.58
Pipes, gutters and fittings shall be stored in a dry weatherproof store and in
such a manner that they are clear of the ground without resting on their
sockets. Rubber jointing rings shall be stored in sealed plastic bags and
shall be protected from exposure to conditions that may adversely affect
the rings. The rings shall be stored in a manner that will not result in
deformation of the rings.
Storage of sanitary
appliances
24.59
Sanitary appliances shall be stored in a dry weatherproof store. Metal

sinks and similar appliances shall be stored on a level surface and in a
manner that will not result in contamination by cement or lime.
PLUMBING WORK
Plumbing work
24.60
(1)
The ends of pipes and gutters shall be cut clean and square and
shall be chamfered internally or externally as required. Cutting and
chamfering shall be carried out using purpose-made equipment.
(2)
Measures shall be taken to prevent deleterious material entering
pipework, by temporarily sealing the ends of pipes and openings and by
fitting access covers and cleaning eyes as plumbing work proceeds.
Jointing material shall not project into the bore of pipes or fittings.
(3)
Pipes passing through walls or floors shall be contained in a plastic
pipe sleeve with 5 mm clearance. Pipes passing through fire rated walls
or floors shall be contained in a galvanized mild steel pipe sleeve with 20
mm clearance. Tthe clearance shall be caulked for the full depth with
mineral wool or other material approved by the Engineer. The galvanized
mild steel pipe sleeve shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 or
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Sleeves shall be finished flush with
walls and ceilings and shall project 100 mm above the finished floor
levels. Masking plates shall be provided on both sides of walls and
ceilings and shall be sealed against the weather.
(4)
Above ground foul water drainage shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 5572. Bolted access doors or inspection units shall
be provided to all branches and bends other than ventilating and
anti-syphon pipes.
(5)
Cast iron pipes shall be jointed with gaskin and caulked lead or a
cold caulking compound. Flexible joints shall be made in accordance
with the manufacturers recommendations. Cast iron pipes shall be
jointed to clay spigot and socket pipes with gaskin and a mixture of
cement and sand in the proportions 1:2 by volume.
24.17
2006 Edition
(6)
Plastic pipes shall be fixed and jointed in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Plastic pipes shall be jointed to pipes
of other materials using adapters.
(7)
Copper pipes shall be jointed with non-manipulative compression
fittings or capillary fittings. Copper pipes shall be jointed to cast iron
sockets with copper alloy caulking bushes and with gaskin and lead or a
cold caulking compound. Copper pipes shall be jointed to tapped bosses
on cast iron pipes with copper alloy threaded connectors.
(8)
Water supply installations shall be carried out in accordance with
BS 6700. Pipes shall be laid to a gradient of at least 1 in 100 to prevent
air locks. Tanks, cisterns and pipeworks shall be cleaned out and flushed
through with potable water after completion.
(9)
Waste outlets to wash basins, sinks and toilets shall be jointed with
a proprietary type of jointing compound approved by the Engineer.
(10) WC pans on concrete floors shall be bedded in white lead putty or
other non-hardening compound approved by the Engineer and shall be
fixed with No. 14 SG round headed brass screws 70 mm long with domed
plastic inserts. WC pans shall be jointed to drain pipes with WC pan
connectors or other fittings approved by the Engineer.
TESTING: PLUMBING - FOUL DRAINS

Testing: plumbing
foul drains
24.61
(1)
Foul drains shall be tested by plugging the lower end of the pipe
and filling the pipe with water up to the flood level of the lowest sanitary
appliance. Drainage above the flood level of the lowest sanitary
appliance shall be tested by visual inspection.
(2)
The lengths of foul drains tested in each test shall be as instructed
by the Engineer.
plumbing - foul drains
24.62
The level of water in tests on foul drains shall remain constant for a
30-minute period without visible leakage.
TESTING: PLUMBING - WATER PIPES

Testing: plumbing water pipes
plumbing - water pipes
24.63
24.64
Water pipes inside buildings shall be visually inspected for leaks and shall
be tested as follows:
(a)
All systems, including cisterns, tanks and cylinders, shall be

filled slowly with water to expel all air.
(b)
Service pipes connected to mains shall be tested at 1.5 times

mains pressure for 1 hour.
(c)
Distribution pipes fed from storage tanks shall be tested at 1.5

times working pressure for 1 hour.
(d)
Each tap shall be opened and checked for a satisfactory rate of

flow.
Water pipes inside buildings shall show no loss of water or visual evidence
of leakage.
24.18
2006 Edition
PART 5: PLASTERWORK AND OTHER FINISHES

MATERIALS
Cement, water and sand
24.65
(1)
Cement for plasterwork and other finishes shall be PC complying
with BS EN 197-1.
(2)
Water for plasterwork and other finishes shall be as stated in Clause
16.09.
(3)
Sand for mixes for plasterwork and other finishes which do not
incorporate lime shall be clean, hard, durable crushed rock or clean sand
and shall have the particle size distribution stated in Table 24.2. Sand for
mixes which incorporate lime shall be clean natural sand and shall have the
particle size distribution stated in Table 24.3.
(4)
The quantity of clay, fine silt and fine dust present in the sand shall
not exceed 10% by mass when determined in accordance with BS 812: Part
101, BS 812: Part 102, BS 812: Part 103 and BS 812: Section 105.1. The
chloride content of sand or crushed rock shall not exceed 0.03 % by mass
when determined in accordance with BS 812: Part 4.
Table 24.2: Particle size distribution of sand for mixes that do not incorporate lime
BS test sieve size
5.00 mm
100
2.36 mm
90 100
1.18 mm
70 100
600 m
40 80
300 m
5 40
150 m
0 10
24.19
2006 Edition
Table 24.3: Particle size distribution of sand for mixes incorporating lime
BS test sieve size
2.36 mm
100
1.18 mm
90 - 100
600 m
55 - 100
300 m
5 - 50
150 m
0 - 10
Premixed plaster
24.66
(1) Premixed plaster shall be factory-produced by weighted

combination of plaster raw materials and chemicals. It shall be supplied
to sites in bags. Mixing with clean water shall be required before
application.
(2) There are two types of premixed plaster, cement-based and
gypsum-based. Gypsum based is for internal use only.
(3) Cement-based plaster contains mineral filler material as aggregate
and Portland cement as main binder, with additives for improved
compressive strength and reduced shrinkage.
(4) Gypsum-based plaster contains pre-mixed minerals, gypsum-based
rendering materials and additives that may be applied in one single thick
application without cracking and separation from the substrate.
(5) The premixed plaster shall comply with BS 5262, BS 5492 and BS
1191. The premixed plaster manufacturing company shall have acquired
ISO certification in their manufacturing process of the premixed plaster
product.
Gypsum plaster
24.67
Gypsum plaster for plastering shall comply with BS 1191: Part 1, Grade B.
Lime
24.68
Lime for plastering shall be hydrated lime or quicklime complying with

BS 890.
Stone chippings
24.69
Stone chippings for Shanghai plaster shall be granite, white stone or

marble chippings. The chippings shall be free from dust and shall be
graded such that 100% passes a 5 mm BS test sieve and 100% is retained
on a 2.36 mm BS test sieve.
Metal lathing
24.70
Metal lathing for plastering shall comply with BS 1369: Part 1 and shall be
one of the following types:
(a)
Zinc-coated or stainless steel expanded metal lathing 6 mm

2
short way of mesh and weighing at least 1.6 kg/m , or
24.20
2006 Edition
(b)
Zinc-coated or stainless steel ribbed metal lathing weighing at

least 2.25 kg/m2.
Aggregates for
lightweight screeds
24.71
Aggregates for lightweight screeds shall be 5 mm exfoliated vermiculite or

of a proprietary type of lightweight beads or granules approved by the
Engineer.
Vapour barrier
24.72
Vapour barrier for lightweight roof screeds shall be polyethylene sheeting

and shall have a nominal thickness of 80 m.
Aggregates for terrazzo
24.73
Aggregates for terrazzo shall be angular crushed marble of a colour

compatible with surrounding finishes. Aggregate shall be free from dust
and shall be graded such that 100% passes a 10 mm BS test sieve and
100% is retained on a 5 mm BS test sieve.
Aggregates for
granolithic concrete
24.74
Aggregates for granolithic concrete shall be crushed grey granite or white

stone complying with BS 882. Aggregate shall be free from dust and
shall be graded such that 100% passes a 10 mm BS test sieve and 100% is
retained on a 2.36 mm BS test sieve.
Tiles
24.75
Each type of tile and fitting shall be obtained from the same manufacturer
and shall match in colour and texture.
Floor tiles
24.76
Clay floor tiles and fittings shall comply with BS 6431: Part 1, BS 6431:
Part 2, BS 6431: Section 3.1, BS 6431: Section 3.2, BS 6431: Section 4.1
and BS 6431: Section 4.2. Ceramic floor tiles shall be vitrified and shall
have a water absorption not exceeding 3%. Clay floor quarry tiles shall
be Group II and shall have a water absorption not exceeding 10%.
Anti-slip tiles shall be embossed or treated with carborundum or similar
grit to provide an anti-slip surface.
Non-homogenous floor
tiles
24.77
Non-homogenous floor tiles shall comply with BS 6431: Part 10, BS 6431:
Part 11, BS 6431 : Part 12, BS 6431 : Part 13, BS 6431 : Part 14, BS
6431 : Part 15 and BS 6431 : Part 18. The tiles shall be 200 mm x 200
mm, 300 mm x 300mm or 400mm x 400 mm.
Ceramic wall tiles
24.78
Glazed ceramic wall tiles and fittings shall comply with BS 6431: Part 1,
BS 6431: Part 2, BS 6431: Section 3.1, BS 6431: Section 3.2, BS 6431:
Section 4.1 and BS 6431: Section 4.2 and shall be eggshell glazed. The
tiles shall be 108 mm x 108 mm or 152 mm x 152 mm or 200 mm x 200
mm and shall be at least 5.5 mm thick. The tiles shall have cushion
edges.
Mosaic tiles
24.79
(1)
Glass mosaic tiles shall be fully vitrified glass tiles free from cracks
or sharp edges and shall be uniform in colour and texture. The tiles shall
be 20 mm x 20 mm x 4 mm thick and shall be regular in shape.
(2)
Glazed ceramic mosaic tiles shall be free from cracks or sharp
edges and shall be uniform in colour and texture. The tiles shall be 18
mm x 18 mm x 5 mm thick or 25 mm x 25 mm x 5 mm thick and shall be
regular in shape with square edges.
(3)
Unglazed vitreous mosaic tiles shall have a water absorption not
exceeding 3% and shall be 20 mm x 20 mm or 50 mm x 50 mm and shall
be respectively 4 mm or 5 mm thick with matching coved tiles.
24.21
2006 Edition
Homogenous coved tile

skirting
24.80
Homogenous coved tile skirting shall comply with BS 6431: Part 10, BS
6431 : Part 11, BS 6431 : Part 13, BS 6431 : Part 14, BS 6431 : Part 15,
BS 6431 : Part 18. The tiles shall be 200 mm x 75 mm x 7mm thick.
Homogenous wall tiles
24.81
Homogenous wall tiles shall comply with BS 6431: Part 10, BS 6431: Part
11, BS 6431 : Part 12, BS 6431 : Part 13, BS 6431 : Part 14, BS 6431 :
Part 15 and BS 6431 : Part 18. The tiles shall be 100 mm x 100 mm.
External facing tiles
24.82
External facing tiles shall be of the specified type from an approved

manufacturer and comply with BS 6431: Part 10, BS 6431 : Part 11, BS
6431 : Part 12, BS 6431 : Part 13, BS 6431 : Part 15, BS 6431 : Part 17,
BS 6431 : Part 19 and BS 6431 : Part 20. The tiles shall be 45 mm x 45
mm x 7mm thick or 45mm x 95 mm x 7 mm thick.
Concrete roof tiles
24.83
Concrete roof tiles shall be precast and shall be manufactured using Grade
20/10 concrete. The tiles shall be flat and shall be 300 mm x 300 mm x
30 mm thick or 400 mm x 400 mm x 35 mm thick.
Tile adhesive and tile

grout
24.84
(1)
Tile adhesive shall be of a proprietary brand approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Tile adhesive and tile grout shall be cement-based compatible with
the substrate and tiles to be installed;
(3)
Tile adhesive shall be in accordance with BS EN 12004:2001
cementitious adhesive, normal setting type with minimum tensile
adhesive strength of 0.5N/mm, and comply with Table 24.4:
Table 24.4: Tensile adhesion strength

Characteristic
Requirement
Test Method
Initial tensile adhesion strength 0.5 N/mm
8.2 of BS EN 1348:1999
Tensile adhesion strength after

water immersion
0.5 N/mm
8.3 of BS EN 1348:1999

heat ageing
0.5 N/mm
8.4 of BS EN 1348:1999

freeze-thaw cycles
0.5 N/mm
8.5 of BS EN 1348:1999
Open time: tensile adhesion

strength
0.5 N/mm
after not less
than 20 min
BS EN 1346: 1999
(4) Tile grout shall be in accordance with ANSI A118.6: 1992, and
comply with Table 24.5.
(5) The colour of the tile adhesive shall be white or grey and the colour
of the grout shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(6) Packed in three ply together with preparation procedures and
application methods. Minimum one set of the preparation procedures and
application methods shall be printed in Chinese and diagrammatic forms
for each lot that is delivered to site.
24.22
2006 Edition
(7) Brand name, batch number, shelf life, pot life and open time shall be
clearly printed on outside of package;
(8)
No prior soaking of tiles is required;
Table 24.5: Tile grout test acceptance standards

Items
Test Method
Acceptance Standards
Remarks
Linear
Shrinkage
ANSI A118.6 :
1992 Clause H4.3
1 day shrinkage < 0.1%

7 days shrinkage< 0.2%
Cast and store grout specimens at 21

- 25C, 45 - 55% R.H.
Water
Absorption
ANSI A118.6 :
1992 Clause H3.4
From 50% R.H. to

immersion
< 5%
From immersion to dry
< 7%
Determine water absorption from

50% R.H. to immersion and from
immersion to dry.
Compatibility
with Tile
Adhesive
BS 5980: 1980
Appendix D with
modification.
Requirements of BS 5980:
1980 are taken
> = 950N
for 14 days in laboratory
condition
> = 560N
for 7 days curing in
laboratory condition
followed by 7 days
immersion in water
(Tensile
Adhesion)
A layer of tile
grout is applied on
tile adhesive for
tensile adhesion
test
Laboratory Condition:
20 2C
45 to 75% R.H.
A layer of tile grout (1.5 mm thick) is

applied over tile adhesive 1.5 mm
thick (brand to be the one selected by
the Engineer) which shall have been
embedded in standard test piece tiles
to harden for 24 hours. Ten such
assemblies are prepared and cured for
14 days at laboratory condition and
then subject to tensile force. Further
ten assemblies are required for
similar tensile tests under 7 days
curing at laboratory condition
followed by 7 days immersion in
water.
Resistance to
Mould
Growth
BS 5980: 1980
Appendix B
No sign or evidence of 3 mm thick tile grout is applied over

mould growth on tile grout. biscuit side of test piece tile and the
assembly be placed in Petri dishes for
incubation at 29 1C for 24 hrs
after addition of potato dextrose agar.
Aspergillus niger is inoculated into
the grout. The whole assemble is
incubated for 14 days at 29 1C.
Bitumen
24.85
Bitumen for tiles shall be as stated in Clause 24.03.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
plasterwork and other
finishes
24.86
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for plasterwork
and other finishes shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
A certificate for cement, gypsum plaster and lime showing the

showing that the material complies with the requirements
24.23
2006 Edition
(b)
(c)
A certificate for sand, stone chippings and each type of

aggregate showing the source of the material and showing that
the material complies with the requirements stated in the
Contract, and including results of tests as appropriate, for
-
Grading
Silt content,
Manufacturers literature and a certificate for each type of tile

and fittings showing the manufacturers name, the date and
place of manufacture and showing that the tiles comply with
the requirements stated in the Contract.
(2)
Particulars of tile
adhesive and tile grout
24.87
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed material for tile adhesive
and tile grout shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
Catalogue, brand name/model name and job reference;
(b) Name, address and contact person of the local supplier;

(c)
Name, address and contact person of the manufacturer;
(d) Where applicable, either the document from the manufacturer

showing his authorization for the supplier as the
agent/distributor in Hong Kong or document from the supplier
showing the appointment of the manufacturer and
manufacturers agreement for the production of the proposed
product;
(e)
Detailed Method Statement for the installation of the tiling

systems, showing all work procedures from the preparation of
background through to the cleaning of the completed
assembly;
(f)
Original or certified true copy (issued or certified by the

accredited laboratory) of the test reports showing full
compliance with the requirements of sub-clauses 24.84(3),
24.84(4) & Clause 24.94. The date of the test shall be
generally within two years before the date of commencement
of the Contract.
(g) Original or certified true copy (certified by the certification

body) of the ISO 9000 series certification for the
manufacturing plant for the Engineers inspection. The
certification body shall be either accredited by the Hong
Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) or considered as having
equivalent standard by the Environment, Transport and
Works Bureau.
(2)
The particulars, including test reports, shall be submitted to the
24.24
2006 Edition
24.88

(a)
Sand, stone chippings and aggregates,
(b)
Tiles and fittings, and
(c)
Tile adhesives and tile grout.

Delivery and storage of
cement, gypsum plaster
and lime
24.89
Cement, gypsum plaster and lime shall be delivered in sealed bags or

containers bearing the manufacturers name. The bags and containers
shall be stored in a dry weatherproof store with a raised floor.
Storage of tile adhesive
24.90
Tile adhesive shall be stored in sealed containers marked to identify the

contents and protected from exposure to conditions which may adversely
affect the adhesive. The adhesive shall be stored in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and shall not be used after the
Storage of premixed
plaster
24.91
Bagged premixed plaster shall be stored separately by types, off the

ground in dry, well-ventilated and covered space. Use in order of
delivery and within manufacturer recommended time limit.
ON SITE DELIVERY CHECK

General
24.92
a) When instructed by the Engineer, all necessary and calibrated

equipment shall be provided and the following tests shall be carried out
for non-slip homogenous floor tiles, glazed ceramic wall tiles, unglazed
vitreous mosaic wall tiles, glass mosaic tiles, homogenous coved tile
skirting, homogenous wall tiles and external facing tiles upon delivery on
Site in the presence of Engineers Representatives:
Test Items
1.
Dimension Check
2.
Surface
Check
3.
Check
Identification Mark
Quality
Test Method
By
measurement
Visual
Visual
No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish,
acceptable
colour consistency
Same as the Engineers
Approved sample
In case of doubtful results, laboratory tests shall be carried out for

confirmation;
24.25
2006 Edition
(b) Sampling frequency for the above tests for non-slip homogenous
floor tiles, glazed ceramic wall tiles, unglazed vitreous mosaic wall tiles,
glass mosaic tiles, homogenous coved tile skirting, homogenous wall tiles
and external facing tiles upon delivery on Site shall be as follows:
Test Items
1.
Dimension
Check
2.
Surface
Quality
Check
Check
Identification
Mark
3.
Sample Frequency
3 samples for
delivery per
type
3 samples for
delivery per
type
3 samples for
delivery per
type
Representative
Consignment
each
each
One delivery per each

type
each
each

type
each
each

type
c) In the event of samples failing to meet the requirements for test

upon delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.
d) When instructed by the Engineer, the following checks shall be
carried out for tile adhesives and tile grout upon delivery on Site in the
presence of Engineers Representatives:
Test Items
1.
Manufacturers
Certificate of Origin
& Delivery Note
2. Product
Identification Number
3.
Expiry Date
Test Method
Document
Check
From an Approved
origin with information
of product identification
numbers
As Approved
Document
Check
Check
information
printed on the
packing
Not expired
e) In the event of the checking results failing to meet the checking

requirements upon delivery on Site, the failed consignment shall be
removed off Site.
TRIAL PANELS
Trial panels
24.93
(1)
A trial panel shall be constructed for each type of plastering and
rendering, each textured finish to screeds, terrazzo, granolithic concrete
and each type of tile to demonstrate that the proposed materials will
produce a finish which complies with the specified requirements.
(2)
Trial panels shall be constructed at least 7 days before the relevant
work starts.
24.26
2006 Edition
(3)
period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing trial panels.
(4)
Trial panels shall be constructed using the materials submitted to the
Engineer.
(5)
Each trial panel shall be 1 m x 1 m and shall be constructed at a
location agreed by the Engineer.
(6)
Trial panels shall be used as a means of comparison against which
the Engineer shall determine the compliance or otherwise of the finish in
the permanent work. Trial panels shall be protected from damage and
shall be left in position until the Engineer instructs their removal.
Trial panels for tile
adhesive
24.94
(1) Tile adhesive compatibility with panel wall shall be demonstrated via
the following test method:
(i)
The tile adhesive shall be tested against the panel wall partition
selected for the Contract complete with moisture sealer.
Acceptance standard shall be minimum 0.3 N/mm;
(ii) Four specimens of 200x200mm ceramic glazed wall tile shall

be selected and fixed vertically without additional support
according to the manufacturers specification;
(iii) The interval between applying tile adhesive and placing tiles
shall not be more than 5 minutes. The extent to which slip
occurs per the first minute after placing tile specimen shall be
recorded. The tile specimens shall be fixed by adhesive tape
to prevent further slip;
(iv) The sample shall be subjected to tests of Tensile Adhesion
Strength with an adhesive not exceeding 3mm in final bed
thickness;
(v) Tiles shall be pulled off on a minimum of 28 days after fixing;
(vi) An aluminium/steel dolly shall be attached onto the surface of
the specimen by a suitable adhesive resin;
(vii) Strong adhesive tape shall be used to fix the position of dolly
until strength of the resin is developed as advised by the resin
manufacturer;
(viii)The dolly shall be connected to the Pull-off Test device. The
pull-off equipment shall be capable of increasing the load
steadily without jerking at a rate of 5 mm/min to 6 mm/min,
and must be provided with a measurement device which shall
retain the maximum force exerted, the so called failure load to
the nearest 0.01KN. The measurement inaccuracy of the
equipment must be less than 2%, in accordance with accuracy
Grade 2 of BS 1610: Part 1: 1985;
(ix) A tensile force shall be applied gradually by the device;
24.27
2006 Edition
(x) The failure force, location of failure and any other observations
or abnormalities shall be recorded;
(xi) The force shall be recorded from the readout unit;
(xii) Steps as described in sub-clauses (vi) to (xi) of this Clause shall
be repeated until Pull-off Tests to all four tiles are completed;
(xiii)Photographs shall be taken.
(2) Tile adhesive compatibility with off-form concrete shall be
demonstrated via the following test method:
(i)
The tile adhesive shall be tested against a mass concrete wall

Grade 35/20 of 200mm thick. Dimensions of the wall shall be
determined by the laboratory carrying out the test;
(ii) Method as described in sub-clauses (1)(ii) to (1)(xiii) of this

Clause shall be followed.
panels
24.95
If in the opinion of the Engineer the specified finish or tile adhesive has not
been produced in the trial panel, particulars of proposed changes to the
materials and methods of construction shall be submitted to the Engineer;
further trial panels shall be constructed until the specified finish or tile
adhesive is produced in the trial panel.
Commencement of
finishes
24.96
Plasterwork and other finishes shall not commence until in the opinion of
the Engineer the specified finish has been produced in the trial panel.
24.97
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials used to produce the

specified finish in trial panels and the trial panels for adhesive shall not be
changed.
PLASTERING AND RENDERING

Applying spatterdash to
new concrete
24.98
(1)
Concrete surfaces which are to be plastered or rendered shall be
spatterdashed immediately after the formwork has been removed or shall
be treated with a proprietary type of bonding agent approved by the
Engineer. Existing concrete surfaces shall be hacked uniformly over the
complete area to expose the aggregate over at least 50% of the area.
The joints in brickwork surfaces shall be raked out to a depth of at least
10 mm.
(2)
Spatterdash shall consist of cement and coarse sand or granite
fines in the proportions 1:2 by volume mixed with the minimum amount
of water necessary to achieve the consistency of a thick slurry.
Spatterdash shall be thrown with a hand trowel onto the surface to a
thickness not exceeding 6 mm and shall cover at least 60% of the area
that is to be plastered or rendered. Spatterdash shall be wetted one hour
after application and shall be allowed to cure and harden before
undercoats are applied.
24.28
2006 Edition
Joint inspection to
spatterdash
24.99
(1)
Joint inspection to minimum 10% of spatterdash shall be carried out
with the Engineers Representative.
(2)
After hardening and curing, the adhesion of the spatterdash coat
shall be checked by brushing with a stiff wire brush.
(3)
Where spatterdash is easily removed, loosened spatterdash shall be
completely removed. Spatterdash shall be re-applied and re-inspected
after 7 days.
(4)
Subsequent works on any affected area shall not start until
re-inspection is to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Background
preparation for
plastering and
rendering
24.100
(1)
Background for plastering and rendering shall comply with BS
5385:1995 and BS 8000:1989.
(2)
High pressure water jet shall be used to remove efflorescence,
laitance, oil, formwork release agent, grease, dirt and loose materials from
the concrete surfaces before application of subsequent finishes.
(3)
Minimum 4 weeks continuous drying out shall be allowed for new
concrete wall after curing before cement sand plastering/rendering
commence.
(4)
After application of cement sand plastering/rendering to concrete
wall, additional 2 weeks drying out shall be allowed before tiling. Drying
time in damp weather conditions should be extended and programme
should be adjusted accordingly to ensure satisfactory installation.
(5)
The prepared concrete surfaces shall be protected from the weather
and contamination from concreting run-offs.
Preparation of
hardened concrete to
receive cementitious
renders
24.101
Concrete surface shall be prepared by:

Either:
1.
a)
Shortly before applying the finish, thoroughly hacking the
concrete surface to remove any laitance or, where approved, with an
electric spade;
b)
Thoroughly cleaning and wetting the surface as required, to
adjust its suction, before applying finish and remove surplus water;
c)
Brushing neat cement slurry into the damp surface
immediately before applying the finish;
Or
2.
Applying bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
Preparation of
hardened concrete to
receive gypsum renders
24.102
Concrete surface shall be prepared by applying bonding agent in

accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
24.29
2006 Edition
Dubbing out
24.103
When it is necessary to correct inaccuracies in the background, dubbing out

shall be as follows:
(i) In layers of a maximum thickness of 10 mm;
(ii) In the same mix as the first coat;
(iii) Allowing each coat to dry out before applying the next;
(iv) Cross scratching each coat to provide a key for the next; and
(v)
Fixing steel lathing
24.104
To a total thickness not exceeding 25 mm.
(1)
Exposed external arrises of plastering or rendering shall be formed
at right angles made with galvanized steel corner beads, which shall
comply with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 or otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
(2)
Junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane
that are to be plastered or rendered shall be jointed with a strip of metal
lathing. The largest dimension of the mesh shall be perpendicular to the
direction of the supports. The lathing shall extend at least 150 mm along
each side of the junction and shall be fixed at 100 mm centres with
galvanized steel staples, nails or tying wire as appropriate to the nature of
the background. The galvanized steel staples and nails shall comply with
BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 while the tying wire shall be in accordance with
BS EN 10244-2: 2001 or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Laps shall
be at least 50 mm where end laps occur between supports and shall be at
least 25 mm at other locations. Laps shall be secured with tying wire at
75 mm centres. Cut ends of lathing shall be painted with one coat of
bituminous paint complying with Clause 24.134.
(3)
Base coats and first coats of plastering and rendering shall be cross
scratched to provide a key for the next coat.
Mixing plaster and

render
24.105
(1)
Mixing plaster and render shall be in accordance with BS 8000: Part
10: 1989. Too strong or too wet render mix that will increase the render
drying shrinkage should be avoided. Plaster and render shall be mixed
using the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve the required
consistency making due allowance for the moisture content of sand and
shall be used within one hour after mixing. The mixed materials shall not
be reconstituted and shall not be used after the initial set has taken place.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the materials shall be mixed
by mechanical methods.
(2)
Renders containing plasticizers shall not be over-mixed and the
constituents shall be dried before mixing with lime putty or water.
(3)
Premixed plaster
24.106
Admixtures should not be used for mixing gypsum plasters.
(1)
Premixed plaster and clean water shall be mixed on site with
portable electrical mixer or other equipment according to manufacturers
recommendations.
(2)
Tolerance of evenness of substrate shall be 5 mm for internal
concrete wall, block wall and beams, and 3 mm for internal ceiling
soffit.
24.30
2006 Edition
(3)
Substrate shall be clean; free from dust, contamination, paint, oil
and loose scale. Dampen dry substrate before plastering.
(4)
Premixed plaster may require the substrate to be treated with
spatterdash or to be keyed before application depending on
(5)
Do not use mixes after initial set has taken place and do not
re-temper or reconstitute mixes unless permitted by the manufacturers
instructions.
(6)
Premixed plaster shall be carried out by experienced applicators.
All the workers and supervisory staff employed for the work shall be
fully instructed and trained on the method of preparation and application
(7) Cement based premixed plaster shall be applied with trowel or
spraying machine in several coats. Application method, thickness,
number of coats and drying time between coats shall be strictly in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
(8)
Cement render
24.107
(i)
Gypsum based premixed plaster shall be applied with

trowel or spraying machine in single coat of thickness in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
(ii)
Half-set plaster shall be leveled with featheredge,

scraped off surplus material and worked from bottom to
top of wall.
(iii)
Allow drying time of 30-60 minutes in accordance with

Sprinkle surface
with clean water and smooth with a hard sponge float to
remove trowel and featheredge marks in circular motion.
(1)
Cement render shall consist of cement and sand or granite fines in
the proportions 1:3 by volume.
(2)
Cement render with a specified finished thickness of 10 mm or less
shall be applied in one layer. Cement render with a specified finished
thickness exceeding 10 mm but not exceeding 20 mm shall be applied in
two layers of equal thickness.
Gypsum plaster
24.108
(1)
Gypsum plaster shall be applied in two coats on solid backgrounds.
The first coat shall consist of Browning plaster and sand in the proportions
1:2 by volume and the finishing coat shall consist of neat finish plaster to
give a total thickness not exceeding 10 mm.
(2)
Gypsum plaster shall be applied in three coats on metal lathing.
The first coat shall consist of metal lathing plaster and sand in the
proportions 1:1 by volume. The second coat and the finishing coat shall
be as stated in Clause 24.108(1) for the first coat and the finishing coat
respectively. The total thickness shall not exceed 13 mm measured from
the outer face of the metal lathing.
24.31
2006 Edition
24.109
Lime plaster
(1)
Lime plaster for internal use shall be applied in two coats on solid
backgrounds. The first coat shall consist of cement, lime and sand in the
proportions 1:4:16 by volume and shall not exceed 10 mm thick on walls
and 5 mm thick on soffits. The second coat shall consist of cement, lime
and sand in the proportions 1:12:30 by volume and shall be 5 mm thick.
The total thickness shall not exceed 15 mm on walls and 10 mm on soffits.
(2)
Lime plaster for internal use shall be applied in three coats on metal
lathing. The first coat and the second coat shall consist of cement, lime
and sand in the proportions 1:2:6 by volume. The finishing coat shall
consist of cement, lime and sand in the proportions 1:12:30 by volume and
shall be 5 mm thick. The total thickness shall not exceed 13 mm
measured from the outer face of the metal lathing.
Shanghai plaster
24.110
(1)
Shanghai plaster shall be applied in two coats, each 10 mm thick.
The base coat shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions 1:3 by
volume. The finishing coat shall consist of cement and stone chippings or
marble chippings in the proportions 1:1 by volume. The chippings shall
be mixed in one of the proportions stated in Table 24.6.
(2)
After the finishing coat has set, the surface shall be scrubbed to
expose the aggregate.
Table 24.6: Proportions of chippings in Shanghai plaster

Proportions of chippings by mass (%)
Colour of
Shanghai
Plaster
Cement
Dark
Stone chippings
Marble chippings
Dark
grey
Light
grey
White
Black
White
Ordinary
70
20
10
Medium
White
60
20
20
Light
White
75
20
White
White
100
AND
GRANOLITHIC
SCREEDS,
TERRAZZO
CONCRETE
Preparation for screeds,
terrazzo and granolithic
concrete
24.111
(1)
Concrete surfaces which are to receive screeds, terrazzo or
granolithic concrete shall be hacked uniformly over the complete area to
expose the coarse aggregate. Laitance shall be removed from fresh
concrete by using stiff brushes or other methods agreed by the Engineer.
(2)
The surfaces shall be cleaned to remove dirt, dust, oil and other
deleterious material. The surfaces shall be dampened for 12 hours before
applying the finish in such a manner that surplus water will not be left.
24.32
2006 Edition
Neat cement slurry shall be brushed onto the existing surface immediately
before applying the finish. A proprietary type of bonding agent approved
by the Engineer may be used instead of cement slurry.
Mixing screeds,
terrazzo and
granolithic concrete
24.112
Screeds, terrazzo and granolithic concrete shall be mixed as stated in

Clause 24.105 for plaster and render.
Screeds
24.113
(1)
Floor screeds exceeding 40 mm thick shall consist of cement, sand
or granite fines and coarse aggregate in the proportions 1:1:3 by volume.
The coarse aggregate shall be graded such that 100% passes a 10 mm BS
test sieve and 75% is retained on a 5 mm BS test sieve.
(2)
Lightweight screeds shall consist of cement and lightweight
aggregate in the proportions 1:8 by volume for roofs and 1:6 by volume for
floors unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The screed shall be
finished with cement and sand or granite fines in the proportions 1:4 by
volume.
(3)
Other screeds shall consist of cement and sand or granite fines in the
proportion 1:3 by volume.
(4)
Wall screeds shall be at least 10 mm thick. The surface shall be
lightly scratched to form a key.
(5)
Floor screeds that are to be laid monolithically with the base shall be
at least 15 mm thick and shall be applied within 3 hours after laying the
base. Floor screeds that are to be bonded to a hardened concrete base
shall be at least 20 mm thick.
(6)
Lightweight screeds shall be at least 50 mm thick excluding the
topping. The topping shall be at least 15 mm thick and shall be laid
monolithically with the screed.
(7)
Vapour barriers for lightweight roof screeds shall be laid flat without
creases. Laps shall be at least 150 mm.
(8)
Screeds shall be laid between timber battens and in bays not
exceeding 15 m2. The length of each bay shall not exceed 1 times the
width of the bay and the top surface of the batten shall be set to the
required level. Screeds shall be compacted to a uniform density
throughout.
(9)
Screeds shall be completed with one of the following surface
finishes as stated in the Contract:
(a)
A smooth untextured finish using a steel trowel or power float,
(b)
An even textured finish using a wood float, or
(c)
A slightly roughened textured finish using a stiff brush.
24.33
2006 Edition
Terrazzo
24.114
(1)
Terrazzo shall be applied in two coats. The minimum thickness of
each coat shall be as stated in Table 24.7. The first coat shall consist of
cement and sand or granite fines in the proportions 1:3 by volume. The
finishing coat shall consist of white or coloured cement and marble
aggregate in the proportions 1:2 by volume. The finishing coat shall be
applied before the first coat has set.
(2)
Terrazzo shall be laid in bays not exceeding 1 m2. The length of
each bay shall not exceed 1 times the width of the bay. Bays shall be
laid in a chequer board pattern and 24 hours shall be allowed between
laying adjacent bays. Bays shall be separated from other bays and from
adjacent finishes to the complete depth of both coats by 3 mm thick brass
strips. Terrazzo shall be compacted to a uniform density throughout.
(3)
After curing has been completed as stated in Clause 24.119, the
surface of terrazzo shall be ground to a smooth finish and to expose the
aggregate. Voids in the surface shall be filled with matching cement.
(4)
One coat of wax polish shall be applied to the surface of wall
finishes. Floor finishes shall not be highly polished or wax polished.
Table 24.7: Thickness of finish of Terrazzo

Location
First coat
Finishing coat
Floors
10 mm
15 mm
Walls and dadoes
10 mm
10 mm
Treads
20 mm
Risers
15 mm
Granolithic concrete
24.115
(1)
The proportions and surface finish of the different types of
granolithic concrete shall be as stated Table 24.8.
(2)
Granolithic concrete that is to be laid monolithically with the base
shall be at least 20 mm thick and shall be applied within 3 hours after
laying the base. Granolithic concrete that is to be bonded to a hardened
concrete base shall be at least 40 mm thick.
(3)
Granolithic concrete shall be laid and compacted as stated in Clause
24.113(8) for screeds and 24 hours shall be allowed between laying
adjacent bays.
(4)
Trowelled surface finishes to granolithic concrete shall be formed
by trowelling the surface with a steel trowel at least 3 times over a period
of 6 hours to 10 hours after compaction to give a smooth finish. Cement
shall not be used to absorb surplus water. Laitance produced by
trowelling shall be removed and shall not be worked into the surface.
(5)
Rubbed surface finishes to granolithic concrete shall be formed by
rubbing down a trowelled surface finish after it has set with fine
carborundum stone to form a smooth finish and to expose the aggregate.
24.34
2006 Edition
(6)
Washed surface finishes to granolithic concrete shall be formed by
brushing off a trowelled surface finish before it has set to expose the
aggregate.
Table 24.8: Proportions and surface finish of granolithic concrete
Type of
granolithic
concrete
Proportions by volume
Cement
Granite
fines
Granite
aggregate
White
stone
Type of surface
finish
Trowelled or
rubbed
Washed
TILING
Floor tiles
24.116
(1)
Floor tiles on concrete bases shall be laid by the semi-dry method as
stated in Clause 24.116(2) to (4).
(2)
The tiles shall be laid on a bed of cement and sand in the
proportions 1:4 by volume. The bed shall be mixed semi-dry and shall be
at least 20 mm thick. The concrete base that is to receive the tiles and bed
shall be prepared and cleaned as stated in Clause 24.111.
(3)
The tiles shall be immersed in water for 30 minutes and shall be
allowed to drain immediately before laying. The cement and sand bed
shall be compacted and finished to the required level. A slurry of cement
and sand in the proportions 1:1 by volume shall be mixed with the
minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a creamy consistency and
shall be spread and trowelled over the bed to a nominal thickness of 3 mm.
The tiles shall be firmly bedded into the slurry to leave straight and even
joints. Tiles with minor variation in colour shall be placed at random
locations.
(4)
After the bed has set, the tiles shall be grouted with a mix of cement
and sand in the proportions 1:1 by volume together with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve the required workability. Surplus
grout shall be cleaned from the face of tiles as work proceeds.
(5)
Floor tiles on floor screeds shall be laid by the thick bed method as
stated in Clauses 24.116(6) to (8).
(6)
The tiles shall be laid on a bed of cement and sand or granite fines in
the proportions 1:3 by volume. The bed shall be approximately 15 mm
thick and shall not be thicker than the tiles. The screed shall be dampened
with clean water to prevent water being absorbed from the bed.
24.35
2006 Edition
(7)
Before laying, the tiles shall be immersed in water for 30 minutes
and allowed to drain and the back of tiles shall be coated with a slurry of
cement together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a
creamy consistency. The tiles shall be firmly tamped into the bed to leave
straight and even joints. Tiles with minor variations in colour shall be
placed at random locations.
(8)
After the bed has set, the tiles shall be grouted with a mix of cement
and sand in the proportions 1:1 by volume together with the minimum
amount of water necessary to achieve the required workability. Surplus
grout shall be cleaned from the face of tiles as work proceeds.
(9)
After lying floor tiles, no traffic shall be allowed on the floor for the
first 4 days and after that only light traffic as approved by the Engineer is
allowed for the next 10 days.
Wall tiles
24.117
(1)
Wall tiles shall be fixed to wall screeds as stated in Clauses
24.116(5) to (8) except as stated in Clauses 24.117(2) to (9).
(2)
Glazed wall tiles shall be laid on a bed of cement and sand or granite
fines in the proportions 1:3 by volume. The bed shall be at least 5 mm,
and shall not exceed 15 mm, thick. Mosaic tiles shall be laid on a bed of
cement and granite fines in the proportions 1:3 by volume. The bed shall
be 10 mm thick. Plain or coloured cement and water shall be mixed to a
creamy consistency and white cement shall not be used except otherwise
stated. Tiles with minor variations in colour shall be placed at random
locations.
(3)
Glazed wall tiles shall be soaked in clean water for at least 30
minutes and stacked to drain and fix as soon as the surface water has
drained from them. Mosaic tiles shall not be soaked but the wall render
shall be dampened with clean water sufficiently to prevent the mosaic tiles
absorbing water from the bedding mortar.
(4)
The backs of glazed wall tiles shall be coated with a mortar of
cement and sand or granite fines in the proportions 1:3 by volume. The
glazed wall tiles shall be tamped firmly into position so that the bed is
uniformly spread throughout to a minimum thickness of 3 mm and not
more than 6 mm at localised areas for rectification of slight variations in
the trueness of the render background. The tiles and joints shall be
cleaned before the bedding hardens.
(5)
The backs of sheets of mosaic tiles shall be coated with a slurry of
cement of the same colour as the final grout. The backing paper of
mosaic tiles shall be removed and final straightening of the tiles shall be
carried out as the sheets are fixed firmly into position. The surface shall
be rubbed with grout and coloured, as required, to fill the joints and clean
any surplus from the face of the tiles as the work proceeds.
(6)
Glazed wall tiles and mosaic tiles shall be grouted with a final grout
of white cement and powdered limestone in the proportions 1:3 by volume.
(7)
When cement-based adhesive bedding method is used to fix wall
tiles, the tiling work shall be carried out in accordance with BS
5385-1:1995 and the followings:
24.36
2006 Edition
(i)
Site demonstration is to be carried out by the adhesive supplier

on the whole application procedures before commencing the
tiling works.
(ii) Tiles shall be cleaned free of dust and loose powder and left
thoroughly dry before immediate application.
(iii) Tiles shall not be wetted when fixing with tile adhesive unless
stated in the manufacturers recommendations.
(iv) Tile adhesive shall be prepared and mixed in strict accordance
with the manufacturers recommendations.
(v)
The adhesive shall be applied by notched trowelling and

buttering method.
(vi) For fixing mosaic tiles with adhesive, in addition to (i) to (v) of
this sub-clause, BS 5385: Part 1: 1995 with particular attention
to 5.4.1 for internal wall and BS 5385: Part 2: 1991 with
particular attention to 27.1 for external wall are required.
The joints shall be grouted with a proprietary grout applied in
accordance with the grout manufacturers recommendations.
Roof tiles
24.118
(1)
Roof tiles shall be laid on a bed of cement and sand in the
proportions 1:4 by volume.
(2)
Roof tiles shall be laid loose and hot bitumen shall be poured
between the joints and pointed.
(3)
25 mm wide joints shall be formed for each 3 m of roof tiles, and 75
mm wide joints shall be formed around the perimeter of roof tiles, to allow
for expansion.
PROTECTION OF PLASTERWORK AND OTHER

FINISHES
Protection of
finishes
24.119
Completed and partially completed surfaces of plasterwork and other

finishes shall be protected from rapid or localised drying out for at least 7
days by covering with polythene sheeting, damp hessian, or a layer of
damp sand at least 50 mm thick, or by other methods agreed by the
Engineer.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances:
finishes
24.120
There shall be no abrupt irregularities in the surface of plasterwork and

other finishes and there shall be no gradual irregularities exceeding 5 mm
in a 2 m length.
24.37
2006 Edition
TESTING
Non-slip homogenous
floor tiles
24.121
The quality tests for non-slip homogenous floor tiles shall be as follow:
a)
Dimensions and surface quality
Test Method
BS 6431
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

200 x 200
BS 6431 Classification
BI
Deviation from
0.75
1. Length Work Size (%)
and
Deviation from
Width
0.5
Average Size (%)
2. Thickness
5
3. Straightness of sides (%)
0.5
4. Rectangularity (%)
0.6
5. Surface Centre curvature
0.5
flatness (%)
Part 10 :1984
Edge curvature
0.5
(%)
Warpage (%)
0.5
= > 95
6. Surface quality (%)
b)
300 x 300
BI
400 x 400
BI
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
5
0.5
0.6
5
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
= > 95
0.5
= > 95
Physical properties:
Test Method
BS 6431
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)
Average
1. *Water
Part 11 : 1983
absorption (%)
Individual
2. *Modulus of
rupture
Average
(N/mm2)
3. *Scratch hardness of surface
(Mohs Scale)
4. *Abrasion
Deep abrasion
resistance
(mm3)
5. *Coefficient of linear thermal
expansion (x106 oC
Part 12 :
1983
Part 13 :
1986
Part 14 :
1983
Part 15 :
1983
200 x
200
BI
<=3
<=
3.3
300 x 300
400 x 400
BI
<=3
BI
<=3
< = 3.3
< = 3.3
>=
27
> = 27
> = 27
>=6
>=6
>=6
< = 205
< = 205
< = 9.0
< = 9.0
<=
205
<=
9.0
Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true
copies issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12
months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the Engineers satisfaction.
24.38
2006 Edition
c)
Chemical properties:
Test Method
BS 6431
Test Items
Nominal Size
200 x 200 300 x 300 400 x 400
1. *Resistance
to acids
and alkali
2.*Resistance
to
household
chemicals
3.*Resistance
to
swimming
pool salts
BI
BI
BI
Sulphuric
acid
Required
Required
Required
Lactic acid
Required
Required
Required
Potassium
hydroxide
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Sodium
hypochlorite
Required
Required
Required
Copper
sulphate
Required
Required
Required
Ammonium
chloride
Standard
cleaning
agent
Part 18 :
1983
months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the Engineers satisfaction;
d)
Slip resistance:
Test Items
Test Method
Nominal Size (mm)
200 x 200
1. Static Coefficient of ASTM C1028
Friction
89
24.39
300 x 300 400 x 400
BI
BI
BI
> = 0.5
> = 0.5
> = 0.5
2006 Edition
Glazed ceramic wall tiles
24.122
The quality tests for glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be as follow:
a)
Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size (mm)

108 x 108
152 x 152
200 x 200
BIII
BIII
BIII
1. Length and Deviation Part 10 :1984
0.75 /
0.5 /
0.5 /
Width
from
(-0.3, +0.6)
(-0.3, +0.6) (-0.3, +0.6)
Work
Size (%)
0.5 /
0.3 /
0.3 /
Deviation
( 0.25)
( 0.25)
( 0.25)
from
Average
Size (%)
2. Thickness
0.5
0.5
0.6
3. Minimum thickness
5.5
5.5
(mm)
4. Straightness of sides
0.3
0.3
0.3
(%)
0.5 / ( 0.3) 0.5 / ( 0.3) 0.5 / (
0.3)
6. Surface
Centre
- 0.3, + 0.5
- 0.3, + 0.5
- 0.3, + 0.5
flatness
curvature
(-0.1 / +0.8
(-0.1 / +0.8 (-0.1 / +0.8
(%)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Edge
- 0.3, + 0.5
- 0.3, + 0.5
- 0.3, + 0.5
curvature
(-0.1 / +0.8
(-0.1 / +0.8 (-0.1 / +0.8
(%)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Warpage
0.5 /
0.5 /
0.5 /
(%)
( 0.5 mm)
( 0.5 mm) ( 0.5 mm)
> = 95
> = 95
> = 95
G = 3 mm
8. Tile with Width of Part 9 : 1984
20%
spacer lugs tile grout
at tiled
surface
(mm) (G)
Note: Values in brackets are for tiles with spacer lugs only.
24.40
2006 Edition
b)
Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water
Average
absorption
(%)
2. *Modulus of Average
rupture
(N/mm2)
3. *Scratch hardness of
surface (Mohs Scale)
4. *Abrasion
Surface
resistance
abrasion
(Class
I-IV)
(PEI
Method)
5. *Coefficient of linear
thermal expansion
(x106 oC
6. *Crazing resistance
108 x 108
BIII
= > 10 &
< = 18
152 x 152
BIII
= > 10 & <
= 18
200 x 200
BIII
= > 10 &
< = 18
Part 12 :
1983
> = 15
> = 15
> = 15
Part 13 :
1986
Part 20 :
1983
>=3
>=3
>=3
Minimum
Class II
Minimum
Class II
Minimum
Class II
Part 15 :
1983
< = 9.0
< = 9.0
< = 9.0
Part 17 :
1983
Required
Required
Required
Part 11 :
1983
months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the Engineers satisfaction.
24.41
2006 Edition
c)
Test
Method BS
6431
Test Items
Nominal Size
1. *Resistance
Hydrochloric
to acids and
acid
alkali
Citric acid
2.*Resistance to
household
chemicals
3. *Resistance to
swimming
pool salts
4. *Resistance to
staining
Potassium
hydroxide
Ammonium
chloride
Standard
cleaning
agent (See
Note 2)
Sodium
hypochlorite
Copper
sulphate
Methylene
blue
Potassium
permanganate
Part 19 :
1984
108 x 108
BIII
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
152 x 152
BIII
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
200 x 200
BIII
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Minimum
Class B
Note: 1.
For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true
copies issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the
past 12 months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the Engineers
satisfaction;
2.
The cleaning agent used is Bathroom Magiclean available in

supermarkets.
24.42
2006 Edition
Unglazed vitreous
mosaic wall tiles
24.123
The quality tests for unglazed vitreous mosaic wall tiles shall be as
follow:
a)

Test Method
BS 6431
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)
1. Length and
Deviation from Work Size
Width
(%)
Deviation from Average Size
(%)
2. Thickness
3. Minimum thickness (mm)
Part
10 :1984

6. Surface
Centre curvature (%)
flatness
Edge curvature (%)
Warpage (%)
b)
Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20, 50 x 50
BI
1.2
0.75
10
4 (20 x 20)
5 (50 x 50)
0.75
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
> = 95
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water
Average
absorption
Individual
(%)
2. *Modulus of Average
rupture
(N/mm2)
(Mohs Scale)
4. *Abrasion
Deep abrasion
resistance
(mm)
expansion (x106 oC)
Test Method
BS 6431
Part 11 : 1983
Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20, 50 x 50
BI
<=3
< = 3.3
Part 12 : 1983
> = 27
Part 13 : 1986
>=6
Part 14 : 1983
< = 205
Part 15 : 1983
< = 9.0
Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified
true copies issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within
the past 12 months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the
Engineers satisfaction.
24.43
2006 Edition
c)
Test Method BS
6431
Nominal Size
20 x 20, 50 x 50
BI
1. *Resistance
Sulphuric acid Part 18 : 1983
Required
to acids and
Lactic acid
Required
alkali
Potassium
Required
hydroxide
2. *Resistance to Ammonium
Required
household
chloride
chemicals
Standard
Required
cleaning agent
3. *Resistance to Sodium
Required
swimming
hypochlorite
pool salts
Required
Copper
sulphate
Test Items
copies issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the
past 12 months are acceptable as evidence of compliance to the Engineers
satisfaction.
Glass mosaic wall tiles
24.124
The quality tests for glass mosaic wall tiles shall be as follow:
a)
Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size (mm)

1. Length and Deviation from Work
Width
Size (%)
2. Thickness
3. Minimum thickness (mm)
Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20
2.0
Part 10 :1984
10
4
4. Surface Centre curvature (%)

flatness
Edge curvature (%)
1.0
> = 95
24.44
1.0
2006 Edition
b)
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water
Average
absorption
(%)
2. *Modulus Average
of
rupture
(N/mm2)
(Mohs Scale)
expansion (x106 oC)
Test Method
BS 6431
Part 11 : 1983
Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20
<=3
Part 12 : 1983
> = 27
Part 13 : 1986
>=6
Part 15 : 1983
< = 9.0
Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or
certified true copies issued by the testing laboratories) for tests
carried out within the past 12 months are acceptable as evidence of
compliance to the Engineers satisfaction.
c)
Test Items
Nominal Size
1.*Resistance to
acids and
alkali
2. *Resistance to
household
chemicals
3. *Resistance to
swimming
pool salts
Sulphuric acid
Lactic acid
Potassium hydroxide
Ammonium chloride
Standard cleaning
agent
Sodium hypochlorite
Copper sulphate
Test Method
BS 6431
Part 18 :
1983
Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
24.45
2006 Edition
Homogenous
coved tile skirting
24.125
The quality tests for homogenous coved tile skirting shall be as follow:
a)

Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

BS 6431 classification
1. Length Deviation from Work
and
Size (%)
Width
Deviation from Average
Size (%)
2. Thickness (%)
b)
Test Method
BS 6431
Acceptance
Standards
200 x 75 x 7
BI
0.75
Part 10 :1984
0.5
5
> = 95
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water
Average
absorption Individual
(%)
(Mohs Scale)
3. *Abrasion Deep abrasion
resistance
(mm3)
expansion (x106 oC)
Test Method
BS 6431
Part 11 : 1983
Acceptance
Standards
200 x 75 x 7
BI
<=3
< = 3.3
Part 13 : 1986
>=6
Part 14 : 1983
< = 205
Part 15 : 1983
< = 9.0
24.46
2006 Edition
c)
Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size
Part 18 : 1983
1. *Resistance Sulphuric acid
to
acids Lactic acid
and alkali
Potassium
hydroxide
2. *Resistance Ammonium
to
chloride
household Standard cleaning
chemicals
agent
3. *Resistance Sodium
to
hypochlorite
swimming Copper sulphate
pool salts
Acceptance
Standards
200 x 75 x 7
BI
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Homogenous wall tiles
24.126
The quality tests for homogenous wall tiles shall be as follow:

a)
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)
1. Length
Deviation from Work Size
and Width (%)
Deviation from Average
Size (%)
2. Thickness (%)
4. Rectanularity (%)
5. Surface
flatness
Edge curvature (%)
Warpage (%)
24.47
Test
Method
BS 6431
Acceptance
Standards
100 x 100
BI
1.0
Part
10 :1984
0.5
10
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
> = 95
2006 Edition
b)
Test Items
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water absorption
Average
(%)
Individual
2. *Modules of
Average
2
rupture (N/mm )
3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs
Scale)
4. *Abrasion
Deep
resistance
abrasion
(mm3)
expansion (x106 oC)
Test Method
BS 6431
Part 11 :
1983
Part 12 :
1983
Part 13 :
1986
Part 14 :
1983
Part 15 :
1983
Acceptance
Standards
100 x 100
BI
<=3
< = 3.3
> = 27
>=6
< = 205
< = 9.0
carried out within the past 12 months are acceptable as
evidence of compliance to the Engineers satisfaction.
c)
Test Items
Nominal Size
1. *Resistance to
Sulphuric acid
acids and
Lactic acid
alkali
Potassium
hydroxide
2. *Resistance to
Ammonium
household
chloride
chemicals
Standard
cleaning agent
3. *Resistance to
Sodium
swimming
hypochlorite
pool salts
Copper sulphate
Test Method BS Acceptance

6431
Standards
100 x 100
BI
Required
Part 18 : 1983
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
24.48
2006 Edition
External facing tiles
24.127
The quality tests for external facing tiles shall be as follow:

a)

Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size (mm)

1. Length and Deviation from Work Size
Width
(%)
Deviation from Average Size Part 10 :1984
(%)
2. Thickness (%)
4. Rectanularity (%)
5. Surface
flatness
Edge curvature (%)
Warpage (%)
b)
Acceptance
Standards
45 x 45 x 7 &
45 x 95 x 7
BI
1.2
0.75
10
0.75
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
> = 95
Test Items
Test Method
BS 6431
Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Water
Average
absorption (%) Individual
2. *Modules of
Average
rupture
(N/mm2)
(Mohs Scale)
4. *Abrasion
Surface abrasion
resistance
(Class I IV)
(PEI Method)
expansion (x106 oC)
6. *Crazing resistance
Part 11 :
1983
Part 12 :
1983
Part 13 :
1986
Part 20 :
1983
Part 15 :
1983
Part 17 :
1983
Acceptance
Standards
45 x 45 x 7 &
45 x 95 x 7
BI
<=3
< = 3.3
> = 27
>=5
Minimum
Class III
< = 9.0
Required
carried out within the past 12 months are acceptable as evidence
of compliance to the Engineers satisfaction.
24.49
2006 Edition
c)
Test Items
Nominal Size
1. *Resistance
Hydrochloric
to acids and acid
alkali
Citric acid
Potassium
hydroxide
2. *Resistance Ammonium
to
chloride
household Standard
chemicals
cleaning agent
(See Note 2)
3. *Resistance Sodium
to
hypochlorite
swimming Copper
pool salts
sulphate
4. *Resistance Methylene blue
to Staining Potassium
permanganate
(See Note 2)
Test Method
BS 6431
Acceptance
Standards
45 x 45 x 7 & 45 x 95 x
7
BI
Part 19 : 1984
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class B
Minimum Class 2
Minimum Class 2
Note: 1. For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or
2. The cleaning agent used is Bathroom Magiclean available in
supermarkets.
24.50
2006 Edition
PART 6: PAINTING
MATERIALS
Paint and associated
materials
24.128
(1)
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, paint and associated
materials in a coat ing system shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer and shall be supplied in sealed containers marked to identify
the contents, the manufacturers brand label and recommendations for use.
(2)
Paint and associated materials for general use shall be a proprietary
type approved by the Engineer and shall be obtained from manufacturers
(3)
Paint and associated materials which will be applied to surfaces
which may come into contact with potable or fresh water shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer which is listed in the current
version of the Water Fittings and Materials Directory issued by the
United Kingdom Water Research Council as being suitable for such use.
(4)
Undercoats and finishing coats shall be compatible with the primer
and with each other and shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
Undercoats and primary finishing coats shall be of slightly different tints to
each other and to the finishing coat.
(5)
Flat finish undercoats shall be used for hard gloss finishes.
Aluminium primer
24.129
Aluminium primer shall comply with BS 4756, Type 1.
Zinc chromate primer
24.130
Zinc chromate primer and metallic zinc-rich primer Type 2 shall comply
with BS 4652.
Lead primer
24.131
Lead primer shall comply with BS 2523.
Calcium plumbate
primer
24.132
Calcium plumbate primer shall comply with BS 3698.
Bitumastic paint
24.133
Bitumastic paint shall be quick drying Type B complying with BS 1070.
Bituminous paint
24.134
Bituminous paint shall comply with BS 6949.
Knotting
24.135
Knotting shall comply with BS 1336.
Stopping
24.136
Stopping shall comply with BS 544.
Rust inhibitor
24.137
Rust inhibitor shall be a chemical agent that is capable of converting rust

into iron phosphate.
Sealers
24.138
Sealers for plaster, masonry and similar materials shall be a stabilising

solution or oil based plaster sealer.
Wood preservative
24.139
Wood preservative shall be as stated in Clause 24.27.
Polyurethane paint
24.140
Polyurethane paint shall be a two-pack type.
Epoxy paint
24.141
Cold cure epoxy paint shall be a two-pack type.

24.51
2006 Edition
Textured paint
24.142
Textured paint for external use shall be a heavy duty masonry paint
incorporating a fine aggregate filler.
Plastic emulsion paint
24.143
Plastic emulsion paint shall be a vinyl or acrylic based emulsion

incorporating a fungicide.
Cement paint
24.144
Cement paint shall be a waterproof cement based paint supplied in drums

and shall not be mixed with lime or similar materials.
Gloss paint
24.145
Synthetic gloss paint for internal and external use shall have an alkyd resin
base combined with drying oils and pigments.
Volatile organic
compound content
24.146
The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of all paint applied on

surfaces of building fabrics, building elements and any
installations/equipment inside semi-enclosed/enclosed areas of the
building shall comply with the VOC limits stipulated in the Air Pollution
Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation.
Amd 1/2007
Selection of colours for

paintwork
24.147
(1)
The colours of paintwork shall be provisionally selected by the
Engineer from a catalogue showing the range of colours offered by the
manufacturers. The catalogue shall be submitted to the Engineer at least
14 days before painting starts.
(2)
Trial panels shall be painted in each of the colours provisionally
selected by the Engineer. Each trial panel shall be 1 m x 1 m and shall be
painted with the complete paintwork system.
(3)
The Engineer shall select the final colour of paintwork from the
trial panel.
(4)
Trial panels shall be used as a means of comparison for the colour
of the finished paintwork. Trial panels shall be protected from damage
and shall be left in position until the Engineer instructs their removal.
Storage of paint and
associated materials
24.148
(1)
Paint and associated materials shall be stored in a dry weatherproof
store. The store shall be maintained in a cool, well-ventilated condition.
(2)
Tins of paint shall be labelled as being for external use, internal use,
undercoating and finishing, as appropriate, and shall be protected from
exposure to conditions that may adversely affect the material. Paint and
associated materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and shall not be used after the recommended shelf life
has been exceeded.
24.52
2006 Edition
ON-SITE DELIVERY CHECK

Emulsion paint,
synthetic paint and
multi-layer acrylic paint
24.149
a) The checking requirement are in the following table:

Test Items
Test Method
Acceptance
Standards
Document check
From Approved
origin with
information of
product
identification
number
As Approved
1.
Manufacturers
Certificate of origin
&Delivery Note
2.
Colour
Code/Label/Serial
Number
Check information
printed on the packing
3.
Expiry Date
Check information
printed on the packing
Not expired
b)
In the event that the checking results fail to meet the checking
requirements upon delivery on Site, the failed consignment shall be
removed off Site.
Preparation of surfaces
for painting
24.150
(1)
Surfaces that are to be painted shall be dry and clean, and
deleterious and loose material shall be removed.
(2)
Absorbent surfaces which are to be painted with cement paint shall
be thoroughly dampened to provide even suction.
(3)
Knotting shall be applied to knots in timber.
(4)
Screws and nails in timber and building board surfaces shall be
recessed or punched below the finished surface and the whole surface shall
be stopped.
(5)
Plaster, cement render, masonry, concrete and similar surfaces shall
be stopped and sealed.
(6)
Scale and rust shall be removed from non-galvanized steel and
ironwork. The surface shall be painted with rust inhibitor at least 12
hours before priming or shall be blast-cleaned in accordance with the paint
(7)
Surfaces adjacent to paintwork shall be temporarily masked to
prevent contamination during painting.
Type and number of
coats for painting
system
24.151
The type and number of coats applied to different surfaces for each
painting system shall be as stated in Table 24.9.
24.53
2006 Edition
Application of paint and

associated materials
24.152
(1)
Paint and associated materials shall be applied in accordance with
BS 6150 and shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the
(2)
Painting shall not be carried out in wet or misty weather, in direct
strong sunlight, or if in the opinion of the Engineer there is excessive dust
in the atmosphere.
(3)
Paint and associated materials shall be applied with bristle brushes
or rollers. If mechanical spraying is permitted by the Engineer the primer
coat, or the first undercoat if a primer coat is not required, shall be applied
by brush.
(4)
Primer coats shall be thoroughly brushed into all surfaces including
joints, angles and sawn ends. Primer coats shall be applied to surfaces
that will be inaccessible before fittings are fixed in position.
(5)
Paint and associated materials shall not be applied until the
underlying surface has been rubbed down with fine glass paper and is clean
and dry.
(6)
Undercoats and finishing coats shall be applied in an even film free
from brush marks, sags and runs. If two hard gloss finishing coats are to
be applied, the second coat shall be applied within 48 hours after the first
coat.
(7)
Cement paint shall be applied within 1 hour after mixing. A
minimum of 12 hours drying time shall be allowed between coats.
(8)
Wet Paint signs in English and Chinese shall be prominently
displayed adjacent to newly painted surfaces.
Health and safety
24.153
(1)
Lead based primers and calcium plumbate primers shall not be
applied by spaying.
(2)
Respirators, which supply clean air during blasting cleaning, paint
spraying or in a situation where toxic fumes are generated, shall be worn.
(3)
Precautions shall be taken to avoid skin and eye contact with paints
and their solvents. All precautionary measures as recommended by the
paint manufacturers shall be followed.
24.54
2006 Edition
Table 24.9: Type and number of coats for painting systems
Primer
Painting
system
Surface type
Type
No. of
coats
No. of
undercoats
Finishing coat
Type
No. of
coats
Internal woodwork
Aluminium primer
Hard gloss
Internal woodwork
natural finish
Polyurethane primer
Polyurethane
paint
External woodwork
Aluminium primer
Hard gloss
Hidden surfaces of
woodwork and rough
sawn timbering
Wood
preservative
Zinc chromate metallic

Non-structural internal zinc-rich or
bright steel
lead primer
Hard gloss
Non-structural external
as for E above
bright steel
Hard gloss
Internal galvanized
steel
Calcium plumbate
primer
Hard gloss
External galvanized
steel
as for G above
Hard gloss
Galvanized steel
adjacent to the coast or Epoxy red oxide
in sewage treatment
chromate primer
works
Cold cure
epoxy paint
Ironwork
1 before Bitumastic
fixing paint
Semi-gloss
plastic
emulsion
paint
Cement paint
Internal walls and

ceilings
External walls without

tile or similar finishes
Structural steelwork
Alkali resistant primer
as stated in Section 18
24.55
2006 Edition
TESTING
Emulsion paint
24.154
The quality tests for emulsion paint shall be as follows:
Surface skin
Acceptance
Standards
- No surface skin
Consistency
- No gelling
Test Method
Test Items
Preliminary
Examination of paint
Colour separation
into layers
Visible impurities
BS 3900 :
A2 : 1983
Hard drying
-No visible
impurities
- No hard settling
Sediment
Drying times
- No colour
separation
BS 3900 :
C3 : 1990
< = 1 hour
Fineness of grind (m)
BS 3900 :
C6 : 1983
< = 50m
Hiding power (contrast ratio %)
BS 3900 :
D4 : 1974
> = 75%
BS 3900 :
D5 : 1980
< = 20
Viscosity (procedure B)
ASTM :
D562 : 81
65 85 KU
Scrub resistance (cycle)
ASTM :
D2486 - 96
> = 400 cycles
85o
Specular gloss
24.56
2006 Edition
Synthetic paint
24.155
The quality tests for synthetic paint shall be as follows:
Surface skin
Acceptance
Standards
- No surface skin
Consistency
- No gelling
Test Method
Test Items
Preliminary
examination of paint
Colour separation
into layers
Settling
BS 3900 :
A2 : 1993
- No colour
separation
-No hard settling
- extraneous
matter
Extraneous matter
Viscosity (Flow Cup No. 6) (sec)
BS 3900 :
A6 : 1996
45 to 60 sec
Drying times
Surface drying (hour)
BS 3900 :
C2 : 1994
<=4
Hard drying
BS 3900 :
C3 : 1990
< = 18
Fineness of grind (m)
BS 3900 :
C6 : 1983
< = 25m
Hiding power (contrast ratio %)
BS 3900 :
D4 : 1974
> = 85%
BS 3900 :
D5 : 1997
> 80
Bend test
BS 3900 :
E1 : 1995
No
coating
crack at 3 mm
mandrel
Scratch test (g)
BS 3900 :
E2 : 1992
> = 600
60o
Specular gloss
24.57
2006 Edition
Multi-layer acrylic paint
24.156
The quality tests for multi-layer acrylie paint shall be as follows:
Acceptance
Standards
Remarks
Test Items
Test Method
1. Low
Temperature
Stability
Clause 5.5
JIS A 6910
1988
No lumps and
free from
separation and
aggregation of
the composing
materials
Respective coatings
of primer coating,
main coating and
top coating are
regarded as samples.
2. Change in
Consistency
Clause 5.6
JIS A 6910
1988
15%
Respective coatings
of primer coating,
main coating and
top coating are
regarded as samples.
3. Cracking
Resistance
due to Initial
Stage Drying
Clause 5.7
JIS A 6910
1988
No cracking
shall occur.
4. Adhesion
Strength
Clause 5.8
JIS A 6910
1988
Standard
condition > =
68.6 N/cm2
Immersion in
water > = 49.0
N/cm2
5. Repeated
Warning and
Cooling
Clause 5.9
JIS A 6910
1988
No peering,
cracking and
blistering and
remarkable
discolouration
and
degradation in
luster on the
surface.
6.
Permeability
Clause 5.10
JIS A 6910
1988
< = 0.5 ml
7. Impact
Resistance
Clause 5.11
JIS A 6910
1988
Crackin,
remarkable
deformation
and peeling
shall not
occur.
24.58
2006 Edition
Note:
1.
2.
8. Weather
Resistance
ASTM G-53-88 Cracking and

peeling shall
not occur and
the
discolouration
shall be No. 3
or over in grey
scale
according to
JIS
6910-1988.
The test conditions:

Fluorescent UV
Lamp: UVA-340
Cycle: 24 hrs UV at
60oC
Total exposure time:
250 hours
9.
Determination
of Resistance
to humid
atmospheres
containing
sulphur
dioxide
BS 3900: F8 :
1976
The amount of
sulphur dioxide to
be used in testing is
one litre. The test
cycle to be 12
cycles
10. Resistance
to Fungal
Growth
BS 3900: G6 : Rating 0, no
1989
fungal growth
No blistering,
loss of
adhesion, rust
staining,
change of
colour,
embrittlement
and other signs
of
deterioration.
The colour of paint to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer.

The base plate for testing to be 20 mm thick cement mortar board.
24.59
2006 Edition
PART 7: BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK

MATERIALS
Clay bricks
24.157
(1)
Clay bricks shall be a brand approved by the Engineer and shall be
well burnt, hard, sound, square and clean.
(2)
The nominal dimensions of clay bricks shall be 225 mm x 112.5
mm x 75 mm, 200 mm x 100 mm x 75 mm, and special sizes and shapes
in accordance with the requirements stated in the Contract.
(3)
Clay bricks for fair-faced work shall be selected for evenness,
texture, sharpness of arrises and uniformity of colour.
(4)
The compressive strength of the clay bricks shall be at least 7.0
MPa.
Concrete bricks and

blocks
24.158
(1)
Concrete bricks and blocks shall be obtained from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer. The compressive strength of the concrete
bricks shall be at least 7.0 MPa and for blocks and fixing bricks at least
2.8 MPa.
(2)
The nominal dimensions of concrete bricks shall be 225 mm x 105
mm x 70 mm. The size of concrete blocks shall be as approved by the
Engineer.
(3)
Concrete bricks and blocks for fair-faced work shall be selected for
evenness, texture and sharpness of arrises.
Concrete hollow blocks
24.159
The compressive strength of the concrete hollow blocks shall be at least

2.8 MPa over the gross area.
Brickwork
reinforcement
24.160
Brickwork reinforcement shall be expanded metal or mild steel rods and

shall be galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 or
otherwise approved by the Engineer, or painted with two coats of
bituminous paint complying with Clause 24.134.
Damp proof course
24.161
Damp proof course shall be two layers of 2-ply bituminous paper or other
types complying with BS 743. Hessian based types of bitumen damp
proof course shall not be used.
Wall ties
24.162
(1)
Wall ties between the ends of walls and concrete shall be:
(a)
6 mm diameter steel rods 350 mm long galvanized or painted

with two coats of bituminous paint complying with Clause
24.134, or
(b)
20 mm x 3 mm galvanized mild steel flats 350 mm long and

fanged at both ends.
(2)
Wall ties for walls built against the face of concrete structures shall
be 20 mm x 3 mm galvanized mild steel flats 150 mm long and fanged at
both ends.
(3)
The length of mild steel flat ties that are fixed by shot firing into
concrete walls may be reduced if permitted by the Engineer.
24.60
2006 Edition
(4)
The galvanized mild steel flats shall comply with BS EN ISO
1461: 1999 or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Mortar for brickwork
and blockwork
24.163
(1)
Cement, water and sand for mortar for brickwork and blockwork
shall be as stated in Clause 24.65.
(2)
Lime putty shall be prepared by mixing hydrated lime with the
minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a thick creamy
consistency. The putty shall be left undisturbed for at least 16 hours
before use.
(3)
Cement mortar shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions
1:3 by volume. Cement lime mortar shall consist of cement, lime putty
and sand in the proportions 1:1:6 by volume for external walls and in the
proportions 1:2:9 by volume for internal walls.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of
brickwork and
blockwork
24.164
(1)
The following particulars of the proposed materials for brickwork

and blockwork shall be submitted to the Engineer:
(a)
A certificate showing the manufacturers name, the date and

place of manufacture and showing that the materials comply
results of tests for crushing strength of clay bricks, concrete
bricks and blocks and concrete hollow blocks,
(b)
Details of brickwork reinforcement, damp proof course and

wall ties, and
(c)
Details of materials for mortar.
(2)
24.165

(a)
Each type of brick and block, and
(b)
Brickwork reinforcement, damp proof course and wall ties.
TRIAL PANELS
Trial panels
24.166
(1)
A trial panel shall be constructed for each type of faced and fairfaced brickwork or blockwork to demonstrate that the proposed materials
will produce brickwork or blockwork that complies with the specified
requirements.
(2)
Trial panels shall be constructed at least 14 days before the relevant
work starts.
24.61
2006 Edition
(3)
period agreed by the Engineer, before constructing trial panels.
(4)
Trial panels shall be constructed using the materials submitted to
the Engineer.
(5)
Each trial panel shall be 1 m x 1 m and shall be constructed at a
location agreed by the Engineer.
(6)
Trial panels shall be used as a means of comparison against which
the Engineer shall determine the compliance or otherwise of the
brickwork or blockwork in the permanent work. Trial panels shall be
protected from damage and shall be left in position until the Engineer
instructs their removal.
Non-compliance:
brickwork and
blockwork
24.167
If in the opinion of the Engineer the brickwork or blockwork in the trial

panel does not comply with the specified requirements for brickwork or
blockwork, particulars of proposed changes to the materials and methods
of construction shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further trial panels
shall be constructed until the trial panel complies with the specified
requirements.
Commencement of
brickwork and
blockwork
24.168
Brickwork and blockwork shall not commence until in the opinion of the
Engineer the trial panel complies with the specified requirements.
24.169
Unless permitted by the Engineer, the materials used to produce a trial

panel that complies with the specified requirements shall not be changed.

of bricks and blocks
24.170
(1)
Bricks and blocks shall be unloaded and handled in a manner
which will not result in soiling, chipping or other damage to the bricks and
blocks.
(2)
Bricks and blocks shall be stored on a dry, levelled and maintained
hard-standing ground base on level supports and in a manner which will
not result in damage or deformation to the bricks or blocks or in
contamination of the bricks or blocks.
(3)
Bricks and blocks shall be stored horizontally.
(4)
Bricks and blocks shall be protected from damage and damaged
bricks and blocks shall not be used in the permanent work unless
24.62
2006 Edition
LAYING BRICKS AND BLOCKS

Type of mortar
24.171
(1)
Cement mortar shall be used for brickwork and blockwork:

(a)
Below the damp proof course, including basement walls,
(b)
For brickwork and blockwork not exceeding 150 mm thick,
(c)
In load-bearing walls, and
(d)
For pointing where the bed is cement mortar or where stated

in the Contract.
(2)
Cement lime mortar shall be used for brickwork and blockwork
other than those stated in Clause 24.148(1).
(3)
Mortar shall be mixed using the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve the required consistency and shall be used within one
hour after mixing. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the
materials shall be mixed by a mechanical method.
Bond and gauge of
brickwork and
blockwork
24.172
(1)
Stretcher bond shall be used for half brick walls and English bond
shall be used for brick walls exceeding half brick thick. Stretcher bond
shall be used for blockwork.
(2)
Brick courses shall be gauged with four courses to 300 mm
including joints.
(3)
Bricks and blocks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar and the joints
shall be filled solid to a thickness of 10 mm.
(4)
Single frog bricks in load-bearing walls shall be laid with the frog
facing upward and filled with mortar.
(5)
Courses shall be kept level and perpends shall be kept in line
vertically. Quoins and other angles shall be plumbed as the work
proceeds and shall be constructed in advance of the remainder of the wall,
but not exceeding five courses, and shall be racked back between levels.
(6)
Bricks and blocks shall be wetted before laying during dry weather
using the minimum amount of water necessary to prevent premature
drying out of the mortar. During wet weather, freshly laid brickwork and
blockwork shall be protected at the completion of each days work or in
heavy rain.
Laying damp proof

courses
24.173
(1)
Brickwork shall be flushed up with cement mortar to form a level
and even bed to receive the horizontal damp proof course.
(2)
Damp proof courses shall be laid in a continuous strip with 150 mm
laps at the end of the length and at returns. The mortar joint shall be
completed to the normal thickness.
Fixing wall ties
24.174
(1)
At junctions of walls and concrete, wall ties shall be fixed at 300
mm centres vertically and shall project 250 mm into the wall.
24.63
2006 Edition
(2)
Wall ties shall be fixed for walls built against the face of concrete
structures and shall be spaced at intervals of 900 mm horizontally and 300
mm vertically in a staggered pattern. The ties shall project 75 mm into
the wall.
Finishing of joints in
brickwork and
blockwork
24.175
Joints that will not be visible in the finished brickwork and blockwork
shall be struck off as the work proceeds. Joints that will be exposed shall
be struck flush and weather pointed as the work proceeds. Joints in
brickwork to which plaster or other wet applied finishes will be applied
shall be raked out to a depth of 10 mm.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances: brickwork
and blockwork
24.176
Brickwork and blockwork shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)
The position on plan shall be within 15 mm of the specified

position.
(b)
The length shall be within 15 mm of the specified length.
(c)
The height shall be within 10 mm of the specified height.
(d)
The level of bed joints shall be within 10 mm of the specified

level in any 5 m length.
(e)
The brickwork and blockwork shall be straight to within 15

mm in any 5 m length.
(f)
The brickwork and blockwork shall be vertical to within 15

mm in any 3 m height.
TESTING: BRICKS AND BLOCK

Batch:
bricks and blocks
24.177
A batch of bricks or blocks is any quantity of bricks or blocks of the same

type, manufactured or produced at the same time in the same place,
covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site at any one time.
Samples:
bricks and blocks
24.178
(1)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, one sample of each
type of bricks or blocks shall be provided at the same time as particulars of
the material are submitted to the Engineer and one sample of each type of
bricks or blocks shall be provided from each batch of the material
(2)
The number of bricks or blocks in the sample shall be 10 for each
batch of 15,000 bricks or blocks or part thereof.
(3)
Testing:
bricks and blocks
24.179
The method of sampling shall be in accordance with BS 3921.
(1)
Each brick or block in the sample shall be tested to determine the
crushing strength of the brick or block.
(2)
The method of testing shall be in accordance with BS 3921.

24.64
2006 Edition
(3)
The average of the 10 crushing strengths of the bricks or blocks
shall be calculated and referred to as the compressive strength.
bricks and blocks
24.180
The compressive strength of bricks and blocks shall be as stated in Clauses

24.157(4), 24.158(1) and 24.159, or as stated elsewhere in the Contract.
24.65
2006 Edition
PART 8: METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS

MATERIALS
Materials for metal
windows and doors
24.181
(1)
Materials for metal windows and doors shall be as stated in Clause
24.181(2) to (9).
(2)
Steel shall be weldable structural steel complying with BS 4360.
Hot dipped galvanized plain steel sheet and coil shall comply with BS
2989. Steel tubing shall comply with BS 1387 medium grade and shall be
galvanized. Slotted steel angles shall be self-finished angles complying
with BS 4345 and shall have cadmium plated steel fittings.
(3)
Aluminium alloy plate, sheet and strip shall comply with BS 1470
and shall be of the specified alloy designation. Aluminium alloy bars,
extruded tube sections and hollow sections shall comply with BS 1474,
alloy designation 6063. Aluminium sections for structural purposes shall
comply with BS 1161. Aluminium alloy drawn tubes shall comply with
BS 1471, alloy designation 6063.
(4)
Brass rods and sections shall comply with BS 2874, designation
CZ 106, condition M.
(5)
Stainless steel shall be of the 18/9 chromium nickel group.
Stainless steel plate, sheet and strip shall comply with BS EN 10029, BS
EN 10048, BS EN 10051 + A1, BS EN 10095 and BS EN ISO 9445 and
shall be Finish No. 2B for mill finish and Finish No. 2J for polished finish.
Stainless steel tubes for structural and general engineering purposes shall
comply with BS EN 10296-2, and shall have the same finish as for plate,
sheet and strip.
Amd 3/2010
(6)
Fixings shall be the same material and shall have the same finish as
the material to be fixed.
(7)
Stud anchors and fixing bolts shall be of a proprietary type of
expanding bolt approved by the Engineer.
(8)
Polysulphide-based sealant shall be a one-pack gun-grade type
(9)
Adhesive for bonding metal to wood or metal to metal shall be of a
DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF METAL WINDOWS

AND DOORS
Steel windows and
doors
24.182
(1)
Steel windows and doors shall be designed and fabricated by the
Contractor in accordance with BS 6510 and as stated in Clauses 24.182(2)
to (12).
(2)
Sections shall be 32 mm universal steel rolled medium or
equivalent W20 sections, dovetail grooved for a weatherstrip when
specified, and shall be hot rolled, cold straightened and free from rolling
24.66
2006 Edition
defects. Manufacturers fabrication holes shall be sealed by welding
before delivery to the Site.
(3)
Frames shall be square and flat with mitred, welded corners and
with glazing bars machine-tenoned or welded to frames.
(4)
Water bars shall be welded to frames for the complete width of the
window or door.
(5)
Weather bars shall be welded to the heading of frames for the
complete width of the window or door.
(6)
Slotted adjustable lugs for building in windows and doors shall
project at least 60 mm beyond the metal frames.
(7)
Loose mullions and transoms to suit window or door openings shall
have an additional 75 mm length at each end for building-in purposes.
(8)
Mastic and bolts shall be used for assembly of composite units.
Mullions and transoms shall be bedded in mastic with all interstices
completely filled.
(9)
Windows shall be suitable for external glazing. Rolled steel heavy
channel section glazing beading shall be 13 mm x 10 mm for windows and
20 mm x 10 mm for doors. The beading shall be mitred at corners and
fixed with galvanized mild steel flat headed countersunk screws at centres
not exceeding 225 mm. Frames shall be tapped to receive screws.
(10) Members shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS EN
ISO 1461: 1999 or zinc sprayed to 0.2 mm nominal thickness in
accordance with BS 2569: Part 1.
(11) Chloroprene rubber or polyvinyl chloride weatherstrips of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer shall be securely fixed into the
dovetail groove in the window or door section to provide continuous
contact between the opening casement and the fixed frame.
(12) Temporary steel clamps shall be provided at the top and bottom of
opening lights of casements before transportation from the factory and
shall be left in position until installation is complete.
Fittings and furniture
to steel windows and
doors
24.183
(1)
Fittings and furniture to steel windows and doors shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall comply with the
requirements stated in Clause 24.183(2) to (13).
(2)
Hinges shall be steel with brass pins and shall be welded or riveted
to frames.
(3)
Fittings, including friction grip pivots, casement fasteners, spring
catches, brackets, slide arms, shoes, slip bolts, cabin hooks and eyes, and
handles shall be manganese brass with bronze finish and shall be capable
of retaining the opening parts rigidly in both the open and closed
positions.
(4)
Handle plates and round headed stay brackets shall be welded to the
fixed frames and shall have interchangeable handles and stays.
(5)
Windows and doors which are to be hung to open shall be fitted

24.67
2006 Edition
with the fittings and furniture stated in Clause 24.183(6) to (11).
(6)
Side-hung casements and vertically centre-hung ventilators shall be
fitted with a two-point nose fastener or a two throw casement fastener with
mild steel adjustable connecting rod and a 250 mm peg stay or bronze
sliding stay as stated in the Contract.
(7)
Projecting casements shall be fitted with bronze sliding shoes,
pivots and friction side arms and one spring catch with a ring for hand or
pole operation and two square-shank barrel bolts.
(8)
Top-hung ventilators shall be fitted with a 200 mm peg stay with a
round-headed stay bracket welded to the fixed frame and with a second
peg to secure the stay firmly and horizontally against the first peg when the
ventilator is closed.
(9)
Bottom-hung ventilators shall be fitted with a spring catch and
fanlight roller stay to limit opening and to permit the ventilator to swing
free for cleaning.
(10) Horizontally centre-hung ventilators shall be fitted with a spring
catch with ring and eye for cord or pole operation.
(11) Doors shall be fitted with sliding bolts of suitable length, striking
plates at top and bottom, magnetic catch, panic bolt, three-lever mortice
lock with two keys, lever or knob handles and escutcheon plates as stated
in the Contract.
(12) Flyscreens shall be extruded aluminium with plastic covered
fibre-glass mosquito gauze with 7 x 7 mesh per 10 mm square.
Side-hung casements for use with flyscreens shall have a locking handle
and an opening and closing mechanism consisting of a bronze cam handle
and bronze roto operator. Top-hung casements for use with flyscreens
shall have bronze through-the-frame type stays.
(13) Window poles shall be 25 mm diameter teak with a strong brass
hook at one end suitable for opening and closing high windows.
Aluminium windows
and doors
24.184
(1)
Aluminium windows and doors shall be designed and fabricated by
the Contractor in accordance with BS 4873 and as stated in Clauses
24.184(2) to (13) and 24.185.
(2)
Fixed windows and doors shall be capable of withstanding a wind
load calculated in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects
Hong Kong with a minimum of 3 kPa with a permissible maximum
deflection of less than 1/180th of the length of the particular member.
Mild steel cores, anchors, brackets and similar fittings shall be used as
stiffeners where necessary.
(3)
Sections shall be extruded aluminium alloy complying with BS
1470 and BS 1474, British alloy designation 6063. The sections shall
have a wall thickness of at least 1.6 mm and shall be dovetail grooved for a
weatherstrip.
(4)
Aluminium sections shall be:

(a)
Clear anodised in accordance with BS 1615, AA/20,

24.68
2006 Edition
(b)
(c)
Colour anodised in accordance with BS 3987, average 25 m

thick, or
Treated with a proprietary type of hardcoat anodic finish
approved by the Engineer with wearing qualities better than
those stated in Clause 24.184(4)(a) and (b).
(5)
Frames shall be mechanically jointed of mortice and tenon
construction to provide rigid and secure connections. Sash members
shall develop the full strength of other members using solid block angle
pieces and shall provide a neat weathertight joint with adequate drainage in
bottom members.
(6)
Galvanized steel fixing lugs shall be provided at centres not
exceeding 300 mm for outer frames of each unit. Lugs shall be fixed
with rag-bolts or with proprietary stud anchors or fixing bolts of a type
(7)
Galvanized steel water bars shall be provided for the complete
width of the window or door where the design requires.
(8)
Mullions, transoms and corner posts in composite units shall have
an additional 75 mm length at each end for building-in purposes.
Mullions and transoms exceeding 1.5 m in length shall be reinforced with
galvanized steel with extended ends for building-in purposes.
(9)
Composite units shall be assembled on Site using all necessary
bolts, screws and other fixings. Joints shall be sealed with a proprietary
type of sealant approved by the Engineer.
(10) Chloroprene rubber, plasticized PVC or nylon pile weatherstrips of
a type approved by the Engineer shall be securely fixed into the dovetail
groove in the window or door section to provide continuous contact
between each opening part and its fixed frame.
(11) Windows and doors shall be suitable for internal glazing with a
glazing system and aluminium beading of a type approved by the
Engineer. Beading shall either form an integral part of the frame or shall
be securely fixed to the frame.
(12) Aluminium alloy, stainless steel or nylon matching the surrounding
finish shall be used for exposed fixings including screws, nuts, bolts,
washers and rivets. Concealed fastening devices shall be galvanized or
cadmium plated steel.
(13) Window and door units and other associated materials shall be
wrapped in strong waterproof paper or polythene sheeting to protect
against damp and scratching before transportation from the factory. The
wrapping shall not be removed until installation starts.
(14) The galvanization of the steel, fixing lugs, steel water bars and
concealed fastening devices above shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461:
1999 or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Fittings and furniture
to aluminium windows
and doors
24.185
(1)
Fittings and furniture to aluminium windows and doors shall be of a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall comply with the
requirements stated in Clause 24.185(2) to (14).
(2)
Friction pivots and sliding stays shall be stainless steel capable of

24.69
2006 Edition
providing a maximum opening of 100 and with a minimum clearance of
100 mm between the frame and window for cleaning purposes.
(3)
Casement fasteners, locking handles, spring catches, casement
stays, brackets, slipbolts and similar fittings and furniture shall be either
diecast zinc alloy complying with BS 1004 suitably coloured to match the
anodised window or door metal or moulded stainless steel with satin
finish.
(4)
Locks shall be cadmium-plated steel with stainless steel or brass
parts.
(5)
Pull handles shall be anodized aluminium.
(6)
Rollers, guides and similar fittings shall be cadmium-plated steel
with nylon or brass rollers to suit the weight of the door or window and
shall be adjustable after installation.
(7)
Windows and doors which are to be hung to open shall be fitted
with fittings and furniture as stated in Clause 24.185(8) to (11).
(8)
Side and top hung windows shall be fitted with friction pivots,
sliding stays, casement fastener or pull handle, and locking handle.
Casement fasteners and locking handles shall be dual where required.
(9)
Sliding windows shall be fitted with rollers, guides and similar
fittings, pull handle and stops and sliding bolts or locking mechanism.
The window shall be constructed such that it cannot be lifted off its rollers
without the removal of a safety device.
(10) Side hung doors shall be fitted with floor springs and adjustable top
pivots, single or double action to stand open or not as stated in the
Contract, mortice dead lock, top and bottom flush lever bolts and push
plates and pull handles as required.
(11) Sliding doors shall be fitted with heavy-duty rollers, guides and
similar fittings, pull handle and stops, hook bolt locking latch and four
bolts.
(12) Flyscreens shall be fitted on the inside surface with frames of
extruded aluminium and plastic covered mosquito gauze of 7 x 7 mesh per
10 mm square. Screens shall be fixed to window frames by wing nuts.
The windows shall be fitted with locking handles and an opening and
closing mechanism comprising a cam handle and roto operator.
(13) All steel framework, cores, anchors and brackets shall be primed
with zinc chromate primer complying with Clause 24.130 and painted with
two coats of bituminous paint complying with Clause 24.134.
(14) Concealed aluminium or stainless steel surfaces that may come into
contact with wet mortar, cement, plaster or similar materials shall be
painted with one coat of bituminous paint complying with Clause 24.134.
Exposed aluminium or stainless steel surfaces shall be protected with a
strippable coating or masking tape that shall not be removed until
Roller shutters and
doors
24.186
The design of roller shutters and doors, including boxes, hoods, guides and
all other parts shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the
24.70
2006 Edition
requirements stated in the Contract.
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of metal
windows and doors
24.187
(1)
construction for metal windows and doors shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
(a)
Name and address of manufacturer,
(b)
Manufacturers literature, and
(c)
Tree sets of working drawings.
(2)
before fabrication of the window or door starts.
24.188
Samples of materials for metal windows and doors, including fittings and
furniture, shall be submitted to the Engineer at the same time as particulars
of the windows or doors are submitted. Details of the samples to be
provided shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
Instruction manuals
24.189
Two copies of instruction manuals shall be provided for motorised roller

shutters and doors. The manuals shall include detailed operating and
maintenance instructions, including wiring and schematic drawings, a
schedule of component parts and a priced list of recommended spares.
The manuals shall be provided at the same time as the particulars of the
roller shutters and doors are submitted.

of metal windows and
doors
24.190
(1)
Metal windows and doors shall be handled and stored in a manner
which will not result in damage or distortion. Opening lights shall be
kept closed.
(2)
Temporary steel clamps in steel windows and doors shall be left in
position until installation is complete. Wrapping to aluminium windows
and doors shall not be removed until installation starts.
24.71
2006 Edition
FIXING METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS

Fixing metal windows
and doors
24.191
(1)
Metal windows and doors which consist of composite units shall be
assembled using all necessary bolts, screws and other fixings. Joints shall
be sealed using polysulphide-based sealant.
(2)
Windows and doors shall be positioned plumb, level and square.
(3)
Pockets shall be formed in heads, jambs, cills and other parts of
structures to receive fixing lugs. The pockets shall be made good after
building in the lugs and screws to frames. Frames shall be screwed using
packing pieces where necessary.
(4)
Steel frames shall be bedded in mortar to form a waterproof seal.
(5)
Aluminium frames shall be bedded in a proprietary type of butyl
mastic bedding compound approved by the Engineer to form a waterproof
seal.
(6)
Joints around external edges of steel frames shall be raked out and
pointed with a proprietary type of oil based mastic sealant approved by the
Engineer to form a smooth, flat joint.
(7)
Joints around external edge of aluminium frames shall be raked out
and pointed with polysulphide-based sealant to form a smooth, flat joint.
(8)
Adjoining surfaces to joints shall be temporarily masked to prevent
contamination during pointing.
24.72
2006 Edition
PART 9: MASONRY
MATERIALS
Stone
24.192
Stone for masonry shall be local granite and shall be free from defects that
will adversely affect the strength or appearance of the masonry.
Mortar
24.193
Cement mortar for masonry shall be as stated in Clause 24.163.
Wall ties
24.194
Wall ties between masonry walls and concrete shall be galvanized mild
steel flats complying with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 or otherwise approved
by the Engineer. The ties shall be at least 40 mm wide, 3 mm thick and 150
mm long and shall be fanged at both ends.
Damp proof course
24.195
Damp proof course for masonry shall be as stated in Clause 24.161.
SUBMISSIONS
24.196
Samples of the following proposed materials for masonry shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source and type of each
material at least 14 days before the masonry work starts:
(a)
Each type of stone,
(b)
Wall ties, and
(c)
Damp proof course.
TRIAL PANELS
Trial panels
24.197
A trial panel shall be constructed for each type of masonry as stated in

Clauses 24.166 to 24.169 for brickwork and blockwork.

of stone
24.198
Stone for ashlar stone walling shall be transported with the minimum
amount of handling and shall be stacked in the vehicle using packing
pieces to prevent damage. The stone shall be stored in stacks on battens
and protected from exposure to rain.
RUBBLE STONE WALLING

Preparation of stone for
rubble stone walling
24.199
(1)
Stones for random rubble walling shall be irregular in shape and
roughly cut to between 75 mm and 300 mm high, at least 75 mm deep and
between 75 mm and 600 mm long on bed. The length or depth on bed of
each stone shall be greater than the height.
24.73
2006 Edition
(2)
Stones for squared rubble walling shall be trimmed roughly square
to between 75 mm and 300 mm high, varying in 75 mm stages. Each
stone shall be between 100 mm and 150 mm deep and between 100 mm
and 600 mm long on bed. The length or depth on bed of each stone shall
be greater than the height.
(3)
Stones for square coursed rubble walling shall be trimmed roughly
square as stated in Clause 24.199(2) to suit courses of regular height
varying from 150 mm to 250 mm.
Laying and jointing
rubble stone walling
24.200
(1)
Stones in rubble stone walling shall be laid dry on a full even bed of
cement mortar. All joints shall be filled and shall be between 5 mm and
15 mm wide.
(2)
Stones of random shapes and sizes in random rubble walling shall
be bonded together over each face of the wall. Stones shall be selected
and rough dressed to keep joint widths to a minimum. At least one
bonding stone of minimum size 450 mm x 150 mm shall be provided and
carried through the full thickness of the wall per square metre. Not more
than 3 stones shall be provided adjacent to a vertical joint.
(3)
Roughly squared stones of random sizes in square rubble walling
shall be bonded together with continuous straight horizontal joints. The
number of vertical joints shall be kept to a minimum.
(4)
Roughly squared stones in square coursed walling shall be laid as
stated in Clause 24.200(3) but brought up to courses at centres not
exceeding 750 mm to line up with quoin and jamb stones.
(5)
Squared rubble walling exceeding 300 mm thick and faced one side
shall be constructed in accordance with the following requirements:
(a)
Roughly squared stone at least 300 mm thick shall be provided

with a backing of random rubble.
(b)
At least two bonding stones per square metre shall be regularly

spaced and carried through the full thickness of the wall or at
least 450 mm into the backing, whichever is less.
(6)
Squared rubble walling exceeding 300 mm thick and faced both
sides shall be constructed in accordance with the following requirements:
Pointing rubble stone

walling
24.201
(a)
Roughly squared stone at least 150 mm thick shall be provided

with a core of random rubble.
(b)
Bonding stones shall be provided as stated in Clause 24.200(5)

but shall be carried through the full thickness of the wall or
450 mm into the core.
Joints in rubble stone walling shall be raked out to a depth of 15 mm as the

work proceeds. The joints shall be pointed in cement mortar on
completion with a flush, weathered or recessed joint as required.
24.74
2006 Edition
ASHLAR STONE WALLING

Preparation of stone
for ashlar stone
walling
24.202
The exposed faces and joint faces of each stone for ashlar stone walling
shall be dressed square and true, free from hollows or rough areas.
Exposed faces shall be finished to a finely squared dressed surface.
Stones shall be at least 300 mm high. Each stone shall be clearly marked
to indicate its position in the finished work.
Laying and jointing

ashlar stone walling
24.203
Stones in ashlar stone walling shall be laid on a full, even bed of mortar
consisting of cement and fine crushed stone in the proportions 1:3 by
volume. All joints shall be filled and shall be 5 mm wide. Stones shall
be laid to bond together throughout the wall, and to the backing, using
projecting bonding stones.
Pointing ashlar stone

walling
24.204
Joints in ashlar stone walling shall be raked to a depth of 15 mm as the

work proceeds and shall be pointed with a flush joint on completion using
bedding mortar.
PROTECTION OF MASONRY
Protection of masonry
24.205
Newly erected masonry shall be protected from exposure to conditions

which may adversely affect the masonry. Arrises, projections and similar
features shall be covered with protective sheeting lapped and securely held
in position. Facework shall be kept clean at all times.
WALL TIES FOR MASONRY

Wall ties for masonry
24.206
(1)
Wall ties in masonry which is to face an existing or newly
constructed wall shall be fixed at a rate of 5 per m2. Ties shall be fixed
100 mm into the wall and 75 mm into the masonry.
(2)
Wall ties shall be fixed between the ends of walls and concrete or
brickwork at centres of at least 450 mm vertically and shall project 250
mm into the masonry.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances
masonry
24.207
(1)
Rubble stone walling shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)

position.
(b)
(c)
24.75
2006 Edition
(2)
(d)

(e)
The walling shall be straight to within 25 mm in any 5 m

length.
(f)
The walling shall be vertical to within 20 mm in any 3 m

height.
Ashlar stone walling shall comply with the following requirements:

(a)

position.
(b)
(c)
(d)

(e)
The walling shall be straight to within 15 mm in any 5 m

length.
(f)
The walling shall be vertical to within 15 mm in any 3 m

height.
24.76
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 25
25.1
2006 Edition
25.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 25
GENERAL
25.01
(1)
The Contractor shall undertake environmental protection measures
to reduce the environmental impacts arising from execution of the Works.
In particular, he shall arrange his method of working to minimize the
effects on the air, noise, water quality as well as nuisance of waste within
and outside the Site, on transport routes and at the stockpiling, loading,
dredging and dumping areas.
(2)
The Contractor shall observe and comply with all the current
enactments, relevant environmental protection and pollution control
ordinances and regulations, and any additions or amendments thereto
coming into effect before completion of the Works. The Contractor shall
provide his staff and the Engineer on site at all times with on-line access
through the Internet to such ordinances and regulations. If on-line access
is not possible and when required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
maintain on site legal copies of the relevant ordinances and their
regulations, and provide one legal copy for the Engineer.
(3)
The Contractor shall design, construct, operate and maintain
pollution control measures to ensure compliance with the contract
provisions as well as the relevant ordinances and their regulations.
(4)
The Contractor shall cooperate with and assist the Environmental
Team in conducting compliance monitoring and audit on the environmental
aspects of the construction activities as described in Clauses 25.29 to 25.34
below.
(5)
Where the activities on Site are found not in compliance with the
requirements as specified or cause unacceptable environmental impacts, the
Contractor shall immediately carry out appropriate environmental
mitigation measures to rectify the situation to the Engineers satisfaction.
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

Water pollution control
- general requirements
25.02
(1)
The Contractor shall observe and comply with the Water Pollution
Control Ordinance and the Technical Memorandum on Standards for
Effluents Discharged into Drainage and Sewerage Systems, Inland and
Coastal Waters and any additions or amendments thereto coming into effect
before completion of the Works.
(2)
The Contractor shall carry out the Works in such a manner as to
minimise adverse impacts on the water quality during execution of the
Works. In particular he shall arrange his method of working to minimise
the adverse effects on the water quality within and outside the Site, on the
transport routes and at the stockpiling, loading, dredging and dumping
areas.
25.3
2006 Edition
(3)
The Contractor shall follow the practices and be responsible for the
design, construction, operation and maintenance of all the necessary
mitigation measures, as specified in the Professional Persons
Environmental Consultative Committee Practice Note (ProPECC PN) 1/94
Construction Site Drainage issued by the Director of Environmental
Protection, or any update or reissue of this document posted on the website
of Environmental Protection Department (http://www.epd.gov.hk) under
Resources and Publications\Publications\Guide Books & Codes of
Practice. The Contractor shall submit the design of the mitigation
measures to the Engineer for approval. The mitigation measures shall be
continuously reviewed and modified as necessary to cope with the
changing site conditions as the Works progress.
Amd 2/2007
Marine plant and

equipment
25.03
(1)
Two weeks before commencement of any marine works, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the proposed methods
of working and the marine plant and equipment to be used.
(2)
The marine plant and equipment to be used on the Works shall meet
the requirement in sub-clauses (1) and (3) of Clause 25.04 and shall be
operated accordingly to achieve the water quality requirements. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities to the Engineer for
inspecting or checking such plant and equipment and shall not use such
plant and equipment for execution of the Works without the agreement of
the Engineer. The Engineer may require the Contractor to carry out trials
of any plant and equipment to prove their suitability.
(3)
After commencement of the Works, if the plant and equipment or
working methods are, in the opinion of the Engineer, not in compliance
with the requirements of the Technical Memorandum on Effluent Standards
issued under the Water Pollution Control Ordinance, the Engineer may
notify the Contractor in writing, and the Contractor shall immediately
initiate remedial measures to halt deterioration. Where such remedial
measures include the use of additional or alternative plant and equipment,
such plant and equipment shall not be used on the Works until agreed by
the Engineer. Where remedial measures include maintenance or
modification of previously approved plant and equipment, such plant and
equipment shall not be used on the Works until the necessary maintenance
or modification is completed and the adequacy of the maintenance or
modification is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4)
The Contractor shall comply with the conditions of dumping permits
obtained from the Director of Environmental Protection. The permits
shall be prominently displayed in both Chinese and English languages on
site and also on the dredgers and barges.
Avoidance of pollution
during dredging,
transporting and
dumping of marine
mud
25.04
(1)
Pollution-avoidance measures shall include but not be limited to the
following:
(a)
All equipment shall be designed and maintained to minimise the

risk of silt and other contaminants being released into the water
column or deposited in locations other than designated location;
(b)
Mechanical grabs shall be designed and maintained to avoid

spillage and shall be sealed tightly while being lifted;
25.4
2006 Edition
(c)
Where trailing suction hopper dredgers for dredging of marine

mud are in use, overflow from the dredger and the operation of
lean mixture overboard systems shall not be permitted unless
expressly approved by the Engineer in consultation with the
Director of Environmental Protection;
(d)
Cutter heads of suction dredgers shall be suitable for the

material being excavated and be designed to minimize
overbreak and sedimentation around the cutter;
(e)
All vessels shall be sized so that adequate clearance is

maintained between vessels and the sea bed at all states of the
tide to ensure that undue turbidity is not generated by turbulence
from vessel movement or propeller wash;
(f)
All leaking pipes shall be repaired promptly and plant shall not
be operated with leaking pipes;
(g)
Before moving vessels that are used for transporting dredged

material, the excess material shall be cleaned from the decks and
exposed fittings of vessels. The excess material shall not be
dumped into the sea except at the approved locations;
(h)
Adequate freeboard shall be maintained on barges to ensure that

decks are not washed by wave action;
(i)
The Contractor shall monitor all vessels transporting material to

ensure that no dumping outside the approved location takes
place. The Contractor shall keep and produce logs and other
records to demonstrate compliance and that journey times are
consistent with designated locations and copies of such records
shall be submitted to the Engineer;
(j)
All bottom-dumping vessels shall be fitted with tight fitting

seals to their bottom openings to prevent leakage of material;
(k)
Loading of barges and hoppers shall be controlled to prevent

splashing of dredged material to the surrounding water, and
vessels shall not be filled with material to a such level that will
cause overflowing of material or polluted water during loading
or transportation; and
(l)
The Engineer may monitor any or all vessels transporting

material to check that no dumping outside the approved location
or loss of material during transportation takes place. The
Contractor shall provide all reasonable assistance to the
Engineer for this purpose.
(2)
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary
dumping permits. All fees in respect of applications for disposal permits
shall be borne by the Contractor. The dredged marine mud shall only be
disposed of at the disposal site or sites designated in the dumping permit.
25.5
2006 Edition
(3)
When dredging, transporting and disposing of contaminated marine
mud, the Contractor shall implement adequate measures for avoidance of
pollution, which shall include but not be limited to the following: (a)
Dredging of contaminated marine mud shall be undertaken with

a suitable grab dredger using closed watertight grab;
(b)
Contaminated marine mud shall be transported by split barge of

not less than 750 m3 capacity, well maintained and capable of
rapid opening and discharging at the disposal site;
(c)
The material shall be placed into the disposal pit by means of

bottom dumping;
(d)
Discharge from split barges shall take place within a radius of

100 metres of centre of the area allocated for the disposal of
contaminated marine mud;
(e)
Discharge shall be undertaken rapidly and the hoppers shall then

be closed immediately. Ensure that material adhering to the
sides of the hopper is not washed out of the hopper and the
hopper remains closed until the barge returns next to the
disposal site; and
(f)
The dumping vessel shall be anchored throughout the dumping

operation.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure that all marine mud is disposed of at the
approved locations. He shall be required to ensure accurate positioning of
vessels before the discharge, and submit proposals for accurate position
control at the disposal sites to the Engineer for approval before
commencing dredging and dumping.
(5) The Contractor shall ensure that all material unsuitable for reuse as
fill material is disposed of at the approved landfill or other designated
locations.
(6) The Contractor shall only employ vessels equipped with automatic
self-monitoring devices specified by the Director of Environmental
Protection for disposal operation. He shall co-operate with and facilitate
the Director of Environmental Protection in inspection of the device and
retrieval of the record stored in the device on a regular basis.
(7) The Contractor shall provide experienced full-time personnel on
board all dumping vessels to ensure that appropriate methods to minimize
pollution are implemented.
Protection of water
quality at water intakes
and storage
25.05
When dredging mud or placing fill in the vicinity of a water intake, the
Contractor shall protect the water intake by surrounding it with a suitable
silt curtain to prevent excessive suspended solids from entering the intake.
The silt curtain shall be designed to ensure that the concentration of
suspended solids entering the intake meets the intake user requirements.
25.6
2006 Edition
Discharge into sewers,

drains and water
bodies
25.06
(1) In accordance with the Water Pollution Control Ordinance (WPCO)

requirements, the Contractor shall apply for the WPCO licence before
discharging any effluent, including but not limited to any trade effluent or
foul or contaminated water or cooling or hot water, from the Site into any
public sewer, stormwater drain, channel, stream-course or sea. The
Contractor shall provide a copy of the application and licence to the
Engineer. The content of effluent to be discharged into the waters from
the Site shall strictly comply with the limits set in the WPCO and the
discharge licence.
(2) The discharge licence may include conditions to require the
Contractor to provide, operate and maintain at the Contractor's own
expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer suitable works for the treatment
and disposal of such trade effluent or foul or contaminated or cooling or hot
water. The design of such treatment works, if required, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval not less than one month before
commencement of the relevant works.
(3) If any toilet or shower facilities are erected, foul water effluent from
these facilities shall be discharged to a foul sewer either directly or
indirectly by means of pumping or other means approved by the Engineer.
Wastewater collected from a kitchen or canteen, including that from basins,
sinks and floor drains, shall be discharged into four sewers via grease traps
of adequate retention capacities as appropriate. If no sewer connection is
available, the Contractor shall arrange for a licensed sub-contractor to
collect the sewage generated from the Site or implement an on-site
packaged sewage treatment system approved by the Engineer.
Wastewater from
construction activities
25.07
(1) The following mitigation measures shall be carried out to mitigate

environmental impacts from wastewater due to construction activities:
(a)
Water used for water testing, boring, piling, drilling works,

concrete batching, washing of concrete trucks, and precast
concrete casting and the like shall be re-circulated and re-used
for such beneficial uses as dust suppression, wheel washing and
general cleaning. The discharge of wastewater shall be kept to
a minimum.
(b)
Online standby sump pumps of adequate capacity and with

automatic alternating devices shall be provided to prevent
overflow of wastewater from any water recycling system.
(c)
Wastewater from concrete batching, bored piling and precast

concrete casting activities shall be treated for pH adjustment and
silt removal before discharge.
(d)
Sand, silt or other materials present in the wash-water resulting

from wheel washing facilities shall be removed before discharge
of the wastewater. That section of access road between any
site exit and the public road shall be paved with concrete or
bituminous surfacing and provided with a suitable backfall to
prevent the site run-off from entering the public road.
(e)
Drainage of groundwater, including water pumped out of

trenches and excavations, shall only be discharged after removal
of silt.
25.7
2006 Edition
(f)
All fuel tanks and fuel storage areas shall be provided with locks
and sited on bunded sealed areas of a capacity equal to 110% of
the storage capacity of the largest tank.
(g)
Site compounds and plant/vehicle service areas shall be, unless

it is practically impossible, located within roofed areas. The
drainage in these areas shall be discharged to a proper
wastewater system (e.g. foul sewer, septic tank or storage tank)
via a properly maintained oil interceptor to prevent release of oil
into the surface water drainage system after accidental spillages.
The interceptor shall have a bypass to prevent flushing during
periods of heavy rain. Waste-oil shall be collected and stored for
recycling or disposal in accordance with the Waste Disposal
Ordinance.
(2) The drainage system for stormwater run-off shall be designed as

segregated from the system for wastewater discharge arising from
construction activities, unless it is practically impossible to reduce the risk
of cross contamination.
Surface runoff
25.08
(1) Surface run-off from the Site shall be discharged into stormwater
drains or natural streams via adequately designed silt-removal facilities
such as sand traps, silt traps, silt retention pond, sediment basins and
mechanical water treatment plant. Channels or earth bunds or sand bag
barriers shall be provided on the Site to properly direct stormwater to such
silt-removal facilities. Perimeter channels at the Site boundaries shall be
provided where necessary to intercept storm run-off from outside the Site
so that it will not wash across the Site. Catchpits and perimeter channels
shall be constructed in advance of site formation works and earthworks.
Manholes shall be adequately covered or temporarily sealed.
(2) Silt-removal facilities shall be designed with adequate capacity and
constructed within the surface-water drainage systems at appropriate
locations.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for adequately maintaining any
existing Site drainage system at all times including removal of solids from
sand traps, manholes and stream beds. The Contractor shall carry out
dredging of water-courses after informing the Engineer and all work in
natural streams/rivers shall follow the requirements in Clause 25.09.
(4) Silt-removal facilities, channels and manholes shall be maintained
and the deposited silt and grit shall be removed regularly, and after each
rainstorm, to ensure that these facilities are functioning properly at all
times. Disposal of material shall be carried out properly subject to the
knowledge and approval of the Engineer. These facilities shall be
regularly inspected as required by the Engineer.
(5) Temporary access roads shall be protected with crushed stone or
gravel, particularly during the rainy seasons. Intercepting channels shall
be provided to prevent storm runoff from washing across exposed soil
surfaces.
25.8
2006 Edition
(6) The Contractor shall pay particular attention to prevention of erosion
during earthwork operations, including but not limited to the following
works:
(a)
Construction works shall be programmed to minimize soil

excavation in the rainy seasons as far as possible.
(b) Earthwork surfaces, whether temporary or final, shall be

adequately compacted and subsequent permanent works shall be
performed immediately, whenever possible, to prevent erosion
and silty runoff. Temporary protection of such surfaces with
hydroseeding or hard cover (e.g. shotcrete) shall be carried out
as required by the Engineer if they have to remain exposed for
more than 10 calendar days.
(c)
Arrangements shall always be in place to ensure that adequate

surface protection measures be safely carried out well before the
arrival of a rainstorm.
(7) Exposed stockpiles of construction materials on the Site such as

aggregates, sand or fill material shall be protected from erosion during
rainstorms (e.g. by means of covering them with tarpaulin or similar fabric)
to prevent the stockpiled materials from being washed away into any
drainage system. In addition, the Engineer may require a separate run-off
collection and treatment system for large stockpiles.
Protection of natural
streams/rivers
25.09
(1) For the purpose of the Contract, a natural stream/river shall refer to a
natural channel including the natural banks and riparian zones, with natural
water fed from upper terrains with water flowing throughout the year or
intermittent water-flow only during wet seasons, and any other
water-carrying channels, ponds or the like and the extents are as defined on
the Drawings. The Contractor shall keep on the Site records of
photographs of the existing natural streams and rivers within the Site, and
provide the Engineer with a copy of the same records before any works
commence in or near natural streams/rivers.
(2) Natural streams/rivers on the Site where work is not being carried out
shall be maintained in clean and tidy conditions and shall be free of any
floating debris. Natural streams/rivers shall not be used to store materials or
to park construction plant or other vehicles.
(3) The natural bottom and existing flow in the river shall be maintained
as far as possible to avoid disturbance to the river habitats. Tracked
vehicles shall not use the river-bed/stream-bed unless protection against
damage is provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Temporary river
crossings should be supported on stilts or pontoons or the like above the
riverbed. Temporary river crossings and temporary access to the works
site shall be carefully planned and located to minimize disturbance to the
substrates of streams/rivers and riparian vegetations caused by the
construction plant. Temporary river crossings and temporary access shall
not be constructed without the prior consent in writing from the Engineer.
(4) Where specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall use smaller
construction plant of a type approved by the Engineer for works in or near
natural streams and rivers to reduce disturbance to the stream-bed/river-bed
where aquatic inhabitants are located.
25.9
2006 Edition
(5) Excavated or backfilling materials shall not be stored adjacent to

natural streams/rivers unless permitted by the Engineer.
(6) No excavated material, silt, debris, rubbish, cement slurry or such
construction waste shall be deposited into natural streams/rivers. The
Contractor shall submit preventive measures to prevent soil/ mud from
slipping into the streams/rivers to the Engineer for agreement before any
works commence in or near natural streams/rivers. Should such deposits
be found, the Contractor shall remove them, and restore the affected natural
streams/rivers to their original state to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If
the works site is inside or in the proximity of natural rivers/streams, the
Contractor shall temporarily isolate the construction works with proper
methods, such as by placing of sandbags or silt curtains with lead edge at
bottom and properly supported props, to prevent adverse impacts on the
water quality.
(7) Without the prior consent of the Engineer, the Contractor shall not
excavate boulders, gravel or sand or other substrata materials from the
natural streams/rivers, whether these materials are for the purpose of
temporary, long-term or off-site use as construction material, or for any
other purposes.
NOISE CONTROL
Noise control - general
requirements
25.10
(1) The Contractor shall observe and comply with the Summary Offences
Ordinance and the Noise Control Ordinance including their subsidiary
regulations and technical memoranda and any additions or amendments
thereto coming into effect before completion of the Works.
(2) The
Environmental
Protection
Department
(EPD)
(http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/) has published a category of Quality
Powered Mechanical Equipment (QPME) on the website:
http://www.epd.gov.hk/cgi-bin/npg/qpme/list.pl?lang_eng
The categories of the QPME include, but are not limited to, those in
the website. A list of the plant models under the QPME is
also given by the EPD on the website: http://www.epd.gov.hk/cgi-bin/npg/qpme/search_gen.pl?lang=eng&

st=sim&smtype=1
The above websites of the QPME is subject to change and hence the
homepage of EPD should be referred to when warranted.
(3) Where a QPME is used, the plant shall be registered with EPD, and
the label issued by EPD from such registration shall be affixed on the
plant at all times and kept legible. The Engineer shall deem a construction
plant or equipment as non-compliant for the purpose of this sub-clause if
it does not have its registration label so affixed.
(4) To facilitate monitoring and control, the Contractor shall establish a
register to record all QPME referred to in sub-clause (2) used on the Site.
25.10
2006 Edition
(5) The Contractor shall devise, arrange methods of working and carry
out the Works in such a manner so as to minimize noise impacts on the
surrounding environment, and shall provide experienced personnel with
suitable training to ensure that these methods are implemented.
(6) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers prior approval, at least
2 weeks before commencement of any work, method statements, the plant
and equipment to be used, and the sound-reducing measures to be adopted
on the Site for the work. Noise reduction methods shall include but not be
limited to scheduling of the work, locating of facilities, selection of plant
and equipment and use of purpose-built acoustic panels and enclosures.
The Contractors submission shall also include a statement explaining why
his proposed methods of working, plant and equipment are able to
minimize the noise impacts arising from the work. The method
statements shall be updated and resubmitted for agreement from time to
time as required by the Engineer.
(7) In considering the submissions made under sub-clause (6) above, the
Engineer may require the Contractor to demonstrate the proposed methods
of working, plant equipment and sound-reducing measures to be used on
the Site in trials or make them available for inspection, to ensure that they
are suitable for execution of the Works.
Allowable noise limits
25.11
(1) For carrying out any construction work other than percussive piling
during the time period from 0700 to 1900 hours on any day not being a
general holiday (including Sundays), the Contractor shall comply with the
following requirements
(a)
The noise level at 1m from the most affected external facade of

the nearby noise sensitive receivers from the construction works
alone during any 30-minute period shall not exceed an
equivalent sound level (Leq) of 75 dB(A). All domestic
premises, hotels, hostel, temporary housing accommodation,
hospital, medical clinic, educational institution, place of public
worship, library, court of law, performing arts centre or office
building shall be considered as noise sensitive receivers.
(b)
In addition to the requirement in sub-clause (1)(a), the noise

level at 1m from the most affected external facade of the nearby
schools from the construction works alone during any 30-minute
period shall not exceed an equivalent sound level (Leq) of 70
dB(A). The allowable equivalent sound level is reduced to 65
dB(A) during school examination periods. The Contractor shall
liaise with the schools and/or the Examination Authority to
ascertain the exact dates and times of all examination periods
during the course of the Contract.
(c)
If the limits stated in the above sub-clauses (1)(a) and (1)(b) are
exceeded, the construction shall stop and shall not re-commence
until appropriate measures acceptable to the Engineer that are
necessary for compliance have been implemented.
25.11
2006 Edition
(2) Notwithstanding the requirements and limitations set out in
sub-clause (1) above and subject to the Contractors compliance with
sub-clauses (2) to (5) of Clause 25.10 above, the Engineer may, upon
application in writing by the Contractor, allow the use of equipment and
carrying out of any construction activities for any duration, provided that he
is satisfied with the application and in his opinion, such application is
considered to be of absolute necessity and adequate noise insulation has
been provided to the noise sensitive receivers affected, or is of emergency
nature, and is not in contravention with the Noise Control Ordinance in any
respect.
Noise mitigation
measures
25.12
(1) All hoods, cover panels and inspection hatches of powered

mechanical plant such as generators, air compressors etc. shall be closed
during operation.
(2)
Diesel hammer shall not be used for piling works.
(3) Blasting shall not be carried out during the period specified in the
blasting clauses under Section 6 to avoid noise impact at sensitive hours.
(4) The Contractor shall use non-percussive equipment such as hydraulic
crusher, sawing, coring machines, etc. for demolition and concrete-breaking
work. In circumstances permitted by the Engineer, the Contractor can use
percussive equipment for demolition and concrete-breaking work.
Where percussive breakers are used, the Contractor shall enclose/wrap the
breaker tip of any percussion breaker used with sound absorbing material to
reduce the noise. This requirement may be exempted for works under
emergency, or with prior agreement from the Engineer that the provision of
such is not necessary. Mufflers or silencers, and damping layer with steel
collars shall be fitted to hand-held pneumatic breakers.
(5) The Contractor shall provide damping materials inside and outside
refuse chutes during breaking construction.
Construction Noise
Permits
25.13
The Contractor shall, when necessary, apply for a Construction Noise

Permit in accordance with the Noise Control (General) Regulations before
commencing the relevant part(s) of the works, display the Permit as
required and provide a copy to the Engineer. Construction activities and
noise shall not deviate from or exceed the terms and conditions defined in
the Construction Noise Permits.
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

Air pollution control general requirements
25.14
(1) The Contractor shall observe and comply with the Air Pollution
Control Ordinance and its subsidiary regulations, particularly the Air
Pollution Control (Open Burning) Regulation and Air Pollution Control
(Construction Dust) Regulation and Air Pollution Control (Smoke)
Regulation, and any additions or amendments thereto coming into effect
before completion of the Works.
(2) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineers prior approval, at least
2 weeks before commencement of any work, method statements identifying
operations and plant likely to cause air pollution or dust emissions from the
Site, together with measures to be implemented to mitigate and control
such pollution and emissions.
25.12
2006 Edition
(3) In considering the submissions made under sub-clause (2) above, the
Engineer may require the methods of working, plant, equipment and air
pollution control system to be used on the site to be demonstrated or made
available for inspection to ensure that they are suitable for the project.
(4) If during the course of construction, the equipment or work methods
submitted in sub-clause (2) above are in the opinion of the Engineer not
effective in controlling air quality impacts to meet the Contract
requirements, the Contractor shall update and resubmit the proposals for
agreement promptly.
(5) The Contractor shall undertake at all times to prevent dust nuisance
and smoke as a result of his activities.
Dust suppression
25.15
(1) The Contractor shall devise, arrange methods of working and carrying
out the works in such a manner as to minimize dust impact on the
surrounding environment, and shall provide experienced personnel with
suitable training to ensure that these methods are implemented.
(2) Material storage and handling areas shall be located on a hard-core
surface or the like to facilitate cleaning and minimise dust generation.
Screens, dust-sheets, tarpaulins or other methods agreed by the Engineer
shall be used to prevent generation of dust.
(3) In the process of material handling, any material that has the potential
to create dust shall be treated with water or sprayed with a wetting agent
unless this would have a detrimental affect on the material.
(4) All conveyors carrying materials that have the potential to create dust
shall be totally enclosed and fitted with belt cleaners. Conveyor transfer
points and hopper discharge areas shall be housed in three-sided roofed
enclosures with a flexible curtain on the fourth side to minimize emission
dust. Exhaust ventilation shall be provided for this enclosure and vented
to a fabric filter system.
(5) Cement and other fine-graded materials delivered in bulk shall be
stored in closed silos fitted with high-level alarm indicator. The high-level
alarm indicators shall be interlocked with the filling line so that in the event
of the hopper approaching an overfull condition, an audible alarm will
operate, and the pneumatic line to the filling tanker will close
automatically. All air vents on cement silos shall be fitted with suitable
fabric filters provided with either shaking or pulse-air cleaning
mechanisms. The filter must be thoroughly cleaned after cement is blown
into the silo to ensure adequate dust collection capacity for subsequent
loads.
(6) The Contractor shall restrict the speed of all vehicles moving within
the Site to minimize fugitive dust emission. Haulage and delivery
vehicles shall be confined to designated roadways inside the Site.
Unpaved roads shall be regularly compacted and the road surface shall be
kept clear of loose material. The Contractor shall ensure that areas within
the Site where there is regular traffic of vehicles are paved with either
concrete or bituminous material and kept clear of any loose surface
material.
25.13
2006 Edition
(7) The Contractor shall undertake regular cleaning and watering of the
Site, including access roads, construction areas and material stockpiles,
after starting work each day to minimize fugitive dust emission as follows:
(a)
The frequencies, extent and amount of watering shall be

adequate for the respective areas of the Site during the
operational day to attain the invisible dust emission level.
(b)
The Contractor shall ensure that there is adequate water

supply/storage for dust suppression at all times.
Amd 2/2007
(c)
The Contractor shall, from commencement to completion of the

Contract, ensure that the watering facilities are available on the
Site in good working conditions at all times.
(d)
The Contractor shall ensure that the watering facilities are

properly maintained and operating efficiently at all times and
replacement facilities are deployed in full operating conditions
immediately in the event of down time owing to mechanical
repairs or any other reasons.
(8) Earth, rock or debris including any deposits arising from the
movement of plant or vehicles shall not be deposited on public roads or
private rights of way as a result of the Contractor's activities.
Wheel-washing and vehicle-cleaning facilities shall be provided as
specified in Clause 25.26(4). Cement and concrete trucks in particular
shall be thoroughly cleaned before leaving the site.
(9) Any vehicle with an open load compartment used for transferring
dusty materials off site shall have properly fitted side-boards and
tail-boards. Dusty materials shall not be loaded to a level higher than the
side-boards and tail-boards, and shall be covered with a suitable tarpaulin
(or any other impervious covering material approved by the Engineer) in
good conditions before leaving the Site. The tarpaulin shall be properly
secured and extended at least 300 mm over the edges of the side-board and
tail boards and be properly secured and maintained throughout the journey
to the off-loading destination. For the purpose of this sub-clause, dusty
materials include cement, earth, pulverized fuel ash, excavated and
crushed rock, aggregates, silt, stone fines, sand, debris, saw dust and
wooden chips, etc.
(10) Earth-moving operations shall be carefully controlled with enhanced
dust-suppression measures when winds are strong and particularly blowing
towards the adjacent sensitive receivers. Sheltered areas of the Site shall
be used for dusty operations, especially during windy periods.
(11) The areas with earthwork activities, including the final compaction
activities, shall be completed as quickly as possible and in compliance with
good practices, to limit creation of wind-blown dust.
(12) The location of dust-producing plant or facilities, either fixed or
temporary, shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
(13) For activities that are likely to generate a substantial amount of dust
and where there are no effective measures or it is not possible to adequately
control the dust level, vacuum cleaners should be used where practicable to
suppress such dust.
25.14
2006 Edition
Smoke and exhaust

control
25.16
(1) The Contractor shall not light bonfires on the Site for burning of
debris or other materials.
(2) Use Ultra-low-sulphur diesel (ULSD) (defined as diesel fuel
containing not more than 0.005% by weight of sulphur) for all
diesel-operated plant and equipment on the Site. The Contractor shall
demonstrate his compliance by maintaining a summary record of all the
delivery notes of ULSD delivered to the Site, including those ordered by
his sub-contractors, together with the details of replenishment of such fuel
by the individual plant and equipment on the Site. The record shall be
supported by the original receipts of delivery notes from the oil companies.
A proforma of the summary record is attached at Appendix 25.1.
Prior consent for

pollutant emitting
equipment
25.17
The Contractor shall not, upon the Site or any part thereof, install or use
any machinery, furnace boiler or other equipment, or use any fuel that may
result in the discharge or emission of any pollutant or any noxious, harmful
or corrosive matter, whether it be in the form of gas, smoke, liquid, solid or
otherwise, without the prior written consent of the Engineer in consultation
with the Director of Environmental Protection.
Odour Mitigation
25.18
(1) The Contractor shall take necessary measures, including but not
limited to masking sprays and suitable covering, to minimize odour
problems arising from the construction activities and the temporary
stockpile of odorous material.
(2) Temporary stockpiling of odorous material and the mitigation
measures shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer. Approved
odorous stockpiles shall be placed as far away from air sensitive receivers
as possible.
Hoardings adjoining
public areas
25.19
(1) In addition to the fences for security and safety required in other parts
of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide and remove upon completion
of the Contract, hoarding of height not less than 2.4m from ground level
along the entire length of the portion of the site boundary which adjoins a
road, street, footway, cycle track, service lane or other area accessible to the
public, except at site entrances and/or exits or for road opening or
resurfacing work, before any works commence in the vicinity.
(2) Where the work is carried out adjacent to a public premise not
screened off by the hoarding pursuant to sub-clause (1), the Contractor shall
provide a screen, with dimensions and details agreed by the Engineer, to
shield the public from the dust or exhaust fume generated by the plant or
equipment, except for works under emergency, or with prior agreement of
the Engineer that the provision of such is not necessary.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Waste management general requirements
25.20
(1) The Contractor shall observe and comply with the Waste Disposal
Ordinance and its subsidiary regulations and any additions or amendments
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for the control of waste within
the Site, removal of the waste material arising from the Site and
implementation of any mitigation measures to minimize waste or reduce
25.15
2006 Edition
Measures to
reduce/minimize
generation of C&D
materials
25.21
problems arising from the waste produced on the Site.

(1) The Contractor shall identify and list out the work processes or
activities that will generate Construction and Demolition (C&D) materials
during construction activities, and the proposed measures to
reduce/minimize such generation in particular metallic waste, timber,
paper/cardboard packaging and chemical waste. The Contractor shall
submit the list of work processes/activities and the proposed measures to
the Engineer for approval within 45 days of the date of the Employers
letter of acceptance of the Tender. The submission should also include the
Contractors proposed organizational structure and lines of responsibilities
for implementation of the waste management measures on the Site.
(2) The proposed measures shall include proper planning of works, good
site management, minimizing over-ordering, avoiding cross contamination
to reusable and/or recyclable materials collected, optimizing the use of
metal formwork or other work processes to reduce or minimize the use of
timber in temporary works construction, maximizing the reuse of excavated
inert C&D materials within the Site, etc.
Reduced use of timber

in temporary works
25.22
(1) The Contractor shall not use tropical hardwood for formwork,
falsework and shoring for trenches and pits. Alternative materials to
tropical hardwood shall be used for such works.
(2) The Contractor shall avoid, reduce or minimize the use of any timber
in temporary works construction as far as possible. Where the Contractor
has to use timber for temporary works construction for one process/activity
with an estimated quantity exceeding 5m3, he shall submit a method
statement to the Engineers Representative for agreement before
commencement of the works. The method statement should include the
justifications for and the measures taken to minimize the use of timber in
the temporary works.
Works involving
demolition
25.23
(1)
For works involving demolition, the Contractor shall submit a
method statement for the works to the Engineer for approval before
commencing demolition on the Site. The Contractor shall include in the
method statement the sequence of demolition and the works programme to
facilitate effective recovery of reusable and/or recyclable portions of the
demolition materials at the earliest stage, so as to minimize the need for
subsequent sorting. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to
materials that will cause contamination or ill-health to workers.
Demolition materials shall be separated into the following categories:
(i)
Broken concrete
(ii) Other inert materials (i.e. blockwork, brickwork, etc.)

(iii) Metals (e.g. reinforcement bars, metal from mechanical and
electrical fittings, and other building services fittings)
(iv) General refuse
Sorting of C&D
materials
25.24
(1) All C&D materials (which mean both the inert and non-inert materials
generated from construction and demolition activities) arising from or in
connection with the Works shall be sorted on site to recover the inert
portion of these materials, and reusable and/or recyclable materials before
disposal of the waste portion off site. The inert portion of the C&D
materials includes soil, building debris, broken rock, concrete, etc. and
25.16
2006 Edition
the non-inert portion comprises timber, paper, plastics, general refuse, etc.
(2) The Contractor shall devise a system for on-site sorting of C&D
materials. The system shall include the identification of the source of
generation, estimated quantity, arrangement for on-site sorting and/or
collection, temporary storage areas, frequency of collection by recycling
contractors or frequency of removal off the Site, etc. The Contractor
shall submit details of the proposed system for sorting of C&D materials to
the Engineer for approval within 45 days of the date of the Employers
letter of acceptance of the Tender.
(3) The Contractor shall ensure that different types of C&D materials are
sorted on site and stored in different containers, skips or stockpiles to
facilitate reuse/recycling and disposal at different outlets as appropriate.
(4) The Contractor shall identify the inert portion of C&D materials that
are suitable for recycling into aggregates, in particular hard rock and broken
concrete generated from demolition or road improvement works, and
recover the materials for delivery to recycling facilities or a location as
notified by the Engineer. All inert C&D materials shall also be broken
down according to the Dumping Licence conditions before disposal.
(5) For other C&D materials, the Contractor shall be required to check
and ensure that the general refuse, as far as reasonably practicable, contains
no observable inert or reusable/recyclable C&D materials (e.g. metal, and
paper/cardboard packaging) before disposal to landfills. If it is found that
the Contractor cannot meet this requirement, the Engineer shall request the
Contractor to review the system for retrieval of reusable or recyclable
materials that are observed. In addition, sorted inert C&D materials for
disposal to public filling outlets shall contain no observable non-inert
materials, such as general refuse, timber etc.
(6) Equipment and material packaging (i.e. paper and cardboard) shall be
recovered, properly stockpiled in a dry and covered condition to prevent
cross-contamination by other C&D materials before disposal by recycling
sub-contractors. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to avoiding
cross-contamination in the course of collecting paper for recycling.
(7) The Contractor shall identify and provide sufficient space for
temporary storage of C&D materials to facilitate collection and/or sorting
on the Site. The space provided shall be commensurate with the
estimated quantity for each type of C&D materials generated from the
Site.
(8) Except for those inert C&D materials to be reused on the Site, the
Contractor shall remove all other C&D materials off the Site as soon as
practicable in order to optimize the use of the on-site storage space.
(9) The Contractor shall make arrangements with the potential recycling
contractors to facilitate the collection of recyclable materials sorted from
the Site with reasonable care.
(10) The Contractor shall establish a system for proper handling and
storage of chemical wastes generated from the Site, and arrange
collection and disposal of such chemical wastes by specialist contractors.
The Contractor shall record the details about the nature of the chemical
wastes, method of storage (e.g. type, size and materials of the container),
the collection and disposal arrangements, etc.
25.17
2006 Edition
(11) The Contractor shall record the quantities of C&D materials

generated using the table in Appendix 25.2, and submit the table at
quarterly intervals to the Engineer within two weeks of the end of each
February, May, August and November, until completion of the Works.
Trip ticket system
25.25
(1) The Contractor shall implement a Trip Ticket System (TTS) for
removal of C&D materials from the Site to the designated disposal ground.
The inert portion of the C&D materials comprising soil, broken rock and
concrete, etc. shall be disposed of at the designated public filling facilities
specified in the Contract or other disposal outlets as directed by the
Engineer. The non-inert portion of the C&D materials that are not
recyclable shall be disposed of at landfills specified in the Contract.
(2) In order to make use of C&D materials generated from the Site, the
Contractor shall make his best endeavour to identify other construction
projects to use these materials. Where the Contractor has identified a
project that can be used as an alternative disposal ground, he shall obtain
the written approval of the Engineer, who will process the Contractors
request expeditiously. In support of the request for such approval, the
Contractor shall provide relevant information as follows:
(a)
He shall submit a detailed description of the alternative disposal

ground, including location, lot number (where appropriate) and
location plan;
(b)
Where the alternative disposal ground is a private construction

project, he shall submit a letter from the Authorised Person of
the development (as defined under the Buildings Ordinance) to
confirm that:
(i)
The C&D materials for use in the development is

acceptable;
(ii) The use of land so formed by the C&D materials is in

conformity with the statutory town plan/lease conditions;
(iii) The Engineers staff are allowed to enter the alternative
ground to conduct inspections where necessary; and
(iv) The estimated quantity and type of C&D materials to be
used in the construction works and the approximate
delivery programme, together with the name, post and
specimen signature of the competent person to sign the
DDF stipulated in sub-clause 25.25(5)(a)(ii) below.
(c)
Where the alternative disposal ground is a private land but not a

construction site, he shall submit a letter from the relevant
authorities, such as the Lands Department and Planning
Department, to confirm the suitability of the alternative disposal
ground in receiving the proposed amount of C&D materials for
use, and a written consent from the landowner.
(d) Where the alternative disposal ground is a government

construction project, submit written consent from the project
office of the alternative disposal ground to use the C&D materials
generated from the Site, and to confirm the estimated quantity
and type of C&D materials required and the approximate delivery
25.18
2006 Edition
(e)
programme.
A system for transmitting disposal records from the alternative
disposal ground to the Engineers Representative (e.g. by
adopting the TTS or alike).
(3)
Illegal dumping of C&D materials generated from the Site, or
disposal of the C&D materials to a piece of private agricultural land
without the Engineers prior approval, constitutes a major improper
disposal (as defined in sub-clause 25.25(16)) for the purposes of assessing
the performance of the Contractor and may be subject to relevant regulating
action.
(4) The Contractor is not entitled to any compensation for any additional
costs and time incurred by processing his request for the Engineer to
approve the alternative disposal ground.
(5) The Contractor shall prepare a Site Management Plan for
implementation of the TTS for the whole Contract. The Contractor shall
submit, within 45 days of the date of the Employers letter of acceptance of
the Tender, the Site Management Plan to the Engineer for approval. If the
Engineer is of the opinion that the Site Management Plan does not meet the
requirements of this clause, he shall request the Contractor to revise the
Plan by notice in writing. The Contractor shall then revise the Plan and
resubmit it within 7 days of the date of the notice. The Contractor shall
review the Site Management Plan on a monthly basis. The updated
section of the Plan (if any) should be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The Plan shall include the following details:
(a)
Site organization and staff duties

A site organizational chart showing the manpower resources and
duties of each staff for implementation of the TTS. The
Contractor shall:
(i)
Appoint a senior staff member (with at least two years

experience in site management) fully responsible for
implementing and overseeing the operation of the TTS;
and
(ii) Appoint experienced person(s) to man each exit from the

Site for the purpose of ensuring that every truck carrying
C&D materials leaving the Site bears a duly completed,
signed and stamped Disposal Delivery Form (DDF). A
sample of the DDF is given at Appendix 25.3
(b) The Contractor shall prepare a monthly programme for disposal
of C&D materials off the Site, and indicate the estimated
quantities, types of the C&D materials and corresponding
disposal grounds. The Contractor shall update the programme
on a monthly basis and submit it to the Engineer for information
by 15th day of each month, or a later date as agreed by the
Engineer.
(c)
The Contractor shall establish site procedures to ensure that each

truck-load of C&D materials leaving the Site will bear a duly
completed DDF.
The Contractor shall also establish a
mechanism to ensure timely retrieval of the DDF and/or receipt
25.19
2006 Edition
from the disposal grounds where irregularities are observed.
(d) The Contractor shall establish a surveillance system within the
Site and at any alternative disposal grounds to check that the
disposal activities comply with the requirements as set out in the
Contract.
(e)
The Contractor shall maintain a comprehensive register of the

DDF issued, and make it available for inspection by the
Engineers Representative upon request.
(f)
Where trucks need to exit and re-enter the Site for delivery of
C&D materials generated by the Site, the Contractor shall devise
control measures to ensure that the C&D materials are not
disposed of outside the Site in breach of the Contract.
(6) Recyclable materials such as metal, paper, plastics and milled

bituminous materials etc., which have been sorted on the Site for the
purposes of recycling those materials, shall not be considered as C&D
materials for the purposes of the Contract. For such sorted recyclable
materials, the Contractor shall devise appropriate control measures to
ensure that the materials are delivered to a proper recycling outlet for
processing. The Contractor shall highlight such control measures in the
site management plan or the environmental management plan pursuant to
the appropriate technical circulars (works) issued by the Environment,
Transport and Works Bureau (such as ETWB TCW No. 19/2005 and/or
later update/amendments).
(7) The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for the site
management plan before disposing any C&D materials from the Site.
(8) The Contractor shall write to all truck drivers whom he or his
subcontractor(s) has engaged for removal of C&D materials from the Site
and draw their attention to the following particular points:
(a)
Each truck carrying C&D materials leaving the Site for a

disposal ground must bear a duly completed and stamped DDF,
irrespective of the location and nature of the disposal ground;
(b) The C&D materials must be disposed of at the disposal grounds

as stipulated in the DDF; and
(c)
What constitutes an improper disposal (as defined in sub-clauses

25.25(15) & 25.25(16)) and that the Public Fill Committee
(PFC) will consider revoking the Dumping Licence from the
holder of the offending trucks.
(d)
Truck drivers must bear a valid Dumping Licence that he can

apply from the Civil Engineering and Development Department
(CEDD).
(9) The procedures for implementation of the TTS are as follows:

(a)
The Engineers Representative will prepare and hand the

DDF to the Contractor on the day of disposal.
(b)
For each truck-load of C&D materials leaving the Site, the

Contractors truck driver must bear a duly completed, signed
and stamped DDF.
25.20
2006 Edition
(c)
The truck shall proceed to the disposal ground as stipulated in

the DDF. Where the disposal ground is a government
disposal facility, the Contractors truck driver shall present the
DDF to the facility operator. If the C&D materials accord
with the acceptance criteria, disposal of the materials will be
permitted and the facility operator will give the Contractors
truck driver a transaction receipt and stamp the DDF.
(d) The Contractor shall maintain a daily record of disposal of C&D

materials from the Site including details of the C&D materials,
the truck number, departure time, etc, using the Daily Record
Summary (DRS), a sample of which is given in Appendix 25.4.
(e)
The Contractor shall submit the duly completed Part 1 of the

DRS form promptly to the Engineers Representative by 1:00
pm of the working day following the date of disposal.
(f)
For disposal at government disposal facilities, the Contractor

shall check the information recorded in the DRS against
available information including his own records and data from
the Civil Engineering and Development Departments website
and then complete Part 2 of the DRS form for submission to the
Engineers Representative within 3 working days after the date
of disposal.
(g)
Where an irregularity is observed or where requested by the

Engineers Representative under special circumstances (e.g. a
DDF has been issued but there is no disposal record at the
designated disposal facilities), the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineers Representative not more than 5 working days after
the recorded date of disposal the supporting evidence such as
duly stamped DDF and/or the transaction receipt (where
relevant) to confirm proper completion of the delivery trips in
question, or not more than 2 working days after the Engineers
Representative has requested for such evidence, whichever is
later. A fax copy of the DDF and transaction receipt is
acceptable, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(10) Where the disposal ground is proposed by the Contractor and has
been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall ensure that the DDF is
signed off by a competent person as agreed by the Engineer at the disposal
ground to confirm completion of each trip. The Contractor shall also
maintain a daily record with details of each disposal trip from the Site to the
disposal ground.
(11) The following items shall be included in the agenda for discussion at
every Site Safety and Environmental Management Committee Meeting, or
other established channels for performance monitoring as agreed by the
Engineers Representative:
(a)
Review the Site Management Plan and implementation of the

TTS, and identify areas for improvement;
(b) Review incidents of non-compliance and discuss the necessary

follow-up actions; and
(c)
Monitor the follow-up action on defects and deficiencies

identified.
25.21
2006 Edition
(12) Where C&D materials from the Site have been dumped at a place
other than that designated under the Contract or approved by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall at his own cost undertake the following remedial
actions:
(a)
Remove the dumped C&D materials from the unauthorised

disposal ground;
(b) Reinstate the unauthorized disposal ground to the condition

before dumping of the C&D materials; and
(c)
Remove the C&D materials to the disposal ground as designated

under the Contract or approved by the Engineer to his
satisfaction.
(13) Where the unauthorised disposal ground is a private property, the

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the landowners consent
before removal of the dumped C&D materials.
(14) Should the Contractor fail to remove the C&D materials from the
unauthorised disposal ground or fail to reinstate the unauthorized disposal
ground as set out in sub-clause 25.25(12) above, the Employer may in
accordance with Clause 82 of General Conditions of Contract instruct
another contractor to perform the work and the Employer shall be entitled
to recover such costs from the Contractor in accordance with Clause 83 of
General Conditions of Contract.
(15) Either one of the following shall constitute an improper disposal:
(a)
A Contractors truck loaded with C&D materials having left the

Site without a DDF completed in accordance with the Contract;
(b) Disposal of C&D materials at a disposal ground other than that

designated in the Contract or approved by the Engineer; and
(c)
The Contractor fails or is unable to produce the stamped DDF or

the transaction receipt (where relevant) in accordance with
sub-clause 25.25(9)(g).
(16) The following shall constitute a major improper disposal:

(a)
Disposal of C&D materials at a disposal ground other than that

designated in the Contract or approved by the Engineer and
where the disposal ground is private agricultural land; or
(b) Illegal dumping of C&D materials.

(17) The Contractor shall also note that the Employer takes a very serious
view of any non-compliance with the TTS requirements. Without
prejudice to other regulating actions which may be taken against the
Contractor, the Contractors performance in implementing the TTS will be
fully reflected in the Report on the Contractors Performance as described
in ETWB TCW No. 31/2004 and/or its later update/amendments. The
Contractor may also be subject to relevant regulating actions.
(18) Furthermore, the Public Fill Committee will consider revoking the
25.22
2006 Edition
Dumping Licence.
25.23
2006 Edition
Avoidance of nuisance
25.26
(1) All works are to be carried out in such a manner as to cause no

damage and as little inconvenience as possible to all nearby residents,
property, business and the public in general.
(2) The Contractor shall not permit any sewage, wastewater, effluent or
surface runoff to flow from the Site onto any adjoining land or allow any
waste matter or refuse which is not part of the final product from waste
processing plant to be deposited anywhere within the Site or onto any
adjoining land.
(3) In the event of any spoil or debris from the Site being deposited on
adjacent land or any silt being washed down to any area, the Engineer shall
be informed immediately. The Contractor shall arrange for removal of
such matter in a proper manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the
spoil or debris is found contaminated, special precautions shall be taken
during removal of the material to ensure that the environmental impacts are
minimized. After removal of the spoil, debris or material and silt, the
Contractor shall restore to the satisfaction of the Engineer the affected land
or areas to their natural state.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure that no earth, rock or debris including any
deposit arising from the movement of plant or vehicles is deposited on
public roads or private rights of way as a result of the activities of the
Contractor, his Sub-contractors, and other contractors working on the Site.
At all exit points leading out of the Site, the Contractor shall provide
wheel-washing bay installations to wash mud and the like from the wheels
and bodywork of all vehicles leaving the site as follows:
(a)
High pressure water jet shall be used to remove all visible signs
of mud from all vehicles to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Heavy-duty metal grating capable of supporting the heaviest
vehicles and a trough for collecting wastewater, etc. should be
installed.
(b) The whole of the area around the wheel-washing bay and any
length of access road between the bays and the Site boundary
shall be paved with concrete or bituminous surfacing to facilitate
cleaning and shall be kept free of mud.
(c)
The wheel-washing bays shall be provided at the start of the

Contract unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Details of the
proposed facilities shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the
operation, maintenance and any necessary replacement of such
installations throughout the Contract.
(d) Water used in the wheel-washing facilities shall be changed at

frequent intervals to maintain the effectiveness of the washing
operation. The wheel-washing facility shall be regularly
desilted.
(5) If any earth, rock or debris generated from activities on the Site are
deposited on public roads or private rights of way, the Contractor shall
immediately remove all these materials and restore the affected roads and
rights of way to their original state to the Engineers satisfaction.
25.24
2006 Edition
Handling and disposal

of waste
25.27
(1) General refuse shall be stored in enclosed bins separate from inert
C&D material and chemical wastes and shall be removed from the Site on a
regular basis in order to minimize odour, pest and litter impacts. Burning
of refuse on site is not permitted.
(2) The Contractor shall take the following general measures to minimize
adverse impacts while handling waste:
Chemical waste
control
25.28
(a)
Handle and store waste in a manner which ensures that it is held

securely without loss or leakage, thereby minimizing the
potential for pollution;
(b)
Remove waste in a timely manner;
(c)
Maintain and clean waste storage areas regularly;
(d)
Use reputable and authorized waste collectors to collect specific

categories of waste for recycling or disposal;
(e)
Minimize windblown litter and dust during transportation by

either fitting trucks with mechanical covers or transporting
waste in enclosed containers;
(1) The Contractor shall observe and comply with the Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation and any additions or amendments
(2) The Contractor shall apply for registration as chemical waste
producer under the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General) Regulation
when chemical waste is produced. All chemical waste shall be properly
identified, stored and disposed in accordance with the Regulation and the
Code of Practice on the Packaging, Handling and Storage of Chemical
Waste published by the Environmental Protection Department.
(3)
The Contractor shall ensure that the disposal of chemical waste is:
(a)
Handled by a licensed waste collector; and
(b)
At a recycling, treatment or disposal facility that is licensed

under the Waste Disposal Ordinance to receive chemical waste
(c)
Carried out with appropriate preventive measures to minimize

adverse impacts and leakage of the waste.
(4) The Contractor must ensure that all the necessary waste disposal
permits are obtained and the conditions specified in these permits are fully
complied with.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND AUDIT

Environmental
monitoring and audit
general requirements
25.29
The Environmental Monitoring and Audit (EM&A) includes measurement,

sampling, laboratory testing, analysis of monitoring results, reporting and
auditing.
25.25
2006 Edition
Environmental Team
25.30
(1) EM&A shall be carried out by the Environmental Team (ET) which
shall be employed by the Employer separately and independent of the
Contractor. The Engineer shall advise the Contractor of the details of the
ET before commencement of Contract.
(2)
The duties of the ET shall include but not limited to the following:
(a)
To investigate and audit the Contractors equipment and work

methodologies with respect to pollution control and
environmental mitigation, and anticipated environmental issues
for proactive action before problems arise;
(b)
To monitor the various environmental parameters and collecting/

monitoring all necessary data as required in the Contract;
(c)
To audit and prepare audit reports on the environmental

monitoring data and the site environmental conditions;
(d)
To forward the environmental monitoring and audit results to the

Engineer, the Contractor as well as the Employer and the
Director of Environmental Protection as necessary;
(e)
To recommend suitable mitigation measures to the Engineer

who shall notify the Contractor accordingly in case of
exceedance of the environmental limits specified in the
Contract; and
(f)
To undertake investigation procedures for complaints on

environmental matters.
(3) The Contractor shall provide assistance and attendance to the ET in

discharging the above duties during the EM&A. Such assistance and
attendance to be provided to the ET should include but not be limited to
allowing site access and provision of construction information.
Vetting of Contractors
proposals by the
Environmental Team
25.31
(1) All method statements submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer

for approval shall be copied to the ET for vetting to see whether sufficient
environmental protection and pollution control measures have been
included to comply with contractual and statutory requirements. The ET
shall advise the Engineer of their views to enable the Engineer to make a
decision on the submission.
(2) The ET shall also review the progress and programme of the Works
from time to time to check whether relevant environmental laws have been
violated, and to ensure that any foreseeable potential for violating such
laws can be prevented. The Contractor shall regularly copy relevant
documents to the ET so that the checking work can be carried out. The
documents shall at least include the updated Work Progress Reports,
updated Works Programme, application letters for different licences/permits
under the environmental protection laws, and all the valid licences/permits.
The site diary and other relevant documents shall also be available for the
ET's inspection upon his request.
(3) If the ET's review concludes that the current status on the
license/permit is not compatible with the works programme or may result
in potential violation of environmental protection and pollution control
requirements by the works in due course, he shall advise the Engineer
accordingly.
25.26
2006 Edition
(4) Upon receipt of the ETs advice through the Engineer, the Contractor
shall undertake immediate action to correct the situation. The Engineer
shall follow up to ensure that the Contractor has taken appropriate action in
order that the environmental protection and pollution control requirements
are fulfilled.
Environmental
monitoring
25.32
(1) The ET shall carry out baseline monitoring and impact monitoring
during the course of the Works in accordance with the requirements laid
down in the Particular Specification.
(2) If the impact monitoring results indicate non-compliance with the
criteria and limits specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall
immediately carry out corrective or mitigation actions in accordance with
the Event and Action Plan detailed in the Particular Specification.
(3) The ET shall carry out more frequent monitoring as specified and
shall continue with the additional monitoring until the recorded levels are
reduced to acceptable levels as a result of the Contractors corrective or
mitigation measures, or until it is proved that the exceedance is not caused
by the construction activities.
Environmental site
audit inspections
25.33
(1) The ET shall be responsible for formulation of the environmental site

inspection, deficiency and action reporting system, and for carrying out the site
inspection works. Within 21 days of the commencement of the Contract, the
ET shall submit a proposal on the site inspection, deficiency and action
reporting procedures to the Contractor through the Engineer for agreement.
(2) Regular site inspections shall be carried out at least once per week.
The areas of inspection shall not be limited to the environmental situation,
pollution control and mitigation measures within the Site. The site
inspections shall also review the environmental situation outside the site
area that is likely to be affected, directly or indirectly, by the site activities.
ET shall make reference to the following information in conducting the
inspection:
(a)
Works progress and programme;
(b)
Individual works methodology proposals (which shall include

proposal on associated pollution control measures);
(c)
The requirements specified in the Contract on environmental

protection;
(d)
The relevant environmental protection and pollution control

laws; and previous site inspection results.
(3) The Contractor shall update the ET with all relevant information of
the Contract for the ET to carry out the site inspections/audits. The
inspection results and its associated recommendations on improvements to
the environmental protection and pollution control works shall be
submitted to the Employer and copied to the Engineer and Contractor
within 24 hours, for reference and for taking immediate action. Upon
receipt of the inspection results and recommendations and unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall follow the procedures and
time-frame as stipulated in the environmental site inspection, deficiency
and action reporting system formulated by the ET to report on any
corrective /remedial measures subsequent to the site inspections /audits.
25.27
2006 Edition
(4) The regular site inspections shall also ensure that the work site
boundaries are not exceeded and that no damage, especially of an
ecological nature, is being caused to the surrounding areas.
(5) Ad hoc site inspections shall also be carried out if significant
environmental problems are identified. Inspections may also be required
subsequent to receipt of an environmental complaint, or as part of the
investigation work, as specified in the Particular Specifications on Event
Contingency Plan for environmental monitoring and audit.
Environmental
complaints
25.34
(1) Complaints about environmental matters shall be referred to the ET

for carrying out complaint investigation procedures. Upon receipt of the
complaints, the ET shall undertake the following actions:
(a)
Investigate the complaint to determine its validity, and to assess

whether the source of the problem is due to works activities;
(b)
If a complaint is valid and due to the works, identify mitigation

measures;
(c)
If mitigation measures are required, advise the Contractor

through the Engineer accordingly as soon as possible;
(d)
Review the Contractor's response on the identified mitigation

measures, and the updated situation;
(e)
Undertake additional monitoring and audit to verify the situation

if necessary, and review that any valid reason for complaint does
not recur;
(f)
Report the investigation results and the subsequent action to the

source of complaint for responding to complainant, with copies
to the Employer, Engineer and the Contractor within the time
frame assigned by the source of complaint; and
(g)
Record the complaint, investigation, the subsequent action and

the results in the monthly EM&A reports.
(2) During investigation of the complaint, the Contractor shall cooperate

with the ET in providing all the necessary information and assistance for
completion of the investigation. If the investigation establishes that the
complaint is valid and mitigation measures are identified, the Contractor
shall promptly carry out the mitigation.
25.28
2006 Edition
Appendix 25.1
PROFORMA FOR MONTHLY RECORDING DELIVERY AND CONSUMPTION OF ULTRA LOW SULPHUR DIESEL ON SITE
Contract No.: ______________________________________
Contract Title:
___________________________________________________________
Name of Person completing the Proforma: ______________________________________

Name of Person responsible for audit checking: __________________________________
Intake
Date
Name of Contractor/
Sub-contractor
Details of Ordering
Fuel
Consumption
Quantity of
Fuel Delivered
(in litre)
Details of Plant
belong to the
Contractor/
Sub-contractor
Date of
Arrival
Date of
Departure
Quantity of Fuel
Consumed
(in litre)
- plant name and

serial no.
- name of oil
company
- delivery note no.
and reference
Total Consumed
Total Delivered
[N.B. The total for the month is for checking the relative order of quantity of fuel delivered and consumed on the Site and need not necessarily be
balance]
25.28
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 25.2
SAMPLE OF WASTE FLOW TABLE
Name of Department: CEDD/DSD/HyD/WSD
Contract No.:
__________________________
Waste Flow Table

Actual Quantities of Inert C&D Materials Generated Quarterly
Quarter
ending
Total
Broken
Reused in
Quantity
Concrete
the Contract
Generated (see Note 3)
Reused in
other
Projects
Disposed as
Public Fill
Imported
Fill
Actual Quantities of C&D Wastes Generated Quarterly

Metals
Paper/
Plastics
cardboard
(see Note 2)
packaging
Chemical
Waste
(in '000m3) (in '000m3) (in '000m3) (in '000m3) (in '000m3) (in '000m3) (in000 kg) (in000 kg) (in000 kg) (in000 kg)
Feb
May
Aug
Nov
Total
Notes: (1)
(2)
(3)
The waste flow table shall also include C&D materials that are specified in the Contract to be imported for use at the Site.
Plastics refer to plastic bottles/containers, plastic sheets/foam from packaging material.
Broken concrete for recycling into aggregates.
25.29
Others, e.g.
general
refuse
(in000m3)
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 25.3 - SAMPLE OF DISPOSAL DELIVERY FORM

Serial No.
Serial No.
0012345678
Serial No.
0012345678
0012345678
Construction and Demolition Materials

Disposal Delivery Form
Date:
Date:
Designated PFF/Landfill :
/ :
(Information contained in this form may be displayed on Internet

)
Date:
Designated PFF/Landfill :
Time of departure from site:
Vehicle Licence Plate Number:
: _________________ : ________________
/ :
Designated Public Filling Facility/Landfill:
Location of Site:
/ :
Vehicle Licence Plate Number. :
Central & Western
Vehicle Licence Plate Number. :
Issued By:
Yau, Tsim, Mong
Shamshuipo
Kowloon City
Wong Tai Sin
Tsuen Wan
Tuen Mun
North
Sai Kung
Outlying Islands
Shatin
Tai Po
Approximate Load : 1/4 1/2 3/4 Full
Approximate Load :
:
1/2
Southern
Kwai Tsing
1/4
Eastern
Yuen Long
Wanchai
Kwun Tong
Issued By:
3/4
Full
Please stick contract no. barcode above
Remark:
(This part retained by issuing office)
()
CEDD(CEO)84
Chop of Designated Public Filling Facility/

Landfill /
Chop of Designated Public Filling Facility/Landfill
Remark: Original form with a light red and inclined watermark DDF
25.30
Chop of Engineers Representative
2006 Edition
APPENDIX 25.4
A SAMPLE OF DAILY RECORD SUMMARY TO RECORD DAILY DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION (C&D) MATERIALS
FROM THE SITE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Contract no. & title:

Date of disposal:
Designated disposal ground(s):
(a)
(b)
(c)
others
Approved alternative disposal grounds:
DDF
Serial
no.
C&D
Vehicle
Departure time Approx. vol (e.g. Full/Three material type
registration no.
from site
Quarter/Half/One quarter) (e.g. inert or
non-inert)
Actual disposal
ground
Arrival time at
disposal ground
Part 11
Submitted by :
Signature :
Date :
Received by :
Post :
1
2
Remarks
Part 22
[Name of Contractors Designated
Person]
[Name and signature of the officer]
Submitted by :
Signature :
Date :
Received by :
Post :
Part 1 - The Contractor shall complete Part 1 and submit it to the Engineers Representative by 1:00 pm of the following working day of the disposal trip.
Part 2 - The Contractor shall complete Part 2 and submit it to the Engineers Representative within 3 working days of the disposal trip.
25.31
[Name of Contractors Designated Person
[Name and signature of the officer]
2006 Edition
Date & Time :
Date & Time :
25.32
2006 Edition
2006 Edition
FOR
SECTION 26
26.1
2006 Edition
26.2
2006 Edition
SECTION 26
GENERAL
Definitions regarding
trees
26.01
Tree means a plant with diameter at breast height measuring 95 mm or

more. Plants growing on retaining structures shall also be measured and
considered.
Diameter at breast height means the diameter of the trunk of the plant
measured at a height of 1.3 m above ground level. For trunk with an
obviously elliptical cross-section, the diameter at breast height shall be the
average of any two-diameter measurements taken at right angle.
Tree crown spread means the diameter of the tree crown defined by the
outermost branches of the tree. For tree crown with an obviously elliptical
cross-section, the diameter of the tree crown shall be the average of any
two- diameter measurements taken at right angle.
Tree height means the height from ground level to the top of the tree.
Dripline of a tree means the imaginary vertical plumb line that extends
downward from the tips of the outermost tree branches and intersects the
ground.
Tree protection zone means an area the perimeter of which is defined by
the dripline of the tree.
Preserved tree, means an existing tree not earmarked to be felled, which
may be a tree to be retained at its existing location, a tree at its existing
location before transplanting, or a tree transplanted within the Site.
Arboricultural work means any work related to the cultivation and care of
trees for any purpose other than timber production, including but not
limited to planting, replanting, transplanting, tree surgery work and control
of pest and disease.
26.02
(1) The Contractor shall submit a Tree Preservation and Protection Plan
before commencing any works on site, which may affect any tree.
(2) The Contractor shall make all necessary allowance for the
preservation and protection of existing trees in his programming of, and
method of construction of the works, including the full extent of all
temporary works and access arrangements.
(3) The Contractor shall assign a person to oversee the implementation of
Tree Preservation and Protection Plan and delegate to that person the full
authority to make all decisions related to such works. The person
assigned shall be working full time on the Site but not necessarily working
solely for matters related to preservation and protection to existing trees.
(4) The limits of site clearance shall be agreed by the Engineer on the Site
before site clearance commences.
26.3
2006 Edition
SURVEY AND IDENTIFICATION OF EXISTING TREES

Tree Survey
26.03
(1)
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry
out a tree survey and submit the survey record to the Engineer within 28
days of the date for commencement of the Works.
(2) The tree survey record shall cover all existing trees present within the
Site or within 2 m of the site boundary and any other trees likely to be
affected by the Works. The Contractor shall carry out tree survey for each
individual tree. Where it is found not practical to carry out a tree survey
for each individual tree and that the tree group survey methodology is
necessary, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineers approval to the tree
group survey methodology before commencing the tree survey on the Site.
Each tree or tree group shall be assigned a unique identification number
according to a numbering system agreed with the Engineer beforehand.
The tree survey record shall be in the form of an A4-sized, bound report
which shall bear a report cover indicating the Contract number, Contract
title, and date of the report and shall include the following documents, the
format of which shall be agreed by the Engineer before submission of the
report:
(a)
A tree survey plan showing the locations of all existing

individual trees and tree groups and identifying:
(i)
Trees which are earmarked under the Contract for

retention at their existing locations,
(ii) Trees which are earmarked under the Contract for

transplanting,
(iii) Trees which are earmarked under the Contract for felling
and
(iv) Any other trees which have not been reported/identified
under the Contract and their treatment has yet to be
instructed by the Engineer,
(b)
A tree schedule for all the trees under sub-clause (a)iv) of this
Clause comprising the following information of each individual
tree::
(i)
Botanical name of the tree species and the identity

code/number as shown on the tree survey plan and marked
on the Site,
(ii) Diameter at breast height of the tree,

(iii) Tree crown spread,
(iv) Tree height,
(v)
Condition of the tree including its form and health

(highlighting any structural defects or unhealthy or
decaying symptoms which may pose danger to the public
if the tree falls), amenity value, survival rate after
transplanting and special features, and
(vi) Existing ground level at the trunk base;

26.4
2006 Edition
and the following information of each tree group:
(vii) The approximate number of trees in the group,
(viii) Botanical names of the tree species in the group and the
percentage composition of each species,
(ix) The diameter range of the trees in the group,
(x)
General description of the type of woodland to which the

group belongs, and
(xi) General condition of the trees in the group.

(c)
Photographic record for each individual tree and tree group

under sub-clause (a)iv) of this Clause complying with the
following:
(i)
All photographs shall be date-stamped to indicate the dates

that the photographs are taken and shall be well-annotated,
and
(ii) The photograph of each tree or tree group shall show

clearly the whole tree or entire tree group as far as
possible, the identification number of the tree or tree
group, and the status of the tree as identified by the
labelling or marking system on the Site as required in
Clause 26.04.
Labelling of Trees
26.04
(1) The Contractor shall mark on the Site with labelling or marking
systems to identify trees of different status in accordance with the
classification in sub-clauses (2)(a)(i) to (iv) of Clause 26.03. The
Contractor shall comply with the following in providing the identification
labelling or marking systems:
(a)
The identification labelling or marking systems for different tree

status shall be in different colours and be clearly distinguishable,
(b)
The tree identification number of each tree or tree group shall be

clearly shown on the label or mark.
(c)
The identification labelling or marking system for the preserved

trees shall be made of durable materials that are non-injurious to
the trees, be placed at a position not easily accessible but clearly
visible to the public, and be attached in such a manner that
allows for the growth of the trees and does not injure the trees,
(d)
The identification labelling or marking systems and the on-site

status identification of trees shall be agreed by the Engineer and
installed before commencing site clearance, demolition,
construction of permanent or temporary works, and any other
site operations which may affect the trees, and
(e)
The Contractor shall reinstate or replace, where necessary, the

identification labelling or marking systems for the preserved
trees and shall remove these identification labelling or marking
systems from the Site upon completion of the Works, or earlier
if so directed by the Engineer.
26.5
2006 Edition
(2) For those individual trees or tree groups identified under sub-clause
(a)(iv) of Clause 26.03, the Contractor shall change the label or mark on
them to reflect their updated status immediately once the Engineer has
instructed the treatment to them.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING TREES

Felling of existing
trees
26.05
(1)
Site clearance should be carried out in stages to suit the actual

clearance requirement as works progress. The limits of site
clearance for any part of the Site shall be agreed by the Engineer
before site clearance at the respective part commences. No clearance
shall be carried out until such requirement is met.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in

respect of tree felling:
Transplanting of
existing trees
26.06
(a)
Fell only those trees earmarked for such purposes under the
Contract and labelled for such purposes on the Site pursuant to
Clause 26.04 or those as directed or approved by the Engineer,
(b)
Take all necessary precautions to protect the people engaged in

the tree felling work as well as the people and property in the
vicinity,
(c)
Adopt working methods that avoid any damage to adjacent

plants to be retained, including damage to their root systems,
(d)
Completely remove the tree to be felled including the stumps

and rootballs,
(e)
If, in the opinion of the Engineer or as required in the Contract,

removal of stumps and rootballs is not necessary, fell the trees
by cutting them near the ground, with their stumps ground rather
than pulled,
(f)
Remove all debris, cut wood, and roots pursuant to sub-clauses

(2)(d) and 2(e) of this Clause, from the trees felled from the Site
as soon as possible, and
(g)
Reinstate where appropriate the ground around the adjacent

plants to be retained to ensure their continued healthy growth
and stability.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in respect of

tree transplanting, either within or off the Site:
(a)
Transplant only those trees earmarked for such purposes under

the Contract and labelled for such purposes on the Site pursuant
to Clause 26.04 or those as directed or approved by the
Engineer, and
(b)
Commence any work related to tree transplanting on the Site

only after the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has
complied with the requirements stipulated for completion before
tree transplanting work commences.
26.6
2006 Edition
Unplanned tree
removal
26.07
Where it is found necessary for the completion of the Works to remove,

either by felling or by transplanting, any trees other than those earmarked
for such purposes under the Contract and labelled purposes on the Site
pursuant to Clause 26.04 or those directed or approved purposes during
the progress of the Works by the Engineer, the Contractor shall comply
(a)
Report to the Engineer the necessity on such tree removal,
(b)
Provide all reasonable assistance as required by the Engineer

in the tree survey and the justification for the proposed tree
removal with substantiation and the necessary details including
method statement, site formation plan and engineering
drawings, for the Engineers preparation of the tree felling or
transplanting application for the tree removal, and
(c)
Fell or transplant the trees only after the Engineers approval

of the tree removal has been given. Such approval shalll
normally be given after the tree felling or transplanting
application has been approved by the government approving
authority.
PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING

TREES
General Precautionary
Measures to Preserved
Trees
26.08
The Contractor shall exercise the greatest care to avoid any damage to the
preserved trees and shall comply with the following in respect of all the
preserved trees:
(a)
Take all necessary precautions to ensure that:

(i)
No nails or other fixings shall be driven into the trees,

including the exposed tree roots,
(ii)
No fencing, services, or signs other than the identification

labels or markings required under Clause 26.04 shall be
attached to any part of the trees,
(iii)
No trees shall be used as anchorages for ropes or chains

used in guying or pulling, or for any other purposes,
(iv)
No soil, materials, equipment or machinery shall be

stockpiled or stored within the tree protection zones,
(v)
No site offices, workshops, canteens, containers or

similar structures shall be installed within the tree
protection zones,
(vi)
Petrol, oil, bitumen, creosote, cement and other materials

likely to be injurious to the trees shall be kept away from
the tree protection zones, and any accidental spills of
these materials shall be cleaned up immediately,
(vii)
Excessive water shall be drained away from the tree

protection zones to prevent damage to tree roots by
asphyxiation,
(viii) The surface on slopes shall be shaped so that water will

not drain to the tree trunks but bypass them,
26.7
2006 Edition
(ix)
No passage or parking of vehicles and no operation of

equipment or machinery shall take place within the tree
protection zones unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer,
(x)
No stripping of surface vegetation or top layer of soil,

and no paving or earth filling shall be carried out within
the tree protection zones unless otherwise agreed by the
Engineer,
(xi)
No fires shall be lit within the tree protection zones or in

a position where the flames will likely extend to within 5
m of foliage, branches or trunks of the trees, bearing in
mind the size of the fire and the wind direction,
(xii)
No concrete mixing, gas tank filling, paintbrush and tool

cleaning, or equipment maintenance shall be carried out
within the tree protection zones,
(xiii) Any necessary scarification or cultivation within the tree

protection zones shall be carried out carefully by hand so
as not to cause damage to the trees, in particular the bark
and the roots,
(xiv) Any equipment, in particular delivery vehicles, overhead
cranes, mechanical excavations, drilling rigs and piling
rigs, shall be carefully operated so as not to cause striking
of the trunks, branches, foliage or root collars of the trees,
(xv)
The trees to be felled, which are adjacent to, or which lie

within a continuous canopy of the preserved trees, shall
be carefully removed, and if necessary in sections but not
using bulldozers in any circumstances, so as not to cause
damage to the preserved trees such as scraping bark off
trunks or breaking branches of trees,
xvi)
Where it is necessary to use herbicides to kill any

vegetation, herbicides that can leach through the soil,
such as the products containing sodium chlorate, and any
other herbicides that are injurious to the trees shall not be
used,
(xvii) Allowance shall be made for the slope of the ground so

that damaging materials such as concrete washings,
mortar or diesel oil cannot run towards the trees,
(xviii) Alkaline clay or limestone shall not be used for filling or
paving, concrete shall be mixed on a thick plastic
tarpaulin, and mixing trucks shall not be rinsed out on the
Site, so as not to change, in particular no to increase the
soil pH, and
xix)
All building debris and chemical wastes shall be hauled

away for proper disposal, and in any circumstances shall
not be burned or buried on the Site or be disposed of by
pouring them on the soil within the Site,
(b)
Repair any damage to the trees in accordance with the

requirements stipulated in Clause 26.16,
(c)
Where the passage or parking of vehicles or the operation of

equipment or machinery within the tree protection zones as
referred to in sub-clause (a)(ix) of this Clause is considered
necessary and is agreed by the Engineer, carry out the
following measures to reduce soil compaction:
26.8
2006 Edition
(i)
Minimize the traffic of the vehicles, equipment or

machinery, and
(ii) Confine the passage or parking of vehicles or operation of

equipment or machinery to the areas laid with temporary
protective mulching as stipulated in sub-clause (5)(b) of
Clause 26.09 and with double, overlapping, thick metal
sheet coverings, or other materials of equivalent strength
as agreed by the Engineer placed on top,
(d)
Where it is necessary to clear the existing undergrowth within

the tree protection zones to allow access and visibility for, and
operation of any construction work,
(i)
Shrubs shall be pruned and grass or other herbaceous

plants shall be cut to a height of not less than 50 mm above
the ground level but not pulled out by equipment in any
circumstances, and
(ii) The agreement of the Engineer shall be obtained before

vegetation clearance commences,
(e)
Protect the preserved trees, where necessary, from increased

exposure to sun and wind due to removal of adjacent trees,
(f)
Align all routes of the overhead services within the Site and all
access routes to the Site or within the Site away from the
preserved trees as far as possible and seek the Engineer approval
to the alignment,
(g)
Report to the Engineer any preserved tree that has structural

defects or unhealthy or has decaying symptoms,
(h)
Submit a report comprising the updated photographic records of

all the preserved trees to the Engineer every two months or at
intervals agreed by the Engineer, complying with the following:
(i)
Each of the reports shall be in the form of an A4-sized,

bound document which shall bear a report cover indicating
the Contract number, Contract title, and date of the report,
(ii) The format of the reports shall be agreed by the Engineer

before submission of the first report,
(iii) All photographs shall be date-stamped to indicate the dates
that the photographs are taken and shall be well-annotated,
(iv) The photograph of each tree shall show clearly the whole
tree as far as possible, the identification number of the tree,
and the status of the tree as identified by the labelling or
marking system on the Site as required in Clause 26.04,
and
(v)
Each of the reports shall include details of any damage

caused to the trees and any signs of health deterioration of
the trees in the reporting period, accompanied with
photographic record of the damage and the tree
deterioration.
26.9
2006 Edition
Protection of preserved
trees from physical
damage and soil
compaction
26.09
(1) The Contractor shall erect, secure and maintain in good condition
temporary protective fencing with a minimum height of 1.5 m to protect the
preserved trees. The Contractor shall submit method statements including
proposed design details of the temporary protective fencing to the Engineer
for approval and obtain such approval before commencing the erection of
the fencing.
(2) The temporary protective fencing shall be erected along or beyond the
perimeter of the tree protection zone of each individual tree. Where the
tree protection zones of two or more trees overlap with each other, the
temporary protective fencing shall be erected along or beyond the perimeter
of the aggregate tree protection zone of the trees or as directed by the
Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall complete erection of the temporary protective
fencing before commencing of site clearance, demolition, construction of
permanent or other temporary works, and any other site operations that may
affect the trees.
(4) The Contractor shall remove the temporary protective fencing from
the Site upon completion of the Works or earlier if so directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not remove or relocate the temporary
protective fencing or enter the area enclosed by the temporary protective
fencing without the prior agreement of the Engineer.
(5) If, in the opinion of the Engineer, erection of temporary of protective
fencing of the preserved trees is not practical, then the following
precautions shall be taken by the Contractor:
(a)
The Contractor shall provide temporary protective hessian

armouring around tree trunks to protect the preserved trees.
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
temporary protective hessian and plank armouring as an
alternative to the same trees for enhanced protection. The
minimum height of the hessian armouring or hessian and plank
armouring from the ground shall be 1.5 m. The Contractor shall
submit details of the temporary protective hessian armouring
and hessian and plank armouring to the Engineer for approval
and obtain such approval before commencing installing such
protection measures.
(b)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the ground of the tree

protection zones of the trees referred to in the sub-clause (5)(a)
of this Clause shall be protected from damage by construction
activities through the use of temporary protective mulching to
cover the entire tree protection zone. When instructed by the
Engineer, double, overlapping, thick metal sheet coverings, or
other materials of equivalent strength as agreed by the Engineer,
shall be laid on top of the temporary protective mulching to
provide additional protection from soil compaction due to
passage or parking of vehicles or operation of equipment or
machinery.
The Contractor shall submit details of the
temporary protective mulching to the Engineer for approval and
obtain such approval before commencing installing such
protection measures.
26.10
2006 Edition
trees from changes in
ground levels
26.10
(c)
The Contractor shall complete erection of the temporary

protective armouring and application of the temporary protective
mulching before commencing site clearance, demolition,
construction of permanent or other temporary works, and any
other site operations that may affect the trees.
(d)
The Contractor shall remove the temporary protective

armouring and the temporary protective mulching from the Site
upon completion of the Works, or earlier if so directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not remove or relocate the
temporary protective armouring or the temporary protective
mulching without the prior agreement of the Engineer.
(1) Without the Engineers prior approval, the Contractor shall not
change the existing ground levels within the tree protection zones of the
preserved trees unless the Contract explicitly requires such changes.
(2) Where it is necessary for completion of the Works and the Engineers
approval has been obtained for temporarily or permanently reducing the
existing ground level around a preserved tree, but this will result in
lowering the existing ground level within the tree protection zone, the
(a)
Implement measures agreed by the Engineer to accommodate

reduction in the existing ground level and to ensure the stability
of the tree,
(b)
Before commencing implementation of the measures to

accommodate reduction in the ground level pursuant to
sub-clause 2(a) of this Clause, submit method statements for the
measures, including the necessary engineering design,
construction details, and associated precautionary works such as
those noted in sub-clause (e) of this Clause, for the Engineers
approval,
(c)
Commence implementation of the measures only after the

Engineers approval of the method statements has been given,
(d)
Follow the requirements stipulated in Clause 26.11 regarding

excavation and cutting of tree roots, and
(e)
Maintain balanced moisture content in the tree and in the soil

after implementation of the measures, by carrying out
necessary precautionary measures such as crown thinning,
watering and mulching.
(3) Where it is necessary for completion of the Works and the

Engineers approval has been obtained for temporarily or permanently
raising the existing ground level around a preserved tree, but this will
result in a rise in the existing ground level within the tree protection zone,
the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Implement the measures agreed by the Engineer to

accommodate raising the existing ground level,
(b)
Before commencing implementation of the measures to

accommodate raising the ground level pursuant to sub-clause
(3)(a) of this Clause, the Contractor shall submit method
statements, including the necessary engineering design,
26.11
2006 Edition
construction details, and associated precautionary works for
the measures for the Engineers approval, and
(c)
trees from excavation
including trenching
26.11
Commence implementation of the measures only after the

Engineers approval to the method statements has been given.
(1) Without the Engineers prior approval, the Contractor shall not carry
out any excavation within the tree protection zones of the preserved trees
unless the Contract explicitly requires such excavation work to be carried
out. For the approved excavation work within the tree protection zones,
the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Obtain agreement from the Engineer about the detailed

locations and extent of the excavations before commencing
any excavation work,
(b)
Carry out the following work before commencing any cutting

work to the aerial roots or underground roots of the preserved
trees:
(i)
Determine the locations of the major roots and the bulk

of their absorbing roots so as to keep the cutting of tree
roots to a minimum and to preserve the tap roots, sinker
roots and support roots of the trees in any circumstances,
(ii) Obtain agreement from the Engineer about the extent of

root cutting on the Site, and
(iii) Where the stability of the trees is likely to be jeopardised,
comply with the requirements stipulated in Clause 26.13.
(c)
Submit to the Engineer photographic records showing the

condition of the affected trees and the agreed extent of
excavations and root cuttings as marked on the Site before
commencing the excavation work and root-cutting work and
thereafter submit photographic records showing the condition of
the affected trees and the progress of the excavation work and
root-cutting work at weekly intervals until backfilling of the
excavation is complete,
(d) Pile the excavated materials outside the tree protection zones to
reduce soil compaction,
(e)
Carry out the excavation work carefully so as not to damage the

bark and root collars of the preserved trees,
(f)
Maintain balanced moisture content in the trees and in the soil

after backfilling of the excavation, by carrying out necessary
precautionary measures such as crown thinning, watering and
mulching, and
(g) Move the temporary protection fencing stipulated in Clause

26.09 to the edge of the intended excavation area, between the
excavation area and the rest of the tree protection zone, during
the duration of excavation work, and move back the same to its
original location after backfilling.
(2) The Contractor shall take the following precautions when carrying out
excavation that involves cutting of the roots of the preserved trees:
26.12
2006 Edition
(a)
Excavation shall be carried out using only hand-held tools such

as hoe and spade, but not mechanical diggers or bulldozers,
(b)
Whenever roots are encountered and before root cutting is

carried out, soil shall be carefully forked away from the roots
using hand-held tools up to the edge along which root cutting is
required,
(c)
Root cutting shall be carried out carefully using sterilised

hand-held pruning tools, and roots greater than 25 mm in
diameter shall be pruned carefully so as not to result in shattered
and frayed roots,
(d)
Any roots damaged during excavation shall be cut back cleanly

with sharp tools to undamaged tissue and treated with an
approved fungicidal dressing before backfilling,
(e)
All cut and exposed roots shall be prevented from drying out
during excavation by adopting the following measures until
backfilling, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer:
(i)
Wrap the tap roots, sinker roots, support roots, and roots
with diameter exceeding 50 mm with hessian, straw or
other porous, absorbent fabric once they are exposed,
(ii) Hang thick hessian or other porous, absorbent fabric from

top of the cut surface over the exposed roots and soil
immediately after root cutting, and
(iii) Mist the hessian or fabric in a frequency that keeps the
roots and the soil at the cut surface moist all the time,
trees from drilling
26.12
(f)
The hessian, straw or other porous, absorbent fabric stipulated in

sub-clause (2)(e)i) of this Clause and the hessian or fabric
stipulated in sub-clause (2)(e)ii) of this Clause shall be removed
immediately before backfilling, and
(g)
Excavations shall be backfilled with soil mix incorporated with

slow release fertiliser at a rate of 500 g/m3 or at a rate as directed
by the Engineer to a level equivalent to the original soil level at
the root collar after settlement.
(1) Without the Engineers prior approval, the Contractor shall not carry
out drilling, such as soil nailing and drilling for bore holes, rock bolts or
dowels, within the tree protection zones of the preserved trees unless the
Contract explicitly requires such drilling work within the tree protection
zones. For the approved drilling work within the tree protection zones, the
(a)
Obtain agreement from the Engineer about the detailed locations

and extent of the drill holes before commencing any drilling
work. The Contractor should bear in mind that the drill holes
shall be located in such a way that the structures to be placed
into the drill holes, including the surface elements of the
structures such as soil nail heads, are at a minimum distance of
500 mm from the trunks of the preserved trees unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer, and
(b) Carry out the following before commencing any cutting work to
the aerial roots or underground roots of the preserved trees:
26.13
2006 Edition
(i)
Determine the locations of their major roots and the bulk

of their absorbing roots so as to keep the cutting of tree
roots to a minimum and to preserve the tap roots, sinker
roots and support roots of the trees in any circumstances,
(ii) Obtain agreement from the Engineer about the extent of

root cutting on the Site,
(iii) Where the stability of the trees is likely to be jeopardised,
comply with the requirements stipulated in Clause 26.13,
(c)
Carry out the drilling work carefully so as not to damage the

branches, foliage, trunk, bark and root collars of the preserved
trees when gaining access for, supporting, mobilising,
positioning and operating the drilling rig, and
(d) Maintain balanced moisture content in the trees and in the soil
after the drilling work, by carrying out necessary precautionary
measures such as crown thinning, watering and mulching.
(2) The Contractor shall take the following precautions when carrying out
drilling work that involves cutting of the roots of the preserved trees:
(a)
Drilling work and root cutting work shall be carried out

carefully,
(b) Roots greater than 25 mm in diameter shall be pruned carefully

in order to prevent shattered and frayed roots, and
(c)
trees from instability
26.13
Any roots damaged during drilling shall be cut back cleanly with
sharp tools to undamaged tissue and treated with an approved
fungicidal dressing.
(1) Where the Works involve cutting of any major roots or other major
parts of the preserved trees or any other works that may jeopardise the
stability of the preserved trees, the Contractor shall install all necessary
physical support measures that will ensure the stability of the preserved
trees. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the preserved trees
growing on retaining structures in order to prevent the trees from being
dislodged from its position as a result of inadequate support.
(2) The physical support measures for the preserved trees shall be
installed securely before commencing root cutting, tree pruning or any
other works that may affect the stability of the trees. Before commencing
installation of these measures, the Contractor shall submit the method
statements of these measures to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor
shall commence installation of the support measures only after the
Engineers approval to the method statements has been given.
(3) The physical support for the preserved trees shall be securely founded
in footings independent of existing walls or building structures or in other
supporting systems as appropriate, without interfering with other works,
other existing features, and the preserved trees. Where the affected tree is
growing on a retaining structure, the Contractor shall make a detailed
assessment to estimate the weight of the tree and identify the best position
of supporting the tree in relation to its overall spread and centre of gravity.
The method statements of the support measures designed by the Contractor
in respect of the trees growing on retaining structures shall include the
following information:
26.14
2006 Edition
(a)
Details of the form of construction for the support measures to

demonstrate the bearing capacity of each element,
(b) Details of the foundation of the support measures to

demonstrate that the support measures shall not interfere with
other works, other existing features, and the preserved trees and
shall not affect the stability of the retaining structure,
(c)
Means of securing the tree to the supporting measures, including

how cups and ties are adjusted to the form of the tree, and
(d) Method of fabrication and erection on the Site.

(4) The Contractor shall remove the physical support for the preserved
trees from the Site upon completion of the Works, or earlier if so directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not remove or relocate the physical
support for the trees without the Engineers prior agreement.
Pruning of preserved
trees
26.14
(1) The Contractor shall not carry out pruning to the preserved trees
unless the pruning work is required under the Contract or is directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any preserved trees
whose branches interfere with the Works and thus require pruning. Pruning
shall only commence after the Engineers approval has been obtained. The
Contractor shall carry out the approved pruning work during the site
clearance stage unless otherwise instructed or agreed by the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Clause 3.86
when carrying out the pruning work.
Control of pest and

disease for preserved
trees
26.15
(1) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary measures to

protect the preserved trees from pest and disease attack and all necessary
control measures to eradicate pest and disease from the infected trees in
the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall regularly check for
any pest and disease attack particularly during known periods of activity
and shall report to the Engineer on any such occurrence.
(2) Before commencing application of the pest and disease control
measures, the Contractor shall submit the method statements of the
control measures to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall
commence application of the control measures only after obtaining the
Engineers approval for the method statements.
(3) The method statements for the pest and disease control measures
shall cover, amongst other aspects as required by the Engineer, the
pesticide, insecticide or fungicide to be used and any other necessary
associated arboricultural work to the infected areas.
(4) The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Clause 3.90 in
applying the pest and disease control measures.
26.15
2006 Edition
REPAIR OF DAMAGE
Repair of damage to
preserved trees and
other affected plants
26.16
(1) The Contractor shall carry out all necessary work of repair of any
damage to the preserved trees and any other plants affected. All necessary
work of repair of damage shall be carried out at the Contractors own costs
if the necessity for such work is, in the opinion of the Engineer, due to
negligence or failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any
obligation expressed or implied on the Contractors part under the Contract.
(2) The work of repair of damage as referred to in sub-clause (1) of this
Clause shall include the following:
(a)
All necessary arboricultural work to the preserved trees and any

other plants damaged, which may include:
(i)
Tree surgery work to remove dead, damaged, diseased or

hazardous parts, to repair wounds, or to provide cables or
braces for additional support,
(ii) Watering and/or mulching in case of water deficiency,

(iii) Applying appropriate fertilizers in case of nutrient
deficiency, and
(iv) Applying appropriate pest and disease control measures in
case of pest and disease attack;
(b)
The replacement planting pursuant to sub-clause (7) of this

Clause for the trees and any other plants damaged to an extent as
described in sub-clause (6) of this Clause and the subsequent
Establishment Works for the new plants for 1 year, when
instructed by the Engineer, and
(c)
Any other reinstatement work necessary to bring the damaged

plants to their original condition before occurrence of the
damage, as directed by the Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any damage to the
preserved trees and other affected plants within the same day of the
occurrence of damage and shall submit to the Engineer within 3 days of the
occurrence of damage, a report comprising the following information in a
format agreed by Engineer:
(a)
The timing of the damage,
(b)
The nature and extent of the damage,
(c)
Photographic records of the damage,
(d)
The proposed work of repair of the damage, and
(e)
The proposed protection measures to avoid recurrence of similar

incident.
(4) When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall firm up and
secure all dislodged trees and any other dislodged plants and shall treat all
wounds of the damaged trees/plants within 3 days of the occurrence of the
damage.
26.16
2006 Edition
(5) Save as stated in sub-clause (4) of this Clause, the Contractor shall not
carry out any work of repair of the damage before the Engineers
acceptance of the report as required in sub-clause (3) of this Clause.
(6) The Contractor shall provide replacement planting of the damaged
trees and any other affected plants under the following circumstances:
(a)
In the opinion of the Engineer the damaged trees or other

affected plants are dead,
(b)
In the opinion of the Engineer, the trees/plants have been

substantially damaged, resulting in one or more of the following
conditions:
(i)
That imminent death of the trees or other affected plants

within the coming growing season is predicted,
(ii) That the structural integrity of the damaged trees or other

affected plants is permanently compromised and
consequently the trees or other affected plants become an
irreparable public hazard,
(iii) That any major parts of the damaged trees or other affected
plants have been lost and consequently their form, habit
and balance have been grossly altered so that their function
cannot be reasonably recovered or the trees or other
affected plants are causing harm to other preserved trees.
(7) When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the
following work:
(a)
Removal of the damaged trees or other affected plants for which

replacement planting as sub-clause (6) of this Clause is required,
in accordance with the following requirements:
(i)
For the removal of the damaged trees, the Contractor shall

prepare a tree felling application document to the
Engineers satisfaction and provide any other assistance or
information as required by the Engineer, for the Engineers
application for approval to the felling of the damaged trees
from the government approving authority,
(ii) The Contractor shall fell the damaged trees only after the
Engineers approval to the tree felling, which shall
normally be given only after the tree felling application has
been approved by the government approving authority, and
(iii) The Contractor shall remove the damaged plants from the
Site, and
(b)
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, replacement planting

of new plants in accordance with the following requirements:
(i)
The Contractor shall complete the replacement planting

within 28 days of the Engineers instruction or other time
duration as agreed by the Engineer, and
(ii) For replacement planting, the Contractor shall plant new

plants of the same species and of similar size and form as
the damaged plants before the damage or provide other
alternative replacement planting as agreed by the Engineer.
26.17
2006 Edition
2006 Edition

Gs 2006 Edition Volume 1 and 2 19 Apr 2010

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Gs 2006 Edition Volume 1 and 2 19 Apr 2010

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (GS), 2006 Edition

(This Version is Continuously Updated to include Amendments issued)

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region

Visit the online Government Bookstore at www.bookstore.gov.hk

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR

LANDSCAPE SOFTWORKS AND ESTABLISHMENT WORKS

TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKINGS AND ROAD STUDS

WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

FORMWORK AND FINISHES TO CONCRETE

CONCRETE AND JOINTS IN CONCRETE

HANDRAILING, LADDERS, STAIRS AND FLOORING

WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORKS

WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION OF TREES

Application of the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works .................................

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC (Amd 1/2009)

Construction safety and safety of the public (Amd 1/2009) ...........................................................

Approval for temporary traffic arrangements and control .......................................................

CARE OF THE WORKS

Protection from water ...............................................................................................................

DAMAGE AND INTERFERENCE

Damage and interference ..........................................................................................................

Records of wage rates ............................................................................................................... 1.16

LIAISON WITH OTHERS

Liaison with others .................................................................................................................... 1.17

Site cleanliness ........................................................................................................................... 1.17

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials and equipment provided by the Employer ............................................................... 1.19

Quality assurance schemes ........................................................................................................

WORKMANSHIP AND TOLERANCES

Workmanship ............................................................................................................................. 1.24

Use of the Site ...................................................................................................

Meetings ..................................................................................................................................... 1.27

Photographs ............................................................................................................................... 1.27

British Standards ........................................................................................................................

General ....................................................................................................................................... 1.55

General ....................................................................................................................................... 1.56

General requirements ................................................................................................................

General requirements ................................................................................................................

Landscape softworks .................................................................................................................

Seedling trees .............................................................................................................................

HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

Handling and storage of rootballed stock .................................................................................

Preparatory works ......................................................................................................................

Scarifying ................................................................................................................................... 3.16

Establishment works .................................................................................................................

TESTING: GRASS COVER

Testing: grass cover ................................................................................................................... 3.24

Transplanting of existing trees .................................................................................................. 3.25

General requirements .................................................................................................................

Fabrication of steelwork ............................................................................................................. 4.4

POSTS AND GATES FOR FENCING

Concrete posts ............................................................................................................................. 4.5

Particulars of fencing .................................................................................................................. 4.5

Storage of fencing ....................................................................................................................... 4.5

Alignment of fencing .................................................................................................................

Tolerances: fencing ..................................................................................................................... 4.7

General requirements .................................................................................................................

Pipes ............................................................................................................................................ 5.3

Precast concrete pipes and fittings .............................................................................................

Step irons ...................................................................................................................................

Particulars of pipes, joints and fittings .....................................................................................